E-Studio 3511, E-Studio 4511 Parts, Service Handbook, Service Manual, Service Support Guide, Imaging Manual

Thank You for purchasing this Factory Service Manual on EBAY from PCTECHINFO!
Click Here for more Factory Service Manuals for other Computer and Printer / Copier Manufacturers from PCTECHINFO!
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS
e-STUDIO3511/4511
File No. SME03000500 R03042130900-TTEC Ver00_2003-11
2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO3511/4511

The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1. Transportation/Installation When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to use the positions as indicated below. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 112kg (246 lb.), therefore pay full attention when handling it.
Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment. Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110/13.2A, 115V or 127V/12A, 220V-240V or 240V/ 8A) for its power source. The equipment must be grounded for safety. Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe. Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32) on the left, 80 cm (32) on the right and 10 cm (4) in the rear. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. 2. Service of Machines Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service. Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the damp heater and their periphery. Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller, developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc. Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation. Use suitable measuring instruments and tools. Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing. - Avoid direct exposure to the beam. - Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam. - Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective. Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
3.
Main Service Parts for Safety The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made their functions out, they may burn down, for instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
4.
Cautionary Labels During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cord during service, Hot area, Laser warning label etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment.
5.
Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials, Used batteries and RAM-ICs Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, consumable parts, packing materials, used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
6.
When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
7. 8.
Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. Precautions Against Static Electricity The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.
Caution :
Dispose of used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention :
Se dbarrasser de batteries et RAM-ICs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht :
Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und RAM-ICs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES .......................................... 1-1
1.1 Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.3 Options ............................................................................................................................... 1-6 1.4 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-6 1.5 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-7
2. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Sectional View .................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 Electric Parts Layout .......................................................................................................... 2-5 2.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components .............................................................. 2-14 2.4 General Description ......................................................................................................... 2-21 2.4.1 System block diagram ........................................................................................... 2-21 2.4.2 Construction of boards .......................................................................................... 2-22 2.5 Disassembly and Replacement of Covers and PC boards .............................................. 2-25 2.5.1 Covers .................................................................................................................. 2-25 2.5.2 PC boards ............................................................................................................. 2-31 2.5.3 Options ................................................................................................................. 2-35
3. COPY PROCESS .......................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Expression of Colors and 4-Step Copy Process ................................................................ 3-1 3.2 General Description of Copying Process ........................................................................... 3-2 3.3 Details of Copying Process ................................................................................................ 3-3 3.4 List of Copying Process Conditions ................................................................................. 3-10
4. General OPERATION ................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Overview of Operation ....................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Description of Operation .................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2.1 Warming-up ............................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2.2 Ready (ready for copying) ....................................................................................... 4-2 4.2.3 Drawer feed copying (Upper drawer paper feeding) ............................................... 4-2 4.2.4 Bypass feed copying ............................................................................................... 4-6 4.2.5 Interruption copying ................................................................................................ 4-6 4.3 Detection of Abnormality .................................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.1 Types of abnormality ............................................................................................... 4-7 4.3.2 Description of abnormality ...................................................................................... 4-7 4.4 Flow Chart ........................................................................................................................ 4-12 4.4.1 Power ON to ready ............................................................................................... 4-12 4.4.2 Automatic feed copying ......................................................................................... 4-14
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS
5. CONTROL PANEL ........................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Control Panel and Display Panel ....................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 Items Shown on the Display Panel .................................................................................... 5-2 5.2.1 Display .................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.3 Relation between the Equipment State and Operators Operation .................................... 5-8 5.4 Description of Operation .................................................................................................... 5-9 5.4.1 Dot matrix LCD circuit ............................................................................................. 5-9 5.4.2 LED display circuit ................................................................................................ 5-11 5.5 Disassembly and Replacement........................................................................................ 5-12
6. SCANNER ..................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Function ............................................................................................................................. 6-1 6.2 Construction ....................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.3 Description of Operation .................................................................................................... 6-4 6.3.1 Scan motor ............................................................................................................. 6-4 6.3.2 Scanning drive circuit .............................................................................................. 6-5 6.3.3 Initialization at power-ON ........................................................................................ 6-7 6.4 Control of Exposure Lamp ................................................................................................. 6-8 6.4.1 General description ................................................................................................. 6-8 6.4.2 Exposure lamp ........................................................................................................ 6-9 6.4.3 Control circuit for the exposure lamp .................................................................... 6-10 6.5 General Description of CCD Control ................................................................................ 6-11 6.5.1 Opto-electronic conversion ................................................................................... 6-11 6.5.2 Shading correction ................................................................................................ 6-11 6.6 Automatic Original Size Detection Circuit ......................................................................... 6-12 6.6.1 Principle of original size detection ......................................................................... 6-12 6.6.2 Process of detection of original size ..................................................................... 6-12 6.7 Disassembly and Replacement........................................................................................ 6-16
7. IMAGE PROCESSING .................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 General Description ........................................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 SYS Board (PWA-F-SYS-350) ........................................................................................... 7-4 7.3.1 Features .................................................................................................................. 7-4 7.3.2 Functions of image processing circuit ..................................................................... 7-5 7.4 LGC Board (PWA-F-LGC-350) ........................................................................................ 7-10 7.4.1 Features ................................................................................................................ 7-10 7.4.2 Functions of image processing circuit ................................................................... 7-10 7.5 Laser Driving PC Board (LDR Board) .............................................................................. 7-10
ii
8. LASER OPTICAL UNIT ................................................................................................ 8-1

8.1 General Description ........................................................................................................... 8-1 8.2 Structure ............................................................................................................................ 8-3 8.3 Laser Diode ........................................................................................................................ 8-7 8.4 Laser Unit Cooling Fan ...................................................................................................... 8-8 8.5 Polygonal Motor ................................................................................................................. 8-8 8.6 Disassembly and Replacement.......................................................................................... 8-9
9. DRIVE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ 9-1

9.1 General Description ........................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2 Main Motor ......................................................................................................................... 9-2 9.2.1 Construction ............................................................................................................ 9-2 9.2.2 Drive circuit of main motor ...................................................................................... 9-3 9.2.3 Signal level of motor circuit ..................................................................................... 9-3 9.3 Transport Motor .................................................................................................................. 9-4 9.3.1 Construction ............................................................................................................ 9-4 9.3.2 Drive circuit of transport motor ................................................................................ 9-5 9.4 Developer Motor ................................................................................................................ 9-6 9.4.1 Construction ............................................................................................................ 9-6 9.4.2 Drive circuit of developer motor .............................................................................. 9-7 9.5 Disassembly and Replacement.......................................................................................... 9-8
10. PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 10-1

10.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................................... 10-1 10.2 Description of Operation .................................................................................................. 10-5 10.2.1 Operation of bypass pickup roller ......................................................................... 10-5 10.2.2 Operation of drawer pickup roller .......................................................................... 10-6 10.2.3 Separation of paper .............................................................................................. 10-7 10.2.4 General operation ................................................................................................. 10-8 10.3 Drive Circuit of Tray-up Motor ........................................................................................ 10-10 10.4 Disassembly and Replacement...................................................................................... 10-11
11. DRUM RELATED SECTION ....................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 Construction ..................................................................................................................... 11-1 11.2 Functions ......................................................................................................................... 11-2 11.3 Output Control Circuits of High-Voltage Transformer ....................................................... 11-4 11.4 Drum Temperature Detection Circuit ................................................................................ 11-5 11.5 Temperature/Humidity Sensor .......................................................................................... 11-6 11.5.1 General description ............................................................................................... 11-6 11.5.2 Construction .......................................................................................................... 11-6 11.6 Charger Wire Cleaner ...................................................................................................... 11-7 11.6.1 Operation .............................................................................................................. 11-7 11.6.2 Construction .......................................................................................................... 11-7 11.6.3 Drive circuit ........................................................................................................... 11-8 11.7 Disassembly and Replacement........................................................................................ 11-9
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC iii e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS
12. DEVELOPER UNIT ..................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 12-1 12.2 Construction ..................................................................................................................... 12-1 12.3 Sectional View .................................................................................................................. 12-2 12.4 Black Toner Cartridge Drive Unit ...................................................................................... 12-3 12.4.1 General descriptions ............................................................................................. 12-3 12.4.2 Toner motor ........................................................................................................... 12-3 12.5 Black Developer Unit ........................................................................................................ 12-4 12.5.1 Functions .............................................................................................................. 12-4 12.5.2 Black developer unit drive section ........................................................................ 12-5 12.5.3 Black auto-toner sensor circuit .............................................................................. 12-6 12.5.4 Black developer unit lifting mechanism ................................................................. 12-9 12.6 Color Developer Unit ...................................................................................................... 12-10 12.6.1 Functions ............................................................................................................ 12-10 12.6.2 Color developer unit drive section ....................................................................... 12-11 12.6.3 Color auto-toner sensor circuit ............................................................................ 12-12 12.6.4 Color toner supply ............................................................................................... 12-14 12.7 High-Voltage Transformer Output Control Circuit ........................................................... 12-15 12.8 Disassembly and Replacement...................................................................................... 12-16
13. REVOLVER UNIT ........................................................................................................ 13-1

13.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 13-1 13.2 Construction ..................................................................................................................... 13-1 13.3 Functions ......................................................................................................................... 13-2 13.4 Drive of Revolver Unit ...................................................................................................... 13-3 13.5 Revolver Motor Drive Circuit ............................................................................................ 13-4 13.5.1 Revolver motor ...................................................................................................... 13-4 13.6 Operation ......................................................................................................................... 13-5 13.6.1 Home position detection ....................................................................................... 13-5 13.6.2 Escape position movement ................................................................................... 13-5 13.6.3 During warming-up ................................................................................................ 13-5 13.6.4 During printing....................................................................................................... 13-5 13.6.5 Color toner supply ................................................................................................. 13-6 13.6.6 During image quality control ................................................................................. 13-6 13.7 Disassembly and Replacement........................................................................................ 13-7
14. TRANSFER UNIT ........................................................................................................ 14-1

14.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................................... 14-1 14.2 Construction ..................................................................................................................... 14-1 14.3 Functions ......................................................................................................................... 14-2 14.4 Outline of 1st transfer ....................................................................................................... 14-4 14.5 Outline of 2nd transfer ...................................................................................................... 14-4 14.6 High-Voltage Power Supply ............................................................................................. 14-5 14.7 Disassembly and Replacement........................................................................................ 14-6
e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS iv November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
15. IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................................................... 15-1

15.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 15-1 15.2 Principle of the Sensor ..................................................................................................... 15-1 15.3 Flow Chart of Control Procedure ...................................................................................... 15-2 15.4 Construction ..................................................................................................................... 15-3 15.5 Disassembly and Replacement........................................................................................ 15-4
16. FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION ...................................................................... 16-1

16.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 16-1 16.2 Operation ......................................................................................................................... 16-1 16.3 Functions ......................................................................................................................... 16-2 16.4 Heater Control Circuit ....................................................................................................... 16-4 16.4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 16-4 16.4.2 Heating principle of IH Heater ............................................................................... 16-5 16.4.3 IH control circuit interface ..................................................................................... 16-6 16.4.4 Relation between system configuration and IH output .......................................... 16-7 16.4.5 Temperature detection section .............................................................................. 16-8 16.4.6 Abnormality in the IH control circuit ..................................................................... 16-13 16.5 Control Circuit of Exit Motor ........................................................................................... 16-15 16.6 Exit Motor Drive .............................................................................................................. 16-15 16.7 Disassembly and Replacement...................................................................................... 16-16
17. AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) ..................................................................... 17-1

17.1 General Description ......................................................................................................... 17-1 17.2 Description of Operations................................................................................................. 17-2 17.3 Drive of ADU .................................................................................................................... 17-8 17.4 Flow Chart ........................................................................................................................ 17-9 17.5 Disassembly and Replacement...................................................................................... 17-11
18. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ............................................................................................... 18-1

18.1 Construction ..................................................................................................................... 18-1 18.2 Operation of DC Output Circuits ...................................................................................... 18-1 18.3 Output Channel ................................................................................................................ 18-2 18.4 Fuse ................................................................................................................................. 18-4 18.5 Configuration of Power Supply Unit ................................................................................. 18-5 18.6 Sequence of Power Supply .............................................................................................. 18-6 18.7 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................. 18-7
19. PC BOARDS ............................................................................................................... 19-1
vi
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1.1 Specifications
Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO4511 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO3511 and e-STUDIO4511. Copy process Type Indirect electrophotographic process (dry) Desktop type (Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) or optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.) Original table Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals) Accepted originals Sheet, book and 3-dimentional object For single-sided originals 50-127 g/m2 (13-34 lb. Bond) For double-sided originals 50-105 g/m2 (13-28 lb. Bond) None of the carbon, bonded nor stapled sheet original is acceptable when using the optional Reversing Automatic Document Feeder. Maximum size: A3/LD Copy speed (Copies/min.) e-STUDIO3511
Paper supply Paper size A4, LT, B5 A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, LT-R, ST-R B4, LG A3, LD
Drawer 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 )
Bypass feed (Size specified) 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 )
PFP 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 )
LCF 35 (11)

e-STUDIO4511
Drawer 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 )
PFP 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 )
LCF 45 (11)

* * *
means Not acceptable. The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side, continuous copying. When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the following conditions: Original/Mode: Single-sided original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected. /Plain paper. Number of sheets: 35[45] or more at the black mode and 11 or more at the color mode. Reproduction ratio: 100% The values in ( ) are available when printed at color mode.
1-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 SPECIFICATIONS
* System copy speed

Copy mode Single-sided originals Single-sided copies Single-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Single-sided copies 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets Sec. e-STUDIO3511 22.9 (70.3) 60.9 (181.8) 94.8 (292.2) 31.3 (95.1) 70.7 (201.8) 110.1 (311.2) 59.6 (149.6) 138.7 (366.6) 217.3 (584.6) 51.2 (124.6) 120.8 (346.5) 188.7 (565.7) e-STUDIO4511 19.8 (70.3) 49.9 (181.8) 76.3 (292.2) 30.3 (95.1) 71.9 (201.8) 101.5 (311.2) 59.5 (149.6) 130.4 (366.6) 201.5 (584.6) 51.5 (124.6) 105.7 (346.5) 158.5 (565.7)
The system copy speed is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected. The period of time from pressing [START] to displaying "READY" is the actually measured value. Setting: Automatic exposure OFF, APS/AMS OFF, Text/Photo Mode, feeding from the upper drawer and Sort Mode. The finisher with the saddle stitcher and hole punch unit are installed. The values in ( ) are the speeds at the color modes.
Copy paper
Drawer Size A3 to A5-R LD to ST-R, 13" LG, 8.5" SQ Weight 64 to 105 g/m2 17 to 28 lb. Bond A4, LT ADU PFP LCF Bypass copy A3 to A6-R, LD to ST-R, 13" LG, 8.5"SQ, 305 x 457 mm (12" x 18") (Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.) 64 to 209 g/m2,17 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Index (Continuous feeding) 64 to 209 g/m2, 17 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Index (Single paper feeding) Labels, OHP film (thickness: 80m or thicker) Remarks
Special paper
Special paper recommended by Toshiba Tec
First copy time ................... Approx. 6.8 sec. or less (black), approx. 16.2 sec. or less (color) (A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually) Warming-up time ............... Approx. 40 seconds (Stand-alone, temperature: 20C) Multiple copying ................ Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
1-2
Reproduction ratio ............. Actual ratio: 1000.5% Zooming: 25 - 400% in increments of 1% (25 - 200% when using RADF) Resolution/Gradation ........ Read: 600 dpi Write: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (black copy) Equivalent to 600 dpi x 600 dpi (color copy) Eliminated portion ............. Leading edge : 3.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (black copy) Leading edge : 5.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (color copy) Leading/trailing edges: 5.02.0 mm, Side edges: 5.02.0 mm (black/color print) Paper feeding .................... Drawers in the equipment 2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) PFP Option (1 or 2 drawers: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) LCF Option (stack height 137.5 mm x 2, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) Bypass feed Stack height 11 mm, equivalent to 100 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond) Capacity of originals in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (Option) ................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: 100 sheets/80 g/m2 (Stack height 16mm or less) Automatic duplexing unit ... Stackless/switchback type Toner supply ...................... Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method Density control .................. Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps Weight ............................... Approx. 112 kg (246.9 lb.) Power requirements .......... AC 110V/13.2A, AC 115V or 127V/15A, 220240V or 240V/8A (50/60 Hz) * The acceptable value of each voltage is 10%. Power consumption .......... 1.5 kW or less (100V series), 1.7 kW or less (200V series) * The electric power is supplied to the reversing automatic document feeder, finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment. Total counter ...................... Electronical counter
1-3
Dimensions of the equipment .......... See the figure below (W660 x D718 x H739 mm) * When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.
718
45
739
66
Fig. 1-101
1-4
1.2 Accessories
Unpacking/Setup instruction Operators manual Operator's manual pocket Power cable Warranty sheet Setup report Customer satisfaction card PM sticker Drum (installed inside of the equipment) Control panel stopper Lever Color developer holder Rubber plug Blind seal (small / large) CD-ROM Developer material (Y, M, C, K) Screw M3 x 8 / M4 x 8 * Machine version NAD: North America MJD: Europe AUD: Australia ASD: Asia TWD: Taiwan SAD: Saudi Arabia JPD: Japan 1 set 4 pcs. (except for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. (for NAD) 1 set (for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 6 pcs. 4 pcs. 3 pcs. / 1pc. 4 pcs. 1 pc. each (for TWD) 1 pc. / 1pc.
1-5
1.3 Options
Platen cover Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Drawer module Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Finisher (Hanging type) Finisher (Console type) Hole punch unit Staple cartridge KA-3511PC MR-3015 MY-1021 KD-1011 KD-1012 A4/LT MJ-1022 MJ-1023, MJ-1024 (with saddle stitcher) MJ-6004 N/E/F/S STAPLE-1600 (for hanging type) STAPLE-2000 (for console type) STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher) Bridge kit Key copy counter, key copy counter socket Work table Damp heater kit FAX board FAX board 2nd line Expansion memory Wireless LAN adapter PCI slot Scrambler board Notes: 1. The bridge kit (KN-3511) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or MJ-1024). 2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S). 3. The PCI slot (GO-1030) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030). KN-3511 MU-8, MU-10 KK-3511 MF-3511 GD-1150 GD-1160 GC-1180 GN-1010 GO-1030 GP-1030
1.4 Supplies
Drum Toner bag Toner cartridge (K) Toner cartridge (Y) Toner cartridge (M) Toner cartridge (C) Marked * : E, D, C and T PS-OD3511 PS-TB3511 PS-ZT3511 *K, PS-ZT3511K PS-ZT3511 *Y, PS-ZT3511Y PS-ZT3511 *M, PS-ZT3511M PS-ZT3511 *C, PS-ZT3511C
1-6
Finisher Platen cover KA-3511PC Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3015
1.5 System List
MJ-1022
Staple cartridge STAPLE-1600
Work table KK-3511
Staple cartridge STAPLE-2000 Bridge kit KN-3511 FAX board GD-1150 FAX board 2nd line GD-1160 Expansion memory GC-1180 Wireless LAN adapter GN-1010 PCI slot GO-1030 Scrambler board GP-1030
Key copy counter MU8, MU-10
Finisher Hole punch unit MJ-6004N/E/F/S
MJ-1023
Damp heater MF-3511
Fig. 1-501
1-7
Finisher
MJ-1024
Drawer module MY-1021
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012A4/LT
1-8
2. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

2.1 Sectional View
[A] Front side view
2 9 6 7 5 3 4 8 1 10 11 12
82 63 60 59 55 62 61 16 48 64 83 18 17 19 20 15 23 21 22 43
58 57
33 35 44 41 34 36 42 32 31 45 28 27 13 40 37 39 38 29 30
77 56 80
49 52 51
47 50
53 54
78 81 79
14
72 73 70
46
24
26
25 65 66 67 76 74
75
71 68 69 70
Fig. 2-101
2-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
1 2
Original glass RADF original glass Exposure lamp Inverter board Mirror-1 Mirror-2 Mirror-3 Carriage-1 Carriage-2 Lens CCD board SLG board Laser unit Photoconductive drum Main charger Recovery blade Drum cleaning blade Drum cleaner brush Toner recovery auger Discharge LED Drum thermistor Black developer unit Developer sleeve K Mixer-1 (K) Mixer-2 (K) Black auto-toner sensor Revolver unit Revolver home position sensor Developer unit C Developer sleeve C Mixer-F (C) Mixer-R (C) Developer unit M Developer sleeve M Mixer-F (M) Mixer-R (M) Developer unit Y Developer sleeve Y Mixer-F (Y) Mixer-R (Y) Color auto-toner sensor Color toner cartridge sensor
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83
Black toner cartridge Color toner cartridge C Color toner cartridge M Color toner cartridge Y Transfer belt Transfer belt drive roller-1 Transfer belt drive roller-2 Transfer belt tension roller 1st transfer roller Transfer belt cleaning blade 2nd transfer roller 2nd transfer roller cleaning brush Fuser roller Pressure roller Fuser belt Separation roller Oil roller Cleaning roller Thermistor Thermostat Exit roller IH coil Upper drawer pickup roller Upper drawer feed roller Upper drawer separation roller Lower drawer pickup roller Lower drawer feed roller Lower drawer separation roller Transport roller Registration roller Bypass pickup roller Bypass feed roller Bypass separation roller Bypass transport roller ADU upper transport roller ADU middle transport roller ADU lower transport roller ADU entrance sensor ADU exit sensor Receiving tray Paper clinging detection sensor
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
2-2
[B] Rear side view (Drive system)

3 1 2
4 9 5
19
20 21 6 8 7 12
11 13 10 14 16 15 18 17
Fig. 2-102
2-3
1 2
Scan motor Main motor Drum cleaner brush motor Transport motor Registration clutch Toner motor Upper transport clutch (Low speed) Upper transport clutch (High speed) 2nd transfer roller drive clutch Lower transport clutch (High speed) Lower transport clutch (Low speed) Upper drawer feed clutch Lower drawer feed clutch Tray-up motor Developer motor Black developer lifting clutch Color developer toner supply clutch Color developer drive clutch Revolver motor ADU motor ADU clutch
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
2-4
2.2 Electric Parts Layout

[A] Unit construction
2
Drive unit PC board unit Scanner unit
Control panel unit
Fuser unit
Automatic duplexing unit
Bypass unit
Transport unit Process unit
Laser unit
Front side
Paper feeder unit

Fig. 2-201
2-5
[B] Scanner unit (B-1) Motor, sensor, lamp
A4 series
M15 M1 M14
S7 S6
S5 S4
EXP S2 S3
S1 Front side
Fig. 2-202-1
LT series
M15 M1 M14
S7 S6
S5 S4
EXP S3
S2 Front side
Fig. 2-202-2
2-6
(B-2) Switch, PC board, heater, thermostat, other part
DH2* SLG SDV THMO2* CCD S41
DH1*
INV Front side
* ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/TWD models: Standard, NAD/MJD models: Option

Fig. 2-203
[C] Control panel unit
KEY LCD
DSP
Fig. 2-204
Front side
2-7
[D] Process unit (D-1) Motor, sensor, switch, clutch, solenoid
2
M2 CLT1
S16 S15 S45
S9
S19
S21 S8 S12
S11 S10 SOL1 M20

Fig. 2-205
M16
Front side
(D-2) Motor, sensor, switch, solenoid, lamp, heater, thermistor, thermostat

M3 S14 S20 SOL2
S17
ERS
THMO3* DH3* S13
THM4
Front side
* ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/TWD models: Standard, NAD/MJD models: Option

Fig. 2-206
2-8
(D-3) Motor, switch
S25 S26
M13
Front side
Fig. 2-207
[E] Laser unit
SNS
LDR
M4 Front side
Fig. 2-208
2-9
[F] Paper feeder unit
2
S33 S32 S34
CLT2 S31
CLT3 S27 S29
S28
S30
Front side
Fig. 2-209
[G] Transport unit

S18
CLT4 CLT5 S22
S42 S43 S44
S24 S23
Front side
Fig. 2-210
2 - 10
[H] Bypass unit
SFB
CLT6
SOL3 S35
S36 Front side

Fig. 2-211
[I] Automatic duplexing unit
S37
S38
ADU M5 S39 CLT7
Front side
Fig. 2-212
2 - 11
[J] Fuser unit
2
IH-COIL
S40
THMO1 THM2 THM3 THM1 Front side

Fig. 2-213
[K] Drive unit

M17 IH M6 M7 M8 DRV M18 CLT12 CCL M9 CLT14 CLT13 CLT8 CLT9 CLT10 M11 CLT11 CLT16 M10 CLT15
M12
HVT Front side

Fig. 2-214 e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 - 12 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
[L] PC board unit

SYS
2
M19
HDD
NIC
LGC NF BRK
FIL or FUS* PS
Front side
* NAD/SAD/TWD models: FIL (Standard), ASD/AUD/CND models: FUS (Standard), MJD model: FUS (Option)
Fig. 2-215
2 - 13
2.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components

The column "P-I" shows the page and item number in the parts list.
(1)
Motors
Function Driving the carriages Driving the transfer belt used toner auger Supplying the black toner Driving the polygonal mirror Driving the automatic duplexing unit Driving the drum and transfer belt Driving the exit roller Driving the drum cleaner brush and used toner auger Driving the fuser unit, 2nd transfer roller, registration roller, transport roller and feed roller Driving the lifting movement of trays in upper/lower drawer Driving the black/color developer unit Driving the lifting movement of the black developer unit Supplying the color toner Driving the transfer belt contact/ release movement Driving the revolver unit Driving the main charger wire cleaner Cooling down the SLG board Cooling down the scanner unit Cooling down the laser unit Cooling down the IH board and SYS board Exhausting ozone and cooling down the equipment inside Cooling down the power supply unit Cooling down the equipment inside Remarks P-I B-1 P17 - I8 D-1 D-2 E I K K K K P31 - I24 P37 - I16 P10 - I10 P42 - I18 P14 - I6 P6 - I15 P14 - I41 P16 - I26
Symbol Name M1 SCAN-MOT Scan motor BELT-CLN-MOT M2 Transfer belt cleaner auger motor TNR-MOT M3 Toner motor M/DC-POL M4 Polygonal motor ADU-MOT M5 ADU motor MAIN-MOT M6 Main motor EXIT-MOT M7 Exit motor DRM-CLN-MOT M8 Drum cleaner brush motor TRSP-MOT M9 Transport motor M10 M11 TRY-MOT Tray-up motor DEV-MOT Developer motor
K K
P4 - I26 P15 - I1
M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17 M18 M19 M20
REVLV-MOT Revolver motor CCL-MOT Charger cleaner motor SLG-FAN-MOT SLG board cooling fan SCAN-FAN-MOT Scanner unit cooling fan LSU-FAN-MOT Laser unit cooling fan IH-FAN-MOT IH control board cooling fan OZN-FAN-MOT Ozone exhaust fan PS-FAN-MOT Power supply cooling fan INTRNL-FAN-MOT Internal cooling fan
K B-1 D-3 B-1 D-1 K K L D-1
P36 - I11 P28 - I35 P11 - I15 P17 - I27 P5 - I22 P8 - I12 P14 - I49 P7 - I9 P1 - I35
2 - 14
(2)
Sensors and switches

Function Original size detection Carriage home position detection Remarks P-I B-1 S1-4: P11 - I12 S5: P11 - I13 B-1 P11 - I17 B-1 D-1 D-1 D-1 P17 - I10 P36 - I102 P36 - I104 P36 - I18
Symbol Name S1-5 APS 1-3, APS-C, APS-R Automatic original detection sensor HOME-SNR S6 Carriage home position sensor PLTN-SNR S7 Platen sensor REVLV-HP-SNR S8 Revolver home position sensor COLR-TNR-SNR S9 Color toner cartridge sensor COLR-ATTNR-SNR S10 Color auto-toner sensor S11
S12
S13 S14 S15
S16
S17 S18
S19 S20 S21
S22 S23
S24
Opening/closing detection of platen cover or RADF Home position detection of the revolver unit Detecting the installation fault of color toner cartridge Detecting toner density adhered on the magnetic roller of the color developer unit Detecting the black developer K-DEV-POS-SNR Black developer contact position detection contact position sensor K-DEV-TIM-SNR Detecting the control of ON/OFF Black developer contact timing detection timing of the black developer lifting sensor clutch K-ATTNR-SNR Detecting the density of toner in the Black auto-toner sensor black developer unit K-TNR-SW Black toner cartridge presence/ Black toner cartridge switch absence detection TRBLT-HP-SNR1 Detecting the rotation position of Transfer belt home position sensor-1 transfer belt (for timing of speed switching in thick paper / OHP film mode) Detecting the rotation position of TRBLT-HP-SNR2 transfer belt Transfer belt home position sensor-2 (for timing of the color image data writing) Toner amount detection on the TNLVL-SNR Image quality sensor transfer belt TR2-POS-SNR Detecting the 2nd transfer roller 2nd transfer roller position detection contact position sensor TEMP/HUMI-SNR Detecting the temperature and Temperature/humidity sensor humidity inside the equipment USD-TNR-FLL-SNR1 Detecting the used toner is full in the Toner bag full detection sensor-1 toner bag USD-TNR-FLL-SNR2 Detecting the presence/absence of Toner bag full detection sensor-2 the toner bag Used toner amount detection in the toner bag Detecting the paper transport at the RGST-SNR Registration sensor registration roller section FED-U-SNR Detecting paper jam and paper Upper drawer feed sensor transport at upper drawer feeding section Detecting paper jam and paper FED-L-SNR transport at lower drawer feeding Lower drawer feed sensor section
D-1
P35 - I17
D-1
P35 - I17
D-2 D-2 D-1
P34 - I25 P37 - I12 P29 - I23
D-1
P30 - I40
D-2 G
P23 - I24 P12 - I5
D-1 D-2 D-1
P5 - I28 P6 - I11 P32 - I108
G G
P23 - I6 P23 - I6
P24 - I52
2 - 15
Symbol Name S25 CCL-F-POS-SW Charger cleaner front position detection switch CCL-R-POS-SW S26 Charger cleaner rear position detection switch CST-U-TRY-SNR S27 Upper drawer tray-up sensor CST-L-TRY-SNR S28 Lower drawer tray-up sensor EMP-U-SNR S29 Upper drawer empty sensor EMP-L-SNR S30 Lower drawer empty sensor NEMP-U-SNR S31 Upper drawer paper stock sensor NEMP-L-SNR S32 Lower drawer paper stock sensor CST-U-SW S33 Upper drawer detection switch CST-L-SW S34 Lower drawer detection switch SFB-SNR S35 Bypass paper sensor SFB-FED-SNR S36 Bypass feed sensor ADU-SET-SW S37 ADU opening/closing switch ADU-TRU-SNR S38 ADU entrance sensor S39 S40 S41 S42 S43 ADU-TRL-SNR ADU exit sensor EXIT-SNR Exit sensor MAIN-SW Main switch FRNT-COV-SW Front cover opening/closing switch COV-INTLCK-SW Cover opening/closing interlock switch SIDE-COV-SW Side cover opening/closing switch CLING-SNR Paper clinging detection sensor
Function Remarks P-I Detecting the position when the main D-3 P28 - I103 charger wire cleaner is moved to the front side Detecting the position when the main D-3 P28 - I103 charger wire cleaner is moved to the rear side Position detection of the lifting tray of F P18 - I30 the upper drawer Position detection of the lifting tray of F P18 - I30 the lower drawer Paper presence/absence detection in F P18 - I30 the upper drawer Paper presence/absence detection in F P18 - I30 the lower drawer Paper amount detection in the upper F P18 - I30 drawer Paper amount detection in the lower F P18 - I30 drawer Detecting presence/absence of the F P4 - I101 upper drawer Detecting presence/absence of the F P4 - I101 lower drawer Detecting presence/absence of paper H P22 - I5 on the bypass tray Detecting the transporting paper fed H P22 - I5 from the bypass tray Automatic duplexing unit opening/ I P42 - I43 closing detection Detecting the transporting paper at I P42 - I31 automatic duplexing unit entrance section Detecting the transporting paper in I P42 - I31 automatic duplexing unit Detecting the transporting paper at J P40 - I32 the exit section Turning ON/OFF of the equipment B-2 P11 - I28 Detecting opening/closing of the front cover Controlling cutoff and supply of the 24V voltage by opening/closing of the front cover or jam access cover Side cover opening/closing detection Detecting whether the paper is clinging to the transfer belt or not G G P5 - I105 P5 - I15
S44 S45
G D-1
P24 - I51 P41 - I25
2 - 16
(3)
Electromagnetic clutches
Function Remarks P-I Driving the transfer belt cleaning D-1 P31 - I27 blade contact/release movement Driving the upper drawer pickup roller F P18 - I29 Driving the lower drawer pickup roller Driving the 2nd transfer roller rotation Driving the 2nd transfer roller contact/release movement Driving the bypass pickup roller and bypass feed roller Driving the automatic duplexing unit Driving the color developer toner supply auger Driving the color developer magnetic roller Driving the black developer magnetic roller Driving the black developer lifting cam Driving the registration roller Driving the upper transport roller (Low speed) Driving the upper transport roller (High speed) Driving the lower transport roller (Low speed) Driving the lower transport roller (High speed) F G G H I K K K K K K K K K P18 - I29 P13 - I8 P12 - I13 P21 - I20 P42 - I16 P15 - I10 P15 - I32 P15 - I28 P15 - I12 P16 - I29 P16 - I19 P16 - I30 P19 - I20 P19 - I16
Symbol Name CLT1 TRBLT-CLN-CLT Transfer belt cleaner clutch CLT2 CST-U-FEED-CLT Upper drawer feed clutch CLT3 CST-L-FEED-CLT Lower drawer feed clutch CLT4 2TR-DRV-CLT 2nd transfer roller drive clutch CLT5 2TR-CONT-CLT 2nd transfer roller contact clutch CLT6 SFB-FEED-CLT Bypass feed clutch CLT7 ADU-CLT ADU clutch CLT8 COLR-DEV-TNR-CLT Color developer toner supply clutch CLT9 COLR-DEV-CLT Color developer drive clutch CLT10 K-DEV-CLT Black developer drive clutch CLT11 K-DEV-LIFT-CLT Black developer lifting clutch CLT12 RGST-CLT Registration clutch CLT13 CST-U-TR-L-CLT Upper transport clutch (Low speed) CLT14 CST-U-TR-H-CLT Upper transport clutch (High speed) CLT15 CST-L-TR-L-CLT Lower transport clutch (Low speed) CLT16 CST-L-TR-H-CLT Lower transport clutch (High speed)
(4)
Solenoids
Function Driving the color auto-toner sensor shutter Driving the image quality sensor shutter Driving the bypass pickup roller Remarks P-I D-1 P36 - I25 D-2 H P23 - I21 P22 - I11
Symbol Name SOL1 ATTNR-SHUT-SOL Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid SOL2 TNLVL-SHUT-SOL Image quality sensor shutter solenoid SOL3 SFB-SOL Bypass pickup solenoid
2 - 17
(5)
PC boards
Function Remarks P-I Controlling CCD and A/D conversion B-2 P11 - I10 of image data Controlling the original scanning B-2 P11 - I38 section and RADF Driving the scan motor Controlling LCD and the touch panel on the control panel Detecting the button entry and controlling LED on the control panel Driving the laser diode Detection of the laser beam position B-2 C C E E P17 - I21 P3 - I26 P3 - I25 P10 - I10 P10 - I10
Symbol Name CCD PWA-F-CCD CCD driving PC board (CCD board) PWA-F-SLG SLG Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) PWA-F-SDV SDV Scan motor driving PC board (SDV board) PWA-F-DSP DSP Display PC board (DSP board) PWA-F-KEY KEY Key control PC board (KEY board) PWA-F-LDR LDR Laser driving PC board (LDR board) PWA-F-SNS SNS H-sync signal detection PC board (SNS board) PWA-F-SFB SFB Bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board (SFB board) PWA-F-ADU ADU ADU driving PC board (ADU board) PS-IH IH IH control PC board (IH board) PWA-F-DRV DRV Driving PC board (DRV board) PWA-F-CCL CCL Charger cleaner driving PC board (CCL board) PWA-F-SYS SYS System control PC board (SYS board) PWA-F-LGC LGC Logic PC board (LGC board) PWA-F-NIC NIC NIC board PWA-F-FIL FIL Filter PC board (FIL board)
Detection of the bypass tray slide guide width Controlling the automatic duplexing unit Controlling each IH coil in the fuser unit Controlling each motor and fan in the system Driving the charger cleaner motor
P20 - I13
I K K K
P42 - I30 P8 - I2 P9 - I8 P9 - I13
Controlling the whole system and image processing Controlling the print engine section Network connection interface Cutting noise of the AC power Power supplying to each damp heater * NAD/SAD/TWD models: Standard Power supplying to each damp heater * ASD/AUD/CND models: Standard * MJD model: Option
L L L L
P8 - I34 P9 - I7 P8 - I22 P7 - I11
FUS
PWA-F-FUS Fuse PC board (FUS board)
P7 - I4
2 - 18
(6)
Lamps and heaters

Function Exposing the original to the light Removing the residual charge from the drum surface Heating the fuser roller Preventing condensation of the mirrors of the carriages * ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/TWD models: Standard * NAD/MJD models: Option Preventing condensation of the lens * ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/TWD models: Standard * NAD/MJD models: Option Preventing condensation of the drum * ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/TWD models: Standard * NAD/MJD models: Option Remarks P-I B-1 P26 - I6 D-2 J B-2 P28 - I12 P41 - I7 P11 - I22
Symbol Name EXP LP-EXPO Exposure lamp LP-ERS ERS Discharge LED IH-COIL IH-COIL IH coil SCN-L-DH DH1 Scanner damp heater (Left)
DH2
SCN-R-DH Scanner damp heater (Right)
B-2
P11 - I32
DH3
DRM-DH Drum damp heater
D-2
P35 - I23
(7)
Thermistors and thermostats

Function Remarks P-I Detecting the surface temperature at J P41 - I15 the edge of the front side of the fuser belt (for preventing overheating at the edge of the fuser belt) Detecting the surface temperature at J P41 - I15 the fuser belt center (for controlling the center IH coil) Detecting the surface temperature at J P41 - I15 the front side of the fuser belt (for controlling the side IH coil) Detecting the temperature at the D-2 P32 - I13 drum surface Preventing overheating in the fuser J P41 - I12 unit Controlling the temperature of the B-2 P11 - I22 scanner damp heater * ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/TWD models: Standard * NAD/MJD models: Option Controlling the temperature of the D-2 P35 - I24 drum damp heater * ASD/AUD/CND/SAD/TWD models: Standard * NAD/MJD models: Option
Symbol Name THM1 THMS-EDGE-FBLT Front edge thermistor
THM2
THMS-MAIN-FBLT Main thermistor THMS-SUB-FBLT Sub thermistor
THM3
THMS-DRM Drum thermistor THMO1 THERMO-FSR Fuser thermostat THMO2 THERMO-SCN-DH Scanner damp heater thermostat
THM4
THMO3 THERMO-DRM-DH Drum damp heater thermostat
2 - 19
(8)
Transformer
Function Remarks P-I Generating high-voltage and supplying K P7 - I10 it to the following sections Main charger wire Main charger grid Developer bias (color and black) Transfer bias (1st and 2nd transfer)
Symbol Name HVT PS-HVT High-voltage transformer
(9)
Others
Function Controlling the exposure lamp Displaying and entering each information Storing the program data and image data Generating DC voltage and supplying it to each section of the equipment Cutting noise of AC power Preventing the inflow of overcurrent to the equipment Remarks P-I B-2 P26 - I7 C L L L L P3 - I19 P8 - I25 P7 - I9 P7 - I2 P7 - I3
Symbol Name INV INV-EXP Inverter board LCD LCD LCD panel HDD HDD Hard disk PS-ACC PS Switching power supply NS-FILTER NF Noise filter BREAKER BRK Breaker
2 - 20
CCD
SNS
PWM Laser beam sensor
SLG
SYS
LGC
Laser unit
(R)
Amp A/D
(G/K-odd) LVDS driver Image processing (ASIC) ASIC LVDS receiver
CCD
Amp A/D
ASIC
LDR
ASIC Laser diode
(B/K-even)
Amp A/D
PCI external slot

8 Data-bus Data-bus 32 RS-232C ASIC 8 Engine CPU 24MHz Bus transceiver Page memory (DIMM) Standard: 128MB Option: 256MB Bus transceiver 32 PCI-bus 32 32 8 16 NVRAM 256KB Flash ROM 512KB 16 Data-bus 8 SRAM 128KB 8 8 Download jig 8 NVRAM 8KB Gate array #2 Gate array #1
2.4.1 System block diagram
Data-bus
2.4 General Description
16
16
SRAM 128KB
Flash ROM 512KB
Scanner CPU 22MHz
Download jig
RADF
Control panel
2 - 21
32 ASIC RTC Data-bus Battery 64 ASIC SRAM 512KB Bus transceiver PFP/LCF 16 64 64 System CPU 333MHz 32 ASIC 16 Flash ROM 2MB x 2 Flash ROM 4MB x 2 32 32 *Main memory total Standard: 256MB x 1 Option: 128MB x 2 Main memory Main memory (DIMM) (DIMM) #0 #1 Standard: Not installed Standard: 256MB Option: 128MB Option: 128MB Key counter Download jig
Scrambler board
32
Finisher
8 IPC Finisher
Scrambler board
Bridge unit
HDD
USB connector (device)
USB connector (host)
Parallel port (IEEE-1284)
I/O
HVT Clutches Sensors Solenoids
LAN connector (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
NIC
FAX
ADU
Motors
Copy key card Bypass unit Switches
PSTN External TEL
NCU (LINE-1)
PSTN
NCU (LINE-2)
FAX
Modem
: Option
2.4.2 Construction of boards (a) Construction diagram of boards This system consists of the following including the SYS board as a main board.
NIC Control panel KEY DSP Laser unit LDR SNS
Scanner unit CCD SDV INV SLG LGC SFB SYS ADU
Main switch AC input
FIL or FUS
PS-ACC DRV
CCL
IH
Cover opening/closing interlock switch : DC power supply line : AC power supply line : Signal line
HVT
(b) Function of each board CCD board: This is the board to convert the reflected light by the original to electrical signals. It consists of the CCD, A/D converter, etc. The CCD converts the reflected light by the original to three-color analog signal; red, green, blue, and the A/D converter converts each analog signal to digital. SLG board: This is the board to mainly control the scanning function (scanner unit) and consists of the ScannerCPU, ASIC, memory (Flash ROM, SRAM), etc. When scanning the original, the exposure lamp and scan motor are started by the command from the Scanner-CPU. And the image processing is performed for the image data sent from the CCD by each ASIC. SDV board: This is the board on which the driver for driving the scan motor is mounted. The scan motor is started by the command from the Scanner-CPU. INV board: This is the board on which the lighting control circuit of the exposure lamp is mounted. The exposure lamp lights by the command from the Scanner-CPU.
2 - 22
DSP board: This is the board to mainly control the control panel. The Panel processing CPU detecting the input from each button and touch panel, and the lighting control circuit for the backlight of the LCD are mounted. And it relays the control signal of the control panel from the SYS board to the LCD and KEY board. KEY board: This is the board on which each button switch and each LED on the control panel are mounted. LDR board: This is the board on which the laser diode and the ASIC are mounted. The laser is emitted based on the output image data signal from the ASIC on the LGC board. SNS board: This is the board on which the light sensor for detecting the radiating position of the laser is mounted. It outputs the H-sync signal to the PWM (Pulse Width Modulator) on the LGC board. SFB board: This is the board on which the circuit pattern is printed. It detects the position of the slide guide of the bypass unit. CCL board: This is the board on which the driver for driving the charger cleaner motor is mounted. ADU board: This is the board to relay each signal between the ASIC on the LGC board and the electric parts (motor, sensor, clutch) in the ADU. IH board: This is the board to generate the electric power for driving the IH coil of the fuser unit from the AC electric power input via the switching power supply. And then it is provided. DRV board: This is the board on which the driver for driving the revolver motor, exit motor, and each fan motor are mounted. SYS board: This is the main board taking a leading part in all systems. It consists of the System-CPU, ASIC, memory (DIMM, Flash ROM, SRAM, NVRAM), RTC (Real Time Clock IC) etc. The System-CPU controls each ASIC to perform the control of the image processing, image memory (page memory, main memory, HDD), external interface (RS-232C, IEEE-1284, USB, PCI), NIC, and FAX. And based on the input data from the control panel, System-CPU communicates with Scanner-CPU on the SLG board and Engine-CPU on the LGC board, and then issues an operation command to the scanner and printer engine section.
2 - 23
LGC board: This is the board to mainly control the print function (printer engine). It consists of the Engine-CPU, ASIC, memory (Flash ROM, SRAM, NVRAM), etc. The Engine-CPU controls each ASIC to drive I/O (electrical parts) of each section in the system. It leads to the operation of the laser unit, revolver, developer unit, drum, transfer belt, drawers, bypass unit, ADU, etc. And then the print is made. NIC board: This is the interface board to connect this equipment to the LAN environment (10BASE-T, 100BASETX) to communicate with PCs, etc. FIL board: This is the board to cut off the noise of AC power from outside, and supply the driving AC power to the damp heater for condensation prevention of each section (scanner and drum). FUS board: This is the board to provide the AC electric power for driving to the damp heater for preventing of the condensation of each section (scanner and drum). HVT: This is the board to generate the DC high voltage from +24V to provide the bias to the section of the main charger, developer, and transfer. PS-ACC: This is the unit to generate each DC voltage, which is used in the equipment, from external AC electric power input. And then it is provided to each electric part.
2 - 24
2.5 Disassembly and Replacement of Covers and PC boards

2.5.1 Covers [A] Front cover / Toner bag (1) Open the front cover.
Fig. 2-501
(2) Remove the toner bag.
Fig. 2-502
(3) Pull up 2 hinge pins (on the left and the right) and then extract them inside. (4) Take off the front cover.
Hinge pin Hinge pin Fig. 2-503
[B] Receiving tray (1) Open the front cover ( tray. Chapter 2.5.1 [A]).
Receiving tray
(2) Remove 2 screws and pull out the receiving
Fig. 2-504 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 25 e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
[C] Tray back cover (1) Remove the receiving tray ( Chapter 2.5.1
[B]). (2) Remove 1 screw and take off the tray back cover.
Tray back cover Fig. 2-505
[D] Front lower cover (1) Take off the front cover ( Chapter 12.8 (A-1)). (3) Release 4 latches and take off the front lower cover. Chapter 2.5.1 [A]).
Black developer unit cover
(2) Take off the black developer unit cover (
Latch
Latch Front lower cover Fig. 2-506
[E] Front right cover (1) Take off the front lower cover ( [D]). (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the front right cover. Chapter 2.5.1
Front right cover
Fig. 2-507
[F] Left cover (1) Open the front cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [A]).
(2) Remove 4 screws and take off the left cover.
Left cover Fig. 2-508
2 - 26
[G] Left rear cover (1) Remove 2 screws and take off the left rear cover.
Left rear cover Fig. 2-509
[H] Left upper cover (1) Remove 2 screws and take off the left upper cover.
Left upper cover Fig. 2-510
[I] Front upper cover (1) Take off the left upper cover ( [H]). (2) Remove 2 screws. Take off the front upper cover. Chapter 2.5.1
Fig. 2-511
[J] Right upper cover (1) Remove 3 screws and take off the right upper cover.
Fig. 2-512
2 - 27
[K] IH terminal cover
Fuser unit cover
Caution: Be sure to unplug before the work, not to get an electricshock. (1) Open the ADU. (2) Open the jam access cover.
Jam access cover
ADU
(3) Open the fuser unit cover.

Fig. 2-513
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the IH terminal cover.
IH terminal cover
Fig. 2-514
[L] Right rear cover (1) Open the ADU.
Fig. 2-515
(2) Take off the IH terminal cover ( 2.5.1 [K]).
Chapter
IH terminal cover
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the ozone filter cover. (4) Remove 2 screws and take off the right upper cover ( cover.
Fig. 2-516 e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 - 28 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC Right rear cover Ozone filter cover
Chapter 2.5.1 [J]).
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the right rear
[M] Right lower cover (1) Take off the right rear hinge cover ( 2.5.1 [N]). (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the right lower cover.
Right rear hinge cover
Chapter
Right lower cover
Fig. 2-517
[N] Right rear hinge cover (1) Remove 2 screws and take off the right rear hinge cover.
Right rear hinge cover Fig. 2-518
[O] Right front hinge cover (1) Pull out the upper and lower drawers slightly. (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the right front hinge cover.
Right front hinge cover Fig. 2-519
[P] Rear cover (1) Remove 7 screws and take off the rear cover.
Rear cover
Fig. 2-520
2 - 29
[Q] Upper rear cover (1) Take off the ADF or the platen cover.
(2) Take off the left upper cover ( [H]). (3) Take off the right upper cover ( [J]).
Chapter 2.5.1 Chapter 2.5.1
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the upper rear cover.
Upper rear cover Fig. 2-521
2 - 30
2.5.2 PC boards [A] Logic PC board (LGC board) (A-1) LGC board case (1) Take off the rear cover ( board cover (plate cover).
LGC board cover
Chapter 2.5.1 [P]).
(2) Loosen 13 screws and take off the LGC
Fig. 2-522
(3) Disconnect 20 connectors, release 12 harnesses from harness clamps, remove 5 screws and take off the whole LGC board with the case.
LGC board case
Fig. 2-523
(A-2) LGC board (1) Take off the rear cover ( cover (plate cover) ( Chapter 2.5.1 [P]). Chapter 2.5.2 (A-1).
(2) Loosen 13 screws and take off the LGC board (3) Disconnect 20 connectors. (4) Remove 4 screws and release 2 locking supports, take off the LGC board.
Fig. 2-524
[B] Hard disk (HDD) (1) Take off the rear cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [P]).
(2) Loosen 4 screws and take off the HVT cover.
HVT cover
Fig. 2-525
2 - 31
(3) Loosen 9 screws and take off the SYS board upper cover.
SYS board upper cover Fig. 2-526
(4) Loosen 3 screws, disconnect 2 connectors and take off the SYS board lower cover.
Connector
SYS board lower
Fig. 2-527
(5) Remove 4 screws and take off the hard disk from the SYS board lower cover.
Hard disk
Fig. 2-528
[C] System control PC board (SYS board) (1) Take off the SYS board lower cover ( 2.5.2 [B]). (2) Disconnect 5 connectors. Chapter
Fig. 2-529
2 - 32
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the whole SYS board with the case.
Harness clamp Connector
Harness clamp System board case Fig. 2-530
(4) Remove 11 screws and release 1 lock support. Then take off the SYS board.
Fig. 2-531
[D] Power supply unit (1) Take off the rear cover ( (2) Disconnect 8 connectors. (3) Remove 3 screws and take off the whole switching power supply unit with the bracket. Note: Be careful not for the power supply unit to be caught by harnesses.
Power supply unit Fig. 2-532
Chapter 2.5.1 [P]).
(4) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 4 screws and take off the power supply cooling fan.
Connector
FLOW
Power supply cooling fan

Fig. 2-533
2 - 33
(5) Remove 11 screws and take off the cover of the power supply unit.
Fig. 2-534
[E] High-voltage transformer (1) Take off the power supply unit ( [D]). (2) Disconnect 8 connectors, remove 2 screws, release 2 lock supports (white arrow) and take off the high-voltage transformer. Chapter 2.5.2
High-voltage transformer
Fig. 2-535
[F] Noise filter (1) Take off the right rear hinge cover and the right lower cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [N] [M]). (2) Disconnect 4 connectors, remove 1 screw and take off the noise filter.
White Black
Fig. 2-536
[G] Fuse board (FUS board) (1) Take off the right rear hinge cover and the right lower cover ( over. Chapter 2.5.1 [N] [M]). (2) Remove 5 screws to take off the unit and turn it
Fig. 2-537
2 - 34
(3) Disconnect 3 connectors and release 4 lock supports (white arrow) to take off the fuse board. Note: FUS board is not included for MJD and NAD.
Fuse board Fig. 2-538
[H] Driving PC board (DRV board) (1) Take off the LGC board case ( [A]). (2) Disconnect 5 connectors, remove 1 screw and DRV board with the bracket. Chapter 2.5.2
DRV board Fig. 2-539
2.5.3 Options [A] MR-3015 (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)) (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable. (2) Take off the connector cover.
Fig. 2-540
(3) Disconnect the connector.
Fig. 2-541
2 - 35
(4) Remove 2 screws on the rear side.
Fig. 2-542
(5) Open the RADF.
Fig. 2-543
(6) Remove 2 screws on the front side.
Fig. 2-544
(7) Slide the RADF backward and take off by lifting it up.
Fig. 2-545
2 - 36
Note: When disinstalling the RADF and installing the platen cover, or disinstalling the platen cover and installing the RADF, tighten the screw which installs the damper holding bracket of the scanner at the following positions. Installing the RADF: A Installing the platen cover: B
Fig. 2-546
[B] KD-1011 (Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)) (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable. (2) Remove 7 screws and take off the rear cover of the equipment. Note: Disconnect the connector of the RADF first when the RADF is installed.
Fig. 2-547
(3) Remove 1 screw and the ground wire, and then disconnect 2 connectors (3 if the optional damp heater is installed).
Connector of optional damp heater
Fig. 2-548
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the rear side.
Fig. 2-549
2 - 37
(5) Take off the lower drawer of the equipment and PFP upper drawer.
Fig. 2-550
(6) Remove 4 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the front side.
Fig. 2-551
(7) Lift up the equipment and take off the PFP.
Fig. 2-552
[C] KD-1012 (Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)) (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable. (2) Remove 7 screws and take off the rear cover of the equipment. Note: Disconnect the connectors of the RADF first when the RADF is installed.
Fig. 2-553 e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE 2 - 38 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Remove 1 screw and the ground wire, and then disconnect 2 connectors (3 if the optional damp heater is installed).
Connector of optional damp heater
Fig. 2-554
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the rear side.
Fig. 2-555
(5) Take off the lower drawer of the equipment.
Fig. 2-556
(6) Pull out the LCF drawer.
Fig. 2-557
2 - 39
(7) Remove 4 screws and take off 2 fixing brackets on the front side.
Fig. 2-558
(8) Lift up the equipment and take off the LCF.
Fig. 2-559
[D] MJ-1022 (Hanging finisher) <When PFP/LCF is not installed> (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable. (2) Take off the connector cover and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 2-560
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the safety bracket on the rear side and the cover.
Fig. 2-561
2 - 40
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the safety bracket on the front side and the cover.
Fig. 2-562
(5) Remove 2 screws.
Fig. 2-563
(6) Lift up the finisher and take it off.
Fig. 2-564
<When PFP/LCF is installed> (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable. (2) Take off the connector cover and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 2-565
2 - 41
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the cover on the rear side.
Fig. 2-566
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the cover on the front side.
Fig. 2-567
Fig. 2-568
(6) Lift up the finisher and take it off.
Fig. 2-569
2 - 42
[E] MJ-1023 (Console finisher) (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable. (2) Take off the connector cover and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 2-570
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the finisher lower cover.
Fig. 2-571
(4) Remove 3 screws and take off the finisher front cover.
Fig. 2-572
(5) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 2-573
2 - 43
(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the cover of the finisher rear side.
Fig. 2-574
(7) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 2-575
(8) Take off the finisher. Note: Be careful not to fell the finisher when moving the finisher unit only.
Fig. 2-576
[F] MJ-1024 (Console finisher) (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable. (2) Take off the connector cover and disconnect the connector.
Fig. 2-577
2 - 44
(3) Open the finisher front cover and remove 1 screw.
Fig. 2-578
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the cover of the finisher rear side.
Fig. 2-579
(5) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 2-580
(6) Take off the finisher. Note: Be careful not to fell the finisher when moving the finisher unit only.
Fig. 2-581
2 - 45
[G] MJ-6004 (Hole punch unit) (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power
cable. (2) Take off the connector cover and disconnect connector.
Fig. 2-582
(3) Open the front cover of the hole punch unit and remove 1 screw.
Fig. 2-583
(4) Take off the cover of the punch unit lower side.
Fig. 2-584
(5) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 2-585
2 - 46
(6) Remove 3 screws and take off the punch unit rear cover.
Fig. 2-586
(7) Remove 1 screw.
Fig. 2-587
(8) Take off the finisher with the hole punch unit. Note: Be careful not to fell the finisher when moving the finisher unit only.
Fig. 2-588
(9) Disconnect 2 connectors.
Fig. 2-589
2 - 47
Fig. 2-590
(11) Lift up the punch unit and take it off.
Fig. 2-591
[H] KN-3511 (Bridge unit) (1) Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable. (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the cover.
Fig. 2-592
(3) Disconnect 1 connector.
Fig. 2-593
2 - 48
(4) Open the bridge unit. Remove 1 screw and take off the cover.
Fig. 2-594
(5) Close the bridge unit and remove 1 screw.
Fig. 2-595
(6) Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket.
Fig. 2-596
(7) Lift up the bridge unit and release the hook. Take off the bridge unit toward the front.
Fig. 2-597
2 - 49
2 - 50
3. COPY PROCESS
3.1 Expression of Colors and 4-Step Copy Process
A variety of colors can be expressed by mixing the three primary colors : Yellow, magenta and cyan. Red can be created by mixing yellow and magenta; blue can be created by mixing magenta and cyan; green is created by mixing cyan and yellow; and mixing all the three primary colors allows you to obtain black.
Magenta Blue Black Cyan Red Green Yellow
This equipment has accomplished to improve reproducibility by adding black toner to the mixture of the above three colors at proper ratio.
[Three primary colors]
Fig. 3-101
e-STUDIO3511/4511 adopts a revolver mechanism which combines the three developer units of yellow, magenta and cyan. In this process, each image of cyan, magenta and yellow is developed in order by rotating these developers and overlaid on the transfer belt one after another. Then the black image developed by independent black developer unit is overlaid for the best expressions of colors. Four layers of color image (K C M Y) on the transfer belt are transferred onto paper.
1st transfer roller Transfer belt Fuser unit 2nd transfer roller
Color developer unit Laser optical unit
Black developer unit
Main charger Photoconductive drum
Fig. 3-102
3-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 COPY PROCESS
3.2 General Description of Copying Process

2 9 6
Paper exit 1st transfer 1800V (400 to 4000V)

10
Original exposure
Cleaning -1000 V
Xenon lamp 16 W
Discharging (LED array) Wavelength 660nm x 24pcs.

5-2
Fusing IH coil
Color development Magnetic roller bias

+
700 to 1300 W
+ + +
-550V (-100 to -900V) DC 1.0 kV/10kHz AC
Photoconductive drum

+ + + +
Data reading (scanning) CCD 600dpi, 7450 pixels
Toner Carrier
5-1
Charger (grid voltage) -800V (-300 to -1200V)
+ + +
2nd transfer (+)1000V (500 to 4800V) (-)-1000V (-100 to 2000V)
Black development Magnetic roller bias -550V (-100 to -900V) DC
Image processing
1.2 kV/10kHz AC
1. Charging: Places a negative charge on the surface of the photoconductive drum. 2. Original exposure: Converts images on the original into optical signals. 3. Data reading: The optical image signals are read into CCD and converted into electrical signals. 4. Data writing: The electrical image signals are changed to light signals (by laser emission) which expose the surface of the photoconductive drum. 5. Development: Negatively-charged toner is made to adhere to the photoconductive drum, producing a visible image.
+ + + +
Bypass feeding Data writing Semiconductor laser Pw=4.0 nJ/mm2 Drawer feeding PFP/LCF feeding
Fig. 3-201
6. 1st transfer: Transfers the visible image (toner) on photoconductive drum to the transfer belt. 7. 2nd transfer: Transfers the visible image (toner) on the transfer belt to paper. 8. Fusing: Fuses the toner image to the paper by applying heat and pressure. 9. Blade cleaning : While scraping off the residual toner from the drum by the blade, this blade also eliminates the (+) residual charge on the drum left after image transfer. 10. Discharging: Eliminates the residual () charge from the surface of the photoconductive drum.
3-2
3.3 Details of Copying Process

(1) Photoconductive drum The photoconductive drum consists of two layers. The outer layer is a photoconductive layer made of an organic photoconductive carrier (OPC), and the inner layer is an aluminum conductive base in a cylindrical form. The photoconductive carrier has a special property: when it is exposed to light, the electrical resistance
Surface potential (V)
Photoconductive layer Base Structure of the photoconductive drum (Example of OPC)

Fig. 3-301
it possesses increases or decreases with the strength of the light. Example: Strong incident light Decreases resistance (works as a conductor.) Weak incident light Increases resistance (works as an insulator.) [Formation of electrostatic latent images] In the processes of charging, data reading, data writing, and discharging described below, the areas on the drum corresponding to colored areas on the original are deprived of negative charge, while the areas on the drum corresponding to white areas retain the negative charge. Thus it forms a negative charge image on the drum surface. As this negative charge image on the drum is not visible to the human eye, it is called an electrostatic latent image. (2) Charging Charging is a process to apply charge evenly to the drum surface. The charger wire produces negative corona discharge, which is controlled by the grid so that the drum surface is evenly charged with negative potential. The surface potential on the drum is determined by the grid potential and is controlled to a fixed value by the grid control circuit.
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3-3
Time (t)
0
Colored area of original

- 500
White area of original

- 1000
Discharge Charging process process
Electric potential of the photoconductive drum

Fig. 3-302
Main charger
Rotation of drum
Grid control circuit

Fig. 3-303
(3) Data reading (scanning) Data reading is a process of illuminating the original with light and converting the reflected light into electrical signals.
CCD board Scanning section control PC board
The light reflected from the original is directed to the Charge Coupled Device (CCD) and this optical image information is converted to electrical signals (image signals), which are then transmitted to the image processing section via the scanner control PC board. The CCD for color processing has RGB filters provided over its surface, which allow the CCD to read the light amount in the respective ranges of wavelength. The image data corresponding to the respective RGB colors is then transmitted to the image processing section.
Light 255 (Example) CCD light receiving amount
Image processing section

Fig. 3-304
Value of image signals to be output
Dark
Difference between "light " and "dark" is divided into 256 steps.
(4) Data writing Data writing is a process of converting the image signals transmitted from the image processing section into light signals and exposing the drum surface with the light signal. Namely, the image signals transmitted from the image processing section are converted into optical signals (laser emission) by the semiconductor laser element, which are then used to expose the drum surface, thus forming an electrostatic latent image there.
Fig. 3-305
Laser driving PC board
Semiconductor laser element Polygonal mirror
Drum
3-4
(5) Development Development is a process of making the electrostatic latent images visible to the eye (visible image). Developer material is supplied to the photoconductive drum surface by means of a magnetic roller, allowing the toner in the developer material to adhere to the areas on the drum surface where the potential is lower than the developer bias which is applied to the magnetic roller (reverse development).
Fig. 3-306
Drum Magnetic roller
Magnet Magnetic roller Toner Carrier (always attracted onto the magnet) Toner
Bias voltage -550V (-100 to -900V) DC 1.2kV/10kHz AC
Toner Photoconductive drum
Photoconductive layer Aluminum base
White background
Halftone
Solid
Fig. 3-307
When the () potential of the photoconductive drum is higher than the developer bias.
- 700V - 600V - 500V - 400V

When the () potential of the photoconductive drum is lower than the developer bias.
White background Image is not developed Image is developed by toner Bias voltage
- 300V - 200V - 100V 0
Fig. 3-308 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3-5 e-STUDIO3511/4511 COPY PROCESS
About developer material The developer material is comprised of a mixture of toner and carrier. The toner is charged to a negative polarity and the carrier to a positive
Coloring agent (5-10%)
5-13m Resin (90-95%) [Toner] Ferrite
polarity, due to the friction with each other caused by mixing. Toner : Mainly consists of resin and coloring. Carrier: Consists of ferrite, and over its surface resin coating to provide consistent frictional electrification.
30-100m [Carrier]
Fig. 3-309
Note: If the developer material is used for a long period of time (beyond its normal life span), toner will become caked onto the carrier. The performance of the carrier is lowered. Result: 1. Image density is lowered. 2. Toner scattering occurs. 3. Background fogging occurs. Solution: Replace the developer material.
Toner
Carrier
Where toner is caked, no frictional electrification occurs.

Fig. 3-310
Magnetic roller - Magnetic brush development technique Inside magnetic rollers, the south and north poles are arranged as shown in the right figure. The Photoconductive drum developer material forms a brush-like fluff which contacts the photoconductive drum surface. This is caused by the lines of magnetic force between the south and north poles.
Magnetic roller
Fig. 3-311
Lines of magnetic force
N
S
3-6 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
(6) 1st transfer 1st transfer is a process of transcribing the toner image (visible image) formed on the photoconductive drum to the transfer belt. A positive bias is applied to the transfer roller, causing the transfer belt to be positively charged. This in turn helps to form an electric field E between the transfer belt (positive) and the photoconductive layer of the photoconductive drum (grounded), thus making the toner image transferred to the transfer belt. In the copy process of this equipment, images are transferred in the order of KCMY on the transfer belt.
Toner E
Pho toco nduc
Transfer belt
Fig. 3-312
1st transfer roller
Transfer belt
(7) 2nd transfer An electrostatic attracting force occurs between the polarized charge (negative) on the lower surface of transfer belt and the belt itself (positive). That makes the toner being absorbed from the belt to the paper. Then an electric field is formed between the 2nd transfer roller and the transfer belt drive roller, which generates a paper polarization and thus the toner is transferred from the belt to the paper.
Alum
tive
inum
laye
base
Fig. 3-313
Phot o drum conductiv e
Fig. 3-314
3-7
(8) Fusing process Fusing is a process of melting the toner on the paper and fixing it firmly onto the paper. Method : The softening point of the toner (main
3
(Heat)
component : resin) is 105 - 1200C. Toner is melted by the fuser belt.
Fuser belt
Separation roller Press roller
+
(Pressure) The fuser belt is pressed against the pressure roller by the springs to increase adherence of the melted toner to the paper. The paper is subjected to the heat and pressure when passing through the fuser belt and the pressure roller. || (Fusing) The toner on the paper is fused to it.
Fuser roller
Fig. 3-315
(9) Blade cleaning While eliminating the (+) charge on the photoconductive drum applied during the transfer stage, the conductive blade recovers the toner left on the drum at the same time. Elimination of transfer charge With this OPC photoconductive drum, (+) charge on their surface cannot be eliminated optically. Therefore, () voltage is applied to the conductive blade, which is pressed against the drum, to eliminate the (+) charge applied at the transfer process.
Surface potential of photoconductive drum

800V
800V
Transfer
Elimina- Discharge Charging tion of transfer charge

Fig. 3-316
3-8
Cleaning The edge of the conductive blade is pressed against the photoconductive drum surface to scrape off residual toner. The toner removed is then caught by the recovery blade.
Drum rotation
Recovery blade
(10) Discharging process Discharging is a process of eliminating the () charge remaining on the photoconductive drum before the next charging process. If the charge remaining on the photoconductive drum is not eliminated, the following phenomenon would occur: () charge remaining on the photoconductive drum surface causes uneven application of the charge for the next copying. The next copy obtains a double image. (The preceding image remains.) To prevent this : The entire surface of the photoconductive drum is flooded with light by the discharge LED array. The photoconductive drum becomes electrically conductive. All of the () charge remaining on the photoconductive drum is conducted away to ground (However, (+) charge is eliminated by the conductive blade as mentioned in (8)). Preparation for the next copying process is completed.
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3-9
Conductive blade
Fig. 3-317

Discharge LED array
Fig. 3-318 e-STUDIO3511/4511 COPY PROCESS
3.4 List of Copying Process Conditions

Process 1. Photoconductive drum (1) Sensitivity FC-210/310 OD-FC31 (OPC drum) (1) Sensitized drum (30) Scorotron type -250 to -1000 V (grid voltage) (adjusting by image quality control) 3. Data writing (1) Light source (2) Light amount 4. Image control 5. Development (1) Magnetic roller (2) Auto-toner detection (1) One magnetic roller (2) Magnetic bridge-circuit method (1) Semiconductor laser (adjustment not required) (2) 6.0 nJ/mm2 Image quality control by detecting toner adhesion amount (1) Same as FC-210/310 (2) Black: Magnetic bridge-circuit method Color: Optical reflection sensor method (3) Toner supply (4) Toner-empty detection (5) Toner (3) Toner cartridge replacing method (4) Density detection method (5) T-FC31-K (black) T-FC31E-K (black) T-FC31-Y (yellow) T-FC31E-Y (yellow) T-FC31-M (magenta) T-FC31E-M (magenta) T-FC31-C (cyan) T-FC31E-C (cyan) (6) Developer material (6) D-FC31-K (black) D-FC31-Y (yellow) D-FC31-M (magenta) D-FC31-C (cyan) (7) Developer bias (7) DC -100 to -700 V (adjusting by image quality control) AC 1.2 kV/4 kHz 6. Transfer Transfer belt method (3) Same as FC-210/310 (4) Same as FC-210/310 (5) T-3511-K (black) T-3511*-K (black) T-3511-Y (yellow) T-3511*-Y (yellow) T-3511-M (magenta) T-3511*-M (magenta) T-3511-C (cyan) T-3511*-C (cyan) (Marked*: E, D, C and T) (6) D-3511-K (black) D-3511-Y (yellow) D-3511-M (magenta) D-3511-C (cyan) (7) DC -100 to -900 V (adjusting by image quality control) Color: AC 1.0 kV/10 kHz Black: AC 1.2 kV/10 kHz (1) 1st transfer: Transfer belt method (2) 2nd transfer: Transfer roller method 7. Separation Separation by electrostatic attraction of the transfer belt Self-separation by transfer belt and 2nd transfer roller (1) Same as FC-210/310 (2) 4.0nJ/mm2 Same as FC-210/310 e-STUDIO3511/4511 OD-3511 (OPC drum) (1) Highly sensitized drum (90) Scorotron type -300 to -1200 V (grid voltage) (adjusting by image quality control)
2. Charging
3 - 10
Process 8. Photoconductive drum cleaning (1) Method (2) Recovered toner (3) Transfer charge removal
FC-210/310 (1) Blade cleaning (2) Non-reusable (3) Simultaneous cleaning and discharging by the conductive blade
e-STUDIO3511/4511 (1) Same as FC-210/310 (2) Same as FC-210/310 (3) Same as FC-210/310
9. Transfer belt cleaning 10.Discharge 11.Fusing (1) Method LED array (red)
Blade cleaning (contact/release mechanism) Same as FC-210/310 (1) Belt fusing system Fuser roller : Fluorinated iron roller (40) (IH coil: 700 -1300W) Pressure roller: Silicon sponge roller (Surface - PFA tube)
(1) Belt fusing system Upper heat roller: Fluorinated aluminum roller (30) (Lamp rating: 550W) Fuser roller: Silicon sponge roller (38) Lower heat roller: PFA tube roller (40) (Lamp rating: 450 W) Fuser belt: PFA tube belt (70)
Fuser belt: PFA tube belt (60) Separation roller: Ceramic roller (20)
(2) Cleaning
(2) Oil roller method Oil roller (22) Cleaning roller (21) (3) ON/OFF control by thermistor (upper/lower roller independent temperature control) (4) Halogen lamp
(2) Oil roller method Oil roller (18) Cleaning roller (16) (3) ON/OFF control and power control by thermistor (4) IH coil
(3) Heat roller temperature
(4) Heater
3 - 11
3 - 12
4. GENERAL OPERATION
4.1 Overview of Operation
Operation of equipment Operation during initializing, pre-running and ready Drawer feed copying by the [START] button Copying operation Bypass feed copying Interrupt copying
4.2 Description of Operation

4.2.1 Warming-up (1) Initialization Power ON IH coil ON Set number 1, reproduction ratio 100% and Wait Warming Up are displayed. Fan motors ON Initialization of laser optical system - The polygonal motor rotates in low speed. Initialization of feeding system - Each drawer tray goes up. Pre-running operation is stopped after five seconds. Cleaning of transfer belt - Main motor is turned ON. Initialization of revolver motor - Detects home position. - Rotates the developer unit to the waiting position and stops rotating. ( - Performs image quality control.)*1 Initialization of scanning system - The carriage moves to the home position. - The carriage moves to the peak detection position. - The exposure lamp is turned ON. - Peak detection (white color is detected by the shading correction plate) - The exposure lamp is turned OFF. READY (WARMING UP) is displayed. (2) Pre-running operation Pre-running operation is started when the temperature of the fuser belt surface reaches a certain temperature. Transport motor is turned ON. - Fuser roller rotation. (3) When the temperature of the fuser belt surface becomes sufficient for fusing, READY is displayed. *1: Image quality control should be performed only at change of environment or periodical performing timing.
4-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 GENERAL OPERATION
4.2.2 Ready (ready for copying) Buttons on the control panel enabled When no button is pressed for a certain period of time, - Set number 1 and reproduction ratio 100% are displayed. Equipment returns to the normal ready state.
4.2.3 Drawer feed copying (Upper drawer paper feeding) (1) Press the [START] button ON READY changes to COPYING Exposure lamp turned ON Scan motor turned ON Carriages-1 and -2 move forward Main motor, transport motor, developer motor and exit motor turned ON - Drum, fuser unit, developer unit and exit roller are driven Drum cleaner brush motor turned ON (2) Drawer paper feeding Fans rotated in high speed and upper drawer feed clutch turned ON - Pickup roller, feed roller, separation roller and transport roller start to rotate Paper reaches the upper drawer feed sensor -Upper drawer feed sensor is turned ON Paper reaches the registration roller - Registration sensor is turned ON and aligning is performed Upper drawer feed clutch is turned OFF after a certain period of time (3) A certain period of time passed after the carriage operation Registration clutch is turned ON after a certain period of time Paper is transported to the transfer area Copy counter operates (4) Completion of scanning Scan motor turned OFF Exposure lamp turned OFF Registration clutch turned OFF (after the trailing edge of the paper passed the registration roller) READY (PRINTING) is displayed (5) Printing operation 1) Color printing operation Black developer lifting clutch, black developer bias (+150), transfer belt cleaner clutch, toner recovery auger, drum cleaner brush, discharge LED and cleaning blade bias turned ON Transfer belt cleaner auger motor turned ON - Transfer belt used toner auger is driven Main charger and 1st transfer bias turned ON Transfer belt marker detection
4-2
Black developer lifting clutch, black developer bias (-) turned ON - Contact the black developer roller to the drum surface Laser emission (black image) Black developer drive clutch and black developer bias (AC) turned ON 1st transfer (black image) - Black image is transferred to the transfer belt Black developer bias (AC) turned OFF Black developer lifting clutch turned ON and black developer drive clutch turned OFF - Release the black developer roller from the drum surface Black developer bias (-) turned OFF Revolver motor turned ON - Revolver rotates 65 degrees to move to cyan developing position Transfer belt marker detection Laser emission (cyan image) Color developer bias (AC) and color developer bias (-) turned ON Color developer drive clutch turned ON Transfer belt cleaner clutch and transfer belt cleaner auger motor turned OFF 1st transfer (cyan image) - Cyan image is transferred to the transfer belt Color developer bias (AC), color developer drive clutch and color developer bias (-) turned OFF Revolver motor turned ON - Revolver rotates 120 degrees to move to magenta developing position Transfer belt marker detection Laser emission (magenta image) Color developer bias (AC), color developer drive clutch and color developer bias (-) turned ON 1st transfer (magenta image) - Magenta image is transferred to the transfer belt Color developer bias (AC), color developer drive clutch and color developer bias (-) turned OFF Revolver motor turned ON - Revolver rotates 120 degrees to move to yellow developing position Transfer belt marker detection Laser emission (yellow image) Color developer bias (AC), color developer drive clutch and color developer bias (-) turned ON 1st transfer (yellow image) - Yellow image is transferred to the transfer belt Color developer drive clutch, color developer bias (AC) and color developer bias (-) turned OFF Revolver motor turned ON - Revolver rotates 55 degrees to move to escape position Transfer belt marker detection 2nd transfer roller drive clutch, 2nd transfer roller contact clutch and 2nd transfer bias turned ON - Contact the 2nd transfer roller to the transfer belt - The image on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper Transfer belt cleaner clutch and transfer belt cleaner auger motor turned ON 2nd transfer roller contact clutch, 2nd transfer roller drive clutch and 2nd transfer bias turned OFF
4-3
Transfer belt cleaner clutch and transfer belt cleaner auger motor turned OFF Main charger and 1st transfer bias turned OFF 2) Black printing operation Black developer lifting clutch, black developer bias (+150), transfer belt cleaner clutch, toner recovery auger, drum cleaner brush, discharge LED and cleaning blade bias turned ON Transfer belt cleaner auger motor turned ON - Transfer belt used toner auger is driven Main charger and 1st transfer bias turned ON Black developer lifting clutch and black developer bias (-) turned ON - Contact the black developer roller to the drum surface Laser emission (black image) Black developer drive clutch and black developer bias (AC) turned ON 1st transfer (black image) - Black image is transferred to the transfer belt 2nd transfer roller drive clutch, 2nd transfer roller contact clutch and 2nd transfer bias turned ON - Contact the 2nd transfer roller to the transfer belt - The image on the transfer belt is transferred to the paper Black developer bias (AC) turned OFF Black developer lifting clutch turned ON and black developer drive clutch turned OFF - Release the black developer roller from the drum surface Black developer bias (-) turned OFF Main charger turned OFF 2nd transfer roller contact clutch, 2nd transfer bias and 2nd transfer roller drive clutch turned OFF Transfer belt cleaner clutch, transfer belt cleaner auger motor and 1st transfer bias turned OFF (6) Paper exiting The exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper Toner recovery auger, drum cleaner brush, discharge LED and cleaning blade bias turned OFF Main motor, transport motor, developer motor and exit motor turned OFF Drum cleaner brush motor turned OFF Drum, fuser unit and developer unit are stopped Fans return to rotate at the normal rotation speed READY is displayed and the equipment enters into ready mode
4-4
Timing chart for copying (A4/LT size, 1 sheet from upper drawer)
(ms) 0 Scan motor fwd. rev. 557 547 1121 801 717 3100 3162 3104 3089 2840 5570 8300 11030 22070 3741
Exposure lamp SVDEN signal Main motor Transfer belt marker detection IVSYNC signal Revolver motor Transfer belt cleaner clutch Color developer drive clutch Black developer lifting clutch Black developer drive clutch
2885
3875
5610 5785
6605 5960 5980 5935
8340 8480
9335 11070 8730 11215
12060 11455 13985 14135 14015 19670
8460
8710
11190
11440
13970
2740 2885 2885
5435 5585 5435
2nd transfer roller contact clutch 2nd transfer bias Transport motor Upper drawer feed clutch Upper drawer feed sensor Registration sensor Registration clutch Exit sensor 10 235 570 495 660
2200 2470
3360 3540
12755 12880
13915 14040
16700 16995
17840 17840 19670
13380 13680 12685 13725 13745 14790 5ms/ck
Scan motor
fwd. rev.
(ms) 0 543 533
795 1988 710 2047 2632 1989 1962 11460 2300 3315
Exposure lamp SVDEN signal Main motor MVDEN signal
979
Revolver motor Transfer belt cleaner clutch Color developer drive clutch Black developer lifting clutch Black developer drive clutch 9020
2020 2160 2160
6355
6500 6345
2nd transfer roller contact clutch 2nd transfer bias Transport motor Upper drawer feed clutch Upper drawer feed sensor Registration sensor Registration clutch Exit sensor 10 235 575 495 660
2195 2460
3355 3535
3975 4100
7190 7190 9020
4610 4905 3915 4975 4970 6025 5ms/ck
4-5
4.2.4 Bypass feed copying (1) Insert a paper into the bypass tray. Bypass paper sensor is turned ON. - Ready for bypass feeding is displayed. Carriages move to the home position.
(2) Press the [START] button ON Ready for bypass feeding changes to COPYING. Exposure lamp ON Scan motor ON Carriages-1 and -2 move forward. Main motor, transport motor, developer motor and exit motor turned ON - The drum, fuser unit, developer unit and exit roller are driven. Drum cleaner brush motor turned ON. (3) Bypass feeding Fans rotate in high speed. Bypass feed clutch turned ON. - The bypass pickup roller is lowered. - The bypass pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller start to rotate. Aligning operation Paper reaches the registration roller. After a certain period of time, the bypass feed clutch turned OFF. (4) Hereafter, operations (3) through (6) of 4.2.3. Drawer feed copying are repeated.
4.2.5 Interruption copying (1) Press the [INTERRUPT] button LED INTERRUPT is turned ON. Copying operation in progress is temporarily stopped, and the carriages-1 and -2 return to appropriate positions. Job interrupted job 1 saved is displayed. Automatic density and reproduction ratio 100% are set. Set number remains the same. (2) Select the desired copy condition (3) After interruption copying is finished: Press interrupt to resume job 1 is displayed. LED INTERRUPT is turned OFF by pressing the [INTERRUPT] button, and the equipment returns to the status before the interruption. Ready to resume job 1 is displayed. (4) Press the [START] button The copying operation before the interruption is resumed.
4-6
4.3 Detection of Abnormality

When something abnormal has occurred in the equipment, symbols corresponding to the type of abnormality are displayed. 4.3.1 Types of abnormality A) Abnormality cleared without turning OFF the door switch (1) Add paper (2) Paper misfeed in bypass B) Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the door switch (1) Misfeed in equipment (2) Add toner (3) Developer unit not installed properly (4) Toner bag replacement C) Abnormality not cleared without turning OFF the main switch (1) Call for service 4.3.2 Description of abnormality A-1) Add paper [In case of the equipment drawer or PFP drawer] (When drawer is not installed) Drawer not detected
Drawer is not installed: Drawer is installed but there is no paper in it:
No paper A signal sent to the control circuit Drawer area of the illustration blinks (When the drawer is selected) [START] button is disabled.
[In case of the equipment, PFP or LCF drawers] (When drawer is installed) Based on the combination of the tray-up motor movement and the status of tray-up sensor and empty sensor, CPU detects the presence of paper.
4-7
When the power is turned ON or LCF drawer is inserted (When the power is turned ON or equipment/PFP drawers are inserted). LCF performs initialization. Detects the presence of paper Tray-up motor ON - The tray goes up At this time, the tray-up sensor and LCF empty sensor are OFF. When the tray-up sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time it means that the tray is in abnormal condition Add paper is displayed regardless of presence/absence of paper Cleared by turning the power ON/OFF Tray-up sensor is turned ON in a fixed period of time. - The tray motor stops. At this time, if the empty sensor is ON - It is judged that there is paper. OFF - It is judged that there is no paper. Drawer area of the illustration blinks. (When the drawer is selected) When the paper in the drawer gets short during copying, The tray-up sensor turned OFF The tray-up motor turned ON - Tray goes up Tray-up sensor turned ON Tray-up motor stopped Empty sensor turned OFF during the copying in spite of the tray-up sensor is ON
It is judged that there is no paper. Drawer area of the illustration blinks. (When the drawer is selected) The copying operation is stopped.
4-8
A-2) Bypass misfeeding ( ) During bypass feeding Bypass feed clutch is turned ON Registration sensor is turned ON * Registration sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time (E120) Bypass misfeeding Bypass misfeed symbol is displayed ( ) The copying operation is disabled. Solution: The bypass sensor is turned OFF by removing the paper from the bypass tray. A-3) Set key copy counter When the key copy counter (optional) is pulled out from the equipment which installs it: Set key copy counter displayed. Copying operation disabled When the counter is pulled out during copying: Copying is stopped when the key copy counter is pulled out. B-1) Misfeed in equipment ( ) Exit sensor detects jamming of the leading edge of paper Registration clutch turned ON Approx 1.2 sec.* Exit sensor turned ON If the exit sensor is not turned ON after approx 1.2 seconds, Paper jam (E010) The copying operation is stopped.
ON
Registration clutch Exit sensor

ON
Timer
0 Approx 1.2 sec.
Paper jam (E010)
Fig. 4-301
4-9
Exit sensor detects jamming of the trailing edge of paper Registration clutch turned OFF Approx 1.3 sec* Exit sensor turned OFF If the exit sensor is not turned OFF after approx 1.3 seconds, Paper jam (E020) The copying operation is stopped.
Registration clutch
OFF
Exit sensor
ON
Timer
Approx 1.3 sec.
Paper jam (E020)
Fig. 4-302
Immediately after the power ON Any of all sensors on paper transport path detects paper (ON) Paper jam (E030) Front cover is opened during copying Paper jam (E410) Registration sensor detects jamming of the leading edge of paper: The registration sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the leading edge of paper passed the transport roller. Paper jam (E120, E200, E210, E300, E330 and E3C0) During paper feeding from ADU: The registration sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the ADU clutch is turned ON. Paper jam (E110) During paper transporting from ADU: ADU entrance/exit sensors do not detect the paper at the fixed timing Paper jam (E510 and E520) During paper feeding from the equipment or PFP: The registration sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the feed clutch is turned ON. Paper jam (E220, E310, E320, E340 to E360, E3D0 and E3E0: Error code defers depending on the paper source.)
4 - 10
B-2) Add toner ( ) Toner density becomes low Auto-toner sensor detects the absence of the toner Control circuit Add toner is displayed: the copying operation disabled Solution: Open the front cover and replace the toner cartridge with new one. Toner is supplied copying operation enabled B-3) Developer unit not installed properly Disconnection of the connectors of the developer unit Developer unit not installed is displayed. Solution: Connect the connectors of the developer unit and close the front cover. B-4) Toner bag replacement ( ) Toner bag is full of used toner Toner recovery auger shifts to the rear side: Toner bag full detection sensor-1 ON Dispose of used toner is displayed
Toner bag full detection sensor is turned ON during printing Printing is stopped after the paper being printed is exited Solution: Replace the toner bag with new one and close the front cover. C-1) Call for service Error code is displayed instead of the set number by pressing the [CLEAR] button and [8] button simultaneously when the Call for service is blinking. Refer to the error code table in the Service Handbook.
4 - 11
4.4 Flow Chart

4.4.1 Power ON to ready
Main switch ON
DC power ON
4
Restart YES
Cover open? NO IH coil ON Fans ON
YES
Registration sensor ON? NO
Scan motor ON
Main motor ON Revolver motor ON Polygonal motor ON NO NO Color toner sensor abnormal? NO YES
YES
Exit sensor ON? NO
Home position detected? YES NO
2.5 sec. Elapsed? YES Call for service "C270" "C280"
YES
ADU entrance/exit sensor ON? NO
Peak detected? YES
Call for service "CF50"
Call for service "C260"
YES
Upper drawer feed sensor ON? NO
Revolver home position detected?
NO
Call for service "CEA0" YES
YES
Lower drawer feed sensor ON? NO
Revolver initialization finished? YES B Performs image quality control
NO
Paper jam "E030"
Image quality control finished propery? YES
NO
Call for service "CE10" "CE20" "CE40" "CE50" "CE90"
4 - 12
Fuser belt ready for prerunning? YES Transport motor ON Tray-up motor ON
NO
NO
Fuser belt reached ready temp.? YES Main motor OFF Revolver motor OFF Transport motor OFF Tray-up motor OFF
Thermistor broken? NO
YES
Call for service
"C410" "C430"
IH coil broken? IH coil OFF B READY NO Polygonal motor condition abnormal? NO
YES
Call for service
"C440"
YES
Call for service
"CA10"
IH error? NO
YES
Call for service
"C470" "C480" "C490"
4 - 13
4.4.2 Automatic feed copying

Press [START]
Processing system control
Transport system control
Scanner system control
4
Main motor ON Developer motor ON Drum cleaner brush motor ON YES Polygonal motor normal rotation? YES NO Feed clutch OFF Call for service "CA10" Color printed? YES NO Registration clutch OFF F NO C YES NG Exit sensor check leading edge? OK Exit sensor check trailing edge? NG Remaining set number=0? Scanner system control completed Carriage stopped Registration clutch ON Counter ON/OFF Exposure lamp OFF Carriage moves backward Transport motor ON Exit motor ON Exposure lamp ON Carriage moves forward Feed clutch ON Carriage stopped
Paper jam "E010"
Paper jam Main motor OFF Transport motor OFF Developer motor OFF Exit motor OFF "E020"
READY
4 - 14
C Black developer lifting clutch ON Black developer bias (+150) ON Transfer belt cleaner clutch ON Toner recovery auger ON Drum cleaner brush ON Discharge LED ON Cleaning blade bias ON Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON Main charger ON 1st transfer bias ON Transfer belt marker detected? YES NO
D Color developer bias (AC) ON Color developer bias (-) ON Color developer drive clutch ON Transfer belt cleaner clutch OFF Transfer belt cleaner auger motor OFF
E 1st transfer (yellow image)
Color developer drive clutch OFF Color developer bias (AC) OFF Color developer bias (-) OFF
1st transfer (cyan image) Color developer bias (AC) OFF Color developer drive clutch OFF Color developer bias (-) OFF
Revolver motor ON Transfer belt marker detected? YES
NO
Call for service "CEE0" Revolver motor ON
Call for service "CEE0"
Black developer lifting clutch ON Black developer bias (-) ON Black developer position corrected? YES NO Transfer belt marker detected? YES Call for service "CEB0" Laser emission (magenta image) Laser emission (black image) Black developer drive clutch ON Black developer bias (AC) ON 1st transfer (black image) Black developer bias (AC) OFF Black developer lifting clutch ON Black developer drive clutch OFF Black developer bias (-) OFF Revolver motor ON Transfer belt marker detected? YES Transfer belt marker detected? YES Call for service "CEE0" Laser emission (cyan image) Color developer bias (AC) ON Color developer drive clutch ON Color developer bias (-) ON NO Color developer bias (AC) ON Color developer drive clutch ON Color developer bias (-) ON 1st transfer (magenta image) Color developer bias (AC) OFF Color developer drive clutch OFF Color developer bias (-) OFF Revolver motor ON NO
2nd transfer roller drive clutch ON 2nd transfer roller contact clutch ON 2nd transfer bias ON
Call for service "CEE0"
2nd transfer roller position corrected? YES
NO
Call for service "CEC0"
Transfer belt cleaner clutch ON Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON
2nd transfer roller contact clutch OFF 2nd transfer roller drive clutch OFF 2nd transfer bias OFF
Transfer belt cleaner clutch OFF Transfer belt cleaner auger motor OFF
Main charger OFF 1st transfer bias OFF G
NO
Call for service "CEE0" Main motor OFF Developer motor OFF Drum cleaner brush motor OFF Toner recovery auger OFF Drum cleaner brush OFF Discharge LED OFF Cleaning blade bias OFF
Laser emission (yellow image)
Processing system control completed
4 - 15
F Black developer lifting clutch ON Black developer bias (+150) ON Transfer belt cleaner clutch ON Toner recovery auger ON Drum cleaner brush ON Discharge LED ON Cleaning blade bias ON Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON Main charger ON 1st transfer bias ON Black developer lifting clutch ON Black developer bias (-) ON Black developer position corrected? YES NO
Call for service "CEB0"
Laser emission (black image) Black developer drive clutch ON Black developer bias (AC) ON 1st transfer (black image) 2nd transfer roller drive clutch ON 2nd transfer roller contact clutch ON 2nd transfer bias ON 2nd transfer roller position corrected? YES
NO
Call for service "CEC0"
Black developer bias (AC) OFF Black developer lifting clutch ON Black developer drive clutch OFF Black developer bias (-) OFF Main charger OFF 2nd transfer roller contact clutch OFF 2nd transfer bias OFF 2nd transfer roller drive clutch OFF Transfer belt cleaner clutch OFF Transfer belt cleaner auger motor OFF 1st transfer bias OFF
4 - 16
5. CONTROL PANEL
5.1 Control Panel and Display Panel
The control panel consists of button switches and touch-panel switches to operate equipment and select various modes, and LEDs and an LCD to display the state of the equipment or the messages. When the operators attention is required, graphic symbols appear with messages explaining the condition of the equipment in the LCD panel. This equipment has a movable control panel which enables to adjust its angle to the operator. It also has improved its operatability and visibility with the enlarged LCD panel.
[Control Panel Outside View]

Fig. 5-101
5-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTROL PANEL
5.2 Items Shown on the Display Panel
Fig. 5-201
Fig. 5-202
5-2
5.2.1 Display
No. 1 2 Message State of equipment Power is OFF (at Sleep Mode) Note Press [START] button or [FUNCTION] button to clear Press [START] button to clear Auto Start can be set
Saving energy At Energy Saving Mode press START button 3 Wait Warming Up Scanner warming up - Displayed until the equipment becomes ready to start scanning 4 Wait Warming Up Scanner warming up Auto Start - Displayed when Auto Start is set Displayed when performing the controlling 5 WAIT function such as cleaning of 2nd transfer roller or main charger to keep the equipment at the best condition 6 Wait adding toner Supplying toner - Equipment becomes the toner supply state Displayed at image quality control 7 Performing Auto Calibration 8 READY Ready for copying - Waiting for the operation Copying job interrupted 9 READY Press START button to copy 10 READY Scanner warming up (WARMING UP) - Ready to scan the original Printing out the data 11 READY (PRINTING) - Scanning is enabled Supplying toner 12 READY (ADDING TONER) - Scanning is enabled Receiving tray in the equipment is full 13 READY (INNER TRAY FULL) - Scanning is enabled 14 READY (CHECK STAPLER) 15 READY (CHECK STAPLER) 16 READY (CHECK SADDLE STITCH STAPLER) 17 READY (ADD PAPER) Press JOB STATUS button 18 READY (FINISHER FULL) 19 READY (HOLE PUNCH DUST BIN IS FULL) No staples in finisher - Scanning is enabled Stapling jam occurred in finisher No staples in saddle stitcher - Scanning is enabled No paper in drawer - Scanning is enabled
Press [STOP] button to clear the Auto Start.
Recovers when the toner supply has finished Recovers when the image quality control has finished
Press [START] button to resume copying or press [MEMORY CLEAR] button to delete the job
- When the bridge unit is installed - Resumes printing by removing papers from the tray Cleared by supplying the staples
Cleared by supplying staples
Cleared by supplying papers
Finisher is full of paper - Scanning is enabled Punching dust box is full - Scanning is enabled
Resumes printing by removing paper from the finisher Resumes printing by removing punching dust from the dust box
5-3
No. Message 20 READY (SADDLE STITCH TRAY FULL) 21 READY (CHANGE DRAWER TO CORRECT PAPER SIZE) 22 Ready for bypass feeding 23 COPYING 24 25 26 27 28 29 Auto Start Close Large Capacity Feeder Close Large Capacity Feeder Door Place Doc. Feeder in the down position Insert key copy counter Place originals in the document feeder Change direction of original Place last %d originals in doc. feeder entrance tray Cannot copy this original Add paper
State of equipment Saddle stitcher tray is full of paper - Scanning is enabled Incorrect paper size setting
Note
Paper is set on the bypass tray At the copying state Auto Start is set during printing Cleared by pressing [RESET] button or [STOP] button Cleared by installing LCF drawer
30 31
LCF drawer is not installed when feeding from LCF is set LCF cover is open when feeding from LCF is Cleared by closing the cover set RADF is open when original is placed on Cleared by closing RADF RADF Key copy counter not inserted Cleared by inserting key copy counter Displayed when the conditions are set and Cleared by setting the original START button is pressed with no original placed Displayed when the direction of original placed is different from the setting Paper jam occurred during copying (RADF scanning)
32 33 34 35
36
37 38
39
Displayed when the original which is not Not printed out allowed to be copied is placed Displayed when the paper in selected drawer is running out Cannot duplex this Displayed when the paper size which is not size specified for duplex copying is set Cannot use this Displayed when the paper size which is not media type specified for the functions such as stapling or hole punching is set Copy size: A4/LT Displayed when the paper size which is not only specified for Book-type duplex copying or Dual-page is set Copy size: A4/LT and Displayed when the paper size which is not A4-R/LT-R specified for Rotate Sort CHANGE DRAWER Displayed when the selected paper size is TO CORRECT not in the drawer PAPER SIZE Change drawer to Displayed when the selected media type is correct media type not in the drawer
5-4
No. Message 40 Select a paper size for bypass feeding 41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49 50
51 52 53 54 55
State of equipment Displayed when paper size needs to be specified for bypass feeding such as duplex copying Place the blank Displayed when no paper is in the selected sheets in bypass tray feeder at Cover Copying Mode and select the paper size Place the blank Displayed when the direction of cover page sheets in the same is different from that of other pages at Cover direction as the Copying Mode originals Place the same size Displayed when the paper size of cover page blank sheets as the is different from that of other pages at Cover originals Copying Mode Place insertion Displayed when no insertion sheet is in the sheets in the bypass selected drawer at Sheet Insertion Mode tray and select the paper size Select the same size Displayed when the size of insertion sheet insert1 sheets as the (sheet 1) is different from that of other pages originals at Sheet Insertion Mode Select the same size Displayed when the size of insertion sheet insert2 sheets as the (sheet 2) is different from that of other pages originals at Sheet Insertion Mode Set insert1 sheets in Displayed when the direction of insertion the same direction as sheet (sheet 1) is different from that of other the originals pages at Sheet Insertion Mode Set insert2 sheets in Displayed when the direction of insertion the same direction as sheet (sheet 2) is different from that of other the originals pages at Sheet Insertion Mode Set transparency film Displayed when the selected paper size is in A4/LT direction other than A4/LT at OHP mode CHECK PAPER IN Papers in LCF are set incorrectly LARGE CAPACITY FEEDER CANNOT PUNCH Displayed when the selected paper size is THIS SIZE PAPER not specified for hole punching Remove paper from Displayed when the paper sizes are mixed at the finisher Staple Sorting Mode Cannot staple this Displayed when the paper size is not size specified for stapling at Staple Sorting Mode Remove paper from Finisher is full of papers the saddle stitch unit Examine stapler Trouble in the stapler unit in finisher
Note
56 Check staple No stapler in finisher section cartridge 57 Check staple cartridge No stapler in saddle stitch unit in the saddle stitch unit
5-5
No. Message 58 Job interrupted job 1 saved 59 Ready to resume job 1 60 Cannot use AMS mode 61 More than 200% is not available 62 Updated the template setting 63 Enter Department Code 64 Cannot copy BLACK mode Check DEPARTMENT COUNTER 65 Cannot copy FULL COLOR mode Check DEPARTMENT COUNTER 66 Cannot copy TWIN COLOR mode Check DEPARTMENT COUNTER 67 Cannot copy Check DEPARTMENT COUNTER 68 Not enough memory to store original(s) Will you print out stored originals? 69 Not enough memory to store original(s) Will you send stored originals in? 70 Not enough memory to store original(s) Will you save stored originals in? 71 The number of originals exceeds the limits Will you copy stored originals? 72 The number of originals exceeds the limits. Will you send stored originals?
State of equipment Interrupt copying is accepted Interrupt copying is cancelled (finished) Displayed when reproduction ratio is set to be over 200% at AMS Mode on RADF Displayed when reproduction ratio is set manually to be over 200% on RADF Displayed when the template stored is recalled by pressing [TEMPLATE] button Displayed when a button is pressed while the department management setting is available Displayed when the number of printouts exceeds the limit number of department counter Displayed when the number of printouts exceeds the limit number of department counter Displayed when the number of printouts exceeds the limit number of department counter Displayed when the number of printouts exceeds the limit number of department counter Displayed when confirming the user to print out the data as much as stored at memory - full state Displayed when confirming the user to send the FAX data as much as stored at memory - full state Displayed when confirming the user to save the scanning data as much as stored at memory-full state Displayed when confirming the user to print out the data as much as stored at memoryfull state
Note
Set the reproduction ratio 200% or below manually Set the reproduction ratio 200% or below
Displayed only in FAX Function
Displayed only in FAX Function
Displayed when confirming the user to send Displayed only in FAX Function the FAX data as much as stored at memoryfull state
5-6
No. Message 73 The number of originals exceeds the limits. Will you save stored originals? 74 Install new Black toner cartridge 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82
State of equipment Displayed when confirming the user to save the scanning data as much as stored at memory-full state
Note Displayed only in Scanning Function
83
84
85
86 87 88
Displayed when black toner is running out even if other toner still remain. Copying not enabled Black copying is available Install new Yellow No yellow toner in the cartridge toner cartridge Other button functions are available Install new Magenta No magenta toner in the cartridge Black copying is available toner cartridge Other button functions are available No cyan toner in the cartridge Install new Cyan Black copying is available toner cartridge Other button functions are available Install new Y and M No yellow and magenta toner in the Black copying is available toner cartridge cartridges Other button functions are available Install new Y and C No yellow and cyan toner in the cartridges Black copying is available toner cartridge Other button functions are available Install new M and C No magenta and cyan toner in the cartridges Black copying is available toner cartridge Other button functions are available Install new color Three colors of toner are running out in the Black copying is available toner cartridge cartridges Other button functions are available Time for periodic PM cycle Maintenance and inspection are maintenance - Displayed at the time for maintenance performed by qualified service - Copying is available technician. READY Displays when the printing is stopped (CHANGE DRAWER because of media type mismatch TO CORRECT MEDIA TYPE) PRESS [BASIC] Displays the warning that the copy is not and select normal enabled when any drawer but bypass feed is paper size selected at Cover Sheet Mode or Sheet Insertion Mode. Paper jam in the equipment Misfeed in copier Remove the paper in the equipment Press [HELP] - Displayed when paper jam occurred in the according to the messages displayed equipment on the panel. Call for service Displayed when motor, sensor, switch, etc. Turn OFF the power and solve the do not work properly problem, then turn ON the power. Leave it for a while and key in the Please try again after Displayed when the Department Code can a while no be keyed in immediately after power-ON. code again Set standard size Displayed when the paper size which is not Reset the paper size acceptable is set (depends on the setting)
No black toner in the cartridge
5-7
5
When interrupting Display not changed Switches to energy saving mode
During READY status Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed
During warming-up During paper jam
Auto job start reserved
Press [ENERGY SAVER] button
Switches to energy saving mode
Scanning original/ Scanning original and Printing out the copy printing out the copy Display not changed Display not changed When displaying HELP screen
During energy saving mode Energy saving mode is cleared and displays BASIC screen Display not changed
Press [ACCESS] button Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed
Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Copy mode is cleared Auto job start after the copy mode is cancelled set Display not changed Auto job start cancelled Printing out stops, and READY Press START to copy and MEMORY CLEAR are displayed Display not changed Scanning or printing out stops, and READY Press START to copy and MEMORY CLEAR are displayed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays print job list screen Display not changed (LED blinking) Display not changed
Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed
5.3 Relation between the Equipment State and Operators Operation

Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Displays print job list screen Display not changed (LED blinking) Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Displays print job list screen Returns to the status before interrupting Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Displays print job list screen Switches to interrupting mode Displays BASIC screen after the copy mode is set and then cancelled Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Number keyed in changes to 1 after being entered Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays HELP screen Wait Warming Up Auto Start is displayed Display not changed Displays FAX screen Display not changed Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Number keyed in changes to 1 after being entered Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Number keyed in changes to 1 after being entered Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays HELP screen Display not changed Displays COPYING and RADF starts feeding Display not changed Displays COPYING and RADF starts feeding Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Number keyed in changes to 1 after being entered Display not changed Displays FAX screen Display not changed Display not changed Displays SCAN screen Displays e-FILING screen Display not changed Displays SCAN screen Displays e-FILING screen Display not changed Displays FAX screen Displays COPY screen Displays SCAN screen Displays e-FILING screen Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Display not changed Displays TEMPLATE screen Displays USER FUNCTIONS screen Displays HELP screen Displays TEMPLATE screen Displays USER FUNCTIONS screen Switches to the screen previously displayed Displays COPYING and RADF starts feeding Energy saving mode is cleared and displays BASIC screen
Press [JOB STATUS] button Press [INTERRUPT] button Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] button after setting the copy mode
Displays department code entry screen (when department management is available) Displays print job list screen Switches to interrupt mode Copy mode is cleared after the copy mode is set
Press [STOP] button
Display not changed
Press [CLEAR] button after setting the copy mode
5-8
Number of printouts changes to 1 while the setting remains unchanged after the copy mode is set Press [CLEAR] button Number keyed in after keying in numbers changes to 1 after (digital keys) being entered Display not changed Press [MONITOR/ PAUSE] Displays FAX screen Press [FAX] button Press [COPY] button Display not changed
Press [SCAN] button
Press [e-FILING]
Press [EXTENSION] button Press [TEMPLATE] button Press [USER FUNCTIONS] button Press [HELP] button
Displays SCAN screen Displays e-FILING screen Display not changed
Displays TEMPLATE screen Displays USER FUNCTIONS screen Displays HELP screen
Press [START] button with the original set on RADF
Displays COPYING

5.4.1 Dot matrix LCD circuit (1) Structure
(640 x 240)
Fig. 5-401
The DSP-LCD-350 is an STN blue mode transmissive type LCD with 640x240-dot display capacity. It consists of a driver LSI, frame, printed circuit board, and lateral type CCFL backlight. * STN: Super Twisted Nematic * CCFL:Cold Cathod Fluorescent Lamp (2) Block diagram
XSCL UD0 UD1 UD2 UD3 IC1 WF 160 IC2 160 IC3 160 IC4 160
LP LCDEN
IC5
120
LCD PANEL 640 x 240 DOTS

IC6
Power supply
VDD GND V0 VEE
120
Fig. 5-402
5-9
(3) System diagram Signals flowing between the control panel and the system board are indicated in the chart below. When the panel processing CPU detects that the control panel is operated, the operational contents are transmitted to the System board through the serial data. The state of the equipment and the messages from the System board are received by the LCD controller and then displayed on the LCD. The LED and buzzers are switched to ON/OFF with the signals from the System control PC board.
System control PC board Control panel
5
Power ON/OFF Reset signals Inverter for backlight Contrast adjustment circuit
LCD controller
LCD display 640 x 240 dots
Analog input
Touch panel
Serial data
Decoder Panel processing CPU
Hard-key matrix LED scan signal
LED serial output
LED driver
Buzzer ON signal
Buzzer
LED
Fig. 5-403
(4) Data Transmission

1/tF FRAME 240 LOAD 1 2 240 1 2 240 1 2 1/tF
FRAME
LOAD CP D0-D3
Fig. 5-404 e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTROL PANEL 5 - 10 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
CP x(640/4) pulses
5.4.2 LED display circuit (1) Method of LED display ex) Displaying COPY .
5VL
Current
LDON0
"L" 17 D7 R3 IC
"L"
Q3
(COPY) LED
Fig. 5-405
Transistor is turned ON when the LDON 0 signal becomes L level. Also, when IC pin changes to L, the current flows from 5VL via the transistor to the LED (COPY) to turn ON the LED (COPY). Conditions to turn ON the LED (a) The transistor (Q3) connected to the LED anode is ON. (b) The output from the cathode side of the LED is L level. The LED turns ON when the conditions (a) and (b) are met.
5 - 11
5.5 Disassembly and Replacement

Note: When taking off the control panel, check the position of the stopper; if the stopper is at the position b, remove the stopper or move it to the position a.
5
Fig. 5-501
[A] Stopper (1) Slide the stopper and pull it out.

Stopper
Fig. 5-502
[B] Control panel unit (1) Take off the right upper cover and the front upper cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [J] [I]). (2) Disconnect 1 connector. (3) Remove 2 screws and take off 2 harness clamps.
Fig. 5-503
(4) Lower the control panel and remove 6 screws. (5) Take off the control panel unit while sliding it.
Fig. 5-504
5 - 12
(6) Remove 3 screws and take off the cover.
5
Fig. 5-505
(7) Remove 5 screws and take off the hinge bracket.
Fig. 5-506
(8) Disconnect 5 connectors and 1 harness clamp, take off the DSP board.
Fig. 5-507
(9) Remove 4 screws and take off the LCD.
Fig. 5-508
5 - 13
(10) Remove 16 screws and take off the KEY board.
5
Fig. 5-509
5 - 14
6. SCANNER
6.1 Function
In the scanning section of this equipment, the surface of an original is irradiated with a direct light and the reflected light is led through mirrors, a lens and a slit to CCD where optical-to-electrical conversion is performed, converting the optical image data into an electrical (analog) signal. This analog signal is changed to a digital signal, which then undertakes various corrective processes necessary for image formation. After that, arithmetic operation is performed on the digital signal, which is then transmitted to the data writing section. In this equipment, a reduction-type CCD for color processing is used. What this CCD differs from blackand-white CCDs is that its devices are arranged in 4 lines and covered with color filters (Red, Green, and Blue). These lines are composed with 3-line color devices and black-and-white device with no filter.
Reflector Rail for carriage-2 Exposure lamp
Original glass Rail for carriage-1
Lens Drive pulley
Carriage-2 Carriage-1 CCD board

Fig. 6-101
SLG board
6-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 SCANNER
6.2 Construction
The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system: (1) Original glass This is a glass on which an original is placed. The light from the exposure lamp is irradiated to the original through this glass. (2) Carriage-1 Carriage-1 consists of the exposure lamp, lamp inverters, reflector, mirror-1, etc. It is driven by the scan motor and scans an original on the glass.
Reflector Lamp inverter Exposure lamp
Mirror-1
Fig. 6-201
a. Exposure lamp This lamp is the light source to irradiate the original on the glass. (One 16 W xenon lamp) b. Lamp inverter Controls lighting of the xenon lamp. c. Reflector This is a plate to efficiently direct the light from the exposure lamp to the surface of the original on the glass. d. Mirror-1 This mirror directs the light reflected from the original to the mirror-2 described later.
Original glass Original
Exposure lamp
Lamp inverter
Reflector Mirror-1
Fig. 6-202 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SCANNER 6-2 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
(3) Carriage-2 Carriage-2 mainly consists of the mirror-2, mirror-3, etc. and directs the reflected light from the mirror1 through the mirrors-2 and -3 to the lens. This carriage is driven by the same scan motor as that for the carriage-1 at half the scanning speed of the carriage-1 (The scanning distance is also half that of the carriage-1).
Mirror-2
6
Mirror-3
Fig. 6-203
(4) Lens unit The light reflected from the mirror-3 is led to the CCD placed at the focal point of the lens which is fixed in a position. (5) CCD driving PC board Processes such as signal amplification, signal integration and A/D conversion are applied on the electrical signal which was converted by CCD.
Lens unit CCD driving PC board
Fig. 6-204
(6) Automatic original detection sensor The size of an original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the automatic original detection sensors (APS sensor) fixed on the base frame without moving the carriage-1.
6-3

6.3.1 Scan motor
Carriage-1 Wire pulley Scan motor
Motor speed-reduction pulley
Carriage-2 Motor pulley

Fig. 6-301
Idler pulley
(a) Scanning of an original placed on the original glass This motor drives the carriages-1 and -2 through the timing belt and carriage wire. First, the scan motor drives the carriages-1 and -2 to their respective home positions. The home positions are detected when the carriage-1 passes the home position sensor. When the [START] button is pressed, the both carriages start to move and scan the original on the glass. (b) Scanning of an original placed on the RADF The carriage-1 stays at the shading position during shading correction, and at the scanning position during scanning operation. (c) Scanning velocity The scanning velocity at color modes is reduced to a half of it at the Black Mode.
6-4
6.3.2 Scanning drive circuit The scan motor is a 2-phase stepping motor and driven by the driver IC-STK-672-071.
PS-ACC-350
+24V +24V DIG GND SCNVREF Voltage to set value for motor current B +24V B A SCNREF +24V A SCNCLK SCNMD3 SCNMD2 SCNMD1 SCNDIR SCNEN SCNRST M
Scan motor
SCCLK-0 Scanner CPU SMDT2-1 SMDT1-1 SMDT0-1 CWCCW-0 H.OFF-0 MOTRST
Clock input Excitation mode setting (3) Excitation mode setting (2) Excitation mode setting (1) Rotation direction setting Cut off output Reset
+5V +5V RESET ICE GND GND
PWA-F-SLG
Fig. 6-302
PWA-F-SDV-350
6-5
Input/output signals
Motor is rotated by setting number of pulse. Input * Internal circuit of the motor driver works when the first pulse becomes ON and the last pulse becomes OFF. The direction of the motor rotation is determined by setting level of Set the direction of motor rotation SCNDIR Input signal. L ... Clockwise direction (as seen from the output shaft) H .. Counterclockwise direction (as seen from the output shaft) Excitation drive is forcibly turned ON/OFF. SCNEN Input H .. Normal operation (Excited) L ... Excitation drive is forcibly shut off (Not excited) Motor wire current value is set in the range of 0 to 2.0 (A)/phase by Input applying the analog voltage 0 to 5 (V). Set the excitation mode. SCNMD1 to 3 Input Reset for the whole system Internal circuit of the driver is initialized by setting the motor to L Reset RESET Input level. The motor drive circuit is automatically reset when the power is turned ON.
Clock input
SCNCLK
Cut off the drive output Voltage to set value for the motor current Set the exicitation for the motor current
SCNREF
6-6
6.3.3 Initialization at power-ON The carriage moves to its home position and performs the peak detection. Then it moves to the carriage waiting position and waits.
Power-ON
Carriage home position sensor ON
NO
YES
Scan motor rotating (Moves to the forward direction of carriage) Scan motor rotating (Moves to backward direction of carriage)
NO
Carriage home position sensor OFF
Carriage home position sensor ON
Error handling
NO
YES
Carriage home position data set
YES
Deceleration Stop
Deceleration Stop
Moving peak detection position
Peak detection
Completion of initialization
Moving to carriage waiting position
Scanning command
Fig. 6-303
6-7
6.4 Control of Exposure Lamp

6.4.1 General description Control circuit for the exposure lamp consists of the following two blocks: (1) Lighting device for the xenon lamp (Inverter) Turns ON/OFF the exposure lamp. (2) CCD circuit This circuit converts the reflected light amount from the original surface and the shading correction plate to electrical signals. The exposure amount is controlled in two ways: (a) White reference formation - reads the reflected light amount from the white shading correction
plate (b) Black reference formation - reads the light amount at the regulation position with the exposure lamp lights OFF
Original Shading correction plate
Exposure lamp (Xenon lamp)
Lighting device for xenon lamp (Inverter) PWA-CCD CCD
PWA-CCD A/D
PWA-SLG Scanner CPU
Fig. 6-401
6-8
6.4.2 Exposure lamp External electrode type xenon fluorescent lamp is used as an exposure lamp in this equipment. (1) Structure Fluorescer is applied on the inside surface of the lamp pipe (except a part to be an opening) which is filled with the xenon gas. A pair of the external electrodes covered by the film with the adhesive agent is attached over the pipe.
PET film Aluminum tape electrode Glass valve
Fluorescer Adhesive agent, PET, film
Xenon gas
Fig. 6-402
(2) Behavior inside the lamp The electron inside the pipe is led to the electric field by applying voltage to the pair of the external electrodes, and discharge is started. Electrons then flow and clash with the xenon atom inside the pipe to excite them, and generate the ultraviolet ray. This ultraviolet ray converts the fluorescer into the visible light.
(6)
(1)
(5) (7) (2) (4) (3) (1)

(1) Electrode (2) Electron (3) Xenon atom (4) Ultraviolet ray (5) Fluorescer (6) Visible light (irradiated from the opening to outside the pipe) (7) Opening (8) Harness
Fig. 6-403
(8)
6-9
6.4.3 Control circuit for the exposure lamp

SLG board
+5VSW +24V
LMPEN B
LAMP LAMP
LP-EXPO-350
LMPON IC16 5VSWON
Xenon lamp
RN2401 RN1401
WDTOUT
INV-EXPO-350
Scanner CPU
Fig. 6-404
Working conditions LAMP ON 5VSW ON WDTOUT LMPEN L L H L H L OFF H Exposure lamp ON signal 5V SW ON signal Watchdog timer signal Lamp turns ON at L Controls 5VSW by CPU. Normally L L is output when CPU is out of control
Exposure lamp enable signal Normally L
Xenon lamp ON
6 - 10
6.5 General Description of CCD Control

6.5.1 Opto-electronic conversion A CCD (Charge-Coupled Device) is used to produce electrical signal corresponding to the reflected light amount from the original. CCD is a one-chip opto-electronic conversion device, comprised of several thousand light-receiving elements arranged in a line, each one of them is a few micron square. This equipment includes a CCD which has 7,450 light-receiving elements. Each element of the light-receiving section consists of semiconductive layers P and N. When the light irradiates the element, light energy produces a (-) charge in the layer P; the amount of the charge produced is proportional to the energy and irradiating time. The charges produced in the light-receiving section are then sent to the transfer section where they are shifted by transfer clock from left to right as shown in the figure below, and are finally output from the CCD. At this time, to increase the transfer speed of the CCD, image signals in the even-number and odd-number elements are separated and output in parallel via two channels.
Transfer clock Transfer section
1 2 3 4 7447 7448 7449 7450
Light energy layer N layer P Details of light receiving element
Light receiving section Transfer section Shift register Transfer clock

Fig. 6-501
6.5.2 Shading correction Signal voltages read by the CCD have the following characteristics: (1) Light source has a variation in its light distribution. (2) Since the light beam reflected from the original is converged using a lens, the light path is the shortest at the center of the CCD and the longest at ends. This causes difference in the amount of light reaching the CCD (i.e. the light amount is maximum at the CCD center, gradually decreases toward ends). (3) Each of the 7,450 elements varies in opto-electronic conversion efficiency. These variation need to be corrected and this correction is referred to as shading correction. Shading correction is performed by applying normalization process using the following formula on the black and white data obtained in advance to correct lighting variance and element variation of the image data. I=kx k S K W (S K) (W K) : : : : Coefficient Image data before correction Black data (stored in black memory) White data (stored in white memory)
6 - 11
6.6 Automatic Original Size Detection Circuit

This circuit detects the size of original (standard sizes only) using the reflection type photosensors arranged on the base frame of the scanner unit. 6.6.1 Principle of original size detection Reflection type photosensors are placed on the base frame of the scanner unit as shown in the Fig. 6601. Each sensor consists of an infrared Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the light emitting side, and a phototransistor on the light receiving side. When there is an original on the original glass, light beams from the LEDs are reflected by the original
and led to the phototransistors. This means that the presence of the original is detected by the presence of reflection (when scanning black image).
[A4 Series] Original glass Original Original [LT Series] Original glass
APS-R APS-3 APS-1 APS-2 APS-C

Fig. 6-601
APS-R APS-3 APS-2 APS-C
6.6.2 Process of detection of original size (1) When the equipment is in the original size detection mode, carriage-1 is set at its home position. (2) When the platen cover is opened, the sensors receive the light reflected from the original and if one of the matrix conditions shown in (4) for original sizes are met, the size of the original is instantly detected. (3) The output signal from each sensor is input to CPU on the scanning section control PC board to determine the size of the original.
[A4 Series]
APS-R VDD VDD
[LT Series]
APS-R
APS-C APS-C
Reflection type photosensor
APS-3
CPU
Reflection type photosensor

APS-3
CPU
APS-2
APS-1
APS-2
GND
PWA-SLG
GND
PWA-SLG
Fig. 6-602 Original size detection circuit e-STUDIO3511/4511 SCANNER 6 - 12 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
[A4 Series]
A5
B5
A4
APS-R
APS-C
A5R
B5R
APS-3
A4R B4
APS-2
APS-1
A3
[LT Series]
ST
LT
APS-R
APS-C
STR
APS-3
LTR
LG
APS-2
LD
Fig. 6-603 Sensor detection points
6 - 13
(4) Original size is determined by the combination of the signals output from each detection point. Combination charts for size determination of A4 series and LT series are as follows.
[A4 Series] Size judgement A3 A4 B4 B5 A4-R A5 B5-R A5-R [LT Series] Size judgement LD LT LG LT-R ST ST-R Code 1 0 Output signal H L APS-C 0 0 0 0 1 0 APS-R 0 1 0 1 1 1 Original Not available Available APS-2 0 0 1 1 1 1 APS-3 0 0 0 0 0 1 APS-C 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 APS-R 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 APS-1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 APS-2 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 APS-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
* When the platen sensor is OFF, The followings are determined by output signals from the APS sensors. Size (The combination of the signals satisfy any in the above chart) : Size is displayed on the control panel and a specific paper or reproduction ratio is selected. Size retention (The combination of the signals do not satisfy the above chart) : The latest original size recognized (or no original state) until new paper size is recognized. No original (Output from all the sensors are H.) : Reproduction ratio and paper are not selected. Size change is always observed and detected. The carriage-1 stays at the standby position even if the reproduction ratio changes corresponding to the change of the original size. * When the platen sensor is ON, The latest original size (or no original state) recognized right before the platen sensor is turned ON is retained regardless of the status the APS sensor output signals.
6 - 14
About reflection type photosensor The reflection type photosensor is comprised of an infrared light emitting diode and a phototransistor. It uses pulse modulation to detect an original.
Original
8 sec. 130 sec. LED

Fig. 6-604
Phototransistor
The light emitting diode is driven by a pulse having a 130 sec. cycle and an 8 sec. ON time. When the phototransistor receives the same signal as this pulse, it is determined that there is an original. The pulse modulation is performed inside the reflection type phototransistor.
6 - 15

[A] Original glass (1) Take off the right upper cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [J]). (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the fixing bracket.
Fixing bracket
6
(3) Remove the original glass.
Fig. 6-701
Original glass
Fig. 6-702
[B] Lens cover (1) Remove the original glass ( take off the lens cover. Chapter 6.7 [A]).
Connector
(2) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 5 screws and
Lens cover
Fig. 6-703
[C] SLG board cooling fan (1) Take off the lens cover ( Chapter 6.7 [B]).
(2) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 2 screws and take off the SLG board cooling fan.
Fig. 6-704 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SCANNER 6 - 16 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
[D] Automatic original detection sensor (APS sensor) (D-1) A4 series (1) Remove the original glass ( Chapter 6.7 [A]).
APS sensor
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw for each APS sensor. Take off 5 APS sensors.
Fig. 6-705-1
(D-2) LT series (1) Remove the original glass ( Chapter 6.7 [A]).
APS sensor
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw for each APS sensor. Take off 4 APS sensors.
Fig. 6-705-2
[E] Exposure lamp (1) Remove the original glass and take off the front upper cover ( Chapters 6.7 [A], 2.5.1 [I]). (2) Move the carriage-1 to the center position where the side of the frame is cut out. (3) Disconnect the connector of the exposure lamp. Note: When disconnecting the connector, pay attention not to give load to the carriage frame. (4) Remove 1 screw. (5) Lift up the front side of the exposure lamp and take off by sliding it.
Fig. 6-706
Connector
Exposure lamp
Fig. 6-707
6 - 17
[F] Lens unit (1) Remove the lens cover ( Chapter 6.7 [B]).
Ground wire
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 5 screws. Then remove 2 screws and 2 ground wires and take off the lens unit. Notes: 1. When installing the lens unit, fix it while pushing it to the direction of the white arrow.
Lens unit
Fig. 6-708
2. For adjustment, refer to 3.9.2 Lens Unit in the Service Handbook. 3. Do not touch 4 screws shown with the arrows when replacing the lens unit.
Fig. 6-709
4. Handle the unit with care. Do not touch the adjusted area and lens. (Hold the unit as the right figure.)
[Rear side] Lens
Adjusted area
Fig. 6-710
[Front side]
[G] Scan motor (1) Take off the upper rear cover ( [Q]). (2) Take off the rear cover ( (3) Disconnect 1 connector. Chapter 2.5.1 [P]). Chapter 2.5.1
Connector
Scan motor
(4) Remove 3 screws and take off the scan motor with the whole bracket. Note: When installing the scan motor, fix it with a belt tension jig (spring).
Scan motor
Fig. 6-712
[H] Carriages-1 and -2 (1) Remove the original glass and take off the upper rear cover ( Chapters 6.7 [A], 2.5.1 [Q]). (2) Move the carriage and position the holes of the carriage to the holes of the frame. (3) Remove 2 screws and take off the brackets fixing the carriage-1 to the wire.
Carriage-1
Fig. 6-713
(4) Remove the square seal fixing the lamp cable to the base. Release the harness from the harness clamp. Disconnect the connector of the lamp cable from the SLG board.
Fig. 6-714
(5) Take off the carriage-1 while inclining it. Note: When replacing the mirror-1, replace the carriage-1 together with mirror-1. Mirror-1 should not be removed.
Carriage-1
Fig. 6-715 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 6 - 19 e-STUDIO3511/4511 SCANNER
Notes: 1. When installing carriage-1, fix the bracket temporarily at the position (A). Then move it to the direction (B), push it to the end and fix securely. 2. Refer to the Service Handbook for more details.
(B)
(A)
(A)
6
(6) Remove 2 screws and take off the inverter board.
Mirror-1
Fig. 6-716
Inverter board
Fig. 6-717
(7) Attach the wire holder jigs to the pulleys to prevent the wires from loosening. Note: Refer to 3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section in the Service Handbook for the direction of the wire holder jigs.
Fig. 6-718
(8) Detach the tension springs of the front and rear sides. (9) Remove the carriage wires.
Carriage wire
Tension spring
(10) Take off the carriage-2 while its corner is pushed into the window of the rail and inclining the carriage. Note: When replacing the mirrors-2 and -3, replace the carriage-2 together with mirrors-2 and -3. Mirrors-2 and -3 should not be removed.
Carriage-2
Fig. 6-720
Notes: 1. When installing carriage-2, fix the bracket temporarily at the position (A). Then move it to the direction (B), push it to the end and fix securely. 2. Refer to the Service Handbook for more details.
(B)
(A)
(A)
Fig. 6-721
[I] Platen sensor (1) Take off the upper rear cover ( [Q]). (2) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latches and take off the platen sensor. [J] Carriage home position sensor (1) Take off the upper rear cover ( [Q]). (2) Disconnect 1 connector. Release the latches and take off the carriage home position sensor. Chapter 2.5.1 Chapter 2.5.1
Carriage home position sensor
Platen sensor
Fig. 6-722
6 - 21
[K] Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) (1) Take off the lens cover ( take off the SLG board. Chapter 6.7 [B]).
(2) Disconnect 7 connectors, remove 6 screws and
SLG board
Fig. 6-723
6 - 22
7. IMAGE PROCESSING
The following diagram shows the process of this equipment from scanning of original to writing data on the photoconductive drum surface.
Scanning section
Writing section
Original
Image processing / System board [SYS]
Original glass
Lens
Scanning section [CCD]
Scanning control section [SLG]
Image processing/ writing control section [LGC]
Laser control section [LDR]
Semiconductive laser element

Fig. 7-101
The followings are the boards used for image processing.

Board Function ACS, color conversion, high quality image processing, image memory PPC SYS board (PWA-F-SYS-350) editing, rectangular area signal generation, editing processing, gamma correction, gradation processing, compression/expansion and black component generation PRT/ Scanner high quality image processing, printer high quality image SCN LGC board (PWA-F-LGC-350) processing, black over print, pure black/pure gray, chroma adjustment and brightness adjustment Smoothing processing, image area control and laser related control
7-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 IMAGE PROCESSING
Image of an original placed on the original glass is scanned by the optical system. The CCD (Charge Coupled Device) reads the optical image signals and converts them into the electrical signals. The electrical signals are amplified and undergo analog-to-digital conversion, then are changed into digital signals. Shading correction (correction of variance in CCD elements and the light source) is performed and the digital signal is output as an image signal from the scanning section.
CCD
Signal amplification
A/D conversion
Shading correction
(Next process)
Fig. 7-102
The image processing section inputs the image signal from the scanning section and applies various image processing on the signal, then transmits the output result to the writing section. Images are processed by the SYS board (PWA-F-SYS-350) and LGC board (PWA-F-LGC-350) in this equipment. Also, the image signals read with the Scanning Function and the printer image signals are processed in the SYS board.
7-2
7.2 Configuration
The Fig. 7-201 shows the image processing section of this equipment.
CCD board (PWA-F-CCD-350) CCD
A/D conversion SLG board (PWA-F-SLG-350) ASIC Shading correction 3-line correction SYS board (PWA-F-SYS-350) ASIC ACS Color conversion Black component generation High quality image processing Image memory editing Editing processing Rectangular are signal generation Editing processing Gamma correction Gradation processing Compression/expansion Scanner high quality image processing Printer high quality image processing Scanner/Printer Controller Black over print Pure black/Pure gray Chrome adjustment Brightness adjustment Image processing section
External port
ASIC Page memory control
LGC board (PWA-F-LGC-350) ASIC Laser related control Smoothing processing LDR board (PWA-F-LDR-350) ASIC Laser drive : Image data flow
Fig. 7-201
7-3
7.3 SYS Board (PWA-F-SYS-350)

7.3.1 Features (1) The image processing section on the SYS board is controlled by the CPU on the SYS board. (2) The image processing section on the SYS board realizes the following when functioning the copier: ACS Color conversion (CMY image data processing) Black component generation High quality image processing Image memory editing Rectangular area signal generation Editing processing Gamma correction Gradation processing Compression/expansion (3) The image processing section on the SYS board realizes the following when functioning the scanner and printer: Scanner high quality image processing Printer high quality image processing Black over print (Post Script) Pure black / Pure gray (Post Script) Chroma adjustment (PCL5C) Brightness adjustment (PCL5C)
7-4
7.3.2 Functions of image processing circuit The image processing section on the SYS board realizes the followings: (1) ACS (Auto Color Selection) This function determines whether the original to be scanned is colored or monochrome, based on the analysis of the R, G and B signals output from the CCD. (2) Color conversion (CMY image data processing) When functioning the copier, the RGB image data is converted to CMY image data. (When functioning the scanner, it is converted to RGB image data.) The image data taken in by the scanner represents the intensities of reflection from the three primary colors of light (Red, Green and Blue). These RGB values are then color-converted to the respective amounts of toners corresponding to the three colors (Yellow, Magenta and Cyan) for printing (=CMY image data processing). (3) Black component generation K (Black) signal is generated from the CMY image data. Based on this K signal, the CMY image data is corrected to suppress hue on reproducing grays or to make the black look more real. (4) High quality image processing (a) Background processing function By using the background adjustment function while manually adjusting the image density, undesirable background of the original can be removed if any, and some necessary but disappeared background can be recovered. By using this function, it is possible to cut the background density down when copying originals which have a certain level of background density, such as newspapers. <Example>
Larger
Dynamic range width Extended dynamic range width
After background processing

Background Text
Lower Density Higher
No. of pixels
Smaller
Smaller
No. of pixels
Lower
Larger
Density
Higher
Histogram
Fig. 7-301
(b) Image discrimination By determining the magnitude of density variation in a block (n x n dot), the target pixels are judged whether they are text or photograph. If they are determined to be text, they are further judged whether they are black or color text, using the differences in the levels of CMY signals.
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 7-5 e-STUDIO3511/4511 IMAGE PROCESSING
(c) Filtering This function is enabled by low-pass filter processing and high-pass filter processing. Low-pass filter processing This processing removes image/electrical noise and decreases moire by performing averaging operation between the image signals of the targeted pixel and those of the neighboring pixels to enhance the reproducibility of original. <Example> Density of the targeted pixel position is X. Density of pixel positions at front and back of the targeted pixel are a and b respectively. X is converted to X through the low pass filtering. When the matrix is (3 x 1):
a+b+x 3
x =
The above averaging operation is performed for all the pixels to accomplish the high reproducibility of original. (The following is the case that the low pass filtering is applied on the primary scanning pixel.)
Density After low-pass filter
Density
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Primary scanning pixel positions
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Primary scanning pixel positions
Fig. 7-302
High-pass filter processing Character outline blurs when the original, such as text, with big difference in density among the pixels is optically scanned and output from the CCD. Characteristic of the lens and other factors cause this phenomenon. In this equipment, processing such as edge enhancement is applied between the targeted pixel and the neighboring pixels to eliminate this phenomenon and realize high reproducibility of original.
Solid black area Original Low contrast area
Image signal
After correction
Fig. 7-303 e-STUDIO3511/4511 IMAGE PROCESSING 7-6 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
(5) Image memory editing This function performs editing such as enlargement/reduction, mirror imaging, etc., by using a line memory. Pixel data for one line in the primary scanning direction is stored in the line memory and the memory is renewed at each line. (a) Enlargement/Reduction Enlargment/Reduction is accomplished by using the line memory control function in the process of the image processing operation. <Example> Enlargement
100% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7
200% 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5
<Example> Reduction
100% 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
50%
Fig. 7-304
(b) Mirror imaging This is accomplished by reading and outputting data from its end. (6) Rectangular area signal generation When a rectangular coordinate position is selected, the corresponding rectangular area signals are generated. Using these signals, various edit processing related to the area specification can be performed. (7) Editing processing This function performs trimming and masking. (a) Trimming Using rectangular area signals, the image signals inside the rectangular area are left and the other image signals are eliminated. (b) Masking Using rectangular area signals, the image data inside the rectangular area are erased.
7-7
(8) Gamma correction This function corrects the input/output characteristics of the scanner/printer and adjusts the image signals so that the input/output characteristics would match with the copy mode. (9) Gradation processing In case of color copying, this function switches the type of gradation processing depending on the copy mode: A type which selects the printer characteristics giving the priority to resolution such as for text data, and another which selects the printer characteristics giving the priority to reproducibility of gradation such as for photographic images. In case of black copying, this function selects the gradation processing which reproduces the halftone image such as photograph more precisely. Also the gradation processing which makes text data clearer is selected in black copying mode. (10) Compression/expansion To lessen the data amount of the color image signals, this function effects the compression/expansion on the data. (11) Scanner high quality image processing This function corrects the image signals scanned by the scanner and reproduces them in a higher image quality. (12) Printer high quality image processing This function reproduces the image signals output from the printer controller in a higher image quality. (13) Black over print (Post Script) When black data of text or graphic object are formed on a certain background with no written data underneath them, the color of the paper comes out around the black data when out-of-color registration is occurring. To prevent this phenomenon, this process enables to keep the background color around the black data formed as a part of the text or the graphic object on the printer data.
Ideal image Black data Out of color registration Black data Black data Black over print
Paper Background
Paper Background
Fig. 7-305
Background
Paper
7-8
(14) Pure black/Pure gray (Post Script) This function is to printout the text and graphics formed as black data with black toner only on the printer data, not using 4 color toner. The gray text/graphics are also printed out with black toner only. (15) Chroma adjustment (PCL5C) This function adjusts chromaticness of the printer data. (16) Brightness adjustment (PCL5C) This function adjusts brightness of the printer data.
7-9
7.4 LGC Board (PWA-F-LGC-350)

7.4.1 Features (1) The image processing ASIC on the LGC board is controlled by CPU mounted on the LGC board. (2) The image processing functions of the LGC board realizes the followings: Smoothing processing Image area control Laser related control 7.4.2 Functions of image processing circuit
An image processing ASIC mounted on the LGC board enables the following functions: (1) Smoothing processing This function removes jaggy and smoothes character outline of images and output them. (2) Image area control This function sets the effective image area in horizontal and vertical directions to be output. (3) Laser related control This function performs the APC (Auto Power Control).
7.5 Laser Driving PC Board (LDR Board)

Image signals processed on the LGC board are processed by ASIC for writing control and LDR board. The signal is then laser controlled and written on the drum. (1) Setting of effective image area ......................... Top, bottom, left and right margins (2) Horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNC) ..... Reference clock signal in the printer section clock generation section synchronized with HSYNC and its signal.
(3) Laser drive section ........................................... ON/OFF control of the semiconductive laser and APC (Auto Power Control).
7 - 10
8. LASER OPTICAL UNIT

The laser optical unit radiates the laser beam onto the photoconductive drum responding to the digital image signals transmitted from the scanner, printer controller, etc. to create the latent image. Image signal is converted into the light emission signal of the laser diode on the laser driving PC board, then radiated on the drum through the optical elements such as cylinder lenses, polygonal mirror and f lens. The unit must not be disassembled in the field as they are very sensitive to dust and finely adjusted at the factory.
[Laser Optical Unit Overview] Fig. 8-101
8-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 LASER OPTICAL UNIT
Slit glass (for outgoing laser beam) Cylinder lens Mirror
SNS board
LDR board f lens 2 Aperture f lens 1 Polygonal motor
Finite focus lens
[Writing Section Overview] Fig. 8-102
8-2
8.2 Structure
(1) Laser emission Unit This unit consists of the laser diode, finite focus lens, aperture and cylinder lens. a. Laser diode This laser diode features low droop, small laser variation and low threshold current. Aperture determines the shape of the laser beam at laser emission position of the primary scanning and secondary scanning. Laser diode radiates the laser beams responding to the laser emission control (ON/OFF) signals from the laser driving PC board. Laser beams which passed through the finite focus lens are focused on the drum surface. b. CAUTION The beam of the semiconductor laser is very weak (about 10 mW), but focused parallel rays creates great energy which is hazardous. Some materials of the components of the laser optical unit are metal. Since the unit is in a sealed container, there is no danger of laser leakage during normal operation. Note: Laser beam is not visible. Pay the closest attention when handling the laser unit components or performing operations such as adjustment of the laser beam, and this kind of operations are very dangerous and must be performed only by specially trained staff. The warning label shown below is attached on the left side of the upper inner cover.
Fig. 8-201
[CAUTION] Do not approach tools near the path of the laser beam. Take off your watches, rings, bracelets, etc. before handling the unit.
8-3
(2) Polygonal motor unit This unit consists of the polygonal motor, polygonal mirror and polygonal mirror cover. a. Polygonal motor This motor rotates the polygonal mirror in high speed. The DC motor controls the rotation speed of the mirror motor as follows: During ready : 10,000.00 rpm : 37,322.12 rpm (FAX 15.4x16.0dot/mm) : 35,922.54 rpm During printing : 36,734.37 rpm (600dpi)
(A) Drum
Laser light
(B )
8
b. Polygonal mirror
(FAX 16.0x15.4dot/mm)
Drum
One laser beam emitted from the laser diode is reflected by this mirror. As the polygonal mirror is rotated by the polygonal motor, the reflected laser light moves in sync with the rotation. The direction of the movement is the primary scanning direction of the image. One scan is performed on one plane of the polygonal mirror. As the polygonal mirror has eight planes, eight scans are performed in one rotation of the polygonal mirror. c. Polygonal mirror cover Polygonal mirror cover reduces the windage loss and noise, prevents adhesion of foreign matters onto the mirror surface and releases heat.
Laser light
Fig. 8-202
Laser light
(C)
Drum
One scan is completed by completion of steps (A) to (C). One scan is performed on one plane of the polygonalmirror. Eight scans can be made with one rotation of the polygonal mirror.
8-4
(3) f lenses 1 and 2 These two lenses perform the following adjustment on the laser beams reflected by the polygonal mirror. a. Uniform-velocity scanning Since the polygonal mirror is rotating at a uniform velocity, the laser beam reflected from the mirror scans over the drum surface at a uniform angular velocity; namely, the pitch between the dots on the drum is wider at both ends than at the center of the scanning range. The f lenses help to correct this difference, making all the dot-to-dot pitches equal on the drum surface.
Drum Narrower Wider
f Lens 1
f Lens 2 Same intervals
Fig. 8-203
b. Face tilt correction The reflecting face of the polygonal mirror is tilted slightly to one side against the perfect vertical. Horizontal deviation of the laser light which is caused by the tilt is corrected. c. Sectional shape of laser beam The shape of the laser beam spotted on the drum is adjusted.
Mirror plane is tilted.
Deviation
Fig. 8-204
(4) H-Sync signal detection PC board (SNS board) The laser light which is started to be scanned from one of the reflected plane of the polygonal mirror is reflected by the H-Sync detection mirror and enters the PIN diode on the H-Sync signal detection PC board. The primary scanning synchronizing signal is generated based on this reflection.
8-5
(5) Laser driving PC board (LDR board) This control board has the following functions: a. b. APC control function (adjusts disparity of the laser intensity caused by temperature) Laser ON/OFF function
(6) Slit glass Slit glass is located where the laser beams are output from the laser optical unit, and it protects the unit from dust.
8-6
8.3 Laser Diode

The laser used in this equipment is a A1GaAs type semiconductive laser. It is generated in the singlehorizontal mode, and its wavelength is approx. 785 nm. This semiconductive laser outputs 10mW with standard DC power supply. Laser intensity is controlled by using the output from the PIN diode for monitoring light output in the semiconductive laser. The relation between the current and optical output of the semiconductive laser is as shown at right.
Optical Output (mW)
Light emission is started when the forward current reaches or becomes larger than the threshold current and outputs the monitor current which is proportionate to the optical output. The threshold current and monitor current differs depending on each semiconductive laser. So optical output has to be adjusted to maintain a constant value. Since the optical output of the semiconductive laser is decreased as the temperature of the laser rises, APC control needs to be performed to maintain a constant optical output.
High temp. Regulation
Low temp.
Forward current Monitor current Current (mA)
Threshold current
Fig. 8-301
Power source
Semiconductive laser Laser power comparison circuit Laser driver circuit
Constant optical output
Monitor efficiency regulation circuit
Monitor output
Fig. 8-302
Fig. 8-302 shows a block diagram of the semiconductive laser control circuit. The semiconductive laser performs monitor efficiency regulation (a process to control monitor current for the light amount), and laser itself is adjusted to initial output emission of approx. 3.0 mW (approx. 408 W on the drum surface). The regulated voltage of the monitor output is feedback to the laser power comparison circuit. This monitor output voltage is compared with the laser power voltage set for the control circuit for every scanning. Laser driver circuit increases the forward current if the laser power is insufficient, and decreases the current when the power is excessive to maintain a constant optical output.
8-7
8.4 Laser Unit Cooling Fan

The laser unit cooling fan is a propeller fan (80 x 80 mm). It cools down the polygonal motor and the Laser driving PC board.
8.5 Polygonal Motor

(1) Drive circuit of the polygonal motor
PD4 DCCLK4
POMON
Buffer (IC7407)
POMCK
Gate array
LCA301-1
PI1 POMPL
PWA-F-LGC
Fig. 8-501
M/DC-POL
(2) Control signal The polygonal motor is a DC motor which is PLL-controlled by clock signal. The signals from LGC board controls the polygonal motor. Signal POMON POMCK POMPL Level L ON Normal rotation Level H OFF Abnormal rotation Remarks Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal Polygonal motor reference clock signal Polygonal motor PLL signal
8-8

[A] Laser optical unit (1) Take off the rear cover ( [A]). (3) Disconnect 2 connectors and release the harness from the harness clamp.
Connector
Fig. 8-601
Chapter 2.5.1 [P]). Chapter 2.5.2
(2) Take off the LGC board cover (
Harness clamp
(4) Take off the left cover (
Chapter 2.5.1 [F]).
(5) Remove 2 screw and take off the toner cover.
Toner cover
Fig. 8-602
(6) Release the harness, loosen 2 screws and take off the anti-vibration bracket.
Anti-vibration bracket
Fig. 8-603
(7) Pull out 2 harnesses and remove 1 screw. (8) Pull out the laser optical unit while lifting it up and take it off.
Harness Laser optical unit

Fig. 8-604
8-9
Notes: 1. Do not leave fingerprints or stain on the slit glass. 2. Laser optical unit is a precise apparatus. Handle the unit with extra care not to shock or vibrate it. 3. Do not disassemble the unit in the field since it is very sensitive to the dust and stain. 4. When installing the laser optical unit (installing the harnesses), take off the left rear cover first so that the harnesses will be easily seen and installed (View from (A)) ( [B] Laser unit cooling fan (1) Open the front cover. Chapter 2.5.1 [G]).
(A)
Fig. 8-605
(2) Remove the receiving tray ( [B]).
Chapter 2.5.1
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the inner cover.
Inner cover
Fig. 8-606
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws. Take off the laser unit cooling fan.
Laser unit cooling fan
Fig. 8-607
8 - 10
9. DRIVE SYSTEM
This chapter explains about each drive system of the main motor, transport motor and developer motor. The function of each drive unit is as follows: Main motor Photoconductive drum Transfer belt Transport motor Fuser unit Bridge unit (option)
2nd transfer roller Registration roller Transport roller Feed roller Bypass feed roller Revolver motor Developer motor ADU motor Exit motor Toner motor Drum cleaner brush motor Transfer belt cleaner auger motor Revolver unit Black developer unit Color developer unit ADU Exit roller Black toner cartridge Drum cleaner brush Transfer belt cleaner auger
9-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 DRIVE SYSTEM
9.2 Main Motor

9.2.1 Construction The main motor drive unit consists of two parts: One part transmits the drive from the main motor to photoconductive drum and the transfer belt, and another part transmits the drive from the drum cleaner brush motor to the drum cleaner brush. The drive to the photoconductive drum is transmitted by the gear, timing belt and the coupling and the drive to the transfer belt is transmitted by the gear and timing belt. The main motor is a brushless DC motor.
Main motor gear
(G10) (G100/P20) (G80/P36)
(P53/G15)
9
(G16) (G27/G20)
(G45/G21) (P75/P33) (P27/G33) (G40/G23)
(G31) (G27/P33) (G19)
(P100)
Drum cleaner brush motor
Fig. 9-201
9-2
9.2.2 Drive circuit of main motor
PK0 PK1
62385
MAMON MAMBK
7407 PK2 Gate array PK3 DCCLK1 MAMGA MAMCK MAMCW
9
MAMPL
PWA-F-LGC
Fig. 9-202
Main Motor
9.2.3 Signal level of motor circuit Signal MAMON MAMBK MAMCW MAMGA MAMCK MAMPL Level L ON Braking CW Low speed Normal Level H OFF Normal CCW High speed Out of control Remarks Main motor ON signal Main motor brake signal Main motor rotational direction signal Main motor speed switching signal Main motor reference clock signal Main motor PLL signal
* CCW: forward rotation
CW: backward rotation
(1) The control signal from LGC controls the operations of the main motor, such as switching of ON/OFF, a rotational direction, a rotational speed, etc. The rotational speed is decided by clock frequency output at the main motor. The speed is lowered to the range from 1/2 to 1/4 at the Thick Paper/OHP Film Mode. This switching is performed between the completion of the 1st transfer and that of the 2nd transfer.
9-3
9.3 Transport Motor

9.3.1 Construction The transport motor drive unit transmits the drive from the transport motor to the fuser unit, 2nd transfer roller, registration roller, transport roller, feed roller, bypass feed roller and bridge unit (option) through the gears and clutches.
(G30)
(G35/G21)
(G64/G30)
(G24) (G25/G14) (G23) (G28/G17)
Transport motor gear (G30) (G30) (G22) (G10)
(G22)
Registration clutch (G28) (G28) (G25/34) (G28) (G32/G35) (G25) Upper transport clutch (High speed) (G28) (G31/G38) Upper transport clutch (Low speed) (G28)
Fig. 9-301
(G27)
9-4
9.3.2 Drive circuit of transport motor The transport motor is a DC brushless motor. At color printing modes with thick paper or OHP film, the transport speed is lowered to 1/2, 1/3 or 1/4 depending on its mode for most effective fusing. The following is the block diagram of the transport motor.
PJ5 PJ6 PJ7
7407 62385
FDMCW FDMON FDMGA
Gate array
7407 DCCLK2
FDMCK
PI2
FDMPL
PWA-F-LGC
Fig. 9-302
Feed Motor
Signal level of motor circuit Signal FDMCW FDMON FDMGA FDMCK FDMPL Level H CCW OFF High speed Out of control Level L CW ON Low speed Normal Remarks Transport motor rotational direction signal Transport motor ON signal Transport motor speed switching signal Transport motor reference clock signal Transport motor PLL signal
* FDMCW (rotational direction signal): The motor does not rotate backward (CCW) in actual movement.
9-5
9.4 Developer Motor

9.4.1 Construction The developer motor is a motor drives the following movements: (A) Lifting movement by rotating the lifting cam in the black developer unit (B) Rotational movement of magnet roller in the black developer unit (C) Rotational movement of toner supply auger in the color developer unit (D) Rotational movement of magnet roller in the color developer unit Each movement is performed by drive transmission from the developer motor through the gears and clutches. The revolver unit contains three color developer units. The developer motor drives the color developer unit only at the developing position; it means each developer unit does not have its own drive. When the revolver rotates, the clutch turns OFF so that the drive of the developer motor will not be transmitted and a damage to the gear will be prevented.
9
(C)Color developer toner supply clutch (G28) (G17)
(G28)
(D)Color developer drive clutch (G28) (G29) (G27) (G19) (G46/G24) (G43) (G/33/G16) (G17) (B)Black developer drive clutch (G28) (A)Black developer lifting clutch (G28) (G48) Developer motor gear (G10) (G46/G24) (G15)
Fig. 9-401
9-6
9.4.2 Drive circuit of developer motor
62385
DVMON DVMCW
7407
Gate array
DVMCK
DVMPL
PWA-F-LGC
Fig. 9-402
Developer Motor
(1) LGC board provides a signal to control the rotation of the developer motor. (DVMON: Developer motor ON signal) When signal from LGC board is the level "L", the developer motor stops. (2) DVMCW signal controls the rotational direction of the motor. The motor rotates forward (CCW) but does not rotate backward (CW) in actual movement. Namely, DVMCW signal is always output level "H". Signal level of motor circuit Signal DVMON DVMCW DVMCK DVMPL Level L ON CW Normal Level H OFF CCW Out of control Remarks Developer motor ON signal Developer motor rotational direction signal Developer motor reference clock signal Developer motor PLL signal
9-7

[A] Developer motor drive unit (1) Take off the rear cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [P]).
Main motor
(2) Take off the LGC board, SYS board and switching power supply with the whole case ( Chapter 2.5.2 [A] [C] [D]). (3) Remove 3 screws and take off the flywheel. Note: The main motor can be taken off by itself without removing the drive unit. (2 screws and 1 connector) (4) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket.
Flywheel
Fig. 9-501
Bracket
Fig. 9-502
Bracket
Fig. 9-503
(6) Disconnect 3 connectors and remove 5 screws. Release the harnesses from 3 harness clamps. Take off the developer motor drive unit.
Developer motor drive unit

Fig. 9-504
Connector
9-8
(A-1) Developer motor (1) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer motor.
Developer motor
Fig. 9-505
(A-2) Black developer lifting clutch (1) Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket.
Bracket
Fig. 9-506
(2) Take off the black developer lifting clutch. Note: Place the stopper when installing the clutch. .
Clutch
Fig. 9-507
(A-3) Color developer toner supply clutch, color developer drive clutch and black developer drive clutch (1) Remove 3 screws, 2 clips, 2 bushing, release the harness from 3 harness clamps and take off the bracket.
Harness clamp Bracket
Fig. 9-508
Clip, bushing Harness clamp
9-9
(2) Remove the gear, E-ring and the clip of each clutch.
Gear and clip Gear Gear and E-ring
Fig. 9-509
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the color developer toner supply clutch. (4) Remove clip A and gear C. Remove 1 bushing and clip B. Disconnect 1 connector and take
Color developer toner supply clutch Clip A Gear C Color developer drive clutch Clip B Bushing
off the color developer drive clutch. (5) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the black developer drive clutch.
Black developer drive clutch

Fig. 9-510
[B] Transport motor drive unit (1) Take off the rear cover and right rear cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [P] [L]). .(2) Take off the LGC board and the SYS board with the whole case ( Chapter 2.5.2 [A] [C]). (3) Remove 3 screws and take off the flywheel ( Chapter 9.5 [A]). Chapter 16.7 [M]).
Fig. 9-511
Ozone exhaust duct
Bracket
(4) Take off IH control PC board with the whole cover ( cover ( (5) Take off the ozone exhaust fan with the whole Chapter 11.7 [J]). (6) Remove 2 screws and take off the ozone exhaust duct. (7) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket.
9 - 10
Bracket
Fig. 9-512
(9)
Take off the fuser unit (
Chapter 16.7 [A]).

Bracket
(10) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket.
Fig. 9-513
(11) Loosen 1 setscrew, disconnect 1 connector and take off the registration clutch. (12) Remove 2 screws and take off the clutch fixing cover. Notes: 1. Make sure not to take off the fixing cover completely. Stand the fixing cover against the equipment being connected with the harness.
Fixing cover
Fig. 9-514
Setscrew
Registration clutch
2. When the registration clutch is reassembled, assemble by keeping the end of the shaft match with the end of the clutch.
0
Fig. 9-515
9 - 11
(13) Loosen 1 setscrew, disconnect 1 connector and take off the upper transport clutch (high speed) with the gear. Note: Do not mix up the registration clutch and upper transport clutch (high speed) when installing.
Setscrew
Upper transport clutch (High speed)

Fig. 9-516
(14) Disconnect 2 connectors and remove 5 screws. Take off the transport motor drive unit.
Connector
Transport motor drive unit
Connector
Fig. 9-517
(15) Remove 2 screws and take off the transport motor. (16) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket, and then take off the upper transport clutch (low speed).
Transport motor
Bracket
Upper transport clutch (Low speed)

Fig. 9-518
(17) Remove 9 screws and take off the cover of transport gear drive unit.
Cover
Fig. 9-519
9 - 12
[C] Main motor drive unit (1) Take off the cleaner unit ( (2) Take off the rear cover ( the whole case ( ( Chapter 11.7 [A]). Chapter 2.5.1 [P]).
(3) Take off the LGC board and the SYS board with Chapter 2.5.2 [A] [C]). (4) Remove 3 screws and take off the flywheel Chapter 9.5 [A]). Chapter 16.7 [M]). Chapter 11.7 [J]). Chapter 9.5 [B]). (5) Take off IH control PC board with the whole cover ( cover ( duct ( (6) Take off the ozone exhaust fan with the whole (7) Remove 2 screws take off the ozone exhaust (8) Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket. Note: This step can be omitted if the developer motor drive unit and the transport motor drive unit are already taken out.
Fig. 9-520
(9) Disconnect 2 connectors, release 2 harness clamps and remove 6 screws. Take off the main motor drive unit.
Harness clamp
Connector Harness clamp
Connector
Fig. 9-521
Main motor drive unit
(10) Remove 4 screws and take off the main motor. Note: When taking off only the main motor, it can be taken off by removing the LGC board and SYS board with the whole case.
Main motor
Fig. 9-522
9 - 13
(11) Loosen 1 screw, shift the tension plate to the direction of the white arrow, and then fix it at the position where the belt tension is loosened.
Tension plate
Fig. 9-523
(12) Remove clip A (back side of the unit), gear A with the shaft and 2 bushings. Remove clip B (back side of the unit), gear B with the shaft, 2 bushings, and gear C between the metal plates
Clip B
of the drive unit.
Clip A
Fig. 9-524
Gear B
Gear C Clip B
Fig. 9-525
Gear A
(13) Remove 8 screws (denoted with the white arrows are the plastic screws) and take off the plate cover.
Plate cover
Fig. 9-526
9 - 14
(14) Remove 2 screws and take off the drum cleaner brush motor. Notes: 1. When reassembling the unit, make sure to follow the inverse procedure of disassembling. 2. Make sure to assemble the unit while all the belt tensions are loosened. Tense the belts after reassembling. 3. Rotate the rotor section of the motor for several times by hand to shake down the belt while the belt is tense. Then screw the belt tensioner.
Fig. 9-527
Drum cleaner brush motor
9 - 15
9 - 16
10. PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM

10.1 General Descriptions
This chapter explains how the system works to pick up paper from the drawer or bypass tray and transport it to the transfer unit. The paper feeding system mainly consists of the pickup roller, feed roller, separation roller, transport roller, registration roller, bypass paper sensor, empty sensor, paper stock sensor, feed sensor, registration sensor and drive system for these components. The transport motor drives the above rollers and sensors. Refer to chapter 9 for more details about the transport motor and its drive system. (1) Pickup roller (Drawers and bypass feed) This roller moves up and down and draws out the paper from the bypass tray or drawer and transport it to the feed roller. (2) Feed roller (Drawers and bypass feed) This roller is placed against the separation roller. It transports the paper from the pickup roller to the transport roller. (3) Separation roller (Drawers and bypass feed) This roller is placed against the feed roller. When two sheets of paper or more are transported from the pickup roller, the load of the torque limiter of the separation roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets. As the result, the separation roller is stopped and the lower paper is not advanced any further. When only one sheet is transported from the pickup roller, the separation roller rotates following the feed roller. (4) Transport roller (Drawers and bypass feed) This roller transports the paper sent from the feed roller to the registration roller. (5) Registration roller Paper transported from the transport roller is pushed against the registration roller which aligns the leading edge of the paper. Then, the registration rollers rotate to transport the paper to the transfer unit.
10
10 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM
The followings are about sensors which detect paper size, availability of paper and position of the paper being transported to control ON/OFF of the rollers. (6) Bypass paper sensor This sensor detects if paper is set in the bypass tray. If it is, bypass feeding always comes before drawer feeding. (7) Empty sensor (Upper/Lower drawer) This is a transmissive-type sensor and detects the availability of paper in the drawer by using an actuator. When there is no paper in the drawer, the actuator blocks the light path of the sensor, and the sensor determines that there is no paper. (8) Paper stock sensor (Upper/Lower drawer) This is a transmissive-type sensor which detects the amount of the remaining paper in the drawer using an actuator. When the remaining paper is consumed and becomes around 100 sheets, the actuator blocks the light path for the transmissive-type sensor to notify that the paper is getting fewer.
10
(9) Feed sensor (Upper/Lower drawer and bypass feed) This sensor detects if the leading edge or trailing edge of the paper has passed the feed roller. It also detects jamming such as misfeeding. (10) Registration sensor This sensor detects that the leading edge of the paper has reached the registration roller and the trailing edge of the paper has passed the registration roller.
10 - 2
12
14
13
11 7 7 3
7 6 4 5 7
17
10
10
8 9
16
15
Paper Feeding Section Sectional View (Front side)

Fig. 10-101
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Name Bypass feed roller Bypass separation roller Bypass pickup roller Upper drawer feed roller Upper drawer separation roller Upper drawer pickup roller Transport roller Lower drawer feed roller Lower drawer separation roller
No. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Name Lower drawer pickup roller Bypass paper sensor Registration sensor Registration roller (rubber roller) Registration roller (metal roller) Upper drawer feed sensor Lower drawer feed sensor Bypass feed sensor
10 - 3
(G31/G38) 20 (G33) (G20/G27) (G40/G34)
(G24/G30)
(G35)
(G25/G21) (G34) (G28/G33) (G33) (G35) 21
18
(G33)
10
(G36/G33)
(G33)
19
Paper Feeding Section Drive System (Rear side)

Fig. 10-102
No. 18 19 20 21
Name Lower transport clutch (Low speed) Lower transport feed clutch (High speed) Upper drawer feed clutch Lower drawer feed clutch
10 - 4

10.2.1 Operation of bypass pickup roller When the bypass pickup solenoid is turned ON, the plunger is pulled, and then the lever is rotated. The pickup arm is then brought down with its own weight. When the bypass pickup solenoid is turned OFF, the pickup arm is brought up by the spring force. The driving force transmitted through the bypass feed clutch is transmitted to the bypass feed roller through the shaft and then to the bypass pickup roller through the timing belt. The roller is rotated by this driving force.
Bypass pickup solenoid
Spring Pickup roller
10
Lever
Pickup arm
Fig. 10-201
10 - 5
10.2.2 Operation of drawer pickup roller When the drawer is inserted, the protrusion at the rear side of the drawer moves up the lever (a) to the direction of A. The pickup roller and roller holder are then lowered by it's own weight.
Insertion direction
Lever (a)
Pickup roller
10
Fig. 10-202
10 - 6
10.2.3 Separation of paper The separation roller in this equipment works to separate the sheets being fed. The separation roller unit consists of the feed roller, separation roller, spring joint, etc., as shown below. The feed roller is rotated by the feed clutch in the direction of the arrow ( pickup roller rotation. The figure at the bottom of this page shows how duplicate feeding is prevented: Since the friction between two sheets is small, the lower sheet is not transported any further while the upper sheet is transported by the feed roller in the direction of the arrow ( ).
Feed roller
) at the same timing as the
Spring joint
10
Separation roller
Fig. 10-203
[Example] When only one sheet enters between the rollers: Since the transporting force of the feed roller is greater than the braking force of the separation roller, the separation roller follows the feed roller, making the sheet go forward to the registration roller. When two sheets enter between the rollers at the same time: Since the transporting force of the feed roller and the breaking force of the separation roller are greater than the frictional force between two sheets, the paper A is transported to the direction of the arrow ( ) and the paper B is braked by the separation roller and is not transported any further.
Feed roller
A B
Separation roller
Fig. 10-204 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 10 - 7 e-STUDIO3511/4511 PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM
10.2.4 General operation [A] From power-ON to ready status (1) When the equipment is turned ON, the tray-up motor is activated and the upper drawer tray starts to rise. When the tray-up sensor is turned ON (L H), the tray-up motor is turned OFF, and the tray is stopped. At this time, if the empty sensor is OFF (L), it is judged that there is no paper in the drawer. If the empty sensor is ON (H), there is paper in the drawer. The tray stops at raised position regardless of availability of paper. The tray-up motor then starts to rotate in reverse and the lower drawer is raised. The lower drawer is stopped in the same manner as the upper drawer, and the empty sensor detects if there is any paper in the drawer. (2) If the drawer is not completely inserted when the equipment is turned ON, the tray for that drawer is not raised. When the drawer is inserted completely, the tray is raised and checks the availability of the paper. (3) If either of the feed sensors is ON (means there is paper on the transport path) when the equipment is turned ON, it is determined that a paper jam has occurred and no operation is enabled until the paper is removed.
10
[B] Ready status (1) After the tray is moved up and availability of paper is checked as described above, the equipment enters the ready status. At ready status, the tray remains at raised position. (2) When a drawer is inserted or removed at ready status, the tray is raised again to check the availability of paper. [C] Bypass feeding The bypass paper sensor detects availability of paper. The bypass pickup solenoid is turned ON and the bypass pickup roller is lowered. The bypass feed clutch is turned ON and then the bypass pickup roller, bypass feed roller and bypass transport roller are rotated and start feeding. The leading edge of paper turns ON the bypass feed sensor and bypass pickup solenoid is turned OFF. Then the bypass pickup roller is raised. The leading edge of paper turns ON the registration sensor and the paper is aligned by the registration roller. The bypass feed clutch is turned OFF, and then the bypass pickup roller, bypass feed roller and bypass transport roller are stopped. The registration clutch is turned ON and the paper is transported to the transfer unit.
10 - 8
[D] Drawer feeding (D-1) Lower drawer The feed clutch and the transport clutch (high speed) are turned ON, and the pickup roller, feed roller and transport roller are rotated to start feeding paper. Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the lower drawer feed sensor, then the transport clutch (high speed) is turned OFF then back ON. Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the registration sensor and the paper is aligned by the registration roller. The transport clutch (high speed) is turned OFF and the transport roller is stopped. The registration clutch and transport clutch (low speed) are turned ON and the paper is transported to the transfer unit. (D-2) Upper drawer The feed clutch and the transport clutch (high speed) are turned ON, and the pickup roller, feed roller and transport roller are rotated to start feeding paper. Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the upper drawer feed sensor, then the feed clutch and the transport clutch (high speed) are turned OFF then back ON. Passing of the leading edge of the paper turns ON the registration sensor and the paper is aligned by the registration roller. The feed clutch and the transport clutch (high speed) is turned OFF and the transport roller is stopped. The registration clutch and transport clutch (low speed) are turned ON and the paper is transported to the transfer unit.
10
10 - 9
10.3 Drive Circuit of Tray-up Motor

Tray-up motor (TRY-MTR) : Driven by IC6 (upper/lower drawer) (LGC: TA8428) Block diagram of TA8428
Thermal shut-down overcurrent protection circuit
Control logic
10
1 IN1 2 IN2 3 M(+) TUP1A 4 GND 5 M() TUP2A 6 N.C. 7 VCC
Fig. 10-301
IN1 and IN2 are input terminals to receive the signals from the microcomputer. The control logic, based on the signals from the microcomputer, controls ON/OFF of the motor rotation direction.
Input IN1 H L H L IN2 H H L L L L H Output M (+) M () L H L
Remarks BRAKE CCW CW
OFF (high impedance) STOP
10 - 10

[A] Bypass unit (A-1) Bypass unit (1) Take off the right front/rear hinge covers ( Chapter 2.5.1 [N] [O]). (2) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw of ground wire and release the harnesses from the harness clamps (2 pcs.).
Fig. 10-401
Connector
(3) Open the bypass feed tray. Remove 1 screw and take off the bypass feed front cover.
10
Fig. 10-402
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the bypass feed rear cover.
Fig. 10-403
(5) Remove 3 screws. Lift up the bypass unit and take it off toward you. Note: When installing the bypass unit, make sure that the ADU is closed in advance since the bypass unit occasionally does not slide smoothly.
Fig. 10-404
10 - 11
(A-2) Bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board (1) Release the harness from 1 harness clamp and disconnect 1 connector. (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the hinge unit.
Fig. 10-405
(3) Detach the bypass tray from the protrusion at the fulcrum of the frame.
Fulcrum
10
Bypass tray
Fig. 10-406
(4) Remove 3 screws and release 4 latches. Take off the upper cover of the bypass tray.
Latch Bypass tray upper cover
Latch
Fig. 10-407
(5) Remove 1 screw and the plate spring. (6) Remove 1 screw (indicated with a white arrow) from the back side, then take off the bracket.
Bracket
Plate spring
Fig. 10-408
10 - 12
(7) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Take off the bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board.
Bypass tray slide guide width detection PC board Connector
Fig. 10-409
Note: When installing the bracket, make sure that the pointer of the bracket is positioned as shown in the right figure (the same point as it pointed before disassembling).
Pointer
10
Fig. 10-410
(A-3) Bypass transport roller (1) Remove 1 E-ring. Slide the shaft and take off the bypass transport roller.
Bypass transport roller

Fig. 10-411
E-ring
(A-4) Bypass pickup roller (1) Remove 1 screw and take off the bypass feed cover by sliding it.
Bypass feed cover

Fig. 10-412
10 - 13
(2) Remove 1 clip and pull out the shaft in the direction of the white arrow. Then take off the bypass pickup roller.
Clip
Bypass pickup roller

Fig. 10-413
(A-5) Bypass pickup solenoid (1) Remove 4 screws and take off the plate cover by lifting and sliding it to the direction of the white arrow.
Plate spring Plate cover
10
Fig. 10-414
(2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 spring. Then take off the bypass pickup solenoid.
Bypass pickup solenoid
Spring Connector
Fig. 10-415
(A-6) Bypass paper sensor (1) Disconnect 1 connector. Then release the latches and take off the bypass paper sensor.
Bypass paper sensor
Fig. 10-416
10 - 14
(A-7) Bypass feed roller (1) Remove 4 screws and take off the bypass feed unit.
Bypass feed unit

Fig. 10-417
(2) Remove 1 clip and take off the bypass feed roller by sliding it.
Clip
Bypass feed roller
10
Fig. 10-418
(A-8) Bypass separation roller (1) Remove 3 screws and take off the lower plate cover.
Lower plate cover
Fig. 10-419
(2) Take off the bypass separation roller. Note: Lubricate the bypass separation roller on every replacement. Refer to the Service Handbook for more details.
Bypass separation roller
Fig. 10-420
10 - 15
(3) Remove the arbor, shaft and spring.
Arbor Shaft Spring
Bypass separation roller

Fig. 10-421
(A-9) Bypass feed sensor (1) Remove 3 screws and take the lower plate cover.
Lower plate cover
10
Fig. 10-422
(2) Disconnect 1 connector. Then release the latches and take off the bypass feed sensor.
Bypass feed sensor
Fig. 10-423
[B] Lower drawer feed sensor/Side cover opening/closing switch (1) Take off the bypass unit ( (2) Take off the ADU ( [K]). (4) Remove 5 screws and take off the stay. Chapter 10.4 [A]). Chapter 14.7 Chapter 17.5 [A]).
Stay
(3) Take off the 2nd transfer unit (
Fig. 10-424
10 - 16
(5) Remove 3 screws and take off the guide by sliding it to the rear side.
Guide
Fig. 10-425
(6) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the lower drawer feed sensor. (7) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the side cover opening/closing switch.
Lower drawer feed sensor
Side guide opening/ closing switch
10
Fig. 10-426
[C] Upper drawer feed sensor/Registration sensor (1) Remove 1 clip and take off the knob.
Knob
Clip
Fig. 10-427
(2) Remove 3 screws. Rotate the guide to take it off by releasing the harness from the harness clamp.
Guide
Fig. 10-428
10 - 17
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Then take off the upper drawer feed sensor with the whole bracket. (4) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Then take off the registration sensor with the whole bracket.
Upper drawer feed sensor
Registration sensor
Fig. 10-429
[D] Registration roller (1) Take off the front right cover ( [E]). (2) Take off the transport motor drive unit ( Chapter 9.5 [B]). (3) Remove 1 clip and take off the knob. (4) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket.
Bracket
Fig. 10-430
Chapter 2.5.1
10
(5) Remove 1 clip and 1 bushing on each front/ rear side. Take off the registration roller (rubber roller) by sliding it to the rear side.
Clip (6) Clip (5)
Spring (6)
Registration roller (Metal roller)

Fig. 10-431
Registration roller (Rubber roller)
(6) Remove 1 clip, 1 bushing and 1 spring on each front/rear side. Take off the registration roller (metal roller) by sliding it to the rear side. Note: The spring on the front side differs from the one on the rear side. Note that the spring on the rear side has a black marking. So when installing, be careful not to mix them up.
Clip (5)
Clip (6)
Registration roller (rubber roller) Spring (6) Registration roller (metal roller)
Fig. 10-432
10 - 18
[E] Drawer feeding unit (E-1) Drawer feeding unit (1) Remove the drawer. (2) Remove 1 screw and take off the drawer feeding unit while sliding it to the front side.
Fig. 10-433
(E-2) Feed clutch (1) Disconnect 1 connector. (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the clutch bracket. (3) Loosen 1 setscrew. (4) Remove the feed clutch.
Feed clutch
10
Fig. 10-434
Note: Attach the clutch to the shaft referring to the figure at right.
0.2-0.5mm
Fig. 10-435
(E-3) Separation roller (1) Remove 1 screw and take off the separation roller holder.
Separation roller
Fig. 10-436
10 - 19
(2) Remove the lever from the holder and take off the separation roller along with its shaft. (3) Take off the cover, arbor, clutch spring, and then the separation roller from the shaft. Note: When reassembling the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller, pay attention to the followings: 1. Set the timing belt securely on the pulleys. 2. Pay attention to the "lock" direction of the one-way clutch.
LO
CK
Lever
Holder Arbor Spring
Cover Clutch spring Separation roller Shaft Arbor Spring

Fig. 10-438
LOCK
CLUTCH-6-L
Fig. 10-437
3. Fit the clips securely into the groove on
10
the shaft. 4. Confirm that there is no oil staining etc. on the surface of the timing belt, pulleys and rollers. 5. Pay attention to the mounting direction of the rollers. 6. Lubricate the separation roller on every replacement. Refer to the Service Handbook for more details. (E-4) Pickup roller (1) Take off the pickup roller from the pickup arm and remove the belt.
Separation roller Paper
Feed roller
Pickup roller
Fig. 10-439
One-way clutch
Belt
Pickup arm
Pickup roller
Fig. 10-440
Pickup arm
10 - 20
(2) Remove the pulley, one-way clutch and 3 E-rings.
E-ring Pulley One-way clutch
E-ring Pickup roller
Fig. 10-441
(E-5) Feed roller (1) Remove the clip and take off the feed roller in the direction of the arrow.
Clip
Feed roller
One-way clutch
10
Fig. 10-442
(E-6)Drawer tray-up sensor and Drawer empty sensor (1) Disconnect the connector and release the latches, and then take off the drawer tray-up sensor. (2) Disconnect the connector and release the latches, and then take off the drawer empty sensor.
Drawer tray-up sensor
Latch
Drawer empty sensor

Fig. 10-443
(E-7) Drawer paper stock sensor (1) Disconnect 1 connector. (2) Release the latches and take off the drawer paper stock sensor.
Drawer paper stock sensor

Fig. 10-444
10 - 21
[F] Tray drive unit (1) Take off the fuse PC board bracket ( Chapter 2.5.2 [G]). (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket.
Bracket
Fig. 10-445
(3) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 4 screws and take off the tray drive unit.
10
Tray drive unit
Fig. 10-446
(4) Turn the tray drive unit. Release 6 latches and take off the cover. Note: When taking off the cover, be careful of the spring inside the tray drive unit which pushes the cover.
Latch
Latch
Latch
Cover Latch
Fig. 10-447
(5) Take off the tray-up motor. Note: When assembling the tray drive unit, match the gear bosses with the holes of the cover.
Bosses Tray-up motor
Fig. 10-448
10 - 22
[G] Lower transport clutch (Low/High speed) (1) Take off the tray drive unit ( [F]). (2) Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket. Chapter 10.4
Bracket
Fig. 10-449
(3) Remove 3 screws and 1 E-ring. Then take off the clutch fixing bracket. (4) Take off the lower transport clutch (low speed) and the lower transport clutch (high speed). Notes: 1. Do not push the transport roller shaft strongly when installing the clutch fixing bracket and tighten the screws in the order of (a), (b) and (c). When the installation is finished, open the side cover and check if the transport roller rotates smoothly. 2. Attach the clutch to the shaft referring to the figure on the right.
Clutch
Fig. 10-450
(c)
Lower transport clutch (Low speed)
Bracket
(b)
10
Lower transport clutch (High speed)
E-ring
(a)
Shaft 0-0.5mm
Fig. 10-451
[H] Registration guide (1) Pull out the registration guide by holding its tab on the front side. (2) Clean the paper dust removal brush attached on the registration guide. Note: When taking off the registration guide, pay attention not to drop the removed paper dust from the brush into the inside of the equipment.
Fig. 10-452
Registration guide
10 - 23
[I] Middle guide (1) Remove 2 screws and take off the 2nd transfer front guide.
2nd transfer front guide

Fig. 10-453
Note: When installing the 2nd transfer front guide, push the 2nd transfer front guide upward and screw it at the position the guide is pushed to the transfer belt unit.
10
2nd transfer front guide

Fig. 10-454
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the middle guide. Note: When taking off the middle guide, pay attention not to drop the removed paper dust from the brush into the inside of the equipment. (3) Clean the paper dust removal brush attached on the middle guide.
Middle guide
Fig. 10-455
10 - 24
11. DRUM RELATED SECTION

11.1 Construction
This chapter explains about the drum, unit around the drum, image processing unit, their parts and control circuits. This area mainly consists of the following components: Drum cleaner unit Drum Main charger Drum thermistor Drum cleaner Cleaning blade Toner recovery blade Toner recovery auger Drum cleaner brush Discharge LED unit Discharge LED Ozone exhaust duct Automatic wire cleaning drive unit Ozone exhaust fan Toner bag / Toner bag full detection sensors-1 & -2 (Toner volume detection sensor / toner pressure detection sensor) High-voltage transformer Image quality sensor ( Chapter 15) Temperature/Humidity sensor
11
Toner bag full detection sensor-2
Toner recovery blade Drum cleaner brush
Toner bag full detection sensor-1 Toner recovery auger Cleaning blade
Discharge LED Drum Main charger Drum thermistor Automatic wire cleaning drive unit
Ozone exhaust duct

Fig. 11-101
11 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 DRUM RELATED SECTION
11.2 Functions
(1) Drum Drum is made of a cylindrical aluminum base coated with thin film of organic photoconductive substance. Photoconductive object becomes insulative (high electrical resistance) when it is not exposed to lights and becomes conductive (low electrical resistance) when it is exposed to lights. This object is called photoconductor. (2) Main charger Main charger consists of a metal rod case having insulated blocks at the both ends with the charger wire attached and the grid is set between them. When high voltage is applied to the charger wire, the surrounding air is charged (ionized). Then a flow of the ionized air into the drum applies the drum a charge as well. This phenomenon is called corona discharge and a control bias is applied to the grid to control the charging amount. Negative charge caused by the corona discharge is applied to the drum surface evenly in dark places. Charger wire is equipped with an automatic wire cleaner to clean the wire.
11
(3) Drum thermistor Since the photoconductive characteristic of the drum surface changes depending on the temperature of the drum surface, the drum thermistor detects the temperature of the drum surface and controls to gain the charging potential according to the environment. (4) Drum cleaner (a) Cleaning blade This blade is pressed against the drum surface with a constant force by pressure springs, and scrapes off the residual toner on the drum surface. Also it removes the positive charge on the photoconductive drum by applying negative charge on the blade. (b) Recovery blade This blade catches the toner scraped off by the cleaning blade. (c) Toner recovery auger This auger carries the residual toner scraped off to the toner bag. (d) Drum cleaner brush This brush roller prevents the residual toner and foreign matter adhering to the drum surface.
11 - 2
(5) Discharge LED Discharge is a process to decrease or eliminate the static electricity on the drum surface. The electrical resistance of the photosensitive layer is decreased by the light, and the residual charge on the drum surface is neutralized and eliminated (cleaned). Electrical potential of the drum surface is fixed to a certain amount before the drum is charged. (6) Toner bag This collects the residual toner scraped off on the drum surface by the cleaning blade and residual toner scraped off on the transfer belt by the transfer belt cleaning blade. (7) Toner bag full detection sensors-1 & -2 The sensor-2 (transmissive type) finds the toner bag full by detecting the volume of used toner in the toner bag. The sensor-1 detects the toner bag full when it is pushed by the toner recovery auger in the cleaner which is given a pressure from the used toner in the toner bag. The toner bag full detection sensor-2 also detects the presence/absence of the toner bag. Toner bag full is determined when either of the toner bag full detection sensors-1 and -2 detects full of toner. Printing is interrupted upon the detection of Toner bag full status, however, the paper already fed is subject to be printed and exited. When the sensors are in trouble, Toner bag full is determined instead of Call for service. If Toner bag full status is not cleared, the sensors, harnesses and LGC board need to be checked. (8) High-voltage transformer A circuit generates the output control voltage Vc of the main charger bias, main charger grid bias, 1st transfer roller bias, 2nd transfer roller bias, black developer bias, color developer bias and cleaning blade bias. (9) Image quality sensor This sensor measures the reflection amount of the test pattern (toner image) formed on the transfer belt and outputs to the LGC board in order to keep the appropriate image density and line width. (10) Temperature/humidity sensor This sensor measures the environment inside the equipment. The values of the temperature and humidity detected inside the equipment are output to the LGC board.
11
11 - 3
11.3 Output Control Circuits of High-Voltage Transformer

Outputs adjustment value of the main charger, transfer charger, and developer biases in the NVRAM to the main processor. Outputs control voltage data from the main processor to the D/A converter. Analog conversion by the D/A converter. Outputs control voltage Vc to the main charger grid bias, 1st transfer roller bias, 2nd transfer roller bias, color developer bias and black developer bias transformer. The main charger bias, 1st transfer roller bias, 2nd transfer roller bias, color developer bias and black developer bias transformers generate output current or voltage proportional to the control voltage Vc with the output ON signal. * Adjustment of the control voltage Vc (change of adjustment data) is performed in the Adjustment Mode (05). * Output value of the cleaning blade bias is fixed when the transformer board is shipped from the factory.
11
Main charger grid D/A converter IC8 1st transfer 2nd transfer Black developer Color developer Main charger ON 1st transfer 2nd transfer Transistor array NVRAM IC7 Black developer (DC) ON Black developer (AC) ON Color developer (DC) ON Color developer (AC) ON Cleaning blade ON
Gate array IC29
MAIN CPU IC34
Fig. 11-301
11 - 4
11.4 Drum Temperature Detection Circuit

(1) Purpose of the drum temperature detection circuit Since the photoconductive characteristic of the drum surface varies drastically depending on the surface temperature of the drum, this circuit detects the temperature of the drum surface to gain the charging potential according to the environment. (2) Configuration of the drum temperature detection circuit
R9
CPU
AN7
RTH
VTEMP
R8 R7
Temperature/ humidity sensor
11
Fig. 11-401
11 - 5
11.5 Temperature/Humidity Sensor

11.5.1 General description This sensor measures the temperature and humidity inside the equipment. 11.5.2 Construction Temperature/humidity control circuit is configured as follows:
TEMP/HUMI AN1
V HUMI MM74HC4053
+ -
CPU
V TEMP
ANSW PB1
+ -
R TH
11
LGC board TEMP/HUMI-SNR
Fig. 11-501
11 - 6
11.6 Charger Wire Cleaner

11.6.1 Operation This equipment includes an automatic cleaning function with a motor drive to automatically clean off the toner adhered on the main charger wire. The drive from charger wire cleaner motor is transmitted to the wire cleaner through the timing belt and the wire cleaner contacted by the main charger wire shuttles between the both ends of main charger wire. The waiting position (home position) of the wire cleaner is at the front side. The wire cleaner and main charger wire are not contacted each other at the waiting position. The cleaning movement is performed in the cases as follows: (1) When the power is turned ON (2) When recovered from the energy saving mode (3) When opening/closing the front cover (4) When the specified number of pages has been printed out (default value: 1,000 pages) from the last cleaning (If the number of pages has reached the setting value during continuous printing, the cleaning movement is performed upon the completion of this printing job.) 11.6.2 Construction (1) Charger wire cleaner motor This motor is a DC brush motor and supplies the drive to the wire cleaner. When the motor rotates in reverse, the wire cleaner shifts to the rear side. Also when the motor rotates normally, the wire cleaner shifts to the front side. (2) Charger wire cleaner front position detection switch This switch detects whether the wire cleaner has reached to the front position (home position) or not. The wire cleaner is always waited at this position except during cleaning movement. (3) Charger wire cleaner rear position detection switch This switch detects whether the wire cleaner has reached to the rear position or not. When this switch is turned ON, the charger wire cleaner motor rotates normally. Then the wire cleaner shifts to the front position (home position).
11
11 - 7
11.6.3 Drive circuit The circuit configuration is as shown below.
ENVMT1-0 ENVMT2-0
Driver
M
ENVSNR1-0
CPU ASIC GA
ENVSNR2-0
LGC board
PWA-CCL
Fig. 11-601
Signal level of motor circuit
11
Motor Signal ENVMT1-0 Wire cleaner drive signal-1 ENVMT2-0 Wire cleaner drive signal-2 OFF L L
Reverse rotation L H
Normal rotation H L Brake H H
Signal level of switching circuit Level Signal ENVSNR1-0 position detection signal ENVSNR2-0 position detection signal Charger wire cleaner rear position Charger wire cleaner front position L H
Charger wire cleaner is at the front Charger wire cleaner is at the position other than the front position Charger wire cleaner is at the rear Charger wire cleaner is at the position other than the rear position
11 - 8

[A] Cleaner unit (1) Open the front cover. Take off the toner bag and black developer unit cover ( 2.5.1 [A], 12.8 (A-1)). (2) Remove 1 screw and take off the sensor cover. Chapter
Sensor cover
Fig. 11-701
11
Fig. 11-702
(4) Loosen 2 screws.
Fig. 11-703
(5) Rotate the lever counterclockwise to screw it again.
Lever
Fig. 11-704
11 - 9
(6) Disconnect 2 connectors. Remove 3 screws and washer and pull out the cleaner unit.
Washer
Cleaner unit
Fig. 11-705
[B] Main charger unit (B-1) Main charger unit (1) Take off the cleaner unit ( 1 turn. (3) Release the latches and take off the main charger unit. Chapter 11.7 [A]).
2
Gear
(2) Rotate the gear counterclockwise for more than
11
Notes: 1. At this time, be careful not to touch the drum surface or damage the drum. 2. When installing the main charger unit, rotate the gear counterclockwise for more than 1 turn until the holder arm is completely hidden inside to install the unit.
Gear
2
Main charger unit
Fig. 11-706
Holder arm
Fig. 11-707
(B-2) Main charger grid (1) Push the terminal head at the front side and remove the grid.
Note: Do not touch the mesh area of the grid.
Fig. 11-708
11 - 10
(B-3) Charger wire * Length: 373 mm, tungsten wire diameter 0.06 mm (1) Take off the terminal covers of the front and rear sides.
Fig. 11-709
(2) Remove the terminal, detach the spring and take off the wire. Notes: Be careful of the followings when attaching the wire. 1. Securely insert the wire into the Vgrooves of the front and rear sides. 2. Do not twist the wire. 3. Do not touch the wire directly with bare hands.
Spring
Wire Terminal
11
Fig. 11-710
(B-4) Wire pad (1) Take off the charger wire ( (B-3)). Note: When installing, pay attention to the direction of the wire pad. (2) Release the latch and remove the wire pad.
Latch
Chapter 11.7
Fig. 11-711
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the pad guide.
Pad guide
Fig. 11-712
11 - 11
(4) Remove the base. Note: Reinstall the base at the same position on the belt as before removing. It is recommendable to leave the mark on the belt in advance.
Base
Fig. 11-713
[C] Drum (1) Take off the cleaner unit ( Chapter 11.7 [A]).
Bracket
11
Fig. 11-714
(3) Take off the drum upward by sliding it toward the front side. Notes: 1. Do not touch, scratch or spit on the drum surface. 2. Try to avoid direct sunlight to the drum. Lay it on the dark place immediately after taking off. 3. Do not touch the drum thermistor during the disassembly and replacement. 4. Do not touch or damage the edge of the cleaning blade. 5. When replacing the drum, take off the drum shaft bearing from the old drum and install it on the new drum.
Drum
Drum shaft bearing
Fig. 11-715
11 - 12
[D] Cleaner (D-1) Drum cleaning blade (1) Take off the main charger unit and drum. ( Chapter 11.7 (B-1) [C]) (2) Remove 3 screws and the cleaning blade. Note: Do not touch or damage the edge of the cleaning blade.
Cleaning blade
Fig. 11-716
(D-2) Recovery blade (1) Remove the recovery blade. Notes: 1. To attach the recovery blade, clean the surface of the frame beforehand to make sure not to deform the blade. 2. Attach the recovery blade while pushing it to the step on the surface of the frame. 3. Press the stuck part with your finger to attach the blade securely. (D-3) Drum cleaner brush (1) Unlock the lever by rotating it and pull it out.
Fig. 11-717
Recovery blade
11
Lever
Fig. 11-718
(2) Remove the drum cleaner brush.
Fig. 11-719
11 - 13
[E] Drum thermistor (1) Take off the drum ( Chapter 11.7 [C]).
(2) Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector, and then take off the drum thermistor with the whole bracket.
Connector
Fig. 11-720
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the drum thermistor.
11
Fig. 11-721
[F] Discharge LED unit (F-1) Discharge LED (1) Take off the black developer unit and cleaner unit ( Chapters 12.8 [A] and 11.7 [A]). (2) Remove 2 screws and lift up the discharge LED unit. Disconnect 2 connectors, then take off the discharge LED unit.
Discharge LED unit
Fig. 11-722
(3) Remove the discharge LED.

Discharge LED
Fig. 11-723
11 - 14
(F-2) Charger cleaner motor (1) Take off the discharge LED unit ( 11.7 (F-1)). (2) Disconnect the joint connector of the charger cleaner motor. (3) Remove 1 screw and take off the charger cleaner motor unit. Chapter
Fig. 11-724
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the gear bracket and motor guide.
Motor guide Gear bracket
11
Fig. 11-725
(5) Remove 2 screws and take out the charger cleaner motor from the motor bracket by rotating it upward.
Fig. 11-726
(F-3) Charger cleaner detection switch (1) Take off the charger cleaner motor unit ( Chapter 11.7 (F-2)). (2) Separate the discharge LED unit into two parts.
Fig. 11-727
11 - 15
(3) Release 2 latches and take off the front position switch arm. (4) Remove 1 screw and take off the rear position switch arm.
Rear position switch arm Front position switch arm
Fig. 11-728
(5) Disconnect 2 connectors and take off the charger cleaner front position detection switch and charger cleaner rear position detection switch.
11
Fig. 11-729
[G] Toner bag full detection sensors (G-1) Toner bag full detection sensor-1 (1) Take off the developer unit, cleaner unit and transfer belt unit ( [A] and 14.7 [A]). (2) Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector. Take off the toner bag full detection sensor-1 with the whole bracket.
Fig. 11-730
Chapters 12.8 [A], 11.7
(G-2) Toner bag full detection sensor-2 (1) Open the front cover. (2) Release 4 latches and take off the toner bag full detection sensor-2.
Fig. 11-731
11 - 16
[H] Temperature/Humidity sensor (1) Take off the front cover, receiving tray and left cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [A] [B] [F]). (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the inner cover.
Inner cover
Fig. 11-732
(3) Disconnect 1 connector. Then release 2 latches and take off the temperature/humidity sensor.
Temperature/ Humidity sensor
Latch
11
Fig. 11-733
[I] Ozone filter (1) Remove 1 screw and take off the cover. (2) Pull out the ozone filter.
Ozone filter
Fig. 11-734
[J] Ozone exhaust fan (1) Take off the SYS board with the whole case ( Chapter 2.5.2 [C]). Chapter 11.7 [I]).
Connector
(2) Take off the ozone filter (
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws. Take off the ozone exhaust fan with the whole cover.
Fig. 11-735
11 - 17
(4) Release 3 latches and take off the cover. Take off the ozone exhaust fan.
Latch
Fig. 11-736
FLOW
11
11 - 18
12. DEVELOPER UNIT

In this equipment, the three color developers (Y, M and C) are installed in the revolver unit and the black developer is installed independently separated from the revolver unit. This special structure ensures the improved printing productivity at the Black Mode. When developing color images (Y, M or C), the black developer unit escapes contacting with the drum. When developing black images, each color developer unit escapes from the drum by rotating the revolver and the black developer unit contacts with the drum instead. The developer motor drives the lifting movement and magnet roller rotation of the black developer unit, and also the toner supply and magnet roller rotation of the color developer unit. Chapter 9 in this manual describes more.
12.2 Construction
Black toner cartridge drive unit Developer motor drive unit Black developer unit Developer material Mixer unit Developer sleeve (magnetic roller) Doctor blade Black auto-toner sensor Black developer unit lifting mechanism Color developer unit Developer material Mixer unit Developer sleeve (magnetic roller) Doctor blade Color developer toner supply auger Color auto-toner sensor
12
12 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 DEVELOPER UNIT
12.3 Sectional View

Color auto-toner sensor Mixer
Developer sleeve
Drum
Color developer unit Developer sleeve
Black developer unit Mixer Black auto-toner sensor
12
Fig. 12-301
12 - 2
12.4 Black Toner Cartridge Drive Unit

12.4.1 General descriptions The black toner cartridge is filled with black toner, and supplies the toner to the black developer unit by rotating the toner cartridge with the drive of the toner motor. The black toner cartridge detection switch ensures that the black toner cartridge is in rotation by detecting the protrusion of the toner cartridge. Also, the auto-toner sensor detects whether the toner cartridge is empty by detecting the toner density ratio of the black developer unit. 12.4.2 Toner motor The toner motor supplies toner to the black developer unit from the toner cartridge. It is driven by the motor driver IC (TA8428K) through an overcurrent protection device. The overcurrent protection device is mounted to protect the toner motor and toner motor driver. When the motor abnormality occurred and the motor drive current exceeding the specified level surged, internal resistance of the overcurrent protection device becomes high to cut off the current. Its circuit configuration is shown below.
Motor driver
TD62385
TA8428K
PE0 PE2
Overcurrent protection device
Toner motor
KTNA1A KTNA1B
12
Gate array
LCA301-2
PB7 KTNDET
Black toner cartridge
Fig. 12-401
Signal level for motor circuit Signal KTNA1A-0 KTNA1B-0 L Level L H H L H L H OFF CW (when supplying toner) CCW (detecting cartridge installation) Brake State
12 - 3
12.5 Black Developer Unit

12.5.1 Functions a. Black developer material The developer material consists of the carrier and toner. The carrier is made of electrically conductive ferrites which is 30-100 m and the toner is made of the resin particle which is 5-20 m. Since the developer material deteriorates after a long time use, periodic replacements are needed. b. Mixer unit The carrier and toner are frictionized each other when the developer material is stirred. Then the carrier is positively charged (+) and the toner is negatively charged (), and the toner is adhered by the electrostatic force. c. Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller) These aluminum rollers have magnets inside. The developer material is pulled by these magnets to form a magnetic brush. The magnets are fixed at their position so only the sleeve rotates. By this rotation, the developer material is transported to the developer sleeve. Then the magnetic brush formed at the developer sleeve sweeps over the drum surface and thus development is performed.
12
d. Doctor blade The doctor blade controls the amount of the developer material from the transport sleeve so that the magnetic brush of the developer material can contact with the drum surface properly. e. Black auto-toner sensor To print out a precise image, the proportion (toner density ratio) of the carrier and the toner in the developer material needs to be always constant. The magnetic bridge circuit in the auto-toner sensor detects the toner ratio in the developer material. This sensor supplies the toner from the toner cartridge.
12 - 4
12.5.2 Black developer unit drive section The black developer motor drives the black developer unit. Connection and disconnection of the developer motor drive is made by ON/OFF of the black developer drive clutch. The drive is connected when it is ON and disconnected when it is OFF.
Developer sleeve
Doctor blade
Mixer-1
Mixer-2
Fig. 12-501
12
Gear (G21)
Gear (G20) Gear (G19)
Gear (G19)
Gear (G20)
Fig. 12-502
12 - 5
12.5.3 Black auto-toner sensor circuit (1) Functions of auto-toner circuit Detection of the toner density in the developer material - density lowered toner supplied Detection of the toner being empty in the toner cartridge
Black auto-toner sensor
CPU
AN2
+ -
ATS
DICH1 LDCH1 CLKCH1
D/A converter
7407
+ -
ATSVR
LCA301-1
12
PA1 ATSDET
Fig. 12-503
12 - 6
(2) Functions of the black auto-toner sensor a. Initializing function: When unpacking and replacing the developer material The automatic adjustment is made so that the output of the auto-toner sensor (input value of the main CPU) will be 2.45V to 2.55V for the toner density of new developer material. b. Toner density stabilizing function: During the printing operation Through the following phases, the toner density is kept constant. Toner is consumed. Toner density decreases. Output change of the auto-toner sensor is detected depending on the humidity. Drives toner motor. Supplies toner to the developer unit from the toner cartridge. c. Toner-empty detection/clear function: Detects toner being empty in the toner cartridge. Drives toner motor. Output of the auto-toner sensor is not changed. Toner density is not changed. Detects toner being empty. Toner-empty clear Drives toner motor. Supplies toner from the toner cartridge. Output of the auto-toner sensor changes. Toner density recovers to its normal value. Toner-empty is cleared. (3) Operations of black auto-toner sensor The black auto-toner sensor is composed of the following circuits. Drive winding Detection winding : Magnetic head (primary side) with a high-frequency magnetic field, which forms a magnetic circuit in the developer material : Receiving the changes in the magnetic resistance of the developer material via a magnetic circuit (secondary side) DC conversion circuit : Converting the high-frequency output from the detection winding to a DC signal
Magnetic resistance DC conversion circuit Auto-toner output VATS Main CPU (LGC board)
12
Drive winding
Detection winding
(Developer material)
Magnetic circuit
Fig. 12-504 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 12 - 7 e-STUDIO3511/4511 DEVELOPER UNIT
When the toner density is low: Toner ratio to the carrier in the developer material decreases. Magnetic resistance decreases. Detection output increases. Auto-toner output VATS increases. When the toner density is high: Toner ratio to the carrier in the developer material increases. Magnetic resistance increases. Detection output decreases. Auto-toner output VATS decreases.
12
12 - 8
12.5.4 Black developer unit lifting mechanism (1) General descriptions In the black developer unit, the drive from the developer motor is transmitted to cam with the black developer lifting clutch and this promotes the lifting movement of the black developer unit to contact or release against the photoconductive drum. When developing color images, (Y, M or C), the black developer unit escapes contact with the drum. When developing black images each color developer unit releases from the drum by rotating its revolver and the black developer unit contacts with the drum instead. Black developer contact position detection sensor detects whether the black developer unit is at the developing position or at the escape position. (2) Construction Black developer lifting clutch An electromagnetic clutch contacts or releases the black developer unit against the drum. The clutch movement lifts the developer unit up and down by rotating the cam. Black developer contact position detection sensor Detects whether the black developer unit is at the contact position or release position. This sensor detects the shield plate. L is output when contacting and H is output when releasing.
12
Black developer contact timing detection sensor Controls the black developer lifting clutch. This sensor outputs reference timing signals for controlling ON/OFF of the black developer lifting clutch. H is output when releasing and L is output when contacting. The sensor controls the power supply to turn OFF the clutch after detecting the output alteration (L to H or H to L).
12 - 9
12.6 Color Developer Unit

12.6.1 Functions a. Color developer material The developer material consists of the carrier and toner. The carrier is made of electrically conductive ferrites which is 30-100 m and the toner is made of the resin particle which is 5-20 m. Since the developer material deteriorates after a long time use, periodic replacements are needed. b. Mixer unit The carrier and toner are frictionized each other when the developer material is stirred. Then the carrier is positively charged (+) and the toner is negatively charged (), and the toner is adhered by the electrostatic force. c. Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller) These aluminum rollers have magnets inside. The developer material is pulled by these magnets to form a magnetic brush. The magnets are fixed at their position so only the sleeve rotates. By this rotation, the developer material is transported to the developer sleeve. Then the magnetic brush formed at the developer sleeve sweeps over the drum surface and thus development is performed.
12
d. Doctor blade The doctor blade controls the amount of the developer material from the transport sleeve so that the magnetic brush of the developer material can contact with the drum surface properly.
12 - 10
12.6.2 Color developer unit drive section The color developer motor drives the color developer unit. Connection and disconnection of the developer motor drive is made by ON/OFF of the color developer drive clutch. The drive is connected when it is ON and disconnected when it is OFF. The transmitted drive operates the mixers.
Developer sleeve
Doctor blade Mixer-R Mixer-F

Fig. 12-601
12
Gear (G21)
Coupling (G20)
Gear (G18)
Gear (G19)
Gear (G19/G27) Gear (G27)

Fig. 12-602
12 - 11
12.6.3 Color auto-toner sensor circuit (1) General descriptions The color auto-toner sensor detects the toner amount on the color developer sleeve with the reflection-type photosensor, differing from the black auto-toner sensor. Light-receiving elements of diffuse reflection in this sensor detect the toner amount on the sleeves with the light amount reflected from the sleeve surface. It detects the toner amount at the first forward position from the developing position. When the toner runs out, it supplies the toner from the toner cartridge with the color toner supply auger driven by the color developer toner supply clutch. Also, the color auto-toner sensor has a shutter which opens and closes by the solenoid. It prevents stain to the sensor and calibrates the sensor with the reflection from the shutter.
Execution control unit

PWA-SYS
Control panel
GA
BC-RAM
Display
CPU
12
Color toner cartridge sensor Color developer toner supply clutch control signal Color developer toner supply clutch Color auto-toner sensor Shutter driving signal Shutter solenoid
Driver
Driver
GA LCA301 CPU
D/A converter
OP-AMP
Toner density signal Color developer unit Color toner cartridge
PWA-LGC
Fig. 12-603
12 - 12
(2) Functions of the color auto-toner sensor a. Initializing function: When unpacking or replacing developer material This sensor automatically adjusts the light amount of sensor to make the detected value of toner density of new developer material by auto-toner sensor equal to the fixed value. Also, the detected value by the standard calibration plate is stored in memory after this adjustment. b. Toner density stabilizing function: The difference between the toner density on the sleeve and the toner density at the initialization mentioned above is detected. Then the difference is adjusted to maintain the density at a certain level. The detected value of auto-toner sensor is corrected in comparison with the detected value by the standard calibration plate not to be affected with temperature, stain and deterioration. Through the following phases, the toner density is kept constant. Toner is consumed. Toner density decreases. Output change of the auto-toner sensor is detected at the preceding position to the developing position. Drives the developer motor at the developing position. Drives the color developer toner supply clutch. Supplies the toner for a specified period of time. The same procedure is repeated for other two colors. c. Toner-empty detection/clear function: Detects toner being empty in the toner cartridge. Drives toner motor. Output of the auto-toner sensor is not changed. Toner density is not changed. Detects toner being empty (Toner-empty detection function). Clears toner-empty. Drives toner motor. Supplies toner from the toner cartridge. Output of the auto-toner sensor is changed. Toner density recovers to its normal value. Toner-empty is cleared. (Toner-empty clear function)
12
12 - 13
(3) Operations of the color auto-toner sensor When the toner density is low: Toner ratio to the carrier in the developer material decreases. The light reflection amount decreases. Detection output (voltage) decreases. When the toner density is high: Toner ratio to the carrier in the developer material increases. The light reflection amount increases. Detection output (voltage) increases.
12.6.4 Color toner supply 1. The color developer unit whose toner needs to be supplied moves to the developing position. 2. The developer unit is driven and the toner is supplied for a regulated period of time. 3. The drive is stopped and the unit moves to the color toner density detection position to detect the density. 4. When the toner density detected is higher than the regulated value, it moves to the escape position. When the toner density detected is lower than the regulated value, it repeats the procedure 1 to 3 for
12
five times. If the toner density is still lower than the regulated value, it is judged as toner empty and the unit moves to the escape position. 5. Procedure 1 to 4 is repeated for other color developer units when the toner supply is needed.
12 - 14
12.7 High-Voltage Transformer Output Control Circuit

Developer bias is supplied from high-voltage power supply to the developer sleeve and the toner image on the developer sleeve is transferred onto the photoconductive drum. A color developer bias and a black developer bias are output separately. Each developer bias consists of DC and AC which has an independent ON/OFF control. At DC, D/A converter adjusts the level of output value in both color and black modes since each mode has a different control condition.
Color developer sleeve D/A converter
KDVVR CDVVR
PWA-HVT
CPU
Gate array
KDVDON-0 LCA301-2
Buffer
KVDAON-0 CDVDON-0 CDVAON-0
Black developer sleeve
12
Fig. 12-701
Outputs adjustment value of the developer bias (DC) in the NVRAM to the main processor. Outputs control voltage data from the main CPU to the D/A converter. Analog conversion by the D/A converter. Outputs control voltage Vc to the developer bias transformer. The developer bias transformer generates output voltage proportional to the control voltage Vc by ONsigned. * Adjustment of the control voltage Vc (change of adjustment data) is performed in the adjustment mode.
12 - 15

[A] Black developer unit (A-1) Black developer unit (1) Open the front cover and take out the toner bag ( Chapter 2.5.1 [A]). (2) Turn the black developer unit lifting lever to the position where a clock hand could be at 9 oclock. Remove 2 screws and take off the black developer unit cover.
Fig. 12-801
Black developer unit cover
Black developer unit lifting lever
(3) Disconnect 2 connectors and remove 1 screw. Pull out the black developer unit.
Black developer unit
Connector
12
(A-2) Developer material (1) Take off the black developer unit ( 12.8 (A-1)). (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the upper cover. Chapter
Fig. 12-802
Upper cover
Fig. 12-803
(3) Discharge the developer material.
Fig. 12-804
12 - 16
(4) Pour the developer material.
Fig. 12-805
Note: When installing the upper cover, make sure the urethan seal is covered by the upper cover.
Urethan seal
Upper cover
Fig. 12-806
12
(A-3) Auto-toner sensor (1) Discharge the developer material ( 12.8 (A-2)). (2) Disconnect 1 connector, remove 1 screw and take off the auto-toner sensor. Chapter
Auto-toner sensor
Fig. 12-807
(A-4) Doctor blade (1) Discharge the developer material ( 12.8 (A-2)). (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the right cover. Chapter
Right cover
Fig. 12-808
12 - 17
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor blade.
Doctor blade
Fig. 12-809
(A-5) Developer sleeve (1) Discharge the developer material ( 12.8 (A-2)). (2) Take off the right cover ( take off the front cover. Chapter 12.8 (A-4)). (3) Remove 3 screws. Disconnect 1 connector and Chapter
Front cover
12
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the polarity adjustment plate. Note: Before disassembling, record (mark if any) the scale pointed by the polarity adjustment lever. Then match the polarity adjustment plate at the scale previously recorded when reassembling. (5) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket.
Bracket
Fig. 12-810
Polarity adjustment plate

Fig. 12-811
(6) Remove 3 screws and take off the rear cover.

Rear cover
Fig. 12-812
12 - 18
(7) Front side: Remove the following parts installed on the shaft of the developer sleeve in order: Bushing, collar, roller, bearing-1, E-ring, bearing-2 and oil seal. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: Page 12-23
Fig. 12-813
(8) Rear side: Remove the following parts installed on the shaft of the developer sleeve in order: E-ring, bushing, collar, roller, bearing-1, E-ring, gear, pin, bearing-2 and oil seal. (9) Take off the developer sleeve. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: Page 12-23
Developer sleeve
Fig. 12-814
12
(A-6) Mixer (1) Discharge the developer material ( 12.8 (A-2)). (2) Take off the developer sleeve ( (A-5)). (3) Front side: Remove the following parts installed on the shaft of each mixer in order: E-ring, bushing-1 and bushing-2. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: Page 12-23 (4) Rear side: Remove the following parts installed on the shaft of each mixer in order: E-ring, gear, bearing and oil seal. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: Page 12-23
E-ring
Bushing-2
Chapter
Chapter 12.8
E-ring
Bushing-1
Fig. 12-815
Gear
E-ring
Fig. 12-816
12 - 19
(5) Take off the mixer from the hole of front side.
Mixer
Fig. 12-817
[B] Color developer unit (B-1) Developer material (1) Remove 2 screws and take off the toner holder by rotating it.
12
Notes: 1. When installing the toner holder, rotate the holder with hooking the magnet roller side of it.
Fig. 12-818
Fig. 12-819
2. When installing the toner holder, be careful not to peel the seal.
Fig. 12-820
12 - 20
(2) Discharge the developer material.
Fig. 12-821
(3) Pour the developer material.
Fig. 12-822
12
(B-2) Doctor blade (1) Discharge the developer material ( 12.8 (B-1)). (2) Remove the urethan seal. (3) Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor blade. Chapter
Urethan seal
Doctor blade
Fig. 12-823
(B-3) Developer sleeve (1) Discharge the developer material ( 12.8 (B-1)). (2) Remove the urethan seal ( polarity adjustment plate. Note: Before disassembling, record (mark if any) the scale pointed by the polarity adjustment lever. Then match the polarity adjustment plate at the scale previously recorded when reassembling.
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 12 - 21 Fig. 12-824
Chapter
Chapter 12.8 (B-2)).
(3) Front side: Remove 1 screw and take off the
Polarity adjustment plate
(4) Remove the following parts installed on the shaft of the developer sleeve in order: C-ring, bearing-1, C-ring, E-ring, bearing-2 and oil seal. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: Page 12-23
Fig. 12-825
(5) Rear side: Remove 1 screw and take off the gear assembly.
Gear assembly
12
(6) Remove the following parts installed on the shaft of the developer sleeve in order: E-ring, bearing, gear, bearing and oil seal. (7) Take off the developer sleeve. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: Page 12-23
Fig. 12-826
Developer sleeve
Fig. 12-827
(B-4) Mixer (1) Discharge the developer material ( 12.8 (B-1)). (2) Take off the developer sleeve ( (B-3)). (3) Front side: Remove the following parts in order: E-ring, bushing-1 and bushing-2. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: Page 12-23
Bushing-1
Fig. 12-828
Chapter
E-ring
Bushing-2
Chapter 12.8
E-ring
12 - 22
(4) Rear side: Remove the following parts in order: E-ring, gear, bearing or bushing, and oil seal. * Procedure for replacing an oil seal: Page 12-23
Gear
E-ring
Fig. 12-829
(5) Take off the mixer from the hole of front side.
Mixer
Fig. 12-830
12
Outside
<<Procedure for replacing an oil seal>> 1. Take off the oil seal by hooking out its inside with a fine screwdriver and such. 2. Push in a new oil seal parallel to the frame, bushing and so on with paying attention to its direction (as shown by the figure at right). 3. Spread the grease (Alvania No.2; about 2-ricegrains amount) all around the inside diameter. Note: Wipe off the grease which has run off to the inner side of the oil seal.
Fig. 12-831
Inside
Grease
Oil seal
12 - 23
[C] Black developer lifting unit (1) Take off the black developer toner supply unit ( Chapter 11.7 [K]). (2) Remove the harnesses from 5 harness clamps. Disconnect 3 connectors and remove 2 screws and 2 springs. Take off the black developer lifting unit. Note: The springs on both front and rear sides differ in the active coils (length of spring). When installing, pay attention to its active coils (length of spring). Front side: 20 (longer) Rear side: 18 (shorter) (3) Disconnect 1 connector and release the latches. Then take off the black developer contact timing detection sensor.
Spring
Fig. 12-832
Spring
12
Black developer contact timing detection sensor
Fig. 12-833
(4) Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the black developer contact position detection sensor with the whole bracket.
Black developer contact position detection sensor
Fig. 12-834
12 - 24
[D] Black toner supply unit (1) Take off the laser optical unit ( [A]). (2) Take off the transfer belt unit ( [A]). (3) Take off the front cover ( (4) Take off the toner bag ( 12.8 [A]). (6) Take off the cleaner unit ( 11.7 [F]). (8) Take off the front lower cover ( [D]). (9) Take off the front right cover ( [E]). (10) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket of the front cover opening/closing switch. (It is not necessary to disconnect the connectors.) (11) Remove 1 screw and 1 clip, take off the transfer belt contact lever. And then, take off the shaft.
Shaft Lever
Chapter 8.6 Chapter 14.7
Chapter 2.5.1 [A]). Chapter 2.5.1 [A]). Chapter

Fig. 18-835
Switch bracket
(5) Take off the black developer unit (
Chapter 11.7 [A]). Chapter
(7) Take off the discharge LED unit (
12
Clip
Fig. 12-836
(12) Remove 2 screws and take off the cleaner rail stay.
Cleaner rail stay
Fig. 12-837
12 - 25
(13) Take off the black toner cartridge. (14) Remove 2 screws, release the harness from the hook and pull out the toner case by rotating it a little.
Toner case Hook
Harness
Fig. 12-838
Toner supply unit
12
(16) Disconnect 2 connectors and take off the toner supply unit by lifting up and pulling out toward you to release it from the catch.
Fig. 12-839
Connector
Fig. 12-840
(17) Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector from the bracket. Then take off the black toner cartridge switch with the whole bracket.
Black toner cartridge switch
Fig. 12-841
12 - 26
(18) Remove 2 screws and take off the toner motor.
Toner motor
Fig. 12-842
[E] Black toner supply auger unit (1) Take off the black toner supply unit ( 11.7 [K]). (2) Take off the black developer lifting unit ( Chapter 12.8 [C]). (3) Remove 1 screw and take off the cleaner rail stay. Chapter
Cleaner rail stay
Fig. 12-843
12
Black toner supply auger unit
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the black toner supply auger unit.
Fig. 12-844
12 - 27
12
12 - 28
13. REVOLVER UNIT

The revolver unit has three colors (yellow, magenta and cyan) of developer units and three colors of toner cartridges inside. The revolver rotates 120 degrees in a clockwise direction to move each color developer unit to the developing position, and thus color development is performed. At black development, the revolver rotates to move them to the escape position not to contact with the photoconductive drum.
13.2 Construction
This chapter explains about the following units, parts and control circuits related to the revolver unit. Refer to Chapter 12 for the color developer unit and Chapter 9 for the developer motor drive unit. Revolver motor Developer motor drive unit Color toner Color developer unit Color toner cartridge sensor Color auto-toner sensor
Color auto-toner sensor Revolver motor
Color toner cartridge sensor
13
Revolver home position sensor Revolver unit

[Revolver unit sectional view] Fig. 13-201
13 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 REVOLVER UNIT
13.3 Functions
(1) Revolver motor The revolver unit rotates with the drive of the revolver motor (two-phase stepping motor). The revolver home position sensor detects its home position. (2) Developer motor drive unit The developer motor drives the color developer unit and the toner supply auger in the revolver unit. This drive is connected and disconnected by the color developer unit drive clutch and the color toner supply clutch. Only the color developer unit at the developing position is driven by this motor. (3) Color toner cartridge The color toner cartridge and the color developer units are fitting each other to prevent misinstallation of the color toner cartridge. Therefore, the revolver unit has no device preventing misinstallation. (4) Color developer unit The color developer units must be in the revolver unit to perform color development. Since the revolver unit has no device to detect misinstallation, be careful not to install the wrong unit. Refer to Chapter 12 for details. (5) Color toner cartridge sensor
13
This sensor detects the installation fault of the color toner cartridge. It is an optical reflection sensor detecting the installation fault with the reflecting light from the reflection section. The color toner cartridge is detected at the toner cartridge replacement position. (6) Revolver home position sensor This sensor is a transmissive type light sensor detecting the revolver unit home position. The position detection is performed at initialization. "Call for service" if it does not detect the position in a specified period of time.
13 - 2
13.4 Drive of Revolver Unit

The drive from the revolver motor is transmitted to the gear at the external layer of the revolver unit rear side. Then the revolver unit rotates clockwise.
Revolver motor (G15)
Revolver unit (G135)
Revolver home position sensor
Fig. 13-401
13
13 - 3
13.5 Revolver Motor Drive Circuit

13.5.1 Revolver motor The revolver motor (two-phase stepping motor) drives over the DRV board circuit.
24V
RVMA-0 PG00 RVMB-0 PG01 CPU PG02 RVMD-0 PG03 SDK03M PD1 LCA301 PD2 PD3 RVMC-0 SDK03M
FET RVMA RVMC FET FET RVMB RVMD FET 2SK2466 x 4 Revolver Motor
PWA-F-LGC
PWA-DRV
13
Fig. 13-501
13 - 4
13.6 Operation
13.6.1 Home position detection The revolver unit detects its home position at every warming-up after the power is turned ON or the front cover is opened/closed since this unit is driven by the stepping motor. The home position is the point where the revolver home position sensor detects the shielded part in the revolver unit. 13.6.2 Escape position movement The color developer units (C, M and Y) are escaped from the developing position when developing black image by rotating the revolver unit. This escaping movement is performed after every home position detection. The escape position is where these color developer units are during warming-up. The movement always starts from the escape position when printing starts. 13.6.3 During warming-up The home position detection and escape position movement are performed consecutively during warmingup. Then the revolver unit operations such as toner supply and image quality control are performed according to the conditions of the equipment. 13.6.4 During printing The revolver unit moves in order, as follows: Escape position (black image development) Cyan image developing position Magenta image developing position Yellow image developing position Escape position (printing completed) In addition to the basic movement mentioned above, the revolver operations such as toner supply and image quality control are performed according to the conditions of the equipment. 1. Image quality control is performed immediately before the printing operation according to the conditions of the equipment. 2. The revolver unit stays at the escape position to perform the black image development. 3. The revolver unit moves to the cyan image developing position after the completion of black image development. 4. The cyan developer unit is driven and performs developing. At the same time, the density of magenta toner is detected and the detection result is stored in memory. 5. The revolver unit moves to the magenta image developing position after the completion of cyan image development. 6. The magenta developer unit is driven and performs developing. At the same time, the density of yellow toner is detected and the detection result is stored in memory. 7. The revolver unit moves to the yellow developing position after the completion of magenta image development. 8. The yellow developer unit is driven and performs developing. At the same time, the density of cyan toner is detected and the detection result is stored in memory. 9. The revolver unit moves to the escape position to perform black image development after the completion of yellow image development. 10. If any of color toner is judged as the low density, the revolver unit supplies the toner. 11. Procedure 2 to 10 is repeated when printing more than 1 page. 12. Printing finishes. Image quality control is performed according to the conditions of the equipment.
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 13 - 5 e-STUDIO3511/4511 REVOLVER UNIT
13
13.6.5 Color toner supply 1. The color developer unit whose toner needs to be supplied moves to the developing position. 2. The developer unit is driven and the toner is supplied for a regulated period of time. 3. The drive is stopped and the unit moves to the color toner density detection position to detect the density. 4. When the toner density detected is higher than the regulated value, it moves to the escape position. When the toner density detected is lower than the regulated value, it repeats the procedure 1 to 3 for five times. If the toner density is still lower than the regulated value, it is judged as toner empty and the unit moves to the escape position. 5. Procedure 1 to 4 is repeated for other color developer units when the toner supply is needed. 13.6.6 During image quality control 1. A black test pattern is formed on the transfer belt while the revolver unit is at the escape position. 2. The revolver unit moves to the cyan developing position after the completion of the black image development and a cyan test pattern is formed. 3. It moves to the magenta developing position after the completion of the cyan image development and a magenta test pattern is formed. 4. It moves to the yellow developing position after the completion of the magenta image development and a yellow test pattern is formed. 5. It moves to the escape position after completion of the yellow image development. 6. The image quality sensor reads the image density of four colors and feedbacks to the image quality control. 7. Procedure 1 to 7 is repeated for one to six times until the specified gradation characteristic and image density are obtained.
13
13 - 6

[A] Color toner cartridge (1) Rotate the revolver to the toner cartridge replacement position. Note: Perform the Test Mode (03) on the control panel. Yellow toner cartridge moves to the replacement position: 03-452 Magenta toner cartridge moves to the replacement position: 03-453 Cyan toner cartridge moves to the replacement position: 03-454 (2) Open the front cover. Take off the color toner cartridge while pressing the knob. [B] Color developer unit (1) Take off the color toner cartridge ( 13.7 [A]). (2) Take off the left cover ( replacement position. a. When rotate the revolver manually, a-1. Lift up the revolver lock lever. a-2. Rotate the revolver in the direction of white arrow until it is locked. Note: Do not touch the sleeve with bare hands. b. When rotate the revolver automatically, Start up the Test Mode (03) and use the following codes. Yellow developer unit moves to the replacement position: 03-455 Magenta developer unit moves to the replacement position: 03-456 Cyan developer unit moves to the replacement position: 03-457
Lock lever
Fig. 13-702 Fig. 13-701
Chapter
Holder
Chapter 2.5.1 [F]).
(3) Rotate the revolver to the color developer
13
13 - 7
(4) Loosen 2 screws on each holder and take off 2 holders. (5) Pull out and take off the color developer unit. If the other color developer units still need to be replaced, repeat the procedure (3) to (5). When rotate the revolver unit manually, push down the revolver lock lever and rotate it a little in the direction of white arrow, and then follow the procedure a. Note: When installing the color developer unit, pay attention to the direction of the holder.
[REAR]
[FRONT]
[REAR]
[FRONT]
Fig. 13-703
[C] Revolver motor
13
(1) Take off the rear cover ( ( Chapter 2.5.2 [A]).
Chapter 2.5.1 [P]).
(2) Take off the LGC board with the whole case (3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 4 screws and take off the revolver motor with the whole bracket.
Connector
Fig. 13-704
[D] Color toner cartridge sensor (1) Take off the receiving tray ( [B]). (2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw and take off the color toner cartridge sensor with the whole bracket. Chapter 2.5.1
Connector
Color toner cartridge sensor
Fig. 13-705
13 - 8
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the color toner cartridge sensor.
Fig. 13-706
[E] Color auto-toner sensor / Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid (1) Take off the receiving tray ( [B]). (2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 3 screws. Then take off the color auto-toner sensor unit. Chapter 2.5.1
Color auto-toner sensor unit
Connector
Fig. 13-707
(3) Remove 2 screws, disconnect 1 connector and take off the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid.
Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid
13
Connector
Fig. 13-708
(4) Remove 2 screws and 1 spring and take off the stay.
Stay
Spring
Fig. 13-709
13 - 9
(5) Remove 1 E-ring and shaft and take off the color auto-toner sensor case.
Shaft
Color auto-toner sensor case
E-ring
Fig. 13-710
(6) Remove 2 screws and take off the color autotoner sensor.
Color auto-toner sensor
Fig. 13-711
[F] Revolver home position sensor
13
(1) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw. Then take off the revolver home position sensor with the whole bracket.
Revolver home position sensor
Fig. 13-712
[G] Color developer unit drive gear / Color toner supply drive gear (1) Take off the color developer unit ( 13.7 [B]). (2) Release 2 latches and take off the holder. Then take off the color developer unit drive gear and color toner supply drive gear. Chapter
Fig. 13-713
13 - 10
Notes: 1. When installing, insert the shaft of the holder into the revolver unit securely. 2. Apply the grease to the shaft after the replacement of the gears.
Grease Grease
Fig. 13-714
[H] Revolver unit (1) Take off all of the color developer units ( Chapter 13.7 [B]). (2) Take off the cleaner unit ( Chapter 11.7 [A]). Note: When taking off the cleaner, make sure that all the color developer units are taken off in advance. Otherwise the drum surface may be scratched depending on the position of the revolver unit (e.g. developing position). (3) Take off the receiving tray ( [B]). (4) Take off the left rear cover ( [G]). (5) Take off the color toner cartridge sensor ( Chapter 13.7 [D]). (6) Take off the color auto-toner sensor ( Chapter 13.7 [E]). (7) Take off the internal cooling fan ( 13.7 [I]). (8) Take off the laser optical unit ( [A]). (9) Release 2 latches take off the laser cooling duct cover (rear side). (10) Take off the revolver home position sensor ( Chapter 13.7 [F]).
Inner cover
13
Chapter Chapter 8.6
(11) Remove 2 screws and take off the inner cover.
Fig. 13-715
13 - 11
(12) Remove 2 screws and take off the laser cooling duct cover (front side).
Fig. 13-716
(13) Take off the developer motor drive unit ( Chapter 9.5 [A]). (14) Remove 1 screw and take off the lock lever.
13
Lock lever
Fig. 13-717
(15) Remove 5 screws and the stay. (Remove 1 of 5 screws from the rear side of the equipment.)
Stay
Fig. 13-718
13 - 12
Bracket
Fig. 13-719
(17) Remove the stopper attached on the front side of the revolver rotary shaft. (18) Push in the bearing to the inside of the frame and take it off from the frame.
Fig. 13-720
(19) Slide the revolver to the front and take off the bearing attached on the rear side of revolver rotary shaft from the rear frame. Take off the revolver unit with the bearing.
13
Fig. 13-721
Note: Do not unscrew the red painted screws (6 pcs.) on the revolver unit after taking off the revolver unit.
Fig. 13-722 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 13 - 13 e-STUDIO3511/4511 REVOLVER UNIT
[I] Internal cooling fan (1) Take off the receiving tray ( [B]). (2) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws. Then take off the internal cooling fan together with the duct. Chapter 2.5.1
Fig. 13-723
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and remove 2 screws. Then take off the internal cooling fan.
Fig. 13-724
13
13 - 14
14. TRANSFER UNIT

14.1 General Descriptions
The transfer unit transfers the toner image formed on the photoconductive drum to the transfer belt, and then transfers it to the paper. The transfer of the toner image from the photoconductive drum to the transfer belt is called 1st transfer and the transfer from the transfer belt to the paper is called 2nd transfer. To reproduce a color image, maximum four color images are overlaid on the transfer belt and the overlaid image is then transferred to the paper. Namely, the transfer belt turns four times for printing of one image. The transfer belt rotates with the main motor drive.
14.2 Construction
Transfer belt home position sensor-2 1st transfer roller Drive roller-2 Tension roller Transfer belt Drive roller-1 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor
Used toner auger 2nd transfer roller
Idling roller Transfer belt cleaning blade Drum Transfer belt home position sensor-1
14
Fig. 14-201
14 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 TRANSFER UNIT
14.3 Functions
(1) Transfer belt The transfer belt is made by forming resin which has an electrical resistance with high precision. The main motor drive rotates the transfer belt drive roller and that makes to rotate the transfer belt as well. 1st transfer roller When the 1st transfer bias from high-voltage power supply is applied, the toner is transferred from photoconductive drum to the transfer belt. The spring presses to contact the transfer belt with the photoconductive drum. Transfer belt cleaning blade Removes the residual toner, paper dust or foreign objects on the transfer belt surface. Transfer belt contact clutch performs contact/release movement. Transfer belt cleaner contact clutch Performs contact/release movement between the transfer cleaning blade and transfer belt. Used toner auger Transports the scraped residual toner and paper dust to the toner bag. The transfer belt cleaner auger motor drives this auger. Drive roller-1 Rotates the transfer belt. This roller is driven by the transmitted drive from the main motor. Tension roller Applies the tensile force to the transfer belt with its spring. Idling roller Retains the contacting position of the transfer belt and the photoconductive drum. Drive roller-2 Contacts the transfer belt cleaning blade to the transfer belt easily. Also retains the contacting position of the transfer belt and the photoconductive drum.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
14
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10) Transfer belt home position sensor-1 and 2 Detects the home position of transfer belt. This reflection type sensor detects the reflection tape inside of the transfer belt. (11) 2nd transfer roller When the 2nd transfer bias from high-voltage power supply is applied, the toner is transferred from the transfer belt to the paper.
14 - 2
(12) 2nd transfer roller drive clutch This clutch is an electromagnetic clutch which transmits the drive to rotate the 2nd transfer roller. This rotation drive is supplied from the transport motor. It transmits the drive when the clutch turns ON and stops transmitting when the clutch turns OFF. It starts the transmission before the 2nd transfer roller contacts with the transfer belt and holds the drive until the release movement is completed. (13) 2nd transfer roller contact clutch This clutch is an electromagnetic clutch which contacts or releases the 2nd transfer roller to the transfer belt. The 2nd transfer roller contacts when this clutch turns ON and releases when it turns OFF. Since the transport motor is its drive source, the clutch needs to be ON as long as they are contacting. It also controls the clutch not to turn more than 180 degrees by the spring and stopper. (14) 2nd transfer roller cleaning brush When the toner is remaining on the 2nd transfer roller, it may stain the rear side of the paper. This brush cleanses the 2nd transfer roller to prevent stain. In addition, the 2nd transfer section needs a periodical cleaning since this section has no mechanism discharging scraped toner. (15) 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor This sensor is a photointerrupter detecting whether the 2nd transfer roller is at its contacting position or releasing position. (16) Paper clinging detection sensor When the thin paper which is out of specification passes through, the thin paper may cling to the transfer belt surface. In this case, the paper clinging to the belt cannot be removed in a usual jam processing and thus a service call occurs. To prevent this, the sensor detects whether the thin paper is clinging to the transfer belt or not, and processes this case as a paper jam.
14
14 - 3
14.4 Outline of 1st transfer

(1) The transfer belt contacts with the photoconductive drum. Power voltage is applied through the 1st transfer roller and it transfers the toner onto the transfer belt. (2) The transfer belt home position sensor-2 detects its home position and overlays four color images. (3) When the transfer of the toner image from the transfer belt to the paper is completed in 2nd transfer, residual toner on the transfer belt is scraped off by the transfer belt cleaning blade.
14.5 Outline of 2nd transfer

(1) The 2nd transfer roller stays at the released position from the transfer belt in 1st transfer. (2) Upon the completion of 1st transfer, the 2nd transfer roller starts to rotate and moves to the transfer position. (3) After an electrode bias is applied on the 2nd transfer roller, the toner image is transferred from the transfer belt to the paper. (4) Upon the completion of 2nd transfer, the 2nd transfer roller escapes to the releasing position.
14
14 - 4
14.6 High-Voltage Power Supply

High-voltage power supply outputs the voltage of positive/negative polarity. When the voltage of positive polarity is supplied to the 2nd transfer roller, the toner will be supplied from the intermediary belt to the paper. When the voltage of negative polarity is supplied to the 2nd transfer roller, the toner on the 2nd transfer roller is transferred to the transfer belt reversely. The toner on the transfer belt is eliminated by the cleaning unit and thus cleaning of the 2nd transfer roller is performed.
2nd transfer roller
CPU
D/A converter
LCA-301-1
DVDON-0 DVAON-0
BUFFER
PWA-HVT
+1000V, -1000V
Fig. 14-601
14
14 - 5

[A] Transfer belt unit Note: Wearing gloves is recommended to avoid direct touch by bare hands to the transfer belt surface. (1) Take off the drum cleaner unit ( [A]). (2) Take off the receiving tray ( [B]). (3) Take off the tray back cover ( [C]). (4) Unlock the fixing lever on the rear side by rotating it. (5) Unlock the fixing lever on the front side by sliding it. (6) Remove 1 screw and take off the fixing lever on the front side. Chapter 2.5.1
Fig. 14-701
1 2
Chapter 11.7 Chapter 2.5.1
14
(7) Disconnect 3 connectors. Note: Make sure to connect each connector to the socket in the same color as that of the connector.
Fig. 14-702
Fig. 14-703
e-STUDIO3511/4511 TRANSFER/TRANSPORT UNIT
14 - 6
(8) Loosen 3 screws and take off the bracket.
Bracket
Fig. 14-704
(9) Lift up the transfer belt cleaning unit and move it out to the front side temporarily. Then place the unit on the rear frame and front frame.
Transfer belt cleaning unit

Fig. 14-705
(10) Pull out the transfer belt unit. Notes: 1. When installing or taking off the transfer belt unit, be careful not to scratch the transfer belt. 2. Do not touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands.
14
Transfer belt unit

Fig. 14-706
[B] Transfer belt Note: Wearing gloves is recommended to avoid direct touch by bare hands to the transfer belt surface. (1) Take off the transfer belt unit ( [A]). (2) Remove 2 clips and take off the shaft by sliding it to the rear side. Note: When installing the shaft, insert the narrow part of the shaft into the stay on the rear side and fit it into the front side by sliding it.
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 14 - 7 Fig. 14-707
Chapter 14.7
(3) Remove 1 screw and 2 stand plates.
Stand plate (long) Stand plate (short)
Fig. 14-708
Fig. 14-709
(5) Install the stand plate (short) on the rear side of the transfer belt unit using the screw which is removed in step (3).
14
Stand plate (short)

Fig. 14-710
(6) Stand the transfer belt unit with its rear side on the bottom. (7) Remove 3 screws and the stay.
Stay
Fig. 14-711
14 - 8
(8) Install the stand plate (long) on the front side of the transfer belt unit using the screw which is removed in step (7).
Stand plate (long)
Fig. 14-712
(9) Stand the transfer belt unit with its front side on the bottom. (10) Remove 3 screws. (11) Incline the transfer belt unit so that the shaft is pulled in the unit. Then remove the stay while the shaft is hidden in the unit.
Stay Shaft
Fig. 14-713
(12) Narrow the distance of rollers and pull out the transfer belt unit. Notes: 1. When installing the transfer belt, make sure it is set at the center not to be moved aside. 2. Make sure that the reflection tape inside of the belt is on the rear side. 3. Do not touch the transfer belt surface with bare hands. 4. Be careful not to scratch the transfer belt. [C] 1st transfer roller (1) Take off the transfer belt ( Chapter 14.7 [B]).
1st transfer roller
Fig. 14-714
1 1
14
2
Transfer belt
Idling roller
(2) Remove 1 screw and the plate spring. (3) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket. Then take off the 1st transfer roller and idling roller.
Plate spring Bracket
1 2
Fig. 14-715
14 - 9
[D] Transfer belt home position sensor-1 (1) Take off the transfer belt ( Chapter 14.7 [B]).
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the cover.
Cover
Fig. 14-716
(3) Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the transfer belt home position sensor-1.
Connector
Transfer belt home position sensor-1

Fig. 14-717
[E] Transfer belt home position sensor-2 (1) Take off the transfer belt ( Chapter 14.7 [B]).
Cover
14
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the cover.
Fig. 14-718
(3) Remove 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the transfer belt home position sensor-2.
Transfer belt home position sensor-2
Connector
Fig. 14-719
14 - 10
[F] Transfer belt cleaning unit (1) Take off the drum cleaner unit ( [A]). Note: When installing the transfer belt cleaning unit, make sure to take off the drum cleaner unit in advance since it may scratch the drum. (2) Take off the transfer belt unit ( [A]). (3) Disconnect 2 connectors and take off the transfer belt cleaning unit. Note: Do not incline the transfer belt cleaning unit steeply since the toner may fall off. [G] Transfer belt cleaning blade / Blade seal (1) Take off the transfer belt cleaning unit ( Chapter 14.7 [F]). (2) Remove 2 blade seals on both ends of the transfer belt cleaning blade. Notes: 1. When putting the blade seal, push the seal firmly in the directions of the arrows in the figure at right. Make sure that there is no gap between the blade and seal. 2. Do not mix up the blade seal for front side and one for rear side since they differ each other. (3) Remove 2 screws and take off the transfer belt cleaning blade. Note: Make sure not to touch or damage the edge of the blade.
Blade seal
Fig. 14-721
Chapter 11.6
Chapter 14.7
Transfer belt cleaning unit
Fig. 14-720
14
Cleaning blade
Fig. 14-722
14 - 11
[H] Transfer belt cleaner auger motor / Transfer belt cleaner clutch (1) Take off the transfer belt cleaning unit ( Chapter 14.7 [F]). (2) Release 2 latches and take off the cover.
Cover
Fig. 14-723
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket on the front side.
Bracket
Fig. 14-724
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket on the rear side.
14
Bracket
Fig. 14-725
(5) Remove 2 springs.
Fig. 14-726
14 - 12
(6) Separate the transfer belt cleaning unit into 2 parts.
Fig. 14-727
(7) Release the latch and take off the gear.
Gear
Fig. 14-728
(8) Remove the harness clamp. Remove 1 screw and take off the transfer belt cleaner auger motor with the whole bracket.
Harness clamp
14
Fig. 14-729
(9) Remove 2 screws and take off the transfer belt cleaner auger motor from the bracket.
Transfer belt cleaner auger motor
Fig. 14-730
14 - 13
(10) Remove 1 clip and take off 1 bushing. Then take off the assembly of the shaft and clutch.
Shaft Clutch
Fig. 14-731
(11) Remove 1 clip. Remove 1 E-ring and take off the bushing-1, and then take off the bushing2 with the shaft. Take off the transfer belt cleaner clutch.
Bushing-2
Transfer belt cleaner clutch
Clip
Bushing-1 E-ring
Fig. 14-732
[I] 2nd transfer roller (1) Open the 2nd transfer unit.
Cover
14
(2) Release 4 latches and take off the cover.
Fig. 14-733
(3) Remove 1 clip. Take off the 2nd transfer roller while pushing the shaft.
Clip
2nd transfer roller

Fig. 14-734
14 - 14
(4) Remove the following parts from the 2nd transfer roller in order. Front side: Collar-1, clip, bushing-1 collar-2 and spring Rear side: Collar-3, one-way clutch and bushing-2
Collar-1 Collor-2 Clip Bushing-1 Spring One-way clutch
Bushing-2 Collor-3
Fig. 14-735
[J] 2nd transfer unit (1) Take off the ADU ( Chapter 17.5 [A]). Chapter 10.4 [A]). Chapter 2.5.1
Slide hinge
(2) Take off the bypass unit ( [L]).
(3) Take off the right rear cover (
(4) Remove 2 clips and 1 spring, and then take off the slide hinge on the front side.
Spring Clip
Fig. 14-736
(5) Open the 2nd transfer unit. Disconnect 2 connectors, then remove 1 screw and the ground wire. Remove 1 harness clamp.
Harness clamp
Ground wire
14
Connector
Fig. 14-737
(6) Take off the 2nd transfer unit.
2nd transfer unit

Fig. 14-738
14 - 15
[K] 2nd transfer roller contact clutch (1) Take off the 2nd transfer unit ( [J]). (2) Take off the 2nd transfer roller ( [I]). (3) Remove 4 screws. Remove 1 screw and 2 ground wires, and then take off the transfer guide.
Fig. 14-739
Chapter 14.7 Chapter 14.7
Transfer guide
Ground wire
(4) Remove 2 tension springs. (5) Remove 2 clips. (6) Take off the bushing-1 and slide the bushing2.
Bushing-2
Bushing-1
Fig. 14-740
(7) Remove 1 screw and the pin. (Front side) (8) Remove 1 screw and the pin. (Rear side) (9) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the case.
Pin Case Pin
14
Fig. 14-741
(10) Remove 1 clip and take off the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch.
Clip
2nd transfer roller contact clutch

Fig. 14-742
14 - 16
[L] 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor (1) Take off the 2nd transfer unit ( [J]). (2) Take off the case ( Chapter 14.7 [K]). (3) Disconnect 1 connector. Then take off the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor. Chapter 14.7
2nd transfer roller position detection sensor
Fig. 14-743
[M] 2nd transfer roller drive clutch (1) Take off the 2nd transfer unit ( [J]). (2) Take off the case ( Chapter 14.7 [K]). (3) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket. Chapter 14.7
Bracket
Fig. 14-744
(4) Disconnect 1 connector and release the harness from the harness clamp. (5) Loosen 1 setscrew. Then take off the 2nd transfer roller drive clutch. Note: When installing the 2nd transfer roller drive clutch, tighten the setscrew while pushing the clutch against the shaft to the end.
Set screw
14
2nd transfer roller drive clutch

Fig. 14-745
[N] Paper clinging detection sensor (1) Take off the transfer belt unit ( [A]). (2) Open the ADU and 2nd transfer unit. (3) Remove 1 screw to slide the bracket downward. Then disconnect 1 connector.
Bracket
Chapter 14.7
Fig. 14-746
14 - 17
(4) Remove 1 screw. Then take off the paper clinging detection sensor from the bracket.
Paper clinging detection sensor
Bracket
Fig. 14-747
14
14 - 18
15. IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL

In this equipment, image quality is controlled by the image quality sensor. At this control, image forming conditions are automatically adjusted so as to minimize the change in the image density or tone reproduction caused by the fluctuation of working environment or life of supply items. At first, the image quality sensor operates to output reflected light amount voltage when no toner image is formed on the transfer belt. The output voltage is then converted analog-to-digital to be output as the reflected light amount signal. The light source amount voltage of the sensor is adjusted to correspond with the value set in advance and the output value of reflected light amount signal at this adjustment is stored. This output value is considered as the reading of the belt surface. Next, the sensor outputs the reflected light amount signal when a test pattern is developed on the transfer belt. This output value is considered as the reading of the toner image. The difference between the reading of the transfer belt and that of the toner image is defined as toner adhesion amount. Image forming conditions are determined in approximating this toner adhesion amount to the value set in advance. In addition, a shutter operated by the solenoid is equipped on the light receiving/emitting surfaces to prevent stain to the sensor and to calibrate the sensor with the reflection from the shutter.
15.2 Principle of the Sensor

Image quality sensor projects light onto the transfer belt and the toner image (test pattern) developed on the transfer belt to output a voltage corresponding to the reflected light amount. The output voltage is then converted analog-to-digital into reflected light amount signal. The CPU calculates the toner adhesion amount to control the image forming conditions.
Transfer belt
15
Test pattern (toner image)
Light emitting element
Light receiving element Reflected light amount voltage A/D
Reflected light amount signal CPU D/A Light source amount signal
Light source amount voltage
Fig. 15-201
15 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL
15.3 Flow Chart of Control Procedure

Start of control procedure (when meeting the image quality control starting conditions such as power-ON) [1] The surface potential of photoconductive drum is estimated with the drum thermistor and temperature/humidity sensor. [2] Reference image forming conditions are set. [3] The sensor light source is adjusted. [4] The test pattern is formed on the transfer belt. Return to [4]. [5] Toner adhesion amount of test pattern (high density) is calculated. [6] Judgment (whether the toner adhesion amount of the test pattern is within the acceptable range or not) NO Modifies the image forming conditions. YES

[7] Toner adhesion amount of the test pattern (low density) is calculated.
15
[8] Judgment (whether the toner adhesion amount of the test pattern is within the acceptable range or not) NO Modifies the image forming conditions. YES The test pattern is formed on the transfer belt. [9] The image forming conditions are determined and stored in NVRAM. [10] Control procedure is completed. (The determined image forming conditions will be reflected on subsequent copies.)
e-STUDIO3511/4511 IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL 15 - 2 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
Return to [8].
15.4 Construction
Image quality sensor: Projects the amount of light on the transfer belt and outputs the voltage corresponding to the reflected light amount from the transfer belt or the toner image on the transfer belt. D/A converter: Laser optical system: A/D converter: Image forming process: CPU: Converts light source amount signal into the voltage to the sensor. Performs test pattern exposure (for toner image formation). Converts the output voltage from the sensor into digital values and outputs them to the CPU. Performs charging, laser exposing and developing processes. Performs steps [1] to [10] described previously.
Image forming process
Transfer belt
Image quality sensor
15
Laser optical system
D/A
A/D
Various image forming conditions Light source amount signal Reflected light amount signal
CPU
Fig. 15-401
15 - 3

[A] Image quality sensor / Image quality sensor shutter solenoid (1) Take off the fuser unit ( [A]). (2) Open the 2nd transfer cover. Remove 2 screws and disconnect 2 connectors. Take off the image quality sensor assembly. Note: Insert latches of sensor case to the hole of the plate securely when installing. (3) Remove 2 screws and take off the image quality sensor. (4) Remove 2 screws and take off the image quality sensor shutter solenoid. Chapter 16.7 [A]). Chapter 14.7
Connector Image quality sensor assembly
Take off the transfer belt unit (
Fig. 15-501
Image quality sensor shutter solenoid
Image quality sensor

Fig. 15-502
15
15 - 4
16. FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION

Toner is fused by applying heat and pressure on the transferred image on the paper which is transported to the fuser unit. The paper is then transported to the receiving tray, paper exiting options or ADU. The fuser unit consists of the IH coil, fuser roller, pressure roller, fuser belt, separation roller, separation fingers, separation plate, cleaning roller, oil roller, thermistors, thermostat, exit roller, exit sensor, etc.
Exit roller Exit sensor Separation plate Cleaning roller Oil roller Fuser roller
Separation roller Fuser belt
Thermostat Separation finger Thermistor IH coil Pressure roller

Fig. 16-101
16 16.2 Operation
The fuser belt is located between the fuser roller and pressure roller. The fuser roller is pressed with the spring force from the pressure roller side, and it is rotated by the transport motor drive. The fuser belt also rotates simultaneously. Then the paper transported to the fuser unit is hold between the fuser belt and pressure roller and the toner is fused on the paper with heat and pressure. After this, the separation fingers, belt separation mechanism and separation plate separate the paper from the fuser belt. Then the paper is transported to the receiving tray, paper exiting options or ADU through the exit roller. In addition, the IH coil in the fuser roller does not structurally rotate. The thermistors control the temperature of fuser roller and detect temperature abnormalities. If the temperature becomes excessively high, the thermostat is opened to stop the power supply to the IH coil. When transporting OHP film or thick paper in color modes, the transport speed is lowered to the range from 1/2 to 1/4 in order to improve fusing efficiency. The exit motor which drives the exit roller is decelerated at the same time.
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 16 - 1 e-STUDIO3511/4511 FUSER UNIT/PAPER EXIT SECTION
16.3 Functions
(1) IH coil (IH: Induction Heating) The IH coil is inside the fuser roller and applies the induction heating to the fuser roller. This IH coil is divided into two parts; the main IH coil heating the center of the fuser roller and the sub IH coil heating both ends of the fuser roller. Each part turns ON/OFF individually controlling the balance of electric supply so that the fuser roller can be kept at a certain temperature without wasting electric power on any paper size. (2) Fuser roller The fuser roller is a metal roller which generates heat spontaneously with eddy current produced by the electromagnetic induction of IH coil. The fuser belt is heated by this self-heating of this roller, and then the toner is fused on the paper. (3) Pressure roller The pressure roller is a sponge roller which assures the nip amount between the fuser roller and fuser belt. The pressure arm and spring press the fuser roller and fuser belt. The toner is fused effectively by the pressure of this roller. (4) Fuser belt The fuser belt is hanged up between the fuser roller and separation roller and fuses the toner image on the paper transported by being heated. The thin fuser belt enables to reduce warming up time and mode changing time. To prevent the fuser belt from adhering toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. (5) Separation roller The separation roller is an extra small ceramic roller coated with the fluororesin tube. When the fuser
16
belt is tensed and driven by the separation roller, the fuser roller drives the fuser belt and the paper between the fuser belt and pressure roller is separated from the fuser belt (belt separation method). (6) Separation fingers Five separation fingers are installed above the pressure roller to separate the paper stuck on the pressure roller. (7) Separation plate The separation plate is installed above the separation roller to cover the insufficient separation often occurs at color printing - the mode that the toner is much adhered.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 FUSER UNIT/PAPER EXIT SECTION
16 - 2
(8)
Cleaning roller / Oil roller Silicone oil is contained inside of the oil roller to supply a proper amount of oil to the fuser belt, and this enables to remove the residual toner and paper dust (preventing offsetting phenomenon). Also, the cleaning roller is a fluorinated aluminum roller which removes the residual toner and paper dust adhered on the oil roller.
(9)
Main thermistor/Sub thermistor This thermistor detects the temperature of the fuser belt to maintain it in a certain temperature range (actually around 180C) between the lower limit causing the poor fusing and the upper limit causing the high temperature offsetting. When the temperature of the fuser belt is lower than the preset temperature, it turns ON the power supply to the IH coil, and when it is higher than the preset temperature, it cuts off the supply. The main thermistor detects the temperature of the center part of the fuser belt and the sub thermistor detects the temperature of the both ends of the fuser belt. It also detects the slight difference of the temperatures at the center and both ends of the fuser belt to control the balance of ON/OFF of the center/side parts of IH coil to keep the fuser belt at a certain temperature.
(10) Front edge thermistor It detects the temperature abnormality at the both ends of the fuser belt. This area may be overheated without heat absorption by paper since paper does not pass through this area. This thermistor is not related to the temperature control of the fuser belt. (11) Thermostat The thermostat cuts off the power supply to the IH coil by opening itself if the fuser belt becomes abnormally hot as a result of the problem such as thermistor malfunction. The thermostat for this equipment is used to prevent abnormal operation. When the thermostat detects any abnormality, it must be replaced as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit.
16
(12) Exit sensor This sensor detects the arrival of the leading or trailing edge of the paper at the exit roller of the fuser unit. It also detects paper jams in the fuser unit paper exit section and trailing edge of paper turned over for duplex printing. (13) Exit motor The exit motor is a stepping motor which drives the exit roller and bridge unit (option). It reduces the transport speed down to the range from 1/2 to 1/4 according to the type of paper such as OHP film or thick paper in color modes. (14) Exit roller This roller transports the paper from the fusing section to the receiving tray, paper exiting options or the ADU and is driven by the exit motor.
16 - 3
16
16.4.1 Configuration
Front edge thermistor Sub thermistor Main thermistor Coil Fuser roller
16.4 Heater Control Circuit
Thermostat Noise filter
Power code

Breaker Coil output 5V SW Power supply for Photocoupler CPU Electric power setting Error signal IH1 ON signal IH2 ON signal IH power source/ drive circuit AC input N L Fuse 5V SW Temperature control circuit Photocoupler Control circuit including CPU IH 250C upper limit circuit LGC AC line DC line
Fig. 16-401
16 - 4
[Block diagram of fuser unit and IH control circuit]
16.4.2 Heating principle of IH Heater The magnetic field is generated by applying a high frequency current to the IH coil inside the fuser roller, which then generates the eddy current in it. When the eddy current flows, the Joule heat is generated by the resistance element of the fuser roller, which is then heated. In the IH coil method, the thermal efficiency is higher than the lamp method because the fuser roller is directly heated. IH coil is divided into two parts to decrease the temperature difference between the center and both ends of the fuser roller.
Main IH coil Current flowing on the surface of the fuser roller
High frequency power source

A
Sub IH coil
Magnetic field
Eddy current
Current flowing inside the fuser roller
[Image of Current Flowing form A to B]

Fig. 16-402
Control circuit high frequency current Fuser roller IH coil Smoothing circuit C2 (IGBT) C3 C1 D1 T1 Current input CPU Photocoupler Tr2 IGBT drive Tr1 IGBT drive
16
Monitoring input current Voltage input I/F circuit on LGC board Monitoring input current
[Book Diagram of High Frequency Power Supply]

Fig. 16-403
16 - 5
16.4.3 IH control circuit interface The IH control circuit uses a photocoupler as an insulation against the secondary circuit. The interface signals are as follows.
CN No. CN455-2 CN455-3 CN455-4 CN455-5 CN455-6 CN455-7 CN455-8 CN455-1 CN456-1 CN456-4 CN456-5 CN456-2 CN456-3 Name of single +5VSW H1PWR1 H1PWR2 H1PWR3 H2PWR1 H2PWR2 H2PWR3 IH2 ON IH1 ON H1ERR1 H1ERR2 SG IHDUTY LGC to IT Main/sub switching signal IH to LGC IH status signal (*Note) LGC to IH IH coil energization permitting signal LGC to IH Switching signal of power setting Direction Definition
(*Note) IH status signal When the temperature (due to insufficient cooling) of the switching element (IGBT) is abnormal: 12: Coil is abnormal, IH FAN OFF After a certain period of time Error [C480] Main/sub coil continuous energization error (15 sec.): 12: Coil is abnormal, IH FAN OFF After a certain period of time Error [C480] When the upper limit of the power voltage is abnormal: 10, 11, 14: Initializing After a certain period of time Error [C470] 07: Ready After a certain period of time Error [C470] When the lower limit of the power voltage is abnormal: 10, 11, 14: Initializing After a certain period of time Error [C470] 07: Ready After a certain period of time Error [C470] Defective circuits : 13: Abnormal circuit, IH coil abnormality Error [C490] Ready state after the initialization: 01: Ready
16
16 - 6
16.4.4 Relation between system configuration and IH output for NAD, SAD, TWD:
System configuration Equipment only Equipment and RADF
(*1)
Warming up (*2)
Ready
Printing 1080W
Energy saving mode
Automatically OFF
Warming up time
1160-1300W
1020W
Equipment, RADF (*1) and FIN Equipment, RADF (*1), FIN, and HPU Equipment, RADF
(*1)
1160-1260W 800W
960W 800W OFF
Approx 40 sec.
, 1140-1240W 940W
FIN, HPU and LCF Equipment, RADF (*1), FIN, HPU, LCF and FAX
for ASD, AUD, CND:

System configuration Equipment only Equipment and RADF
(*1)
Warming up (*2)
Ready
Printing 1080W
Energy saving mode
Automatically OFF
Warming up time
1160-1300W
1240W 1180W
Equipment, RADF (*1) and FIN Equipment, RADF (*1), FIN, and HPU Equipment, RADF (*1), FIN, HPU and LCF Equipment, RADF (*1), FIN, HPU, LCF and FAX 1140-1240W 1160-1260W 700W
1120W
700W
OFF
Approx 40 sec.
16
1100W
* RADF: Reversing automatic document feeder, FIN: Finisher, HPU: Hole punch unit, LCF: Large capacity feeder, FAX: FAX unit (*1) The wattage lowers 50 W more when the scanning is performed from the RADF during warming up. (*2) AC power should be input voltage when the equipment is warming up (The lower the voltage is, the longer the warming up time becomes).
16 - 7
16.4.5 Temperature detection section To maintain the stable temperature of the fuser belt, the thermistor detects the temperature and controls ON/OFF of the IH coil. Output from the thermistors is used to detect the abnormality. (1) Relation between the thermistor output voltage and surface temperature of the fuser belt:
Output voltages of thermistors [V] Approx. 0.30 Approx. 1.77 Approx. 3.28 Approx. 3.66 Approx. 3.81 Approx. 4.03 Surface temperatures of fuser belt [oC] 40 100 150 170 180 200
(2) Control of the surface temperature of the fuser belt:

Warming-up Ready (180C) During printing (180C)
180
Temperature of fuser belt 0
IH coil ON
OFF
ON OFF ON OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
16
Fig. 16-404
(3) Temperature control for the both ends of the fuser belt During the continuous printing, the temperature of the both ends of the fuser belt (areas where the paper does not pass on) generally tend to be higher than that of the other areas (areas where the paper passes on). The temperature of the ends are detected by the front edge thermistor, and when it reaches 250C, the heater is automatically turned OFF regardless of the temperature of the area where the paper passes on.
16 - 8
(4) Temperature control at energy saving mode This equipment has the following two types of temperature control for saving energy and returns to ready status to perform printing in each mode upon printing request. The period of time from the printing request to this mode can be set in the Setting Mode (08) or by an from administrator. Administrator setting procedure: [USER FUNCTIONS] button [ADMIN] (input of administrators password) [GENERAL] [ENERGY SAVER] Auto Power Save Mode (Setting Mode (08-205)): When the printing is not performed in a specified period of time (default setting: 15 min.) after the previous printing is completed, the equipment enters to Auto Power Save Mode. ON/OFF of IH coil is controlled to maintain the fuser belt surface temperature at 100oC. Auto Shut Off Mode (Setting Mode (08-206)): When the printing is not performed in a specified period of time (default setting: e-STUDIO3511: 60 min. / e-STUDIO4511: 90 min.) after the equipment entered to Auto Power Save Mode, the equipment then enters to Auto Shut Off Mode to turn OFF the IH coil.
Warming-up Ready During printing Fixed time (08-205) Auto Power Save Mode Fixed time (08-206) 180 Auto Shut Off Mode
100 Temperature of fuser belt IH coil ON 0 Fig. 16-405 OFF
16
16 - 9
(5) Thermistor/heater status counter control To enhance the safety of the fusing section unit, CPU provides the following protection: When the third [C410] error has occurred after two consecutive [C410] errors, the IH coil is not turned ON and error [C410] is displayed immediately even if an operator turns OFF the power and back ON. However, if the equipment goes into a ready state normally with the thermistor/heater status counter 1 or below, the counter is cleared to 0. If the error codes [C410] to [C450] are displayed and still not cleared even thought the thermistor, thermostat and IH coil have been repaired (and the power ON/OFF does not clear the error), check the Setting Mode (08-400) to set the thermistor/heater status counter to 0. Reference * The thermistor/heater status counter never has values other than 0 to 19. If the IH coil does not turn ON and the service call [C410] is displayed immediately after the power is ON, ensure the thermistor/heater status counter is 2 or over. If it is 2 or over, be sure to check the thermistor, thermostat and IH coil. Reset the counter to 0 (setting mode (08-400)) after repairing them, then turn ON the power. If the thermistor/heater status counter is 20 or over (e.g., 21), the data in NV RAM or NV RAM itself may possibly have been ruined due to causes such as leakage from the chargers. Check the bias, high-voltage transformers and charge wires to see if any of them is defective, and also look through all the data in the NV RAM.
16
e-STUDIO3511/4511 FUSER UNIT/PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 10
(6) Temperature detection configuration Thermistor is a device whose resistance decreases as it detects a higher temperature. Thus its input voltage to CPU changes and then CPU judges whether this change is normal or abnormal. If one of the fuser belt thermistors is broken, the control circuit judges that the fuser belt temperature is extremely low and keeps turning the IH coil ON. As a result, the fuser belt temperature rises, and possibly activates the thermostat which is a safety protection device. To prevent this in advance, CPU works to detect whether each thermistor is broken or not. Also, the thermistors constantly check the temperature of IH coil to prevent it from excessive heating by IH circuit abnormality, LGC circuit abnormality or thermistor abnormality. The thermistors automatically turn OFF the power when the temperature of IH coil exceeds the specified temperature.
+5 Sub thermistor
CPU
137
PC4/AN4
+5 Main thermistor
138
PC5/AN5
+5 Front edge thermistor
16
139
PC6/AN6
Fig. 16-406
16 - 11 e-STUDIO3511/4511 FUSER UNIT/PAPER EXIT SECTION
(7) Abnormality detection by the thermistors The following table shows the conditions judging the fuser belt temperature abnormality and detecting timing.
Checking timing Condition Power ON 1 2 Detecting 40C 1 2 Detecting 100C 1 Temperature judged Main thermistor 250C or above 40C or below 150C or above 250C or above 40C or below 250C or above 100C or below 2 Detecting 160C 1 40C or below 150C or above 250C or above 160C or below 2 Detecting ready temperature 1 40C or below 150C or above 250C or above Ready temp. or below 40C or below 160C or above 250C or above 1 40C or below 2 During printing 1 40C or below 160C or above 250C or above 40C or below 2 At paper jam 1 2 250C or above Sub thermistor 250C or above 150C or above 40C or below 250C or above 40C or below 250C or above 100C or below 150C or above 40C or below 250C or above 160C or below 150C or above 40C or below 250C or above Ready temp. or below 160C or above 40C or below 250C or above 40C or below 160C or above 40C or below 250C or above 40C or below 250C or above Front edge thermistor 250C or above 40C or below On usual C450 C440 On usual C440 On usual C430 C440 Fixed time C430 C440 Fixed time C430 C440 Fixed time C430 C440 Fixed time C410 Power ON C410 C440 Checking timing Error code C440
16
During ready status At energy saving mode
* Condtion: Priority of error checking.

e-STUDIO3511/4511 FUSER UNIT/PAPER EXIT SECTION 16 - 12 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
16.4.6 Abnormality in the IH control circuit When an abnormality is detected in the IH control circuit, it stops the power supply to the IH coil and displays a message Call for service. (1) IH control circuit CPU output level of the IH control circuit changes depending on the condition of IH coil. This output level goes through the photocoupler into the gate array.
LGC 5V SW
IH VDD
Gate array H1ERR1
PA3
CPU
PA4
H1ERR2
Fig. 16-407
16
(2) IH error
Port input value H1ERR1 Power ON In warming up Detecting 40C Initial abnormality IH power voltage abnormality IGBT high temperature abnormality / Continuous energization (15 sec.) IH circuit/coil abnormality In warming up Detecting 40C During ready status IH power voltage abnormality IGBT high temperature abnormality / Continuous energization (15 sec.) IH circuit/coil abnormality During ready status During printing IH power voltage abnormality IGBT high temperature abnormality / H L L H H H L H H L C490 C470 C480 C490 H L L H L H C490 C470 C480 L L L H1ERR2 L L H C470 C470 C480
Checking timing
Error content
Error code
At Energy Saving Mode Continuous energization (15 sec.) IH circuit/coil abnormality Normal
Initial abnormality: CPU (IH) abnormality is not cleared. IH power voltage abnormality: The input voltage becomes above 20% (approx.) or below 20% (approx.) of the rated voltage. IGBT high temperature abnormality: Overheating of IGBT or short- or open-circuit of IGBT temperature-detecting sensor. IH circuit abnormality: Abnormality in IH circuit IH coil abnormality: Temperature-detecting sensor in IH circuit is abnormal, or IH coil is open-circuited or wrongly installed.
16
16.5 Control Circuit of Exit Motor

The following is the control circuit of the exit motor. The exit motor is a stepping motor. The motor is turned ON/OFF and the direction of its rotation is switched by controlling the output timing of pulse signal (A0A1B0B1).
LGC
+5V
DRV
PG10 PG11 CPU PG12 PG13 5V SW
EXTMA-0 EXTMC-0 EXTMB-0 EXTMD-0
A B AB BB
A1 A0 B1 B0
EXTMA EXTMC EXTMB EXTMD
Exit Motor PG0 VREF STK672 LCA301 PG1
PG2
Fig. 16-501
16.6 Exit Motor Drive

The diagram shown below is the layout of the driving gears of the exit roller.
G24
Exit motor
16
G48 G16 G20

Exit roller (15)
G14
G22
Fig. 16-601

[A] Fuser unit (1) Take off the IH terminal cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [K]) (2) Disconnect 2 connectors and 4 faston terminals. Notes: 1. Make sure to hold the plastic part of the faston terminals when disconnecting them. 2. Make sure not to connect each terminal to the wrong position. (3) Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser unit.
RED (S )
BLUE (C )
WHITE
WHITE
Fig. 16-701
Fig. 16-702
[B] Oil roller (1) Take off the fuser unit ( Chapter 16.7 [A]).
Transport guide
(2) Open the jam access cover and transport guide.
16
Jam access cover
Fig. 16-703
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the cleaning unit by lifting it up. Note: When installing, fit 2 protrusions on the bottom of the cleaning unit into the holes of the frame securely.
Cleaning unit
Fig. 16-704
(4) Remove spring (B) on each end of the oil roller. (5) Take off the oil roller.
- Front side Spring (B)
Oil roller - Rear side Fig. 16-705
(6) Remove 1 bushing from each side of the oil roller.

Bushing
Fig. 16-706
Note: Install the oil roller according to the marking on the frame (the shaft end with a groove should point at the rear side).
16
Groove
Fig. 16-707
[C] Cleaning roller (1) Take off the oil roller from the cleaning unit ( Chapter 16.7 [B]). (2) Remove 1 E-ring and 1 bushing from the cleaning roller front side. Then take off the cleaning roller. (3) Remove the spring (A) on each end of the frame. Note: When installing, make sure that the oil roller rotates smoothly by turning the gear (C) of the cleaning roller manually for a several times.
Cleaning roller
Gear (C)
E-ring
Spring (A) Bushing

Fig. 16-708
(4) Remove 1 E-ring, the gear (C) and 1 bushing from the cleaning roller rear side.
Bushing
E-ring
Gear (C)
Fig. 16-709
[D] IH coil (1) Take off the fuser unit ( Chapter 16.7 [A]).
E-ring
(2) Release the harnesses from 5 harness clamps. Then remove 1 E-ring, 1 bushing and 2 screws.
Bushing
Fig. 16-710
(3) Pull out the bracket and IH coil. (4) Take out the IH coil from the bracket. Notes: 1. When installing, be sure to set the harnesses C and S of 4 harnesses on upper. 2. Make sure that there is not any scratch
C S
IH coil
16
or break on the white tube on the IH coil. 3. Make sure that there is not any peeling or scratch on the harness tube.
White tube Bracket
Fig. 16-711
[E] Fuser roller / Fuser belt guide Note: When installing/disinstalling the fuser roller, make sure not to remove the spring (shown in the figure at right) since the removal of this spring may have the fuser roller press to deform the thermistor.
Spring - Rear side Spring
- Front side -
Fig. 16-712
(1) Remove the cleaning unit ( (2) Remove the IH coil ( both sides.
Chapter 16.7 [B]).
Chapter 16.7 [D]).
(3) Push down the pressure releasing levers on (4) Remove 1 C-ring and 2 gears.
Pressure releasing C-ring lever

Fig. 16-713
Gear
(5) Remove 1 bearing.
Bearing
Fig. 16-714
(6) Insert a flat-head screwdriver into the slit of the fuser belt guide on the rear side. Then slide the plate while opening the slit by the flat-head screwdriver. Take off the fuser belt guide from the fuser roller. Note: Be careful not to scratch the fuser belt.
16
Fuser belt guide
Fig. 16-715
Fuser belt
Bracket
Fig. 16-716
(8) Take off the fuser roller. (9) Remove 1 C-ring, 1 bearing and 1 fuser belt guide from the fuser roller front side. Note: When installing, make sure that the fuser belt guide securely fits in the fuser roller groove. Also, make sure that the ring on the fuser belt guide securely fits in the groove on the belt restricting plate.
Fuser roller Fuser belt guide Bearing
Fig. 16-717
Ring
C-ring
[F] Fuser belt (1) Take off the fuser roller ( Chapter 16.7 [E]).
Fuser belt
Fuser belt unit
(2) Lift up the fuser belt unit and take it off. Note: Be careful not to scratch the fuser belt. Lay the fuser belt on the clean place to prevent the belt from the dust.
Fig. 16-718
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket on the front side.
16
Bracket - Front Fig. 16-719
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket on the rear side.
Bracket - Rear Fig. 16-720
(5) Remove 1 E-ring. Then remove 1 bearing.

E-ring
Bearing
Fig. 16-721
(6) Lift up the separation roller by sliding it. (7) Take off the fuser belt.
Fuser belt Separation plate
Separation roller
Fig. 16-722
Note: When installing the fuser belt, place a sheet of paper between the separation plate and fuser belt in order to prevent the fuser belt from being scratched by the separation plate. Keep the paper between then until the fuser roller is installed.
Fuser belt Paper
Separation plate
16
Fig. 16-723
[G] Separation finger (1) Take off the fuser roller ( Chapter 16.7 [E]).
Fuser belt
Fuser belt unit
(2) Lift up the fuser belt unit and take it off. Note: Be careful not to scratch the fuser belt. Lay the fuser belt on the clean place to prevent the belt from the dust.
Fig. 16-724
(3) Confirm that the pressure releasing levers on both sides are up. Then loosen each 1 screw on both front and rear sides.
- Front side -
- Rear side -
Fig. 16-725
(4) Remove 2 springs.
Spring
Fig. 16-726
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the separation finger unit.
16
Separation finger unit
Fig. 16-727
(6) Remove the spring of each separation finger.
Separation finger Spring

Fig. 16-728
[H] Pressure roller (1) Take off the fuser belt unit ( 16.7 [G]). (3) Take off the pressure roller. Chapter 16.7 [F]). Chapter
(2) Take off the separation finger unit (
Pressure roller
Fig. 16-729
(4) Remove each 1 ring, 1 bearing and 1 bushing on both front and rear sides of the pressure roller.
Pressure roller
Bushing Bearing Ring
Fig. 16-730
[I] Thermostat (1) Take off the fuser unit ( take it off. Note: When installing, fit 2 protrusions on the bottom of the cleaning unit into the holes of the frame securely. Chapter 16.7 [A]).
Cleaning unit
(2) Remove 2 screws. Lift up the cleaning unit and
16
Fig. 16-731
(3) Release the harnesses from the harness clamps. (4) Remove 2 screws and take off the thermostat unit. Note: Be careful not to scratch the fuser belt.
Thermostat unit Fuser belt

Fig. 16-732
(5) Remove 2 screws and take off the thermostat from the bracket.
Thermostat
Bracket
Fig. 16-733
Notes: When installing, pay attention to the followings: 1. Make sure to fix the thermostat, and then harness terminal in order on the bracket. 2. Make sure to keep the gap between the fuser roller and thermostat is 0.7 mm to 2.0 mm while the fuser roller is pressed to the pressure roller.
Fig. 16-734
0.7-2.0mm
[J] Thermistor (1) Take off the fuser unit ( clamps. Chapter 16.7 [A]).
(2) Release the harnesses from the harness
16
Fig. 16-735
(3) Remove 1 screw of each thermistor and take off total 3 thermistors.
Fig. 16-736
(4) Remove each 1 screw and take off the thermistor from each bracket. Note: When installing, be careful not to deform the thermistor or the frame (plate). Also, make sure that the thermistor is in touch with the fuser belt.
Fig. 16-737
[K] Exit sensor / Exit finger / Transport guide (1) Take off the fuser unit ( Chapter 16.7 [A]).
Cover (A)
(2) Open the jam access cover and transport guide. (3) Remove 3 screws and take off the cover (A).
Fig. 16-738
(4) Remove 1 screw and plate spring. (5) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the exit sensor. (6) Remove 1 spring.
Connector
Spring
16
Plate spring Exit sensor
Fig. 16-739
(7) Remove 1 E-ring and pull out the shaft. Then remove 8 exit fingers and 1 actuator.
E-ring Actuator
Fig. 16-740
(8) Remove 1 screw. (9) Enlarge the frame and take off the transport guide.
2
Fig. 16-741
[L] Exit roller (1) Take off the fuser unit ( Chapter 16.7 [A]).
Exit roller cover (Shoulder screw)
(2) Open the jam access cover of the fuser unit. (3) Remove 2 screws (one of the front side is a shoulder screw) and take off the exit roller cover.
Fig. 16-742
(4) Remove 1 E-ring and 1 bushing from the exit roller front side.
Bushing
16
Exit roller E-ring
Fig. 16-743
(5) Remove E-ring, gear unit, E-ring and bushing in order from the exit roller rear side. Then take off the exit roller.
Gear unit
Bushing
Exit roller
E-ring E-ring
Fig. 16-744
[M] IH control PC board (IH board) (1) Take off the SYS board case ( [C]). (2) Take off the flywheel ( [L]). (4) Disconnect 2 connectors and 4 faston terminal ( Chapter 16.7 [A]).
IH board cover
Fig. 16-745
Chapter 2.5.2
Chapter 9.5 [A]). Chapter 2.5.1
(3) Take off the right rear cover (
(5) Remove 3 screws and take off the IH board cover. (6) Disconnect 2 connectors, remove 2 screws and take off the IH board case.
Connector
IH board case
Fig. 16-746
Connector
(7) Disconnect 4 connectors, remove 7 screws and take off the IH board. Notes: 1. Make sure not to connect each IH connection cable to the wrong position. 2. Tighten 4 screws of the IH connection cable completely (tightening torque: 1.17 - 1.56 Nm). 3. Since the IH control board is a highvoltage section, make sure to disconnect the power cable at maintenance. [N] IH control board cooling fan (1) Take off the IH board case ( [M]). (2) Remove 1 screw and take off the IH control board cooling fan cover. Chapter 16.7
IH connection cable
16
IH board
Fig. 16-747
IH control board cooling fan cover
Fig. 16-748
(3) Disconnect 1 connector and take off the IH control board cooling fan.
IH control board cooling fan
Connector
Fig. 16-749
16
FLOW
17. AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU)

The Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU) is a unit to automatically print on both sides of paper. A switchback method using the exit roller is adopted for the ADU of this equipment. A sheet of paper is switchbacked by the exit roller right after the printing operation (fusing operation) on one side is completed, and the reversed sheet is transported to the registration section for the other side of the sheet to be printed. The ADU mainly consists of the transport rollers and their drive system, paper guide and ADU entrance/ exit sensor.
Entrance guide
Upper transport roller
Paper guide ADU entrance sensor
Middle transport roller
ADU motor ADU exit sensor
Exit guide
17
Lower transport roller
Fig. 17-101
17 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT
17.2 Description of Operations

The back side printing (recording data of the back side of paper) is performed first by selecting duplex printing mode and pressing the [START] button. When the trailing edge of the paper passes the exit gate, the paper is switchbacked by the exit roller and transported into the ADU (the exit gate is closed with its own weight), and then the switchbacked paper is transported with acceleration. The transportation decelerates in front of the upper transport roller of the ADU. The front side printing (recording data of the front side of paper) is performed at the registration section. The paper passes through the exit gate again and is transported to the receiving tray to complete duplex printing. There are three methods of judging a paper jam: (1) whether the ADU entrance sensor is turned ON or not in a specified period of time after the switchback to the ADU started (E510). (2) whether the ADU exit sensor is turned ON or not in a specified period of time after the ADU entrance sensor is turned ON (E520). (3) whether the registration switch is turned ON or not in a specified period of time after the paper feeding from the ADU to the equipment (E110). If the ADU is opened during duplex printing, the ADU motor and ADU clutch are stopped, namely, ADU open jam occurs (E430). The equipment is never to be stopped during printing by interruption in any case except paper jam or service call. The operation of the duplex printing differs depending on the size of the paper; single-paper circulation and alternateness circulation. The figures in the following pages show the circulating operations during duplex copying. The numbers in the figures indicate the page numbers.
17
17 - 2
(a) Single-paper circulation With the paper larger than A4/LT size, duplex printing (back-side printing front-side printing) is performed for one sheet at a time as shown below.
(1)
(2)
(3)
2 1 2 4
4 1
(4)
(5)
(6)
17
4 2 1 4 2 1 3 2 3 1
(7)
(8)
Fig. 17-201
(9)
17 - 3
(b) Double-paper alternateness circulation With A4/LT size paper or smaller, duplex printing is performed for two sheets at a time as shown below. Back side of the 1st sheet Back side of the 2nd sheet Front side of the 1st sheet Front side of the 2nd sheet
2
(1)
(2)
(3)
4 2 4 4 1
17
(4)
(5)
4
(6)
2 1 3
3 1
(7)
Fig. 17-202 17 - 4
(8)
(c) Multiple-paper circulation With more than one sheet of A4/LT size paper or smaller, duplex printing is performed as shown below in a following order: (In case of 5 sheets) Back side of the 1st sheet ( Back side of the 3rd sheet ( Front side of the 3rd sheet ( Front side of the 5th sheet (
2
) Back side of the 2nd sheet ( ) Front side of the 2nd sheet ( ) Back side of the 5th sheet ( )
2
) Front side of the 1st sheet ( ) Back side of the 4th sheet ( ) Front side of the 4th sheet (
1 8 7
) ) )
6 5 9
3 10
2 2 4
(1)
(2)
2
(3)
(4)
2 1 6
(5)
4 3 3
(6)
6 5
(7)
6 5
(8)
10
10
17
(9)
8 8 7
( 10 )
10 9
( 11 )
( 12 )
10
10
( 13 )
( 14 )
( 15 )
Fig. 17-203 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 17 - 5 e-STUDIO3511/4511 AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT
17
(unit: msec)
5955 6990 8200 9230 11760 10440 11465 12795 14000 15030 16240 17270
Equipment
Exit sensor
0 5810 5950 8050 8785 10420 10285 11615 11905 13850 14795 16070

4835 5895 7075 8135 9315 10370 10635 11695 12875 13935 15115 16175 7770 8660 10005 10900 13575 14470 8340 9580 10575 13150 14145 15390 7935 9060 11655 10170 11055 11985 13730 14870 7430 9060 9670 11055 11655 11985 13235 14870
Registration sensor
Registration clutch
Timing chart for duplex copying from upper drawer (A4, 3 sheets)
17 - 6
ADU
ADU entrance sensor
ADU exit sensor
ADU clutch
ADU motor
(unit: msec)
6040 8070 11510 13840

0 6900 10050 12660 4915 10690 6990 12765 8830 11240 9405 11955 8990 10185 10690 12135 8510 10125 10690 12135
Equipment
Exit sensor
Registration sensor
Registration clutch
Timing chart for duplex copying from upper drawer (A3, 1 sheet)
17 - 7
ADU
ADU entrance sensor
ADU exit sensor
ADU clutch
ADU motor
17
17.3 Drive of ADU

When the ADU motor rotates to the direction A, the upper transport roller is rotated driven by the gears and belt. The ADU clutch is then turned ON and the middle transport roller and lower transport roller are rotated.
Upper transport roller
ADU motor
A Middle transport roller
ADU clutch
17
Fig. 17-301
17 - 8
17.4 Flow Chart

Exit motor reverse rotation ON
Specified time has passed
ADU motor ON
ADU entrance sensor ON?
No
Yes
Specified time has passed (Paper is transported to the first stopping position in ADU) ADU transport jam (E510)
Trailing edge of first paper turned ON the ADU exit sensor?
No
Yes
ADU motor ON
ADU motor stopped
ADU clutch ON
17
ADU exit sensor check the arrival
No
Yes
ADU transport jam (E520) Specified time has passed
A
Fig. 17-401
17 - 9
ADU paper feeding command signal received
No
Yes
ADU motor stopped ADU clutch OFF
ADU motor/clutch ON
ADU feeding operation started
Registration sensor ON?
No
Yes
Registration in process
ADU misfeeding (E110)
Registration process completed ADU motor stopped ADU clutch OFF
17
Next paper is ready for the registration
Fig. 17-402
17 - 10

[A] ADU (1) (2) Take off the right rear hinge cover and right front hinge cover ( Chapter 2.5.1 [N] [O]). Remove 1 screw, open the bypass tray and take off the bypass feed front cover.
Bypass feed front cover

Fig. 17-501
(3) (4)
Disconnect 1 connector and remove 1 screw fixing the ground wire. Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket.
Connector
Bracket
Ground wire Fig. 17-502
(5)
Open the ADU. Lift up the ADU a little and slide it to the rear side and take it off.
17
Fig. 17-503
[B] ADU inside rear cover (1) (2) Take off the ADU ( rear cover. Chapter 17.5 [A]).
ADU inside rear cover
Screw
Remove 2 screws and take off the ADU inside
Fig. 17-504
17 - 11
[C] ADU opening/closing switch (1) (2) (3) Take off the ADU ( ( Chapter 17.5 [B]). Chapter 17.5 [A]). Take off the ADU inside rear cover Disconnect the connector and release the latch to take off the ADU opening/closing switch.
ADU opening/closing switch
Fig. 17-505
[D] Paper guide (1) (2) Take off the ADU ( off the paper guide. Chapter 17.5 [A]). Release the fulcrum on the front side and take
Paper guide Fig. 17-506
[E] ADU cover (1) Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, and paper guide ( (2) Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [D]). Remove 4 screws and take off the ADU cover.
Screw
Screw
ADU cover
17
Fig. 17-507
[F] (1)
Rear latch Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]).
Spring
(2)
Remove the spring.
Fig. 17-508
17 - 12
(3)
Remove the screw and release the rear latch.
Screw
Rear latch Fig. 17-509
[G] Opening/Closing lever (1) Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( (2) Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]). Remove 2 screws and take off the opening/ closing lever.
Screw
Opening/Closing lever Fig. 17-510
[H] ADU entrance sensor, ADU exit sensor (1) Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( (2) Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]). Disconnect the connector and release the latch to take off the ADU entrance sensor.
ADU entrance sensor
Connector
17
Fig. 17-511
(3)
Disconnect the connector and release the latch to take off the ADU exit sensor.
Connector
ADU exit sensor Fig. 17-512
17 - 13
[I] (1)
ADU driving PC board (ADU board) Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]).
(2) (3) (4)
Remove the ADU inside rear cover ( Chapter 17.5 [B]). Chapter 17.5 [E]).
ADU board Fig. 17-513
Remove the ADU cover (
Disconnect 6 connectors and release 4 lock supports to take off ADU board.
[J] (1)
ADU motor Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]).
Binding band
(2)
Disconnect 1 connector and remove the binding band.
Connector
Fig. 17-514
(3) (4)
Remove 2 screws. Lift the ADU motor slightly and shift it to the direction of the arrow to take it off.
ADU motor
Screw
17
Fig. 17-515
[K] ADU gear unit (1) Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( (2) (3) Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]). Chapter 17.5 [J]). Take off the ADU motor ( unit. Note: Match the protrusion of clutch with the position shown in the figure when assembling.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT 17 - 14 Fig. 17-516 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC Screw ADU gear unit
Remove 3 screws and take off the ADU gear
[L] ADU clutch (1) Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]). Chapter 17.5 [J]). Take off the ADU motor ( Take off the ADU gear unit ( Chapter 17.5 [K]). Remove the screw and take off the ground wire. Disconnect 1 connector. Loosen 1 setscrew and take off the ADU clutch.
Ground wire
Screw
Connector Fig. 17-517 Setscrew ADU clutch
Fig. 17-518
[M] Upper transport roller (1) Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( (2) Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]). Remove 2 screws and take off the opening/ closing lever.
Screw
Opening/Closing lever Fig. 17-519
17
(3)
Remove the spring.
Spring
Fig. 17-520 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 17 - 15 e-STUDIO3511/4511 AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT
(4)
Remove the screw and release the rear latch.
Screw
Rear latch Fig. 17-521
(5)
Remove 4 screws and take off the bracket.
Screw Fig. 17-522
Bracket
(6)
Remove the clip, pulley, pin and belt on the rear side.
Pin
Pulley Belt Clip
17
Fig. 17-523
(7) (8)
Remove the clip on the front side. Remove 2 bushings and take off the upper transport roller.
Upper transport roller Bushing
Clip
Bushing Fig. 17-524 e-STUDIO3511/4511 AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT 17 - 16 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
[N] (1)
Middle transport roller Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]).
(2)
Take off the ADU board.
ADU board Fig. 17-525
(3)
Remove the clip, pulley, pin and belt on the front side.
Pin Belt Pulley Clip
Fig. 17-526
(4)
Remove the clip on the rear side.
Clip Fig. 17-527
17
(5)
Remove 2 bushings and take off the middle transport roller.
Bushing
Middle transport roller
Bushing Fig. 17-528 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 17 - 17 e-STUDIO3511/4511 AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT
[O] Lower transport roller (1) Take off the ADU, ADU inside rear cover, ADU opening/closing switch, paper guide, and ADU cover ( (2) (3) Chapter 17.5 [A] to 17.5 [E]). Take off the ADU motor, the ADU gear unit and ADU clutch. Remove the clip on the rear side.
Clip
Fig. 17-529
(4)
Remove the clip, pulley, belt and the pin on the front side.
Pin Belt Pulley Clip
Fig. 17-530
(5)
Remove 2 bushings and take off the lower

Bushing
transport roller.
17
Bushing Fig. 17-531
(6)
Remove 4 E-rings and take off 2 rollers. Notes: 1. The roller has a one-way clutch inside. When installing rollers, pay attention to the rotation direction. 2. Replace 2 rollers at a time.
E-ring
Roller E-ring Roller
E-ring
Fig. 17-532 e-STUDIO3511/4511 AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT 17 - 18 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
18. POWER SUPPLY UNIT

18.1 Construction
The power supply unit consists of an AC filter and insulation type DC output circuits. (1) AC filter Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the equipment from leaking to the outside. (2) DC output circuits Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part. The DC voltage is divided into the following two lines. a. Main line : Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process. Four kinds of voltage (+3.3V, +5.1V, +12V and 12V) are output when the main switch of the equipment is turned ON. b. Door switch line : Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process, being supplied via the door switch. Two kinds of voltage (+5.1VD and +24VD) are output only when the main switch of the equipment is turned ON and two doors (front cover and jam access cover) are closed.
18.2 Operation of DC Output Circuits

(1) Starting line output When the main switch of the equipment is turned ON, power starts supplying to all the lines only when two doors (front cover and jam access cover) are closed. (2) Stopping line output When the main switch of the equipment is turned OFF, PWR-DN signal is output after the instantaneous outage insurance time (20 ms or more) elapses and then the supply of each voltage stops. If the supply of voltage of the main line (+3.3VA, +5.1VA, +12VA, -12VA) stops earlier than the 24V line does, it may cause the damage of the electron device on each control circuit. To prevent this, the supply of these voltages stops after the PWR-DN signal is output and the minimum retaining time (+3.3VA/+5.1VA: 50 ms or more, +12VA/-12VA: 5 ms or more) elapses. (3) Output protection Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits (a fuse and internal protection circuit). This is to prevent the defectives (damage or abnormal operation of the secondary circuit) which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an overvoltage due to a short circuit between different voltages. If the protection circuit is activated (except the case the fuse is blown out), remove the causes such as short-circuit. Turn ON the power again 1 minute later to clear the overcurrent protection.
18
18 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
18.3 Output Channel

The followings are four output channels which are not linked with the door switch. (1) +3.3V +3.3VA +3.3VB +3.3VB +3.3VB (2) +5.1V +5.1VA +5.1VB +5.1VB : CN464 : CN464 : CN466 Pins 24 and 26 Pin 25 Pin 1 Output to the SYS board Output to the SYS board Output to the LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board), PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) +5.1VB +5.1VB +5.1VB +5.1VB (3) +12V +12VA +12VB +12VB (4) -12V -12VA -12VB : CN464 : CN464 Pin 9 Pin 3 Output to the SYS board Output to the SYS board : CN464 : CN464 : CN466 Pin 7 Pin 5 Pin 16 (*NAD/SAD/TWD models only) Output to the SYS board : CN467 : CN467 : CN468 : CN469 Pins 5 and 6 Pins 21 and 22 Pin 1 Pin 5 Output to the RADF Output to the SLG board Output to the finisher Output to the FIL board or FUS board : CN464 : CN464 : CN466 : CN467 Pins 13, 14, 15 and 16 Pins 19 and 20 Pin 3 Pins 17 and 18 Output to the SYS board Output to the SYS board Output to the LGC board Output to the SLG board
18
Output to the SYS board Output to the LGC board
18 - 2
The followings are two output channels which are linked with the door switch. (1) +5.1V +5.1VD (2) +24V +24VD1 : CN465 board) +24VD1 +24VD1 +24VD2 +24VD3 +24VD4 +24VD4 +24VD5 : CN469 : CN470 : CN465 : CN467 : CN467 : CN467 : CN468 Pins 1 and 2 Pin 1 Pins 5 and 6 Pins 1 and 2 Pin 9 Pins 11 and 13 Pin 3 Output to the PFP/LCF Output to the power supply cooling fan Output to the DRV board Output to the RADF Output to the SDV board Output to the SLG board Output to the finisher <<Output connector>> Not linked with the door switch CN464 CN466 CN467 CN468 CN469 For the SYS board For the LGC board, FAX board, CCL board (via LGC board), PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) For the SLG board, RADF For the finisher For the FIL board / FUS board Pins 1 and 2 Output to the LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC : CN466 Pins 11 and 12 Output to the LGC board
18
Linked with the door switch CN465 CN466 CN467 CN468 CN469 CN470 For the LGC board, DRV board, CCL board (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) For the LGC board For the SLG board, SDV board, RADF For the finisher For the PFP/LCF For the power supply cooling fan
18 - 3
18.4 Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormally with each part using the following table. Voltage +24VD1 Part Fuse type Polygonal motor F3:8A (Semi time-lag) Tray-up motor ADU motor Main motor Developer motor Transport motor Drum cleaner brush motor Transfer belt cleaner auger motor Toner motor Laser unit cooling fan 2nd transfer roller drive clutch 2nd transfer roller contact clutch Bypass feed clutch Registration clutch Upper transport clutch (high speed) Upper transport clutch (low speed) Lower transport clutch (high speed) Lower transport clutch (low speed) Upper drawer feed clutch Lower drawer feed clutch ADU clutch Color developer toner supply clutch Color developer drive clutch Black developer drive clutch Black developer lifting clutch Transfer belt cleaner contact clutch Bypass pickup solenoid Image quality sensor shutter solenoid Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid Discharge LED Key copy counter / Copy key card CCL Charger cleaner motor Power supply Power supply cooling fan PFP/LCF Bridge unit DRV Revolver motor F4:5A (Semi time-lag) Exit motor IH control board cooling fan Ozone exhaust fan Internal cooling fan RADF F5:4A (Semi time-lag) SLG Exposure lamp (lamp inverter) F6:4A (Semi time-lag) CCD drive circuit (CCD board) SLG board cooling fan Scanner unit cooling fan SDV Scan motor Finisher F7:5A (Semi time-lag)
18 - 4 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
Board/Unit LGC
18
+24VD2
+24VD3 +24VD4
+24VD5
IH
F3
+24VD1 CN465 +24VD1 CN469 +24VD1 CN470

F4
LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) PFP/LCF Power supply cooling fan DRV board RADF SLG board, SDV board Finisher LGC board
CN460
CN460

+24VD2 CN465 +24VD3 CN467 +24VD4 CN467 +24VD5 CN468 +5.1VD CN466 Reg.
F5 F6
*NAD/SAD/TWD models: Standard Main switch

F1
Breaker Door switch Noise filter

F7
Live FIL board AC DOOR
AC IN
Noise filter
Neutral
18.5 Configuration of Power Supply Unit
Switching power supply
18 - 5
F2
+3.3VA +3.3VB +3.3VB +3.3VB
CN464 CN464 CN466 CN467
SYS board SYS board LGC board SLG board
FUS board
*ASD/AUD/CND models: Standard *MJD model: Option
+5.1VA +5.1VB +5.1VB +5.1VB

ICP1
CN464 CN464 CN468 CN469
SYS board SYS board Finisher FIL board or FUS board
Noise filter
Reg.
+5.1VB CN466
AC MAIN +5.1VB CN467 +12VA -12VA +12VB +12VB -12VB CN464 CN464 CN464 CN466 CN464
LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board), PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) SLG board, RADF SYS board SYS board SYS board LGC board SYS board
18
18.6 Sequence of Power Supply
ON
700ms or lower
OFF
AC input
0ms to 200ms 3.2V or higher
+3.3VA (Linked with main switch)
3.2V or higher 0ms to 10ms or 200ms lower 4.95V or higher 4.95V or higher 10ms to 120ms 20ms or 10ms or higher higher 20ms or 50ms or higher higher
+5.1VA (Linked with main switch)
PWR-DN
Max. 20ms +12VA, -12VA (Linked with main switch) 11.4V or higher 200ms or lower
5ms or higher
0ms to 200ms 5ms or higher
11.4V or higher
0ms or higher
0ms or higher
PWR-EN
200ms or lower +3.3VB (Linked with main switch) 3.2V or higher 0ms or higher
+5.1VB (Linked with main switch) 0 ms to 200ms 4.95V or higher
18
+5.1VD (Linked with door switch) +12VB, -12VB (Linked with main switch) +24VD (Linked with door switch)
Lower limit of each rated voltage or higher +4.95V(R.V. +5.1V) +11.4V(R.V. +12V) -11.4V(R.V. -12V) -21.6V(R.V.+24V)
18 - 6
J662 2 2 3 3 1 1
WIRELESS LAN AC ADAPTER

+5V
FG (OPTION)
AC(N:OUT) AC (GND) AC(L:OUT)
J655 AC(N:MAIN) 1 NF AC(L:MAIN) 2 4 AC(L) 3 AC(N)
J656
INLET (AC IN) NS-FILTER (NOISE FILTER)

F
N A GND B L C
MAIN GND
G
AC(L:MAIN) AC(L:MAIN) 4
F2
MAIN-SW (MAIN-SWITCH)
J622 1 3 4 AC(L:DOOR) 2 AC(N:DOOR) 3 6 F1
NF
NF
J650
3 2 1
J650 3 3 2 2 1 1

J595 3 4 AC(N:MAIN) AC(N:MAIN) J460 1
18.7 AC Wire Harness
BREAKER PS-ACC AC-DC DC
J653
LOAD
AC-DC
DC
J469 1 2 3 4 5 6
+5.1VB SG
J647 AC-IN-YHM(N) AC-IN(L) AC-IN-YHM(N) AC-IN-YHM(N) 3 3 2 2 1 1
(
CN451 A CN450 B
COV-INTLCK-SW COVER OPENING/CLOSING INTERLOCK SWITCH
J546 1 2 THERMO-FSR IH-COIL CN453 CN452 J643 J642
FUSER
18 - 7
PS-IH PWA-F-FIL ASD,AUD,CND MODELS: STANDARD MJD MODEL: OPTION
J433 J431 AC(N) 3 4 AC(L) 3 2 1
SAD,TWD NAD,MODELS: STANDARD
CN454
J644 J644
J493 AC(N) 4 3 2 AC(L) 1 J494 1 2 AC(N) 3
PWA-F-FUS
J433
J657 DRM-N DRM-L 2 1
THERMO-DRM-DH
ASD,AUD,SAD, TWD,CND MODELS: STANDARD DRM-DH NAD,MJD MODELS: OPTION SCANNER
AC(L)
3 2 1
J495 SG 3 2 +5.1VB 1
RY
2 1
SG +5.1VB
RY
J432 1 2 3 AC(N:SCN) AC(L:SCN)
THERMO-SCN-DH J61 J62
J64 1 1 2 2 DH-SCN-N 1 1 DH-SCN-L 2 2 J652 J60 1 1 2 2 J63
SCN-R-DH SCN-L-DH
J432 1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6

+5.1VB SG
(DC LINE)
18
18
18 - 8
19. PC BOARDS
(1) PWA-F-SYS
19
19 - 1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 PC BOARDS
(2) PWA-F-LGC
19
19 - 2
(3) PWA-F-SLG
(4) PWA-F-CCD
(5) PWA-F-SDV
19
19 - 3
(6) PWA-F-DRV
(7) PWA-F-CCL
19
19 - 4
(8) PWA-F-LDR
(9) PWA-F-SNS
(10) PWA-F-ADU
19
19 - 5
(11) PWA-F-DSP
(12) PWA-F-KEY
19
19 - 6
(13) PWA-F-FIL (* NAD/SAD/TWD models: Standard)
(14) PWA-F-FUS (* ASD/AUD/CND models: Standard, MJD model: Option)
19
19 - 7
19
19 - 8
1-1, KANDA NISHIKI-CHO, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO, 101-8442 JAPAN
e-STUDIO3511/4511
File No. PLE03000200
2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION
All rights reserved
EXPLANATION OF SERVICE-PARTS LIST
1.
(1)
HOW TO READ THE PARTS LIST

Number of pieces The number of pieces in the list denotes total pieces used per unit. But the numbers in the list for PACKING MATERIAL and ACCESSORY denote total pieces used per machine. One pack of screws in the list includes 50 pieces. ABBREVIATED CODES QTY ..................... one piece PAC ...................... one pack 1/P ........................ one piece packed in polyethylene bag 1/S ........................ one piece packed in special pack 1/C ........................ one piece packed in carton box 1/PP ...................... one piece packed in paper and polyethylene bag 1/KP ..................... one piece packed in polyethylene bag with cardboard 1/D ........................ one piece packed in polyethylene-cushion bag 1/SB ...................... one piece packed in shielding bag N/A ....................... not available I ...................... INTERCHANGEABILITY STATUS
(2) (3)
QTY/PAC
P .................. PURPOSE A ................. ADD B ................. DELETE C ................. CHANGE D ................. QTY, CHANGE E .................. MISENTRY F .................. OMISSION
CURRENT NEW CURRENT NEW CURRENT NEW CURRENT NEW CURRENT NEW PARTS
MACHINE
A ................ LAST SUFFIX IS CHANGED B.C.D.E ......... PART NUMBER IS CHANGED
2.
(1)
HOW TO PLACE ORDER FOR PARTS

The parts handled as service parts are only those with their "Q'TY/PACK" column listed with a quantity other than "N/A***" or "SUPPLY". Those parts with "N/A***" are listed only for the purpose of showing the mechanical construction, those listed with "SUPPLY" are handled only as a sales item, and therefore both types of parts are not supplied as service parts. Orders for any parts which form a component of a semi-assembled unit are not acceptable. Note: All the screws and nuts used are ISO standard.
(2)
3.
REGION
NAD ............... 115V/60Hz, UL & CSA TWD .............. 110V/60Hz, TAIWAN SAD ............... 127V/60Hz, SAUDI ARABIA ASD ............... 220V 50/60Hz, ASIA, etc. AUD ............... 240V/50Hz, AUSTRALIA MJD ............... 230-240V 50/60Hz, EUROPE UKD .............. 230-240V 50/60Hz, UNITED KINGDOM
NOTICE EXPLICATIVE DE LA LISTE DES PIECES DE RECHANGE
1.
(1)
COMMENT UTILISER LA LISTE DES PIECES DE RECHANGE

Nombre de pices Le nombre de pices indiqu sur la liste est le nombre total de pices utilises pour chaque unit. Toutefois, le nombre indequ sur la liste EMBALLAGE ACCESSOIRES est le nombre total de pices utilises pour chaque machine. Un paquest de vis indiqu sur la liste contient 50 vis. ABREVIATIONS QTY ..................... une pice PAC ...................... un paquet 1/P ........................ une pice emballe dans un sac en polythylne 1/S ........................ une pice emballe dans un sac spcial 1/C ........................ une pice emballe dans une bote en carton 1/PP ...................... une pice emballe dans un sac en papier et en polythylne 1/KP ..................... une pice emballe dans un sac en polythylne avec carton 1/D ........................ une pice emballe dans un sac rembourr en polythylne 1/SB ...................... une pice emballe dans N/A*** ................. non disponible I ...................... INTERCHANGEABILITE
(2) (3)
Q'TY/PAC
P .................. BUT A ................. AJOUTER B ................. SUPPRIMER C ................. MODIFIER D ................. CHANGEMENT DE QUANTITE E .................. INSCRIPTION ERRONEE F .................. OMISSION
A
PIECES
B
2 1 2 1
C
2 1
D
2 1
E
2
MACHINE
1 ACTUELLE 2 NOUVELLE A ................. LE DERNIER SUFFIXE EST CHANGE B.C.D.E ......... LE NOMBRE DE PIECES EST CHANGE
2.
(1)
COMMENT COMMANDER LES PIECES

Les pices de rechange sont uniquement celles qui sont mentionnes dans la colonne "Q'TY/PACK" avec une quantit autre que "N/A***" ou "SUPPLY". Le pices dans la colonne "N/A***" sont mentionnes uniquement dans le but d'indiquer la construction mcanique. Les pices dans la colonne "SUPPLY" sont detines uniquement la vente. Par consquent, ces deux types de pices ne sont pas fournies en tant que pices de rechange. Les commandes de toute pice formant un lment ou une unit semi-assemble ne seront pas acceptes. Nota: Toutes les vis et tours le crous seront conformes au code ISO.
(2)
3.
PAYS
NAD ............... 115V/60Hz, UL & CSA TWD .............. 110V/60Hz, TAIWAN SAD ............... 127V/60Hz, ARABIE SAOUDITE ASD ............... 220V 50/60Hz, ASIE, etc. AUD ............... 240V/50Hz, AUSTRALIE MJD ............... 230-240V 50/60Hz, EUROPE UKD .............. 230-240V 50/60Hz, ROYAUME-UNI
II
ERKLRUNG DES ERSATZTEIL-KATALOGES
1.
(1)
WIE LIEST MAN DIE TEILELISTE?

Die Teileanzahl Die Anzahl der Teile in der Liste, drcken die gesamten Teile pro Verpackungseinheit aus. Aber die Zahl in der Liste "Packing" (Verpackung) und "Accessory" (Zubehr) beschreibt die gesamte Teileanzahl pro Maschine. Eine Verpackungseinheit SCHRAUBEN enthlt 50 stck. Abkrzungscode QTY ..................... Stck PAC ...................... Packung 1/P ........................ ein Stck in einem Plastikbeutel 1/S ........................ ein Stck in einer Spezialverpackung 1/C ........................ ein Stck in einem Karton 1/PP ...................... ein Stck in Papier und einem Plastikbeutel 1/KP ..................... ein Stck in einem Plastikbeutel mit Pappdeckel 1/D ........................ ein Stck in einem gepolsterten Plastikbeutel N/A ....................... nicht lieferbar 1/SB ...................... ein Stck in einer Schutzhlle I ...................... Austauschbar untereinander
(2) (3)
QTY/PAC
P .................. Zweck A ................. Zustzlich B ................. Entfernen C ................. ndern D ................. Menge gendert E .................. Fehlangabe F .................. Weglassen
A
alt Teile neu alt
B
neu alt
C
neu alt
D
neu alt
E
neu
I
Maschine
A ................. letzte Ziffer ist gendert B.C.D.E ......... Teilenummer ist gendert
2.
(1)
WIE WERDEN ERSATZTEILE BESTELLT?

Die Ersatzteile fr den Service haben in der Spalte "QTY/PACK" eine Nummer. Die Teile mit der Angabe "N/A***" shid nur aufgefhrt, um die technische Konstruktion zu zeigen und sind einzeln nicht lieferbar. Die Bezeichnung "SUPPLY" weist darauf hin, da dieses Teil als Zubehr gehandelt wird und beim Verkauf bestellt werden mu. Bestellungen fr Einzelteile, die einer Baueinheit angehren knnen nicht akzeptiert werden. Hinweis: Alle Schrauben und Muttern werden nach dem ISO-Standard hergestellt.
(2)
3.
REGION
NAD ............... 115V/60Hz, UL & CSA TWD .............. 110V/60Hz, TAIWAN SAD ............... 127V/60Hz, SAUDI-ARABIEN ASD ............... 220V 50/60Hz, ASIEN, usw. AUD ............... 240V/50Hz, AUSTRALIEN MJD ............... 230-240V 50/60Hz, EUROPA UKD .............. 230-240V 50/60Hz, GROSSBRITANNIEN
III
SPIEGAZIONE DELLA LISTA DEI PEZZI DI RICAMBIO
1.
(1)
COME LEGGERE LA LISTA DEI PEZZI DI RICAMBIO

Numero dei pezzi Il numero dei pezzi indica il totale dei pezzi per elemento. I numeri nella lista del materiale d'imballagio e accessori indicano il totale dei pezzi per macchina. Nella lista, un pacco di viti contiene 50 viti. ABBREVIAZIONI QTY ..................... un pezzo PAC ...................... un pacco 1/P ........................ un pezzo imballato in sacco di polietilene 1/S ........................ un pezzo imballato in pacco speciale 1/C ........................ un pezzo imballato in scatola di cartone 1/PP ...................... un pezzo imballato in sacco di polietillene e carta 1/KP ..................... un pezzo imballato in sacco di polietilene con cartone 1/D ........................ un pezzo imballato in sacco morbido di polietilene 1/SB ...................... un pezzo imballato in sacco di protezione N/A ....................... non disponibile I ...................... stato di intercambiabilit
(2) (3)
QTY/PAC
P .................. scopo A ................. aggiunta B ................. annullamento C ................. modifica D ................. modifica QTY E .................. ingresso errato F .................. omissione
A
PEZZI
CORRENTE NUOVI CORRENTE NUOVI CORRENTE NUOVI CORRENTE NUOVI CORRENTE NUOVI
I
MACCHI NARIO
A ................. modifica dell'ultimo suffisso B.C.D.E ......... modifica del numero di pezzo
2.
(1)
ORDINAZIONE DEI PEZZI

I pezzi usati come pezzi di ricambio sono elencati nella colonna "QTY/PACK" con una quanti differente da "N/A***" o "SUPPLY". I pezzi con "N/A***" sono elencati solamente per mostrare la construzione meccanica e quelli con "SUPPLY" sono elencati solamente come articoli di vendit: cio significa che questi due tipi di pezzi non sono forniti come pezzi di recambio. L'ordinazione dei pezzi non viene accettata quando questi pezzi formano un componente di un messo elemento. Nota: Tuttle le viti e i dadi sono standard ISO.
(2)
3.
NAZIONE
NAD ............... 115V/60Hz, UL & CSA TWD .............. 110V/60Hz, TAIWAN SAD ............... 127V/60Hz, ARABIA SAUDITA ASD ............... 220V 50/60Hz, ASIA, ecc. AUD ............... 240V/50Hz, AUSTRALIA MJD ............... 230-240V 50/60Hz, EUROPA UKD .............. 230-240V 50/60Hz, GRAN BRETAGNA
IV
EXPLICACION DE LA LISTA DE PIEZAS DE SERVICIO
1.
(1)
Cmo se lee la lista de piezas

El nmero de piezas El nmero de piezas en la lista especifica las plezas totales usada pou unidad, mientras que el nmero en la lista para METERIAL DE EMBALAJE y ACCESORIOS especifica las piezas totales usadas por mquina. En el paquete de tornillos se incluyen 50 unidades. Cdigos abreviados QTY ..................... una pieza PAC ...................... una paquete 1/P ........................ una pieza empaquetada en la bolsa de politileno 1/S ........................ una pieza empaquetada en paquete especial 1/C ........................ una pieza empaquetada en caja de cartn 1/PP ...................... una pieza empaquetada en papel y bolsa de politileno 1/KP ..................... una pieza empaquetada en bolsa de politileno con cartn 1/D ........................ una pieza empaquetada en bolsa almohadillada de politileno 1/SB ...................... una pieza empaquetada en una N/A ....................... bolsa protegida I ...................... SITUACION DE INTERCAMBIABILIDAD
(2) (3)
QTY/PAC
P .................. PROPOSITO A ................. AADIR B ................. BORRAR C ................. CAMBIO D ................. CANTIDAD, CAMBIO E .................. ENTRADA ERRONEA F .................. OMISION
A
Piezas
B
2 1 2 1
C
2 1
D
2 1
E
2
I
Mquina
1 Actualmente 2 Nueva A ................. El ltimo sufijo ha cambiado B,C,D,E ......... Se ha cambiado el nmero de la pieza
2.
(1)
Cmo realizar un pedido de piezas

Las piezas consideradas como piezas de servicio son slo aquellas designadas con Q'TY/PACK y no las designadas con N/A ... o SUPPLY. Aquellas piezas con N/A ... se ponen en lista slo con el propsito de monstrar la construccin mecnlca. Aqullas piezas designadas bajo SUPPLY se consideran slo como un artculo para ventas y por lo tanto ambos tipos de piezas no se consideran como piezas de servicio. Los pedidos para cualquler pieza que forme un componente de la unidad semiensamblada no ser aceptados. NOTA: todos los tornillos y tuercas son del estandar ISO.
(2)
3.
PAISES
NAD ............... 115V/60Hz, UL & CSA TWD .............. 110V/60Hz, TAIWAN SAD ............... 127V/60Hz, SAUDI ARABIA ASD ............... 220V 50/60Hz, ASIA, etc. AUD ............... 240V/50Hz, AUSTRALIA MJD ............... 230-240V 50/60Hz, EUROPA UKD .............. 230-240V 50/60Hz, GRAN BRETAA
Contents
COVER-1-ASM ............................................... 1 COVER-2-ASM ............................................... 2 CONTROL-PANEL-ASM ............................... 3 BASE-FRAME-ASM ....................................... 4 FRONT-FRAME-ASM .................................... 5 REAR-FRAME-ASM ...................................... 6 POWER-SUPPLY-ASM ................................... 7 CASE-SYS-ASM ............................................. 8 CASE-LGC-ASM ............................................ 9 LASER-OPTICAL-UNIT-ASM .................... 10 OPTICAL-FRAME-ASM .............................. 11 TR2-UNIT-1-ASM ......................................... 12 TR2-UNIT-2-ASM ......................................... 13 DRUM-DRIVE-ASM .................................... 14 DEV-DRIVE-ASM ........................................ 15 FEED-DRIVE-ASM ...................................... 16 OPTICAL-DRIVE-ASM ............................... 17 FEEDER-1-ASM ........................................... 18 FEEDER-2-ASM ........................................... 19 BYPASS-ASM ............................................... 20 BYPASS-FEEDER-1-ASM ........................... 21 BYPASS-FEEDER-2-ASM ........................... 22 ALIGNING-1-ASM ....................................... 23 ALIGNING-2-ASM ....................................... 24 PLATEN-ASM ............................................... 25 CRG-1-ASM .................................................. 26 CRG-2-ASM .................................................. 27 MAIN-CHARGER-ASM .............................. 28 TRANSPORT-BELT-UNIT-1-ASM .............. 29 TRANSPORT-BELT-UNIT-2-ASM .............. 30 BELT-CLEAN-UNIT-ASM ........................... 31 CLEANER-ASM ........................................... 32 DEVELOPER-YMC-ASM ............................ 33 DEVELOPER-K-ASM .................................. 34 REVOLVER-UNIT-1-ASM ........................... 35 REVOLVER-UNIT-2-ASM ........................... 36 TONER-1-ASM ............................................. 37 TONER-2-ASM ............................................. 38 FUSER-1-ASM .............................................. 39 FUSER-2-ASM .............................................. 40 FUSER-3-ASM .............................................. 41 ADU-ASM ..................................................... 42 DRAWER-ASM ............................................. 43 ASY-LGC-350S-1 .......................................... 51 ASY-LGC-350S-2 .......................................... 52 ASY-LGC-350S-3 .......................................... 53 ASY-SYS-350S-1 ........................................... 54 ASY-SYS-350S-2 ........................................... 55 ASY-SYS-350S-3 ........................................... 56 ASY-SLG-350S .............................................. 57 PWA-SDV ...................................................... 58 PWA-DRV ...................................................... 59 PWA-CCL ...................................................... 60 PWA-ADU ..................................................... 61 JIGS & GREASE ......................................... 101 DOWNLOAD JIGS ..................................... 102 SUPPLIES .................................................... 103 REPLACE UNIT ......................................... 104 PM-KIT ........................................................ 105
1. COVER-1-ASM
2. COVER-2-ASM
3. CONTROL-PANEL-ASM
4. BASE-FRAME-ASM
5.FRONT-FRAME- ASM
6. REAR-FRAME-1-ASM
7. REAR-FRAME-2-ASM
8. CASE-SYS-ASM
9. CASE-LGC-ASM
10. LASER-OPTICAL-UNIT -ASM
11. OPTICAL-FRAME-ASM
12. TR2-UNIT-1-ASM
13. TR2-UNIT-2-ASM
14. DRUM-DRIVE-ASM
15. DEV-DRIVE-ASM
16. FEED-DRIVE-ASM
17. OPTICAL-DRIVE-ASM
18. FEEDER-1-ASM
19. FEEDER-2-ASM
20. BYPASS-ASM
21. BYPASS-FEEDER-1 -ASM
22. BYPASS-FEEDER-2 -ASM
23. ALIGNING-1-ASM
24. ALIGINING-2-ASM
25. PLATEN-ASM
26. CRG-1-ASM
27. CRG-2-ASM
28. MAIN-CHARGER-ASM
29. TRANSPORT-BELT -UNIT-1-ASM
30. TRANSPORT-BELT -UNIT-2-ASM
31. BELT-CLEAN-UNIT -ASM
32. CLEANER-ASM
33. DEVELOPER-YMC -ASM
34. DEVELOPER-K -ASM
35. REVOLVER-UNIT-1 -ASM
36. REVOLVER-UNIT-2 -ASM
37. TONER-1-ASM
38. TONER-2-ASM
39. FUSER-1-ASM
40. FUSER-2-ASM
41. FUSER-3-ASM
42. ADU-ASM
43. DRAWER-ASM
e-STUDIO3511/4511
COVER-1-ASM
December 2003
9 2 41 10
8 23 44 45 23 22 8
20 12 15 7 8 36 23 8 8 11 18
16
8 8
14 8 6 13
8 33
25
26 8 26 24 8 26 24 8 26 26 24
42
32
33
4 3 1 31
40
4 4 4 30 28
8 24 26 17 38 8 8 8 35 37 39 29 28 4 8 34 27 8 8 21 21 5 5
43 27
19
E-STUDIO4511/3511

COVER-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44A 44B 45
6LA29551000 6LA29551100 6LA29556000 6LA29585000 6LA08917000 6LA29536000 6LA29501000 6LA29535000 6LA08913000 6LA29601000 6LA29524000 6LA29532000 6LA29509000 6LA29581000 6LA29521000 6LA29600000 6LA29512000 6LA29522000 6LA29593000 6LA29559000 6LA29516000 6LA29505000 6LA29554000 6LA29578000 6LA29555000 6LA29547000 6LA08905000 6LA29507000 6LA29586000 6LA29587000 6LA29588000 6LA34331000 6LA34325000 6LA08921000 6LA34326000 6LA07127000 6LA29567000 6LA29616000 6LA34330000 X0-01419000 6LA34333000 6LA29568000 6LA34332000 6LA47530000 6LA47628000 6LA47629000
ASYS-COVER-FRT-UPR ASYS-COVER-FRT-UPR LID-SCREW MG-CATCH-18 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI PIN-HINGE COVER-TRAY COVER-STOP-PAPER S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI COVER-TP-RGT-350 COVER-CABLE-FAX COVER-FILTER-OZ COVER-RGT-UPR COVER-HINGE-FRT COVER-LFT-RER COVER-TP-LFT-350 COVER-TRAY-BCK COVER-LFT ASYS-COVER-FRAME-FRT ASYB-COVER-FRT-LWR COVER-FRAME-FRT-BCK BRKT-ARM LID-SW LBL-MASK-FW LBL-MASK-N.P.GRAY COVER-LFT-RER-LGC S/HEX-M4*8-NI BRKT-LEVER SEAL-COV-FRT-1 SEAL-COV-FRT-2 SEAL-COV-FRT-3 DUCT-AIR-3 DUCT-AIR-1 S/TPP/HEX-4*8-NI DUCT-AIR-2 FAN.D-6015-340 MYLAR-COVER-TP-LFT SEAL-FAN-T2 SEAL-DUCT-T02 S/TPP/BID-4X20-NC SEAL-DUCT-AIR-A MYLAR-COVER-TP-RGT PNL-REINF-WINDOW LBL-ENERGY-T-PS LBL-PROHIBIT-U LBL-PROHIBIT-E
1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 5/P 2 1/P 9 10/P 2 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/D 19 10/P 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 2 1/P 1 1/P 4 10/KP 4 10/KP 1 1/P 7 10/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 2 1/KP 2 10/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 5/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP
e-Studio4511 e-Studio3511
NAD MJD,SAD,ASD,AU D
6LA47633000 LBL-HOT-350-2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
COVER-2-ASM
December 2003
2 1 9 2 13 2 3 2 7 2 8 2 2 2 13 2
19
2 6
12 18 17 14 15 10
11 5 4
E-STUDIO4511/3511

COVER-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10B 11 12A 12C 13 14B 15B 17B 18B 19A 19C
6LA29598000 6LA08913000 6LA29602000 6LA29584000 6LA29517000 6LA29582000 6LA29544000 6LA60601000 6LA60605000 6LA47613000 6LA08905000 6LA47529000 6LA56226000 6LA29556000 4400740530 4408860880 4402860770 4400685400 44204604000
ASYS-COVER-TP-RER S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI COVER-TP-FRT-350 COVER-RGT-LWR COVER-IH COVER-HINGE-RER ASYB-COVER-RER COVER-DF-CONECT POCKET-MANUAL LBL-PM S/HEX-M4*8-NI LBL-LASER LBL-LASER-C LID-SCREW LABEL-FCC LABEL-CANADA-A LBL-C-TICK-MARK LABEL-CHINA LBL-SERVICE-45
1 1/C 14 10/P 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 2 10/P 1 1/KP 1 5/KP 2 5/P 1 10/KP 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/KP
MJD NAD,MJD,TWD,SA D,AUD,ASD CND NAD NAD AUD ASD NAD,MJD,TWD,SA D,AUD,ASD CND
6LA56227000 LBL-SERVICE-45C
e-STUDIO3511/4511
CONTROL-PANEL-ASM
8 12 9 10 1 7
December 2003
6 5 4
13
11
19
14 15 104 101 101 25 101 101 26 101
103
101
16 28
A
106 106 2 18 29 27 105 17
30
A
102 102
E-STUDIO4511/3511

CONTROL-PANEL-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 25 26 27 28 29 30 101 102 103 104 105 106
6LA37030000 ASYS-COV-CONPANE-UPR-U 6LA37033000 6LA37038000 6LA37004000 6LA37007000 6LA37008000 6LA37009000 6LA37010000 6LA37011000 6LA37012000 6LA37013000 6LA37014000 6LA37015000 6LA37016000 6LA37017000 6LA37018100 6LA37019000 6LA37027000 6LA37028000 6LA37029000 6LA41769000 6LA41771100 6LA37037000 6LA41824000 6LA37034000 F0-01213000 X0-02094000 X0-02095000 X0-02096000 X0-02093000 X0-01771000 6LA08915000 ASYS-COV-CONPANE-UPR-TW SHEET-BLIND COVER-CONPANE-LWR KEY-START KEY-STOP KEY-FC KEY-TEN KEY-FUNCTION-A KEY-FUNCTION-B KEY-FUNCTION-C KEY-HELP LID-LED-A LID-LED-B PLATE-DIFFUSION MYLAR-SHIELD SHIELD-CONPANE ASYS-HINGE-R ASYS-HINGE-L ASYS-PNL-TOUCH PWA-F-KEY-350 PWA-F-DSP-350 SPG-F-CONPANE HRNS-DSP-LCD-350 PLATE-HINGE-OPE EB-6U S/TPB/BID-2X6-NI S/TPP/BRZ-3X10-NI S/TPP/BRZ-3X8-NI S/PAN/SWWS-M4X6-NI S/PAN/SWWP-M4X12-NI S/TPS/HEX-4*12-NI
1 1/PP 1 1/PP 2 5/P 1 1/PP 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/KP 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/D 5 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/SB 1 1/SB 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 1/P 2 5/P 16 10/P 7 10/P 4 10/P 1 10/P 6 10/P 6 10/P
NAD,MJD,SAD.AS D,AUD,CND TWD
e-STUDIO3511/4511
BASE-FRAME-ASM
December 2003
19
24 21 20 22 25 26 23 8 22 25 23 8 24 21 20 8 8 2 18 103 8 8 8
108 103
C D
8
103 105 8 16 108 107 108 104 106 8 5 8 6 102 107 104 102 106 101 109
B
3 8
B A
8
7 110
C
9
A
17
12
11 8 8 10
E-STUDIO4511/3511

BASE-FRAME-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
6LA35502000 6LA35503000 6LA65308000 6LA35588000 6LA35501000 41306501000 6LA08913000 6LA08909000 6LA65287000 6LA65302000 6LA08921000 6LA65303000 6LA65310000 44201850000 44201851000 41306022000 4401966050 41306025000 41306024000 44201853000 44201854000 4401981710 E0-01853000 E0-01106000 F0-00045000 F0-00024000 F0-00342000 F0-00315000 F0-00330000 F0-00025000 X0-00430000 X0-02074000
BRKT-REAR-LOW-MC BRKT-FRAME-R-L-D BRKT-HOLD-DUMP BRKT-EARTH-REAR2 STUD-FEED-LEFT-MC FOOT-MAIN-AT S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI FOOT-RAIL-LEFT BRKT-JOINT-PFP S/TPP/HEX-4*8-NI PLATE-DRV-TRAY STAY-CSSTT-MID CASE-DRV-TRY-F CASE-DRV-TRY-R CPG-LIFT-28 SPC172-100-3400 GER-TRAY-21 GER-TRAY-24-14 G06S-13/G05S-80 G05H-45/G05S-15 K-M/DC-TRAY-210 CS1A-B2CA 55533-1211 EDS-1 LWS-1U SPLSN-6U SPLSN-22U SPSN-22U LWS-3U S/BID-M3X6-NI S/TPS/BID-4X8-ZU3
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 23 10/P 6 10/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/C 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/D 2 1/D 2 5/P 3 10/P 2 5/P 4 5/P 2 5/P 4 5/P 5 5/P 2 10/P 1 10/P
e-STUDIO3511/4511
FRONT-FRAME-ASM
December 2003
A
6 112 6 37 6 24 21 21 10 6 113 37 6 6 14 107 101 6 13 15 105
G
12 6
6 18 9 6 2 6 106 25 16 6 110 4 110 3 103 33 34 7 4 44 39 40 103 8 101 6 11 6
B C D
6 1 102 35
E
17 8
20
8 4
F B C D
103
103
4 109
26
29 42
112 104 103 103 32 8
36
30
31
43
103 6
19
6 22
103
27 23 6
5 41 108 6
E-STUDIO4511/3511

FRONT-FRAME-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 112 113
6LA35584000 44203227000 6LA41199000 6LA08900000 6LA47635000 6LA08913000 6LA40238000 6LA08908000 6LA35525000 6LA35577000 6LA35509000 6LA35214000 6LA35220000 44200854000 E0-02347000 6LA35515000 6LA41242000 6LA35576000 6LA08918000 6LA29364000 6LA08915000 6LA34314000 6LA35566000 6LA35557000 6LA41364000 6LA40261000 6LA34691000 6LA41767000 6LA40262000 6LA40258000 6LA40211000 6LA29937000 6LA40216000 6LA40215000 6LA40226000 6LA29594000 6LA39945000 6LA40239000 6LA40240000 6LA47644000 6LA40263000 6LA08905000 6LA40297000 F0-01194000 X0-00164000 F0-01048000 F0-00862000 E0-01853000 F0-00211000 X0-00965000 X0-02114000 X0-00426000 F0-01195000 F0-00339000 F0-00341000
GUIDE-TBU-F-N STUD-LEVER-ADU STUD-KNOB-RGST-350 S/HEX-M3*6-NI LBL-RVLV S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI BRKT-ADJ-SCREW-TBU S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI BRKT-HANDLE ASYS-HANDLE BRKT-FRONT-SUB BRKT-DOOR-SW-F-MC GUIDE-SW-DOOR-350 STUD-DOOR-SW AGX226 BRKT-GUIDE-F SPASER-GAP ASYS-GUIDE-FRONT-L S/TPP/HEX-3X10-NI BRKT-GUIDE-CLT-F S/TPS/HEX-4*12-NI FAN-D-8025-350NH ASYS-COVER-INNER BRKT-TOP-FRT-SUB ASYS-BRKT-PIN-HOOK-F HLDR-TBU-FRT BUSH-KG-016L-MID2 SNSR-THS-350 BRKT-SPG-TBU-FRT ASYS-LEVER-TBU-FRT STUD-SPG-TBU-F GUIDE-DEV-BLK PLT-G-DRV-F-TBU PLT-G-CLB-F-TBU FELT-FRAME-FRONT SEAL-FRAME-FRT BRKT-GEL-CUBE-FRT HLDR-TBU-CLN-F SCREW-ADJ-TBU LBL-CAU-LSR-350 SPG-BRKT-TBU-F S/HEX-M4*8-NI SPG-GD-TBU UAMS-02WH-2 S/PAN/SWWP-M4X8-NI UAMS-05-0 TB-1116 CS1A-B2CA EDS-1208U RR/E-4-SS S/TPS/PAN-4X32-ZU3 S/BID-M3X4-NI LAMS EHP-6U LWS-2U
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/KP 53 10/P 1 1/P 5 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/D 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 5/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 16 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 3 10/P 4 5/P 3 5/P 1 5/P
e-STUDIO3511/4511
REAR-FRAME-ASM
December 2003
20 28 21 28 32 28 53 40 3 39 28 23 28 23 105
52 2
105 28 28 3 102 28 28
106 102 103 101
A
43 4 102 28 102 103 101 27 15 14 28
3 41 3 25 3
42
26 3
105 106
102
1 28
37 3 28 35
H D
28
3
I C B
3 38 47 3 3
22 28
28 3 28
28
34 36
24
B
50 13 19 31 44 49 3 46 45 107 16 33
12 3 11
C
19 18 29 9 6
E
10 6
D 30 51
F
10
3 28
3 7
G E
48
F G
E-STUDIO4511/3511

REAR-FRAME-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 101 102 103 105 106 107
6LA35569000 6LA29530000 6LA08908000 6LA35520000 6LA08900000 6LA33326000 44203707000 6LA41566100 6LA33284000 6LA08917000 C0-03663000 6LA33285000 6LA41934000 6LA34905000 6LA34918000 6LA37926000 6LA37933000 4407972860 6LA35508000 6LA29543000 6LA29365000 6LA29531000 6LA35528000 6LA35585000 6LA35572000 6LA37678000 6LA08913000 6LA37927000 6LA37932000 6LA37931000 6LA41365000 6LA37934000 6LA35525000 6LA35534000 6LA35546000 6LA40234000 6LA41242000 6LA35571000 6LA39875000 6LA32843000 6LA36350000 6LA36354000 6LA40249000 6LA40252000 6LA40255000 6LA40316000 6LA40212000 6LA40256000 6LA37952000 6LA40662000 6LA35586000 6LA35252000 F0-01048000 F0-00024000 F0-00211000 F0-00025000 X0-00077000 X0-00965000
PLATE-REV-MOTR-A BRKT-RER-COV-U S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI STUD-LEVER-ADU-R S/HEX-M3*6-NI SPG-TERM-CHARGR-350 PLT-TERM-HVM HRNS-REAR-HV-350 TB-CHARGR-350 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI GP1A73A HLDR-SNSR-AUGER HRNS-TNFL-WCLM-350 ASYS-BRKT-MOT-EXIT ASYS-MOTR.S-EXIT BRKT-STOP-RVLV STUD-BRKT-STOP-RVLV STOP-RING-6-5 BRKT-FRAME-R-R STUD-ADU BRKT-GUIDE-CLT-R BRKT-RER-COV-M BRKT-FLAME-L GUIDE-TBU-R-N BRKT-D-FEED-TR2 SHAFT-COV-G-R-350 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI ASYS-ARM-STOP-RVLV STOP-RVLV GEAR-10H46-6-CLUCH-L ASYS-BRKT-PIN-HOOK-R SPG-T-STOP-RVLV BRKT-HANDLE HANDLE ASYS-GUIDE-REAR-L HLDR-TBU-CLN-R SPASER-GAP PLATE-REV-MOTR-B GASKET-4-10-100 BRKT-D-FEED-FUSER SHEET-BKT-MOT LBL-HRNS-IH-350 ASYS-HLDR-TBU-RER ASYS-LEVER-TBU-RER BRKT-SPG-TBU-RER BRKT-LOCK-TBU-R-L SPE-LOCK-TBU SPG-LEVER-TBU SEAL-CUPL-BOTL BUSH-CE-016-75 SHIELD-STUD-SFB UAMS-05-0 LWS-1U EDS-1208U LWS-3U S/PAN/SWWP-M3X8-NI RR/E-4-SS
1 1/P 1 1/P 21 10/P 1 1/P 3 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 38 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 5/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/KP 3 5/P 8 5/P 2 10/P 3 5/P 2 10/P 1 10/P
e-STUDIO3511/4511
POWER-SUPPLY-ASM
December 2003
D
7
B C G
H
8
8 17
B A C
1
102
E D I H
101 16
G
13
F
5 6 5 11 14
15 12
12
10
E-STUDIO4511/3511

POWER-SUPPLY-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2A 2B 3A 3B 5B 6B 7 8A 8B 8C 8D 9A 9B 9C 10 11A 11B 11C 13 14 15 16 17 101 102
6LA35530000 BRKT-INLET 4402322610 FL-VU-215F3-M 4402953150 FL-ZSG2215-11 4402255020 4402255050 B-NRW10-15A-Y B-NRW10-10A-Y
1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 5/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/C 1 1/C 1 1/SB 1 1/SB 1 1/SB 1 1/C 11 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/P
F0-00342000 SPLSN-6U F0-00332000 SPSN-6U 6LA42129000 4402449910 4400494940 6LA55883000 4402494070 6LA41998000 6LA41999000 6LA42099000 6LA42024000 6LA41981000 6LA69837100 6LA42007000 6LA08913000 6LA41968000 6LA41967000 4404610110 6LA34684000 X0-00169000 E0-06067000 HRNS-INLT-ACC-R350 CBL/P-INLET-EUR CBL/P-INLET-AU CABLE-P-INLET-US CBL-INLET-CND PS-ACC-350-JU PS-ACC-350-E PS-ACC-350-EC PS-HVT-350-S PWA-F-FIL-350 PWA-F-FIL-360 PWA-F-FUS-350 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI HRNS-FIL-POW-350 HRNS-NF-FIL-350 MARK-EARTH-VDE BRKT-COVER-R-R S/PAN/SWWP-M4X8-BSNI NC-179-F6.35
NAD,TWD,SAD MJD,ASD,AUD,CN D NAD,TWD,SAD MJD,ASD,AUD,CN D NAD,TWD,SAD,AS D,AUD,CND NAD,TWD,SAD,AS D,AUD,CND MJD,ASD AUD NAD,TWD,SAD CND NAD,TWD,SAD ASD,AUD,MJD CND NAD TWD,SAD ASD,AUD,CND
e-STUDIO3511/4511
CASE-SYS-ASM
December 2003
42 43 11
A
9 10 32 9 33 20 2 1 14 9 12 9 9
40 9 9 5 8 4 6 8 9 4
8 9
39
107 26 27 26 27 26 35 30 29 44 41 20 7 24 25 44 20 22 106 20 36 7
13
20 101 17 16 18 20 20 34 108 102 101 15 37
21 105
20
19 31 104
20 23 20 28
46 45 108
38
E-STUDIO4511/3511

CASE-SYS-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2A 2B 2D 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 101 102 104 105 106 108
6LA34617000 CASE-PS-IH 6LA42077000 PS-TH-IH-350-U 6LA42079000 PS-TH-IH-350-E 6LA42078000 6LA34618000 6LA34657000 6LA34669000 6LA35532000 6LA34672000 6LA41837000 6LA08917000 X0-00164000 6LA34668000 6LA34314000 6LA41590000 6LA41537200 6LA34663000 6LA34622000 6LA34634000 6LA34635000 6LA34629000 6LA08908000 6LA41609000 6LA41692000 6LA34648000 6LA34624000 G0-00286000 6LA56134000 44201254000 6LA34688000 6LA41610000 6LA41611000 6LA34689000 6LA34644000 6LA34621000 6LA42082000 6LA34678000 6LA34675000 6LA35531000 6LA34623000 6LA34667000 6LA34683000 6LA34685000 6LA34686000 F0-00273000 F0-00226000 F0-01269000 F0-00047000 F0-00341000 X0-00057000 E0-04314000 F0-00280000 6LA08913000 PS-TH-IH-350-S CASE-TRM-PS-IH TERM-PS-IH-NI TERM-PS-IH-N3 BRKT-PCB-MID-M BRKT-NIC-EARTH HRNS-IH-RLY-350 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI S/PAN/SWWP-M4X8-NI CASE-FAN-PS-IH FAN-D-8025-350NH HRNS-IH-ACC-350 HRNS-IH_TH-350 SHLD-SYS-LVPS BRKT-CASE-S-TOP BUSH-KG-016L-FA BUSH-KG-016L-SC COV-CNCT-DWN S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI HRNS-SYS-FSMS-350 CTRL-F-NIC-350 COV-CNCT-USB-H COVER-SYS-L 6Y060L0 DAMPER-HDD-320 SCREW-HDD-DSS LBL-CASE-SYS-1 HRNS-HDD-SIG-350 HRNS-HDD-POW-350 LBL-CASE-SYS-2 ASYS-SHLD-PS-IH COVER-PS-IH ASY-PWA-SYS-350S GSKT-STG1-10CF GSKT-STG4-9CF BRKT-PCB-MID-R COVER-SYS-U DUCT-FAN-IH MYLAR-NIC SEAL-CASE-FAN-PS-IH SEAL-DUCT-FAN-IH WLS-06-0 KGLS-6RT KGPS-6RF EDS-1717U LWS-2U S/PAN-M3X6-NI JFS-4S-C1N WLS-20-0 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI
1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/C 1 1/C 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 3 1/P 13 10/P 3 10/P 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 15 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/SB 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/C 4 5/P 4 10/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/SB 1 5/P 4 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 2 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 2 10/P 1 5/P 2 10/P 2 5/P 1 5/ 29 10/P
NAD,TWD MJD,ASD,AUD,CN D SAD
CNT
e-STUDIO3511/4511
CASE-LGC-ASM
December 2003
111 106
106 110
111 107 113
109 101 111 108 109 112 8 107 2 11 2 11 10 2 7 20 15 19
114 16
11 4 6
2 5 11 2 18
1 102
11 101 2
2 13 14 17 105
102 104 101
101 11 11 9 3
12
E-STUDIO4511/3511

CASE-LGC-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 7A 7B 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 101 102 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
6LA35521000 6LA08908000 6LA36800000 6LA34606000 6LA34627000 6LA42070000 6LA42071000 6LA41594100 6LA35522000 6LA34664000 6LA08913000 6LA35558000 6LA41902000 6LA34665000 6LA34632000 6LA08902000 6LA34692000 6LA34676000 6LA34602000 6LA34654000 F0-00045000 F0-00341000 F0-00211000 F0-00025000 F0-00229000 F0-00047000 F0-00034000 F0-00337000 F0-00029000 F0-01263000 F0-01047000 F0-01181000 X0-00057000
BRKT-PCB-TOP S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI SHLD-BRKT-PCB-MID CASE-LGC-350 LID-LGC ASY-PWA-LGC-350S ASY-PWA-LGC-351S PWA-F-DRV-F350/351 BRKT-PCB-MID COVER-LGC-350 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI BRKT-PCB-MID2 PWA-F-CCL-350 BRKT-PWA-F-CCL-350 BRKT-HEAT-SINK S/HEX-M3*10-NI SHEET-BRKT-PCB-MID GSKT-STG8-10CF BRKT-DRV ASYB-HEAT-SINK EDS-1 LWS-2U EDS-1208U LWS-3U KGLS-8RT EDS-1717U EDS-2323U WS-1U WS-3U RWS-3T V0 LFCS-30 FCT-6010 S/PAN-M3X6-NI
1 1/PP 12 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/SB 1 1/SB 1 1/SB 1 1/D 1 1/KP 33 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 10/P 1 1/KP 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 10/P 4 5/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 2 5/P 2 10/P 1 5/P 2 5/P 2 5/P 3 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 10/P
e-STUDIO3511/4511
LASER-OPTICAL-UNIT-ASM
December 2003
14
12
14 11 10
102
101 B 14 4 14
C 3 14 C 1 D D B 14 14 4
14
8 7 8 7
10
E-STUDIO4511/3511

LASER-OPTICAL-UNIT-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 7 8 10 11 12 14 101 102
6LA36798000 6LA36796000 F0-00339000 6LA36729000 6LA36728000 6LA08908000 6LA47972000 6LA36749000 6LA35565000 6LA08913000 F0-00047000 F0-01048000
ASYS-DAMP-HOUS BRKT-DAMP-HOUS-B EHP-6U GUIDE-LSU SPG-LSU-RIGHT S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI ASYB-LASER-UNIT-S ASYS-SCREW-LSU-NI ASYS-TRAY-LSU-IPPER S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI EDS-1717U UAMS-05-0
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/S 1 5/P 1 1/PP 8 10/P 1 10/P 2 5/P
10
e-STUDIO3511/4511
OPTICAL-FRAME-ASM
December 2003
26 26 23 K D 26 2
3 3
28 103
25 40 7 25 25 5 110 25 G F 6 22 31 31 34 31 29 26 31 103 26 44 34 105 19 30 25 25 E 16 31 31 31 31 101 3 21 E 14 9 17 21 25 12A 27 26 12A 12A G D 107 36 37 25 25 26 31 31 31 26 18 26 20 40 41 42 A L 15 4 26 108 26 26 26 8 26 32 25 A 25 F 13 25 25 25 102 10 11 1 104 104 25 111
109 110
31
25
L 43
38
106
31 31 31
11
E-STUDIO4511/3511

OPTICAL-FRAME-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12A 12B 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20B 21 22A 22B 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32A 32B 34 36 37 38 40 41 42 43 44 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
6LA39656000 6LA39881000 6LA39931000 6LA41809000 6LA39661000 6LA39385000 6LA41980000 6LA41808000 6LA39935000 6LA47978000 6LA41810000 44205167000 44205167000 4406379920 6LA39926000 6LA07127000 6LA41739100 C0-03663000 6LA39453000 6LA39913000 6LA39898000 6LA39908000 6LA39892000 6LA39893000 6LA39866000 6LA08909000 X0-02069000 6LA08908000 6LA39949000 44205162000 6LA35555000 6LA39938000 6LA08913000 6LA39902000 6LA39903000 6LA29596000 6LA39451000 D0-17438000 6LA41972000 6LA39815000 6LA39814000 6LA39813000 6LA39816000 6LA29595000 F0-00034000 X0-00077000 F0-00211000 F0-00341000 F0-00044000 6LA39968000 F0-01179000 X0-00130000 F0-00036000 F0-00339000 6LA39916000
ASYS-COVER-LENS-350 LID-DOWNLOAD SPL-SHLD-102-7 HRNS-SLG-SYS-350 DUCT-SCAN-INR GUIDE-HRNS-RER HRNS-SCN-RR-350 HRNS-SLG-SPLY-350 SPL-SHLD-30-7 ASY-LENS-UNIT-S PWB-F-CBL-350 SNSR-PS-TW05 SNSR-PS-TW05 SNSR-PS-TY1CH56 CUSH-STAY-TP-LFT FAN.D-6015-340 ASY-HRNS-POW-350 GP1A73A COVER-HRNS-SLG GSKT-16-13-38 BRKT-D_H-LENS MYLAR-BASE-SCAN ASY-D-H-SCAN-L-U ASY-D-H-SCAN-L-E STAY-TP-RGT-SCAN S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPS/BID-3X6-ZU3 S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI MYLAR-BRKT-TP-RER SZ-AJ8R2004ZC BRKT-CNTR BRKT-HRNS-HTR S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI ASY-D-H-SCAN-R-U ASY-D-H-SCAN-R-E BRKT-RER-COV-UPR BRKT-PWA-SLG-350 FPC41-12-0.5T30X10 ASY-SLG-350S GASKET-COV-LENS GASKET-3-4-38 GASKET-3-4-30 GASKET-LS13-8 BRKT-COV-RER-UPR-L EDS-2323U S/PAN/SWWP-M3X8-NI EDS-1208U LWS-2U UAMS-05-2 EDGING-TE-012-75 WWS-2U S/PAN/SWWP-M3X20-NI RLWS3TV0 EHP-6U BUSH-KG-016-22
1 1/P 1 1/P 3 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/D 1 1/S 1 1/C 3 1/C 4 1/C 1 1/D 1 1/KP 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 5/KP 1 1/C 1 1/C 1 1/P 2 10/P 26 10/P 53 10/P 1 1/KP 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 29 10/P 1 1/C 1 1/C 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/SB 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 5 10/P 2 10/P 2 5/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 3 5/P 2 10/P 1 5/P 2 5/P 1 1/P
NAD MJD,TWD,SAD,AS D,AUD,CND
TWD,SAD,ASD,AU D,CND TWD,SAD ASD,AUD,CND
TWD,SAD ASD,AUD,CND
11
e-STUDIO3511/4511
TR2-UNIT-1-ASM
42 9 1 48 35 9 104 103 112 29 108 18 106 43 112 32
December 2003
105 25 17
104 19
30
D
9
9 9
16
B
9
14
11 15 8 113 46 22
D H
5 43 27
F A G
3 28 103 26 44
104 21
12
C
44 107 107
13
109
50 14 15 45
11 15 46 111 31 2 9 34 9 33 14 24 23 38 20 39 14
37
47
40 47
F
47
36 9 101
A
104
9 6
14
49 4 7 10 41 9 47 14 47 9
B
47 6
12
E-STUDIO4511/3511

TR2-UNIT-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113
6LA41383000 6LA37602000 6LA41314000 6LA41665000 CO-03663000 6LA41281000 6LA41543000 6LA41202000 6LA08917000 6LA41270000 6LA41279000 6LA41063000 6LA41228000 4407734980 4407972860 6LA41280000 6LA41345000 41307995000 6LA47672000 4407685930 6LA37667000 6LA03849000 6LA41266000 6LA41196000 6LA41813000 4408358930 6LA41380000 6LA37685000 6LA41191000 6LA36367000 6LA41193000 6LA41200000 6LA41192000 6LA41381000 6LA41198000 6LA41285000 6LA41347000 6LA41351000 6LA41349000 6LA41342000 6LA41352000 6LA41373000 6LA41252000 6LA41379000 6LA41378000 6LA08900000 6LA41376000 6LA41276000 6LA41178000 6LA08901000 F0-00041000 6LA08923000 6LA08909000 6LA08913000 F0-00235000 X0-00990000 F0-00042000 X0-00965000 X0-00966000 X0-01034000 F0-01023000 X0-01009000
COVER-RIGHT COVER-RIGHT-LOW PUSHER-COV-SW HRNS-2NDTR-2-350 HOOK-A HRNS-2NDTR-350 ACTR-CAM-TR2 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI SFT-LOCK-TR2 CAM-LIFT-TR2 KEY-STOP-CAM CLUCH-MGSSC-180-CCW-017 BUSH-6-GCB STOP-RING-6-5 GUIDE-PP-EXIT RIB-GUIDE-EX-A LBL/W-FUSER LBL-CAU-BLT-2 HOLDER-WH LBL-O-RGST TL-SEP-ROL ASYS-BRKT-TR2-F GEAR-10S18-PS2M18-6 HRNS-EARTH1-350 STOP-RING-6-4 PLT-CAM-TR2 ASYS-BRKT-COV-RIGHT-F ASYS-BRKT-COV-RIGHT-R LBL-FUS-1 BLT-SY-S2M-158-5 PULLY-S2M18-6-D SHAFT-DRV-F-TR2 BRKT-TL-SEP-ROL STUD-PIVOT-F SUPPORT-TR2-F PIN-SP-TR2 SP-PUSH-TR2-F PLT-SET-SP LEVER-LOCK-TR2 SP-PUSH-TR2-R SPG-E-6P8X0P8X18 SPG-E-6R65XR65X38-TR2 SHAFT-CAM-TR2-N ASYS-SLIDER-SPC S/HEX-M3*6-NI ASYS-PLT-PIN-SP-R BRKT-SFT-LOCK GEAR-125S18-6D S/HEX-M3*8-NI EDS-2 S/TPP/HEX-4*12-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI LWS-1S P/PRL/BH7-2X14-SS UAMS-05S-2 RR/E-4-SS RR/E-5-SS P/SPW/AW-1.6X12-SS P-18 P/SPW/AW-2X10-SS
1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 9 10/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 6 5/P 3 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 5/KP 1 1/KP 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 6 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 3 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 1 5/P 2 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 3 10/P 3 10/P 2 5/P 1 10/P
12
e-STUDIO3511/4511
TR2-UNIT-2-ASM
December 2003
41 9
47 44 50
45 2 102 19 3 48
46
11 39 38 40 29
43 20 13 105 49 36 49 37 42 17 20 17
B
4
21
42 1
28
18
C D
32 103 33 103 30 21 37 36
49
49
105
35
34 32
33
13
E-STUDIO4511/3511

TR2-UNIT-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 9 11 13 15 16 17 18 21 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 102 103 105
6LA41382000 6LA41328000 6LA41271000 6LA41565100 6LA41170000 6LA41269000 6LA41268000 F0-00042000 6LA08917000 6LA41374000 6LA41227000 6LA41134000 6LA41368000 6LA41353000 6LA27421000 6LA41201000 6LA30778000 6LA41133000 6LA41245000 6LA41318000 4400336190 6LA41219000 6LA41361000 6LA41236000 6LA41326000 6LA41282000 6LA41814100 6LA41325000 6LA41165000 6LA41329000 6LA41324000 6LA41263000 6LA41257000 6LA08908000 X0-00964000 X0-02030000 X0-00966000
FRM-TR2-UNIT ASYS-GER10S18-125S18 PIN-PLT-DRV-A-TR2 HRNS-TC2-HV-350 SFT-GEAR-TR2-R PLT-ERS-TR2 PLT-EARTH-TERM UAMS-05S-2 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI SPG-C-10R1X1X42R2 CASE-CLN-TR2 SEAL-CLN-A-TR2 ASYS-LID-CLN ASYS-PLT-FRM-TR2 CR-3511TR2 BUSH-TR2-R DDL-1280ZZH-P0P25LY13 COLLER-SP-TR2 SPG-C-10R5XR8X13R7-TR2 ASYS-COLLAR-TR2 STOP-RING-8 PLT-HVT-TR2 HOLDER-HVT-TR2 LID-HVT-TR2 GEAR1S21-125S23-21-S HOLDER-SPC-TR2 HRNS-EARTH2-350 BRKT-TR2-R-SS ROLLER-GAP-TR2-GEAR SHAFT-A-S PLT-ARM-GEAR-TR2-B-S SHEET-BRKT-TR2-R WSH-4P5-8-OP3-PHF50S S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI RR/E-3-SS S/PAN/SWWP-M3X12-NI RR/E-5-SS
1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 2 5/P 3 10/P 4 1/P 1 1/PP 2 5/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/S 2 5/P 2 1/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 2 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 4 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P
CSP
13
e-STUDIO3511/4511
DRUM-DRIVE-ASM
December 2003
45 48
49 50
47 45 45 46 4 55 54 29 40 104 28 37 9 55 39 107 45 29 34 104 21 108 104 11 18 29 13 14 17 104 12 37 29 2 28 8 15 22 104 29 103 5 37 29 34 104 29 29 10 29 7 51 23 52 25 29 106 29 29 35 34 34 104 56 104 24 104 28 45 37 37 102 45 29 29 21 27 104 29 36 29 29 43 1 45 45 29 57
29 6
45
A
41
32
A
104
44 19 20
C
29 28 16 30 31 105 21 38 29
C
D
104
26
14
E-STUDIO4511/3511

DRUM-DRIVE-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
6LA32596000 6LA32600000 4407972860 6LA34322000 6LA32634000 6LA32502000 6LA32511000 6LA29373000 6LA32571000 6LA32689000 6LA32643000 6LA32519000 6LA32641000 6LA32521000 6LA32520000 6LA32522000 6LA32532000 6LA32642000 6LA32514000 6LA32515000 6LA32703000 6LA32698000 6LA32534000 6LA32700000 6LA32645000 6LA32691000 6LA32696000 4407734980 6LA08908000 6LA32553000 6LA32577000 6LA32579000 6LA32610000 6LA32586000 6LA32587000 6LA08917000 6LA32631000 6LA32702000 6LA32624000 6LA32640000 6LA32648000 6LA32593000 6LA32694000 6LA08913000 6LA34318000 6LA34320000 6LA34321000 6LA34314000 6LA34329000 6LA32585000 6LA32584000 6LA32647000 6LA32701000 6LA08900000 6LA32690000 6LA32704000 X0-00966000 F0-01048000 X0-00965000 X0-00968000 X0-01237000 X0-01670000 F0-00337000 X0-02015000
ASYS-PLATE-DRV-MAIN2 ASYS-PLATE-DRV-MAIN4 STOP-RING-6-5 ASYS-DUCT-OZ-IN BRKT-CAP-TB3 MOTR_D-MAIN-350 ASYS-BE-G05H100PS2M20 COLAR-GEAR-CLT-CAM ASYS-BRKT-DRUM-EARTH BLT_SY-S3M-405-8 GEAR-21-45-350 GEAR-10S40_10S23-06 GEAR-08S31-06-DCL GEAR-10S016-06-BCL GEAR-10S016-06 GEAR-10S19-06 GEAR-10S27_10S20-6 GEAR-08S47-350 SHAFT-DRIVE-AUGER SHAFT-BLT-CLN SPG-E-11P5X1P2X19R ASYS-GEAR-H27-P22-CTG GEAR-08S15_P2GT-53 ASTS-GEAR-H27-P22 BLT.SY-164-2GT-6 BLT_SY-S3M-339-8 ASYS-GEAR-H80-P24 BUSH-6-GCB S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI SPG_C-19P3X1P4X5R COUPL-DRUM-350 ASYS-DRM-SF-HUSNG-350 ASYS-PULLY-TENS-TB ASYS-BRKT-TENS-TB1 ASYS-BRKT-TENS-TB2 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI ASYS-BRKT-TENS-TB3 BRKT-REINF-DRIVE-1 ASYS-BRKT-DRUM-TNS MOTR,D-AUG-350 BRKT-GEAR-DRIVE ASYS-PLATE-DRV-MAIN3 ASYS-PULLY-50-22 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI ASYS-DUCT-O-OUT ASYS-CASE-O-IN ASYS-CASE-O-OUT FAN-D-8025-350NH FILTER-OZ-SPB-600 ASYS-HLDR-BRG COLAR-8X115-125 PLATE-DRIVE BRKT-REINF-DRIVE-2 S/HEX-M3*6-NI BLT_SY-S3M-300-8 PLATE-D_MAIN-TBU RR/E-5-SS UAMS-05-0 RR/E-4-SS RR/E-7-SS RR/C/EXT-12-B S/PAN-M2.6X4-NC WS-1U
1 1/P 1 1/P 3 5/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 5/P 31 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 4 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 5 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 10 10/P 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/D 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 6 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 1 5/P 3
MSP
14
e-STUDIO3511/4511
DEV-DRIVE-ASM
104 33 1
December 2003
30
18
19
16 102 30 G D 17 18 19
33
101
C 19 104 B 19 17 26 19 A F 19 32 107 21 21 22 23 B A 104 2 2 22 2 104 24 17 2 102 102 E 20 9 18 27 103 3 F 12 25 D 106 8 G 30 15 G 10 6
107
29 7
28 11 13 4
14 E
29
15
E-STUDIO4511/3511

DEV-DRIVE-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 101 102 103 104 106 107
6LA31901000 6LA08913000 6LA31924000 6LA31948000 6LA31922000 6LA41588000 6LA31931000 6LA31932000 6LA31921000 6LA31929000 6LA31919000 6LA31926000 4407959970 4346312030 6LA31913000 6LA31917000 44201492000 4400802080 6LA08909000 6LA31909000 6LA31910000 6LA31911000 6LA31933000 6LA31915000 6LA31914000 6LA31916000 6LA31946000 6LA31943000 4400336190 4407972860 6LA08900000 6LA31944000 6LA08915000 F0-00238000 F0-00042000 X0-00968000 F0-00045000 F0-00047000 X0-00730000
MOTR_D-DEV-350 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI GEAR-8S17-8 GEAR-8S19-6 GEAR-8H17-8 HRNS-KDVR-CDVR-350 GEAR-10S33_10S16-8 GEAR-10S29-6 SHAFT-CLUCH-TNR-YMC CLUCH-35E-10S28-8 SHAFT-CLUCH-DEV-YMC CLUCH-33F-6-CW-GEAR BRG-696ZZNR BUSHING GEAR-10S28-6 PLATE-GEAR-FRAME-R260 BUSH-6-POM BUSH-8 S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI ASYS-PLATE-GEAR-FRAME GEAR-5H43-6 GEAR-5H46_10S24-6 GEAR-10S27-6-IDLER SHAFT-CLUCH-MOVE-K GEAR-10S15-6 PLATE-STAY-MOTR SHAFT-CLUCH-DEV-KM CLUCH-33C-8-CW-GEAR STOP-RING-8 STOP-RING-6-5 S/HEX-M3*6-NI CLUTCH-33C-6-CW-GEAR S/TPS/HEX-4*12-NI LWS-2Y UAMS-05S-2 RR/E-7-SS EDS-1 EDS-1717U S/SET/K-M3X4-B
1 1/C 5 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 5/P 3 5/P 7 10/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 2 5/P 3 5/P 1 10/P 1 1/D 2 10/P 1 5/P 3 5/P 1 10/P 5 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P
15
e-STUDIO3511/4511
FEED-DRIVE-ASM
18 27 17 31 A B 104 D 103 27 103 8 101 J 27 2 27 1 33 27
December 2003
32
27
34
28
34 34 25 34
21 D
25
105 103 23 29 103 22 27 B
34
25
C I
25
7 J
102 25 A 27 25 20 F C 26 E G 105
K 4 30 10 105 K 24 19 23 36 11 G 22 14 F
36 9 I 11
6 5
13 12 36
15
16 E
16
E-STUDIO4511/3511

FEED-DRIVE-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 101 102 103 104 105
6LA32829000 44201362000 6LA32822000 6LA32842000 6LA32848000 44201368000 6LA32845000 6LA32846000 44201360000 6LA32850000 6LA32813000 6LA32821000 6LA32820000 6LA32812000 6LA32817000 6LA32814000 6LA32807000 6LA32833000 6LA32839000 6LA32809000 6LA32831000 44201492000 4407972860 6LA32819000 6LA08908000 6LA32801000 6LA08913000 6LA32808000 6LA31943000 6LA32838000 6LA32810000 4400802080 6LA32811000 6LA08900000 4402833100 6LA32851000 X0-00968000 F0-00340000 F0-01048000 X0-00966000 X0-00730000
ASYS-BRKT-DRV-FEED GEAR-10S023-06 GEAR-10S28_10S17-6 GEAR-10S028-06-TR2 ASYS-BE-G10S025G10S01 GEAR-10S024-06 GEAR-10S21_10S34-06 GEAR-10S30_10S29-06 GEAR-10S022-06 ASYS-BE-G05H064G10S03 GEAR-10S030-06-A GEAR-10S35_10S32-6 GEAR-10S38_10S31-06 GEAR-10S25_10S34-06 GEAR-10S028-06-CST1 GEAR-10S027-06-CST ASYS-BRKT-DRV-ROL PLATE-DRV-FEED CLUCH-33C-8-CCW-GEAR GEAR-10S19-6 BRKT-DRV-ROL-1 BUSH-6-POM STOP-RING-6-5 SHAFT-DRV-ROL S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI MOTR_D-FEED-350-37W S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI GEAR-10S31_10S021-6 CLUCH-33C-8-CW-GEAR CLUCH-33C-6-CCW-GEAR GEAR-10S025-8 BUSH-8 BRKT-DRV-FUSER S/HEX-M3*6-NI CLUTCH-6-R COLAR-0602 RR/E-7-SS SPLSN-4U UAMS-05-0 RR/E-5-SS S/SET/K-M3X4-B
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 7 10/P 1 1/C 8 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 6 10/P 1 1/P 3 5/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 5 5/P 1 10/P 3 10/P
16
e-STUDIO3511/4511
OPTICAL-DRIVE-ASM
December 2003
102
8 7 108 5 7 15 6 107 7 27 19 B 7 D 26 A 106 17 22 23
105
21 25
10
D 25 C
28 B
106 13 12 11 103 14
103 14 103 4 9
A 104 18 1
2 16 101 101 2 3 18 16 104
17
E-STUDIO4511/3511

OPTICAL-DRIVE-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 26 27 28 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
6LA39397000 6LA01742000 6LA39410000 6LA39430000 6LA39733000 6LA39739000 6LA08913000 6LA39735000 6LA39792000 C0-03663000 6LA67393000 44202846000 44202845000 6LA39782000 44202660000 6LA39745000 4407545610 6LA08932000 6LA41748000 6LA39444000 6LA39784000 6LA39673000 6LA07166000 6LA39675000 X0-00077000 X0-00455000 F0-00041000 X0-00968000 6LA08908000 6LA08909000 X0-02118000 F0-00044000
SHAFT-DRV-SCAN PLY-WIRE-SCAN ASYS-WIR_RP-SCAN-FRT ASYS-WIR_RP-SCAN-RER BRKT-MOTR-SCAN DUMPER-MOTR S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI ASYS-MOTR-SCAN BRKT-DF-LFT-350 GP1A73A SHAFT-OPN-SNS SPR-OPEN-SNS LVR-OPEN-SNS BRKT-DF-RGT-350 SPE-WIRE-TENS BLT_SY-560-S2M-6 BRG-608ZZNR SCREW-ACTR-TRU PWA-F-SDV-350 PULLEY-73S2M COVER-PILLEY DUCT-SCAN-RER FAN.D-6025-340 CUSH-DUCT-SCAN-RER S/PAN/SWWP-M3X8-NI S/BID-M4X10-NI EDS-2 RR/E-7-SS S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPP/PAN-3X30-NI UAMS-05-2
1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 10/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/SB 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/KP 2 10/P 2 10/P 3 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 1 5/P
17
e-STUDIO3511/4511
56 28 57 19 57 31 29 35 52 25 58
FEEDER-1-ASM
57 25 19
December 2003
36 54 37
C A G
30
B
34 32 53 22 23 26 18 19 17 19 13 16 21 53 53
H I
F
58 52
15
33
52
19
57
20
19
19
25
21 24 19
27 57 2 7 10 11 9 8 12 12 5 6 10 2 57 14 30
30
F
13
19 17
D C
51 51 51
18
E-STUDIO4511/3511

FEEDER-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
6LA47898000 41318623000 44201805000 6LA47910000 41304047100 4401964360 4401964270 41304506000 44201817000 6LA47909000 44201773000 41319491000 6LA47908000 41306012000 41318603000 41318604000 41306011000 41306002000 4407972860 41306719000 4402833110 4402231780 6LA47900000 4401964410 44201492000 4400884670 44201810000 6LA47895000 6LA31944000 C0-03663000 4407734980 41306504000 41306502000 4400682590 41305501000 6LA41754000 6LA47892000 6LA08917000 X0-00979000 X0-00966000 E0-01105000 X0-00730000 F0-00235000 6LA08908000 F0-00671000 6LA08909000
BRKT-ROL-SEP GUIDE-P-SEP HLDR-SEP-ROL-DM LEVER-RLR-PICK K-ROLL-SPT ARBOR-SPT-F ARBOR-SPT-R SFT-SEP-AT SPR-1.0-15.60RF SPC055-045-01525 COV-SPE/ARBOR CHIP-HLDR-SEP GUIDE-P-FEED ACTR-EMPTY-PPR ARM-FEED-UNIT SFT-DRV-PICK ARM-RLR-PICK PLY/T-PICK-20 STOP-RING-6-5 ROLLER-PICK-AT CLUTCH-6-L PLY-20-2M SFT-ROL-FEED K-ROLL-FEED BUSH-6-POM PLY-20-ROL LEV-ROL-SEP-DM ASYS-BRKT-CLT CLUTCH-33C-6-CW-GEAR GP1A73A BUSH-6-GCB BLT/T-194-2GT-2 BLT/T-124-2GT-2 SKB-KI-100M SPR-LVR-PICK HRNS-PFP-FED-UNIT-576 ASYS-BRKT-FEED-UNIT S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI P/PRL/AH7-2X8-SS RR/E-5-SS 54702-1211 S/SET/K-M3X4-B LWS-1S S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI EDS-0607M S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI
1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 9 5/P 1 1/KP 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 3 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 3 10/P 3 10/P 3 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 8 10/P 3 5/P 1 10/P
MSP
MSP
MSP
18
e-STUDIO3511/4511
FEEDER-2-ASM
54
December 2003
41 59 32
54
D
51 51 28 30 56 8 55 18 51 19 29 14 17 58 13 1411 16 51 15 51 33 7 6 21 23 58 10 20 14 11 14 14 12 18 14 51 39 26 14 25 14 14 9 30 36 3 36 57 14 22 14 35 34 37
57
51
30 54
A B
43
38 57
C
40 60 27
A
4
24 6 57 36 6 42
36 14 31 14
C
4 6
42
51
53
51
51 5 51
2 52
53
19
E-STUDIO4511/3511

FEEDER-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
41306501000 6LA37637000 6LA64841000 44201601000 41306007000 44201611000 4346312030 44201684000 44201681000 44201862000 44201683000 44201686000 X0-00966000 6LA64842000 6LA66937000 6LA35223000 44201492000 6LA35219000 6LA66938000 44201701000 6LA35201000 6LA32568000 44201613000 44201680000 6LA28916000 6LA35246000 6LA35209000 44201746000 F0-00041000 6LA29016000 6LA29021000 6LA29012000 6LA29023000 6LA35245000 6LA29020000 6LA29035000 6LA41572100 6LA35238000 6LA29580000 6LA29583000 4400336190 6LA35250000 X0-02069000 X0-02074000 6LA08909000 6LA08913000 X0-00964000 F0-00341000 X0-00968000 X0-00730000 6LA08908000 6LA08915000
FOOT-MAIN-AT ASYS-FRM-FEEDER-R-350 RAIL-CSSTT-RGT CATCH-CST-320 SLIDER-CST ROLLER-FEEDER BUSHING GG10S024/10S030 GG10S031/10S038 GEAR-10S035-06 GEAR-10S034-06 GEAR-10S033-06 RR/E-5-SS CLUCH-33C-6-CCW-GEAR SHAFT-ID-CLUCH BUSH-6-POM GEAR-10S036-06D-350 CLUCH-33C-8-CCW-GEAR GEAR-10S028-06D ASYS-BKT-DRV-F1-350 GEAR-10S40_10S34-350 BUSH-ROL-FEEDER GG10S025/10S021 GEAR-10S020-10S027 SPE-SFB-LINK-F ASYS-BKT-DRV-FED-3 GEAR-10S033-06 EDS-2 ASYS-HINGE-FRT ASYS-HINGE-RER ASYS-BRKT-HLDR-FRT ASYS-BRKT-HLDR-RER SPE-SFB-LINK-R LINK-BYPASS COVER-HRNS HRNS-MFCLL-350 ROL-BYPS-DRV-FEED COVER-BYPS-FRT COVER-BYPS-RER STOP-RING-8 COVER-BYPS-GEAR S/TPS/BID-3X6-ZU3 S/TPS/BID-4X8-ZU3 S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI RR/E-3-SS LWS-2U RR/E-7-SS S/SET/K-M3X4-B S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI S/TPS/HEX-4*12-NI
1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 6 1/P 1 1/KP 3 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 13 10/P 1 1 1/D 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 2 5/P 1 1/P 21 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 9 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 4 10/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
19
e-STUDIO3511/4511
BYPASS-ASM
17 6 104 20 21 103 106 18 103 103 16 22 14 102 101 19 104 102 102 5 23 24
December 2003
11 107 10 103 9 2
13 107
A
12 102
25 4
15
20
E-STUDIO4511/3511

BYPASS-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16A 16B 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 101 102 103 104 106 107
6LA28988000 6LA28986000 6LA28989000 6LA28990000 6LA28998000 6LA28999000 6LA28995000 4407726480 6LA28997000 6LA28996000 41316597000 6LA41705000 4400901130 6LA71350000 6LA29000000 6LA29003000 6LA29002000 6LA28941000 6LA28943000 6LA28948000 6LA65698000 6LA29006000 6LA29007000 6LA29009000 6LA28993000 X0-00430000 6LA08917000 6LA08908000 X0-00968000 F0-00043000 X0-00595000
TRAY-BP-L-350 TRAY-BYP-UP-350 TRAY-BYP-M TRAY-BYP-M-SUB GUIDE-TRAY-FRT GUIDE-TRAY-RER ASYS-PLATE-PINION-350 PINION-18-395 ASYS-RACK-BYPASS RACK-BYPASS-350 SPG-PT-TRAY-BYP PWA-F-SFB-350 PAD-BRAKE HRNS-SFB-SIZE-360 LBL-TRAY-U-350 LBL-TRAY-E-350 LBL-HIGH-TRAY-350 BRKT-TRAY-BYP-R ASYS-SFT-TRAY-BYP-350 SPA-HINGE-BYPASS BUSH-8X12X8F LEVER-GUIDE-F SPG-GUIDE-F SHEET-PAD-GUIDE-F STOP-PAPER-BYP S/BID-M3X6-NI S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI RR/E-7-SS UAMS-05SN-W S/TPP/PAN-3X6-NI
1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/D 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 5/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 10/P 4 10/P 3 10/P 2 10/P 1 5/P 2 10/P
NAD,TWD,SAD,AS D,AUD,CND MJD
20
e-STUDIO3511/4511
BYPASS-FEEDER-1-ASM
106 26 107 20 23 21
December 2003
15 103 105
103 104 101 109 17 16 24 109 25 18 101 19 22 14 104
2 4 3 11 1 13 13 13 102 A
10 13 10
12
6 101 5 B 101
B A
108 108 108
21
E-STUDIO4511/3511

BYPASS-FEEDER-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C MSP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109
6LA28899000 6LA28863000 6LA28865000 6LA28887000 6LA28921000 6LA28922000 6LA28840000 6LA28896000 6LA28857000 6LA28861000 6LA28862000 6LA08935000 6LA28754000 6LA29033000 6LA28755000 44201734000 6LA28932000 6LA29031000 6LA31943000 6LA28933000 6LA28915000 6LA65698000 4407972860 6LA28931000 4407734980 X0-00966000 X0-00965000 6LA08908000 F0-00339000 6LA08900000 X0-00968000 X0-00730000 X0-01989000 6LA08917000
ASYS-ROLL-SPT-L30 ARBOR-SPT-BYP SPG-1.0-0.15-65-13L SHAFT-ROL-SPT LEVER-SPT-F LEVER-SPT-R SPG-E-6XR6X91R7R STAY-SPT-BYP-350 ASYS-BRKT-LVR-SPT COVER-SPE-ARBOR-17 HOLDER-ROL-SPT-BYP SCR-M3X6BISR-NI ASYS-BRKT-DRV-BYP FRAME-DRV-BYPS-SUB ASYS-ARM-JOINT-BYPS GEAR-10S023-06 GEAR-1-S021-06 GEAR-10S020-10S027 CLUCH-33C-8-CW-GEAR ASYS-SHAFT-BYPS-350 CPG-DRV-BYP-350 BUSH-8X12X8F STOP-RING-6-5 ROL-BYPS-DRV BUSH-6-GCB RR/E-5-SS RR/E-4-SS S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI EHP-6U S/HEX-M3*6-NI RR/E-7-SS S/SET/K-M3X4-B S/TPP/BID-3X8-NI S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 4 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 4 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 2 5/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 3 10/P 3 10/P
21
e-STUDIO3511/4511
BYPASS-FEEDER-2-ASM
December 2003
103 103 103 16
49
34 11 14 13 12 18 103 10
15
103
B
5
17
50
103 20 23 21 22 105 19 103 24 39 29 105 44 106 32 102 28 44 106 36 37 30 38 106 30 35 33 47 31 45 46 106 27 1 103 25 26 4 38 3 7 6 5 2 103 103 2 20 44 106 29 38 41 42 38 103
C
48
101 40 106 44
D
9
D
8
103 43
C
22
E-STUDIO4511/3511

BYPASS-FEEDER-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 101 102 103 104 105 106 108
6LA28873000 6LA28967000 6LA28966000 6LA28965000 C0-03663000 6LA28951000 6LA28960000 6LA28952000 6LA29032000 6LA28805000 6LA04769000 6LA28814000 6LA28815000 6LA28759000 6LA28827000 6LA28828000 6LA28764000 6LA28823000 6LA28821000 4401965270 4401965250 6LA28822000 4401965260 6LA28819000 6LA28835000 44218398000 6LA28818000 6LA28807000 6LA28811000 4402833110 6LA28756000 6LA28832000 6LA28834000 6LA28817000 6LA28758000 4401966400 44218389000 4407972860 6LA28812000 6LA28841000 6LA28820000 44201789000 6LA41939200 4407734980 6LA28837000 6LA28831000 6LA28833000 6LA71421000 6LA29004000 6LA28839000 X0-00979000 X0-02011000 6LA08917000 6LA08908000 X0-00964000 X0-00966000 6LA08900000
ASYS-FRAME-BYPASS SPL-IDLR-TR-BYPS SHAFT-IDLR-TR-BYPS IDLER-TR-BYPASS GP1A73A ACTUATOR-BYP SPG-T-SNSR-LOW-T BRKT-ACT-BYP BRKT-BYPASS-FRT GUIDE-BYPASS-U SOL-SFB-340 LEVER-PICK STUD-LVR-PIC-BP SPG-E-6XR8X36.8XR STAY-BYPASS-U COVER-BYPASS-U ACTR-EMP-SW-BYP ASYS-BRKT-STOPPER STPR-BYP-F-350 ARM-STOPPER LEVER-STOPPER-F STPR-BYP-R-350 LEVER-STOPPER-R PLATE-ARM-PICK BLT-SY-138-2GT-2.8 K-ROLL-PICK-SFB SFT-ROL-PIC-BYP-350 SHAFT-ROL-FEED-BYPS GEAR-06S-027-06 CLUTCH-6-L ARM-PICK-350 WEIGHT-PICK-BYP-LOW WEIGHT-PICK-BYP-UP SPL-ROL-FEED-BYP CUSHION-PAD PLY/T-2GT020-06 K-RLR-FEED-SFB STOP-RING-6-5 CPG-DRVN-BYP-350 ROLLER-TR-BYPASS STUD-G032-BYPS GEAR-06S-032-06 HRNS-SFB-350 BUSH-6-GCB SHAFT-WEIGHT-BYP WEIGHT-PICK-BYP WEIGHT-PICK-BYP-MID HRNS-SFB-PIS-360 LBL-BYPS-CAUSION SPG-ACTR-EMP-SW P/PRL/AH7-2X8-SS S/CTS-M3X8-NI S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI RR/E-3-SS RR/E-5-SS S/HEX-M3*6-NI
1 1/PP 2 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 5 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 18 10/P 2 10/P 5 10/P 9 10/P 2 10/P
MSP
MSP
22
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ALIGNING-1-ASM
December 2003
105 2
49 41
41
K
14 14 13 16 44 43 35 34 101 11 12 101 11 40 1 42 47 15
105
K G C D
16 23
33
17 14 106 18 45 104 32 105 105 14 16
F H
10 9 6
43
B A
C
3 5 7 29
13
H I
14
16 14
I
6 9 10 5
D
4 7 19 21 22 20 104
106 31 48 43
102
24
103
30 105 26
46 26 105 26 105
F
25 25
G
26 9 28 27 25 26 38 39
E
37 105 36
25
26
23
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ALIGNING-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 101 102 103 104 105 106
6LA37720000 6LA37719000 6LA37627000 6LA37629000 6LA37626000 C0-03663000 6LA37634000 6LA41620000 6LA08917000 44201543000 4346312020 4401964660 6LA37644000 4400336190 6LA37709000 4346312030 6LA37704000 6LA37706000 6LA34035000 6LA34037000 6LA34003000 6LA34004000 6LA41539000 4406597050 F0-00341000 F0-01048000 6LA35582000 6LA37640000 6LA37724000 6LA37723000 6LA37725000 6LA08909000 6LA37691000 6LA37710000 6LA37692000 6LA37611000 6LA37612000 6LA37613000 6LA37657000 6LA37658000 6LA37659000 6LA41229000 6LA37669000 6LA37705000 6LA37730000 F0-00339000 6LA37714000 6LA37721000 6LA37728000 X0-00968000 X0-02103000 X0-00595000 X0-01991000 6LA08913000 6LA08901000
ASYS-GUIDE-RGST-L ASYS-GUIDE-RGST-R ACTR-REG ACTR-MID HLDR-REG-SENSOR GP1A73A SPG-ACT HRNS-TBNA-350 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI MYLAR-SW-RGST-2 PIN GEAR-10S020-08 BUSH-8X12X11S-POM STOP-RING-8 ROLLER-RGST-R BUSHING SPG-E-RGST-MC-FRT RLR-MID-350 COV_IQ_MAIN SHUT-IQ SOL_IQ SPG-E-5R3XR3X18R14 HRNS-FED1-350 SNR-CTD-313 LWS-2U UAMS-05-0 BRKT-LG-SW-350 HLDR-MID-ROLLER STAY-GUIDE-MID-350 GUIDE-MIDDLE-350 SHEET-GUIDE-MID-N S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI MYLAR-GUIDE-RGST-FRT ROLLER-RGST-L MYLAR-GUIDE-RGST-RER HLDR-ERTH-RGST SPG-F-RGST-R SPG-F-RGST-L ASYS-ERZV10D821-350 MYLAR-RGST-L MYLAR-RGST-R KNOB-RGST-350 SCREW-LOCK-ARM SPG-E-RGST-MC-RER ASYS-GUIDE-MIDDLE-2 EHP-6U GEAR-10S20-08-N BRUSH-RH-6H SHEET-GUARD-RGST RR/E-7-SS S/PAN/SWWP-M2.6X6-NI S/TPP/PAN-3X6-NI S/BID-M3X8-BSNI S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI S/HEX-M3*8-NI
1 1/PP 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 4 10/P 2 5/P 2 10/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 6 5/P 1 1/KP 4 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 4 5/P 8 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 10/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 2 1/KP 2 1/KP 1 1/P 3 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 2 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 6 10/P 2 10/P
23
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ALIGNING-2-ASM
December 2003
21
17
17 16 23 12
26
11 18
17
17 28 27 17 21 15 16 27 20 14 2 17 24 17 26 17 17 1
52
51 8 21 4 19 53 9 7 25 53 19 8 5 6 6
3 5
21
10 13
21
22
24
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ALIGNING-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 51 52 53
6LA37668000 44200424000 6LA37618000 6LA37683000 44201623000 6LA37708000 6LA37703000 6LA08921000 6LA37675000 44201543000 6LA35248000 6LA35247000 6LA35251000 6LA37715000 6LA37632000 6LA37707000 6LA08917000 6LA37606000 6LA37628000 6LA41571100 6LA08913000 44201627000 6LA37716000 6LA37682000 44201629000 6LA35243000 6LA37687000 6LA35240000 E0-01853000 C0-03663000 X0-00966000
KNOB-COVER-FEED MG-CATCH-44 COVER-GUIDE-LOW ACTR-SNSR-LOW-350 BUSH-FEED-IDL SPG-C-8XR8X16R9 SPG-T-SNSR-LOW-350 S/TPP/HEX-4*8-NI SHAFT-FEED-LOW-350 MYLAR-SW-RGST-2 GUIDE-FEED-MID GUIDE-SFB GUIDE-FEEDER-L BUSH-MID-ROL-F SHAFT-MID SPG-C-8XR6X16 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI PLATE-GUIDE-FED ROLLER-IDLA HRNS-RCOV-FED2-350 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI GUIDE-OPEN-L BUSH-MID-ROL-R SPG-GUIDE-SFB STOPPER-COV-FED BRKT-GUIDE ROLLER-MID-1DLA GUIDE-FEED-R CS1A-B2CA GP1A73A RR/E-5-SS
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/D 2 5/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 9 10/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 6 10/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/D 1 1/P 2 10/P
24
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PLATEN-ASM
December 2003
11
2 11 4
25
E-STUDIO4511/3511

PLATEN-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1A 1B 1C 2 3 4 5 6 11
6LA39851000 ASYS-GLASS-A 6LA39852000 ASYS-GLASS-L 6LA39853000 6LA39804000 6LA39840000 6LA39843000 6LA39889000 6LA39948000 6LA08908000 ASYS-GLASS-K ASYS-GLASS-ADF-350 MYLAR-TAPE-FRT SEAL-COLOR-TP-L-R2 S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI
1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/KP 2 1 5/KP 1 1/KP 7 2 10/P
NAD MJD,SAD.ASD,AU D TWD,CND
25
e-STUDIO3511/4511
CRG-1-ASM
December 2003
30 5 6
19 10 10 11 19 C B 19
4 19 9 7 B 9 11 18
11
19 22 17 22 8 22
26
E-STUDIO4511/3511

CRG-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17 18 19 22 30
6LA39553000 F0-00339000 6LA41764000 6LA41765000 6LA39548000 6LA08916000 6LA08900000 4408604590 6LA41806000 6LA39572000 6LA08908000 6LA39577000 6LA47974000
REFLECTOR-LAMP EHP-6U LAMP-EXPO-350 INV-EXPO-350 COVER-INV S/TPP/HEX-3X6-NI S/HEX-M3*6-NI FOOT-CRG-3.64 HRNS-INV-350 GUIDE-HRNS-CRG1 S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI MYLAR-HRNS-INV ASYB-CARRIGE-1-S
1 1/D 1 5/P 1 1/S 1 1/C 1 1/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 4 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 9 10/P 3 1/KP 1 1/S
26
e-STUDIO3511/4511
CRG-2-ASM
December 2003
20 A
5 6
A B 7 C
B 9 8
5 4 7
27
E-STUDIO4511/3511

CRG-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
4 5 6 7 8 9 20
6LA67394000 X0-00077000 6LA67395000 4408604590 44202692000 X0-02069000 6LA47975000
ASYS-BKT-PLY-F-C2 S/PAN/SWWP-M3X8-NI ASYS-BKT-PLY-R-C2 FOOT-CRG-3.64 GUIDE-WH-CRG2 S/TPS/BID-3X6-ZU3 ASYB-CARRIGE-2-S
1 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/D 4 5/P 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/S
27
e-STUDIO3511/4511
MAIN-CHARGER-ASM
December 2003
13 14 9 10
A
11 102 8 1 12 15 21 41 6 7 108 5 102 16 18 4 2 19 20 26 101 3
B
17
22
103 103
101
30 29
32
31 42 28
25
43 105 27 39 33 35 104 37 106 105 36 104 107 38 105
40
28
E-STUDIO4511/3511

MAIN-CHARGER-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
6LA33931000 6LA33363000 6LA33364000 6LA33410000 6LA33369000 6LA33366000 6LA33427000 6LA33359000 6LA33355000 6LA33356000 6LA33921000 6LA33929000 44203517000 4407402190 6LA33358000 4407682120 6LA33368000 6LA33367000 4408672530 4408672550 4408672480 6LA33319000 6LA33438000 6LA33316000 6LA33439000 6LA33400000 6LA33381000 6LA33378000 6LA08916000 44203765000 6LA41935000 6LA33386000 6LA33420000 6LA33372000 6LA33383000 6LA33425000 6LA33426000 6LA33428000 6LA33434000 6LA08917000 X0-00963000 X0-00602000 E0-01853000 X0-01951000 6LA08908000 6LA08909000 6LA08913000 F0-00050000
ASYS-CASE-CHARGR-350 FLANGE-10-3 GEAR-PLY-22-12 TERM-CHARGR-FRT-350 SPG-CHARGR-FRT-350 BLT-SY-2GT-782-2 BASE-CHARGR-350 PUSHER-SW-RER TERM-CHARGR-RER-350 SPG-E-44X055X155 ASYS-PULLY-CHARGR-350 ASYS-PAD-CHARGR-350 HOOK-R-CH-M SPRING-TENS-CH WIRE-CHARGR-373 HANGER-WIRE LID-CHARGR-RER-350 LID-CHARGR-FRT-350 SPC060-010-0227 PUSH-CH-M-F-220 GRID-220 SHEET-CHARGR HLDR-LED-DRUM-2 SHLD-ELASE-LED DUCT-CHARGR-DRUM LINK-CHARGER-LFT ASYS-SW-LINK-350 LINK-CHARGR-RGT S/TPP/HEX-3X6-NI LP-ERASE-320 HRNS-WCLM-350 ASYS-MOTR-TNR-140-350 GEAR-08H18-6 ASYS-HLDR-MOTR-350 HLDR-SPG-CHARGR SHEET-CHARGR-FRT GUIDE-PAD-CHARGR-350 SHEET-LINK-LFT S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI RR/E-2-SS S/TPP/PAN-3X8-NI CS1A-B2CA S/BID-M3X3-NC S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI RENY/PH3-6
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/KP 1 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 2 1/D 2 10/P 3 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
MSP MSP
MSP
28
e-STUDIO3511/4511
TRANSPORT-BELT-UNIT-1-ASM
December 2003
7 28 25 B 101 102 17 30 22 30 9 107 15 101 29 8 23 103 106 6 9 12 106 20 11 24 106 7 C 26 7 15 16 102 101 27 9 18 19 A 10 24 9 B A 7 21 7
101 3
12
5 101 12 101
3 4
29
E-STUDIO4511/3511

Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 101 102 103 104 105 106 107
6LA40235000 X0-00980000 6LA40233000 6LA40192000 6LA40319000 6LA40202000 6LA08902000 6LA40247000 6LA08908000 6LA40320000 6LA40182000 4407972860 6LA40085000 6LA40077000 6LA40317000 6LA40242000 6LA40243000 6LA41550000 6LA40312000 6LA40302000 6LA40330000 6LA40075000 6LA40285000 6LA29372000 6LA40315000 6LA40313000 6LA40328000 X0-00966000 6LA40323000 X0-00092000 6LA08913000 X0-00967000 F0-00044000 X0-00730000
SHAFT-CAM-TBU P/PRL/AH7-2X10-SS CAM-TBU LEVER-CAM-TBU ASYS-GUIDE-UNIT-F-TBU COVER-SENSER-DRV S/HEX-M3*10-NI COLAR-DRV-CLB-B-TBU S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI ASYS-GUIDE-UNIT-R-TBU SHAFT-SPG-TBU STOP-RING-6-5 BRG-MF148T12ZZ-TBU COLAR-RLR-DRV-F-TBU GEAR-Z23-DRV-TBU BLOCK-DRV-F3-TBU BLOCK-DRV-R6-TBU HRNS-TBHP-350 SPG-LOCK-TBU-N ASYS-SNSR-MARK-350 FRAME-R-TBU ASYS-RLR-DRV-A-TBU SPACER-ROL-TBU GUIDE-CLT-TBU-R BRKT-LOCK-TBU-R-R SHAFT-TBU-LOCK-R WASHER-125-083-05-TBU RR/E-5-SS DDL-1680HHRPOP25LY13 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI RR/E-6-SS UAMS-05-2 S/SET/K-M3X4-B
1 1/P 2 10/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 4 10/P 1 1/P 12 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 5/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/C 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 2 10/P 6 10/P 2 5/P 1 2 10/P 3 10/P 6 5/P 1 10/P
29
e-STUDIO3511/4511
December 2003
32 15 26 25 H 33 34
101 36 30 5 G 106 22 42
17 I 107 F 27 26 15 25 39
104 37
107 3 C
J 45 44
110 106 H 45 43 21 102 11 12
D 108 101 4 14 41 35 A 21 E 18 16 13
2 103 7 13 106 102 7 G 19 10 J 9 13 29 40 11 102 31 12 E C I 23 A B 1 7 6 D F 105 24
20
107 8 104 28 107 G 38 13 13 106 7 G B
104
30
E-STUDIO4511/3511

Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
6LA40017000 6LA40084000 6LA40151000 6LA40247000 6LA40230000 4408510800 6LA08917000 6LA40203000 6LA40244000 6LA40245000 6LA40040000 6LA40273000 6LA08902000 6LA40086000 6LA40105000 6LA40023000 6LA27420000 6LA40274000 6LA40110000 6LA40197000 6LA40194000 6LA40318000 6LA40198000 6LA40115000 4406537280 6LA40155000 6LA40199000 6LA41812000 6LA40018000 6LA40005000 4400336190 6LA40200000 6LA40201000 6LA27418000 6LA40191000 6LA40196000 6LA40299000 6LA40272000 6LA40300000 6LA40302000 6LA40285000 6LA40085000 6LA40314000 6LA40312000 6LA40328000 X0-00968000 6LA40322000 F0-00045000 6LA08908000 X0-00092000 X0-00966000 F0-00044000 X0-01526000 X0-00967000 X0-00730000
FRAME-L-F-TBU ASYS-STAY-FRM-L-L-TBU ASYS-STAY-FRM-L-R-TBU COLAR-DRV-CLB-B-TBU ASYS-RLR-CLB-A-TBU BRG-688ZZNR S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI COVER-SENSER-CLB BLOCK-DRV-F6-TBU BLOCK-DRV-R6-TBU SLIDE-RLR-TNT-F-TBU SPG-C-7R9XR7X20R S/HEX-M3*10-NI ASYS-HLDR-PAD-TNT-TBU BRG-MF63T12ZZ-TBU SPG-F-TNT-TBU CR-3511TR1 MYLAR-CLB-TBU SPG-R-GRD-P-TBU RLR-12-P-TBU COLAR-F-RLR-12-TBU GEAR-8H27-8-TBU TERMINAL-F-TR1-P-TBU SPG-F-TR1-P-TBU HLDR-TR-ROLL SPG-C-2R9X0R25X8R-80TBU COVER-TERMINAL-F-P-TBU HRNS-TBHP2-350 FRAME-L-R-TBU RLR-TNT-A-TBU STOP-RING-8 TERMINAL-R-TR1-P-TBU COVER-TERMINAL-R-P-TBU BT-3511TR COLAR-CLB-F-TBU COLAR-TNT-TBU PLT-BASE-TUB-F BRKT-ADJ-RLR-TNT-TBU PLT-BASE-TUB-R ASYS-SNSR-MARK-350 SPACER-ROL-TBU BRG-MF148T12ZZ-TBU SHAFT-TBU-LOCK-L SPG-LOCK-TBU-N WASHER-125-083-05-TBU RR/E-7-SS DDL-1480ZZRPOP25LY13 EDS-1 S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI RR/E-5-SS UAMS-05-2 P/PRL/AH7-2X12-SS RR/E-6-SS S/SET/K-M3X4-B
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 5/P 3 10/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/S 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/KP 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/S 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 5/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 3 5/P 2 10/P 8 10/P 1 2 10/P 6 5/P 1 10/P 3 10/P 1 10/P
CSP
CSP
30
e-STUDIO3511/4511
BELT-CLEAN-UNIT-ASM
41
December 2003
3 33
E
105 19
105 42
43 44 105 32 106 10
B E
22 107 101 47 108 20 107 27 18 19 101 46 110
11 45 101 39 4 8 106 101 39 21
17
F
105 26 102 36 24 25 23 101 104 33 106 101 35 31 6 9 30 15
101
110 16 28
A
19 34 18
26 31 1 31
105 14 5 40
102 102 37 2 12 13 102 38 38
D
101
29 30 103
31
E-STUDIO4511/3511

BELT-CLEAN-UNIT-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 101 102 103 105 106 107 108 109 110
6LA29368000 6LA29381000 6LA29413000 6LA29314000 6LA29395000 6LA29398000 6LA29322000 6LA29404000 6LA29241000 6LA29439000 6LA27419000 6LA29332000 6LA29307000 6LA29359000 6LA29362000 6LA29386000 6LA29366000 4407972860 4407734980 6LA29256000 6LA29433000 6LA29416000 6LA29324000 6LA29363000 6LA29312000 6LA29440000 6LA41228000 6LA29415000 6LA29402000 6LA02920000 6LA29438000 6LA29367000 6LA29410000 6LA29382000 6LA29375000 6LA03849000 6LA29377000 6LA29423000 6LA29445000 6LA29397000 6LA29405000 6LA29412000 6LA29432000 6LA29414000 6LA29429000 6LA29431000 6LA29435000 6LA08900000 X0-00102000 X0-00964000 X0-00965000 X0-00426000 F0-00339000 E0-02703000 F0-00044000 X0-01009000
ASYS-HLDR-CLNR-BELT ASYS-PLT-CLN-F GEAR-10S16-6 CASE-MID ASYS-CASE-CLT-F ASYS-CASE-CLT-R AUGER-BLADE-X SEAL-BLADE-FRT GEAR-05H16-4 REC-SHEET-T068 BL-3511TR SPG-C-NOZZLE NOZZLE-CLT-OUT1 SEAL-F-SIDE SEAL-R-SIDE SPE-BLADE-TB-250 STAY-CASE-CLT-3 STOP-RING-6-5 BUSH-6-GCB LINK-CLNR-BELT SEAL-BLADE-F-S ASYS-BRKT-CLT-REAR ASYS-BKT-MT-AUG ASYS-MOT-CLT GEAR-05H16-4-2 CAM-CLNR-2 CLUCH-MGSSC-180-CCW-017 SHAFT-CAM-CLNR-BELT-3 ASYS-NOZZLE-CLT-OUT2 BUSH-0410-05F-M TAPE-AT-51XE STOPPER-TBU-R BRKT-CLT-REAR-2 LINK-CLNR-BELT-S PLATE-CASE-REAR2 TL-SEP-ROL BRKT-CLT-TBU SCREW-CLT-TBU SPG-F-REC NOZZLE-CLT-TBU SEAL-BLADE-RER STUD-GEAR-2 SEAL-BLADE-R-S GEAR-10S17-6 SEAL-CASE-MID-RER SEAL-CLNR-MID-REAR BRKT-CLT-TL S/HEX-M3*6-NI S/PAN-M3X12-NI RR/E-3-SS RR/E-4-SS S/BID-M3X4-NI EHP-6U UAMS-05-2 P/SPW/AW-2X10-SS
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/S 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 5/KP 2 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 3 5/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 3 5/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 3 5/P 2 1/KP 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 6 10/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 10 10/P 4 10/P 2 5/P 1 1 5/P 1 10/P
MSP CSP
MSP
31
e-STUDIO3511/4511
CLEANER-ASM
11
December 2003
11
19 17 23 28 38 37 35 30 23 16 32 22 31 21
37 36
29 18
1 11 6 7 4 102 3 11
52 2 101
A
107
106 108
54
5 7
26
53
55
C
9 8 11 10 104 39 27
A
11 20 26 42 13 47 14 11 41 105 15 30 103
B
24
C
11
12 15 33 34
40
15
44
46
15
104
32
E-STUDIO4511/3511

CLEANER-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 44 46 47 48 52 53 54 55 101 102 103 104 105 107 108
6LA33418000 6LA33287000 6LA02922000 6LA33296000 6LA33297000 6LA33903000 6LA02920000 6LA33283000 6LA33273000 6LA33321000 6LA08917000 6LA33417000 6LA41741000 6LA33338000 6LA08909000 6LA33930000 6LA33917000 6LA33329000 6LA33259000 6LA33402000 6LA33305000 6LA33360000 6LA33301000 6LA33411000 6LA33404000 6LA33437000 6LA08905000 6LA33302000 6LA27417000 6LA33431000 6LA33288000 6LA33441000 6LA33331000 6LA27416000 6LA33268000 6LA33266000 6LA33322000 6LA33274000 6LA33433000 6LA33919000 6LA33912000 6LA33432000 6LA08904000 6LA40653000 6LA33328000 6LA08913000 6LA33339000 6LA33435000 6LA40665000 6LA40667000 X0-01009000 X0-00966000 X0-00434000 X0-00426000 X0-01240000 F0-01048000 C0-06992000
ASYS-FRAME-DRUM-RER SHAFT-BRUSH-CLNR-RER BUSH-0612-D6F-M GEAR-10S16-5-AG GEAR-10S16-15 ASYS-PLATE-AYGER-AG BUSH-0410-05F-M SPG-E-4R4-10-GAP PLATE-GAP-BLK-RER TERM-BLADE-DRUM-350 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI ASYS-FRAME-DRUM-FRT THMS-DRM-350 HLDR-THMS-DRUM-350 S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI ASYS-AUGER-DRUM-LWR ASYS-AUGER-DRUM-UPR SHAFT-FLICKER-350 CHAS-CLNR-DRUM-RGT ASYS-CHAS-CLNR-DRUM-LFT AUGER-CLNR-DRUM-350 SPG-C-5R9XR4X8L WSHR-CLNR-AUGER ASYS-NOZZLE-CLNR-DRUM SEAL-CLNR-DRUM-RGT COVER-RTNR-350 S/HEX-M4*8-NI GEAR-10S24-4-AUGER B-3511 SHEET-AUGER-FRT-350 SHAFT-BRUSH-CLNR-FRT SPG-E-6XR55X17R4-BLADE HLDR-BLASE-DRUM-350 BL-3511D SHLD-BLADE-CNR-FRT SHLD-BLADE-CNR-RER SHEET-BRUSH-CLNR SHEET-RECOVERY-DRUM SHEET-AUGER-LWR ASYS-RTNR-BRG ASYS-SHAFT-DRUM-FRT SHEET-AUGER-RER-350 S/HEX-M4X6-NI HANDL-DRUM-U-TNR GUIDE-DRUM-LFT-LWR S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI TERM-BRUSH-DRUM-350 CASE-ACTR-12 ACTR-12 SPG-ACT-12 P/SPW/AW-2X10-SS RR/E-5-SS S/BID-M3X8-NI S/BID-M3X4-NI RR/C/EXT-17-B UAMS-05-0 KI1215-AA
1 1/C 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 14 10/P 1 1/C 1 1/C 1 1/P 5 10/P 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 5/P 2 5/P 1 1/C 1 1/KP 1 1/PP 2 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/S 1 5/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/S 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/KP 1 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 3 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 1/P
CSP
CSP
32
e-STUDIO3511/4511
DEVELOPER-YMC-ASM
25 25 24 25 23 25
December 2003
30
34
21 20
C B
11 19
41
23
36
35 37 17 37 15 18 16 14 14 23 2 39
37
10
37 38
5 3 4
A B C
26
1 23 39
31 28 32 33 30 33 32
22
D
13 12 37 31
4 31 30
13 3 8 7 67
12
37 9
29
33
27
50
33
E-STUDIO4511/3511

DEVELOPER-YMC-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28A 28B 28C 29A 29B 29C 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
6LA30789000 6LA30808000 6LA29820000 4406333150 6LA30751000 6LA30778000 F0-01052000 X0-00968000 6LA30773000 6LA30722000 6LA30723000 6LA30779000 6LA30711000 4401949290 6LA29879000 4407728150 6LA30752000 6LA30753000 6LA30703000 6LA30750000 6LA30749000 6LA30805000 X0-01973000 6LA30786000 X0-01988000 6LA30783000 6LA30816000 6LA30812000 6LA30812100 6LA30812200 6LA30813000 6LA30813100 6LA30813300 X0-01989000 X0-00060000 X0-01991000 X0-01725000 6LA30706000 6LA30811000 6LA30765000 X0-00965000 6LA30795000 6LA30763000 6LA30764000 6LA30807000
ASYS-CASE-DEV-YMC RLR-MAGT-YMC BRG-L1480DDRPOP25LY13 SEAL-VC8-12-2.5 GEAR-08H21-8 DDL-1280ZZH-P0P25LY13 S5103-31 RR/E-7-SS AJST-BIAS-YMC MIXER-F-YMC MIXER-R-YMC BUSH-SEAL-6-M BUSH-MIXER-F-YMC SEAL-VC6-10-2.5 BRG-L1260DDRPOP25LY13 BUSH-6-GCB GEAR-08H19_08H27-6 GEAR-08H27-6 ASYS-PLATE-DOCTR-YMC GEAR-08S19-6 GEAR-08H18-6 PAD-DEV-F-YMC S/PAN/SWWS-M3X6-BS ASYS-GUIDE-DEV-YMC S/PAN-M2X4-BS ASYS-COVER-DEV-YMC SHUT-DEV-YMC HLDR-TC1-YMC HLDR-TC1-YMC HLDR-TC1-YMC HLDR-TC2-YMC HLDR-TC2-YMC HLDR-TC2-YMC S/TPP/BID-3X8-NI S/PAN/SWWP-M3X6-NI S/BID-M3X8-BSNI S/BID-M3X5-BSNI ASYS-PLATE-GEAR-YMC COUPLE-DEV-YMC SPG-CX10XR55X16R5 RR/E-4-SS DDL-1260ZZH-POP25LY13 SEAL-RLR-MAGT-F-YMC SEAL-RLR-MAGT-R-YMC PLATE-CASE-DEV-YMC
1 1/C 1 1/C 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 2 1/P 2 5/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/KP 4 10/P 1 1/KP 4 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 9 1/PP 9 1/PP 9 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 3 10/P 3 10/P 2 10/P 3 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 6 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/P
Yellow Magenta Cyan NAD MJD TWD,SAD,ASD,AU D,CND
33
e-STUDIO3511/4511
DEVELOPER-K-ASM
December 2003
107 19
39 20 17 105 16 14 15 34 101 2 37 12 10 3 38 31
106 11 106 12 10
A B C
1
4 31 101 34
33
102 102 5
104 1514
17 20 18
7 102 26 7 102 102 29 27 30 107 28 31 40 30 107 21 22 23 25 8 3 8
3 106
E
27
106
32 24 103 41 27 27 108 13 9 6
A B C
108
34
E-STUDIO4511/3511

DEVELOPER-K-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 37 38 39 40 41 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
6LA29848000 6LA29898000 4401949290 6LA29811000 6LA29849000 6LA29901000 6LA29920000 6LA30779000 6LA29817000 6LA29879000 6LA02920000 6LA29822000 6LA29932000 6LA29820000 4406333150 6LA29823000 6LA29819000 6LA29836000 6LA29844000 6LA29892000 6LA29875000 6LA29882000 6LA29810000 6LA41552000 6LA41686000 6LA29904000 6LA08918000 6LA29893000 6LA29805000 6LA29808000 6LA08917000 6LA29936000 6LA29918000 6LA29931000 6LA29869000 6LA29870000 6LA29921000 X0-01526000 6LA08905000 X0-00084000 X0-01725000 X0-00060000 X0-00968000 X0-00967000 X0-00965000 X0-00966000 X0-00164000
ASYS-CASE-DEV-BLK ASYS-COVER-BLADE SEAL-VC6-10-2.5 ASYS-BLADE-DOCTOR-BLK ASYS-COVER-MIXER ASYS-MIXER2-BLK ASYS-BUSH-MIXER-BLK BUSH-SEAL-6-M MIXER1-BLK BRG-L1260DDRPOP25LY13 BUSH-0410-05F-M GEAR-08H19-6-MIX RLR-MAGT-BLK BRG-L1480DDRPOP25LY13 SEAL-VC8-12-2.5 GEAR-08H21-8-SLV RLR-GAP-BLK BUSH-8X14X4-M BUSH-6X12X4-M COLOR-8R1X10X1R4-POM PLATE-FRT-BLK TERM-BIAS-BLK COVER-FRT-BLK HRNS-KATC-350 SNSR-ATC-350 SEAL-ATC-BLK S/TPP/HEX-3X10-NI COVER-RER-BLK ASYS-BRKT-RER-BLK GEAR-08H20-6-BLK S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI COVER-CABLE STAY-DEV-BLK SEAL-MAG-SIDE-BLK SEAL-FLANG-FRF-BLK SEAL-FLANG-RER-BLK SEAL-DRUM-UPPER P/PRL/AH7-2X12-SS S/HEX-M4*8-NI S/PAN/SWWP-M3X8-BSNI S/BID-M3X5-BSNI S/PAN/SWWP-M3X6-NI RR/E-7-SS RR/E-6-SS RR/E-4-SS RR/E-5-SS S/PAN/SWWP-M4X8-NI
1 1/PP 1 1/C 4 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/C 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/KP 2 1/P 1 5/P 2 1/P 1 1/KP 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 5/P 6 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 3 10/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 3 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 4 10/P 3 10/P 2 10/P
34
e-STUDIO3511/4511
REVOLVER-UNIT-1-ASM
December 2003
106 103 24 22 34
32
104
104 23 104 106 C
14
19 25 101 11 30 31 102 7 18 102 27 102 6 102 26 19 28 101 9 E G 17 33 G 13
20
104 103 20
32
16 19
14 19
15
E 101 8 102 102 D
5 A 6 4 5 A 1
10
2 3 6 5 6 30 29
11 12 107
35
E-STUDIO4511/3511

REVOLVER-UNIT-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22B 23B 23C 24B 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 101 102 103 104 105 106B 107
6LA29899000 6LA29837000 6LA29846000 6LA29842000 4402461720 X0-00968000 6LA29833000 6LA29831000 6LA29832000 6LA29830000 4407734980 6LA29935000 6LA29939000 6LA29889000 6LA29894000 6LA29888000 C0-03663000 6LA41544100 6LA08908000 6LA29902000 6LA29940000 6LA41635000 6LA41635100 44205187000 6LA29847000 6LA29938000 6LA29839000 6LA29934000 6LA29859000 4407972860 6LA31912000 6LA08913000 6LA29871000 6LA08905000 X0-00990000 X0-00966000 F0-00339000 F0-00024000 F0-00017000 X0-01443000 X0-00965000
ASYS-CHAS-LIFT FRAME-FRT-LIFT SHAFT-LIFT GEAR-08H19-8-BLK BUSH-8*5.5-GCB RR/E-7-SS SHAFT-CAM-LIFT CAM-FRT-LIFT CAM-RER-LIFT ACTR-CAM-LIFT BUSH-6-GCB ROCK-RTNR-DEV HLDR-SNSR-LIFT GUIDE-FRAME-LIFT GUARD-SNSR-LIFT SPG-L-DETENT GP1A73A HRNS-KDVP2-350 S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI COVER-SNSR-LIFT COV-HEAT-DRUM HEATR-DRUM-350X HEATR-DRUM-350X THRM-CS-7L SPG-E-8R5XR9X30R5-LIFT FRAME-RER-LIFT AXIS-GEAR-IDLE ASYS-GEAR-08H20-12 BUSH-6X10X4F-POM STOP-RING-6-5 GEAR-10S27-6 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI SPG-E-8R5XR9X32R3-LIFT S/HEX-M4*8-NI P/PRL/BH7-2X14-SS RR/E-5-SS EHP-6U LWS-1U T18S S/TPS/BID-3X6-NC RR/E-4-SS
1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 5/P 4 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 4 10/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 3 10/P 6 10/P 3 5/P 5 5/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
TWD,SAD,ASD,AU D,CND TWD,SAD ASD,AUD,CND
35
e-STUDIO3511/4511
REVOLVER-UNIT-2-ASM
December 2003
8 11
8 A
13 F
102 12 37 103
4 F 37 105 15 E 14 D 104 106 41 42 38 17 18 16 39 M 110 43 107 M 21 107 107 22 109 E D
35
4 108 4 Y 112
109
36
35
39 40
37
Y 23 1
24 G 25 26
27
19
36
E-STUDIO4511/3511

REVOLVER-UNIT-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 3 4 6 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 112
6LA37918000 6LA37901000 6LA37947000 6LA08909000 6LA33110000 6LA37938000 6LA41697000 6LA37939000 6LA41698100 6LA34015000 6LA34016000 6LA34014000 6LA41555000 6LA34032000 6LA34021000 6LA34017000 6LA34018000 6LA34019000 6LA34033000 6LA08908000 6LA37917000 6LA37916000 6LA08913000 6LA34028000 6LA34029000 6LA34027000 X0-02135000 6LA34036000 6LA36805000 C0-03663000 F0-00339000 C0-06663000 F0-01046000 X0-00057000 X0-00060000 F0-00024000 F0-00041000 X0-00963000 F0-00035000
ASYB-BIAS-DEV-YMC ASYB-REVOLVER ASYB-HLDR-DEV-YMC S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI ASYS-MOTR-DRIVE-RVL BRKT-SNSR-HP-RVLV_2 HRNS-RVHP-350 BRKT-SNSR-TNR-EX HRNS-CTNC-350 COV-TD-MAIN-BTM COV-TD-MAIN-TOP SNSR-TD-350 HRNS-DVTNA-350 ASYS-SHUT-TD CLNR-TD-LENS BRKT-TD-S STAY-TD-S SOL-TD SPG-E-6XR45X22R8 S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI BRG-6900ZZNRC2P5 RRG-RVLV S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI BRKT-COV-TD BUSH-4X7X6F-POM SHAFT-TD COV_TD DAMPER-SENSOR GP1A73A EHP-6U GP2A200LCS UAMS-02WL-0 S/PAN-M3X6-NI S/PAN/SWWP-M3X6-NI LWS-1U EDS-2 RR/E-2-SS LWS-05
1 1/P 1 1/C 6 1/P 12 10/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 10/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 9 10/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 2 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 10/P 4 10/P 2 5/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P
36
e-STUDIO3511/4511
TONER-1-ASM
December 2003
31 27 102 30 103 19 20 102 23 24 28 29 26 101 15 16 19 21 19 18 17 3 22 14 5 1 6
32
32
20 35
A
2 7
25 8 4
104 10 9 31 11 12
31 33 13 33 31
37
E-STUDIO4511/3511

TONER-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3A 3B 3C 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 35 101 102 103 104
6LA40631000 6LA40661000 6LA40676000 6LA40676100 6LA40676300 6LA03104000 6LA40686000 6LA40668000 6LA40634000 6LA40635000 6LA40632000 6LA03106000 6LA40685000 6LA41613000 6LA03099000 6LA40669000 6LA40624000 6LA40638000 6LA40633000 44204339000 6LA40639000 44201492000 6LA40637000 6LA40677000 4406584800 6LA40648000 6LA03225000 6LA40640000 6LA40641000 6LA03236000 6LA40650000 6LA03144000 6LA08917000 6LA08909000 44204394000 6LA40673000 X0-01670000 X0-00966000 X0-00964000 F0-01048000
CASE-GATE-TONER SEAL-BLK-TONER-JOINT-L ASYS-CPL-BTL-350 ASYS-CPL-BTL-350 ASYS-CPL-BTL-350 SEAL-VR90A SPG-C-9R7XR8X23R5R CPL-TONER-BTL BUSH-AUGER-TONER GASSKET-TONER-DRV COVER-CPL SEAL-WAS-90108 BRKT-SW-HLDR-350 SW-KTNCSW-350 COVER-SW-340 GEAR-CPL-TONER ASYS-BRKT-TONER-DRV MOTR.D-TONER-350 AUGER-SUB-HOPPER BUSH-0612*06F-M GEAR-08S27-6-D BUSH-6-POM SHAFT-TNR-DRV GEAR-08S27-5 CLUTCH-6-08L2 GEAR-08S27-6 ASYS-SEAL-SHTR GEAR-08S27_08S49-6 ASYS-BRKT-GEAR-R GP08S17/2GT072 BLT.SY-178-2GT-3 GG08S066/10S017 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI SCREW20*D23 SEAL-TONER-350 S/PAN-M2.6X4-NC RR/E-5-SS RR/E-3-SS UAMS-05-0
1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 5/P 3 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 8 10/P 3 10/P 2 10/P 1 1/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P
NAD MJD TWD,SAD,ASD,AU D,CND
37
e-STUDIO3511/4511
TONER-2-ASM
19
December 2003
28
20 19
12
24 31 13 14
A
102 11 101 33
23 27 26 25
102 34 101 3 4 1 17 16 18 3 5 101 2 35 32 102
19 102
22
10 6 101 3 36 5 9 7 19 8 19 101
38
E-STUDIO4511/3511

TONER-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 101 102
6LA40684000 6LA40660000 44204339000 6LA40608000 6LA40617000 6LA40622000 6LA40610000 6LA40609000 6LA40607000 6LA40614000 6LA40680000 6LA40613000 6LA40677000 6LA40618000 6LA40619000 44204347000 6LA40683000 6LA08913000 6LA08917000 6LA08901000 6LA40644000 6LA40652000 6LA40643000 6LA40645000 6LA40647000 6LA40646000 6LA35567000 6LA08909000 6LA40662000 6LA40659000 6LA40649000 6LA40648000 6LA40678000 4406527560 X0-00964000 X0-01989000
TERM-TONER-DEV SEAL-BLK-TONER-JOINT-U BUSH-0612*06F-M AUGER-TONER-DEV GEAR-08B20-6 SEAL-BLK-TONER-PIPE JOINT-PATH-DEV JOINT-HOPPER AUGER-TONER-UP GEAR-08S23-6-D ASYS-BRKT-BLK-PATH GEAR-08S23-6 GEAR-08S27-5 GEAR-08S16_08B20-6 SHUT-TERM-TONER SPC054-040-0440 HLDR-AUGER-DEV S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI S/HEX-M3*8-NI GUIDE-BOTL-TONER-LOW SEAL-GUIDE-BOTTLE GUIDE-BOTL-TONER-UP HLDR-BOTL-TONER SPG-C-15X1X27 PUSHER-BOTL-TONER ASYS-DRUM-GUIDE-S-R S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI SEAL-CUPL-BOTL BRKT-GEAR-F GEAR-08B20-6 GEAR-08S27-6 ASYS-BKT-TNR-PATH-SUB K-BUSH-MIXER-R RR/E-3-SS S/TPP/BID-3X8-NI
1 1/P 1 5/P 3 5/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 6 10/P 8 10/P 1 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 10/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 6 10/P 6 10/P
38
e-STUDIO3511/4511
FUSER-1-ASM
December 2003
42 46
32
23 43 60 113 53 111 A 1 40 111
111 I 44 108 45 57 111 44 52 44 44 111 46 20 24 I 31 112 54 103 104 11 110 55 17 21 3 112 106 12 28 116 G 50 B 102 49 106 116 13 47 10 48 G 38 30 116 34 33 102 29 35 36 37 105 102 27 102 109 22 114 101 15 102 26 22 15 18 16 J E D 58 16 7 I F 102 K 41 106 102 K 39 102 I 6 4 59 25 20 111 103
111
C 111 111 8
103
25 20 101 25 20 25
20 56
5 H 4 6
19
31 J 14 B
19
18 H 116
37
30 38
17 C 9 58 116
105 35 36 D 33 116 34
116
39
E-STUDIO4511/3511

FUSER-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 52 53 54 55 56 58 60 101 102 103 104 105 106 108 109 110 111 112 113 114
6LA36262000 6LA36217000 6LA36218000 6LA36294000 6LA27424000 6LA36295000 6LA36170000 6LA36292000 6LA36169000 4401759090 6LA36282000 44203038000 6LA36329000 6LA36207000 6LA36241000 6LA36363000 6LA36227000 6LA08937000 6LA05278000 6LA34929000 6LA36201000 6LA36238000 6LA36348000 6LA36293000 6LA36256000 6LA36274000 6LA36378000 44203023000 6LA36128000 4407734980 6LA36302000 6LA36408000 6LA36124000 6LA36150000 6LA36278000 6LA36243000 6LA36118000 6LA36119000 6LA36291000 6LA36263000 6LA36290000 6LA36265000 6LA34906000 44202991000 6LA36297000 6LA34935000 6LA36330000 6LA34921000 6LA36422000 6LA36423000 6LA36327000 6LA36328000 6LA36289000 6LA36412000 6LA36306000 6LA08910000 4400678850 F0-00270000 6LA08900000 6LA08908000 X0-00968000 X0-00434000 X0-00966000 X0-00973000 X0-01009000 F0-00032000 6LA08917000 6LA36400000 6LA08916000 X0-00965000
COVER-FUSER-SUB BRKT-ARM-F BRKT-ARM-R COLLAR-BRG-PS HR-3511-L BRG6803ZZS1C4KZ BRKT-SPL-R BRKT-SCR-PR BRKT-SPL BUSH-6 GEAR-10S37-10S34-8 GEAR-IDLE-15-23 GEAR-10S18-10S25-6 COVER-FUS-PR SPG-E-FUS-BELT SPG-ARM-FUSER SCREW-M3-FUS SCREW-BKT-DEV SCREW-FUSER-M4B SPG-E-SCRAPER STUD-IH-R STUD-FUS-STAY COV-GER-R COV-GUIDE-RTN-L SCRAPR-FUS-350 PLATE-ENT-HR PLATE-ENT-PR GEAR-SEP-IDLE-1 GUIDE-ENT-PR BUSH-6-GCB SPG-BRG-RL-PS LBL-FUS-4 LEVER-ARM-FUSER SHAFT-ARM-FUSER LEVER-FUS-ARM-H SPG-C-7R4XR4X20R CAM-ARM-FUSER SHAFT-LEVER-ARM ARM-FUSER-F-S PLT-COVER-FUSER ARM-FUSER-R-S SHEET-FUS-HND GUIDE-EXIT-RTN GATE-FUSER SHAFT-GATE-L SPL-GUIDE-R-350 SHAFT-IDLE-CL GEAR-10S18-6 BRKT-SCRAPR-PR-F BRKT-SCRAPR-PR-R GATE-FUSER-SEN SPG-L-ACT-SEN BRKT-COV-HNS-R ASYB-BRKT-SCRAPR SHEET-FUS-HOT S/TPS/HEX-3*10-NI SZ-HOME-140 UAMS-05L-0-46 S/HEX-M3*6-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI RR/E-7-SS S/BID-M3X8-NI RR/E-5-SS RR/E-1.5-SS P/SPW/AW-2X10-SS PLWS-1-46B S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI PLWS-2-46B S/TPP/HEX-3X6-NI RR/E-4-SS
1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/S 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 4 5/P 3 10/P 2 5/P 5 5/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 5 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 2 5/P 2 5/P 1 5/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/D 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/PP 8 1/P 1 1/KP 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/KP 2 10/P 1 1/P 3 10/P 9 10/P 3 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 3 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 13 10/P 2 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
CSP
MSP
MSP
39
E-STUDIO4511/3511

FUSER-1-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
115 116
6LA08905000 S/HEX-M4*8-NI X0-01950000 S/PAN/SWWS-M3X10-NI
2 10/P 7 10/P
39
e-STUDIO3511/4511
FUSER-2-ASM
43
December 2003
47 41 112 9 44 20
36
37 35 105 43
106
N
15 107 21 26 25 16 26 25 103 103 E 14 14 113 113 B 103 19 19 103 12
M A
9
O 105
13
G
46 103
D
17 18 32 33 5 18 40 17
H C
38
21 107 109
39
D B G
105 111 22 111
109
K O
107 31 1 108 24 21
111 110 23
110 101 103 8 7 107 9 4 6 104 30 107 29 103 31 33
27 34
H
21
11
I
8 104 4
28
F
10 101 29 30 107 9
2 6 107
40
E-STUDIO4511/3511

FUSER-2-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C CSP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 43 44 46 47 101 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113
6LA27423000 6LA36283000 6LA36228000 6LA36219000 6LA36349000 6LA36174000 6LA36249000 6LA36232000 6LA08933000 6LA36244000 6LA36245000 6LA36284000 6LA36381000 6LA36375000 44202975000 6LA36385000 44203198000 6LA36346000 6LA36211000 6LA36410000 4401759090 6LA36402000 6LA27426000 6LA34922000 6LA36382000 6LA36377000 6LA36386000 6LA36303000 4401902390 4406325180 6LA36234000 6LA36403000 6LA34929000 6LA27425000 6LA34903000 6LA34901000 6LA34902000 6LA36331000 6LA36286000 6LA36301000 6LA36261000 6LA36407000 6LA36405000 6LA36359000 6LA36409000 X0-01950000 X0-00426000 X0-02069000 6LA08908000 X0-00964000 X0-00966000 X0-00965000 6LA08917000 6LA08909000 6LA08918000 6LA36276000 X0-00973000
BT-3511-FU RLR-BELT-HR ASYS-BRKT-FUS-BELT GUIDE-BRG SHEET-FUS-LEVER BRG-6800ZZ ASYS-BRKT-PLT SPG-E-FUS-SCRP SCREW-CON-DEV-V BRKT-STOP-BRG-F BRKT-STOP-BRG-R COVER-EXIT-LFT GUIDE-EXIT-U GUIDE-BELT GEAR-EXIT-U BRKT-FUS-EXIT ROLL-EXIT-L-320 SFT-EXIT-L-D SPL-EXIT-ROLL LBL-HOT-350 BUSH-6 ASYS-ROLL-EXIT-U B-3511U GEAR-10S22-6 ROLL-FUS-GUIDE SHAFT-FUS-GUIDE BRKT-FUS-CLN BRKT-CLN-ARM BUSH-6-11 SPE-P/R-CL-800 SPC-FUS-CLN TAPE-COVER-EXIT SPG-E-SCRAPER SR-3511U HLDR-GEAR-EXIT GEAR-10S16_05S48 GEAR-08S22_05S24 COV-EX-LFT-SUB PLT-FUS-LFT LEVER-FUS-PAPER COVER-EXIT-RGT LBL-FUS-2 LBL-FUS-3 SPL-COV-STOP LBL-INST-FUSER S/PAN/SWWS-M3X10-NI S/BID-M3X4-NI S/TPS/BID-3X6-ZU3 S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI RR/E-3-SS RR/E-5-SS RR/E-4-SS S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPP/HEX-3X10-NI SCREW-M3-FUS-C RR/E-1.5-SS
1 1/S 1 1/C 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 11 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/KP 4 5/P 1 1/KP 1 1/S 1 1/P 10 5/P 10 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 2 5/P 2 5/P 1 1/KP 1 5/P 1 1/S 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/PP 2 5/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 2 10/P 14 10/P 2 10/P 7 10/P 1 10/P 5 10/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 3 10/P 1 5/P 10 10/P
CSP
CSP
40
e-STUDIO3511/4511
FUSER-3-ASM
27 29
December 2003
102 107 4 102 5 8 9 102 103 6 2 17 D 18 26 24 26 G
25 28 108 19 A 21 26 G 24
24
101 20
7 101 16 103 103 11 103 104 10 103 14 F
104 104 10 E 103 104 10 103 12
103
101 13
103 18 17 2 6 3
106 D B F 103 15 106 105 105 E B A 103
41
E-STUDIO4511/3511

FUSER-3-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7A 7B 7C 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
6LA36252000 44202938000 6LA36205000 6LA36206000 44202940000 6LA36264000 6LA36339000 6LA36340000 6LA36392000 X0-00966000 4401759090 6LA36387000 6LA36180000 6LA07172000 6LA36235000 6LA05317000 6LA36308000 6LA36383000 6LA36277000 6LA36269000 6LA36136000 6LA36399000 6LA36394000 6LA36353000 6LA36388000 6LA42102000 6LA36401000 6LA36404000 6LA42086000 6LA08917000 X0-00060000 F0-00032000 6LA08908000 F0-00270000 X0-00094000 6LA08905000 6LA08900000 X0-02127000
BRG6808ZZNRS1C4 BKT-IH-F BRKT-IH-R GEAR-H/R-320 CRR-S400SKFB ASYB-COIL-IH-100 ASYB-COIL-IH-200 ASYB-COIL-IH-127 RR/E-5-SS BUSH-6 BRKT-THMS BRKT-THERMO-HR THRMST-340-FUS HRNS-TRMS-350 K-HLD-THERMO ASYS-THRMIS-RH BRKT-THRMS CRR-HR-CLR COLAR-HR-IN STAY-FUSER DUCT-FUSER-BASE DUCT-FUSER-COV SPG-C-4R46XR15X17R3 WHEEL-STAR-D SNSR-TBPS-350 SHEET-DUCT-FUS HLDR-SNSR-TBU HRNS-TBPS-350 S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI S/PAN/SWWP-M3X6-NI PLWS-1-46B S/TPS/HEX-3*6-NI UAMS-05L-0-46 S/PAN/SWWP-M3X10-NI S/HEX-M4*8-NI S/HEX-M3*6-NI
1 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/C 1 1/C 1 1/C 1 10/P 1 5/P 3 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C 1 1/P 2 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 6 1/P 1 1/C 7 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 10/P 2 10/P 5 5/P 13 10/P 8 10/P 3 10/P 2 10/P 1 10/P 1
MSP
41
e-STUDIO3511/4511
105 26
ADU-ASM
50 42
December 2003
106
43
B C L D
38 32 41 33 38 105 34 24 41 35
12
25
7 7 36
41
I
30 49
12 12
I
31 38 4 46 105
106
G K H
15
107 48 47
102
48 102 28
47 49 107
23
101 18 9 27
G
101 102 17 28 20 104 102 103 21104 16 9 10 39 107 55 11 101 102 9 10 102 19 22 10
2 106 31 14 3
A B
28 8 101 8 5 6 13 37 9
C
29 28 29
E J
11
D
54 108 101 101
11 6
9 44
45
106 38
1 108
E
101 106 53
K
52 101 108 108
106 106 51 101
42
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ADU-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108
6LA28612000 6LA28604000 6LA76218000 6LA28621000 44203252000 6LA28608000 41316029000 4407734980 4407972860 44201492000 41317051000 X0-00979000 41316033000 6LA35253000 6LA76208000 6LA32838000 6LA28605000 44205169000 44203218000 44203219000 44203220000 44203250000 41316054000 44203255000 44203253000 6LA28606000 41316064000 F0-00339000 F0-00221000 6LA69830000 4401983080 6LA71341000 6LA71342000 6LA71324000 6LA71343000 6LA28622000 6LA35254000 4400682590 44203240000 6LA08913000 F0-00260000 6LA28602000 4402859600 44203271000 44203272000 6LA56500000 41316101000 41316103000 41316102000 6LA28607000 6LA28609000 6LA28610000 6LA28620000 6LA28619000 6LA28611000 X0-02069000 6LA08935000 X0-00730000 X0-00966000 6LA08901000 6LA08909000 6LA08917000 6LA08900000
ASYS-FRAME-BTM-ADU ASYS-FRM-RER-ADU FRAME-FRT-ADU GUIDE-PAPER-UPR GUIDE-PAPER-L32 SCREW-CASET ROLL-TRANS-C BUSH-6-GCB STOP-RING-6-5 BUSH-6-POM PLY/T-2GT020-6F P/PRL/AH7-2X8-SS BLT/T-282-2GT-5 CUSH-GUIDE-ADU BRKT-MOTR-UPR CLUCH-33C-6-CCW-GEAR ASYS-BRKT-MOT-ADU K-MOT-EXIT-320 GP08S024/2GT020 GG08S024/10S028 GEAR-08S024 BLT/T-426-2GT-5 LEVER-LATCH-F LEVER-LATCH-R32 SHAFT-OPEN-320 LEVER-OPEN-ADU SPE-068-070-241 EHP-6U KGLS-24RTV0 PWA-F-ADU-360 SZ-FED-210 HRNS-ADU-CVSW-360 HRNS-ADU-FED-L-360 HRNS-ADU-360 HRNS-ADU-FED-U-360 ASYB-ROLL-TRANS-L SHEET-CUSH-ADU SKB-KI-100M SPL-ADU-320 S/TPS/HEX-4*8-NI SG-130 CASE-ADU SP-CS3A-B2BA COVER-INSIDE-F COVER-IN-R-320 GUIDE-PAPER-IN ROLL-TRANS-IDLE SPR-IDLE SPL-GUIDE-IN LBL-O-PLACE-COV HLDR-BYPASS-FRT HLDR-BYPASS-RER COVER-HINGE-SUB-FRT COVER-HINGE-SUB-RER PLATE-POS-ADU S/TPS/BID-3X6-ZU3 SCR-M3X6BISR-NI S/SET/K-M3X4-B RR/E-5-SS S/HEX-M3*8-NI S/TPS/HEX-3*8-NI S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI S/HEX-M3*6-NI
1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 2 5/P 2 1/KP 3 5/P 6 5/P 3 5/P 3 1/P 3 10/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 4 5/P 4 5/P 1 1/C 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 3 5/P 1 1/P 3 10/P 3 5/P 1 1/PP 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 6 1/P 6 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/KP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 13 10/P 7 10/P 1 10/P 4 10/P 4 10/P 8 10/P 4 10/P 4 10/P
42
e-STUDIO3511/4511
DRAWER-ASM
December 2003
10 14 25 9 51
A
8 16 18 17 26 15
12 11
B
56 57 57 24 7 52 5 30 4 3 7 55 7 55 3 2
54
29
21
54 54 54 54
22
28 27 1 54
31
23
43
E-STUDIO4511/3511

CASSETTE-ASM
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31A 31B 31C 51 52 54 55 56 57
41306032000 41304004000 41306028000 6LA29052000 41306614000 6LA29053000 41306517000 41306033000 41305015000 6LA29056000 41305012000 41304510000 41304511000 41304065000 6LA29058000 41306260000 41305546000 6LA29061000 6LA29533000 6LA29534000 6LA29059000 41305503000 41307701000 6LA29062000 6LA29063000 6LA29064000 41307599000 6LA29549000 6LA29550000 6LA47905000 X0-00963000 X0-00434000 6LA08917000 X0-00968000 X0-01989000 X0-02116000
CST-AT K-SFT-LIFT-TRAY BUSH-SFT-LIFT LEVER-LIFT-TRAY CUSH-LVR-LIFT ASYS-TRAY-CST CUSH-TRAY-CST WALL-SIDE-F-AT LVR-ADJUST-WALL LID-LEVER-ADJUST PL-ADJUST-WALL PIN-ADJUST-LVR PIN-ADJUST-WALL K-WALL-SIDE-R LEVER-LOCK-WALL-RER LOCK-WALL-R SPL-LOCK-WALL-R WALL-CSSTT-END COVER-CSSTT COVER-CSSTT-HNDL ASYS-PLATE-PINION SPC-LVR-WALL LBL/O-P-MAX LBL-O-PAPER LBL-O-GUIDE LBL-O-LD SHEET-CST SHEET-SIZE-LT SHEET-SIZE-A4 SHEET-SIZE-CN RR/E-2-SS S/BID-M3X8-NI S/TPP/HEX-3*8-NI RR/E-7-SS S/TPP/BID-3X8-NI W/TH/A-3-SS
1 1/PP 1 1/P 2 5/P 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/P 3 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/PP 1 1/PP 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 5/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 1/KP 1 10/P 2 10/P 10 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P 2 10/P
NAD TWD,SAD,ASD,AU D CND
43
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ASY-LGC-350S-1
December 2003
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1A 1B 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44
6LA42070000 ASY-PWA-LGC-350S 6LA42071000 ASY-PWA-LGC-351S C0-07814001 IC1 C0-08148001 IC2 C0-08147001 IC3 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC4 C0-07917000 IC5 C0-00921000 TA8428K(S) IC6 C0-08142001 IC7 C0-07829001 IC8 C0-01943001 74VHC244MTCX IC9 C0-06568001 IC10 C0-01934001 74VHC00MTCX IC11 C0-01946001 74VHC32MTCX IC12 C0-06681000 IC13 C0-08141001 IC14 C0-08141001 IC15 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC16 C0-07813001 IC17 C0-01941001 74VHC14MTCX IC18 C0-01931001 74LCX244MTCX IC19 C0-01932001 74LCX245MTCX IC20 C0-01931001 74LCX244MTCX IC21 C0-01931001 74LCX244MTCX IC22 C0-01952001 74VHCT541AMTCX IC23 C0-01937001 74VHC08MTCX IC24 C0-08141001 IC25 C0-01941001 74VHC14MTCX IC26 C0-01946001 74VHC32MTCX IC27 C0-08124001 IC28 4849300232 IC-LCA301 IC29 C0-01934001 74VHC00MTCX IC30 C0-07895000 IC31 C0-01935001 74VHC04MTCX IC32 C0-07812001 IC33 C0-06762000 EC-N062 TMP95C063FE IC34
1 1/SB 1 1/SB 1 1 1 1 5/S 1 1 5/S 1 1 1 1/S 1 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1 1 1 5/S 1 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1 1/S 1 1 1/S
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 76 77 101 102 103
C0-08141001 IC35 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC36 E0-06671000 CLC1028-0301 IC37 4849300232 IC-LCA301 IC38 C0-06860001 IC39 C0-06859001 IC40 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC41 C0-01946001 74VHC32MTCX IC42 C0-01943001 74VHC244MTCX IC43 C0-00921000 TA8428K(S) IC44 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC45 C0-04597001 74VHC245MTCX IC46 C0-05984001 IC47 C0-08124001 IC48 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC49 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC50 C0-01943001 74VHC244MTCX IC51 C0-08142001 IC52 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC53 C0-01915001 MM74HC4053MTCX IC54 C0-08141001 IC55 C0-08141001 IC56 C0-06859001 IC57 C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC58 C0-08141001 IC59 C0-08123000 IC60 C0-07829001 IC61 C0-06859001 IC62 C0-06859001 IC63 C0-02013001 MAX6001EUR-T IC64 C0-07813001 IC66 C0-07812001 IC67 C0-08138001 Q1 C0-08138001 Q2 C0-08136000 Q3
1 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1/S 1 1 1 5/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1/S 1 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1 1 1 5/S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1/S 1 1 1 1 1
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166
C0-08138001 Q4 C0-08176000 Q5 C0-08139001 Q6 C0-08138001 Q7 C0-08138001 Q8 C0-08133002 Q9 C0-08138001 Q10 C0-08138001 Q11 C0-08139001 Q12 C0-08139001 Q13 C0-08139001 Q14 C0-08139001 Q15 C0-08139001 Q16 C0-08139001 Q17 C0-08139001 Q18 C0-08139001 Q19 C0-08139001 Q20 C0-08139001 Q21 C0-08138001 Q22 C0-08127002 D1 C0-08168001 D2 C0-08127002 D3 C0-08162001 D4 C0-08127002 D5 C0-08127002 D6 C0-08127002 D7 C0-08127002 D8 C0-08127002 D9 C0-08127002 D10 C0-08127002 D11 C0-08127002 D12 C0-08127002 D13 C0-08127002 D14 C0-08127002 D15 C0-08127002 D16
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
167 168 201 202 203 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 272 276 277 278 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 289 290
C0-08127002 D17 C0-08127002 D18 C0-08130001 ZD1 C0-08164001 ZD2 C0-08129001 ZD3 D0-15996001 C1 D0-15994001 C2 D0-15996001 C3 D0-15996001 C4 D0-15995001 C5 D0-15999001 C6 D0-16275001 C7 D0-15994001 C8 D0-15995001 C9 D0-16275001 C10 D0-16275001 C11 D0-16002001 C12 D0-16277001 C13 D0-16003001 C14 D0-15994001 C15 D0-15994001 C16 D0-15997001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04090001 D0-04090001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-05042001 D0-04098001 C17 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C22 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C26 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C27 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C28 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C31 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C32 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C33 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C34 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C35 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C36 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C37 C1608JB1H104KT C39 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C40
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 316 317 318 320 322 323 325 326 329 330 331
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C41 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C42 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C43 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C44 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C45 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C46 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C47 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C48 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C49 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C50 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C51 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C52 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C53 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C54 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C55 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C56 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C57 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C58 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C59 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C60 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C61 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C62 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C63 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C64 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C66 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C67 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C68 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C70 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C72 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C73 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C75 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C76 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C79 D0-04095001 GRM1882C1H150JZ01D C80 D0-04095001 GRM1882C1H150JZ01D C81
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 368
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C82 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C83 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C84 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C85 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C86 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C87 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C88 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C89 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C90 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C91 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C92 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C93 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C94 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C95 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C96 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C97 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C98 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C99 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C100 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C101 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C102 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C104 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C105 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C106 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C107 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C108 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C109 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C110 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C111 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C112 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C113 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C114 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C115 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C116 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C118
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
369 370 371 372 373 374 375 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C119 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C120 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C121 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C122 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C123 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C124 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C125 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C127 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C128 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C129 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C130 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C131 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C132 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C133 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C134 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C135 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C136 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C137 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C138 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C139 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C140 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C141 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C142 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C143 D0-04095001 GRM1882C1H150JZ01D C144 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C145 D0-04095001 GRM1882C1H150JZ01D C146 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C147 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C148 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C149 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C150 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C151 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C152 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C153 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C154
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
405 406 407 408 409 410 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441
D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C155 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C156 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C157 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C158 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C159 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C160 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C162 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C163 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C164 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C165 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C166 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C167 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C168 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C169 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C170 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C171 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C172 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C173 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C174 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C175 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C176 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C178 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C179 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C180 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C181 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C182 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C183 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C184 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C185 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C186 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C187 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C188 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C189 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C190 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C191
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
443 444 446 447 448 452 453 454 455 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 484 485 486 487 488 489 493 494 495
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C193 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C194 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C196 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C197 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C198 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C202 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C203 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C204 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C205 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C209 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C210 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C211 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C212 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C213 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C214 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C215 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C216 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C217 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C218 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C222 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C223 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C224 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C225 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C226 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C227 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C228 D0-04100001 GRM188B11H103KA01D C234 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C235 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C236 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C237 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C238 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C239 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C243 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C244 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C245
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
496 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 516 517 518 519 520 522 523 524 525 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C246 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C253 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C254 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C255 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C256 D0-04100001 GRM188B11H103KA01D C257 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C258 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C259 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C260 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C261 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C262 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C263 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C264 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C266 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C267 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C268 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C269 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C270 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C272 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C273 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C274 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C275 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C277 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C278 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C279 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C280 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C281 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C282 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C283 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C284 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C285 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C286 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C287 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C288 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C289
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 551 553 555 558 559 560 561 562 563 565 566 567 568 569 570 650 651 653 654 656 657 751 752 753 754 755
D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C291 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C292 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C293 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C294 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C295 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C296 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C297 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C298 D0-04086001 GRM1882C1H221JA01D C299 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C301 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C303 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C305 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C308 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C309 D0-04100001 GRM188B11H103KA01D C310 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C311 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C312 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C313 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C315 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C316 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C317 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C318 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C319 D0-04095001 GRM1882C1H150JZ01D C320 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C400 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C401 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C403 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C404 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C406 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C407 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C501 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C502 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C503 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C504 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C505
51
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
850 851 852 853
D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C600 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C601 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C602 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C603
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
51
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ASY-LGC-350S-2
December 2003
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 37 38
D0-02288001 D0-00984001 D0-00984001 D0-00954001 D0-00954001 D0-01135001 D0-00984001 D0-01019001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-00951001 D0-00951001 D0-00951001 D0-00953001 D0-00983001 D0-00952001 D0-01182001 R18 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R19 D0-01182001 R20 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R21 D0-01182001 R22 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R23 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R24 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R26 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R27 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R28 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R29 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R30 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R31 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R32 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R33 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R34 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R35 D0-01053001 MCR03EZPFX1002 R37 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R38 R2 MCR03EZHJ223 R3 MCR03EZHJ223 R4 MCR03EZHJ104 R5 MCR03EZHJ104 R6 MCR03EZPFX3902 R7 MCR03EZHJ223 R8 MCR03EZHJ471 R9 MCR03EZHJ472 R10 MCR03EZHJ472 R11 MCR03EZHJ101 R12 MCR03EZHJ101 R13 MCR03EZHJ101 R14 MCR03EZHJ103 R15 MCR03EZHJ222 R16 MCR03EZHJ102 R17
1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
39 40 41 42 43 45 46 47 48 49 50 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 73 74 75 76
D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R39 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R40 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R41 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R42 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R43 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R45 D0-01046001 MCR03EZHJ822 R46 D0-01031001 MCR03EZHJ562 R47 D0-01031001 MCR03EZHJ562 R48 D0-01004001 MCR03EZHJ332 R49 D0-00974001 MCR03EZHJ182 R50 D0-01037001 MCR03EZHJ681 R52 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R53 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R54 D0-01053001 MCR03EZPFX1002 R55 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R56 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R57 D0-00976001 MCR03EZHJ184 R58 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R59 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R60 D0-00976001 MCR03EZHJ184 R61 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R62 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R63 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R64 D0-01053001 MCR03EZPFX1002 R65 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R66 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R67 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R68 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R69 D0-00967001 MCR03EZHJ153 R70 D0-00983001 MCR03EZHJ222 R71 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R73 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R74 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R75 D0-00966001 MCR03EZHJ152 R76
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
77 78 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 107 108 109 110 112 113 114 115
D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R77 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R78 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R80 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R81 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R82 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R83 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R84 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R85 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R86 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R87 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R88 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R89 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R90 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R91 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R92 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R93 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R94 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R95 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R96 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R97 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R98 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R99 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R100 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R101 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R102 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R103 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R104 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R107 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R108 D0-01051001 MCR03EZPFX1000 R109 D0-01054001 MCR03EZPFX1003 R110 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R112 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R113 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R114 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R115
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150
D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R116 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R117 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R118 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R119 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R120 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R121 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R122 D0-01099001 MCR03EZPFX2202 R123 D0-01182001 R124 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R125 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R126 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R127 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R128 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R129 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R130 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R131 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R132 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R133 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R134 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R135 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R136 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R137 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R138 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R139 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R140 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R141 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R142 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R143 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R144 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R145 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R146 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R147 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R148 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R149 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R150
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188
D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R151 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R152 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R153 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R154 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R155 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R156 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R157 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R158 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R159 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R160 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R161 D0-01054001 MCR03EZPFX1003 R162 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R163 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R164 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R165 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R166 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R167 D0-00955001 MCR03EZHJ105 R168 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R169 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R170 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R171 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R175 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R176 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R177 D0-01054001 MCR03EZPFX1003 R178 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R179 D0-01125001 MCR03EZPFX3301 R180 D0-01125001 MCR03EZPFX3301 R181 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R182 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R183 D0-01125001 MCR03EZPFX3301 R184 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R185 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R186 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R187 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R188
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223
D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R189 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R190 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R191 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R192 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R193 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R194 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R195 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R196 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R197 D0-01037001 MCR03EZHJ681 R198 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R199 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R200 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R201 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R202 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R203 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R204 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R205 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R206 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R207 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R208 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R209 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R210 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R211 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R212 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R213 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R214 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R215 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R216 D0-01021001 MCR03EZHJ473 R217 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R218 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R219 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R220 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R221 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R222 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R223
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
224 225 226 227A 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258
D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R224 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R225 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R226 D0-01099001 MCR03EZPFX2202 R227 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R228 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R229 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R230 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R231 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R232 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R233 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R234 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R235 D0-00954001 MCR03EZHJ104 R236 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R237 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R238 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R239 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R240 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R241 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R242 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R243 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R244 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R245 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R246 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R247 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R248 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R249 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R250 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R251 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R252 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R253 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R254 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R255 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R256 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R257 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R258
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P e-Studio3511
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 284 285 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295
D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R259 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R260 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R261 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R262 D0-00654001 R263 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R264 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R265 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R266 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R267 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R268 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R269 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R270 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R271 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R272 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R273 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R274 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R275 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R276 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R277 D0-00955001 MCR03EZHJ105 R278 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R279 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R280 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R281 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R282 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R284 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R285 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R287 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R288 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R289 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R290 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R291 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R292 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R293 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R294 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R295
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 313 315 316 317 318 319 320 322 323 324 325 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 335
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
336 337 338 339 342 343 345 348 349 352 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
382 383 384 385 386 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 401 402 403 404 405 407 408 409 410 417 424 425 426 427 428 435 436 438 439
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 450 451 456 457 458 459 468 469 470 471 472 473 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 494 495 496 497
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
498 499 500 501 502 503 505 507 508 509 511 512 513 514 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543
D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R498 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R499 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R500 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R501 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R502 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R503 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R505 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R507 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R508 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R509 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R511 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R512 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R513 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R514 D0-01003001 MCR03EZHJ331 R516 D0-01003001 MCR03EZHJ331 R517 D0-01003001 MCR03EZHJ331 R518 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R519 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R520 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R521 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R522 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R523 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R524 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R525 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R526 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R534 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R535 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R536 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R537 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R538 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R539 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R540 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R541 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R542 D0-01029001 R543
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614
D0-01029001 R580 D0-01029001 D0-01020001 D0-00981001 D0-01020001 D0-00984001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-00984001 D0-01020001 D0-00984001 D0-00949001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-00983001 D0-00983001 D0-01020001 D0-01002001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 D0-01020001 R581 MCR03EZHJ472 R582 MCR03EZHJ220 R583 MCR03EZHJ472 R584 MCR03EZHJ223 R585 MCR03EZHJ472 R586 MCR03EZHJ472 R587 MCR03EZHJ223 R588 MCR03EZHJ472 R589 MCR03EZHJ223 R590 MCR03EZHJ000 R591 MCR03EZHJ472 R592 MCR03EZHJ472 R593 MCR03EZHJ472 R594 MCR03EZHJ472 R595 MCR03EZHJ472 R596 MCR03EZHJ472 R597 MCR03EZHJ472 R598 MCR03EZHJ472 R599 MCR03EZHJ472 R600 MCR03EZHJ472 R601 MCR03EZHJ472 R602 MCR03EZHJ472 R603 MCR03EZHJ472 R604 MCR03EZHJ472 R605 MCR03EZHJ222 R606 MCR03EZHJ222 R607 MCR03EZHJ472 R608 MCR03EZHJ330 R609 MCR03EZHJ472 R610 MCR03EZHJ472 R611 MCR03EZHJ472 R612 MCR03EZHJ472 R613 MCR03EZHJ472 R614
1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
615 616 617 620 622 623 700 701 703 704 705 707 708 709 711 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 750 753 800 801 802 803 804
D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R615 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R616 D0-01029001 R617 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R620 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R622 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R623 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R700 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R701 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R703 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R704 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R705 D0-01052001 MCR03EZPFX1001 R707 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R708 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R709 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R711 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R713 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R714 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R715 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R716 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R717 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R718 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R719 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R720 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R721 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R722 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R750 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R753 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R800 D0-01189001 MCR10EZHJ000 R801 D0-00983001 MCR03EZHJ222 R802 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R803 D0-01189001 MCR10EZHJ000 R804
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
52
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ASY-LGC-350S-3
December 2003
53
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-LGC-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
31 32 34 35 37 38 40 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 54 55 56 58 59 60 61 62 63 101 102 103 151 152 153 154
E0-06776000 CN331 E0-06909000 CN332 E0-06512001 CN334 E0-06780000 CN335 E0-06777000 CN337 E0-06445000 CN338 E0-06912000 CN340 E0-02160000 DHB-PA34-R13NNA CN344 E0-06779000 CN345 E0-06862000 CN347 E0-06870000 CN348 E0-00112000 174215-1 CN349 E0-00780000 CN350 E0-06759000 CN351 E0-06854000 CN352 E0-06756000 CN354 E0-06866000 CN355 E0-06867000 CN356 E0-06772000 CN358 E0-06789000 CN359 E0-06774000 CN360 E0-06778000 CN361 E0-00260000 CN362 E0-06749000 CN363 E0-04294000 RXE025 F1 E0-04296000 F2 E0-03542000 RXE017 F3 D0-16457001 X1 D0-16117001 X2 D0-12253001 X3 D0-08700001 MA-406-8.25M-16/50L2 X4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1/P 1 1 1 1 1/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1/P 1 1 1/P 1 1 1 1 1/C
53
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ASY-SYS-350S-1
December 2003
54
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 21 31 33 34 35 36 37 38 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
6LA42082000 ASY-PWA-SYS-350S C0-00379001 LED1 C0-00379001 LED2 C0-00379001 LED3 C0-00379001 LED4 C0-00379001 LED5 C0-00379001 LED6 C0-00379001 LED7 C0-00379001 LED8 C0-00379001 LED11 C0-06557001 IC1 C0-06557001 IC3 C0-02838001 IC4 C0-06556001 IC5 C0-06848000 IC6 C0-08122001 IC7 C0-06557001 IC8 C0-02802001 IC10 C0-07828000 IC11 C0-07827000 IC12 C0-07828000 IC13 C0-07827000 IC14 C0-06556001 IC15 C0-06556001 IC16 C0-06558001 IC17 C0-08180001 IC18 C0-06711000 IC19 C0-06560001 IC20 C0-02884001 IC21 C0-06566001 IC22 C0-06567001 IC23 C0-02883001 IC24 C0-06913001 IC25 C0-04046000 IC26 C0-02884001 IC27 C0-06557001
1 1/SB 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
54
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
IC28 59 61 63 64 65 68 69 72 73 75 78 82 83 84 85 86 87 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 107 110 C0-06556001 IC29 C0-06556001 IC31 C0-06556001 IC33 C0-06559001 IC34 C0-06558001 IC35 C0-06912001 IC38 C0-06653000 IC39 C0-06558001 IC42 C0-06558001 IC43 C0-08121001 IC45 C0-02676001 SN74LS07DBR IC48 E0-06671000 CLC1028-0301 IC52 C0-06569001 IC53 C0-02838001 IC54 C0-06562001 IC55 C0-02010001 SN75LV4737ADBLE IC56 C0-05778001 IC57 C0-02884001 IC60 C0-02884001 IC61 C0-06570001 IC62 C0-02883001 IC63 C0-07775001 IC64 C0-02883001 IC65 C0-06721000 IC66 C0-02883001 IC67 C0-02884001 IC68 C0-06558001 IC69 C0-06563001 IC70 C0-02884001 IC71 C0-01990001 NC7SZ125M5X IC72 C0-06557001 IC73 C0-06556001 IC74 C0-06878000 IC77 C0-06559001 IC80 1 1 5/ 1 5/S 1 1 1 1 1/S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1/S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
54
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
111 112 113 114 122 123 124 125 126 127 129 130 131 132 133 134 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154
C0-06557001 IC81 C0-06556001 IC82 C0-06559001 IC83 C0-06557001 IC84 C0-06569001 IC92 C0-06556001 IC93 C0-06556001 IC94 C0-06556001 IC95 C0-06551001 IC96 C0-07809000 IC97 C0-06325000 IC99 C0-06558001 IC100 C0-06558001 IC101 C0-06558001 IC102 C0-02019001 M51957BFP C61J IC103 C0-02019001 M51957BFP C61J IC104 C0-06558001 IC106 C0-02806001 IC107 C0-06556001 IC108 C0-06557001 IC109 C0-06557001 IC110 C0-06556001 IC111 C0-06558001 IC112 C0-02806001 IC113 C0-06535000 IC114 C0-06557001 IC115 C0-06558001 IC116 C0-06556001 IC117 C0-06556001 IC118 C0-06549001 IC119 C0-08121001 IC120 C0-07775001 IC121 C0-02019001 M51957BFP C61J IC122 C0-02019001 M51957BFP C61J IC123 C0-06563001 IC124
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/S 1 5/S 1
54
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
155 156 157 159 160 161 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 300 301 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 400 401 402 405 408 409 410 412 413 415 416
C0-06558001 IC125 C0-06556001 IC126 C0-06558001 IC127 C0-06559001 IC129 C0-02676001 SN74LS07DBR IC130 C0-06955001 IC131 C0-08138001 Q1 C0-08138001 Q2 C0-08138001 Q3 C0-08138001 Q4 C0-08138001 Q5 C0-08135001 Q6 C0-08138001 Q7 C0-08138001 Q300 C0-08138001 Q301 C0-08125001 D1 C0-08125001 D2 C0-03935001 D3 C0-08128001 D4 C0-08128001 D5 C0-08126001 D6 C0-08126001 D7 C0-08125001 D8 C0-08126001 D9 E0-06438000 CN100 E0-00068000 DHB-PB50-S13NN CN101 E0-06435000 CN102 E0-06578000 CN105 E0-03094000 CN108 E0-00962000 53324-0810 CN109 E0-06790000 CN110 E0-06675000 CN112 E0-00780000 CN113 E0-06446000 CN115 E0-06446000 CN116
1 1 1 1 1 5/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/ 1 1 1 1 5/P 1 1 1 1 1
54
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
417 418 419 420 421 422 424 425 426 441 450 451 452 453 650 651 652 701 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 801 802 803 804 806
E0-06445000 CN117 E0-06910000 CN118 E0-06444000 CN119 E0-06443000 CN120 E0-00077000 DHB-RD60-S131N-4.9 CN121 E0-01547000 DF1B-26DP-2.5DSA CN122 E0-06440000 CN124 E0-06446000 CN125 E0-06856000 CN126 E0-04238000 J1 D0-04445001 FB100 D0-04445001 FB101 D0-04445001 FB102 D0-04445001 FB103 D0-07755001 FB300 D0-07755001 FB301 D0-07755001 FB302 D0-15881001 L1 D0-15881001 L300 D0-15881001 L301 D0-15881001 L302 D0-15881001 L303 D0-15881001 L304 D0-15881001 L305 D0-15881001 L306 D0-15881001 L307 D0-15881001 L308 D0-15881001 L309 D0-15881001 L310 D0-15881001 L311 D0-05478001 NFE61PT472C1H9L NF1 D0-05478001 NFE61PT472C1H9L NF2 D0-05478001 NFE61PT472C1H9L NF3 D0-05478001 NFE61PT472C1H9L NF4 D0-05478001 NFE61PT472C1H9L NF6
1 1 1 1 1 5/ 1 5/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/
54
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
807 810 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 869 870 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 893 894 895 896 897 898 899 900
D0-05478001 NFE61PT472C1H9L NF7 D0-05478001 NFE61PT472C1H9L NF10 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA3 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA4 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA5 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA6 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA7 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA8 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA9 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA10 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA11 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA12 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA13 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA14 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA15 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA16 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA17 D0-05418001 RA19 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA20 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA21 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA22 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA23 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA24 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA25 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA26 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA27 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA28 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA43 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA44 D0-05418001 RA45 D0-05418001 RA46 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA47 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA48 D0-01222001 RA49 D0-01222001 RA50
1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1
54
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 937 938 939 940
D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA51 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA52 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA53 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA54 D0-05419001 MNR14E0ABJ220 RA55 D0-01212001 RA56 D0-01212001 RA57 D0-01212001 RA58 D0-01212001 RA59 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA60 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA61 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA62 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA63 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA64 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA65 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA66 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA67 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA68 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA69 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA70 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA71 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA72 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA73 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA74 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA75 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA76 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA77 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA78 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA79 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA80 D0-01201001 MNR14E0ABJ103 RA81 D0-01222001 RA87 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA88 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA89 D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA90
1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1 1 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/
54
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-1
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
941 952 953 981
D0-01217001 MNR14E0ABJ472 RA91 E0-01896000 SKHWACA010 SW2 E0-01896000 SKHWACA010 SW3 E0-04340000 CR2450-HE4 SY1
1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1/C
54
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ASY-SYS-350S-2
December 2003
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 3 4 21 51 52 54 57 58 59 60 62 63 64 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 74 75 76 77 78 81 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93
D0-07067000 MX-38T-32.768KHZ-5PPM X1 D0-15929001 X3 D0-15882001 X4 E0-03359000 JP1 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C1 D0-07622001 C2 D0-16812001 C4 D0-07622001 C7 D0-07622001 C8 D0-07622001 C9 D0-07622001 C10 D0-07622001 C12 D0-16835001 C13 D0-16812001 C14 D0-16812001 C16 D0-16812001 C17 D0-07622001 C18 D0-07622001 C19 D0-07622001 C20 D0-16829001 C21 D0-16850001 C22 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C24 D0-09434001 C25 D0-07622001 C26 D0-07622001 C27 D0-07622001 C28 D0-16829001 C31 D0-07622001 C36 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C37 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C38 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C39 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C40 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C41 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C42 D0-16829001 C43
1 1/C 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 112 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 125 126 127 128 130 132 133 134 135
D0-16835001 C44 D0-07622001 C45 D0-16813001 C46 D0-07622001 C47 D0-16813001 C48 D0-07622001 C49 D0-07622001 C50 D0-07622001 C51 D0-07622001 C52 D0-07622001 C53 D0-07622001 C54 D0-07622001 C55 D0-07622001 C56 D0-07622001 C57 D0-07622001 C58 D0-16829001 C62 D0-07622001 C64 D0-07622001 C65 D0-07622001 C66 D0-07622001 C67 D0-07622001 C68 D0-16812001 C69 D0-07622001 C70 D0-16829001 C71 D0-16829001 C72 D0-07622001 C73 D0-16850001 C75 D0-07622001 C76 D0-16812001 C77 D0-07622001 C78 D0-07622001 C80 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C82 D0-16829001 C83 D0-07622001 C84 D0-07622001 C85
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172
D0-07622001 C86 D0-07622001 C87 D0-07622001 C88 D0-07622001 C89 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C90 D0-07622001 C91 D0-07622001 C92 D0-07622001 C93 D0-07622001 C94 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C95 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C96 D0-07622001 C97 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C98 D0-16812001 C101 D0-07622001 C102 D0-07622001 C103 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C104 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C105 D0-07622001 C106 D0-07622001 C107 D0-07622001 C108 D0-07622001 C109 D0-07622001 C110 D0-07622001 C111 D0-16829001 C112 D0-07622001 C113 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C114 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C115 D0-07625001 C116 D0-16850001 C117 D0-07622001 C118 D0-16812001 C119 D0-07622001 C120 D0-07622001 C121 D0-07622001 C122
1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 200 201 202 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357
D0-07622001 C123 D0-16850001 C124 D0-16812001 C125 D0-07622001 C126 D0-07622001 C127 D0-16829001 C128 D0-16829001 C129 D0-16829001 C130 D0-16829001 C131 D0-16835001 C132 D0-16835001 C133 D0-07622001 C134 D0-16835001 C135 D0-16835001 C136 D0-16812001 C137 D0-16812001 C138 D0-16812001 C139 D0-16812001 C140 D0-07622001 C141 D0-16813001 C142 D0-07622001 C143 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C144 D0-07622001 C145 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C146 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C150 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C151 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C152 D0-07622001 C300 D0-07622001 C301 D0-07622001 C302 D0-07622001 C303 D0-07622001 C304 D0-07622001 C305 D0-07622001 C306 D0-07622001 C307
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
358 359 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 369 370 372 373 374 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 388 389 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398
D0-07622001 C308 D0-07622001 C309 D0-07622001 C311 D0-07622001 C312 D0-07622001 C313 D0-07622001 C314 D0-07622001 C315 D0-07622001 C316 D0-07622001 C317 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C319 D0-07622001 C320 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C322 D0-07622001 C323 D0-07622001 C324 D0-07622001 C326 D0-07622001 C327 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C328 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C329 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C330 D0-07622001 C331 D0-07622001 C332 D0-07622001 C333 D0-07622001 C334 D0-07622001 C335 D0-07622001 C336 D0-07622001 C338 D0-07622001 C339 D0-07622001 C341 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C342 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C343 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C344 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C345 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C346 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C347 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C348
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433
D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C349 D0-07622001 C350 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C351 D0-07622001 C352 D0-07622001 C353 D0-07622001 C354 D0-07622001 C355 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C356 D0-07622001 C357 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C358 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C359 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C360 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C361 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C362 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C363 D0-07622001 C364 D0-07625001 C365 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C366 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C367 D0-07622001 C368 D0-07622001 C369 D0-07622001 C370 D0-07625001 C371 D0-07622001 C372 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C373 D0-07625001 C374 D0-07622001 C375 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C376 D0-07622001 C377 D0-07622001 C378 D0-07622001 C379 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C380 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C381 D0-07622001 C382 D0-07622001 C383
1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469
D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C384 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C385 D0-07622001 C386 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C387 D0-07622001 C388 D0-07622001 C389 D0-07622001 C390 D0-07622001 C391 D0-07625001 C392 D0-07622001 C393 D0-07622001 C394 D0-07622001 C395 D0-07622001 C396 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C397 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C399 D0-07622001 C400 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C401 D0-07622001 C402 D0-07622001 C403 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C404 D0-07622001 C405 D0-07622001 C406 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C407 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C408 D0-07622001 C409 D0-07622001 C410 D0-07622001 C411 D0-07622001 C412 D0-07622001 C413 D0-07622001 C414 D0-07622001 C415 D0-07622001 C416 D0-07622001 C417 D0-07622001 C418 D0-07622001 C419
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504
D0-07622001 C420 D0-07622001 C421 D0-07622001 C422 D0-07622001 C423 D0-07622001 C424 D0-07622001 C425 D0-07622001 C426 D0-07622001 C427 D0-07622001 C428 D0-07622001 C429 D0-07622001 C430 D0-07622001 C431 D0-07622001 C432 D0-07622001 C433 D0-07622001 C434 D0-07622001 C435 D0-07622001 C436 D0-07622001 C437 D0-07622001 C438 D0-07622001 C439 D0-07622001 C440 D0-07622001 C441 D0-07622001 C442 D0-07622001 C443 D0-07622001 C444 D0-07622001 C445 D0-07622001 C446 D0-07622001 C447 D0-07622001 C448 D0-07622001 C449 D0-07622001 C450 D0-07622001 C451 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C452 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C453 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C454
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 514 515 517 518 520 522 525 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546 547
D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C455 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C456 D0-07622001 C457 D0-07622001 C458 D0-07622001 C459 D0-07622001 C460 D0-07622001 C461 D0-07622001 C462 D0-07625001 C464 D0-07622001 C465 D0-07625001 C467 D0-07622001 C468 D0-07622001 C470 D0-07622001 C472 D0-07622001 C475 D0-07622001 C477 D0-07622001 C478 D0-07622001 C479 D0-07622001 C480 D0-07622001 C481 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C482 D0-09434001 C483 D0-07622001 C484 D0-07622001 C485 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C487 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C488 D0-07622001 C489 D0-07625001 C490 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C491 D0-07625001 C492 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C493 D0-07622001 C494 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C495 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C496 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C497
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
548 549 550 551 552 553 554 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583
D0-07622001 C498 D0-07622001 C499 D0-07622001 C500 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C501 D0-07622001 C502 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C503 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C504 D0-07622001 C506 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C507 D0-07622001 C508 D0-07625001 C509 D0-07622001 C510 D0-07622001 C511 D0-07622001 C512 D0-07622001 C513 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C514 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C515 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C516 D0-07622001 C517 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C518 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C519 D0-07622001 C520 D0-07622001 C521 D0-07622001 C522 D0-07622001 C523 D0-07622001 C524 D0-07622001 C525 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C526 D0-07622001 C527 D0-07622001 C528 D0-07622001 C529 D0-07622001 C530 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C531 D0-07622001 C532 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C533
1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 597 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620
D0-07622001 C534 D0-07622001 C535 D0-07622001 C536 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C537 D0-07622001 C538 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C539 D0-07622001 C540 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C541 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C542 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C543 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C544 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C545 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C547 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C549 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C550 D0-07622001 C551 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C552 D0-07622001 C553 D0-07622001 C554 D0-07625001 C555 D0-07622001 C556 D0-07625001 C557 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C558 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C559 D0-07622001 C560 D0-07622001 C561 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C562 D0-07622001 C563 D0-09434001 C564 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C565 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C566 D0-07622001 C567 D0-07622001 C568 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C569 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C570
1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 630 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 640 641 642 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663
D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C571 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C572 D0-07622001 C573 D0-07622001 C574 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C575 D0-07622001 C576 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C577 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C578 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C580 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C582 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C583 D0-09434001 C584 D0-07622001 C585 D0-07622001 C586 D0-07622001 C587 D0-07622001 C588 D0-07622001 C590 D0-07622001 C591 D0-07622001 C592 D0-07622001 C598 D0-07622001 C599 D0-07622001 C600 D0-07622001 C601 D0-07622001 C602 D0-07622001 C603 D0-07622001 C604 D0-07622001 C605 D0-07622001 C606 D0-04086001 GRM1882C1H221JA01D C607 D0-04086001 GRM1882C1H221JA01D C608 D0-04086001 GRM1882C1H221JA01D C609 D0-04086001 GRM1882C1H221JA01D C610 D0-07622001 C611 D0-07622001 C612 D0-07622001 C613
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699
D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C614 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C615 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C616 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C617 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C618 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C619 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C620 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C621 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C622 D0-07496001 GRM1882C1H470JZ01D C623 D0-07622001 C624 D0-07622001 C625 D0-07622001 C626 D0-07622001 C627 D0-07622001 C628 D0-07622001 C629 D0-07622001 C630 D0-07622001 C631 D0-07622001 C632 D0-07622001 C633 D0-07622001 C634 D0-07622001 C635 D0-07622001 C636 D0-07622001 C637 D0-07622001 C639 D0-07622001 C640 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C641 D0-07622001 C642 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C643 D0-07622001 C644 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C645 D0-07622001 C646 D0-07622001 C647 D0-07622001 C648 D0-07622001 C649
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
702 703 704 705 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740
D0-07622001 C652 D0-07622001 C653 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C654 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C655 D0-07622001 C659 D0-07622001 C660 D0-07622001 C661 D0-07622001 C662 D0-07622001 C663 D0-07622001 C664 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C665 D0-07622001 C666 D0-07622001 C667 D0-07622001 C668 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C669 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C670 D0-07622001 C671 D0-07625001 C672 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C673 D0-07622001 C674 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C675 D0-07622001 C676 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C677 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C678 D0-07622001 C679 D0-07625001 C680 D0-07622001 C682 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C683 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C684 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C685 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C686 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C687 D0-04091001 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C688 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C689 D0-07622001 C690
1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
741 742 743 744 745 746 753 758 759 760 761 762 763 764 765 766 767 768 769 770 771 772 773 774 775 776 777 778 779 780 781 782 783 784 785
D0-07622001 C691 D0-07622001 C692 D0-07622001 C693 D0-07622001 C694 D0-07622001 C695 D0-07622001 C696 D0-07622001 C703 D0-07622001 C708 D0-07622001 C709 D0-07622001 C710 D0-07622001 D0-04091001 D0-04091001 D0-04091001 D0-04091001 D0-07622001 C716 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C717 D0-07622001 C718 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C719 D0-07622001 C720 D0-07622001 C721 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C722 D0-07622001 C723 D0-07622001 C724 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C725 D0-07622001 C726 D0-07622001 C727 D0-07622001 C728 D0-07622001 C729 D0-07622001 C730 D0-07622001 C731 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C732 D0-07622001 C733 D0-07622001 C734 D0-07622001 C735 C711 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C712 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C713 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C714 GRM1882C1H330JZ01D C715
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821
D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C736 D0-09434001 C737 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C738 D0-09434001 C739 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C740 D0-05723001 GRM21BF11C105ZA01L C741 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C742 D0-04093001 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C743 D0-07622001 C744 D0-07622001 C745 D0-07622001 C746 D0-07622001 C747 D0-07622001 C748 D0-07622001 C749 D0-07622001 C750 D0-07622001 C752 D0-07622001 C753 D0-07622001 C754 D0-07622001 C755 D0-07622001 C756 D0-07622001 C757 D0-07622001 C758 D0-07622001 C759 D0-07622001 C760 D0-07622001 C761 D0-07622001 C762 D0-07622001 C763 D0-07622001 C764 D0-07622001 C765 D0-07622001 C766 D0-07622001 C767 D0-07622001 C768 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C769 D0-07622001 C770 D0-07622001 C771
1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 1
55
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-2
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
822 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 837
D0-07622001 D0-04093001 D0-04093001 D0-04093001 D0-04093001 D0-04093001 D0-04093001 D0-04093001 D0-04093001 C772 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C780 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C781 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C782 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C783 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C784 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C785 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C786 GRM1882C1H220JZ01D C787
1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
55
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ASY-SYS-350S-3
December 2003
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 49 50 51 52 65 68 71 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 93 94 95 96 99 100 101 102 103
D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R36 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R37 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R38 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R39 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R40 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R41 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R42 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R43 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R44 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R45 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R46 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R47 D0-01044001 MCR03EZHJ820 R49 D0-05827001 R50 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R51 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R52 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R65 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R68 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R71 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R73 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R74 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R75 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R76 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R77 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R78 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R79 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R93 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R94 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R95 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R96 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R99 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R100 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R101 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R102 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R103
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
106 109 110 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 126 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 146 147 148
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 180 181 182 183 184
D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R149 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R150 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R151 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R152 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R153 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R154 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R155 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R156 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R157 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R158 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R159 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R160 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R161 D0-00967001 MCR03EZHJ153 R162 D0-08713001 R163 D0-08713001 R164 D0-00967001 MCR03EZHJ153 R165 D0-00967001 MCR03EZHJ153 R166 D0-08713001 R167 D0-08713001 R168 D0-00967001 MCR03EZHJ153 R169 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R170 D0-00991001 MCR03EZHJ270 R171 D0-00991001 MCR03EZHJ270 R172 D0-01047001 MCR03EZHJ823 R173 D0-00963001 MCR03EZHJ124 R174 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R175 D0-00954001 MCR03EZHJ104 R176 D0-00954001 MCR03EZHJ104 R177 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R178 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R180 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R181 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R182 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R183 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R184
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
185 186 187 188 189 190 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 230 231 236
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 275 276 279 280
D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R240 D0-01004001 MCR03EZHJ332 R241 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R242 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R243 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R244 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R245 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R246 D0-01134001 R247 D0-01053001 MCR03EZPFX1002 R248 D0-01134001 R249 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R250 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R252 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R253 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R254 D0-01021001 MCR03EZHJ473 R255 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R256 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R257 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R258 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R259 D0-01021001 MCR03EZHJ473 R260 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R261 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R263 D0-00600001 R264 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R265 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R266 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R267 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R268 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R269 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R270 D0-00978001 MCR03EZHJ201 R271 D0-17402001 R272 D0-17402001 R275 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R276 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R279 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R280
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
281 290 291 292 293 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 320 323 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 341 342 343 344
D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R281 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R290 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R291 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R292 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R293 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R300 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R301 D0-01036001 MCR03EZHJ680 R302 D0-01036001 MCR03EZHJ680 R303 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R304 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R305 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R306 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R307 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R308 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R310 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R311 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R312 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R313 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R314 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R315 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R316 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R317 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R320 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R323 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R325 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R326 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R327 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R328 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R329 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R330 D0-01019001 MCR03EZHJ471 R331 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R341 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R342 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R343 D0-00600001 R344
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 354 356 357 358 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 382 384
D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R345 D0-00600001 R346 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R347 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R348 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R349 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R350 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R351 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R352 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R354 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R356 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R357 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R358 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R360 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R361 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R362 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R363 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R364 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R365 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R366 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R367 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R368 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R369 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R370 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R371 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R372 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R373 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R374 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R375 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R376 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R377 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R378 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R379 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R380 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R382 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R384
1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
386 388 389 390 391 393 398 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 432 441
D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R386 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R388 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R389 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R390 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R391 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R393 D0-00600001 R398 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R403 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R404 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R405 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R406 D0-00600001 R407 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R408 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R409 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R410 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R411 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R412 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R413 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R414 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R415 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R417 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R418 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R419 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R420 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R421 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R422 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R423 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R424 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R425 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R426 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R427 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R428 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R429 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R432 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R441
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
442 445 447 448 450 453 455 456 458 460 462 464 465 467 468 470 471 473 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491
D0-00993001 MCR03EZHJ272 R442 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R445 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R447 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R448 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R450 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R453 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R455 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R456 D0-01015001 R458 D0-01015001 R460 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R462 D0-00600001 R464 D0-00600001 R465 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R467 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R468 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R470 D0-01015001 R471 D0-01015001 R473 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R475 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R476 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R477 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R478 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R479 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R480 D0-00600001 R481 D0-00600001 R482 D0-00993001 MCR03EZHJ272 R483 D0-00993001 MCR03EZHJ272 R484 D0-00993001 MCR03EZHJ272 R485 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R486 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R487 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R488 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R489 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R490 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R491
1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 504 505 506 507 508 510 511 512 525 527 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 543 544 545 546 547
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 563 564 565 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654
D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R620 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R621 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R622 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R623 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R624 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R625 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R626 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R627 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R628 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R629 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R630 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R631 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R632 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R633 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R634 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R635 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R636 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R637 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R638 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R639 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R640 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R641 D0-01027001 MCR03EZHJ512 R642 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R643 D0-00600001 R644 D0-00600001 R645 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R646 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R647 D0-00600001 R648 D0-00600001 R649 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R650 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R651 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R652 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R653 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R654
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689
D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R655 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R656 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R657 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R658 D0-01044001 MCR03EZHJ820 R659 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R660 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R661 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R662 D0-01044001 MCR03EZHJ820 R663 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R664 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R665 D0-01031001 MCR03EZHJ562 R666 D0-01044001 MCR03EZHJ820 R667 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R668 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R669 D0-00966001 MCR03EZHJ152 R670 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R671 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R672 D0-01053001 MCR03EZPFX1002 R673 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R674 D0-01134001 R675 D0-01134001 R676 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R677 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R678 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R679 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R680 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R681 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R682 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R683 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R684 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R685 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R686 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R687 D0-01002001 MCR03EZHJ330 R688 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R689
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
690 691 692 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724
56
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SYS-350S-3
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 743 750 751 752 753 754 755 756 757 758 759 760 761 762 763
D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R725 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R726 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R727 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R728 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R729 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R730 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R731 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R732 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R733 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R734 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R735 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R736 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R737 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R738 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R739 D0-00981001 MCR03EZHJ220 R743 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R750 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R751 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R752 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R753 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R754 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R755 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R756 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R757 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R758 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R759 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R760 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R761 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R762 D0-01018001 MCR03EZHJ470 R763
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
56
e-STUDIO3511/4511
ASY-SLG-350S
December 2003
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
6LA41972000 ASY-SLG-350S C0-01957001 DM7407MX IC1 C0-04597001 74VHC245MTCX IC2 C0-06308001 IC3 C0-01456001 IC4 C0-06859001 IC5 C0-06859001 IC6 C0-04596001 74LCX32MTCX IC7 C0-06601001 IC8 C0-01910001 74VHC157MTCX IC9 C0-01946001 74VHC32MTCX IC10 C0-01909001 74VHC138MTCX IC11 C0-01946001 74VHC32MTCX IC12 C0-01937001 74VHC08MTCX IC13 C0-06306001 IC14 C0-04593001 74LCX08MTCX IC15 C0-04596001 74LCX32MTCX IC16 C0-02136001 FM93C66M8X IC17 C0-06762000 EC-N062 TMP95C063FE IC18 C0-02029001 MBM29F400TC-90PFTN IC19 C0-01941001 74VHC14MTCX IC20 C0-01935001 74VHC04MTCX IC21 C0-04597001 74VHC245MTCX IC22 C0-06444001 IC23 C0-01941001 74VHC14MTCX IC24 C0-02019001 M51957BFP C61J IC25 C0-01990001 NC7SZ125M5X IC26 C0-04597001 74VHC245MTCX IC27 C0-04597001 74VHC245MTCX IC28 C0-06307001 IC29 C0-04603001 NC7SZ04M5X IC30 C0-04593001 74LCX08MTCX IC31 C0-04597001 74VHC245MTCX IC32 C0-06898001 IC33 C0-01932001 74LCX245MTCX IC34 C0-02005001 PQ2TZ15U
1 1/SB 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1 1 1 1 5/S 1 1 5/P 1 1/S 1 5/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 5/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 5/S 1 1 1/S 1 5/S 1 1/S 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1 1/S 1 1/S
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 131 132 133 135 136 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161
IC35 C0-02019001 M51957BFP C61J IC36 C0-04597001 74VHC245MTCX IC37 C0-06728000 IC38 48493001690 IC39 C0-06605001 IC40 C0-06606001 IC41 C0-01951001 IC42 C0-06897001 IC43 C0-00675002 RN2401(TE85R) Q1 C0-00517002 Q2 C0-00657001 RN1401(TE85R) Q3 C0-00657001 RN1401(TE85R) Q4 C0-00657001 RN1401(TE85R) Q5 C0-00657001 RN1401(TE85R) Q6 C0-00657001 RN1401(TE85R) Q7 C0-00657001 RN1401(TE85R) Q8 C0-00517002 Q9 C0-00551002 2SC2712-Y(TE85R) Q10 C0-00426001 02CZ3.3-X(TE85R) D1 C0-00470002 1SS184(TE85R) D2 C0-00473001 1SS193(TE85R) D3 C0-00470002 1SS184(TE85R) D5 C0-00473001 1SS193(TE85R) D6 D0-16002001 C1 D0-16553001 C2 D0-16553001 C3 D0-16002001 C4 D0-15995001 C5 D0-15995001 C6 D0-15995001 C7 D0-16001001 C8 D0-16001001 C9 D0-16001001 C10 D0-15995001 C11
1 5/S 1 5/S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/P 1 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 183 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199
D0-15998001 C12 D0-15998001 C13 D0-15995001 C14 D0-15998001 C15 D0-15998001 C16 D0-15998001 C17 D0-15998001 C18 D0-16002001 C19 D0-15994001 C20 D0-15994001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04102001 D0-04102001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 D0-04098001 C21 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C22 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C23 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C24 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C25 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C26 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C27 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C28 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C29 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C30 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C31 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C33 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C36 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C37 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C38 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C39 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C40 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C41 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C42 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C43 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C44 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C45 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C46 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C47 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C48 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C49
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C50 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C51 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C52 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C53 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C54 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C55 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C56 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C57 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C58 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C60 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C61 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C62 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C63 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C64 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C65 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C66 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C67 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C68 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C69 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C70 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C71 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C72 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C73 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C74 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C75 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C76 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C77 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C78 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C79 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C80 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C81 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C82 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C83 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C84 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C85
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C86 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C87 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C88 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C89 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C90 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C91 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C92 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C93 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C94 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C95 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C96 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C97 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C98 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C99 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C100 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C101 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C102 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C103 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C104 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C105 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C106 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C107 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C108 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C109 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C110 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C111 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C112 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C113 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C114 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C115 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C116 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C117 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C118 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C119 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C120
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C121 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C122 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C123 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C124 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C125 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C126 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C127 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C128 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C129 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C130 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C131 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C132 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C133 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C134 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C135 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C136 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C137 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C138 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C139 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C140 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C141 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C142 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C143 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C144 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C145 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C146 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C147 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C148 D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C149 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C150 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C151 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C152 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C153 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C154 D0-07515001 GRM188B11H272KA01D C155
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
306 307 308 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 338 339 340 341 342 343
D0-07512001 GRM188B11E223KA01D C156 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C157 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C158 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C160 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C161 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C162 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C163 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C164 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C165 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C166 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C167 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C168 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C169 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C170 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C171 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C172 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C173 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C174 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C175 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C176 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C177 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C178 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C179 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C180 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C181 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C182 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C183 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C184 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C185 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C188 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C189 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C190 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C191 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C192 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C193
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C194 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C195 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C196 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C197 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C198 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C199 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C200 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C201 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C202 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C203 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C204 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C205 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C206 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C207 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C208 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C209 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C210 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C211 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C212 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C213 D0-07625001 C214 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C215 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C216 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C217 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C218 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C219 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C220 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C221 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C222 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C223 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C224 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C225 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C226 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C227 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C228
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
379 380 382 384 387 393 394 395 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 419 420 425 426 427 428 429 430
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C229 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C230 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C232 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C234 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C237 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C243 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C244 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C245 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C247 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C248 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C249 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C250 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C251 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C252 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C253 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C254 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C255 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C256 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C257 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C258 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C259 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C260 D0-04085001 GRM1882C1H100JZ01D C261 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C262 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C263 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C264 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C265 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C269 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C270 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C275 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C276 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C277 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C278 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C279 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C280
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466
D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C281 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C282 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C283 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C284 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C285 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C286 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C287 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C288 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C289 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C290 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C291 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C292 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C293 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C294 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C295 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C296 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C297 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C298 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C299 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C300 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C301 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C302 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C303 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C304 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C305 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C307 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C308 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C309 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C310 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C311 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C312 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C313 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C314 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C315 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C316
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 487 488 489 490 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 540
D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C317 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C318 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C319 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C320 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C321 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C322 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C323 D0-04102001 GRM1882C1H101JA01D C324 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C325 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C326 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C327 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C328 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C337 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C338 D0-07625001 C339 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C340 D0-15332000 R1 D0-15332000 R2 D0-15182000 R3 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R4 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R5 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R6 D0-00950001 MCR03EZHJ100 R7 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R8 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R9 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R10 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R11 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R12 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R13 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R14 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R15 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R16 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R17 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R18 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R20
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
541 542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574 575
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
647 648 649 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 693 694 695 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 707 708 709 710 711 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720
D0-01038001 MCR03EZHJ682 R162 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R163 D0-00993001 MCR03EZHJ272 R164 D0-01038001 MCR03EZHJ682 R165 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R166 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R167 D0-01038001 MCR03EZHJ682 R168 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R169 D0-01038001 MCR03EZHJ682 R170 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R171 D0-01038001 MCR03EZHJ682 R173 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R174 D0-01038001 MCR03EZHJ682 R175 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R176 D0-01038001 MCR03EZHJ682 R177 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R178 D0-01149001 MCR03EZPFX4701 R179 D0-01134001 R180 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R181 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R182 D0-01134001 R183 D0-01053001 MCR03EZPFX1002 R184 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R187 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R188 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R189 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R190 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R191 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R193 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R194 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R195 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R196 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R197 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R198 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R199 D0-00949001 MCR03EZHJ000 R200
1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 748 751 757 759 762 763 768 774
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
775 776 777 778 779 780 781 785 786 787 788 789 790 791 792 793 794 795 796 797 798 799 800 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809 810 811 812
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 825 826 827 828 829 831 832 833 836 837 838 839 840 841 842 843 844 845 846 847 848 849 850 851
D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R293 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R294 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R295 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R296 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R297 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R298 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R299 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R300 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R301 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R302 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R303 D0-01125001 MCR03EZPFX3301 R305 D0-01098001 MCR03EZPFX2201 R306 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R307 D0-01125001 MCR03EZPFX3301 R308 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R309 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R311 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R312 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R313 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R316 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R317 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R318 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R319 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R320 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R321 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R322 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R323 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R324 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R325 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R326 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R327 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R328 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R329 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R330 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R331
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
57
E-STUDIO4511/3511

ASY-SLG-350S
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
852 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 861 862 863 864 865 866 867 868 869 870 910 911 912 913 916 918 919 921 954 991 992
D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R332 D0-00984001 MCR03EZHJ223 R333 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R334 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R335 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R336 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R337 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R338 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R339 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R340 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R341 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R342 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R343 D0-00966001 MCR03EZHJ152 R344 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R345 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R346 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R347 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R348 D0-00983001 MCR03EZHJ222 R349 D0-00953001 MCR03EZHJ103 R350 E0-04751000 CN10 E0-03219000 B10B-PHDSS CN11 E0-03969000 B18B-CZWHK-B-1 CN12 E0-03995000 CN13 E0-02160000 DHB-PA34-R13NNA CN16 E0-06435000 CN18 E0-06057001 CN19 E0-01107000 5597-05CPB CN21 D0-04475001 BLM41PF800SN1L FL4 D0-06100001 MA-406-22M-8/50L2 X1 D0-05690001 SG-8002JC-20.0000M-PCCL X2
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 1 1/P 1 1 1 1/P 1 5/P 1 1/D 1 1/C
57
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PWA-SDV
December 2003
58
E-STUDIO4511/3511

PWA-SDV
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 11 14 51 52 53 56 57 59 60 104 105 109 110 111 112 200 280 281 282
6LA41748000 PWA-F-SDV-350 PWB1 C0-06838000 IC1 C0-04597001 74VHC245MTCX IC4 D0-16003001 C1 D0-15999001 C2 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C3 D0-04101001 GRM188B11H102KA01D C6 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C7 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C9 D0-04042001 C1608JF1H104ZT C10 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R4 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R5 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R9 D0-00960001 MCR03EZHJ121 R10 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R11 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R12 D0-00613001 MCR25JZHJ472 R100 E0-03989000 B10B-CZHK-B-1 CN30 E0-04745000 B06B-XASK-1 CN31 E0-04741000 CN32
1 1/SB 1 1 5/S 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1
58
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PWA-DRV
December 2003
59
E-STUDIO4511/3511

PWA-DRV
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
6LA41594100 PWA-F-DRV-F350/351 C0-02136001 FM93C66M8X IC1 C0-02021000 STK672-210 IC2 C0-01452001 TD62308AF(TP2) IC3 C0-01452001 TD62308AF(TP2) IC4 C0-01452001 TD62308AF(TP2) IC5 C0-06682001 IC6 C0-06682001 IC7 D0-03582001 C1 D0-16163000 C2 D0-03582001 C3 D0-16162000 C4 D0-06722001 C5 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C6 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C7 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C8 D0-04090001 GRM1882C1H471JA01D C9 D0-04092001 GRM188B11H222KA01D C10 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C11 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C12 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C13 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C14 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C15 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C16 D0-05042001 C1608JB1H104KT C17 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C18 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C19 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C20 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C21 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C22 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C23 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C24 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C25 D0-12616001 C26 D0-12616001 C27 D0-12616001
1 1/SB 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 1
59
E-STUDIO4511/3511

PWA-DRV
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
79 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134
C28 D0-04098001 GRM188F11E104ZA01D C29 D0-16161000 R1 D0-16161000 R2 D0-16161000 R3 D0-16161000 R4 D0-16161000 R5 D0-06169000 RGC5 0.27-OHM-J R6 D0-06169000 RGC5 0.27-OHM-J R7 D0-01021001 MCR03EZHJ473 R8 D0-01021001 MCR03EZHJ473 R9 D0-00988001 MCR03EZHJ242 R10 D0-01003001 MCR03EZHJ331 R11 D0-00988001 MCR03EZHJ242 R12 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R14 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R15 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R16 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R17 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R18 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R19 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R20 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R21 D0-00973001 MCR03EZHJ181 R22 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R23 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R24 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R25 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R26 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R27 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R28 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R29 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R30 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R31 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R32 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R33 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R34
1 10/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/ 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
59
E-STUDIO4511/3511

PWA-DRV
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
135 136 137 138 139 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 601 602 603 604
D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R35 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R36 D0-00952001 MCR03EZHJ102 R37 D0-00951001 MCR03EZHJ101 R38 D0-01020001 MCR03EZHJ472 R39 E0-06774000 CN434 E0-00299000 B6P-VH CN435 E0-00781000 53258-0520 CN436 E0-00756000 53253-0610 CN437 E0-06789000 CN438 E0-06578000 CN439 E0-06790000 CN440 C0-06986000 Q1 C0-06986000 Q2 C0-06986000 Q3 C0-06986000 Q4
1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
59
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PWA-CCL
December 2003
60
E-STUDIO4511/3511

PWA-CCL
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 11 52 53 54 55 591 592 601 602
6LA41902000 PWA-F-CCL-350 C0-00921000 TA8428K(S) IC1 D0-04078001 C2 D0-04570001 DD305-999F104Z12 C3 D0-04570001 DD305-999F104Z12 C4 D0-16656001 C5 E0-06756000 CN491 E0-06855000 CN492 4408262200 JUMPER-WIRE-5 JP1 4407782660 JUMPER-WIRE-10 JP2
1 1/C 1 5/S 1 1 5/ 1 5/ 1 1 1 1 10/P 1 10/P
60
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PWA-ADU
December 2003
61
E-STUDIO4511/3511

PWA-ADU
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 11 51 53 54 56 57 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 361 362 363 364 365 367 401 402 403 408 409
6LA69830000 PWA-F-ADU-360 C0-02021000 STK672-210 IC1 D0-04050000 UVZ1H221MPH1CA C1 D0-04051000 UMT1C220MDH1YJ C3 D0-04078000 DD308-63F104Z50 C4 D0-04078000 DD308-63F104Z50 C6 D0-04078000 DD308-63F104Z50 C7 D0-15380000 R1 D0-03163000 ERDS2TJ102A R2 D0-03163000 ERDS2TJ102A R3 D0-03163000 ERDS2TJ102A R4 D0-03163000 ERDS2TJ102A R5 D0-04168000 R6 D0-04077000 ERDS2TJ101A R7 D0-04077000 ERDS2TJ101A R8 D0-04076000 ERDS2TJ680A R9 E0-00083000 1-175487-1 CN211 E0-00090000 175487-4 CN212 E0-00132000 2-175487-3 CN213 E0-00089000 175487-3 CN214 E0-00092000 175487-6 CN215 E0-00088000 175487-2 CN217 4407782660 JUMPER-WIRE-10 JP1 4407782660 JUMPER-WIRE-10 JP2 4407782660 JUMPER-WIRE-10 JP3 4407782660 JUMPER-WIRE-10 JP8 4407782660 JUMPER-WIRE-10 JP9
1 1/C 1 1/S 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 5/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P 1 10/P
61
e-STUDIO3511/4511
JIGS & GREASE
December 2003
1 2 3
10
11
12
101
E-STUDIO4511/3511

JIGS & GREASE

Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2A 2B 3A 3B 4 5 6 7 8 9 10A 10B 11 12
4407915730 4406552050 4406552060 4408687160 4408687180 4406552140 6LA01757000 4407914000 6LA48402000 4407933080 4842512170 41303709000
JIG-SW-F-COV CHART-COLER-A4 CHART-COLER-LT CHART-15-1-A4 CHART-15-1-LT JIG-CLEAN-DOC HOLDER-WIRE-SCAN NOZZLE-BOTTLE ASY-JIG-DOC-350 ASM-SILICONE-1M OIL-LAUNA40-100 ASM-PG-HP300-S
1 1/P 1 10/KP 1 10/KP 1 10/P 1 10/KP 1 1/P 2 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/D 1 1/P 1 1/P 1 1/C
A4 series (Color) LT series (Color) A4 series LT series
6LA00019000 GREASE-HP300-S 41303711000 ASM-PG-ALV2 4400545160 MOLYKOTE-100
Silicon Oil LAUNA40 100cc White grease 100g White grease 10g Alvania No.2
101
e-STUDIO3511/4511
DOWNLOAD JIGS
December 2003
11,12
3 2
4 (Model 1881) 5 (Model 1931)
102
E-STUDIO4511/3511

DOWNLOAD JIGS
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1 2 3 4 5
44205829000 K-PWA-DLM-320 6LA41995000 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 6LA41994000 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 6LA41996000 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 6LA41997000 PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931
1 1/C 1 1/SB 1 1/SB 1 1/SB 1 1/SB
For LGC, SLG For HDD (48MB) For SYS, LGC, SLG, NIC (16MB) For Model 1881 For Model 1931
102
e-STUDIO3511/4511
SUPPLIES
December 2003
11 9
21
10
12
13
103
E-STUDIO4511/3511

SUPPLIES
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C DRM DEV DEV DEV DEV SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP SUP OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT OPT
1 2 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 4G 4H 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 5G 5H 5I 5J 5K 5L 5M 5N 5O 6A 6B 7A 7B 7C 8A 8B 8C 9 10 11A 11B 11C 12A 12B 13 21
6LA27284000 6LA27227000 6LA27228000 6LA27229000 6LA27230000 6AG00000065 6AK00000001 6AG00000066 6AK00000002 6AG00000067 6AK00000003 6AG00000073 6AG00000069 6AG00000047 6AG00000050 6AG00000053 6AG00000074 6AG00000070 6AG00000048 6AG00000051 6AG00000054 6AG00000075 6AG00000071 6AG00000049 6AG00000052 6AG00000055 6AG00000076 6AG00000072 6AG00000059
OD-3511 D-3511-K D-3511-Y D-3511-M D-3511-C PS-ZT3511K PS-ZT3511K PS-ZT3511EK PS-ZT3511EK PS-ZT3511DK PS-ZT3511DK PS-ZT3511TK PS-ZT3511CK PS-ZT3511Y PS-ZT3511EY PS-ZT3511DY PS-ZT3511TY PS-ZT3511CY PS-ZT3511M PS-ZT3511EM PS-ZT3511DM PS-ZT3511TM PS-ZT3511CM PS-ZT3511C PS-ZT3511EC PS-ZT3511DC PS-ZT3511TC PS-ZT3511CC PS-TB3511
1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 SUPPLY 1 1/P
6AG00000060 PS-TB3511E 6AR00000032 KA-3511PC 6AR00000033 KA-3511PC-N 6AR00000034 KA-3511PC-C 6AR00000056 MY-1021 6AR00000057 6AR00000058 66002050 66002051 6AR00000059 6AR00000060 6AR00000061 6AR00000062 6AR00000063 6A000000048 6LA47822000 MY-1021-N MY-1021-C MU-8 MU-10 KK-3511 KK-3511-N KK-3511-C MF-3511U MF-3511E GC-1180 COVER-F-SKIRT-PFP
Black Yellow Magenta Cyan NAD NAD MJD MJD SAD,AUD,ASD SAD,AUD,ASD TWD CND NAD MJD SAD,AUD,ASD TWD CND NAD MJD SAD,AUD,ASD TWD CND NAD MJD SAD,AUD,ASD TWD CND NAD,SAD,AUD,AS D,TWD,CND MJD NAD,MJD,SAD.AU D ASD,TWD CND NAD,MJD,SAD.AU D ASD,TWD CND NAD,MJD,SAD.AU D ASD,TWD CND NAD MJD
103
e-STUDIO3511/4511
REPLACE UNIT
December 2003
104
E-STUDIO4511/3511

REPLACE UNIT
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C
1A 1B 2 3 4 5 6
6LA47982000 FUSER-3511-100 6LA47983000 FUSER-3511-200 6LA47963000 6LA47962000 6LA47961000 6LA47959000 6LA47960000 ASYB-TR-BLT-3511 DEVE-UNIT-3511K DEVE-UNIT-3511YMC ASYB-CLNR-DRUM-3511 ASYB-MAIN-CH-3511
1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S
NAD,SAD,TWD USP MJD,ASD,AUD,CN USP D USP USP USP USP USP
104
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PM-KIT
December 2003
105
E-STUDIO4511/3511

PM-KIT
Q'TY / PIR PAGE
DEC
T

2003
C KIT KIT KIT KIT KIT
1 2 3 4 5
6LA47817000 6LA47981000 6LA47968000 6LA47980000
EPU-KIT-3511 DEV-KIT-3511 TBU-KIT-3511 FR-KIT-3511
1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S 1 1/S
6LA47970000 DEV-KIT-3511CLR
EPU KIT FUSER KIT TBU KIT BLACK DEVELOPER KIT COLOR DEVELOPER KIT
105
e-STUDIO3511/4511
File No. SHE03000200 R03042133500-TTEC Ver00_2003-11
2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO3511/4511

The installation and service should be done by a qualified service technician. 1. Transportation/Installation When transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to use the positions as indicated below. The equipment is quite heavy and weighs approximately 112kg (246 lb.), therefore pay full attention when handling it.
Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, ADU or RADF) when transporting the equipment. Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 110/13.2A, 115V or 127V/12A, 220V-240V or 240V/ 8A) for its power source. The equipment must be grounded for safety. Never ground it to a gas pipe or a water pipe. Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct sunlight. Also provide proper ventilation as the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone. To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80 cm (32) on the left, 80 cm (32) on the right and 10 cm (4) in the rear. The socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. 2. Service of Machines Basically, be sure to turn the main switch off and unplug the power cord during service. Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the exposure lamp, the fuser unit, the damp heater and their periphery. Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer belt, 2nd transfer roller, developer, IH control circuit, high-voltage transformer, exposure lamp control inverter, inverter for the LCD backlight and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF. Be sure not to touch rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts, pulleys, fan, etc. Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges underneath. When servicing the machines with the main switch turned on, be sure not to touch live sections and rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposure to laser radiation. Use suitable measuring instruments and tools. Avoid exposure to laser radiation during servicing. - Avoid direct exposure to the beam. - Do not insert tools, parts, etc. that are reflective into the path of the laser beam. - Remove all watches, rings, bracelets, etc. that are reflective. Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug once a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
3.
Main Service Parts for Safety The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If these parts are shorted circuit and/or made their functions out, they may burn down, for instance, and may result in fatal accidents. Do not allow a short circuit to occur. Do not use the parts not recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.
4.
Cautionary Labels During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and the cautionary labels such as Unplug the power cord during service, Hot area, Laser warning label etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and whether they are properly stuck to the equipment.
5.
Disposition of Consumable Parts, Packing Materials, Used batteries and RAM-ICs Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, consumable parts, packing materials, used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.
6.
When parts are disassembled, reassembly is basically the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to reassemble small parts such as screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
7. 8.
Basically, the machine should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled. Precautions Against Static Electricity The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband, because the ICs on it may become damaged due to static electricity. Caution: Before using the wristband, pull out the power cord plug of the equipment and make sure that there are no uninsulated charged objects in the vicinity.
Caution :
Dispose of used batteries and RAM-ICs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention :
Se dbarrasser de batteries et RAM-ICs uss y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht :
Entsorgung des gebrauchten Batterien und RAM-ICs (inklusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES .......................................... 1-1
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 1-1 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 1-5 Options ............................................................................................................................... 1-6 Supplies ............................................................................................................................. 1-6 System List ........................................................................................................................ 1-7
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE ........................................................ 2-1

2.1 Error Code List ................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.1 Jam ...................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.2 Service call .......................................................................................................... 2-6 2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function .......................................................... 2-11 2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes ....................................................................................................... 2-21 2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) ................................................................................ 2-23 2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) .............................................................................. 2-28 2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) .......................................................................... 2-31 2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05) ........................................................................................ 2-32 2.2.5 Setting mode (08) .............................................................................................. 2-74 2.2.6 Pixel counter .................................................................................................... 2-145 2.2.7 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08) ...................... 2-156
3. ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................................. 3-1

Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment) ................................................................. 3-1 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor ................................................................................ 3-2 Performing Image Quality Control ...................................................................................... 3-5 Image Dimensional Adjustment ......................................................................................... 3-6 3.4.1 General description .............................................................................................. 3-6 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller ............................................................. 3-8 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment .................................................................................. 3-10 3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment ............................................................................... 3-14 3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function) ................................................................. 3-21 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ........................................................................... 3-21 3.5.2 Density adjustment ............................................................................................ 3-22 3.5.3 Color balance adjustment .................................................................................. 3-24 3.5.4 Gamma balance adjustment .............................................................................. 3-25 3.5.5 Offsetting adjustment for background processing .............................................. 3-26 3.5.6 Judgment threshold for ACS .............................................................................. 3-27 3.5.7 Sharpness adjustment ....................................................................................... 3-27 3.5.8 Setting range correction ..................................................................................... 3-28 3.5.9 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ............................... 3-29 3.5.10 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ....................................................................... 3-29 3.5.11 Adaptation to highlighter .................................................................................... 3-30 3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting ........................................................................... 3-30 3.5.13 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type ............................................. 3-31
i e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10 3.11
3.12
3.5.14 Maximum text density adjustment ...................................................................... 3-31 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function) .................................................................. 3-32 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ........................................................................... 3-32 3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode) ........................................................ 3-33 3.6.3 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode) ............................................................ 3-34 3.6.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text ....................................................................... 3-35 3.6.5 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode ............................................................ 3-35 3.6.6 Dot size adjustment in black printing ................................................................. 3-36 3.6.7 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type ............................................. 3-36 3.6.8 Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing .................................... 3-36 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function) ............................................................... 3-37 3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment .............................................................................. 3-37 3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode) ...................................................................... 3-38 3.7.3 Background adjustment (Gray Scale Mode) ...................................................... 3-39 3.7.4 Background adjustment (Color Mode) ............................................................... 3-39 3.7.5 Judgment threshold for ACS .............................................................................. 3-40 3.7.6 Sharpness adjustment ....................................................................................... 3-40 3.7.7 Setting range correction ..................................................................................... 3-41 3.7.8 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) ............................... 3-41 3.7.9 Fine adjustment of black density ........................................................................ 3-42 3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection ..................................................................... 3-42 3.7.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black) ................................... 3-43 3.7.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color) .................................... 3-43 High-Voltage Transformer Setting .................................................................................... 3-44 3.8.1 General description ............................................................................................ 3-44 3.8.2 Setting at the replacement of high-voltage transformer ..................................... 3-44 Adjustment of the Scanner Section .................................................................................. 3-45 3.9.1 Carriages ........................................................................................................... 3-45 3.9.2 Lens unit ............................................................................................................ 3-49 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System ........................................................................ 3-51 3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding .......................................... 3-51 Adjustment of the Developer Unit .................................................................................... 3-52 3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit) ...................................................... 3-52 3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit) ....................................................... 3-53 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015) ................................................................................ 3-55 3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF position ............................................................................. 3-55 3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF height ............................................................................... 3-59 3.12.3 Adjustment of skew ............................................................................................ 3-60 3.12.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM ........................ 3-61 3.12.5 Adjustment of aligning ........................................................................................ 3-62 3.12.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing .................................................................... 3-63 3.12.7 Adjustment of reverse solenoid .......................................................................... 3-64 3.12.8 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch ..................................................... 3-66 3.12.9 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor .................................................... 3-67 3.12.10 Adjustment of tray volume ................................................................................. 3-68
ii
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022) .............................................................................. 3-69 3.13.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width ....................................................................... 3-69 3.13.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate ............................................................. 3-71 3.13.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag ............................................................. 3-72 3.13.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt ................................... 3-73 3.13.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate ................................................ 3-75 3.13.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle .................................................................... 3-76 3.13.7 DIP switch functions ........................................................................................... 3-78 3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024) ..................................................................... 3-80 3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit) ................................................. 3-80 3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit) ....................................................... 3-81 3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) ........................................... 3-83 3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) ...................... 3-86 3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) .......................................................... 3-86 3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) ...................................... 3-87 3.15 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10) ................................................................................... 3-88
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) ............................................................................ 4-1

4.1 PM Support Mode .............................................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.1 General description .............................................................................................. 4-1 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen ............................................................. 4-1 4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement ........................................................................... 4-6 4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure ............................................................................ 4-7 4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling ....................................................................................... 4-7 4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist ..................................................................................... 4-8 4.5 PM KIT ............................................................................................................................. 4-22 4.6 Jig List .............................................................................................................................. 4-23 4.7 Grease List ....................................................................................................................... 4-23 4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies ................................................................ 4-24 4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies ........................................................ 4-24 4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum .............................................. 4-25 4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade4-26 4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaner brush ........................................................................ 4-26 4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt ..................................................................................... 4-26 4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller .................................... 4-26 4.8.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller .................................... 4-27
5. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 5-1

5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ............................................................... 5-4 5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) .............................................................. 5-4 5.1.2 Paper misfeeding ................................................................................................. 5-5 5.1.3 Paper transport jam ........................................................................................... 5-11 5.1.4 Other paper jam ................................................................................................. 5-19 5.1.5 Cover open jam ................................................................................................. 5-22 5.1.6 RADF jam .......................................................................................................... 5-26 5.1.7 Finisher jam ....................................................................................................... 5-31 5.1.8 Drive system related service call ....................................................................... 5-44
iii e-STUDIO3511/4511 CONTENTS
5.1.9 Paper feeding system related service call ......................................................... 5-45 5.1.10 Scanning system related service call ................................................................. 5-49 5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call ............................................................................ 5-50 5.1.12 Communication related service call ................................................................... 5-54 5.1.13 RADF related service call .................................................................................. 5-55 5.1.14 Circuit related service call .................................................................................. 5-56 5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call ................................................................. 5-59 5.1.16 Finisher related service call ............................................................................... 5-60 5.1.17 Image control related service call ...................................................................... 5-74 5.1.18 Copy process related service call ...................................................................... 5-78 5.1.19 Toner density control related service call ........................................................... 5-81 5.1.20 Other service call ............................................................................................... 5-85 5.1.21 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function .......................................................... 5-86 5.2 Troubleshooting of Image .............................................................................................. 5-102
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING ................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig ............................................................................... 6-2 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) ......................................................................... 6-4 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) ....................................................................... 6-10 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) ........................... 6-19 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320 ............................................................................................... 6-20 6.2 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) ................................................. 6-34 6.3 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device .................................................................. 6-45
7. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ................................................................................................. 7-1

7.1 Output Channel .................................................................................................................. 7-1 7.2 Fuse ................................................................................................................................... 7-3 7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit ................................................................................... 7-4
8. REMOTE SERVICE ....................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1 Auto Supply Order .............................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.1 Outline ................................................................................................................. 8-1 8.1.2 Setting Item .......................................................................................................... 8-2 8.1.3 Setting procedure ................................................................................................ 8-4 8.1.4 Order Sheet Format ........................................................................................... 8-12 8.2 Service Notification .......................................................................................................... 8-14 8.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................... 8-14 8.2.2 Setting ................................................................................................................ 8-14 8.2.2.1 Preparation ........................................................................................... 8-14 8.2.2.2 Setting procedure ................................................................................. 8-15 8.2.3 Items to be notified ............................................................................................. 8-19
9. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ............................................................. 9-1

9.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 9-1 9.2 DC Wire Harness ..................................................................................................... Appendix 9.3 Connector Table ....................................................................................................... Appendix
iv
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/ SUPPLIES 2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 3. ADJUSTMENT
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM) 5. TROUBLESHOOTING
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING
8. REMOTE SERVICE
9. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES/OPTIONS/SUPPLIES
1.1 Specifications
Values in [ ] are for e-STUDIO4511 in case that the specification is different between e-STUDIO3511 and e-STUDIO4511. Copy process Type Indirect electrophotographic process (dry) Desktop type (Console type: when optional Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) or optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) is installed.) Original table Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals) Accepted originals Sheet, book and 3-dimentional object For single-sided originals 50-127 g/m2 (13-34 lb. Bond) For double-sided originals 50-105 g/m2 (13-28 lb. Bond) None of the carbon, bonded nor stapled sheet original is acceptable when using the optional Reversing Automatic Document Feeder. Maximum size: A3/LD Copy speed (Copies/min.) e-STUDIO3511
Drawer 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 )
PFP 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 )
LCF 35 (11)

e-STUDIO4511
Drawer 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 )
PFP 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 )
LCF 45 (11)

* * *
means Not acceptable. The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side, continuous copying. When the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder is used, the copy speed of 35[45] sheets per minute is only available under the following conditions: Original/Mode: Single-sided original/A4/LT size. APS/automatic density are not selected. /Plain paper. Number of sheets: 35[45] or more at the black mode and 11 or more at the color mode. Reproduction ratio: 100% The values in ( ) are available when printed at color mode.
1-1
* System copy speed

Copy mode Single-sided originals Single-sided copies Single-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Double-sided copies Double-sided originals Single-sided copies 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets 1 set 3 sets 5 sets Sec. e-STUDIO3511 22.9 (70.3) 60.9 (181.8) 94.8 (292.2) 31.3 (95.1) 70.7 (201.8) 110.1 (311.2) 59.6 (149.6) 138.7 (366.6) 217.3 (584.6) 51.2 (124.6) 120.8 (346.5) 188.7 (565.7) e-STUDIO4511 19.8 (70.3) 49.9 (181.8) 76.3 (292.2) 30.3 (95.1) 71.9 (201.8) 101.5 (311.2) 59.5 (149.6) 130.4 (366.6) 201.5 (584.6) 51.5 (124.6) 105.7 (346.5) 158.5 (565.7)
The system copy speed is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original are set on the RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected. The period of time from pressing [START] to displaying "READY" is the actually measured value. Setting: Automatic exposure OFF, APS/AMS OFF, Text/Photo Mode, feeding from the upper drawer and Sort Mode. The finisher with the saddle stitcher and hole punch unit are installed. The values in ( ) are the speeds at the color modes.
Copy paper
Drawer Size A3 to A5-R LD to ST-R, 13" LG, 8.5" SQ Weight 64 to 105 g/m2 17 to 28 lb. Bond A4, LT ADU PFP LCF Bypass copy Remarks A3 to A6-R, LD to ST-R, 13" LG, 8.5" SQ, 305 x 457 mm (12" x 18") (Non-standard or userspecified sizes can be set.) 64 to 209 g/m2,17 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Index (Continuous feeding) 64 to 209 g/m2, 17 lb. Bond to 110 lb. Index (Single paper feeding) Special paper recommended by Labels, OHP film (thickness: 80 m or thicker) Toshiba Tec
Special paper
First copy time ................... Approx. 6.8 sec. or less (black), approx. 16.2 sec. or less (color) (A4/LT, upper drawer, 100%, original placed manually) Warming-up time ............... Approx. 40 seconds (Stand-alone, temperature: 20C) Multiple copying ................ Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
1-2
Reproduction ratio ............. Actual ratio: 1000.5% Zooming: 25 - 400% in increments of 1% (25 - 200% when using RADF) Resolution/Gradation ........ Read: 600 dpi Write: Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi (black copy) Equivalent to 600 dpi x 600 dpi (color copy) Eliminated portion ............. Leading edge : 3.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (black copy) Leading edge : 5.02.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.02.0 mm (color copy) Leading/trailing edges: 5.02.0 mm, Side edges: 5.02.0 mm (black/color print) Paper feeding .................... Drawers in the equipment 2 drawers (stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) PFP Option (1 or 2 drawers: stack height 60.5 mm, equivalent to 550 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) LCF Option (stack height 137.5 mm x 2, equivalent to 2500 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond)) Bypass feed Stack height 11 mm, equivalent to 100 sheets; 64-80 g/m2 (17-22 lb. Bond) Capacity of originals in the Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (Option) ................. A3 to A5-R, LD to ST-R: 100 sheets/80 g/m2 (Stack height 16mm or less) Automatic duplexing unit ... Stackless/switchback type Toner supply ...................... Automatic toner density detection/supply Toner cartridge replacing method Density control .................. Automatic density mode and manual density mode selectable in 11 steps Weight ............................... Approx. 112 kg (246.9 lb.) Power requirements .......... AC 110V/13.2A, AC 115V or 127V/15A, 220240V or 240V/8A (50/60 Hz) * The acceptable value of each voltage is 10%. Power consumption .......... 1.5 kW or less (100V series), 1.7 kW or less (200V series) * The electric power is supplied to the reversing automatic document feeder, finisher, PFP and LCF through the equipment. Total counter ..................... Electronic counter
1-3
Dimensions of the equipment .......... See the figure below (W660 x D718 x H739 mm) * When the tilt angle of the control panel is 45 degrees.
718
45
739
66
Fig. 1-101
1-4
1.2 Accessories
Unpacking/Setup instruction Operators manual Operator's manual pocket Power cable Warranty sheet Setup report Customer satisfaction card PM sticker Drum (installed inside of the equipment) Control panel stopper Lever Color developer holder Rubber plug Blind seal (small / large) CD-ROM Developer material (Y, M, C, K) Screw M3 x 8 / M4 x 8 * Machine version NAD: North America MJD: Europe AUD: Australia ASD: Asia TWD: Taiwan SAD: Saudi Arabia JPD: Japan 1 set 4 pcs. (except for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. (for NAD) 1 set (for NAD and MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. (for MJD) 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc. 6 pcs. 4 pcs. 3 pcs. / 1pc. 4 pcs. 1 pc. each (for TWD) 1 pc. / 1pc.
1-5
1.3 Options
Platen cover Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Drawer module Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Finisher (Hanging type) Finisher (Console type) Hole punch unit Staple cartridge KA-3511PC MR-3015 MY-1021 KD-1011 KD-1012 A4/LT MJ-1022 MJ-1023, MJ-1024 (with saddle stitcher) MJ-6004 N/E/F/S STAPLE-1600 (for hanging type) STAPLE-2000 (for console type) STAPLE-600 (for saddle stitcher) Bridge kit Key copy counter, key copy counter socket Work table Damp heater kit FAX board FAX board 2nd line Expansion memory Wireless LAN adapter PCI slot Scrambler board Notes: 1. The bridge kit (KN-3511) is necessary for installation of the finisher (MJ-1022, MJ-1023 or MJ-1024). 2. The finisher (MJ-1023 or MJ-1024) is necessary for installation of the hole punch unit (MJ-6004N/E/F/S). 3. The PCI slot (GO-1030) is necessary for installation of the scrambler board (GP-1030). KN-3511 MU-8, MU-10 KK-3511 MF-3511 GD-1150 GD-1160 GC-1180 GN-1010 GO-1030 GP-1030
1.4 Supplies
Drum Toner bag Toner cartridge (K) Toner cartridge (Y) Toner cartridge (M) Toner cartridge (C) Marked * : E, D, C and T PS-OD3511 PS-TB3511 PS-ZT3511 *K, PS-ZT3511K PS-ZT3511 *Y, PS-ZT3511Y PS-ZT3511 *M, PS-ZT3511M PS-ZT3511 *C, PS-ZT3511C
1-6
Finisher Platen cover KA-3511PC Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) MR-3015
1.5 System List
MJ-1022
Work table KK-3511
Staple cartridge STAPLE-2000 Bridge kit KN-3511 FAX board GD-1150 FAX board 2nd line GD-1160 Expansion memory GC-1180 Wireless LAN adapter GN-1010 PCI slot GO-1030 Scrambler board GP-1030
Key copy counter MU8, MU-10
Finisher Hole punch unit MJ-6004N/E/F/S
MJ-1023
Damp heater MF-3511
Fig. 1-501
1-7
Finisher
MJ-1024
Drawer module MY-1021
Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012A4/LT
1-8
2. ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE

2.1 Error Code List
One of the following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen while pressing the [CLEAR] button and the digital key [8] simultaneously when the CLEAR PAPER or CALL SERVICE symbol is blinking. 2.1.1 Jam
Error code E010 E011 Classification Paper exit jam Other paper jam Contents Jam not reaching the exit sensor : The paper which has passed through the fuser unit does not reach the exit sensor. Paper jam caused by clinging to the transfer belt: The paper after the 2nd transfer is clinging to the transfer belt and entering under the receiving tray. E020 Paper exit jam Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Power-ON jam: The paper is remaining on the paper transport path when power is turned ON. HDD abnormality causes jam: Image data to be printed cannot Paper misfeeding be prepared. ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper which has passed through ADU does not reach the registration sensor during duplex printing. E120 Bypass misfeeding (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper fed from the bypass tray does not reach the registration sensor. Upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the upper drawer does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor. E140 Lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the lower drawer does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP upper drawer does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. E160 PFP lower drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor): The paper fed from the PFP lower drawer does not reach the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. LCF misfeeding (Paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor): The Paper transport jam paper fed from the LCF does not reach the LCF feed sensor. Upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.1 Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.1 Ch. 5.1.4
E030 E090 E110
Other paper jam
Ch. 5.1.4 Ch. 5.1.4 Ch. 5.1.2
E130
Ch. 5.1.2
E150
Ch. 5.1.2
E190 E200
Ch. 5.1.2 Ch. 5.1.3
2-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Error code E210
Classification Paper transport jam
Contents Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. Lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor.
Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.3
E220
Ch. 5.1.3
E300
PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed
Ch. 5.1.3
E310
Ch. 5.1.3
E320
sensor. PFP upper drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer
Ch. 5.1.3
E330
feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor.
Ch. 5.1.3
E340
PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP upper drawer
Ch. 5.1.3
E350
Ch. 5.1.3
E360
feed sensor. PFP lower drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the PFP upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the PFP lower
Ch. 5.1.3
E3C0
drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor): The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has passed the upper drawer feed sensor.
Ch. 5.1.3
E3D0
LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the upper drawer feed sensor after it has passed the lower drawer feed sensor. LCF transport jam (Paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor): The paper does not reach the lower drawer feed sensor after it has passed the LCF feed sensor.
Ch. 5.1.3
E3E0
Ch. 5.1.3
E400 E410
Cover open jam
Jam access cover open jam: The jam access cover has opened during printing. Front cover open jam: The front cover has opened during printing.
Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5
2-2
Error code E420 E430 E440 E450 E480 E510 E520
Classification Cover open jam
Contents PFP side cover open jam: The PFP side cover has opened during printing. ADU open jam: The ADU has opened during printing. Side cover open jam: The side cover has opened during printing. LCF side cover open jam: The LCF side cover has opened during printing. Bridge unit open jam: The bridge unit has opened during printing.
Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.5 Ch. 5.1.3 Ch. 5.1.3
Paper transport jam (ADU section)
Stop jam in the ADU: The paper does not reach the ADU exit sensor after it has passed the ADU entrance sensor. Jam not reaching the ADU entrance sensor: The paper does not reach the ADU entrance sensor after it is switchbacked in
E550
Other paper jam
the exit section. Paper remaining jam on the transport path: The paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (caused by a multiple paper feeding).
Ch. 5.1.4
E711
RADF jam
Jam not reaching the original length sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the original length sensor. Jam not reaching the registration sensor: The original fed from the original feeding tray does not reach the registration sensor. Stop jam at the original length sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the original length sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Feed signal reception jam: The feed signal is received even no original exists on the original feeding tray. Jam not reaching the read sensor: The original does not reach the read sensor after it has passed the registration sensor (when scanning obverse side) or the reverse sensor (when
Ch. 5.1.6
E712 E713
Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6
E714 E721
Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6
E722
scanning reverse side). Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the exit sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to exit section.
Ch. 5.1.6
E723
Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning): The original which passed the read sensor does not reach the reverse sensor when it is transported from the scanning section to reverse section.
Ch. 5.1.6
E724
Stop jam at the registration sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the registration sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Stop jam at the read sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
Ch. 5.1.6
E725
Ch. 5.1.6
E726
Transport/exit signal reception jam: RADF receives the transport/ exit reception signal from the equipment when no original is at the exposure waiting position.
Ch. 5.1.6
2-3
Error code E731
Classification RADF jam
Contents Stop jam at the exit sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the exit sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor.
E741
Stop jam at the reverse sensor: The trailing edge of the original does not pass the reverse sensor after its leading edge has reached this sensor. Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during reverse feeding): The leading edge of the original does not reach the reverse sensor when original is fed from the reverse section.
Ch. 5.1.6
E742
Ch. 5.1.6
E743
Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during reverse feeding): The original does not reach the exit sensor after it has passed the reverse sensor when the original is exited from the reverse section.
Ch. 5.1.6
E860 E870 E910
Jam access cover open: The jam access cover has opened during RADF operation. Finisher jam (Bridge unit) RADF open jam: RADF has opened during RADF operation. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after it has passed the exit sensor.
Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.6 Ch. 5.1.7 (1)
E920
Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 1: The trailing edge Ch. 5.1.7 (1) of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor 1 after its leading edge has reached the sensor. Jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trailing edge of the paper does not reach the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport Ch. 5.1.7 (1)
E930
E940
sensor 1. Stop jam at the bridge unit transport sensor 2: The trailing edge Ch. 5.1.7 (1) of the paper does not pass the bridge unit transport sensor 2 after its leading edge has reached the bridge unit transport
E9F0 EA10 EA20
Finisher jam (Punch unit) Finisher jam (Finisher section)
sensor 2. Punching jam: Punching is not performed properly.
Ch. 5.1.7 (4)
[MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Paper transport delay jam: The paper which has passed the bridge Ch. 5.1.7 (2) unit does not reach the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Paper transport stop jam: (1) The paper does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) The paper has passed through the inlet sensor but does not reach or pass the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor. Ch. 5.1.7 (2)
EA30
[MJ-1023/1024] Power-ON jam: (1) Paper exists at the inlet sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] (2) Paper exists at the feed path sensor or processing tray sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024]
Ch. 5.1.7 (2)
2-4
Error code EA40
Classification Finisher jam (Finisher section) Door open jam:
Contents (1) The finisher has been released from the equipment during printing. [MJ-1022] (2) The upper/front cover of the finisher section or the upper/ front door of the puncher section has opened during
Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.7 (2)
EA50 EA60 EA70 EA80 EA90 EAA0 Finisher jam (Saddle stitcher section)
printing. [MJ-1023/1024] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly.
Ch. 5.1.7 (2)
[MJ-1022/1023/1024] Early arrival jam: The inlet sensor detects the paper earlier than Ch. 5.1.7 (2) a specified timing. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Stack delivery jam: It cannot deliver the stack of paper on the intermediary process tray to the stack tray. [MJ-1022] Stapling jam: Stapling is not performed properly. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.7 (2) Ch. 5.1.7 (3)
Door open jam: The delivery cover or inlet cover has opened dur- Ch. 5.1.7 (3) ing printing [MJ-1024]. Power-ON jam: Paper exists at No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, vertical path paper sensor or delivery sensor when power is turned ON. [MJ-1024] Transport stop jam: The paper which passed through the inlet sensor does not reach or pass No.1 paper sensor, No. 2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor or delivery sensor. [MJ-1024] Ch. 5.1.7 (3)
EAB0
Ch. 5.1.7 (3)
EAC0 EAD0 Other paper jam
Transport delay jam: The paper which has reached the inlet sensor does not pass through the inlet sensor. [MJ-1024] Print end command time-out jam: The printing has not finished normally because of the communication error between the SYS board and LGC board at the end of printing. Receiving time time-out jam: The printing has been interrupted because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher when the paper is transported from the equipment
Ch. 5.1.7 (3) Ch. 5.1.4
EAE0
Finisher jam
Ch. 5.1.7 (5)
EAF0 EB30
Finisher jam (Finisher section) Finisher jam
to the finisher. Stack return jam: It cannot load the paper which passed through Ch. 5.1.7 (2) the delivery roller on the intermediary process tray. [MJ-1022] Ready time time-out jam: The equipment judges that the paper Ch. 5.1.7 (5) transport to the finisher is disabled because of the communication error between the equipment and finisher at the start of printing.
EB50 EB60
Paper transport jam
Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper. Paper remaining on the transport path: The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of upcoming paper (redetection after no jam is detected at [EB50]).
Ch. 5.1.3 Ch. 5.1.3
2-5
2.1.2 Service call

Error code C010 C020 C030 C040 Paper feeding system related service call C130 Classification Drive system related service call Contents Main motor abnormality: The main motor is not rotating normally. Developer motor abnormality: The developer motor is not rotating normally. Transport motor abnormality: The transport motor is not rotating normally. PFP motor abnormality: The PFP motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP) Upper drawer tray abnormality: The upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the upper drawer) C140 Lower drawer tray abnormality: The lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the lower drawer) C150 PFP upper drawer tray abnormality: The PFP upper drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP upper drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP upper drawer) C160 PFP lower drawer tray abnormality: The PFP lower drawer tray motor is not rotating or the PFP lower drawer tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the PFP lower drawer) C180 LCF tray motor abnormality: The LCF tray motor is not rotating or the LCF tray is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) LCF end fence motor abnormality: The LCF end fence motor is not rotating or the LCF end fence is not moving normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any drawer except the LCF) C1B0 LCF transport motor abnormality: The LCF transport motor is not rotating normally. (the case that paper can be fed from any Scanning system related service call C270 drawer except the LCF) Peak detection error: Lighting of the exposure lamp (white reference) is not detected when power is turned ON. Carriage home position sensor not turning OFF within a specified period of time: The carriage does not shift from its home position in a specified time. C280 Carriage home position sensor not turning ON within a specified period of time: The carriage does not reach to its home position Copy process related service call in a specified period of time. Charger cleaner motor abnormality: Charger cleaner motor is not rotating or wire cleaner is not moving normally. Ch. 5.1.10 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Ch. 5.1.9 Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.8 Ch. 5.1.8 Ch. 5.1.8 Ch. 5.1.9
C1A0
Ch. 5.1.9
C260
Ch. 5.1.10 Ch. 5.1.10
C360
Ch. 5.1.18
2-6
Error code C410
Classification Fuser unit related service call
Contents Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ON: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected when power is turned ON or the temperature of the fuser roller does not rise in a specified period of time after power is turned ON. Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected after a specified period of time has passed from power-ON (including ready time or energy saving
C430
Ch. 5.1.11
C440
mode). Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment: The temperature of the fuser roller has exceeded the range of control (in this case, the main switch turns OFF automatically) or does not even reach
Ch. 5.1.11
C450 C470
the range. Thermistor abnormality during printing: Abnormality of the thermistor is detected during printing. IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality: The AC input is not applied to the IH control circuit normally, or the input voltage is too high/low.
Ch. 5.1.11 Ch. 5.1.11
C480 C490 C550 C570 C580 C730 C810 C820 C830 Optional communication related service call RADF related service call
Overheating of IGBT: The temperature of the IGBT rises abnormally. IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality: Abnormality is detected in IH control circuit or IH coil is broken/shorted. RADF I/F error: Communication error has occurred between the RADF and the scanner. Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board Communication error between IPC board and finisher EEPROM initialization error: EEPROM is not initialized normally when performing the code 05-356. Fan motor abnormality: The fan motor is not rotating normally. Read sensor adjustment error: The read sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356. Original length sensor adjustment error: The original length sensor cannot be adjusted normally when performing the code 05-356.
Ch. 5.1.11 Ch. 5.1.11 Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.13 Ch. 5.1.13 Ch. 5.1.13 Ch. 5.1.13
C900 C940 C950 C960 C970 C9E0 CA10 CA20
Circuit related service call
Connection error between SYS board and LGC board Engine-CPU abnormality LGC board memory abnormality Connection error between LGC board and DRV board, ID
Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.15 Ch. 5.1.15
Process related service call Circuit related service call Laser optical unit
abnormality High-voltage transformer abnormality: Leakage of the main charger is detected. Connection error between SLG board and SYS board, ID abnormality Polygonal motor abnormality: The polygonal motor is not
related service call rotating normally. H-Sync detection error: H-Sync signal detection PC board cannot detect laser beams.
2-7
Error code CB20 CB30
Classification Finisher related service call
Contents Delivery motor abnormality: Delivery motor or delivery roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1022] Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor abnormality: Tray 1/Tray 2 shift motor is not rotating or delivery tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16
CB40
Rear aligning plate motor abnormality: Rear aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Staple motor abnormality: Staple motor is not rotating or stapler is not moving normally. [MJ-1022/1023/1024] Stapler shift motor abnormality: Stapler shift motor is not rotating or staple unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Backup RAM data abnormality: (1) Abnormality of checksum value on finisher controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON. [MJ-1023/1024] (2) Abnormality of checksum value on punch controller PC board is detected when the power is turned ON.
Ch. 5.1.16
CB50 CB60 CB80
Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16
CB90
[MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality: Paper pushing plate motor is not rotating or paper pushing plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024]
Ch. 5.1.16
CBA0 CBB0 CBC0 CBD0 CBE0 CBF0
Stitch motor (front) abnormality: Stitch motor (front) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality: Stitch motor (rear) is not rotating or rotary cam is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Alignment motor abnormality: Alignment motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Guide motor abnormality: Guide motor is not rotating or guide is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Paper folding motor abnormality: Paper folding motor or paper folding roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1024] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality: Paper positioning plate motor is not rotating or paper positioning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1024] Sensor connector abnormality: Connector of guide home position sensor, paper pushing plate home position sensor or paper pushing plate top position sensor is disconnected. [MJ-1024]
Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16
CC00
Ch. 5.1.16
CC10 CC20
Micro switch abnormality: With all covers closed, inlet door switch, delivery door switch or front cover switch is open. [MJ-1024] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and saddle stitcher controller board [MJ-1023/1024] Stack processing motor abnormality: The stack processing motor is not rotating or the stack delivery belt is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16
CC30
Ch. 5.1.16
CC40
Swing motor abnormality: Swing motor is not rotating or swing unit is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
Ch. 5.1.16
2-8
Error code CC50
Classification Finisher related service call
Contents Horizontal registration motor abnormality: Horizontal registration motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Punch motor abnormality: Punch motor is not rotating or puncher is not shifting normally. [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)] Front alignment motor abnormality: Front alignment motor is not rotating or front aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Front aligning plate motor abnormality: Front aligning plate motor is not rotating or aligning plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024]
CC60
Ch. 5.1.16
CC80
Ch. 5.1.16
CC90
Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality: The upper stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the upper stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality: The lower stack tray lift motor is not rotating or the lower stack tray is not moving normally. [MJ-1022]
Ch. 5.1.16
CCA0
Ch. 5.1.16
CCB0 CCD0 CCE0
Rear jogging motor abnormality: The rear jogging motor is not rotating or the rear jogging plate is not moving normally. [MJ-1022] Stack ejection motor abnormality: Stack ejection motor or stack ejection roller is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Paper trailing edge assist motor abnormality: Paper trailing edge assist motor is not rotating or paper trailing edge assist is not moving normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Gear changing motor abnormality: Gear changing motor is not rotating normally. [MJ-1023/1024] Communication error between finisher and punch unit: Communication error between finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board [MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed)]
Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16
CCF0 CE00
Ch. 5.1.16 Ch. 5.1.16
CE10
Image control Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level): The output value related service call of this sensor is out of a specified range when sensor light source is OFF. Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level): The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range when the image quality control test pattern is not formed.
Ch. 5.1.17
CE20
Ch. 5.1.17
CE40 CE50 CE90 CEA0 CEB0
Image quality control test pattern abnormality: The test pattern is not formed normally. Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality: The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range. Drum thermistor abnormality: The output value of the drum thermistor is out of a specified range. Copy process Revolver home position detection abnormality: It cannot detect related service call that the revolver is at its home position. Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality: The black developer unit does not move up or down normally (lifting cam does not operate normally).
Ch. 5.1.17 Ch. 5.1.17 Ch. 5.1.17 Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.18
2-9
Error code CEC0 CEE0 CEE1 CEF0 CF20 CF30
Classification Copy process related service call
Contents 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality: The 2nd transfer roller does not contact/release normally. Transfer belt position detection abnormality (normal speed): The home position of the transfer belt cannot be detected. Transfer belt position detection abnormality (when decelerating): Reference position of the transfer belt cannot be detected. Revolver motor abnormality: Revolver motor is not rotating or
Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.18 Ch. 5.1.19 Ch. 5.1.19
Toner density control related service call
revolver is not moving normally. Toner density detection voltage abnormality: The output value of the color auto-toner sensor in printing is out of a specified range. Reference plate detection voltage abnormality: The output value of the color auto-toner sensor against the reference plate is out of a specified range at the light amount correction during
CF40
an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job has finished. Light amount correction voltage abnormality: The light amount correction is not finished normally during an auto-toner adjustment or when a print job has finished, or the output value of the sensor is out of a specified range when the light amount correction has finished.
Ch. 5.1.19
CF50
Color auto-toner sensor abnormality: The connection of the color auto-toner sensor cannot be detected at the initialization, or the output value of color auto-toner sensor when the revolver starts rotating for initialization is out of a specified range.
Ch. 5.1.19
F070 F090 F091 F092 F100 F101 F102 F103 F104 F105 F106 F107 F108 F110 F111 F120 F350
Communication related service call Circuit related service call Other service call
Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU SRAM abnormality on the SYS board NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board SRAM and NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board HDD format error: HDD cannot be initialized normally. HDD unmounted: Connection of HDD cannot be detected. HDD start error: HDD cannot become Ready state. HDD transfer time-out: Reading/writing cannot be performed in the specified period of time. HDD data error: Abnormality is detected in the data of HDD. HDD other error Point and Print partition damage /SHR partition damage
Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.14 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.12 Ch. 5.1.20 Ch. 5.1.14
Communication related service call Other service call Circuit related service call
/SHA partition damage Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU Scanner response abnormality Database abnormality: Database is not operating normally. SLG board abnormality
2 - 10
2.1.3 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function (1) Internet FAX related error
Error code 1C10 1C11 1C12 1C13 1C14 1C15 1C20 1C21 1C22 1C30 1C31 1C32 1C33 1C40 1C60 1C61 1C62 1C63 1C64 1C65 1C66 1C67 1C68 1C69 1C6A 1C6B 1C6C 1C6D 1C70 1C80 1C81 1C82 1CC0 1CC1 System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality HDD full failure during processing Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error NIC access error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error Terminal mail address error Destination mail address error System error SMTP client OFF Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Onramp Gateway transmission failure Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received Job canceling Power failure Contents Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1) Ch. 5.1.21 (1)
2 - 11 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
(2)
RFC related error

Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Syntax error, command unrecognized Contents HOST NAME error(RFC: 500) Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) Terminal mail address error 2501 Syntax error in parameters or arguments (RFC: 500) HOST NAME error(RFC: 501) Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) Terminal mail address error (RFC: 501) 2503 2504 2550 2551 2552 2553 Bad sequence of commands Command parameter not implemented Mailbox unavailable User not local Insufficient system storage Mailbox name not allowed Destination mail address error (RFC: 503) HOST NAME error(RFC: 504) Destination mail address error (RFC: 550) Destination mail address error (RFC: 551) Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552) Destination mail address error (RFC: 553) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Ch. 5.1.21 (2) Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (2)
Error code 2500
2 - 12
(3) Electronic Filing related error

Error code 2B10 2B11 2B20 2B30 2B31 Message displayed in the TopAccess screen There was no applicable job. Job status failed. Failed to access file. Insufficient disk space. Failed to access Electronic Filing. Contents No applicable job error in job control module JOB status abnormality File library function error Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/ deleted 2B32 Failed to print Electronic Filing document. Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of clients access (being edited, etc.). 2B50 2B51 2B71 2B80 2B90 2BA0 2BB0 2BB1 2BC0 2BC1 2BD0 Failed to process image. Failed to process print image. Document(s) expire(s) in a few days Hard Disk space for Electronic Filing nearly full. Insufficient Memory. Invalid Box password specified. Job canceled Power failure occurred System fatal error. Failed to acquire resource. Power failure occurred during e-Filing restoring. Image library error List library error Documents expiring in a few days exist Hard disk space in /SHR partition is nearly full (90%). Insufficient memory capacity Invalid Box password Job canceling Power failure Fatal failure occurred System management module resource acquiring failure Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3) Ch. 5.1.21 (3)
(4)
E-mail related error

Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified Message size exceeded limit or maximum size Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. Failed to read AddressBook Not enough memory Invalid Domain Address Invalid Domain Address Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to send E-Mail message Failed to connect to SMTP server Failed to send E-Mail message Invalid address specified in From: field Invalid address specified in To: field NIC system error SMTP service is not available Failed to process received E-mail job Failed to process received Fax job Job canceled Power failure occurred Contents System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding file capacity System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality HDD full failure during processing Address Book reading failure Memory acquiring failure Terminal IP address unset Terminal mail address unset SMTP address unset Server time time-out error NIC time time-out error NIC access error SMTP server connection error HOST NAME error (No RFC error) Terminal mail address error Destination mail address error (No RFC error) System error SMTP client OFF E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Process failure of FAX job received Job canceling Power failure Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4) Ch. 5.1.21 (4)
Error code 2C10 2C11 2C12 2C13 2C14 2C15 2C20 2C21 2C22 2C30 2C31 2C32 2C33 2C40 2C60 2C61 2C62 2C63 2C64 2C65 2C66 2C67 2C68 2C69 2C6A 2C6B 2C6C 2C6D 2C70 2C80 2C81 2CC0 2CC1
2 - 14
(5)
File sharing related error

Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Illegal Job status Not enough memory Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Invalid parameter specified There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Illegal Job status Failed to create directory Failed to create file Failed to delete file Failed to create file Failed to convert image file format Failed to copy file Invalid parameter specified Failed to connect to network destination. Check destination path Specified network path is invalid. Check destination path Logon to file server failed. Check username and password There are too many documents in the folder. Failed in creating new document. Failed to process your Job. Insufficient disk space. FTP service is not available File Sharing service is not available Expired scan documents deleted from share folder. Expired Sent Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Expired Received Fax documents deleted from shared folder. Scanned documents in shared folder deleted upon users request. Sent Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon users request. Received Fax Documents in shared folder deleted upon users request. Failed to delete file. Failed to acquire resource. Job canceled Power failure occurred Contents System access abnormality Insufficient memory Message reception error Message transmission error Invalid parameter Exceeding document number System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Directory creation failure File creation failure File deletion failure File access failure Image conversion abnormality File library access abnormality Invalid parameter File server connection error Invalid network path Login failure Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed. HDD full failure during processing FTP service not available File sharing service not available Periodical deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Periodical deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of scanned documents completed properly. Manual deletion of transmitted FAX documents completed properly. Manual deletion of received FAX documents completed properly. File deletion failure Resource acquiring failure Job canceling Power failure Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5) Ch. 5.1.21 (5)
Error code 2D10 2D11 2D12 2D13 2D14 2D15 2D20 2D21 2D22 2D30 2D31 2D32 2D33 2D40 2D60 2D61 2D62 2D63 2D64 2D65 2D66 2D67 2D68 2DA0 2DA1 2DA2 2DA3 2DA4 2DA5 2DA6 2DA7 2DC0 2DC1
(6)
E-mail reception related error

Message displayed in the TopAccess screen MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. MIME Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Whole partial mails were not reached by timeout. Partial Mail Error has been detected in the received mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Error has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. HDD Full Warning has been occurred in this mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Receiving partial mail was aborted since the partial mail setting has been changed to Disable. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Partial mail was received during the partial mail setting is disabled. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Contents E-mail MIME error Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
Error code 3A10 3A11
3A12
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A20 3A21
E-mail analysis error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A22
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A30 3A40 3A50 3A51
Partial mail time-out error Partial mail related error Insufficient HDD capacity error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A52
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A60 3A61
Warning of insufficient HDD capacity
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A62
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A70
Warning of partial mail interruption
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A80 3A81
Partial mail reception setting OFF
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3A82
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
2 - 16
Error code 3B10 3B11
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Format Error has been detected in the received mail. Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator.
Contents E-mail format error
Troubleshooting Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3B12
Format Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Content-Type error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3B20 3B21
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3B22
Content-Type Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Charset error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3B30 3B31
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3B32
Charset Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. E-mail decode error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3B40 3B41
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3B42
Decode Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. TIFF analysis error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C10 3C11
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C12
Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Analyze Error has been detected in the received mail.
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C13
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
Error code 3C20 3C21
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator.
Contents TIFF compression error
3C22
Tiff Compression Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. TIFF resolution error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C30 3C31
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C32
Tiff Resolution Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. TIFF paper size error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C40 3C41
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C42
Tiff Paper Size Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp destination error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C50 3C51
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C52
Offramp Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C60 3C61
Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail has been transferred to the administrator. Offramp Security Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail could not be transferred to the administrator.
Offramp security error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
3C62
Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
2 - 18
Error code 3C70 3D10
Message displayed in the TopAccess screen Power Failure has been occurred in Email receiving. SMTP Destination Error has been detected in the received mail. This mail was deleted.
Contents Power failure error Destination address error
3D20 3D30 3E10 3E20 3E30 3F00 3F10 3F20 3F30 3F40
Offramp Destination limitation Error has been detected in the received mail. Fax Board Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Connection Timeout Error has been occurred in the received mail. POP3 Login Error has been occurred in the received mail. File I/O Error has been occurred in this mail. The mail could not be received until File I/O is recovered.
Offramp destination limitation error FAX board error POP3 server connection error POP3 server connection time-out error POP3 login error File I/O error
Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6) Ch. 5.1.21 (6)
<<Error history>> In the setting mode (08-253), the latest twenty groups of error data will be displayed. Display example EA10 03 07 26 17 57 32 064 064 23621000000 Error code YY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCDEFHIJLO 4 digits 12 digits (Year is indicated 3 digits 3 digits 11 digits with its last two digits.)
A Paper source 0: Not selected 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: Upper drawer 4: Lower drawer 5: PFP upper drawer 6: PFP lower drawer Paper size code 0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7: A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5 A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ K: A3-wide L: 305457 mm M: 8K-R N: 16K-R O: 16K Z: Not selected Sort mode/staple mode 0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch ADF mode 0: Unused 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED APS/AMS mode 0: Not selected 1: APS
2: AMS
G H
Duplex mode 0: Not selected 1: Book 2: Double-sided/Single-sided 8: Single-sided/Duplex copying Unused Image shift 0: Unused 1: Book 2: Left 4: Right Editing 0: Unused
4: Double-sided/Duplex copying
1: Masking
2: Trimming
3: Mirror image
4: Unused
Edge erase/Dual-page 0: Unused 1: Edge erase
2: Dual-page
3: Edge erase & Dual-page
K L
Unused Function 0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission MMM Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Mx256)+(Mx16)+M NNN Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal) (Nx256)+(Nx16)+N Color mode 0: Auto color 1: Full color 2: Black 3: Unused 4: Twin color copy 5: Gray scale 6: Unused 7: Image smoothing 2 - 20 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
2.2 Self-diagnosis Modes

Mode Control panel check mode Test mode Test print mode Adjustment mode Setting mode List print mode PM support mode Firmware update mode For start [0]+[1]+ [POWER] [0]+[3]+ [POWER] [0]+[4]+ [POWER] [0]+[5]+ [POWER] [0]+[8]+ [POWER] [9]+[START]+ [POWER] [6]+[START]+ [POWER] [8]+[9]+ [POWER] Contents All LEDs on the control panel are lit, and all the LCD pixels blink. Checks the status of input/output signals. Outputs the test patterns. Adjusts various items. Sets various items. Prints out the data lists of the codes 05 and 08, PM support mode and pixel counter. Clears each counter. Performs updating of the system firmware. For exit [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON [POWER] OFF/ON 100% C A4 TEST MODE 100% P A4 TEST PRINT 100% A A4 TEST MODE 100% D TEST MODE 100% UA A4 LIST PRINT 100% K TEST MODE Display
Note: To enter the desired mode, turn ON the power while two digital keys designated to each mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) are pressed simultaneously. <Operation procedure> Control panel check mode (01):
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit) [0][1] [POWER] (LED lit/LCD blinking) [START] [START] (Button check)
Notes: 1. A mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON when the LED is lit and the LCD is blinking. 2. Button Check Buttons with LED (Press to turn OFF the LED.) Buttons without LED (Press to display the message on the control panel.) Button on touch panel (Press to display the screen on the control panel at powerON.)
Test mode (03): Refer to 2.2.1. Input check (test mode 03) and 2.2.2. Output check (test mode 03). Test print mode (04): Refer to 2.2.3. Test print mode (04). Adjustment mode (05): Refer to 2.2.4. Adjustment mode (05). Setting mode (08): Refer to 2.2.5. Setting mode (08). List print mode (9S): The procedure varies depending on the code.
[9] [START] [POWER] (Code) [START] 101: Adjustment mode (05) 102: Setting mode (08) (Code) 103: PM support mode 104: Stored information of pixel counter (toner cartridge reference) 105: Stored information of pixel counter (service technician reference) 106: Error history [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] List starts to be printed [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Key in the first code to be printed
Key in the last code to be printed
PM support mode (6S):

[6][START] [POWER] (Code) 2: PM Support Screen [START] (Operation started) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Firmware update mode (89): Refer to 6. FIRMWARE UPDATING.

[POWER] ON Normal [0][1] Control panel check mode [0][3] [0][4] Test print mode [0][5] Adjustment mode [0][8] Setting mode [9][START] List print mode [6][START] PM support mode [8][9]
Warming up
Test mode
Firmware update mode
Ready
[POWER] OFF
*1
To user
State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes *1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis mode, and leave the equipment to the user.
2 - 22
2.2.1 Input check (Test mode 03) The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the [FAX] button, [COPY] button and the digital keys in the test mode (03). <Operation procedure>
[0][3] [POWER] [START] [FAX] or [COPY] [Digital keys] [CLEAR] (LCD ON) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
Note: Initialization is performed before the equipment enters the test mode.
[Example of display during input check]
Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed in the following pages.
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: OFF ( [FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital Button key A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H Bypass unit connection ADU connection LCF connection LCF drawer detection switch PFP upper drawer detection switch PFP upper drawer paper stock sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP connection PFP side cover open/close switch PFP upper drawer empty sensor PFP upper drawer tray-up sensor LCF tray bottom sensor LCF standby side paper misload detection sensor Paper stock sensor at LCF feed side PFP lower drawer detection switch PFP lower drawer paper stock sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor PFP motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) PFP lower drawer empty sensor PFP lower drawer tray-up sensor LCF end fence home position sensor LCF end fence stop position sensor Empty sensor at LCF standby side LCF side cover open/close switch LCF motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at output mode (03)) LCF tray-up sensor LCF feed sensor Empty sensor at LCF feed side Lower drawer detection switch Upper drawer detection switch Lower drawer paper stock sensor Upper drawer paper stock sensor Lower drawer empty sensor Upper drawer empty sensor Lower drawer tray-up sensor Upper drawer tray-up sensor 2 - 24 Drawer not installed Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Not connected Cover opened No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at bottom position Properly loaded Not connected Items to check Condition with highlighted button Not connected Not connected
[1]
[2]
[3]
Paper present Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper present Abnormal rotation No paper Tray at upper limit position Fence home position Fence stop position No paper Cover closed Abnormal rotation Tray at upper limit position No paper No paper Drawer not installed Drawer not installed Paper almost empty Paper almost empty No paper No paper Tray at upper limit position Tray at upper limit position
[4]
[5]
[6]
Digital Button key A B C D [7] E F G H A B C D [8] E F G H A B C D [9] E F G H A B C D [0] E F G H
Items to check Side cover open/close switch Front cover opening/closing switch Exit sensor Bypass feed paper width sensor 3 Bypass feed paper width sensor 2 Bypass feed paper width sensor 1 Bypass feed paper width sensor 0 Bypass sensor ADU opening/closing switch ADU exit sensor ADU entrance sensor Key copy counter connection Paper clinging detection sensor
Condition with highlighted button
Cover opened Cover opened Paper present Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 Refer to table 1 No paper ADU opened Paper present Paper present
Not connected No paper
Table 1. Relation between the status of the bypass paper width sensor and paper size (width).
Bypass paper width sensor 3 0 1 1 1 0 1 2 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 Paper width size A3/LD A4-R/LT-R A5-R/ST-R Card size B4-R/LG B5-R
[FAX] button: ON/[COPY] button: OFF ([FAX] LED: ON/[COPY] LED: OFF)
Digital Button key A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H A B C D E F G H Items to check 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor Black developer contact timing detection sensor Black developer contact position detection sensor Main motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Developer motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Transport motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) Polygonal motor rotation status (Motor is rotating at Output Mode (03)) 24V Power supply IPC board connection Color toner cartridge sensor Revolver home position sensor Toner bag full detection sensor Black auto-toner sensor connection Lower drawer feed sensor Upper drawer feed sensor Bridge unit connection Color auto-toner sensor connection RADF connection Platen sensor Carriage home position sensor Condition with highlighted button Released Releasing movement Released position Abnormal rotation Abnormal rotation Abnormal rotation Abnormal rotation Power OFF Not connected Normally Home position
[1]
[2]
Toner bag full Not connected
[3]
No paper Paper present
[4]
Not connected Not connected
[5]
RADF connected Platen cover opened Home position
2 - 26
Digital Button key A B C D [6] E F G H A B C D [7] E F G H A B C D [8] E F G H A B C D [9] E F G H A B C D [0] E F G H
Items to check APS sensor (APS-R) APS sensor (APS-C) APS sensor (APS-3) APS sensor (APS-2) APS sensor (APS-1) RADF tray sensor RADF empty sensor RADF jam access cover switch RADF open/close sensor RADF exit sensor RADF reverse sensor RADF read sensor RADF registration sensor RADF original length sensor RADF original width sensor 1 RADF original width sensor 2 RADF original width sensor 3 Black toner cartridge switch Bypass feed sensor Registration sensor Transfer belt home position sensor Bridge unit transport sensor 2 Bridge unit cover open/close detection switch Bridge unit transport sensor 1 Bridge unit paper full detection sensor Charger cleaner front position detection switch Charger cleaner rear position detection switch
Condition with highlighted button
No original No original No original No original No original Original present Original present Cover opened RADF opened Original present Original present Original present Original present
Original present Original present Original present Original present Cartridge not installed
No paper Paper present
Home position Paper present Cover opened Paper present Paper not full Cleaner home position Cleaner rear position
[FAX] button: OFF/[COPY] button: ON ([FAX] LED: OFF/[COPY] LED: ON)

Digital Items to check key [1] Temperature/humidity sensor [2] Temperature/humidity sensor [3] Drum thermistor Display on the touch panel Displays the temperature inside the equipment. (Unit: C) Displays the humidity inside the equipment. (Unit: %RH) Displays the temperature near the drum surface. (Unit: C)
2.2.2 Output check (test mode 03) Status of the output signals can be checked by entering the following codes in the test mode 03.
<Operation procedure> Procedure 1

[0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START]
Operation ON
) ( )
Stop code
[START]
Operation OFF
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 2
[0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation One direction
[CLEAR]
Test mode standby
[POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 3
[0][3] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
Operation ON
[START]
Operation OFF
[CLEAR]
Test mode standby
[POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Procedure 4
[0][3] [POWER] (Code) [START] [POWER]OFF
2 - 28
Code 101 102 103 108 109 110 112 115 116 118 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 218 222 225 226 228 232 235 241 242 243 248 249 252 261 264 265 267 268 271 278
Function
Code
Function
Procedure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 1 1 3 3 2 2
Main motor ON (Operational without black 151 Code No.101 function OFF developer unit) Toner motor K (normal rotation) ON 152 Code No.102 function OFF Polygonal motor (600dpi) ON 153 Code No.103 function OFF Registration clutch ON 158 Code No.108 function OFF PFP motor ON 159 Code No.109 function OFF ADU motor ON 160 Code No.110 function OFF Developer motor ON (Operational with black 162 Code No.112 function OFF developer unit) Drum cleaning brush motor ON 165 Code No.115 function OFF Transfer belt cleaner auger motor ON 166 Code No.116 function OFF Laser ON 168 Code No.118 function OFF Exit motor (normal rotation) ON 170 Code No.120 function OFF Exit motor (reversal rotation) ON 171 Code No.121 function OFF LCF motor ON 172 Code No.122 function OFF Transport motor ON 173 Code No.123 function OFF Toner motor K (reversal rotation) ON 174 Code No.124 function OFF Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid ON 175 Code No.125 function OFF (open) Color auto-toner sensor LED ON 176 Code No.126 function OFF Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Lower transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF Lower transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF LCF pickup solenoid ON/OFF LCF end fence reciprocating movement LCF end fence motor ON/OFF LCF feed clutch ON/OFF LCF transport clutch ON/OFF Key copy counter count up ADU clutch ON/OFF PFP transport clutch ON/OFF PFP upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF PFP lower drawer feed clutch ON/OFF Bridge unit gate solenoid ON/OFF Discharge LED ON/OFF IH board cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) Lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) Developer bias (Black) [+DC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Black) [-DC] ON/OFF Main charger ON/OFF Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit position, speed can be changed by using ZOOM button) SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan ON (high/low speed) SLG board cooling fan / Scanner unit cooling fan OFF Scanner exposure lamp ON/OFF Laser unit cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF LCF tray-up motor UP/DOWN PFP upper drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up)
Code 280 281 282 283 284 285 294 295 297 410 411 412 413 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 424 425 426 427 428 430 431 432 433 434 435 437 439 440 442 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461
Function PFP lower drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) RADF read motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) RADF reverse motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) RADF reverse solenoid ON/OFF Power OFF mode (for 200V series) RADF fan motor ON/OFF Power supply cooling fan (low speed) ON/OFF Power supply cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (low speed) Internal cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed) IH board cooling fan (high speed) ON/OFF Ozone exhaust fan (low speed) ON/OFF Ozone exhaust fan (high speed) ON/OFF Developer bias (Black) [AC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [+DC] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [-DC1] ON/OFF Developer bias (Color) [AC] ON/OFF 1st transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF 1st transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller bias [+] ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller bias [-] ON/OFF Drum cleaning blade bias ON/OFF Image quality sensor shutter solenoid ON/OFF Color developer drive clutch ON/OFF Black developer drive clutch ON/OFF Black developer lifting clutch ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller drive clutch ON/OFF 2nd transfer roller contact clutch ON/OFF Transfer belt cleaner clutch ON/OFF Upper transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF Upper transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF Color developer toner supply clutch ON/OFF Revolver motor ON/OFF (printing operation) Revolver motor operation (at standby position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge Y access position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge M access position) Revolver motor operation (at toner cartridge C access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit Y access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit M access position) Revolver motor operation (at developer unit C access position) Revolver motor operation (at home position) Revolver motor operation (at developing position) Black developer unit lifting movement ON/OFF (continuous lifting movement) Charger cleaner motor movement (one reciprocating movement)
Procedure 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 2
2 - 30
2.2.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the following codes in the test print mode (04).
<Procedure 1>
Operation Continuous test printing [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[0][4] [POWER]
(Code)
[START]
[CLEAR]
<Procedure 2>
[0][4] [POWER] (Code) [START] [CLEAR] Color (selection ( [START] Operation Continuous test printing [CLEAR] [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Notes: 1. When an error occurs, it is indicated on the panel, but the recovery operation is not performed. Turn OFF the power and then back ON to clear the error. 2. During test printing, the [CLEAR] button is disabled when Wait adding toner is displayed.
Code 142 204 219 220 231 237 262 270 Types of test pattern Grid pattern (black) Grid pattern (color) 6% test pattern 8% test pattern Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps Halftone Pattern for jitter evaluation (4 lines ON / 4 lines OFF) Image quality control test pattern 3 pixels standard, Width: 10 mm 1 pixel standard, for color deviation correction For checking the image quality control Remarks Pattern width: 2 dots, Pitch: 10 mm Pattern width: 1 dot, Pitch: 10 mm Remarks 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)

Items in the adjustment mode list in the following pages can be corrected or changed in this adjustment mode (05). Turn ON the power with pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously in order to enter this mode. Procedure 1
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value) [ENTER] ([FAX] [START]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-). [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[START] [CANCEL]
Procedure 2
[0][5] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
Value displayed
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (value unchangeable)
([FAX] [START]) (Test copy)
Procedure 3
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [UP] or [DOWN] (Adjust a value) [ENTER] ([FAX] [START]) or (Test copy) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM) [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[START] [CANCEL]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 4
[CANCEL] [START]
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub code) [START] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] (Key in a value) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT]
Stores value in RAM
[START] (Test copy)
[FAX]
[CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [UP] [ENTER] or or [DOWN] [INTERRUPT] (Adjust a value) Stores value in RAM
Automatic adjustment
[START] (Test copy)
[FAX]
2 - 32
Procedure 6
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) Automatic ( adjustment ) [START] ([FAX] (Test copy) ) [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
[START]
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. * Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.
Procedure 7
[CANCEL] [0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START]
Automatic adjustment
[ENTER] Stores value in RAM
*[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
[START] (Test copy)
[FAX]
* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, an error message is displayed. * Return to standby screen by pressing the [CANCEL] or [CLEAR] button.
Procedure 10
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub code) [START] Value ( displayed ) [START] [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Value unchangeable)
Procedure 14
[0][5] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [ENTER] [UP] or [DOWN] or (Adjust a value) [INTERRUPT] Stores value in RAM [CANCEL] (Corrects value)
[START]
[Digital key] (Sub code)
[START]
[START] (Test copy)
[FAX]
Note: The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal state. Therefore, the problem of fusing efficiency may be occurred in the test copy at the adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3 minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05) Operation: One test print is printed out when the [FAX] button is pressed after the code is keyed in at Standby Screen.
Code 1 3 4 5 6 7 10 12 13 14 15 47 48 49 50 51 52 55 56 57 58 59 60 62 63 64 Types of test pattern Grid pattern (Black) Remarks Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment
Grid pattern (Black/Duplex printing) Refer to 3.4.3 Printer related adjustment For gamma adjustment (Color/Black integrated pattern) Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment For gamma adjustment (Color) For gamma adjustment (Black) For gamma adjustment (Color) For gamma adjustment (Black) Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (Y) Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (M) Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (C) Secondary scanning direction 33 gradation steps (K) Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 600 x 600 dpi) Gamma adjustment for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600 dpi) Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 600 x 600 dpi) Gamma adjustment for printer (PCL/ 1,200 x 600 dpi) Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 600 x 600 dpi) Gamma checking for printer (PS/ 1,200 x 600 dpi) Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 2) Grid pattern (Full Color / Thick paper 3) Grid pattern (Full Color / OHP) Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 2) Grid pattern (Black / Thick paper 3) Grid pattern (Black / OHP) For color deviation correction (Full Color) For color deviation correction (Full Color) For color deviation correction (Full Color) Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment For checking the gradation reproduction For checking the gradation reproduction Refer to 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment For checking the image of printer section For checking the image of printer section For checking the image of printer section For checking the image of printer section Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment Refer to 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment For checking the gradation reproduction For checking the gradation reproduction Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller Refer to 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller Only for A3/LD size Only for A3/LD size Only for A3/LD size
2 - 34
03/12
Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code. 2. In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M stands for the LGC board and SYS stands for the SYS board.
Adjustment mode (05)
Code 200 201 202 203 204 206 207 Default ClassifiFunc- <Acceptable ProceRAM Contents Items cation tion dure value> ALL Devel- Initialization of All M The value starts changing approx. 3 5 (Y,M,C,K) <0-255> opment color auto-toner minutes after this adjustment started. ALL M The value is automatically set during 5 Y sensor light <0-255> amount correction this adjustment (approx. 2 minutes). M ALL M 5 target value <0-255> (As the value increases, the sensor C ALL M output increases correspondingly.) 5 <0-255> Chapter 3.2) ( K ALL M 5 <0-255> YMC ALL M 5 <0-255> Devel- Initialization of color autoALL M Initializes the color auto-toner sensor 5 opment toner sensor light amount (color) light amount correction target value. correction target value Devel- Enforced correction of color ALL M Performs the color auto-toner sensor 5 opment auto-toner sensor light (color) light amount correction forcibly. amount Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output ALL 225 M When the value decreases, the 1st 3 <0-225> transfer roller bias output increases. adjustment The adjustment value becomes (When not transferred) effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). Y Transfer 1st transfer roller ALL 140 M When the value decreases, the 1st 14 (color) <0-225> bias output transfer roller bias output increases. M M The adjustment value becomes 14 ALL 140 adjustment (color) <0-225> (Image quality effective when the Setting Mode (08C M 541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). 14 ALL 140 control test (color) <0-225> pattern) K M 14 ALL 148 (color) <0-225> Plain Transfer 1st transfer roller M When the value decreases, the 1st 3 ALL 135 paper bias output transfer roller bias output increases. (black) <0-225> adjustment The adjustment value becomes Thick ALL 135 M effective when the Setting Mode (083 paper 1 (black) <0-225> 541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> M 3
208
210
211-0 211-1 211-2 211-3 212
214
215
216
217

Code Classification Items Y M C K Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 1) Y M C K Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 2) Y M C K Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (Thick paper 3) Y M C K Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output adjustment (OHP film) Y M C K Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (When cleaning the roller [+] ) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (When cleaning the roller [-] ) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (Paper interval/When not transferred) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 137 <0-158> 196 <159-255> 169 <159-255> M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). Contents When the value decreases, the 1st transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08541, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid).
Procedure
218-0 Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output 218-1 adjustment (Plain paper) 218-2 218-3 220-0 220-1 220-2 220-3 221-0 221-1 221-2 221-3 222-0 222-1 222-2 222-3 223-0 223-1 223-2 223-3 224
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 3
225
ALL
226
ALL
2 - 36

Code 227-0 227-1 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) 143 <0-158> 116 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 113 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 107 <0-158> 119 <0-158> 107 <0-158> 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 113 <0-158> 107 <0-158> 5 <0-10> M M Contents When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid).
Procedure
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output adjustment (Plain paper)
227-2 227-3
229-0 229-1
229-2 229-3
230-0 230-1
Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller Single side bias output Reverse adjustment side at (Thick paper 1) duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (Thick paper 2)
14 14
M M
14 14
M M
When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid).
14 14
M M
14 14
M M
231-0 231-1
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (Thick paper 3)
M M
232-0 232-1
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output (OHP film)
M M
233
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias offsetting
234-0 234-1
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Plain paper)
234-2 234-3
Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing
ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color)
5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10>
M M
M M
When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). When the value decreases, the 2nd transfer roller bias output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective when the Setting Mode (08544, 549 and 551) is 0 (invalid). Sets the offset amount of 1st transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V Sets the offset amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V
14 14
14 14
14 14
4 4
4 4

Code 236-0 236-1 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL (black) 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 78 <0-255> 84 <0-255> 87 <0-255> 94 <0-255> 5 <0-10> M M Contents Sets the offset amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -500V 1: -400V 2: -300V 3: -200V 4: -100V 5: 0V 6: +100V 7: +200V 8: +300V 9: +400V 10: +500V
Procedure
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 1)
236-2 236-3
237-0 237-1 238-0 238-1 239-0 239-1 241 242 243 244 245
Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 2) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 3) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (OHP film) Main Main charger grid charger bias adjustment Y M C K Transfer 1st transfer roller bias offsetting
4 4
M M
4 4
M M M M M M M M M M M
Sets the offsetting amount of 2nd transfer roller bias. 0: -1,000 V 1: -800 V 2: -600 V 3: -400 V 4: -200 V 5: 0 V 6: +200 V 7: +400 V 8: +600 V 9: +800 V 10: +1,000 V
4 4 4 4 4 4
As the value increases, the transformer output increases. The adjustment value becomes effective only when the setting mode (08-549, 551, 556, 557) is 0 (invalid).
3 3 3 3
250
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias output voltage
+Low
ALL
251
+High
ALL
4000 <18004400> 400 <0-500>
252
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output voltage
+Low
ALL
253
+High
ALL
4800 M <43205280> M 516 <416-616>
Sets the offsetting amount of 1st transfer roller bias. 0: -500 V 1: -400 V 2: -300 V 3: -200 V 4: -100 V 5: 0 V 6: +100 V 7: +200 V 8: +300 V 9: +400 V 10: +500 V Transformer output setting of the 1st transfer roller bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Transformer output setting of the 2nd transfer roller bias (plus output). When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V)
2 - 38

Code 254 Classification Items -Low Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL -110 <-9999-0> -2000 <-9999-0> 140 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 148 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> M Contents Transformer output setting of the 2nd transfer roller bias (minus output). When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated.
Procedure
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias output voltage
255
-High
ALL
262-0 262-1 262-2 262-3 263 265 266 267 268 269-0 269-1 269-2 269-3 271-0 271-1 271-2 271-3 272-0 272-1 272-2 272-3
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Image quality control test pattern)
Y M C K
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Plain paper)
Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Y M C K
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (Thick paper 1)
Y M C K
Y M C K
ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color)
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
10 10 10 10
Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated.
2 2 2 2 2
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10

Code 273-0 273-1 273-2 273-3 274-0 274-1 274-2 274-3 275 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias actual value (When cleaning the roller) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias actual value display (Plain paper) Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual value display (OHP film) Classification Items Y M C K Y M C K (+) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 135 <0-225> 140 <0-225> 145 <0-225> 150 <0-225> 137 <0-255> 196 <0-255> 143 <0-158> 116 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 113 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 107 <0-158> 119 <0-158> 107 <0-158> 128 <88-168> 128 <88-168> 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> M M M M M M M M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated. Contents Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias when printing is operated.
Procedure
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2
276 277-0 277-1
(-)
ALL ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL
M M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated.
2 10 10
277-2 277-3
279-0 279-1
279-2 279-3
284
Single side Reverse side at duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer 2nd transfer roller Single bias actual value side Reverse display side at (Thick paper 1) duplexing Single side Reverse side at duplexing Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit contact timing adjustment Transfer Transfer belt cleaning unit release timing adjustment Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 2)
M M
10 10
M M
Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated.
10 10
M M
10 10
285
ALL
290-0 290-1
ALL (black) ALL (color)
M M
When the value increases, the contact timing of transfer belt cleaning unit is delayed. When the value increases, the release timing of transfer belt cleaning unit is delayed. Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated.
10 10
2 - 40

Code 291-0 291-1 292-0 292-1 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL (black) ALL (black) 143 <0-158> 137 <0-158> 113 <0-158> 107 <0-158> 85 <0-100> 75 <0-100> 80 <0-100> 80 <0-100> 80 <0-100> 146 <0-255> 124 <0-255> M M M M M M M M M M M Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias on the leading/trailing edge of paper when printing is performed. (The value corrected in 05-293 is displayed.) Corrects the 2nd transfer roller bias output of leading/trailing edge of paper (05-227, 229, 230, 231 and 232). Correcting factor: % Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated. Contents Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when printing is operated.
Procedure
Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (Thick paper 3) Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias offsetting adjustment (OHP film) Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film
10 10 10 10 14 14 14 14 14 10 10
293-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller bias correction of 293-1 leading/trailing edge of paper 293-2 293-3 293-4 294-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd 294-1 transfer roller bias of leading/trailing edge of paper (Plain paper) 294-2
Single side Reverse side at duplex printing Single side 294-3 Reverse side at duplex printing 296-0 Transfer Actual value Single side display of 2nd 296-1 transfer roller bias Reverse of leading/trailing side at duplex edge of paper printing (Thick paper 1) 296-2 Single side 296-3 Reverse side at duplex printing 297-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of 297-1 leading/trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 2) 298-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of 298-1 leading/trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 3)
ALL (color) ALL (color)
141 <0-255> 121 <0-255>
M M
10 10
ALL (black) ALL (black)
144 <0-255> 122 <0-255>
M M
10 10
ALL (color) ALL (color)
131 <0-255> 122 <0-255>
M M
10 10
ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color)
146 <0-255> 141 <0-255> 146 <0-255> 141 <0-255>
M M M M
10 10 10 10

Code Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL 121 <0-255> 116 <0-255> M Contents
Procedure
299-0 Transfer Actual value display of 2nd transfer roller bias of 299-1 leading/trailing edge of paper (OHP film) 305 Scanner Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section) Scanner Image location adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section) Scanner Distortion mode Image Image quality control closed-loop control contrast voltage correction/ Mode 2 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control laser power correction/ Mode 2 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control contrast voltage correction/ Mode 1 maximum number of time corrected Image Image quality control closed-loop control laser power correction/ Mode 1 maximum number of time corrected Image control Image control Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K
Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias on the leading/trailing edge M of paper when printing is performed. (The value corrected in 05-293 is displayed.) 128 SYS When the value increases by 1, the <92-164> image shifts by approx. 0.137mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. 128 SYS When the value increases by 1, the <0-255> image shifts by approx. 0.0423mm toward the front side of the paper. 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 3 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 2 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 1 <0-255> 300 <270-330> 1200 <10801320> M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M Transformer output calibration of the main charger grid bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Sets the maximum correction number of time of the laser power in the closed-loop control mode 1. Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control mode 1. Sets the maximum correction number of time of the laser power in the closed-loop control mode 2. Moves carriages to the adjusting position. ( Chapter 3. 4. 4.) Sets the maximum correction number of time of the contrast voltage in the closed-loop control mode 2.
10 10
306
ALL
308 330-0 330-1 330-2 330-3 331-0 331-1 331-2 331-3 332-0 332-1 332-2 332-3 333-0 333-1 333-2 333-3 334 335
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
6 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1
Main charger grid calibration voltage 1 (low) Main charger grid calibration voltage 1 (high)
2 - 42

Code 338 339 Classification Image control Image control Items Color developer bias DC (-) calibration voltage 1 (low) Color developer bias DC (-) calibration voltage 2 (high) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL 100 <85-115> 900 <810-990> M Contents
Procedure
340
Scanner Reproduction ratio adjustment of secondary scanning direction (scanner section)
ALL
354
RADF
Adjustment of RADF paper alignment
355
356
RADF
357
RADF
for singlesided original for double sided original Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization Fine adjustment of RADF transport speed
ALL
ALL
Transformer output calibration of the color developer bias. When replacing M the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) 128 SYS When the value increases by 1, the <0-255> reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (vertical to paper feeding direction) increases by approx. 0.223%. 10 SYS When the value increases by 1, the <0-20> aligning amount increases by approx. 0.5mm. 10 SYS <0-20> SYS Performs the adjustment and initialization when the RADF board or RADF sensor is replaced. SYS When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction on original (fed from the RADF) increases by approx. 0.1%. SYS When the value increases by 1, the image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the rear side of paper by approx. 0.0423mm. SYS When the value increases by 1, the carriage position shifts by approx. 0.1 SYS mm toward the exit side when using the RADF. SYS Transfers the characteristic values of the scanner (shading correction factor / RGB color correction / reproduction ratio color aberration correction) from the NVRAM of the SYS board to the NVRAM of the SLG board. SYS Transfers the characteristic values of the scanner (shading correction factor / RGB color correction / reproduction ratio color aberration correction) from the NVRAM of the SLG board to the NVRAM of the SYS board. SYS When the value increases by 1, the copied image of original fed from the RADF shifts toward the trailing edge SYS of paper by approx. 0.1mm.
1 1
ALL
ALL
50 <0-100>
358
RADF
RADF sideways deviation adjustment
ALL
128 <0-255>
359 360 363
Scanner Carriage position adjustment ALL during scanning from RADF (black) ALL (color) Scanner Data transfer of SCN characteristic value of scanner / SYS board -> SLG board
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> -
1 1 6
364
Scanner Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SLG board -> SYS board
SCN
365
RADF
RADF leading edge position 1 adjustment
366
for singlesided original for double sided original
ALL
50 <0-100> 50 <0-100>
ALL

Code 367 Classification RADF Items RADF original guide width adjustment (Minimum) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL Contents Stores the current width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the minimum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-356) is performed. Stores the current width of RADF original guide by keying in this code with the guide set at the maximum width. Perform this adjustment when the RADF board or volume is replaced, or when the code (05-356) is performed. Transformer output calibration of the black developer bias. When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the values listed in attached data sheet are entered. (Unit: V) Displays the contrast voltage initial value set by the open-loop control. (Unit: V)
Procedure
368
RADF
RADF original guide width adjustment (Maximum)
ALL
372
Image Black developer bias DC control (-) calibration voltage 1 (low) Image Black developer bias DC control (-) calibration voltage 2 (high) Image Image quality Y control open-loop control/ M contrast voltage initial value C display K Image Contrast voltage control actual value display Y M C K Image Image quality control open-loop control/ laser power initial value display Y M C K Image Laser power control actual value display Y M C K
ALL
100 <85-115> 900 <810-990> 320 <0-999> 330 <0-999> 340 <0-999> 375 <0-999> 320 <0-999> 330 <0-999> 340 <0-999> 375 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255> 92 <0-255>
373
ALL
380-0 380-1 380-2 380-3 381-0 381-1 381-2 381-3 382-0 382-1 382-2 382-3 383-0 383-1 383-2 383-3
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
10 10 10 10
Displays the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V)
10 10 10 10
Displays the laser power initial value set by the open-loop control. (Unit: W)
10 10 10 10
Displays the laser power when printing is operated. (bit value)
10 10 10 10
2 - 44

Code 384-0 384-1 384-2 384-3 385-0 385-1 385-2 385-3 386-0 386-1 386-2 386-3 388 Image Output value control display of image quality sensor Image Developer bias control DC (-) actual value display Image Main charger grid control bias actual value display Classification Items Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K When the light source is OFF Transfer belt surface Highdensity pattern Y Highdensity pattern M Highdensity pattern C Highdensity pattern K Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 408 <0-999> 78 <0-255> 84 <0-255> 87 <0-255> 94 <0-255> 135 <0-255> 137 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 146 <0-255> 0 <0-1023> M M M M M M M M M M M M M Displays the output value of image quality sensor when the sensor light source is OFF. Displays the output value of image quality sensor (when there is no test pattern) on the transfer belt. Displays the output value of image quality sensor when a high-density test pattern is written. The larger the value is, the smaller the toner amount adhered becomes. Displays the developer bias when printing is operated. (bit value) Displays the main charger grid bias when printing is operated. (bit value) Contents Displays the laser power when printing is operated. (Unit: W)
Procedure
Image Laser power control actual value display
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 2
389
ALL
0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023>
390-0
ALL
10
390-1
ALL
10
390-2
ALL
10
390-3
ALL
10

Code 391-0 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-1023> 0 <0-255> M Contents Displays the output value of image quality sensor when a low-density test pattern is written. The larger the value is, the smaller the toner amount adhered becomes.
Procedure
Image Output value control display of image quality sensor
391-1
391-2
391-3
392
Lowdensity pattern Y Lowdensity pattern M Lowdensity pattern C Lowdensity pattern K Image Light amount adjustment control result of image quality sensor Image Relative humidity display control during latest closed-loop control Image Enforced performing of control image quality open-loop control Image Enforced performing of control image quality closed-loop control Image Image quality control control initialization Laser Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (reproduction ratio adjustment) Laser Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position Image Color deviation correction 1 K C M Y Image Color deviation correction 2 K C M Y
10
ALL
10
ALL
10
ALL
10
ALL
393
ALL
0 <0-100> -
394
ALL
The LED light amount adjustment value of this sensor is the reference value to set the reflected light from the belt surface. Displays the relative humidity at the latest performing of the closed-loop control. Performs the image quality open-loop control. Performs the image quality closedloop control. Performs the image quality control, initialize each control value. When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.07%. (approx. 0.1mm/step) When the value increases by 1, the writing start position shifts to the front side by approx. 0.0423mm. When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by 0.0423 mm (effective for all pages of continuous printing).
395
ALL
396 401 405 410 411 417-0 417-1 417-2 417-3 418-0 418-1 418-2 418-3
ALL PRT PPC PPC PRT ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 127 <118-138> 127 <118-138> 128 <118-138> 129 <118-138> 130 <118-138> 128 <118-138> 128 <118-138> 128 <118-138>
M M M M M M M M M M M M M
6 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 4
When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by 0.0423 mm (effective for the 2nd and following pages on the continuous printing).
4 4 4 4
2 - 46

Code 421 422 424 425 426 427 430 Image Drive Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (fine adjustment of transport motor speed) Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) /Reverse side at duplexing Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) /Reverse side at duplexing Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper) Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction) Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper) Drive Classification Drive Items Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio (fine adjustment of main motor speed) Fine adjustment of exit motor speed Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC /PRT FAX PPC /PRT FAX PPC /PRT FAX PPC 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 107 <0-255> 121 <0-255> 153 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> M M M M M M M Contents When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.04%. When the value increases by 1, the rotation becomes faster by approx. 0.05%. When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.04%. When the value increases by 1, the blank area becomes wider by approx. 0.0423mm.
Procedure
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
431
Image
PPC
432
Image
PPC
0 <0-255>
433
Image
PPC
0 <0-255> EUR: 45 UC: 28 JPN: 28 Others: 45 <0-255> 18 <0-255>
434-0
Image
PPC /PRT
434-1
Image
PPC /PRT
435
Image
PRT
24 <0-255> 0 <0-255>
436
Image
PRT
437
Image
PRT
0 <0-255>
438
Image
PRT
0 <0-255>

Code 439 Classification Image Items Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction) when paper size is not specified at bypass feed Upper Secondary drawer scanning laser Lower writing start drawer position Bypass feeding LCF PFP Duplex feeding Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 128 <0-255> M Contents When the value increases by 1, the margin increases by approx. 0.2 mm.
Procedure
440 441 442 443 444 445 448-0 448-1 448-2 448-3 449-0 449-1 449-2 449-3 450-0 450-1 450-2 450-3 452-0 452-1 452-2 452-3
Laser
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Plain paper) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP lower drawer / Plain paper) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Upper drawer / Plain paper) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer / Plain paper)
20 <0-40> 40 <0-80> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 20 <0-40> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63>
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx. 0.2 mm.
1 1 1 1 1 1
When the value increases by 1, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size 1: 205mm to 219mm Short size 2: 204mm or shorter
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 48

Code 455-0 455-1 455-2 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL 23 <0-63> 23 <0-63> 33 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 17 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 17 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 16 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> 20 <0-63> M M M Contents When the value increases by 1, the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size: 219mm or shorter * Postcard is supported only for JPN model.
Procedure
457
458-0 458-1 458-2 460-0 460-1 460-2 461-0 461-1 461-2 462-0 462-1 462-2 462-3 463-0 463-1 463-2
Paper Paper aligning Long feeding amount adjustsize Middle ment at the size registration Short section (Duplex size feeding / Plain paper) Paper Paper aligning amount adjustfeeding ment at the registration section (LCF / Plain paper) Paper Paper aligning Long feeding amount adjustment size at the registration Middle size section (Bypass Short feeding/Plain paper) size Paper Paper aligning Long feeding amount adjustment size at the registration Middle size section (Bypass Short feeding/Thick paper 1) size Paper Paper aligning Long feeding amount adjustment size at the registration Middle size section (Bypass Short feeding/Thick paper 2) size Paper Paper aligning Long size feeding amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (Bypass size feeding/Thick Post paper 3) card Paper Paper aligning Long size feeding amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (Bypass feeding/OHP film) size
4 4 4
ALL
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Code 466-0 466-1 466-4 466-5 466-6 466-7 467 Classification Items Plain paper Post card Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Paper Adjustment of paper feeding pushing amount/Duplex feeding (short size) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 143 <0-255> 198 <0-255> 143 <0-255> 143 <0-255> 143 <0-255> 143 <0-255> 128 <0-255> M M M M M M M When the value increases by 1, the driving speed of ADU transport roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. When the value increases by 1, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page by 0.25mm. Contents When the value increases by 1, the driving speed of bypass feed roller increases by approx. 0.2 ms when the paper transport is started from the registration section. * Post card is supported only for JPN model.
Procedure
Paper Adjustment of feeding paper pushing amount / Bypass feeding
4 4 4 4 4 4 1
468-0 468-1 468-2 469-0 469-1 469-2 469-3 470-0 470-1 470-2 470-3 471-0 471-1 471-2 471-3
Finisher Fine adjustment of binding position /folding position
A4-R /LT-R B4 A3/LD
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Upper drawer / Thick paper 1) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (Lower drawer / Thick paper 1) Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP upper drawer / Thick paper 1)
Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2
0 <-14-14> 0 <-14-14> 0 <-14-14> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 18 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63> 15 <0-63>
M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
4 4 4
When the value increases by "1", the aligning amount increases by approx. 0.8mm. <Paper length> Long size: 330mm or longer Middle size: 220mm to 329mm Short size 1: 205mm to 219mm Short size 2: 204mm or shorter
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 50

Code 472-0 472-1 472-2 472-3 473 ClassifiItems cation Paper Paper aligning feeding amount adjustment at the registration section (PFP lower drawer / Thick paper 1) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 15 M When the value increases by "1", the 4 <0-63> aligning amount increases by approx. ALL M 0.8mm. 4 15 <0-63> <Paper length> ALL M Long size: 330mm or longer 4 15 <0-63> Middle size: 220mm to 329mm ALL M Short size: 219mm or shorter 4 15 <0-63> Short size 1: 205mm to 219mm ALL M Short size 2: 204mm or shorter 1 15 <0-63> * Post card is supported only for JPN model. ALL ALL ALL ALL 25 <0-63> 25 <0-63> 33 <0-63> 28 <0-63> 28 <0-63> M M M M 4 4 4 4
474-0 474-1 474-2 475-0
475-1
475-2
475-3
475-4
475-5
475-6 475-7
475-8
475-9
Long size Middle size Short size 1 Short size 2 Paper Paper aligning amount feeding adjustment at the registration section (LCF / Thick paper 1) Long Paper Paper aligning size feeding amount adjustMiddle ment at the size registration Short section (ADU / Thick paper 1) size Paper Paper aligning Thick feeding amount adjustpaper 2 Long size ment at the Thick registration paper 2 section (Bypass Middle feeding) size Thick paper 2 Short size Thick paper 3 Long size Thick paper 3 Middle size Thick paper 3 Short size OHP film Long size OHP film Middle size OHP film Short size Post card
ALL
ALL
28 <0-63>
ALL
28 <0-63> 28 <0-63>
ALL
ALL
28 <0-63>
ALL ALL
24 <0-63> 24 <0-63> 24 <0-63> 28 <0-63>
M M
4 4
ALL
ALL

Code 494 ClassifiItems cation Laser Secondary scanning data laser writing start position Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 1 128 M When the value increases by 1, the <0-255> image shifts by approx. 0.2 mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. ALL 128 M 1 <0-255> ALL 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 148 <0-255> 148 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> M 1
495
496
497-0 497-1 497-2
Laser
Adjustment of drawer sideways deviation
497-3
497-4 497-5 498-0 498-1 Laser
When decelerating to 1/2 When decelerating to 1/3 When decelerating to 1/4 Upper drawer Lower drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF
ALL ALL ALL
M M M
When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423mm.
4 4 4
ALL
ALL
M M M M When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the front side by 0.0423mm.
4 4 4 4
501 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 512 514 515
Image
Image
Image
Image
Bypass ALL feeding Adjustment of ALL Long size duplex feeding sideways devia- Short size ALL (A4/LT or tion smaller) Density adjustment Photo PPC (black) Fine adjustment Text PPC of manual /Photo (black) density Text PPC /Center value (black) Density adjustment Text PPC (black) Fine adjustment of /Photo PPC manual density Photo (black) /Light step value Text PPC (black) Density adjustment Text PPC (black) Fine adjustment of /Photo PPC manual density Photo (black) /Dark step value Text PPC (black) Density adjustment Photo PPC (black) Fine adjustment of PPC automatic density Text /Photo (black) Text PPC (black)
SYS When the value increases, the image of the center step density becomes SYS darker. SYS SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. SYS When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter. SYS SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. SYS When the value increases, the image of the dark steps becomes darker. SYS SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS SYS
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1
2 - 52

Code 532 533 534 570 Image ClassifiItems cation Image Range correction Text Background peak /Photo Photo adjustment Text Range correction Text on original /Photo manually set on the original glass Photo Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 1 40 SYS When the value increases, the (black) <0-255> background of the image (low density SYS area) becomes harder to be printed 1 PPC 16 (black) <0-255> out. SYS 1 PPC 40 (black) <0-255> SYS Sets whether the values of the 1 PPC 22 background peak and text peak are (black) <11-14, fixed or not. Ones place is an 21-24, adjustment for automatic density 31-34, 41-44> and tens place is for manual PPC SYS density. Once they are fixed, the 1 12 (black) <11-14, range correction is performed with 21-24, standard values. The values of the 31-34, background peak and text peak affect 41-44> the reproduction of the background PPC SYS density and text density respectively. 1 22 (black) <11-14, Background peak Text peak 21-24, 1: fixed fixed 31-34, 2: varied fixed 41-44> 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied PPC - Adjusts the gradation reproduction 7 (black) automatically. 128 SYS When the value increases, the 4 PPC (black) <0-255> density in the target area becomes SYS higher. 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> H : High density area SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255>
571
572
Text
580 590-0 590-1 590-2 591-0 591-1 591-2 592-0 592-1 592-2 596-0 596-1 596-2
Image Image
Automatic gamma adjustment L Adjustment of gamma balance M (Text/Photo) H
Image
Adjustment of gamma balance (Text)
L M H
Image
Adjustment of gamma balance (Photo)
L M H
Image
Adjustment of gamma balance (PS/Smooth)
L M H

Code 597-0 597-1 597-2 598-0 598-1 598-2 599-0 599-1 599-2 604 605 606 Image Sharpness adjustment Image Adjustment of gamma balance (PCL/Detail) Image Adjustment of gamma balance (PCL/Smooth) ClassifiItems cation Image Adjustment of gamma balance (PS/Detail) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PRT 4 128 SYS When the value increases, the (black) <0-255> density in the target area becomes SYS higher. 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> H : High density area SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS 4 PRT 128 (black) <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the image 1 PPC 0 (black) <0-31> becomes sharper. When the value deSYS creases, the image becomes softer. 1 PPC 0 (black) <0-31> The smaller the value is, the less the SYS moire becomes. 1 PPC 0 (black) <0-31> * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). PPC 30 SYS Adjustment of the smudged/faint text. 1 (black) <0-255> With increasing the value, the faint text is suppressed, and with decreasing it, the smudged text is suppressed.
L M H L M H L M H Text /Photo Text Photo
648
Image
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
Text /Photo
654 655 663
Image
Adjustment of smudged/faint text
PS PCL
Image
Dot size adjustment in black printing
PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black)
664 665
Image
Upper limit in toner saving mode
PS PCL
PRT (black) PRT (black)
5 SYS When the value decreases, the width <0-9> of text becomes wider. SYS 5 <0-9> SYS Adjusts the dot size of primary 255 scanning direction in black printing. <0-255> The smaller the value is, the dot becomes smaller. 176 SYS When the value decreases, the <0-255> printing density becomes lighter. SYS 176 <0-255>
1 1 1
1 1
2 - 54

Code 667-0 667-1 667-2 667-3 667-4 693 ClassifiItems cation Image Setting beam Beam level conversion level 0/4 Beam level 1/4 Beam level 2/4 Beam level 3/4 Beam level 4/4 Image Range correction Text on original set on /Photo the RADF Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 0 M Sets the beam level for 4 divided 4 (black) <0-255> smoothing. The primary scanning M direction is divided into 4 and the dot 4 PPC 63 (black) <0-255> width is set at the 5 levels (incl. level M 0). The smaller the value is, the 4 PPC 127 (black) <0-255> smaller the primary scanning M direction of the dot becomes. 4 PPC 191 (black) <0-255> M 4 PPC 255 (black) <0-255> SYS Sets whether the values of the back- 1 PPC 22 ground peak and text peak are fixed or (black) <11-14, not. Ones place is an adjustment for 21-24 automatic density and tens place is 31-34 for manual density. Once they are 41-44> fixed, the range correction is performed PPC 12 SYS with standard values. 1 (black) <11-14, The values of the background peak 21-24, and text peak affect the reproduction 31-34, of the background density and text 41-44> density respectively. Background peak Text peak PPC 22 SYS 1: 1 fixed fixed (black) <11-14, 2: varied fixed 21-24, 3: fixed varied 31-34 4: varied varied 41-44> FAX SYS When the value increases, the image 1 125 (black) <0-255> of center value density becomes darker. FAX 20 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step 1 (black) <0-255> at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of light side becomes lighter. FAX 20 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step 1 (black) <0-255> at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image of dark side becomes darker. FAX 128 SYS When the value increases, the image 1 (black) <0-255> of the center step density becomes darker. FAX 128 SYS 1 (black) <0-255> FAX (black) FAX (black) 20 SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step <0-255> at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image 20 SYS of the light steps becomes lighter. <0-255> 1
694
Photo
695
Text
700
Image
701
Adjustment of binarized threshold (Text)
Center value Light step value Dark step value
702
710
Image
714
Density adjustPhoto ment manual density fine adjustment/Center Text /Photo value Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Light step value Photo
715
Image
719
Text /Photo

Code 720 Classification Image Items Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Dark step value Density adjustment automatic density fine adjustment Range correction on original manually set on the original glass Photo Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) SCN (black) Contents
Procedure
724
Text /Photo Photo Text /Photo Text /Photo
SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step 20 <0-255> at the density adjustment. When the value increases, the image 20 SYS of the dark steps becomes darker. <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> 12 <11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44> SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS SYS Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an adjustment for automatic density and tens place is for manual SYS density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction of the SYS background density and text density respectively. Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed SYS 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied
725 729 825
Image
1 1
1
Image
826
Text
SCN (black)
827
Photo
SCN (black)
828
Gray scale
SCN (black)
830
Image
Range correction Text on original set on /Photo the RADF
SCN (black)
831
Text
SCN (black)
832
Photo
SCN (black)
833
Gray scale
SCN (black)
SYS Sets whether the values of the background peak and text peak are fixed or not. Ones place is an adjustment for automatic density and tens place is for manual SYS density. Once they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak and text peak affect the reproduction SYS of the background density and text density respectively. Background peak Text peak 1: fixed fixed 2: varied fixed SYS 3: fixed varied 4: varied varied
2 - 56

Code 835 836 837 838 840 841 842 843 845 846 847 848 850 851 852 853 Image Image Image Image Image Sharpness adjustment Classification Image Items Range correction Text Background peak /Photo Text adjustment Photo Gray scale Text/ Photo Text Photo Gray scale Text /Photo Text Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) 56 <0-255> 64 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 48 <0-255> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 35 <0-255> Contents
Procedure
SYS When the value increases, the background of the image (low density SYS area) becomes harder to be printed out. SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value SYS decreases, the image becomes softer. SYS The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. SYS * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the background becomes darker. SYS When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter. SYS SYS
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Center Photo value
Fine adjustment of background / Center value Text Density adjust/Photo ment manual Text density fine adjustment/Light Photo step value Fine adjustment of background / Light step value (Image smoothing) Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Dark step value Text /Photo Text Photo
855 856 857 858
Image
Image
Fine adjustment of background / Dark step value (Image smoothing) Density adjustment automatic density fine adjustment Text /Photo Text Photo
SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black)
860 861 862
Image
SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (black)
SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at background adjustment. When the value increases, the background of the light steps becomes lighter. 20 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> of the dark steps becomes darker. SYS 20 <0-255> SYS 20 <0-255> SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step 20 at background adjustment. When the <0-255> value increases, the background of the dark steps becomes darker. 128 SYS When the value increases, the image <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255>
1 1 1 1
1 1 1

Code 880-0 880-1 880-2 881-0 881-1 881-2 882-0 882-1 882-2 883-0 883-1 883-2 884 ClassifiItems cation Image Adjustment of gamma balance (Text/Photo) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> L 128 SCN SYS When the value increases, the density 4 (black) <0-255> in the target area becomes higher. M SYS L : Low density area 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> M : Medium density area H SYS H : High density area 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Text) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Photo) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Adjustment of L SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> gamma balance M SYS 4 SCN 128 (Gray scale) (black) <0-255> H SYS 4 SCN 128 (black) <0-255> Image Reproduction ratio fine SYS When the value increases by 1, the 1 SCN 128 adjustment of primary reproduction ratio of primary scanning (black) <0-255> scanning direction direction increases by approx. 0.1%. Effective with the resolution other than 600 dpi. Mainte- Equipment number (serial ALL SYS When this adjustment is performed 1 nance number) display with this code, the setting code (08995) is also performed automatically. (10 digits) Image Automatic PRT SYS Adjusts the gradation reproduction 7 PS gamma for each color, Y, M, C and K. /600x600dpi (color) SYS 7 PRT adjustment PS /1200x600dpi (color) SYS 7 PRT PCL /600x600dpi (color) SYS 7 PRT PCL /1200x600dpi (color) Image Color balance L 128 SYS The target color, mode and density 4 PRT (color) <0-255> adjustment for Y area become darker as the value M SYS increases. 4 PRT 128 (PS/600x600dpi/ (color) <0-255> Smooth) L : Low density area H SYS M : Medium density area 4 PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area
976
1000 1001 1002 1003 1010-0 1010-1 1010-2
2 - 58

ClassifiItems cation 1011-0 Image Color balance adjustment for M 1011-1 (PS/600x600dpi/ Smooth) 1011-2 Code 1012-0 1012-1 1012-2 1013-0 1013-1 1013-2 1014-0 1014-1 1014-2 1015-0 1015-1 1015-2 1016-0 1016-1 1016-2 1017-0 1017-1 1017-2 1018-0 1018-1 1018-2 Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PS/1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PS/600x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PS/600x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PS/600x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PS/600x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PS/600x600dpi/ Smooth) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PS/600x600dpi/ Smooth) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> PRT 128 SYS The target color, mode and density (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PRT 128 (color) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area PRT 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PRT 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure
L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Code 1019-0 1019-1 1019-2 1020-0 1020-1 1020-2 1021-0 1021-1 1021-2 1022-0 1022-1 1022-2 1023-0 1023-1 1023-2 1024-0 1024-1 1024-2 1025-0 1025-1 1025-2 1026-0 1026-1 1026-2 Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PCL/600x600dpi/ Smooth) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PS/1200x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PS/1200x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PS/1200x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PS/1200x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PS/1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PS/1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Classification Image Items Color balance adjustment for M (PS/1200x600dpi/ Smooth) L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> Contents
Procedure
SYS The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value SYS increases. L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area H : High density area SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 60

Code 1027-0 1027-1 1027-2 1028-0 1028-1 1028-2 1029-0 1029-1 1029-2 1030-0 1030-1 1030-2 1031-0 1031-1 1031-2 1032-0 1032-1 1032-2 1033-0 1033-1 1033-2 1034-0 1034-1 1034-2 Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PCL/600x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PCL/600x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for M (PCL/600x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (PCL/600x600dpi/ Detail) Image Color balance adjustment for K (PCL/600x600dpi/ Smooth) Image Color balance adjustment for C (PCL/600x600dpi/ Smooth) Classification Image Items Color balance adjustment for M (PCL/600x600dpi/ Smooth) L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> Contents
Procedure
SYS The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value SYS increases. L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area H : High density area SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Code 1035-0 1035-1 1035-2 1036-0 1036-1 1036-2 1037-0 1037-1 1037-2 1038-0 1038-1 1038-2 1039-0 1039-1 1039-2 1040-0 1040-1 1040-2 1041-0 1041-1 1041-2 1046-0 1046-1 1047-0 1047-1 Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Image Classification Image Items Color balance adjustment for M (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Color balance adjustment for C (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Color balance adjustment for K (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Smooth) Color balance adjustment for Y (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Detail) Color balance adjustment for M (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Detail) Color balance adjustment for C (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Detail) Color balance adjustment for K (PCL/ 1200x600dpi/ Detail) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Plain paper) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 1) PS PCL PS PCL L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H L M H Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> Contents
Procedure
SYS The target color, mode and density area become darker as the value SYS increases. L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area H : High density area SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. SYS Note: When the value increases, the image SYS offsetting may occur. SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 62

Code 1048-0 1048-1 1049-0 1049-1 1050-0 1050-1 1055 1056 1057 1058 1060 Image Reproduction ratio fine adjustment of primary scanning direction Image Image Image Classification Image Items Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 2) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (Thick paper 3) Adjustment of maximum toner amount (OHP film) Upper limit in toner saving mode PS PCL PS PCL PS PCL Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) SCN (color) 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 255 <0-255> 200 <0-255> 200 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 176 <0-255> 128 <0-255> Contents
Procedure
SYS When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. SYS Note: When the value increases, the image SYS offsetting may occur. SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value decreases, the printing density becomes lighter. SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1
1065
Image
Judgment threshold for ACS
SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color)
1066
Image
Judgment threshold for ACS on original set on the RADF Fine adjustment of background Text Printed image Photo
SYS When the value increases by 1, the reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction increases by approx. 0.1%. Effective with the resolution other than 600 dpi. 70 SYS When the value increases, originals <0-255> tend to be judged as monochrome, and when the value decreases, they 70 SYS tend to be judged as color in auto<0-255> color mode. 0 <0-50> 0 <0-50> 0 <0-50> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-3> 0 <0-3> 0 <0-3> SYS Adjusts the level of background. When the value increases, the background SYS becomes more brightened. SYS SYS Adjusts the black density of the scanned image. When the value SYS increases, the black density becomes darker. SYS SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. SYS 0: sRGB 1: AppleRGB 2: ROMMRGB 3: AdobeRGB SYS
1070 1071 1072 1075 1076 1077
Image
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Image
Fine adjustment of black density
Text Printed image Photo
1080 1081 1082
Image
RGB conversion Text method selection Printed image Photo

Code Classification Image Sharpness adjustment Items Text Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> SCN (color) SCN (color) SCN (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 20 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> Contents
Procedure
1086
1087
Printed image Photo
1088
SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes SYS softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. SYS * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. SYS When the value increases, the image of the dark steps becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS SYS Sets the changing amount by 1 step at the density adjustment. SYS When the value increases, the image of the light steps becomes lighter. SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS SYS
1550 1551 1552 1553 1554 1560 1561 1562 1563 1564 1570 1571 1572 1573 1574
1580 1581 1582 1583 1584
Image
Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Center value
Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Image
Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Dark step value
Image
Density adjustment manual density fine adjustment/Light step value
Image
Density adjustment automatic density fine adjustment
2 - 64

Code 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 1630 1631 1632 1633 1642 Image Image Maximum text density adjustment Classification Image Items Adjustment of maximum toner amount Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Y M C K Automatic gamma Color/ adjustment Black Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC 255 <0-255> 249 <0-255> 237 <0-255> 237 <0-255> 249 <0-255> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> 5 <0-10> Contents
Procedure
SYS When the value decreases, the image becomes lighter. SYS Note: When the value increases, image SYS offsetting may occur. SYS SYS SYS When the value increases by 1, the maximum text density of each color SYS becomes darker. SYS SYS
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7
1643
Color
PPC
1675 1676 1688 1689 1690 1691 1692 1693 1694 1695 1696 1697
Image Image Image
Judgment threshold for ACS Judgment threshold for ACS on original set on the RADF Text Automatic offsetting adjust- /Photo Text ment for background processing (background Printed image density) Photo Map
Image
Automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing (text density)
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
SYS Automatic adjustment of gradation reproduction in the Full Color Mode (each color of Y, M, C and K) and Black Mode. SYS Automatic adjustment of gradation reproduction in the Full Color Mode (each color of Y, M, C and K). 70 SYS When the value increases, originals <0-255> tend to be judged as black, and when SYS the value decreases, they tend to be 70 <0-255> judged as color in auto-color mode. SYS When the value increases, the 128 <0-255> background becomes darker. SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS When the value increases, the text 128 <0-255> becomes darker. SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255> SYS 128 <0-255>
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Code 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 1757 Image Image Sharpness adjustment / Full Color Mode Image Manual offsetting adjustment for background processing (text density) Classification Image Items Manual offsetting adjustment for background processing (background density) Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text /Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Sharpness adjustment /Auto Color Mode (Text/Photo) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 128 <0-255> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> EUR: 0 UC: 0 JAPN: 22 <0-31> Contents
Procedure
SYS When the value increases, the background becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the text becomes darker. SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value deSYS creases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the SYS moire becomes. SYS *The default value 0 is equivalent to 16 (center value). SYS SYS When the value increases, the image becomes sharper. When the value decreases, the image becomes softer. The smaller the value is, the less the moire becomes. * The default value 0 is equivalent to 16(center value). SYS Sets the reproduction mode for highlighter for four types of one touch SYS adjustment. 0: Default SYS 1: Highlighter 1 2: Highlighter 2 SYS
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1769 1770 1771 1772 1779-0 1779-1 1779-2
Image
Setting for highlighter
Vivid Clear Warm Cool
Image
Color balance adjustment for Y (Text/Photo)
L M H
PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
0 <0-27> 0 <0-27> 0 <0-27> 0 <0-27> SYS The target color, mode and density 128 <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. 128 <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area 128 <0-255> H : High density area
1 1 1 1 4 4 4
2 - 66

ClassifiItems cation 1780-0 Image Color balance adjustment for Y 1780-1 (Text) Code 1780-2 1781-0 1781-1 1781-2 1782-0 1782-1 1782-2 1783-0 1783-1 1783-2 1784-0 1784-1 1784-2 1785-0 1785-1 1785-2 1786-0 1786-1 1786-2 1787-0 1787-1 1787-2 Image Color balance adjustment for M (Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for M (Printed image) Image Color balance adjustment for M (Text) Image Color balance adjustment for M (Text/Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (Map) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for Y (Text/Photo) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> 128 SYS The target color, mode and density PPC (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

ClassifiItems cation 1788-0 Image Color balance adjustment for M 1788-1 (Map) Code 1788-2 1789-0 1789-1 1789-2 1790-0 1790-1 1790-2 1791-0 1791-1 1791-2 1792-0 1792-1 1792-2 1793-0 1793-1 1793-2 1794-0 1794-1 1794-2 1795-0 1795-1 1795-2 Image Color balance adjustment for K (Text) Image Color balance adjustment for K (Text/Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Map) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Photo) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Printed image) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Text) Image Color balance adjustment for C (Text/Photo) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> PPC SYS The target color, mode and density 128 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS PPC 128 (color) <0-255>
Procedure
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 68

ClassifiItems cation 1796-0 Image Color balance adjustment for K 1796-1 (Printed image) Code 1796-2 1797-0 1797-1 1797-2 1798-0 1798-1 1798-2 1800-0 1800-1 1800-2 1800-3 1801-0 1801-1 1801-2 1801-3 1802-0 1802-1 1802-2 1802-3 1803-0 1803-1 1803-2 1803-3 Image Lower limit value control of laser power Image Upper limit value control of laser power Image Lower limit value control of contrast voltage Image Upper limit value control of contrast voltage Image Color balance adjustment for K (Map) Image Color balance adjustment for K (Photo) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 128 SYS The target color, mode and density 4 (color) <0-255> area become darker as the value SYS increases. 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> L : Low density area SYS M : Medium density area 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> H : High density area SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> SYS 4 PPC 128 (color) <0-255> M Sets the upper limit value of the 4 ALL 500 <0-999> contrast voltage at the image quality ALL M control. (Unit: V) 4 500 <0-999> ALL M 4 500 <0-999> ALL M 4 600 <0-999> ALL M Sets the lower limit value of the 4 120 <0-999> contrast voltage at the image quality ALL M control. (Unit: V) 4 120 <0-999> ALL M 4 120 <0-999> ALL M 4 120 <0-999> ALL M Sets the upper limit value of the laser 4 800 <0-999> power at the image quality control. ALL M (Unit: W) 4 800 <0-999> ALL M 4 800 <0-999> ALL M 4 800 <0-999> ALL M Sets the lower limit value of the laser 4 350 <0-999> power at the image quality control. ALL M (Unit: W) 4 350 <0-999> ALL M 4 350 <0-999> ALL M 4 350 <0-999>
L M H L M H L M H Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K

ClassifiItems cation 1804-0 Image Background control voltage actual 1804-1 value display Code 1804-2 1804-3 1805-0 1805-1 1805-2 1805-3 1806-0 1806-1 1806-2 1806-3 1807-0 1807-1 1807-2 1807-3 1808-0 1808-1 1808-2 1808-3 1809-0 1809-1 1809-2 1809-3 Image Drum exposure control voltage characteristic/slope factor display (main charger grid high voltage area) Image Drum exposure control voltage characteristic/offset factor display (main charger grid low voltage area) Image Drum exposure control voltage characteristic/slope factor display (main charger grid low voltage area) Image Drum surface control potential characteristic/offset factor display Image Drum surface control potential characteristic/slope factor display Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> M ALL 125 <0-999> ALL M 125 <0-999> ALL M 125 <0-999> ALL M 125 <0-999> ALL M 979 <0-999> ALL M 979 <0-999> ALL M 979 <0-999> ALL M 990 <0-999> ALL M -6 <-999-999> ALL M -6 <-999-999> ALL M -6 <-999-999> ALL M -4 <-999-999> ALL M 58 <0-999> ALL M 58 <0-999> ALL M 58 <0-999> ALL M 60 <0-999> ALL M 35 <-999-999> ALL M 35 <-999-999> ALL M 35 <-999-999> ALL M 42 <-999-999> ALL M 49 <0-999> ALL M 49 <0-999> ALL M 49 <0-999> ALL M 53 <0-999> Contents Displays the background voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V)
Procedure
Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K
10 10 10 10
Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum surface potential to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.
10 10 10 10
Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum surface potential to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.
10 10 10 10
Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum exposure voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.
10 10 10 10
Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum exposure voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.
10 10 10 10
Displays the slope factor of the approximate expression of the drum exposure voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.
10 10 10 10
2 - 70

Code 1810-0 1810-1 1810-2 1810-3 1811-0 1811-1 1811-2 1811-3 1812-0 1812-1 1812-2 1812-3 1813-0 1813-1 1813-2 1813-3 1814-0 1814-1 1814-2 1814-3 1815-0 1815-1 1815-2 1815-3 Image Contrast voltage/ control correction number of time display Image Background control voltage/lower limit actual value display Image Display of control background voltage/upper limit actual value Image Contrast voltage/ control lower limit actual value display Image Contrast voltage/ control upper limit actual value display Classification Items Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Y M C K Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 41 <-999-999> 41 <-999-999> 41 <-999-999> 47 <-999-999> 500 <0-999> 500 <0-999> 500 <0-999> 600 <0-999> 120 <0-999> 120 <0-999> 120 <0-999> 120 <0-999> 170 <0-999> 170 <0-999> 170 <0-999> 170 <0-999> 80 <0-999> 80 <0-999> 80 <0-999> 80 <0-999> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M Displays the actual number of time the contrast voltage has been corrected at the closed-loop control. Displays the lower limit value of the background voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) Displays the upper limit value of the background voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) Displays the lower limit value of the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) Displays the upper limit value of the contrast voltage when printing is operated. (Unit: V) Contents Displays the offset factor of the approximate expression of the drum exposure voltage to the main charger grid voltage at the open-loop control.
Procedure
Image Drum exposure control voltage characteristic/offset factor display (main charger grid high voltage area)
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

Code 1816-0 1816-1 1816-2 1816-3 1817 Image control Image control Image control Classification Image control Items Laser power correction/number of time display Y M C K Laser power actual value display Laser power correcting factor Laser power actual value display Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL PPC (black) 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 0 <0-255> 92 <0-255> M M M M M Displays the laser power value when copying in the Black Mode. (Bit value) Perform the correction of the setting 05-1817. (Unit: %) Displays the laser power value when printing in the Black Mode. (Bit value) Perform the correction of the setting 05-1820. (Unit: %) Corrects the 2nd transfer roller bias output of the trailing edge of paper (05-227, 229, 230, 231 and 232). Correction factor: % Contents Displays the actual number of time the laser power has been corrected at the closed-loop control.
Procedure
10 10 10 10 2
1819 1820
PPC 100 (black) <100-255> PRT 92 (black) <0-255>
M M
1 2
Image Laser power correcting PRT 100 control factor (black) <100-255> 1822-0 Transfer 2nd transfer roller Plain ALL 92 paper <0-100> bias correction of 1822-1 ALL Thick 88 trailing edge of paper 1 <0-100> paper 1822-2 ALL Thick 90 paper 2 <0-100> 1822-3 ALL Thick 90 paper 3 <0-100> 1822-4 OHP film ALL 90 <0-100> 1823-0 Transfer Display of Single ALL 145 side (black) <0-255> intermediate level 1823-1 Reverse ALL 120 of 2nd transfer side at (black) <0-255> roller bias actual duplexing value of trailing 1823-2 ALL 139 Single edge of paper side (color) <0-255> (Plain paper) 1823-3 Reverse ALL 118 side at (color) <0-255> duplexing 1825-0 Transfer Display of ALL 138 Single side (black) <0-255> intermediate level 1825-1 Reverse ALL 112 of 2nd transfer side at (black) <0-255> roller bias actual duplexing value of trailing 1825-2 ALL 123 Single edge of paper side (color) <0-255> (Thick paper 1) 1825-3 Reverse ALL 112 side at (color) <0-255> duplexing
1821
M M M M M M M M
1 14 14 14 14 14
Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. (The value corrected in 05-1822 is displayed.)
10 10
M M
10 10
M M
10 10
M M
10 10
2 - 72

Code Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) ALL ALL ALL 145 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 145 <0-255> 139 <0-255> 118 <0-255> 112 <0-255> 40 <0-100> 60 <0-100> 40 <0-100> 190 <0-255> 180 <0-255> 200 <0-255> M M M M M M M M M M Displays the value of 1st transfer roller bias at deceleration when the actual printing is operated. (The value corrected in 05-1829 is displayed.) Corrects the 1st transfer roller bias output. Correction factor: % Contents Displays the value of 2nd transfer roller bias when the actual printing is operated. (The value corrected in 05-1822 is displayed.)
Procedure
1826-0 Transfer Display of intermediate level of 2nd transfer roller bias 1826-1 actual value of trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 2) 1827-0 Transfer Display of intermediate level of 2nd transfer roller bias 1827-1 actual value of trailing edge of paper (Thick paper 3) 1828-0 Transfer Display of intermediate level of 2nd transfer roller bias 1828-1 actual value of trailing edge of paper (OHP film) 1829-0 Transfer 1st transfer roller Thick bias correction at paper 2 1829-1 Thick deceleration paper 3 1829-2 OHP film 1831
10 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 14 2
1832
1833
Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual ALL value display at deceleration (black) (Thick paper 2) Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual ALL value display at deceleration (black) (Thick paper 3) Transfer 1st transfer roller bias actual ALL value display at deceleration (black) (OHP film)
2.2.5 Setting mode (08)

The items in the setting code list can be set or changed in this setting mode (08).
Procedure 1
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] *[FUNCTION CLEAR] Sets or changes value [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 2
[0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed [POWER]OFF/ON (Exit)
[START]
(
Procedure 3
[0][8] [POWER]
[Digital key] (Code)
[START]
[ENTER] or (Automatic setting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[CANCEL] or [CLEAR]
Procedure 4
[CANCEL] [START] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [POWER] [ENTER] [FAX] or OFF/ON [START] [Digital key] [INTERRUPT] (Exit) [START] * [FUNCTION CLEAR] (Stores value (Test copy) Sets or in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) * Press [FUNCTION CLEAR] to enter minus (-).
Procedure 5
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [ENTER] [Digital key] [POWER] OFF/ON or *[HELP] (Exit) [INTERRUPT] Sets or (Stores value in RAM) changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value) *Press [HELP] to enter - .
(
2 - 74
Procedure 7
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [Digital key] (Setting) [ENTER] or (HDD formatting) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
[START]
Procedure 9
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Select button] [ENTER] [POWER] OFF/ON or (Exit) [INTERRUPT] (Stores value in RAM)
Procedure 10
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (1st setting) [START] [Digital key] (2nd setting) [ENTER] [POWER] or OFF/ON [INTERRUPT] (Exit) (Stores value in RAM) [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
Procedure 11 and 12
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code)
[Digital key] or [POWER] OFF/ON [ENTER] [START] [Software keyboard] *2(Stores value in RAM) (Exit) *1 [MONITOR/PAUSE] Sets or changes value [CLEAR] (Corrects value)
*1. Press [MONITOR/PAUSE] to enter "-", when entering telephone number. *2. The data are stored in SYS-RAM in procedure 11 and stored in NIC-RAM in procedure 12.
Procedure 14
[CANCEL] [0][8] [POWER] [Digital key] (Code) [START] [Digital key] (Sub-code) [START] [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] Adjustment value cannot be changed [CLEAR] (Corrects value) November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 2 - 75 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
Notes: 1. The digit after the hyphen in Code of the following table is a sub code. 2. In RAM, the NVRAM of the board in which the data of each code is stored is indicated. M stands for the LGC board, SYS stands for the SYS board and NIC stands for the NIC board.
Setting mode (08)
Code 200 ClassifiItems cation General Date and time setting Default Func- <Acceptable ProceRAM Contents tion dure value> - Year/month/date/day/hour/minute/ ALL 5 <13 digits> second Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48 Day - 0 is for Sunday. Proceeds Monday through Saturday from 1 to 6. ALL EUR: 0 M 0: EUR 1: UC 1 UC: 1 2: JPN 3: Other JPN: 2 <0-3> ALL M 0: No external counter 1 0 1: Coin controller <0-3> 2: Copy key card 3: Key copy counter ALL 0 M 0: For factory shipment 1: For line 1 <0-1> *Field: 0 must be selected ALL SYS Timer to return the equipment to the 1 3 <0-10> default settings when the [START] button is not pressed after the function and the mode are set 0: Not cleared 1 to 10: Set number x 15 sec. ALL 11 SYS Timer to automatically switch to the 1 <0, 6-15> energy saving mode when the equipment has not been used 0: Invalid 6: 3min. 7: 4min. 8: 5min. 9: 7min. 10: 10min. 11: 15min. 12: 20min. 13: 30min. 14: 45min. 15: 60min. ALL Refer to SYS Timer to enter the Sleep Mode 1 content automatically when the equipment <0-20> has not been used 0: 3min. 1: 5min. 2: 10min. 3: 15min. 4: 20min. 5: 25min. 6: 30min. 7: 40min. 8: 50min. 9: 60min. 10: 70min. 11: 80min. 12: 90min. 13: 100min. 14: 110min. 15: 120min. 16: 150min. 17: 180min. 18: 210min. 19: 240min. 20: Not used <Default value> e-STUDIO3511: 9 e-STUDIO4511: 12 ALL 0 SYS 0: Black letter on white background 1 <0-1> 1: White letter on black background
201
General Destination selection
202
User Counter installed externally interface
203 204
General Line adjustment mode User Auto-clear timer setting interface
205
User Auto power save mode timer interface setting
206
User Auto Shut Off Mode timer interface setting (Sleep Mode)
207
User Highlighting display on LCD interface
2 - 76
Setting mode (08)

Code 209 ClassifiItems cation User Default setting of filing interface format when E-mailing (common in all color modes) Paper Paper size (A6-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction User Default setting of filing interface format when storing files (at color/ACS modes) User Default setting of filing interface format when storing files (at black mode) User Language displayed at interface power-ON Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> SYS 0:TIFF (Multi) ALL 0 1:PDF (color) <0-1> 148/105 M <148-432/ 105-297> SCN SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1 (color) 3:TIFF (Single) <0-3> ALL (black) ALL 0 <0-3> EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6> EUR: 0 UC: 0 JPN: 5 <0-6> 0 <0-1> SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 3:TIFF (Single) ALL
Procedure
210
10
218
1: PDF 2: JPG
219
1: PDF
2: JPG
220
221
User Language selection in UI interface data at Web power ON
ALL
223
Mainte- Switching of output pages/ nance driving counts at PM
ALL
224 225
Paper Paper size for bypass feed feeding Paper Paper size for upper drawer feeding Paper Paper size for lower drawer feeding Paper Paper size for PFP upper feeding drawer Paper Paper size for PFP lower feeding drawer Paper Paper size (A3) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (A4-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (A5-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction
ALL ALL
226
ALL
227
ALL
228
ALL
229
ALL
230
ALL
231
ALL
SYS 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 SYS 0: Language 1 1: Language 2 2: Language 3 3: Language 4 4: Language 5 5: Language 6 6: Language 7 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. (The message is displayed on the LCD screen.) 0: PM counter (The number of output pages is set at 08-251.) 1: PM time counter (The timing is set at 08-375.) UNDEF SYS Press the button on the LCD to select the size. EUR:A4 M Press the button on the LCD to UC:LT select the size. JPN:A4 EUR:A3 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. UC:LD JPN:A3 EUR: A4-R M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. UC: LT-R JPN: A4-R EUR:A4 M Press the button on the LCD to select the size. UC:LG JPN:B4 M 420/297 <182-432/ 140-297> M 297/210 <182-432/ 140-297> M 210/148 <182-432/ 140-297>
9 9
10
10
10
Setting mode (08)

Code 232 ClassifiItems cation Paper Paper size (B4) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (B5-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (LT-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (LD) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (LG) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (ST-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (COMPUTER) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (FOLIO) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (13LG) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (8.5X8.5) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (Non-standard) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 1 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (8K) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (16K-R) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (A3-wide) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 2 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> ALL 364/257 M <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 257/182 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 279/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 432/279 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 356/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 216/140 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 356/257 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 330/210 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 330/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 216/216 <182-432/ 140-297> ALL M 432/279 <148-432/ 105-297> ALL 148/100 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into <148-432/ [MEMORY 1]. 100-297> ALL 390/270 M <182-432/ 140-297> M 270/195 <182-432/ 140-297> M 457/305 <182-457/ 140-305> 148/100 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass feed (non-standard type) into <148-432/ [MEMORY 2]. 100-297>
Procedure
10
233
10
234
10
235
10
236
10
237
10
238
10
239
10
240
10
241
10
242
10
243
10
244
10
245
ALL
10
246
ALL
10
247
ALL
10
2 - 78
Setting mode (08)

Code 248 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL Contents
Procedure
249
250
Paper Memory 3 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Paper Memory 4 feeding Paper size (bypass feeding/ non-standard type) feeding/widthwise direction Mainte- Service technician nance telephone number Mainte- Setting value of PM counter nance
148/100 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass <148-432/ feed (non-standard type) into 100-297> [MEMORY 3]. 148/100 SYS Registers the paper size of bypass <148-432/ feed (non-standard type) into 100-297> [MEMORY 4]. 0 SYS A telephone number can be entered <14 digits> up to 14 digits. Use the [MONITOR/ PAUSE] button to enter a hyphen(-). Refer to M <Default> content e-STUDIO3511 <8 digits> UC, EUR: 120000 JPN: 0 e-STUDIO4511 UC, EUR: 150000 JPN: 0 0 M Counts up when the registration <8 digits> sensor is ON. SYS Displays the latest 20 errors data SYS Sets whether the data is printed on the different but similar size paper or not when the paper of corresponding size is not available. 0: Valid (The data is printed on A4/A3 when LT/LD is selected or vice versa.) 1: Invalid (The message to use the selected paper size is displayed.) 0 M 0: Automatic <0-4> 1: PFP single-drawer type installed 2: PFP dual-drawer type installed 3: LCF installed 4: Not installed EUR:A4 M Press the icon on the LCD to select UC:LT the size. JPN:A4 - 1: Electrical counter -> Backup counter 2: Backup counter -> Electrical counter <1-2> ( Page 2-144) 1 SYS Sets whether the FSMS connection <0-2> is accepted or not. 0: Prohibited 1: Accepted (serial connection only) 2: Accepted (both serial and USB connections) 14 SYS 0: No limits 1 to 30: 1 to 30 days <0-30> 1 <0-1>
10
ALL
10
ALL
11
251
ALL
252 253 254
Mainte- Current value of PM counter nance Display/0 clearing Mainte- Error history display nance Paper LT A4/LD A3 feeding
ALL ALL PRT
1 2 1
255
Paper PFP/LCF installation feeding
ALL
256
Paper Paper size setting /LCF feeding Counter Counter copy
ALL
257
ALL
258
Mainte- FSMS acceptance nance
ALL
259
Network Storage period at trail and private
PRT
Setting mode (08)

Code 260 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL Contents
Procedure
Network Web data retention period
261
Network Web data in Electronic Filing retention period
ALL
262
Network TWAIN data retention period
ALL
263 264 265 266 267
Network Administrator's password (Maximum 6 digits) Network File retention period Network Maximum data capacity at E-mailing Network Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX Electronic Full guarantee of documents filing in Electronic Filing when HDD is full
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
268
User Binarizing level selection interface (When judging as black in the ACS Mode)
ALL
270
Electronic Default setting of user box filing retention period
ALL
271
General Warning display of the HDD capacity to be filled
ALL
10 SYS When a certain period of time has <3 digits> passed without operation after accessing TopAccess, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) 10 SYS When a certain period of time has <3 digits> passed without operation after accessing Electronic Filing, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) 10 SYS When a certain period of time has <3 digits> passed without operation after accessing TWAIN and File Downloader, the data being registered is automatically reset. This period is set at this code. (Unit: Minute) 123456 SYS Able to enter within 6 digits (Figures <6 digits> only) SYS 0: No limits 30 <0-999> 1 to 999: 1 to 999 days SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 30 <2-30> SYS 2 to 30 M bytes 30 <2-30> SYS Sets the file retention level when 0 editing the files in the Electronic <0-1> Filing (at CutDoc/SaveDoc command execution). 0: Not full retained 1: Fully retained - Retains the source file until CutDoc/ SaveDoc command is completed. * The file is not deleted even if the HDD has become full during the execution of command when 1 is set. 3 SYS 0: Step -2 1: Step -1 <1-5> 2: Step 0 (center) 3: Step 1 4: Step 2 * The binarizing level of each step is set at 08-609. 0 SYS Sets the data retention period when <0-999> creating a user box. 0: Not deleted 1 to 999: Retention period (Unit: Day) 90 SYS Sets the percentage of the HDD <0-100> capacity filled which warning is displayed 0 to 100: 0 to 100 %
11 1 1 1 1
2 - 80
Setting mode (08)

Code 272 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 3 <0-99> 0 <0-6> Contents
Procedure
Scanning Notification setting of E-mail saving time limit Scanning Default setting of partial size when transmitting E-mail
273
ALL
274
FAX
Default setting of page by page when transmitting Internet FAX
ALL
0 <0-4>
275 276
Default setting of encode method User Default setting of density interface adjustment (Black)
FAX
FAX SCN (black)
0 <0-3> 0 <0-11>
277
278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286
User Default setting of interface background adjustment (Full Color) User Default setting of color interface mode User Default setting of resolution interface (Full Color) User Default setting of resolution interface (Gray Scale) User Default setting of resolution interface (Black) User Default setting of original interface mode (Full Color) User Default setting of original interface mode (Black) User Default setting of scanning interface mode User Default setting of rotation interface mode User Default setting of original interface paper size
SCN (color) SCN SCN (color) SCN (black) SCN (black) SCN (color) SCN (black) SCN SCN ALL
3 <1-5> 0 <0-4> 2 <0-3> 2 <0-4> 1 <0-4> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-3> 0 <0-19>
SYS Sets the days left the notification of E-mail saving time limit appears 0 to 99: 0 to 99 days SYS Sets the default value for the partial size of E-mail to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 (Unit: KB) SYS Sets the default value for the page by page of Internet FAX to be transmitted when creating a template. 0: Not divided 1: 64 2: 128 3: 256 4: 512 5: 1024 6: 2048 (Unit: KB) SYS 0: No partitioning 1: 256 2: 512 3: 1024 4: 2048 SYS 0: Automatic density 1: Step -5 2: Step -4 3: Step -3 4: Step -2 5: Step -1 6: Step 0 (center) 7: Step +1 8: Step +2 9: Step +3 10: Step +4 11: Step +5 (1 to 11: Manual density) SYS 1: Step -2 2: Step -1 3: Step 0 (center) 4: Step +1 5: Step +2 SYS 0: Black 1: Gray Scale 2: Unused 3: Full Color 4: Auto Color SYS 0: 100 dpi 1: 150 dpi 2: 200 dpi 3: 300dpi SYS 0: 100 dpi 1: 150 dpi 2: 200 dpi 3: 300dpi 4: 400 dpi SYS 0: 150 dpi 1: 200 dpi 2: 300 dpi 3: 400dpi 4: 600 dpi SYS 0: Text 1: Photo 2: Printed Image SYS 0: Text 1: Text/Photo 2: Photo 2: Tablet
1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
SYS 0: Single 1: Book
287
Mainte- ON/OFF setting of Service nance Notification Function
ALL
0 <0-1>
SYS 0: 0 degree 1: 90 degrees 2: 180 degrees 3: 270 degrees SYS 0: Automatic 1: A3 2: A4 3: LD 4: LT 5: A4-R 6: A5-R 7: LT-R 8: LG 9: B4 10: B5 11: ST-R 12: COMP 13: B5-R 14: FOLIO 15: 13"LG 16: 8.5"x 8.5" 18: A6-R 19: Size mixed SYS 0: OFF 1: ON
Setting mode (08)

Code 288 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 12 <1-24> 3 <1-5> 1 <0-1> EUR: 6 UC: 2 JPN: 6 <0 -13> 0 <0-4> 0 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-2> 1200 <50012800> Contents
Procedure
General Searching interval of deleting expired files User Default setting of backinterface ground adjustment (Gray Scale) Network Raw printing job (Duplex) Network Raw printing job (Paper size)
289
ALL
290 291
PRT PRT
SYS Sets the search interval of expired files. Deletes if expired file is found. (Unit: Hour) SYS 1: Step -2 2: Step -1 3: Step 0 (center) 4: Step +1 5: Step +2 SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid SYS 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMP 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 7: A5 8: A6 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13 "LG 13: 8.5" x 8.5" SYS 0: Plain paper 1: Thick paper 1 2: Thick paper 2 3: Thick paper 3 4: OHP film SYS 0: Portrait 1: Landscape SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid
1 1
292
Network Raw printing job (Paper type) Network Raw printing job (Paper direction) Network Raw printing job (Staple) Network Raw printing job (Exit tray) Network Raw printing job (Number of form lines)
PRT
293 294 295 296
PRT PRT PRT PRT
1 1 1 1
297
Network Raw printing job (PCL font pitch) Network Raw printing job (PCL font size)
PRT
298
PRT
Network Raw printing job (PCL font number) 300 User Maximum number of copy interface volume (MAX9) A3 301-0 Counter Number of output pages at Full 301-1 Counter Color Mode in A4 Copier Function 301-2 Counter A5 301-3 301-4 301-5 301-6 301-7 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD
299
PRT PPC PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color)
SYS 0: Inner tray 1: Finisher tray 1 2: Finisher tray 2 SYS Sets the number of form lines from 5 to 128. (A hundredfold of the number of form lines is defined as the setting value.) 1000 SYS Sets the font pitch from 0.44 to <44-9999> 99.99. (A hundredfold of the font pitch is defined as the setting value.) 1200 SYS Sets the font size from 4 to 999.75. <400(A hundredfold of the font size is 99975> defined as the setting value.) SYS Sets the PCL font number. 0 <0-79> SYS 0: 999 1: 99 2: 9 0 <0-2> SYS Counts the output pages at the Full 0 <8 digits> Color Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the 0 <8 digits> setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the 0 <8 digits> definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits> SYS 0 <8 digits>
1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 82
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation 301-8 Counter Number of output pages at Full 301-9 Counter Color Mode in Copier Function 301-10 Counter Code 301-11 Counter 301-12 Counter 301-13 Counter 301-14 Counter 301-15 Counter 301-16 Counter 302 User interface Function LG PPC (color) LT PPC (color) ST PPC (color) COMP PPC (color) 13"LG PPC (color) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (color) 16K PPC (color) 8K PPC (color) Others PPC (color) Original counter display ALL Default
<Acceptable value>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
303-0 303-1 303-2 303-3 303-4 303-5 303-6 303-7 303-8 303-9
Counter Number of output pages at Full Counter Color Mode in Printer Function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter
A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13"LG
303-10 Counter 303-11 Counter 303-12 Counter
PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color)
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> EUR: 2 UC: 0 JPN: 0 <0, 2> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS Counts the output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Sets whether the original counter is displayed or not. 0: Not displayed 2: Displayed SYS Counts the output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Setting mode (08)

Code Classification Function Number of output 8.5"x8.5" PRT (color) pages at Full 16K PRT Color Mode in (color) Printer Function 8K PRT (color) Others PRT (color) Number of output A3 PPC (color) pages at Twin A4 PPC Color Mode in (color) Copier Function A5 PPC (color) A6 PPC (color) B4 PPC (color) B5 PPC (color) FOLIO PPC (color) LD PPC (color) LG PPC (color) LT PPC (color) ST PPC (color) COMP PPC (color) 13"LG PPC (color) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (color) 16K PPC (color) 8K PPC (color) Others PPC (color) Number of output A3 PPC (black) pages at Black A4 PPC Mode in Copier (black) Function A5 PPC (black) A6 PPC (black) B4 PPC (black) Items Default
<Acceptable value>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
303-13 Counter 303-14 Counter 303-15 Counter 303-16 Counter 304-0 304-1 304-2 304-3 304-4 304-5 304-6 304-7 304-8 304-9 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter
304-10 Counter 304-11 Counter 304-12 Counter 304-13 Counter 304-14 Counter 304-15 Counter 304-16 Counter 305-0 305-1 305-2 305-3 305-4 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS Counts the output pages at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS Counts the output pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 84
Setting mode (08)

Code 305-5 305-6 305-7 305-8 305-9 Classification Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Function Number of output PPC B5 (black) pages at Black FOLIO PPC Mode in Copier (black) Function LD PPC (black) LG PPC (black) LT PPC (black) ST PPC (black) COMP PPC (black) 13"LG PPC (black) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (black) 16K PPC (black) 8K PPC (black) Others PPC (black) Number of output A3 PRT (black) pages at Black A4 PRT Mode in Printer (black) Function A5 PRT (black) A6 PRT (black) B4 PRT (black) B5 PRT (black) FOLIO PRT (black) LD PRT (black) LG PRT (black) LT PRT (black) ST PRT (black) COMP PRT (black) 13"LG PRT (black) Items Default
<Acceptable value>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
305-10 Counter 305-11 Counter 305-12 Counter 305-13 Counter 305-14 Counter 305-15 Counter 305-16 Counter 306-0 306-1 306-2 306-3 306-4 306-5 306-6 306-7 306-8 306-9 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Printer Function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Setting mode (08)

Code Classification Function Number of output 8.5"x8.5" PRT (black) pages at Black 16K PRT Mode in Printer (black) Function 8K PRT (black) Others PRT (black) Number of output A3 PRT (black) pages at List Print A4 PRT Mode (black) A5 PRT (black) A6 PRT (black) B4 PRT (black) B5 PRT (black) FOLIO PRT (black) LD PRT (black) LG PRT (black) LT PRT (black) ST PRT (black) COMP PRT (black) 13"LG PRT (black) 8.5"x8.5" PRT (black) 16K PRT (black) 8K PRT (black) Others PRT (black) Number of output A3 FAX pages in FAX A4 Function FAX Items A5 A6 B4 FAX FAX FAX Default
<Acceptable value>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS Counts the output pages at the Black Mode in the Printer Function for each SYS paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS Counts the output pages at the List Print Mode for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the output pages in the FAX Function for each paper size accordSYS ing to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the SYS definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 86
Setting mode (08)

Code 308-5 308-6 308-7 308-8 308-9 Classification Items B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13"LG 8.5"x8.5" 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13"LG Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> Contents
Procedure
Counter Number of output pages in FAX Counter Function Counter Counter Counter
SYS Counts the output pages in the FAX Function for each paper size accordSYS ing to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) and the SYS definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
308-10 Counter 308-11 Counter 308-12 Counter 308-13 Counter 308-14 Counter 308-15 Counter 308-16 Counter 309-0 309-1 309-2 309-3 309-4 309-5 309-6 309-7 309-8 309-9 Counter Number of scanning pages at Counter Full Color Mode in Copier Function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter
Setting mode (08)

Code Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure
8.5"x8.5" PPC 0 309-13 Counter Number of (color) <8 digits> scanning pages at 16K PPC 0 309-14 Counter Full Color Mode in (color) <8 digits> Copier Function 8K PPC 0 309-15 Counter (color) <8 digits> Others PPC 0 309-16 Counter (color) <8 digits> A3 SCN 0 310-0 Counter Number of (color) <8 digits> scanning pages at A4 SCN 0 310-1 Counter Full Color Mode in (color) <8 digits> Scanning Function A5 SCN 0 310-2 Counter (color) <8 digits> A6 SCN 0 310-3 Counter (color) <8 digits> B4 SCN 0 310-4 Counter (color) <8 digits> B5 SCN 0 310-5 Counter (color) <8 digits> FOLIO SCN 0 310-6 Counter (color) <8 digits> LD SCN 0 310-7 Counter (color) <8 digits> LG SCN 0 310-8 Counter (color) <8 digits> LT SCN 0 310-9 Counter (color) <8 digits> ST SCN 0 310-10 Counter (color) <8 digits> COMP SCN 0 310-11 Counter (color) <8 digits> 13"LG SCN 0 310-12 Counter (color) <8 digits> 8.5"x8.5" SCN 0 310-13 Counter (color) <8 digits> 16K SCN 0 310-14 Counter (color) <8 digits> 8K SCN 0 310-15 Counter (color) <8 digits> Others SCN 0 310-16 Counter (color) <8 digits> A3 PPC 0 311-0 Counter Number of (color) <8 digits> scanning pages at A4 PPC 0 311-1 Counter Twin Color Mode (color) <8 digits> in Copier Function A5 PPC 0 311-2 Counter (color) <8 digits> A6 PPC 0 311-3 Counter (color) <8 digits> B4 PPC 0 311-4 Counter (color) <8 digits>
SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function for SYS each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized SYS paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper (08-353). SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Full Color Mode in the Scanning SYS Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting SYS of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier SYS Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting SYS of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 88
Setting mode (08)

Code 311-5 311-6 311-7 311-8 311-9 Classification Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Function PPC Number of B5 (color) scanning pages at FOLIO PPC Twin Color Mode (color) in Copier Function LD PPC (color) LG PPC (color) PPC LT (color) PPC ST (color) PPC COMP (color) PPC 13"LG (color) 8.5"x8.5" PPC (color) PPC 16K (color) PPC 8K (color) PPC Others (color) Number of PPC A3 (black) scanning pages at PPC Black Mode in A4 (black) Copier Function PPC A5 (black) PPC A6 (black) PPC B4 (black) PPC B5 (black) PPC FOLIO (black) PPC LD (black) PPC LG (black) PPC LT (black) PPC ST (black) PPC COMP (black) PPC 13"LG (black) Items Default
<Acceptable value>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
311-10 Counter 311-11 Counter 311-12 Counter 311-13 Counter 311-14 Counter 311-15 Counter 311-16 Counter 312-0 312-1 312-2 312-3 312-4 312-5 312-6 312-7 312-8 312-9 Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier SYS Function for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting SYS of large-sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Setting mode (08)

Code Classification Function Number of 8.5"x8.5" PPC (black) scanning pages at PPC Black Mode in 16K (black) Copier Function PPC 8K (black) PPC Others (black) Number of SCN A3 (black) scanning pages in SCN Scanning Function A4 (black) SCN A5 (black) SCN A6 (black) SCN B4 (black) SCN B5 (black) SCN FOLIO (black) SCN LD (black) SCN LG (black) SCN LT (black) SCN ST (black) SCN COMP (black) SCN 13"LG (black) 8.5"x8.5" SCN (black) SCN 16K (black) SCN 8K (black) SCN Others (black) Number of FAX A3 scanning pages in FAX FAX Function A4 Items A5 A6 B4 FAX FAX FAX Default
<Acceptable value>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS Counts the scanning pages at the Black Mode in the Scanning Function SYS for each paper size according to the setting for the count setting of largeSYS sized paper (08-352) and the definition setting of large-sized paper SYS (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the scanning pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
2 - 90
Setting mode (08)

Code 314-5 314-6 314-7 314-8 314-9 Classification Items B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13"LG 8.5"x8.5" 16K 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13"LG Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> Contents
Procedure
Counter Number of scanning pages in Counter FAX Function Counter Counter Counter
SYS Counts the scanning pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
314-10 Counter 314-11 Counter 314-12 Counter 314-13 Counter 314-14 Counter 314-15 Counter 314-16 Counter 315-0 315-1 315-2 315-3 315-4 315-5 315-6 315-7 315-8 315-9 Counter Number of transmitted pages Counter in FAX Function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter
Setting mode (08)

Code Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX FAX 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> Contents
Procedure
315-13 Counter Number of 8.5"x8.5" transmitted pages 315-14 Counter in FAX Function 16K 315-15 Counter 315-16 Counter 316-0 316-1 316-2 316-3 316-4 316-5 316-6 316-7 316-8 316-9 Counter Counter Number of received pages in Counter FAX Function Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter Counter 8K Others A3 A4 A5 A6 B4 B5 FOLIO LD LG LT ST COMP 13"LG 8.5"x8.5" 16K 8K Others
SYS Counts the transmitted pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS Counts the received pages in the FAX Function for each paper size SYS according to the setting for the count setting of large-sized paper (08-352) SYS and the definition setting of largesized paper (08-353). SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS SYS
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
316-10 Counter 316-11 Counter 316-12 Counter 316-13 Counter 316-14 Counter 316-15 Counter 316-16 Counter
2 - 92
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation 317-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Full Color Mode in Copier Function 317-1 Counter Code Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 0 14 SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) <8 digits> at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/ small). PPC 0 14 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 14 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) <8 digits> at the Full Color Mode in the Printer Function according to its size (large/ small). PRT 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PRT 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) <8 digits> at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/ small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the Black Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/ small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (black) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (black) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. 14
Large
Small
317-2 Counter
Total
318-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Full Color Mode in Printer Function 318-1 Counter
Large
Small
14
318-2 Counter
Total
14
319-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Twin Color Mode in Copier Function 319-1 Counter
Large
14
Small
14
319-2 Counter
Total
14
320-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Black Mode in Copier Function 320-1 Counter
Large
14
Small
14
320-2 Counter
Total
14
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation 321-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at Black Mode in Printer Function 321-1 Counter Code Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PRT 0 14 SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the Black Mode in the Printer Function according to its size (large/ small). PRT 0 14 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (black) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PRT 0 14 than set as large-sized paper SYS (black) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. PRT 0 SYS Counts the number of output pages (black) <8 digits> at the List Print Mode Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of PRT 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper PRT 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes. 14
Large
Small
321-2 Counter
Total
322-0 Counter Display of number of output pages at List Print Mode 322-1 Counter
Large
Small
14
322-2 Counter
Total
14
323-0 Counter Display of number of output pages in FAX Function 323-1 Counter
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
323-2 Counter
Total
FAX
0 SYS Counts the number of output pages <8 digits> in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of <8 digits> all paper sizes.
14
14
14
324-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at Full Color Mode in Copier 324-1 Counter Function
Large
Small
324-2 Counter
Total
PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the Full Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes.
14
14
14
2 - 94
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation 325-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at Full Color Mode in Scanning 325-1 Counter Function Code Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> SCN 0 14 SYS Counts the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the Full Color Mode in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). SCN 0 14 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other SCN 0 14 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of scanning (color) <8 digits> pages at the Twin Color Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (color) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (color) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. PPC 0 SYS Counts the number of scanning (black) <8 digits> pages at the Black Mode in the Copier Function according to its size (large/small). PPC 0 SYS Large: Number of output pages of (black) <8 digits> large-sized paper defined at 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other PPC 0 than set as large-sized paper SYS (black) <8 digits> Total: Total number output pages of all paper sizes. FAX 0 SYS Counts the number of scanning <8 digits> pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of <8 digits> all paper sizes. 14
Large
Small
325-2 Counter
Total
326-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at Twin Color Mode in Copier 326-1 Counter Function
Large
Small
14
326-2 Counter
Total
14
327-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages at Black Mode in Copier Function 327-1 Counter
Large
14
Small
14
327-2 Counter
Total
14
328-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages in FAX Function 328-1 Counter
Large
14
Small
FAX
14
328-2 Counter
Total
FAX
14
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation 329-0 Counter Display of number of scanning pages in Scanning Function 329-1 Counter Code Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 0 SCN 14 SYS Counts the number of scanning (black) <8 digits> pages in the Scanning Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of SCN 0 14 large-sized paper defined at SYS (black) <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper SCN 0 14 SYS Total: Total number output pages of (black) <8 digits> all paper sizes.
Large
Small
329-2 Counter
Total
330-0 Counter Display of number of transmitted pages in FAX Function 330-1 Counter
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
330-2 Counter
Total
FAX
0 SYS Counts the number of transmitted <8 digits> pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of <8 digits> all paper sizes.
14
14
14
331
User Default setting of screen interface
ALL
332-0 Counter Display of number of received pages in FAX Function 332-1 Counter
Large
FAX
Small
FAX
332-2 Counter
Total
FAX
SYS Sets the screen to be displayed after the auto-clear time has passed or it has recovered from the energy saving mode or sleep mode. 0: Copier 1: Fax 2: Scan 3: Box 0 SYS Counts the number of received <8 digits> pages in the FAX Function according to its size (large/small). Large: Number of output pages of 0 large-sized paper defined at SYS <8 digits> 08-353 Small: Number of output pages other than set as large-sized paper 0 SYS Total: Total number output pages of <8 digits> all paper sizes.
0 <0-3>
14
14
14
333-0 333-1 333-2
Counter Display of total number of pages Counter at Full Color Mode Counter
Large Small Total
ALL 0 SYS Displays the total number of pages at (color) <8 digits> Full Color Mode in the Copier/Printer/ ALL 0 SYS Scanning Functions. (color) <8 digits> ALL 0 SYS (color) <8 digits>
14 14 14
2 - 96
Setting mode (08)

Code 334-0 334-1 334-2 335-0 335-1 335-2 346 347 348 349 352 ClassifiItems cation Counter Display of total number of pages Counter at Twin Color Mode Counter Counter Display of total number of pages Counter at Black Mode Counter Function ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL (black) ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL Default
<Acceptable value>
RAM
Contents
Procedure
Large Small Total Large Small Total
353
356 357 358 359 360 370 372 374 375
Counter Count setting of large-sized paper (PM) Counter Definition setting of largesized paper (PM) Counter Count setting of thick paper (PM) Counter Count setting of OHP film (PM) Counter Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter Definition setting of largesized paper (Fee charging system counter) Counter Counter for upper drawer feeding Counter Counter for lower drawer feeding Counter Counter for bypass feeding Counter Counter for LCF feeding Counter Counter for PFP upper drawer feeding Counter Counter for PFP lower drawer feeding Counter Counter for ADU Counter Counter for RADF Mainte- Setting value of PM time nance counter display/0 clearing
ALL
0 SYS Displays the total number of pages at <8 digits> Twin Color Mode in the Copier 0 SYS Function. <8 digits> 0 SYS <8 digits> M Displays the total number of pages at 1 <0-1> Black Mode in the Copier/Printer/ M Scanning/FAX Functions. 1 <0-1> M 1 <0-1> M 0: Counted as 1 1 <0-1> 1: Counted as 2 M 0: A3/LD 1 <0-1> 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 1 <0-1> M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 1 <0-1> M 0: Counted as 1 1: Counted as 2 JPN: 0 2: Counted as 1 (Mechanical counter OTHER: 1 <0-2> is double counter) M 0: A3/LD 0 <0-1> 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP 0 M Counts the number of sheets fed <8 digits> from upper drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from lower drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from bypass feed M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from LCF M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from PFP upper drawer M Counts the number of sheets fed 0 <8 digits> from PFP lower drawer M Counts the number of output pages 0 <8 digits> of duplex printing. SYS Counts the number of originals fed 0 <8 digits> from RADF M <Default> Refer to content e-STUDIO3511 <8 digits> JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 315,000 e-STUDIO4511 JPN: 0 UC, EUR: 315,000 0 M Counts the drum driving time (main <8 digits> motor ON).
14 14 14 14 14 14 1 1 1 1 1
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
376
Mainte- Current value of PM time nance counter
ALL
Setting mode (08)

Code 381 ClassifiItems cation Counter Setting for counter installed externally Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 1 ALL 1 M Selects the job to count up for the <0-7> external counter. 0: Not selected 1: Copier 2: FAX 3: Copier/FAX 4: Printer 5: Copier/Printer 6: Printer/FAX 7: Copier/Printer/FAX PPC 0 SYS The number of error is reset at HDD 2 <8 digits> formatting. FAX SYS 2 0 <8 digits> SCN SYS 2 0 <8 digits> PRT SYS 2 0 <8 digits> ALL M Counts the number of time the 2 0 polygonal motor has switched its <8 digits> rotational speed between normal rotation and standby rotation. ALL 0 M Accumulates the time the polygonal 2 <8 digits> motor has rotated at normal rotation. ALL 0 <0-19> M 0: No error 1: C410 (Once) 2: C410 (consecutively occurred) 3: 4: C430 5: C440 6: C450 7: C440 8: C450 9: C440 10: C470 11: C470 12: C480 13: C490 14: C470 15: C480 16: C490 17: C470 18: C480 19: C490 0: OFF 1: 40C 2: 45C 3: 50C 4: 55C 5: 60C 6: 65C 7: 70C 8: 75C 9: 80C 10: 85C 11: 90C 12: 95C 13: 100C 14: 105C 15: 110C 16:115C 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C 1
390 391 392 393 398
Counter Number of errors in HDD (Copying) Counter Number of errors in HDD (FAX) Counter Number of errors in HDD (Scanning) Counter Number of errors in HDD (Printer) Laser Number of polygonal motor rotational speed switching
399
Laser
400
Fuser
Accumulated time of polygonal motor at normal rotation Fuser unit error status counter
409
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature at a energy saver mode (Center thermistor)
ALL
13 <0-16>
410-0
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Plain paper)
ALL (black) ALL (color)
12 <0-16> 12 <0-16> 12 <0-16>
410-1
411
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature on standby (Center thermistor)
ALL
2 - 98
Setting mode (08)

Code 412-0 ClassifiItems cation Fuser Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Thick paper 3) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> ALL 12 M 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C (black) <0-16> 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C ALL 12 M 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C (color) <0-16> 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C ALL 12 M 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C (black) <0-16> 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C ALL 13 M 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C (color) <0-16> 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C ALL 16 M 0: Invalid 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. (black) <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4:4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. ALL 0 M 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. (color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. ALL 9 M 0: 120C 1: 125C 2: 130C <0-16> 3: 135C 4: 140C 5: 145C 6: 150C 7: 155C 8: 160C 9: 165C 10: 170C 11: 175C 12: 180C 13: 185C 14: 190C 15: 195C 16: 200C ALL 1 M Sets deceleration ratio of paper (color) <0-3> transport speed. 0: 1/1 1: 1/2 2: 1/3 3: 1/4 ALL 1 M (color) <0-3> ALL (color) ALL (black) ALL (color) 2 <0-3> 12 <0-16> 12 <0-16> 12 <0-16> 10 <0-16> 14 <0-16> 0 <0-16> M
Procedure
412-1
413-0
Fuser
413-1
Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor/Thick paper 1)
417-0
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 3)
417-1
422
Fuser
Fuser roller temperature setting at the end of prerunning during warming-up
430
Fuser
431
Fuser
432
Fuser
437-0
Fuser
437-1
Transport motor speed deceleration (OHP film) Transport motor speed deceleration (Thick paper 2) Transport motor speed deceleration (Thick paper 3) Fuser roller temperature during printing (Center thermistor /Thick paper 2)
438-0
Fuser
438-1
Fuser roller temperature ALL during printing (black) (Center thermistor/OHP film) ALL (color) Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 2) ALL (black) ALL (color)
439-0
Fuser
439-1
0: 120C 3: 135C 6: 150C 9: 165C 12: 180C 15: 195C 0: 120C 3: 135C 6: 150C 9: 165C 12: 180C 15: 195C 0: Invalid 3: 3 sec. 6: 6 sec. 9: 10 sec. 12: 16 sec. 15: 25 sec.
1: 125C 4: 140C 7: 155C 10: 170C 13: 185C 16: 200C 1: 125C 4: 140C 7: 155C 10: 170C 13: 185C 16: 200C 1: 0 sec. 4: 4 sec. 7: 7 sec. 10: 12 sec. 13: 18 sec. 16: 30 sec.
2: 130C 5: 145C 8: 160C 11: 175C 14: 190C 2: 130C 5: 145C 8: 160C 11: 175C 14: 190C 2: 2 sec. 5: 5 sec. 8: 8 sec. 11: 14 sec. 14: 20 sec.
Setting mode (08)

Code 440-0 ClassifiItems cation Fuser Pre-running time for first printing (Plain paper/Low temperature environment) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 2: 2 sec. 4 12 (black) <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. ALL 0 M 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 4 (color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. ALL 9 M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 4 2: 2 sec. (black) <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. ALL 5 M 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 4 (color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. ALL 0 M Sets whether or not detecting the 1 <0-1> original length by transporting without scanning in reverse when finding A4R/FOLIO paper. 0: Invalid- Judges as A4-R without transporting in reverse with no scanning. 1: Valid- Judges whether it is A4-R or FOLIO size by transporting in reverse with no scanning. * The original is transported in reverse with no scanning when detecting LT-LG size-paper in LT, regardless of this setting. ALL 5 M Sets the number of times of the 4 <0-5> feeding retry from the upper drawer. ALL M 4 5 <0-5> ALL M Sets the number of times of the 4 5 <0-5> feeding retry from the lower drawer. ALL M 4 5 <0-5> ALL M Sets the number of times of the 4 5 <0-5> feeding retry from the PFP upper ALL M drawer. 4 5 <0-5> ALL M Sets the number of times of the 4 5 <0-5> feeding retry from the PFP lower ALL M drawer. 4 5 <0-5> ALL M Sets the number of times of the 4 5 <0-5> feeding retry from the bypass tray. ALL M 4 5 <0-5> ALL M Sets the number of times of the 4 5 <0-5> feeding retry from the LCF. ALL M 4 5 <0-5>
440-1
441-0
Fuser
Pre-running time for first printing (Thick paper 1)
441-1
462
RADF
Setting for switchback operation to copy mixedsized original on RADF
463-0 463-1 464-0 464-1 465-0 465-1 466-0 466-1 467-0 467-1 468-0 468-1
Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (upper drawer) Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (lower drawer) Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (PFP upper drawer) Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (PFP lower drawer) Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (bypass feed) Paper Feeding retry feeding number setting (LCF)
Plain paper Others Plain paper Others Plain paper Others Plain paper Others Plain paper Others Plain paper Others
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ERROR CODE AND SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE 2 - 100
Setting mode (08)

Code 470 ClassifiItems cation Paper Paper size (305x457 mm) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Paper Paper size (Post card) feeding feeding/widthwise direction Laser Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error (Normal rotation) Judged number of polygonal motor rotation error (At acceleration/deceleration) Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 10 ALL 457/305 M <148-457/ 105-305> ALL M * Post card is supported only for JPN 10 148/100 model. <148-432/ 100-297> ALL M Displays the error [CA10] when the 1 0 set number of rotation error has been <0-1> detected. 0: 2 times 1: 12 times ALL 0 M 0: Waiting time for polygonal motor 1 <0-1> rotation overshooting 0.6 sec. 1: Waiting time for polygonal motor rotation overshooting 2.2 sec. ALL 0 M 0: A4/LT 1: LCF 1 <0-5> 2: Upper drawer 3: Lower drawer 4: PFP upper drawer 5: PFP lower drawer PPC 1 SYS Sets whether or not changing the 1 <0-2> drawer automatically to the other drawer with the paper of the same size when paper in the selected drawer has run out. 0: OFF 1: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper direction and size: ex. A4 to A4) 2: ON (Changes to the drawer with the same paper size. Paper with the different direction is acceptable as long as the size is the same: ex., A4 to A4-R, LT-R to LT. 1 is applied when the staple/holepunch is specified.) ALL 0 M 0: ON 1: OFF 1 <0-1> ALL SYS Sets whether or not switching the 1 0 polygonal motor from the standby <0-2> rotation to the normal rotation when the original is set on the RADF or the platen cover is opened. 0: Valid (when using RADF and the original is set manually) 1: Invalid 2: Valid (when using RADF only) ALL 0 SYS Sets whether or not switching the 1 <0-1> polygonal motor from the normal rotation to the standby rotation at the Auto Clear Mode. 0: Valid 1: Invalid
471
478
479
Laser
480
Paper Default setting of paper feeding source
481
Paper Automatic change of paper feeding source
482 483
Paper Feeding retry setting feeding Laser Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor
484
Laser
Polygonal motor rotational status switching at the Auto Clear Mode
Setting mode (08)

Code 485 ClassifiItems cation Laser Rotational status of polygonal motor on standby Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 0 SYS Sets the rotational status of polygonal 1 <0-1> motor on standby. 0: Rotated (The rotational speed is set at 08-490.) 1: Stopped ALL 0 SYS Switches the polygonal motor to the 1 <0-2> standby rotation when a certain period of time has passed from the pre-running. At this code, the period to switch the status to the standby rotation is set. 0: 15 sec. 1: 30 sec. 2: 45 sec. * This setting is effective when 0 or 2 is set at 08-483. ALL 0 M 0: Performs only at no paper size is 1 <0-1> designated 1: Performs regardless of designation of paper size ALL 3 M Set the type of polygonal motor. 1 <2-3> 2: 2 clock type 3: 3 clock type ALL M 0: 38090.55rpm 1: 35000rpm 1 5 <0-5> 2: 30000rpm 3: 25000rpm 4: 20000rpm 5: 10000rpm ALL 0 M 0: Stopped 1 1: 10000rpm <0-1> PPC SYS Sets the image reproduction method 1 0 (black) at photo mode. <0-1> 0: Error diffusion 1: Dither PPC 0 SYS 0: Automatic 1 (black) <0-1> 1: Manual (Center) M 0: Invalid 1 ALL 1 <0-1> 1: Valid ALL M 0: Invalid 1: 0 sec. 4 16 2: 2 sec. (black) <0-16> 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. ALL 0 M 9: 10 sec. 10: 12 sec. 11: 14 sec. 4 (color) <0-16> 12: 16 sec. 13: 18 sec. 14: 20 sec. 15: 25 sec. 16: 30 sec. 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1st 1 <0-1> transfer roller bias depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1st 1 <0-1> transfer roller bias depending on the transfer belt life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1st 1 <0-1> transfer roller bias depending on the 1st transfer roller life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid
486
Laser
Timing of auto-clearing of polygonal motor pre-running rotation
487
Transfer Selection of performing the 2nd transfer roller cleaning (Bypass feed) Laser Laser Setting of polygonal motor type Polygonal motor rotation number on standby Polygonal motor rotation in the energy saving mode Error diffusion and dither setting at photo mode Default setting of density adjustment Main charger wire autocleaning setting Pre-running time for first printing (OHP film)
488 489
490 502
Laser Image
User interface 511 Main charger 526-0 Fuser
503
526-1
541
Image Environment correction control control of 1st transfer roller bias Image Transfer belt life correction control of 1st transfer roller bias
542
543
Image 1st transfer roller life control correction of 1st transfer roller bias
Setting mode (08)

Code 544 ClassifiItems cation Image Environment correction control control of 2nd transfer roller bias Image Transfer belt life correction control of 2nd transfer roller bias Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 1 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the transfer belt life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 ALL M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> 2nd transfer roller bias depending on the 2nd transfer roller life. 0: Invalid 1: Valid ALL 1 M 0: Invalid 1 <0-1> 1: Valid ALL 2 <0-2> 1 <0-1> 0:80 g/m2 (21.3 lb.)/EUR 1:75 g/m2 (20 lb.)/UC 2:64 g/m2 (17.1 lb.)/JPN M Sets whether or not performing the open-loop control 1.The open-loop control 1 is performed in advance of the closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS 0: Text/Photo 1: Photo 2: Text 3: Gray Scale M Sets whether or not performing the open-loop control 2.The open-loop control 2 is performed before or during printing. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the drum voltage depending on the drum life in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the drum voltage depending on the drum surface temperature in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not deciding the initial value of contrast voltage in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the laser power depending on the drum life when the laser power initial value is set in open-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M Sets whether or not correcting the contrast voltage in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid M 1
545
546
Image 2nd transfer roller life control correction of 2nd transfer roller bias Transfer Setting of 2nd transfer roller bias paper type correction control Transfer Setting of 2nd transfer roller bias table (for each destination/paper thickness) Image Image quality control/opencontrol loop control 1
547
548
549
ALL
550 551
Default setting of Original mode Image Image quality control/opencontrol loop control 2 Image
PPC (black) ALL
0 <0-3> 1 <0-1>
1 1
552
Image Drum life correction control control
ALL
1 <0-1>
553
Image Drum temperature correction control control
ALL
1 <0-1>
554
Image Image quality open-loop control control/Contrast voltage initial value Image Drum life correction of laser control power initial value
ALL
1 <0-1>
555
ALL
1 <0-1>
556
Image Image quality closed-loop control control/Contrast voltage
ALL
1 <0-1>
Setting mode (08)

Code 557 ClassifiItems cation Image Image quality closed-loop control control/Laser power Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 1 M Sets whether or not correcting the 1 <0-1> laser power in closed-loop control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Image Contrast voltage/Correction 1 M Sets whether or not switching the 1 ALL control gain environment setting <0-1> correction amount once at contrast voltage correction depending on the environment. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Image Image quality closed-loop ALL 1 M Sets whether performing closed-loop 1 control control automatic start-up/At (color) <0-2> control automatically at power-ON power-ON when the fuser roller temperature becomes below the specified level. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Image Process switching for image PPC 1 M Sets whether or not performing a 1 smoothing (Text/Photo) (black) <0-1> smoothing process (primary scanning direction, 2,400 dpi or equivalent). 0: Invalid 1: Valid Image Process switching for image PPC 0 M Sets whether or not performing a 1 smoothing (Photo) (black) <0-1> smoothing process (primary scanning direction, 2,400 dpi or equivalent). Image Process switching for image PPC 1 M 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1 smoothing (Text) (black) <0-1> Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Relative humidity variation ALL (color) 1 <0-2> M Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the relative humidity becomes below the specified level from the previous control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the equipment has not been used for a specified period of time. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when the specified number of sheets has been printed out from the previous control. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) Sets whether or not performing closed-loop control automatically when recovered from Toner empty. 0: Invalid 1: Valid (at mode 1) 2: Valid (at mode 2) 1
558
559
560
561
562
565
566
Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Period of time unattended
ALL (color)
1 <0-2>
567
Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Accumulated print volume
ALL (color)
2 <0-2>
568
Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ When recovered from Toner empty
ALL (color)
2 <0-2>
Setting mode (08)

Code 569 ClassifiItems cation Image Image quality closed-loop control control automatic start-up/ Temperature setting of fuser roller at power-ON Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> ALL 8 M Sets the fuser roller temperature to 1 (color) <0-20> perform closed-loop control when 1 or 2 (valid) is set in 08-559. 0: 20C 1: 25C 2: 30C 3: 35C 4: 40C 5: 45C 6: 50C 7: 55C 8: 60C 9: 65C 10: 70C 11: 75C 12: 80C 13: 85C 14: 90C 15: 95C 16: 100C 17: 105C 18: 110C 19: 115C 20: 120C Image quality closed-loop ALL 4 M Sets the relative humidity difference 1 control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-6> to perform the closed-loop control Relative humidity difference when 1 or 2 (valid) is set in 08setting 565. 0: 0% 1: 5% 2: 10% 3: 15% 4: 20% 5: 25% 6: 30% Image quality closed-loop ALL 4 M Sets the period of time unattended to 1 control automatic start-up/ (color) <0-24> perform closed-loop control when 1 Setting of period of time or 2 (valid) is set in 08-566. unattended Setting value x 1 (hour) ALL 10 M Sets the number of accumulated print 1 Image quality closed-loop (color) <0-30> control automatic start-up/ volume to perform closed-loop Setting of accumulated print control when 1 or 2 (valid) is set in volume 08-567. Setting value x 100 (pages) Abnormality detection count ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 (Y) <0-16> image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 Abnormality detection count <0-16> (M) image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 Abnormality detection count <0-16> (C) image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] ALL 0 M Counts the abnormality detection of 1 Abnormality detection count <0-16> (K) image quality control. Accumulating Display/0 clearing total of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] ALL 1 M 0: 3 sec. 1: 6 sec. 4 Pre-running time Transport 2: 9 sec. <0-10> at power-ON and motor 3: 12 sec. 4: 15 sec. 5: 18 sec. speed 1/1 ready status 6: 21 sec. 7: 24 sec. 8: 27 sec. ALL 4 M 9: 30 sec. 10: 33 sec. 4 Transport <0-10> motor speed 1/2 ALL 7 M 4 Transport <0-10> motor speed 1/3 Transport motor speed of ALL 0 M 0: Decelerating to 1/1 1 pre-running at ready status <0-2> 1: Decelerating to 1/2 2: Decelerating to 1/3 Default setting of Original PPC 0 SYS 0: Text/Photo 1 1: Text mode (color) <0-4> 2: Printed image 3: Photo 4: Map
570
Image control
571
Image control
572
Image control
573
Image control Image control Image control Image control Fuser
574
575
576
583-0
583-1
583-2
584
Fuser
585
User interface
Setting mode (08)

Code 586 ClassifiItems cation Image Image quality switching when selecting the Image Smoothing Mode Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 0 PPC SYS Selects the method of image pro1 <0-1> cessing when the Image Smoothing (black) is selected in the original modes. 0: Processing for Image Smoothing 1: Processing when judging as black in the ACS Mode PPC 1 SYS 0: Automatic 1 (color) <0-1> 1: Manual (Center) SYS 0: Auto color 1: Black 1 PPC 1 <0-2> 2: Full color PPC SYS Selects the method of image 1 1 (black) <0-1> processing when the original is judged as black in the ACS Mode. 0: Processing for Image Smoothing 1: Processing when judging as black in the ACS Mode PPC 0 SYS 0: Scanning color/black integrated 1 (Color) <0-1> pattern 1: Scanning color pattern only PRT SYS Initializes the status of automatic 3 (color) gamma adjustment in color printing. EUR:0 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON 1 ALL UC:1 JPN:1 <0-1> ALL SYS 0: Invalid 1 0 1: Single-sided to duplex copying <0-3> 2: Two-sided to duplex copying 3: User selection ALL 0 SYS 0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 1 <0-2> 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection) 2: Not selected PPC 0 SYS 0: Invalid 1 1: Valid <0-1> PPC SYS 0: Continuous feeding 1 0 (by pressing the [START] button) <0-1> 1: Single feeding (by setting original on the tray) ALL 88 SYS Sets the binarizing level of each step. 4 <0-255> When the value increases, the image ALL SYS becomes darker. When the value 4 108 <0-255> decreases, the image becomes ALL SYS lighter. 4 148 <0-255> *Refer to 08-268. ALL SYS 4 178 <0-255> ALL SYS 4 208 <0-255> ALL SYS 0: OFF 1 1 <0-1> 1: ON
587 588 589
User interface User interface Image
Default setting of Density mode Default setting of Color mode Image quality switching when judging as black in the ACS Mode
595
597 602
Scanning operation switching at automatic calibration Image Gamma correction table all clearing User Screen setting for automatic interface energy saver/automatic power OFF User Setting for automatic interface duplexing mode
Image
603
604
User Default setting for APS/AMS interface
605 607
User interface User interface
Centering printing of primary/ secondary direction at AMS Default setting of RADF mode
609-0 609-1 609-2 609-3 609-4 610
Step -2 Step -1 Step 0 (center) Step +1 Step +2 User Key touch sound of control interface panel
Image
Binarizing level setting (When judging as black in the ACS Mode)
Setting mode (08)

Code 611 612 613 ClassifiItems cation User Book type original priority interface General Summer time mode User Paper size selection for interface [OTHER] button Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> 0 SYS PPC <0-1> ALL SYS 0 <0-1> PPC SYS EUR: FOLIO UC:COMP JPN:A5-R ALL SYS 6 <1-50> Contents 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page 0: Not summer time 1: Summer time Press the icon on the LCD to select the size.
Procedure
1 1 9
614
Network Local I/F time-out period
615
General Size information of main memory and page memory
ALL
SYS
616
Counter Counting method in Twin Color Mode (Limitation Function)
ALL
JPN: 1 UC: 0 EUR: 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 4 <0-10>
SYS
617 618 619
User interface User interface Paper feeding
Print setting without department code Default setting of RADF original size Time lag before auto-start of bypass feeding
ALL PPC ALL
SYS SYS SYS
620 621 622 623 624 625
User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface User interface
Department management setting (Copier) Department management setting (FAX) Department management setting (Printer) Department management setting (Scanner) Department management setting (List print) Blank copying prevention mode during RADF jamming Rotation printing at the nonsorting Direction priority of original image Department management printing counter
PPC FAX PRT SCN PRT PPC
1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 1 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-2> 0 <0-1>
SYS
Sets the period of time when the job is judged as completed in local I/F printing (USB or parallel). 1: 1.0 sec. 2: 1.5 sec. - 50: 25.5 sec. (in increments of 0.5 sec.) Displays the sizes of the main memory and page memory. Enables to check if each memory is properly recognized. Sets the counting method in Twin Color Mode with the Limitation Function. 0: Count as color 1: Count as black 0: Printed 1: Not printed 0: Same size originals 1: Mixed size originals Sets the time taken to add paper feeding when paper in the bypass tray has run out during the bypass feed copying. 0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button is pressed. 1-10: Setting value x 0.5sec. 0: Invalid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid
1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid
627 628 629
ALL PPC ALL
SYS 0: OFF 1: ON (Start printing when the scanning of each page is finished) SYS 0: Not rotating 1: Rotating SYS 0: Automatic 2: Landscape SYS 0: Invalid 1: Portrait 1: Valid
1 1 1
Setting mode (08)

Code 632 ClassifiItems cation User Automatic calibration interface disclosure level Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PPC 1 SYS Sets the disclosing level of automatic 1 <0-2> calibration. 0: Service technician 1: Administrator 2: User ALL 0 SYS 0: Normal 1 <0-1> 1: Inner receiving tray PPC SYS 0: ON 1: OFF 1 0 <0-1> ALL EUR: 24 SYS 0: +12.0h 1: +11.5h 2: +11.0h UC: 40 3: +10.5h 4: +10.0h 5: 9.5h JPN: 6 6: +9.0h 7: +8.5h 8: +8.0h <0-47> 9: +7.5h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14: +5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 19: +2.5h 20: +2.0h 21: +1.5h 22: +1.0h 23: +0.5h 24: 0.0h 25:-0.5h 26: -1.0h 27: -1.5h 28: -2.0h 29: -2.5h 30: -3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 33: -4.5h 34: -5.0h 35: -5.5h 36: -6.0h 37: -6.5h 38: -7.0h 39: -7.5h 40: -8.0h 41: -8.5h 42: -9.0h 43: -9.5h 44: -10.0h 45: -10.5h 46: -11.0h 47: -11.5h EUR:1 SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD. 1: DD.MM.YYYY UC:2 2: MM.DD.YYYY JPN:0 <0-2> SYS 0: Invalid 1: STAPLE 2 2:SORT 3: GROUP <0-4> 4: ROTATE SORT 0 SYS 0: NON-SORT 1: STAPLE <0-4> 2: SORT 3: GROUP 4: ROTATE SORT 0 SYS 0: K 1: Y 2: M 3: C <0-6> 4: R 5: G 6: B 4 <0-6> SYS 0: K 4: R 1: Y 5: G 2: M 6: B 3: C 1
634 636
User interface User interface
638
Inner receiving tray priority at Non-sort Mode Width setting for image shift copying (linkage of front side and back side) General Time differences
640
User Date display format interface
ALL
641
User Automatic Sorting Mode interface setting (RADF) User Default setting of Sorter interface Mode
PPC
642
PPC
643
644
645
User Color 1 at twin color PPC interface selection (Select what color (color) black in original is copied) User Color 2 at twin color PPC interface selection (Select what color (color) other than black in original is copied) User Correction of reproduction PPC interface ratio in editing copy
10 <0-10>
646
User Image position in editing interface
PPC
0 <0-1>
SYS Sets the reproduction ratio for the X in 1 printing (including magazine sort) to the Reproduction ratio x Correction ratio. 0: 90% 1: 91% 2: 92% 3: 93% 4: 94% 5: 95% 6: 96% 7: 97% 8: 98% 9: 99% 10: 100% SYS Sets the page pasted position for X in 1 to the upper left corner/center. 0: Cornering 1: Centering
Setting mode (08)

Code 647 648 Classification User interface User interface Items Rotation of paper direction for BOX printing Returning finisher tray when printing is finished Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 1 SYS <0-1> ALL SYS 0 <0-1> Contents
Procedure
649 650 651
User interface User interface User interface
Magazine sort setting 2 in 1/4 in 1 page allocating order setting Printing format setting for Time Stamp and Page Number
PPC PPC PPC
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 2 <0-3>
0: Rotation OFF 1: Rotation ON Sets whether or not returning the finisher tray to the bin 1 when printing is finished. 0: Not returned 1: Returned SYS 0: Left page to right page 1: Right page to left page SYS 0: Horizontal 1: Vertical SYS Hyphen Dropout
(with page number)(with date, time and page number)
1 1
1 1 1
652 653 657
658
Default setting of printing direction for Time Stamp and Page Number User Auto-start setting for bypass interface feed printing
User interface User interface User interface
Cascade operation setting Cascade operation setting
PPC PRT PPC
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
0: OFF OFF 1: ON OFF 2: OFF ON 3: ON ON Note: Hyphen printing format ON: -1- OFF: 1 SYS 0: OFF 1: ON SYS 0: OFF 1: ON SYS 0: Short edge 1: Long edge SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatical feeding) SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically into the copier when it is placed on the bypass tray. 0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.) 1: ON (Automatical feeding) SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS Clears SMS partition. (Performs when the service call [F106] has occurred.) SYS Sets the counting method of fee charging or department count in Twin Color Mode. 0: Count as Twin Color Mode 1: Count as Black Mode 2: Count as Full Color Mode M/ Initializes all the adjustment modes SYS and the setting modes.
1 1 1
PRT
659
User Auto-start setting for bypass interface feed printing
PPC
1 <0-1>
660 661 662
Network Auto-forwarding setting of received FAX Network Auto-forwarding setting of received E-mail General Clearing of SMS partition
ALL ALL ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -
1 1 3
663
Counter Counting method in Twin Color Mode
PPC
0 <0-2>
665
General M/SYS all clearing
ALL
Setting mode (08)

Code 666 667 669 671 672 ClassifiItems cation General /SHR partition clearing General /SHA partition clearing General System all clearing User Size indicator interface General Initialization of department management information Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> ALL SYS Initializes the Electronic Filing. ALL SYS Initializes the shared folder. ALL SYS Initializes system NVRAM area. ALL 0 <0-1> SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS Initializing of the department management information * Enter the code with the digital keys and press the [INITIALIZE] button to perform the initialization. If the area storing the department management information is destroyed for some reason, Enter Department Code is displayed on the control panel even if the department management function is not set on. In this case, initialize the area with this code. This area is normally initialized at the factory. SYS Sets whether or not applying the Coated Paper Mode to each paper source. SYS 0: Normal mode 1: Coated Paper Mode * Coated Paper Mode - This mode is SYS selected when the paper which often causes the misfeeding (ex. coated paper) is used. The occurrence of SYS misfeeding is reduced by lengthening the jam detection time. However, the printing speed is lowered since the SYS printing cycle is also lengthened with the lengthened jam detection time. SYS Sets whether or not displaying the [COATED] button on the LCD screen at bypass feeding. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed (The Coated Paper Mode is applied by pressing the [COATED] button at bypass feeding.) * Coated Paper Mode - This mode is selected when the paper which often causes the misfeeding (ex. coated paper) is used. The occurrence of misfeeding is reduced by lengthening the jam detection time. However, the printing speed is lowered since the printing cycle is also lengthened with the lengthened jam detection time.
Procedure
3 3 3 1 3
675-0
Paper Coated Paper feeding Mode setting for paper source
Upper drawer Lower drawer PFP upper drawer PFP lower drawer LCF
ALL
0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
675-1
ALL
675-2
ALL
675-3
ALL
675-4
ALL
676
Paper Bypass copy printing feeding [COATED] button display
PPC
Setting mode (08)

Code 677-0 ClassifiItems cation Paper Coated Paper feeding Mode setting at bypass feeding Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> PRT 0 SYS Sets whether or not applying the 4 <0-1> Coated Paper Mode on each paper type at bypass printing. PRT 0 SYS 0: Normal mode 4 <0-1> 1: Coated Paper Mode * Coated Paper Mode - This mode is PRT 0 SYS selected when the paper which often 4 <0-1> causes the misfeeding (ex. coated paper) is used. The occurrence of PRT 0 SYS misfeeding is reduced by lengthening 4 <0-1> the jam detection time. However, the printing speed is lowered since the PRT 0 SYS printing cycle is also lengthened with 4 <0-1> the lengthened jam detection time. ALL SYS When the duplex printing is short 1 1 <0-1> paid with a coin controller, reverse side of the original is not printed and is considered as a defect (printing job may be cleared). To solve this problem, the selection of printing method is enabled with this setting. 0: Invalid (Both sides printed) 1: Valid (Only one side printed) ALL SYS Rebuilds all databases. 3 ALL ALL FAX ALL ALL ALL 0 <0-1> <2> <0-2> SYS Rebuilds all databases related to the Address Book. SYS Rebuilds all databases related to the logs. SYS 0: Not subjected for APS judgment 1: Subjected for APS judgment SYS 2: Normal formatting SYS 0: Not formatted 1: Not used 2: Normal format SYS Performs the calibration of the pressing position on the touch panel (LCD screen). The calibration is performed by pressing 2 reference positions after this code is started up. SYS Returns the value to the factory shipping default value. SYS Checks the bad sector. - 0: Not installed 1: Installed SYS Sets the paper type priority during copying. 1: Normal paper 2: Thick paper 1 - Start up this code and have the user enter the key code. - This setting is effective only when the scrambler board is installed. 3 3 1 7 7 1
Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film
677-1
677-2
677-3
677-4 683
General Duplex printing setting when coin controller is used
684 685 686 689 690 691 692
General Rebuilding all databases General Rebuilding all databases related to Address Book General Rebuilding all databases related to log FAX Adaptation of paper source priority selection General HDD formatting General HDD type display Mainte- Performing panel calibration nance
693 694 696 697
General Initialization of NIC information General Performing HDD testing Scrambler Installation of scrambler board board (Option) Paper Paper type priority feeding Scrambler Entering the key code for board scrambler board Scrambler Erasing all data in HDD board
ALL ALL ALL PPC
0 <0-1> 1 <1-2> -
3 3 2 1
698 699
ALL ALL
5 3
Setting mode (08)

Code 701 ClassifiItems cation FAX Destination setting for FAX Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> EUR: 5 SYS FAX UC: 4 JPN: 0 Other: 1 <0-25> Contents
Procedure
702 703
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
704
707
708
Maintenance
711 715
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance
716 717
718 719 720
721
Remote-controlled service function Remote-controlled service HTTP server URL setting Remote-controlled service HTTP server Port number setting Remote-controlled service HTTP initially-registered server URL setting Remote-controlled service HTTP initially-registered server Port number setting Remote-controlled service lengthened polling interval Remote-controlled service periodical polling timing (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Remote-controlled service polling interval at emergency Remote-controlled service response waiting time (Timeout) Remote-controlled service initial registration Remote-controlled service tentative password Status of remote-controlled service initial registration (Display only) Service center call function
ALL ALL
2 <0-2> -
0: Japan 1: Asia 2: Australia 3: Hong Kong 4: U.S.A./Canada 5: Germany 6: U.K. 7: Italy 8: Belgium 9: Netherlands 10: Finland 11: Spain 12: Austria 13: Switzerland 14: Sweden 15: Denmark 16: Norway 17: Portugal 18: France 19: Greece 20: Poland 21: Hungary 22: Czech 23: Turkey 24: South Africa 25: Taiwan SYS 0: Valid (Remote-controlled server) 1: Valid (L2) 2: Invalid SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
1 11
ALL
0 SYS <0-65535> SYS Maximum 256 Bytes
ALL
11
ALL
0 SYS <0-65535>
ALL ALL
2 <0-2> -
SYS 0: Valid (Once a month) 1: Valid (Once a week) 2: Invalid SYS 0 (0:00) to 2359 (23:59)
1 1
ALL ALL
0 <0-1> 3 <1-30> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -
SYS 0: Invalid SYS Unit: Minute
1: Valid
1 1
ALL ALL ALL
SYS 0: OFF 1: Start 2: Only certification is scanned SYS Maximum 10 letters SYS 0: Not registered 1: Registered SYS 0: OFF 1: Notified by HTTP 2: Notified by SNMP (OFF) 3: Notified by E-mail (OFF) SYS Maximum 192 letters
1 11 2
ALL
722
Mainte- Service center call nance E-mail address setting
ALL
11
Setting mode (08)

Code 723 724 Classification Maintenance Maintenance Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> ALL SYS Maximum 256 letters ALL 0 SYS <0-65535> 1 <0-1> SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid SYS 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) SYS
Procedure
726 727 728 729 730 731 732
Service center call HTTP server URL setting Service center call HTTP server port number setting Mainte- HTTP proxy setting nance Mainte- HTTP proxy IP address nance setting Mainte- HTTP proxy port number nance setting Mainte- HTTP proxy ID setting nance Mainte- HTTP proxy password nance setting Mainte- HTTP proxy panel display nance Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance Maintenance Automatic ordering function of supplies FAX number Automatic ordering function of supplies E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies HTTP server URL setting Automatic ordering function of supplies HTTP server port number setting Automatic ordering function of supplies User's name Automatic ordering function of supplies User's telephone number Automatic ordering function of supplies User's E-mail address Automatic ordering function of supplies User's address Automatic ordering function of supplies Service number Automatic ordering function of supplies Service technician's name
11 1
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
1 11 1 11 11 1 1
0 <0-65535> SYS Maximum 30 letters 1 <0-1> 3 <0-3> SYS Maximum 30 letters SYS 0: Valid 1: Invalid
733
ALL
734
ALL
SYS 0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF SYS Maximum 16 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/ Pause] button SYS Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits SYS Maximum 256 letters
11
11
735
ALL
11
736
ALL
0 SYS <0-65535>
738
739
740
741
742
743
Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote)
ALL
SYS Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
ALL
SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/ Pause] button SYS Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits SYS Maximum 100 letters
11
11
ALL
11
ALL
0 SYS Maximum 5 digits <5 digits> SYS Maximum 50 letters
11
ALL
11
Setting mode (08)

Code 744 ClassifiItems cation Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies (Remote) Service technician's telephone number Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies (Remote) Service technician's E-mail address Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies (Remote) Supplier's name Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies (Remote) Supplier's address Mainte- Automatic ordering function nance of supplies (Remote) Notes Mainte- Information about supplies nance Part number of toner (Remote) cartridge C Mainte- Information about supplies nance Order quantity of toner (Remote) cartridge C Mainte- Information about supplies nance Condition number of toner (Remote) cartridge C Mainte- Information about supplies nance Part number of toner (Remote) cartridge M Mainte- Information about supplies nance Order quantity of toner (Remote) cartridge M Mainte- Information about supplies nance Condition number of toner (Remote) cartridge M Mainte- Information about supplies nance Part number of toner (Remote) cartridge Y Mainte- Information about supplies nance Order quantity of toner (Remote) cartridge Y Mainte- Information about supplies nance Condition number of toner (Remote) cartridge Y Mainte- Information about supplies nance Part number of toner (Remote) cartridge K Mainte- Information about supplies nance Order quantity of toner (Remote) cartridge K Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> ALL SYS Maximum 32 digits Enter hyphen with the [Monitor/ Pause] button ALL SYS Maximum 192 letters List: 256 digits
Procedure
11
745
11
746
ALL
11
747
ALL
11
748
ALL
11
749
ALL
SYS Maximum 20 digits
11
750
ALL
1 <1-99> 1 <1-99> -
SYS
751
ALL
SYS
752
ALL
11
753
ALL
1 <1-99> 1 <1-99> -
SYS
754
ALL
SYS
755
ALL
11
756
ALL
1 <1-99> 1 <1-99> -
SYS
757
ALL
SYS
758
ALL
11
759
ALL
1 <1-99>
SYS
Setting mode (08)

Code 760 Classification Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance Items Information about supplies Condition number of toner cartridge K Information about supplies Part number of toner bag Information about supplies Order quantity of toner bag Information about supplies Condition number of toner bag Automatic ordering supplies Result table printout Automatic ordering supplies Display Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 1 SYS <1-99> ALL Contents
Procedure
761
11
762
ALL
1 <1-99> 1 <1-99> 1 <0-2> 2 <0-2> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1>
SYS
763
ALL
SYS
764
ALL
SYS 0: OFF 1: Always 2: ON Error SYS 0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) 1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP) 2: Invalid SYS 0: Default 1: Reset
765
ALL
766
767
Reset of service NVRAM Area reset of service NVRAM Mainte- Service Notification setting nance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Maintenance (Remote) Destination E-mail address 1
ALL
ALL
768
ALL
SYS Enables to set up to 3 E-mail addresses to be sent. (08-768, 777, 778) 0: Invalid 1: Valid SYS Maximum 192 letters
11
769
Total counter information transmission setting Total counter transmission interval setting PM counter notification setting Dealer's name Login name Display setting of [Service Notification] button Sending error contents of equipment Setting total counter transmission interval (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
ALL
0 <0-1> 1 <1-31> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> -
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
770
ALL
SYS 1 to 31 days
771
ALL
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
772 773 774
ALL ALL ALL
SYS Maximum 100 letters Needed at initial registration SYS Maximum 20 letters Needed at initial registration SYS 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed
11 11 1
775
ALL
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
776
ALL
SYS
Setting mode (08)

Code 777 Default ClassifiFunc- <Acceptable Items RAM Contents cation tion value> SYS Maximum 192 letters Mainte- Destination E-mail address 2 ALL nance (Remote) Mainte- Destination E-mail address 3 ALL SYS Maximum 192 letters nance (Remote) Mainte- Notification format selection ALL 0 SYS 0: Text nance <0-1> 1: Text + XML data Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Day-1 Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Day-2 Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Day-3 Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Day-4 Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Sunday Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Monday Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Tuesday Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Wednesday Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Thursday Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Friday Mainte- Remote-controlled service nance polling day selection Saturday Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner cartridge C Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner cartridge M Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner cartridge Y Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner cartridge K Mainte- Information of supplies nance setting of toner bag ALL 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-31> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> 0 <0-1> SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month SYS 0: OFF 1 to 31: 1st to 31st of a month SYS 0: Invalid 1: Valid
Procedure
11
778
11
779
780
781
ALL
782
ALL
783
ALL
784
ALL
785
ALL
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
786
ALL
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
787
ALL
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
788
ALL
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
789
ALL
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
790
ALL
SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid
791 792 793 794 795
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid SYS 0: Invalid
1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid 1: Valid
1 1 1 1 1
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation Mainte- Remote-controlled service 796 nance lengthened interval polling (End of month) 797 Mainte- Firmware download nance 810 Image Transfer bias correction control table setting 819-0 Develop- Color auto-toner Y ment sensor output 819-1 setting for initial M developer 819-2 material C Code 820-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor output 820-1 display for developer material 820-2 821 Y M C Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL SYS 0: Invalid 0 <0-1> ALL ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) Contents 1: Valid
Procedure
Develop- ON/OFF of the mode for ment developer material stabilization
822-0 Develop- Number of times ment the mode for 822-1 developer material stabilization is 822-2 performed 823-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/light amount correction 823-1 voltage abnormal detection 823-2 824-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/toner density detection 824-1 voltage abnormal detection 824-2 858-0 Develop- Toner empty ment detection 858-1 858-2
Y M C Y M C Y M C Y M C
ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color)
0 SYS 0: Accepted 1: Prohibited <0-1> M 1 : TYPE1 2 : TYPE2 3 : TYPE3 2 <1-3> M Sets the target output value of color 256 <0-1023> auto-toner sensor to the sleeve in the M auto-toner control. (This is set when 256 <0-1023> performing the automatic adjustment M of auto-toner sensor.) 256 <0-1023> M Displays the output value of the color <0-1023> auto-toner sensor to the sleeve in M color printing. <0-1023> M <0-1023> M Sets whether or not performing an 0 aging to stabilize the status of <0-1> developer material when the toner density is uneven or the toner charging amount is lowered. 0: ON 1: OFF 0 M Displays the number of times the <0-255> developer material stabilization is M performed. 0 <0-255> M 0 <0-255> M Displays 1 when the abnormal 0 <0-1> output voltage is detected for the M color auto-toner sensor light amount 0 <0-1> correction. ([CF40] error) M 0: Normal 0 <0-1> 1: Abnormality detected M Displays 1 when the abnormal 0 <0-1> toner density detection voltage is M detected. ([CF20] error) 0 <0-1> 0: Normal M 1: Abnormality detected 0 <0-1> 0 M Becomes 1 when detecting the <0-1> toner empty. 0 M 0: Normal <0-1> 1: Empty detected 0 M <0-1>
1 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 1
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation 859-0 Develop- Color toner forced ment supply level display 859-1 Code 859-2 860-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of 860-1 OFF level voltage 861-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of standard light 861-1 amount voltage 862-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/proper range setting of reference plate 862-1 output Default Func- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion value> ALL 0 M Becomes 1 when the toner density (color) <0-1> decreases and it is judged forced ALL 0 M toner supply is needed. (color) <0-1> 0: Normal level ALL 0 M 1: Forced supply level (color) <0-1> ALL 20 M Sets the range for judging whether (color) <0-1023> the sensor output value when the ALL 0 M sensor light source is OFF is correct (color) <0-1023> or not. ALL 205 M Sets the range for judging whether (color) <0-255> the adjustment result of sensor light amount is correct or not. ALL 40 M (color) <0-255> ALL 820 (color) <0-1023> ALL 205 (color) <0-1023> ALL 450 (color) <0-1023> ALL 155 (color) <0-1023> ALL (color) <0-1023> ALL (color) <0-1023> ALL 820 (color) <0-1023> ALL 205 (color) <0-1023> ALL (color) 0 <0-1> M Sets the range for judging whether the sensor output value for the reference plate is correct or not.
Procedure
Y M C Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Lower limit Upper limit Lower limit
4 4 4 4 4 4
Upper 863-0 Develop- Color auto-toner limit ment sensor/proper Lower range setting of 863-1 developer output limit 864 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ment sensor OFF output value display at power ON 865 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ment reference plate output value display at power ON Upper 866-0 Develop- Color auto-toner ment sensor/abnormal limit detection potential 866-1 Lower difference setting limit of reference plate output 867 Develop- Color auto-toner control ment environment and life light amount correction setting 868 Develop- Color auto-toner adjustment ment finishing range setting
M M M
Sets the range for judging whether the sensor output value for the sleeve is correct or not. Displays the sensor output value when the sensor light source is OFF at power ON. Displays the sensor output value with the standard light amount for the reference plate at power ON. Sets the range for judging whether the difference between the sensor output when the sensor light source is OFF and the sensor output for the reference plate is correct or not. Sets whether the sensor light amount is corrected or not depending on the environment and life. 0: Correction 1: No correction Sets the difference from the target value for judging whether the color auto-toner adjustment finishes correctly or not. Sets the difference from the target value for judging whether the light amount correction finishes correctly or not.
4 4 2
ALL (color)
4 <0-255>
869
Develop- Color auto-toner control ALL ment environment and life light (color) amount correction/correction finishing range setting
5 <0-255>
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation 870 Develop- Color auto-toner sensor/ ment setting of number of times of error detection at light amount correction 871 Develop- Color auto-toner control ment environment and life light amount correction/display of number of times of reference plate detection error 872 Develop- Color auto-toner control ment environment and life light amount correction/display of number of times of light amount control voltage adjustment error 873-0 Develop- Color auto-toner Y ment control/developer initial output 873-1 M setting 873-2 C Code 874 Develop- Color developer life correcment tion Default ProceFunc- <Acceptable RAM Contents tion dure value> 3 ALL M Sets the number of times of 1 continuous error detection before the (color) <0-255> light amount correction abnormality is displayed. ALL 0 M Displays the number of times of the 2 (color) <0-255> reference plate detection error for the environment and life light amount correction. ALL (color) 0 <0-255> M Displays the number of times of the light amount control voltage adjustment error for the environment and life light amount correction. 2
ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> ALL 256 (color) <0-1023> ALL 0 (color) <0-1>
M M M M
Sets the initial developer output target value.
4 4 4
875-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 0) 875-1 875-2 876-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 1) 876-1 876-2 877-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 2) 877-1 877-2 878-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 3) 878-1 878-2
Y M C Y M C Y M C Y M C
ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color)
0 <-512-511> 0 <-512-511> 0 <-512-511> -4 <-512-511> -2 <-512-511> -2 <-512-511> -6 <-512-511> -3 <-512-511> -3 <-512-511> -8 <-512-511> -4 <-512-511> -4 <-512-511>
M M M M M M M M M M M M
Sets whether the toner density detection voltage correction is performed or not depending on the developer life in the color auto-toner control. 0: Corrected 1: Not corrected Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 0-2000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 20015000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 500110000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 1000120000 is set as the correction amount.
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Setting mode (08)

ClassifiItems cation 879-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 4) 879-1 Code 879-2 880-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 5) 880-1 880-2 881-0 Develop- Color developer ment life correction value (segment 6) 881-1 881-2 900 Version System firmware ROM version Function ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL Default
<Acceptable value>
RAM M M M M M M M M M -
Contents Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 2000130000 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count within 3000137500 is set as the correction amount. Sets the correction amount of the toner density detection voltage depending on the developer life. In this code, the life count 37501 or more is set as the correction amount. JPN: T350SY0JXXX UC: T350SY0UXXX EUR: T350SY0EXXX Others: T350SY0XXXX 350M-XXX 350S-XXX DF-XXXX SDL-XX FIN-XX F562-XXX X.XXX VX.XX/X.XX VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X
Procedure
Y M C Y M C Y M C
-10 <-512-511> -5 <-512-511> -5 <-512-511> -12 <-512-511> -6 <-512-511> -6 <-512-511> -12 <-512-511> -6 <-512-511> -6 <-512-511> -
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2
903 905 907 908 915 916 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928
Version Engine ROM version Version Scanner ROM version Version RADF ROM version Version Finisher ROM version Version FAX board ROM version Version NIC board ROM version Version FROM basic section software version Version FROM internal program Version UI data fixed section version Version UI data common section version Version Version of UI data language 1 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 2 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 3 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 4 in HDD Version Version of UI data language 5 in HDD
ALL ALL ALL ALL FAX ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Code 929 930 931 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 995 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X VXXX.XXX X Contents
Procedure
Version Version of UI data language 6 in HDD Version Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power-ON Version Version of UI data language 7 in HDD Version HDD data unit version Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 1 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 2 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 3 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 4 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 5 Version Web UI data in HDD Version: Language 6 Mainte- Equipment number (serial nance number) display Mainte- FSMS total counter nance Network Reset of NIC board Network Selection of NIC board status information
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 11
999 1001 1002
ALL ALL ALL
1003 1004
Network Speed setting of Ethernet Network NIC Web password
ALL ALL
1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012
Network Availability of IP Network Method of IP addressing Network Domain name Network IP address Network Subnet mask Network Gateway Network Availability of IPX Network Network frame type
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
0 SYS This code can be also keyed in from <10 digits> the adjustment mode (05-976). 10 digits 0 SYS Refer to values of total counter. <8 digits> NIC 1: Cold 2: Warm 3: Not reset 3 <1-3> NIC 1: Not printed out when the copier is 1 restarted <1-2> 2: Printed out when the copier is restarted 3 NIC 1: 10 MBPS 2: 100 MBPS <1-3> 3: Automatic NIC Writing only (Current setting is not displayed.) Maximum 31 letters 1 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available <1-2> NIC 1: Unchanging 2 <1-2> 2: Automatic addressing (DHCP) NIC Maximum 96 letters NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) 1 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available <1-2> NIC 1: Automatic 2: IEEE802.3 1 3: Ethernet II 4: IEEE802.3 SNAP <1-5> 5: IEEE802.2
1 12 12
12 12
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

Code 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-5> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 80 <1-65535> 8080 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 80 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Available Contents 2: Not available 2: Not available
Procedure
Network Availability of NCP Burst Network Availability of AppleTalk Network Zone setting of AppleTalk Network Availability of LDAP Network Availability of DNS Network IP address to DNS server (Primary) Network IP address to DNS server (Secondary) Network DDNS Desired level
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
NIC Maximum 32 letters *: Wildcard character NIC 1: Available 2: Not available NIC 1: Available 2: Not available
1021 1023 1024 1025 1026 1027 1028 1029 1030 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041
Network Availability of SLP Network NetBios name Network Name of WINS server or IP address (Primary) Network Name of WINS server or IP address (Secondary) Network Availability of Bindery Network Availability of NDS Network Directory service context Network Directory service tree Network Availability of HTTP server Network Port number to NIC HTTP server Network Port number to system HTTP server Network Availability of NIC HTTP client Network TCP port number to Controller HTTP client Network IP address to HTTP server (Primary) Network Availability of SMTP client Network FQDN or IP address to SMTP server Network TCP port number of SMTP client Network Availability of SMTP server Network TCP port number of SMTP server
ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL
NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 1: Invalid 2: Via DHCP 3: Insecure DDNS 4: Secure DDNS 5: Multi-secure DDNS NIC 1: Available 2: Not available NIC Maximum 15 letters NIC Maximum 128 letters NIC Maximum 128 letters NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 2: Not available
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 1
NIC Maximum 127 letters NIC Maximum 47 letters NIC 1: Available 2: Not available NIC SYS NIC 1: Available NIC NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC 1: Available 2: Not available NIC Maximum 128 Bytes 2: Not available
12 12 12 12 12 12
25 NIC <1-65535> NIC 1: Available 1 <1-2> NIC 25 <1-65535>
2: Not available
12 12

Code 1042 1043 1044 1045 1046 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061 1062 1063 1065 1066 1067 1068 1069 1070 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 2 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-3> 5 <0-4096> 110 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 21 <1-65535> 0 <0-65535> 1 <1-2> 21 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> public private 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> public Contents
Procedure
Network E-mail box name to SMTP server Network Availability of Offramp Network Offramp security Network Printing at Offramp Network Availability of POP3 clients Network FQDN or IP address to POP3 server Network Types of POP3 server Network Login name to POP3 server Network Login password to POP3 Network E-mail reception interval Network TCP port number of POP3 client Network Availability of FTP client Network FQDN or IP address to FTP server Network TCP port number of FTP client Network Data port number of FTP client Network Login name to FTP server Network Login password to FTP server Network Availability of FTP server Network TCP port number of FTP server Network Login name to FTP client Network Login password to FTP client Network MIB function Network Setting of read Community Network Setting of read/Write Community Network Authentication TRAP function Network ALERTS TRAP function Network TRAP destination IP address Network Community setting of TRAP (via IP)
NIC Maximum 192 letters NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Available NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 2: Not available 2: Not available 2: Not available
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
NIC Maximum 128 Bytes NIC 1: Automatic 2: POP3 3: APOP NIC Maximum 32 letters NIC Maximum 32 letters NIC Unit: Minute NIC NIC 1: Available 2: Not available
12 12 12 12 11 11 12 12 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
NIC Maximum 128 letters NIC NIC SYS Maximum 31 letters SYS Maximum 31 letters NIC 1: Available NIC SYS Maximum 31 letters SYS Maximum 31 letters NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC Maximum 31 letters NIC Maximum 31 letters NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255 (Default value 000.000.000.000) NIC Maximum 31 letters 2: Not available

Code 1073 1074 1075 1076 1077 1078 1079 1080 1081 1082 1083 1084 1085 1086 1087 1088 1089 1090 1091 1092 1093 1094 1095 1096 1370 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL ALL 1 <1-2> 9100 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 515 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> 1 <1-2> 631 <1-65535> 1 <1-2> print Contents
Procedure
Network Availability of Raw/TCP Network TCP port number of Raw Network Availability of LPD client Network TCP port number of LPD Network LPD queue name Network Availability of IPP Network Availability of IPP port number 80 Network TCP port number of IPP Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network Network IPP printer name IPP printer location IPP printer information IPP printer information (more) Installer of IPP printer driver IPP printer Make and Model IPP printer information (more) MFGR IPP message from operator Availability of FTP print
NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC NIC Maximum 31 letters NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC 1: Valid 2: Invalid NIC NIC NIC NIC NIC Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters Maximum 127 letters
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 1
NIC Maximum 127 letters NIC Maximum 127 letters NIC Maximum 127 letters NIC Maximum 127 letters NIC 1: Available 2: Not available NIC Maximum 31 letters NIC Maximum 31 letters
Network Printer user name of FTP Network Printer user password of FTP Network TCP port number to FTP print server Network Login name to Novell print server Network Login password to Novell print server Network Name of SearchRoot server Network Scan rate setting of print queue Image Image quality control time process- accumulating counter ing Image Accumulated counter of process- output pages since the ing performing of image quality control
21 NIC <1-65535> NIC Maximum 47 letters NIC Maximum 31 letters
1371
ALL
NIC Maximum 31 letters 5 NIC Unit: Second <0-255> M Counts driving count of the drum 0 (image quality control time). <8 digits> Counts up when drum motor and image quality control are ON. 0 M Cleared to 0 by the image quality <4 digits> closed-loop control. Counts up with the number of printing job received after this control.

Code 1372 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 0 <8 digits> M Contents Counts up the heater control time accumulated (when power of the copier is ON) but does not count at the Sleep Mode. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (on standby). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (during printing). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up the heater control time accumulated (at energy saving mode). When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. When the counter value of the fuser belt is cleared, this counter value is also cleared in sync at PM support mode. Does not count up when cleaning is not effective. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the upper drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the lower drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP upper drawer.
Procedure
Image Heater and energizing time process- accumulating counter ing Display/0 clearing
1378
Image Fuser roller ready process- temperature time ing accumulating counter
ALL
0 <8 digits>
1380
Image Fuser roller printing process- temperature time ing accumulating counter
ALL
0 <8 digits>
1382
Image Fuser roller energy saving process- temperature time ing accumulating counter Display/0 clearing
ALL
0 <8 digits>
1385
Image Number of output pages process- (Thick paper 1) ing
ALL
0 <8 digits>
1386
ALL
0 <8 digits>
1387
ALL
0 <8 digits>
1388
Image Number of output pages process- (OHP film) ing
ALL
0 <8 digits>
1389 1390 1391 1392
Main charger Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding
Main charger wire cleaning counter display/0 clearing Feeding retry counter (upper drawer) Feeding retry counter (lower drawer) Feeding retry counter (PFP upper drawer)
ALL ALL ALL ALL
0 <5 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits>
M M M M
1 1 1 1

Code 1393 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 0 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> 10 <8 digits> M Contents Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the PFP lower drawer. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the bypass tray. Counts the number of times of the feeding retry from the LCF. When the number of feeding retry (08-1390 to 08-1395) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry will not be performed subsequently. In case 0 is set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry continues regardless of the counter setting value. Refer to (Note 1).
Procedure
Paper Feeding retry counter feeding (PFP lower drawer) Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Paper feeding Feeding retry counter (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter (LCF) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP upper drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (PFP lower drawer) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (bypass feed) Feeding retry counter upper limit value (LCF)
1394 1395 1396
ALL ALL ALL
M M M
1 1 1
1397
ALL
1398
ALL
1399
ALL
1400
ALL
1401
ALL
(Note 1) In this equipment, a toner image is formed on the transfer belt prior to a paper feeding. When the feeding retry occurs and the transport timing is delayed, the toner image on the transfer belt is cleaned off without the 2nd transfer since the paper cannot be reached for the 2nd transfer process. After that, the toner image formation is retried while the paper is waited. In this case, the toner for this image formation is consumed wastefully since the toner image on the transfer belt is already cleaned off, even though the printing is normally completed. Therefore, note that the excessive toner will be consumed consequently when the upper limit value of feeding retry counter is set larger or set as 0 (no limit). The toner is also consumed wastefully when the paper misfeeding occurs. Replace the roller at earlier timing if the paper misfeedings have occurred frequently.
<<Pixel counter related code>> (
Chapter 2.2.6)
Note: In the pixel counter function, the twin color copy mode is regarded as the full color mode.
Setting mode (08)
Code 1500 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL EUR: 0 UC: 1 JPN: 0 <0-1> Contents
Procedure
Pixel Standard paper size setting counter
SYS Selects the standard paper size to convert it into the pixel count (%). 0: A4 1: LT
1501 1502
Pixel Pixel counter all clearing counter Pixel Service technician reference counter counter clearing Pixel Toner cartridge reference counter counter clearing Pixel Pixel counter display setting counter Pixel Displayed reference setting counter
ALL ALL
1503
ALL
1504
ALL
1505
ALL
1506
Pixel Toner empty determination counter counter setting Pixel Threshold setting for toner counter empty determination (Output pages) Pixel Threshold setting for toner counter empty determination (Pixel counter) Pixel Pixel counter clear flag/ counter Service technician reference Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Service technician reference cleared date Toner cartridge reference cleared date (Y) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (M) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (C) Toner cartridge reference cleared date (K) Toner cartridge reference count started date (Y) Toner cartridge reference count started date (M) Toner cartridge reference count started date (C)
ALL
1507
ALL
1508
ALL
1509
ALL
SYS Clears all information related to the pixel counter. SYS Clears all information related to the service technician reference pixel counter. SYS Clears all information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel counter. 1 SYS Selects whether or not to display the <0-1> pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Displayed 1: Not displayed 0 SYS Selects the reference when display<0-1> ing the pixel counter on the LCD screen. 0: Service technician reference 1: Toner cartridge reference 0 SYS Selects the counter to determine <0-1> toner empty. 0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter 200 SYS Sets the number of output pages to <0-999> determine toner empty. This setting is valid when 0 is set at 08-1506. 12288 SYS Sets the number of output pages to <0-60000> determine toner empty. This setting is valid when 1 is set at 08-1506. 0 SYS Becomes 1 when 08-1502 is <0-1> performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1502 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed.
3 3
1510 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517
ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL ALL (color) ALL (color) ALL (color)
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Setting mode (08)

Code 1518 1547 Classification Pixel counter Pixel counter Items Toner cartridge reference count started date (K) Number of output pages/full color (Service technician reference) Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> ALL Contents
Procedure
PPC <8 digits> (color)
1548
Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Service technician reference)
PPC <8 digits> (black)
1549
Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (Service technician reference)
PRT <8 digits> (color)
1550
PRT <8 digits> (black)
1551
FAX <8 digits> (black)
1552
Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC <8 digits> (color)
1553
Pixel Number of output pages/ counter black (Toner cartridge reference)
PPC <8 digits> (black)
1554
Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference)
PRT <8 digits> (color)
1555
PRT <8 digits> (black)
1556
FAX <8 digits> (black)
SYS Displays the date on which 08-1503 was performed. SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the printer function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] SYS Counts the number of output pages converted to the standard paper size in the FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page]
2 2
Setting mode (08)

Code 1557 Classification Items Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> Contents
Procedure
Pixel Number of output pages/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference)
1558
Pixel counter
1559
Pixel counter
1560
Pixel counter
1561
Pixel counter
1562
Pixel counter
1563 1564 1565 1566 1577
Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter Pixel counter
1578
Pixel counter
1579
Pixel counter
PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages (color) converted to the standard paper size in the copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (Y) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (M) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (M) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PPC <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (C) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Number of output pages/full PRT <8 digits> SYS Counts the number of output pages color (C) (Toner cartridge (color) converted to the standard paper size reference) in the printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit. page] Toner cartridge Y ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the replacement counter (color) toner cartridge Y replacement. Toner cartridge M ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the replacement counter (color) toner cartridge M replacement. Toner cartridge C ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the replacement counter (color) toner cartridge C replacement. Toner cartridge K ALL <3 digits> SYS Counts the number of time of the replacement counter toner cartridge K replacement. 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in Average pixel count/full color PPC (color) <0-10000> (Y+M+C+K) (Service the copy function, full color mode, all technician reference) toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Average pixel count/full color PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (Y) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, reference) toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Average pixel count/full PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in color (M) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, reference) toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
2 2 2 2 2
Setting mode (08)

Procedure
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (C) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, reference) toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, reference) toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, technician reference) all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (M) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (C) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, reference) toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color technician reference) (color) mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Y) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (M) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (C) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/full color PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (K) (Service technician PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color reference) (color) mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] Pixel Average pixel count/black PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in counter (Service technician refer(black) <0-10000> the copy function, black mode and ence) service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Setting mode (08)

Procedure
Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y+M+C+K) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Service technician reference)
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the printer function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT/ <0-10000> the copy/printer/FAX function, black FAX mode and service technician (black) reference. [Unit: 0.01%] 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the PPC (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, all toner and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner Y and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner M and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner C and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner K and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Setting mode (08)

Procedure
Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Service technician reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference)
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K)+black (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K) (Toner cartridge reference)
1615
1616
1617
1618
PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> copy function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> printer function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> FAX function, black mode and service technician reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in <0-10000> the copy function, full color/black mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (color) <0-10000> the printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Setting mode (08)

Procedure
Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference)
1620
Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K)+black (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/full counter color (K)+black (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Average pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference)
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (Y) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (M) (Toner cartridge reference)
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the printer function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in <0-10000> the printer function, full color/black mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT <0-10000> the copy/printer function, full color (color) mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC/ 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in PRT/ <0-10000> the copy/printer/FAX function, black FAX mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the average pixel count in (black) <0-10000> the FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> copy function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner Y and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner M and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%]
Setting mode (08)

Procedure
Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (C) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/full color counter (K) (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference) Pixel Latest pixel count/black counter (Toner cartridge reference)
1633
1634
1639
1640
Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (Y) 1641-1 1641-0 1641-2 1641-3 1641-4 1641-5 1641-6 1641-7 1641-8 1641-9
0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100%
PRT SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the 0 (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner C and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (color) <0-10000> printer function, full color mode, toner K and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] FAX 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> FAX function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> copy function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PRT 0 SYS Displays the latest pixel count in the (black) <0-10000> printer function, black mode and toner cartridge reference. [Unit: 0.01%] PPC <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into (color) 10 ranges. The number of output PPC <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In (color) this code, the distributions in the PPC <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and (color) toner Y are displayed. [Unit: page] PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color) PPC <8 digits> SYS (color)
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Setting mode (08)

Code 1642-0 Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) Contents
Procedure
Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (M) 1642-1 1642-2 1642-3 1642-4 1642-5 1642-6 1642-7 1642-8 1642-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (C) 1643-1 1643-0 1643-2 1643-3 1643-4 1643-5 1643-6 1643-7 1643-8 1643-9
<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner M are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner C are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Setting mode (08)

Code 1644-0 Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PPC (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) Contents
Procedure
Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (K) 1644-1 1644-2 1644-3 1644-4 1644-5 1644-6 1644-7 1644-8 1644-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (Y) 1645-1 1645-0 1645-2 1645-3 1645-4 1645-5 1645-6 1645-7 1645-8 1645-9
<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function, full color mode and toner K are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner Y are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Setting mode (08)

Code 1646-0 Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) Contents
Procedure
Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (M) 1646-1 1646-2 1646-3 1646-4 1646-5 1646-6 1646-7 1646-8 1646-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (C) 1647-1 1647-0 1647-2 1647-3 1647-4 1647-5 1647-6 1647-7 1647-8 1647-9
<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner M are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner C are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Setting mode (08)

Code 1648-0 1648-1 1648-2 1648-3 1648-4 1648-5 1648-6 1648-7 1648-8 1648-9 1649-0 1649-1 1649-2 1649-3 1649-4 1649-5 1649-6 1649-7 1649-8 1649-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PRT (color) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) PPC (black) Contents
Procedure
Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/full color (K)
<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function, full color mode and toner K are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS copy function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
Setting mode (08)

Code 1650-0 1650-1 1650-2 1650-3 1650-4 1650-5 1650-6 1650-7 1650-8 1650-9 1651-0 1651-1 1651-2 1651-3 1651-4 1651-5 1651-6 1651-7 1651-8 1651-9 Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black Classification Items 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% 0-5% 5.1-10% 10.1-15% 15.1-20% 20.1-25% 25.1-30% 30.1-40% 40.1-60% 60.1-80% 80.1-100% Default Func- <Acceptable RAM tion value> PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) PRT (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) FAX (black) Contents
Procedure
Pixel Pixel count counter distribution/black
<8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the <8 digits> SYS printer function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS The pixel count data are divided into 10 ranges. The number of output <8 digits> SYS pages in each range is displayed. In this code, the distributions in the FAX <8 digits> SYS function and black mode are displayed. [Unit: page] <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS <8 digits> SYS
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
<<PM support mode related code>> The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08). The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table below. <Sub-codes> 0: Present number of output pages - Means the present number of output pages. 1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement - Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement. 2: Number of output pages at the last replacement - Means the number of output pages at the last replacement. 3: Present drive counts - Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds). 4: Recommended drive counts to be replaced - Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds). 5: Driving counts at the last replacement - Means the drive counts at the last replacement. 6: Present output pages for control - Means the present number of output pages for controlling. 7: Present drive counts for control - Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds). 8: Number of times replaced - Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen. Notes: Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7. When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice versa. When "0" is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated to "0".
Items Photoconductive drum
PM management Date of previous setting replacement

<Procedure 4> *Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>
Remarks <Default values of code 1150 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 <Default values of code 1158 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 <Default values of code 1166 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 <Default values of code 1174 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 <Default values of code 1182 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 <Default values of code 1190 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 <Default values of code 1198 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/200000 Sub-code 4: 315000/315000 <Default values of code 1200 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 116000/116000 <Default values of code 1202 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 30000/37500 Sub-code 4: 28000/28000 <Default values of code 1204 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 30000/37500 Sub-code 4: 28000/28000 <Default values of code 1206 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 30000/37500 Sub-code 4: 28000/28000 <Default values of code 1214 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 240000/300000 Sub-code 4: 505000/505000
1150-0 to 8
1151
Drum cleaning blade
1158-0 to 8
1159
Drum cleaner brush
1166-0 to 8
1167
Main charger grid
1174-0 to 8
1175
Main charger wire
1182-0 to 8
1183
Main charger wire cleaning pad
1190-0 to 8
1191
Ozone filter
1198-0 to 8
1199
Developer material K
1200-0 to 8
1201
Developer material Y
1202-0 to 8
1203
Developer material M
1204-0 to 8
1205
Developer material C
1206-0 to 8
1207
1st transfer roller
1214-0 to 8
1215
Items Transfer belt

Remarks <Default values of code 1228 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 240000/300000 Sub-code 4: 505000/505000 <Default values of code 1232 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 240000/300000 Sub-code 4: 505000/505000 <Default values of code 1240 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 156000/156000 <Default values of code 1250 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 <Default values of code 1258 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 <Default values of code 1260 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 <Default values of code 1270 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 <Default values of code 1272 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 <Default values of code 1276 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/150000 Sub-code 4: 285000/285000 <Default values of code 1282 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 <Default values of code 1284 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 <Default values of code 1286 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 120000/120000 <Default values of code 1290 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1292 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
1228-0 to 8
1229
Transfer belt cleaning blade
1232-0 to 8
1233
2nd transfer roller
1240-0 to 8
1241
Pressure roller
1250-0 to 8
1251
Oil roller
1258-0 to 8
1259
Cleaning roller
1260-0 to 8
1261
Pressure roller separation finger
1270-0 to 8
1271
Fuser belt
1272-0 to 8
1273
Fuser belt guide
1276-0 to 8
1277
Pickup roller (RADF)
1282-0, 1, 2, 8
1283
Feed roller (RADF)
1284-0, 1, 2, 8
1285
Separation roller (RADF)
1286-0, 1, 2, 8
1287
Pickup roller (Upper drawer)
1290-0, 1, 2, 8
1291
Pickup roller (Lower drawer)
1292-0, 1, 2, 8
1293
Items Pickup roller (LCF)

Remarks <Default values of code 1294 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1298 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1300 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1302 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1306 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1308 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1310 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 160000/160000 <Default values of code 1312 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1314 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1316 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1320 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1322 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1324 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1328 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1330 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000 <Default values of code 1332 (e-STUDIO3511/4511)> Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0/0 Sub-code 1: 80000/80000
1294-0, 1, 2, 8
1295
Feed roller (Upper drawer)
1298-0, 1, 2, 8
1299
Feed roller (Lower drawer)
1300-0, 1, 2, 8
1301
Feed roller (LCF)
1302-0, 1, 2, 8
1303
Separation roller (Upper drawer) Separation roller (Lower drawer) Separation roller (LCF)
1306-0, 1, 2, 8
1307
1308-0, 1, 2, 8
1309
1310-0, 1, 2, 8
1311
Separation roller (PFP upper drawer) Separation roller (PFP lower drawer) Separation roller (Bypass unit) Feed roller (PFP upper drawer) Feed roller (PFP lower drawer) Feed roller (Bypass unit)
1312-0, 1, 2, 8
1313
1314-0, 1, 2, 8
1315
1316-0, 1, 2, 8
1317
1320-0, 1, 2, 8
1321
1322-0, 1, 2, 8
1323
1324-0, 1, 2, 8
1325
Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer) Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer) Pickup roller (Bypass unit)
1328-0, 1, 2, 8
1329
1330-0, 1, 2, 8
1331
1332-0, 1, 2, 8
1333
<<Procedure to copy the total counter value (08-257)>> 1. Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously. 2. Key in the code 257 with the digital keys and press the [START] button (the following is displayed). Note: Before performing the following operations, note the current counter values.
3. Key in the value 1 or 2 with the digital key and press the [START] button. The value entered is displayed on the left of the %, and the [ENTER] button is displayed. Note: The value can be erased by pressing the [CLEAR] button to change as long as the [START] button is not pressed. (The value on the left of the % is reset to 0 by pressing the [CLEAR] button.) Key in 1 to copy the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A) onto the value of the backup counter (SLG board) (B).
(A)
(B)
Key in 2 to copy the value of the backup counter (SLG board) (B) onto the value of the total counter (LGC board) (A). 4. Press the [ENTER] button to complete overwriting of the counter value. Note: The screen returns to the code entry screen without copying (overwriting) the value when the [CANCEL] button is pressed.
(A) (B)
2.2.6 Pixel counter (1) Outline Pixel counter is a function that counts the number of dots emitted by the laser and converts it into the print ratio (%) per standard paper size. This Print ratio (%) per standard paper size is called Pixel count (%). This function enables you to know how each user uses the equipment and to grasp the tendency of toner consumption (number of output pages per cartridge). (2) Factors affecting toner consumption Standard number of output pages per cartridge shows the average number of output pages under the condition that the data of print ratio 6% is printed on the standard paper size (A4/LT) at a normal temperature and humidity. However, users do not always print under the above condition. As for the type of original, copy/print mode and environment, each user has different tendency, and as a result, the number of output pages per cartridge becomes different depending on the user. The major factors affecting toner consumption are as follows: (a) Original/Data coverage (b) Original/Data density (c) Original/Print mode (d) Density setting Also there are other factors in addition to the above, such as environment, individual difference of equipment, difference in lot quality of materials, toner density and drum surface potential.
The general relations between the above 4 factors and toner consumption per output page in the copy function are as follows:
Toner consumption
Original coverage
Toner consumption
Original density
Toner consumption
TEXT /PHOTO
TEXT
PHOTO
PRINTED IMAGE
Toner consumption
MAP
Original mode
Manual Manual Automatic Manual Manual Manual density density density density density density -5 -1 Center +1 +5
Density setting
Fig. 2-203 Factors affecting toner consumption and the tendency
(3) Details of pixel counter (a) Toner cartridge reference and service technician reference The pixel counter function in this equipment has 2 references, toner cartridge reference and service technician reference. Toner cartridge reference This is a system that accumulates data on each color between the installation of a new toner cartridge and next installation. The installation of new toner cartridge is judged when the total number of pixel count or output pages after the detection of toner empty has exceeded the threshold. The threshold to be used is selectable in the setting mode (08-1506) between the pixel count and output pages (0: Output pages 1: Pixel counter). The threshold of pixel count is set in the setting mode (08-1508) and that of output pages is set in the setting mode (08-1507). When the new toner cartridge is judged as installed, the data related with the previous cartridge is cleared and replaced with the data after the installation of new cartridge. Clearing of the counter of the toner cartridge reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1503). Service technician reference This is a system that accumulates data between clearing the counter of the service technician reference by service technician and subsequently clearing the same counter. Clearing of the counter of the service technician reference is performed in the setting mode (08-1502). (b) Print count (number of output pages) The number of output pages shown at the pixel counter is counted after converting all paper sizes to the standard size (A4/LT). Printing on other than the standard size is converted by paper area ratio. The standard size is set in the setting mode (08-1500). The examples of conversion are as follows: Ex.) 1. 1 is added to the print count when printing on A4/LT size. 2. 2 is added to the print count when printing on A3/LD size. (area ratio to A4/LT: 200%) 3. 1.49 is added to the print count when printing on B4 size. (area ratio to A4: 149%) 4. 1.27 is added to the print count when printing on LG size. (area ratio to LT: 127%)
(c) Pixel count (%) Pixel count (%) shows the ratio of laser emitting pixels to all pixels on standard paper. The examples of pixel count are as follows: Note: In the following examples, solid copy is considered to be 100%. But since the image has 4 margins, it never becomes 100% actually. Ex.) 1. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 5 2. Printing 5 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) Pixel count: 0%, Print count: 5 3. Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Printing 2 pages on A4/LT size with blank copy (Laser never emits.) Pixel count: 50%, Print count: 4 4. Printing 3 pages on A4/LT size with 6% of laser emission Printing 1 page on A4/LT size with 2% of laser emission Pixel count: 5%, Print count: 4 5. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with solid copy (Laser emits to all pixels.) Pixel count: 100%, Print count: 4 6. Printing 2 pages on A3/LD size with 6% of laser emission Pixel count: 6%, Print count: 4 (d) Average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%) There are 2 types of the value calculated as the pixel count, average pixel count (%) and latest pixel count (%). 1. Average pixel count (%) The average value of all pixel count data after each reference data is cleared is calculated and displayed. 2. Latest pixel count (%) The value is displayed for printing just before the pixel counter is confirmed.
(e) Type of calculated data Since this is multifunctional and color equipment, the data of pixel count is calculated for each function and color. The following list is the information that can be confirmed by LCD screen. But actually, more information can be confirmed by the setting mode (08). See after-mentioned (5)-(c) for details. : With data : Without data
Toner cartridge reference Yellow Magenta Cyan Copy function Printer function FAX function Total
Table 2-201 Type of calculated data
Service technician reference Full color/Twin color Black Black
Black
Total
Yellow Magenta Cyan
(f) Setting related with the pixel counter function (f-1) Standard paper size setting The standard paper size (A4 or LT) to convert it into the pixel count is selected (08-1500). (f-2) Pixel counter display setting Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (08-1504). (f-3) Display reference setting The reference when displaying the pixel counter on the LCD screen (toner cartridge reference or service technician reference) is selected (08-1505). (f-4) Determination counter of toner empty This is the counter to determine the replacement of new toner cartridge after the toner empty is detected. After the toner empty is detected by the auto-toner sensor, this counter checks if toner empty is not detected one more time while the specified number of pixel count or output pages is counted. (f-5) Pixel counter clearing There are 3 types for the pixel count clear as follows: 08-1501: All information related to the pixel count is cleared. 08-1502: All information related to the service technician reference pixel count is cleared. 08-1503: All information related to the toner cartridge reference pixel count is cleared.
(4) Relation between pixel count and toner consumption The users printing out the image with large coverage or high density may cause the large value of pixel count. And the setting that toner consumption becomes high in the original mode or density setting may cause it as well. In this case, the replacement cycle of toner cartridge is faster than the standard number of output pages. Therefore, this trend needs to be grasped for the service. The relation between pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge is as follows:
Standard number of output pages (K) Number of output pages per cartridge (Page) Y
Y/2
Standard number of output pages (Y, M, C)
X/2 Y/10 X/10 6% 12% 60% Pixel count (%)

Fig. 2-204 Pixel count and number of output pages per cartridge
(5) Pixel counter confirmation (a) Display on LCD screen Whether or not to display the pixel counter on the LCD screen is selected (0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed) in the setting mode (08-1504), and whether or not to display it at the service technician reference or toner cartridge reference is selected (0: Service technician reference, 1: Toner cartridge reference) in the setting mode (08-1505). The following screen is displayed when the buttons, [USER FUNCTIONS], [COUNTER] and [PIXEL COUNTER] are pressed in this order after Displayed is selected with the code above and the power is, as usual, turned ON. (The displayed buttons are depending on the setting of 08-1505.)
Table 2-205 Reference selection screen
When selecting and pressing the button in the above screen, each pixel counter screen is displayed. [TONER CARTRIDGE] button: Information screen of toner cartridge reference is displayed. [SERVICE (COLOR)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (full color) is displayed. [SERVICE (BLACK)] button: Information screen of service technician reference (black) is displayed.
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [TONER CARTRIDGE] button.
Table 2-206 Information screen of toner cartridge reference
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (COLOR)] button.
Table 2-207 Information screen of service technician reference (full color)
The following screen is displayed when pressing the [SERVICE (BLACK)] button.
Table 2-208 Information screen of service technician reference (black)
(b) Data list printing The data for pixel counter can be printed in the list print mode (9S). 9S-104: The data of the toner cartridge reference is printed. 9S-105: The data of service technician reference is printed.
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 2003.4.23 09:55 TONERCARTRIDGE No DATE 0 20030423 1 20030423 2 20030423 9 20030423 10 20030423 11 20030423 Col. Y Y Y K K K Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] PPC 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 PRN 23456 23456 23456 23456 23456 23456 FAX ------12345 12345 12345 TOTAL 45678 45678 45678 45678 45678 45678
Table 2-209 Data list of toner cartridge reference
PIXEL COUNTER CODE LIST 2003.4.23 09:55 SERVICEMAN No DATE 0 20030423 1 20030423 2 20030423 9 20030423 10 20030423 11 20030423 Col. Y Y Y K K K Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] Print Count [LT/A4] Average Pixel Count [%] Latest Pixel Count [%] PPC 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 PRN 23456 23456 23456 23456 23456 23456 FAX ------12345 12345 12345 TOTAL 45678 45678 45678 45678 45678 45678
Table 2-210 Data list of service technician reference
(c) Display in the setting mode (08) Information of pixel count can be also checked in the setting mode (08). For details, see 2.2.5 Setting mode (08). (c-1) Print count, pixel count
Full color/Twin color Yellow Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Average pixel count (%) 1557 1609 1626 1558 1615 1630 1621 Magenta 1559 1610 1627 1560 1616 1631 1622 Cyan 1561 1611 1628 1562 1617 1632 1623 Black 1552 1612 1629 1554 1618 1633 Black 1553 1613 1639 1555 1619 1640 1556 1625 1634 Black (at color) + Black 1614 1620 1624
Copy function
Printer function
FAX function
Total
Table 2-202 Pixel count code table (toner cartridge reference)
Total Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Print count (page) Average pixel count (%) Latest pixel count (%) Average pixel count (%) 1547 1577 1596 1549 1582 1601 1587
Full color/Twin color Yellow Magenta Cyan 1578 1597 1583 1602 1588 1579 1598 1584 1603 1598 1580 1599 1585 1604 1590
Black 1581 1600 1586 1605 1591
Black 1548 1592 1606 1550 1593 1607 1551 1594 1608 1595
Copy function
Printer function
FAX function
Total
Table 2-203 Pixel count code table (service technician reference)
(c-2) Pixel count distribution

Full color/Twin color Magenta Cyan 1642 1646 1643 1647 Black 1649 1650 1651
Yellow Copy function Printer function FAX function Pixel count distribution (page) Pixel count distribution (page) Pixel count distribution (page) 1641 1645 -
Black 1644 1648 -
Table 2-204 Pixel count code table
Note: By entering the sub code at the above code, the pixel count distribution can be displayed dividing into 10 ranges. The sub codes are as follows. 0: 0 - 5% 5: 25.1 - 30% (c-3) Other information Toner cartridge replacement counter The toner cartridge replacement count is displayed. 08-1563: Toner cartridge Y 08-1565: Toner cartridge C 08-1564: Toner cartridge M 08-1566: Toner cartridge K 1: 5.1 - 10% 6: 30.1 - 40% 2: 10.1 - 15% 7: 40.1 - 60% 3: 15.1 - 20% 8: 60.1- 80% 4: 20.1 - 25% 9: 80.1 - 100%
Toner cartridge reference count started date The toner cartridge reference count started date is displayed. 08-1515: Toner cartridge Y 08-1517: Toner cartridge C 05-1516: Toner cartridge M 05-1518: Toner cartridge K
Service technician reference cleared date The service technician reference cleared date (08-1510) is displayed. The date (08-1502 was performed) is stored. Toner cartridge reference cleared date The toner cartridge reference cleared date is displayed. The date (08-1503 was performed) is stored. 08-1511: Toner cartridge Y 08-1513: Toner cartridge C 05-1512: Toner cartridge M 05-1514: Toner cartridge K
2.2.7 Classification List of Adjustment Mode (05) / Setting Mode (08)

Classification User interface Adjustment Mode (05) Setting Mode (08) [Date/Time] 200, 638, 640 [Timer] 204, 205, 206, 260, 261, 262 [Screen] 207, 602 [File] 209, 218, 219, 264, 288 [Language] 220, 221 [Administrator] 263 [Scanning] 265, 266, 273, 274 [Box] 267, 270 [HDD] 271 [Address book] 269 [E-mail] 272 [Default setting] 275, 276, 277, 278, 279, 280, 281, 282, 283, 284, 285, 286, 289, 331, 480, 503, 550, 585, 587, 588, 603, 604, 607, 618, 642 [Raw printing] 290, 291, 292, 293, 294, 295, 296, 297, 298, 299 [Copy volume] 300 [Original counter] 302 [Automatic calibration] 595, 632 [AMS] 605 [Control panel] 610 [Book duplexing] 611 [Summer time] 612 [Paper size] 613 [Department management] 617, 620, 621, 622, 623, 624, 672 [Sorting] 627, 634, 641, 649 [Original direction] 628 [Image shift] 636 [Color specification] 643, 644 [Edit copying] 645, 646 [Box printing] 647 [X in 1] 650 [Annotation] 651, 657 [Automatic transferring] 660, 661 [Indicator] 671 [Priority drawer] 689 [Paper type] 697 [Image position] 305, 306 [Distortion] 308 [Reproduction ratio] 340, 884, 1060 [Carriage position] 359, 360 [Fixed value] 364, 369 [Margin] 430, 431, 432, 433, 435, 436, 437, 438, 439 [Image density] 501, 503, 504, 505, 506, 507, 508, 509, 510, 512, 514, 515, 710, 714, 715, 719, 720, 724, 725, 729, 845, 846, 847, 850, 851, 852, 855, 856, 857, 860, 861, 862, 1550, 1551, 1552, 1553, 1554, 1560, 1561, 1562, 1563, 1564, 1570, 1571, 1572, 1573, 1574, 1580, 1581, 1582, 1583, 1584
Scanner
Image
[Error diffusion / Dither] 502 [ACS] 268, 609-0 to 4 [Smoothing] 560, 561, 562 [Image quality] 586, 589 [Gamma correction] 597
Classification Image
Adjustment Mode (05) [Range correction] 532, 533, 534, 570, 571, 572, 693, 694, 695, 825, 826, 827, 828, 830, 831, 832, 833, 835, 836, 837, 838 [Color deviation correction] 417-0 to 3, 418-0 to 3 [Gamma adjustment] 580, 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1642, 1643 [Gamma balance] 590-0 to 2, 591-0 to 2, 592-0 to 2, 596-0 to 2, 597-0 to 2, 598-0 to 2, 599-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2, 882-0 to 2, 883-0 to 2, 1000 [Sharpness] 604, 605, 606, 840, 841, 842, 843, 1086, 1087, 1088, 1737, 1738, 1739, 1740, 1741, 1757 [Smudged/faint text] 648, 654, 655 [Toner saving] 664, 665, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058 [Pixel size] 663 [Smoothing] 667-0 to 4 [Binarization] 700, 701, 702 [Background adjustment] 848, 853, 858 [Color balance] 1010-0 to 2, 1011-0 to 2, 1012-0 to 2, 1013-0 to 2, 1014-0 to 2, 1015-0 to 2, 1016-0 to 2, 1017-0 to 2, 1018-0 to 2, 1019-0 to 2, 1020-0 to 2, 1021-0 to 2, 1022-0 to 2, 1023-0 to 2, 1024-0 to 2, 1025-0 to 2, 1026-0 to 2, 1027-0 to 2, 1028-0 to 2, 1029-0 to 2, 1030-0 to 2, 1031-0 to 2, 1032-0 to 2, 1033-0 to 2, 1034-0 to 2, 1035-0 to 2, 1036-0 to 2, 1037-0 to 2, 1038-0 to 2, 1039-0 to 2, 1040-0 to 2, 1041-0 to 2, 1779-0 to 2, 1780-0 to 2, 1781-0 to 2, 1782-0 to 2, 1783-0 to 2, 1784-0 to 2, 1785-0 to 2, 1786-0 to 2, 1787-0 to 2, 1788-0 to 2, 1789-0 to 2, 1790-0 to 2, 1791-0 to 2, 1792-0 to 2, 1793-0 to 2, 1794-0 to 2, 1795-0 to 2, 1796-0 to 2, 1797-0 to 2, 1798-0 to 2 [Toner amount] 1047-0 to 1, 1048-0 to 1, 1049-0 to 1, 1050-0 to 1, 1612, 1613, 1614, 1615, 1616 [ACS] 1065, 1066, 1675, 1676 [Background/Black density] 1070, 1071, 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077 [RGB] 1080, 1081, 1082 [Maximum text density] 1630, 1631, 1932, 1633 [Background processing] 1688, 1689, 1690, 1691, 1692, 1693, 1694, 1695, 1696, 1697, 1698, 1699, 1700, 1701, 1702, 1708, 1709, 1710, 1711, 1712 [Highlight pen] 1769, 1770, 1771, 1772 [Contrast voltage] 330-0 to 3, 332-0 to 3, 380-0 to 3, 381-0 to 3, 1800-0 to 3, 1801-0 to 3, 18110 to 3, 1812-0 to 3, 1815-0 to 3 [Laser power] 331-0 to 3, 333-0 to 3, 382-0 to 3, 383-0 to 3, 384-0 to 3, 1802-0 to 3, 1803-0 to 3, 1816-0 to 3, 1817, 1819, 1820, 1821 [Main charger] 385-0 to 3, 1805-0 to 3, 1806-0 to 3, 1807-0 to 3, 1808-0 to 3, 1809-0 to 3, 1810-0 to 3
Setting Mode (08)
Image control
[1st transfer] 541, 542, 543 [2nd transfer] 544, 545, 546, 547, 548 [Setting] 549, 551
Classification Image control
Adjustment Mode (05) [Developer] 386-0 to 3 [Sensor] 288, 389, 390-0 to 3, 390-1 to 3, 392 [Temperature/Humidity] 393 [Performing] 394, 395, 396 [Background voltage] 1813-0 to 3, 1814-0 to 3
Setting Mode (08) [Automatic starting] 559, 565, 566, 567, 568, 569, 570, 571, 572 [Drum] 552, 553 [Contrast voltage] 554, 556, 558 [Laser power] 555, 557 [Abnormality detection] 573, 574, 575, 576 [Counter] 1370, 1371
Drive system
Feeding system
[Main motor] 421, 422 [Exit motor] 424, 425 [Transport motor] 426, 427 [Aligning amount] 448-0 to 2, 449-0 to 2, 450-0 to 2, 452-0 to 2, 455-0 to 2, 457, 458-0 to 2, 460-0 to 2, 461-0 to 2, 462-0 to 3, 463-0 to 2, 469-0 to 5, 470-0 to 2, 471-0 to 2, 472-0 to 2, 473, 474-0 to 2, 475-0 to 2 [Paper pushing amount] 466-0 to 7, 467
Laser
Main charger Developer
[Polygonal motor] 401, 405 [Write start] 410, 411, 440, 441, 442, 443, 444, 445, 494, 495, 496, 498-0 to 1 [Sideways deviation] 497-0 to 5 [Grid] 241, 242, 243, 244 [Auto-toner] 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206 [Color auto-toner] 207, 208
[Paper dimension] 229, 230, 231, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242, 243, 244, 245, 246, 247, 248, 249, 470, 471 [Feeding setting] 254, 255, 481, 619, 658, 659 [Paper retry] 463-0 to 1, 464-0 to 1, 465-0 to 1, 466-0 to 1, 467-0 to 1,468-0 to 1, 482, 1390, 1391, 1392, 1393, 1394, 1395, 1396, 1397, 1398, 1399, 1400, 1401 [Coated paper Mode] 675-0 to 4, 676, 677-0 to 4 [Paper size] 224, 225, 226, 227, 228, 256 [Blank copy prevention] 625 [Polygonal motor] 398, 399, 478, 479, 483, 484, 485, 486, 488, 489, 490
Transfer
[Grid] 334, 335 [Color developer] 338, 339 [Black developer] 372, 373 [1st transfer] 250, 251 [2nd transfer] 252, 253, 254, 255 [1st transfer] 210, 211-0 to 3, 212, 214, 215, 216, 217, 218-0 to 3, 220-0 to 3, 221-0 to 3, 222-0 to 3, 223-0 to 3, 233, 245, 262-0 to 3, 263, 265, 266, 267, 268, 269-0 to 3, 271-0 to 3, 272-0 to 3, 273-0 to 3, 274-0 to 3, 1829-0 to 2, 1831, 1832, 1833 [2nd transfer] 224, 225, 226, 227-0 to 3, 229-0 to 3, 230-0 to 1, 231-0 to 1, 232-0 to 1, 234-0 to 3, 236-0 to 3, 237-0 to 1, 238-0 to 1, 239-0 to 1, 275, 276, 277-0 to 3, 279-0 to 3, 290-0 to 1, 291-0 to 1, 292-0 to 1, 293-0 to 4, 294-0 to 3, 296-0 to 3, 297-0 to 1, 298-0 to 1, 299-0 to 1, 1822-0 to 4, 1823-0 to 4, 1825-0 to 4, 1826-0 to 4, 1827-0 to 4, 1828-0 to 4 [Cleaning] 284, 285
[Cleaning] 511 [Color auto-toner] 819-0 to 2, 820-0 to 2, 822-0 to 2, 823-0 to 2, 824-0 to 2, 858-0 to 2, 859-0 to 2, 860-0 to 1, 861-0 to 1, 862-0 to 1, 863-0 to 1, 864, 865, 866-0 to 1, 867, 868, 869, 870, 871, 872, 873-0 to 2, 874, 875-0 to 2, 876-0 to 2, 877-0 to 2, 878-0 to 2, 879-0 to 2, 880-0 to 2, 881-0 to 2 [Stabilization] 821 [Transfer] 810
[Cleaning] 487
Classification Fuser
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08) [Status counter] 400 [Temperature] 409, 410-0 to 1, 411, 412-0 to 1, 413-0 to 1, 422, 437-0 to 1, 438-0 to 1 [Transport speed] 430, 431, 432 [Pre-running] 417-0 to 1, 439-0 to 1, 440-0 to 1, 441-0 to 1, 526-0 to 1, 583-0 to 2, 584 [Switchback] 462
RADF
Finisher Network
[Aligning amount] 354, 355 [Sensor/EEPROM] 356, 367, 368 [Transporting] 357, 358, 365, 366 [Binding/Folding position] 468-0 to 2
Counter
[Tray reset] 648 [Cascade] 652, 653 [NIC] 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004 [IP address] 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009, 1010 [IPX] 1011 [Frame type] 1012 [NCP] 1013 [AppleTalk] 1014, 1015 [LDAP] 1016 [DNS] 1017, 1018, 1019 [DDNS] 1020 [SLP] 1021 [NetBios] 1023 [WINS] 1024, 1025 [Bindery] 1026 [NDS] 1027 [Directory] 1028, 1029 [HTTP] 1030, 1031, 1032, 1033, 1034, 1035 [SMTP] 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1041, 1042 [Offramp] 1043, 1044, 1045 [POP3] 1046, 1047, 1048, 1049, 1050, 1051, 1052 [FTP] 1053, 1054, 1055, 1056, 1057, 1058, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1089, 1090, 1091, 1092 [MIB] 1063 [Community] 1065, 1066 [TRAP] 1067, 1068, 1069, 1070 [Raw/TCP] 1073, 1074 [LPD] 1075, 1076, 1077 [IPP] 1078, 1079, 1080, 1081, 1082, 1083, 1084, 1085, 1086, 1087, 1088 [Novell] 1093, 1094 [SerchRoot] 1095 [Print queue] 1096 [External counter] 202, 381, 683 [Counter copy] 257 [Paper size] 301-0 to 16, 303-0 to 16, 304-0 to 16, 305-0 to 16, 306-0 to 16, 307-0 to 16, 308-0 to 16, 309-0 to 16, 310-0 to 16, 311-0 to 16, 312-0 to 16, 313-0 to 16, 314-0 to 16, 315-0 to 16, 316-0 to 16 [Large/Small size] 317-0 to 2, 318-0 to 2, 319-0 to 2, 320-0 to 2, 321-0 to 2, 322-0 to 2, 323-0 to 2, 324-0 to 2, 325-0 to 2, 326-0 to 2, 327-0 to 2,
Classification Counter
Adjustment Mode (05)
Setting Mode (08) 328-0 to 2, 329-0 to 2, 330-0 to 2, 332-0 to 2, 333-0 to 2, 334-0 to 2, 335-0 to 2 [Double count] 346, 347, 348, 349, 352, 353 [Paper source] 356, 357, 358, 359, 360, 370, 372, 374 [HDD] 390, 391, 392, 393 [Count method] 616, 663 [Department management] 629 [Fuser] 1372, 1378, 1380, 1382 [Paper type] 1385, 1386, 1387, 1388 [Main charger] 1389 [System] 900, 920, 921, 922, 923, 924, 925, 926, 927, 928, 929, 930, 931, 933, 934, 935, 936, 937, 938, 939 [Engine] 903, 905, 907, 908 [FAX] 915 [NIC] 916 [PM counter] 223, 251, 252, 375, 376 [Telephone] 250 [Error history] 253 [FSMS] 258, 999 [Service notification] 287, 702, 703, 704, 707, 708, 711, 715, 716, 717, 718, 719, 720, 721, 722, 723, 724, 766, 767, 768, 769, 770, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, 777, 778, 779, 780, 781, 782, 783, 784, 785, 786, 787, 788, 789, 790, 791, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796 [HTTP] 726, 727, 728, 729, 730, 731 [Supply order] 732, 733, 734, 735, 736, 738, 739, 740, 741, 742, 743, 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751, 752, 753, 754, 755, 756, 757, 758, 759, 760, 761, 762, 763, 764, 765, 794, 795 [Downloading] 797 [Destination] 201, 701 [Line] 203 [Private] 259 [Local I/F] 614 [Memory] 615 [Partition] 662, 666, 667 [Clearing] 665, 669, 693 [Database] 684, 685, 686 [HDD] 690, 691, 694 [Control panel] 692 [Scrambler board] 696, 698, 699 [Equipment number] 995
Version
Maintenance
Others
[Equipment number] 976
3. ADJUSTMENT
3.1 Adjustment Order (Image Related Adjustment)
This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing components which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to be obeyed in priority. In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments, while the dotted lines lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.
Developer material Parts to be replaced Drum Main charger wire Main charger grid Code in mode 05 200, 201, 202, 203, 204, 206 Transfer belt 1st transfer roller 2nd transfer roller
Item to be adjusted 3.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner sensor
Item to be adjusted 3.3 Adjustment of image quality control / Automatic initialization of image quality control
Code in mode 05 396
3.4 Image dimensional adjustment Order Items 1 3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller Code in mode 05 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463 401 411 426 441, 440, 444 443, 442, 445 498 405 306 340 305 430 432 433
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3.4.3 Printer related adjustment
(a) (b) (c) (d)
Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction Primary scanning data laser writing start position Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing (a) Image distortion 3.4.4 (b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction Scanner (c) Image location of primary scanning direction related adjustment (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (e) Image location of secondary scanning direction (f) Top margin (g) Right margin (h) Bottom margin Code in mode 05 1642, (1643, 580) 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003 Adjust the image quality if necessary. ( Chapter 3.5, 3.6, 3.7)
Item to be adjusted 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PPC) 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (PRT)
END November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3-1 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT
3.2 Adjustment of the Auto-Toner Sensor

When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure. (1) Install the cleaner and developer unit.
Note: Do not install the toner cartridge. (2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. The following message will be displayed. [0] [5] [POWER] 100% TEST MODE A A3
(3)
Key in a code and press the [START] button. Code 200: All developer materials 201: Developer material Y 202: Developer material M 203: Developer material C 204: Developer material K 206: Developer material Y, M, C 100% (Code) [START] TEST MODE 200 A3
(4)
Adjustment for K (Magnetometric sensor control) The following message will be displayed approx. 2 minutes later. (B) (C) (A) K: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltage (V) (C): No display (A): Target values (V) for adjustment reference voltage Note: The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A). K: xxxV
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT
3-2
In 30 to 60 seconds, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged. Then the sensor output control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C). (B) (C) (A) K: xxxV K: yyy K: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltage (V) (C): Sensor output control value (bit value) (A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage Note: Be careful that the values in (A), (B) and (C) vary with humidity. In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is automatically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. (5) Adjustments for Y, M and C (light sensor control) In 15 to 45 seconds, the following message will be displayed (The time varies with the number of colors to be adjusted). (B) (C) (A) Y: (B): Current sensor voltage (V) (C): No display (A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage Note: The current sensor voltage (V) shown in (B) automatically changes, gradually approaching the target value for adjustment reference voltage shown in (A). After approx. 5 seconds have passed, the current sensor voltage (V) in (B) is converged. Then the sensor output control value (bit value) corresponding to the initial developer material is displayed in (C). (B) (C) (A) Y: xxxV Y: yyy Y: zzzV (B): Current sensor voltage (V) (C): Sensor output control value (bit value) (A): Target value (V) for adjustment reference voltage Y:
3-3
In case of single-color adjustment, press the [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory when the control value is displayed. In case of multiple-color adjustment, it is automatically proceeded to the adjustment of next color. When the adjustments of all colors have finished and [ENTER] is lit, press [ENTER] button to store the adjustment results in memory. (6) Standard of adjustment value range (A): Adjustment reference voltages (V)
Humidity(%) 29.9 or below 30.0-44.9 45.0-59.9 60.0-74.9 75.0 or above K 2.47 2.49 2.50 2.69 2.86 Y 1.25 M 1.25 C 1.25
Note: Since the adjustments for Y, M and C are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correction is not performed. (B): Current sensor voltages (V)
Humidity(%) 29.9 or below 30.0-44.9 45.0-59.9 60.0-74.9 75.0 or above K 2.37-2.57 2.39-2.59 2.40-2.60 2.59-2.79 2.76-2.96 Y 1.15-1.35 M 1.15-1.35 C 1.15-1.35
Note: Since the adjustments for Y, M and C are controlled by the light sensor, the humidity correction is not performed. (7) (8) Turn the power OFF. Install the toner cartridges.
3-4
3.3 Performing Image Quality Control

(1) When unpacking Prior to image dimensional adjustment, perform the Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) procedure. When any of the following parts is replaced, be sure to perform the Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) procedure. Photoconductive drum Image quality sensor 2nd transfer roller Drum cleaning blade Developer material Transfer belt Main charger Drum cleaner brush Laser optical unit 1st transfer roller Main charger grid
(2)
Note: When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in addition, Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396) should be done first. (3) When performing "Automatic gamma adjustment" in cases no parts written above are replaced, do the Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) procedure before "Automatic gamma adjustment".
Item to be adjusted Forced performing of image quality closed-loop control <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment Mode (2) Key in [395] and press the [START] button. (3) "WAIT" is displayed. (4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment returns to the initial state of Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to 5. TROUBLESHOOTING. 396 Automatic initialization of image quality control <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment Mode (2) Key in [396] and press the [START] button. (3) "WAIT" is displayed. (4) When the adjustment finishes normally, the equipment will return to initial state of the Adjustment Mode. If an error has occurred, take appropriate action by referring to 5. TROUBLESHOOTING. Contents
Code 395
3-5
3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment

3.4.1 General description There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. Prior to this image dimensional adjustment, perform the "Automatic initialization of image quality control (05-396)". When adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.
Item to be adjusted 1 Paper alignment at the registration roller Code in mode 05 448, 449, 450, 452, 455, 457, 458, 459, 460, 461, 462, 463 (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction
2 Printer related adjustment
401 411 426 441, 440, 444, 443, 442, 445 498 405 306 340 305 430 432 433
(Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed) (b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position (c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transport motor rotation speed) (d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position (e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing (a) Image distortion
3 Scanner related adjustment
(b) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (c) Image location of primary scanning direction (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (e) Image location of secondary scanning direction (f) Top margin (g) Right margin (h) Bottom margin
3-6
[Procedure to key in adjustment values] In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [FAX] button, immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be performed (normal copy mode).
Varies with the code XXX keyed in.
<Operation keys>
<Display> 100%
A3
0 1
TEST MODE
POWER Digital keys : Key in codes. 100% START TEST MODE Digital keys : Key in adjustment values. ( CLEAR Use to make corrections) ENTER
or
Code No.
XXX
ZZZ
A3
Adjustment value newly keyed in. (If no entering, YYY is displayed.)
YYY
Current adjustment value 100% TEST MODE
Value ZZZ is stored replacing values YYY.
A3
INTERRUPT FAX Test copy START If the test copy does not satisfy the specified values, return to step 1 and repeat the adjustment procedure. Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode. 100% Wait Warming Up
A3
100% COPYING
A3
3-7
3.4.2 Paper alignment at the registration roller The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).
Paper type Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Weight 64-80 g/m2 17-20 lb. 81-105 g/m2 21-28 lb. 106-163 g/m2 29-43 lb. 164-209 g/m2 44-55 lb. Upper drawer 450 (*4) 469 (*4) Lower drawer 452 (*4) 470 (*4) PFP upper PFP lower drawer 448 (*4) 471 (*4) drawer 449 (*4) 472 (*4) LCF 457 473 ADU 455 (*1) 474 (*1) Bypass feed Black Color 458 (*1) 460 (*1) 461 (*1) 475 (*3) 462 (*2) 475 (*3) 463 (*1) 475 (*3)
Sub-code (*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size (*2) 0: Long size 1: Middle size (*3) 0: Long size of thick paper 2 2: Short size of thick paper 2 4: Middle size of thick paper 3 6: Long size of OHP film 8: Short size of OHP film (*4) 0: Long size 1: Middle size
2: Short size 2: Short size 3: Post card 1: Middle size of thick paper 2 3: Long size of thick paper 3 5: Short size of thick paper 3 7: Middle size of OHP film 9: Post card 2: Short size 1 3: Short size 2
Notes: 1. Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer) Middle size: 220-329 mm (8.7-12.9 inches) Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter) Short size 1: 205-219 mm (8.1-8.6 inches or shorter) Short size 2: 204 mm or shorter (8.0 inches or shorter) 2. The adjustment of Post card is for Japan only. <Procedure>
(Not necessary for LCF) [0] [5] [Power] (Code) [START] (Sub-code) [START] value ( Current displayed ) new ( Enter ) value [POWER] OFF/ON (Exit)
[SET] or [INTERRUPT] Stores in memory
[Drawer selection]
(*5) + [FAX] (Text print)
3-8
(*5)
1: 3: 55: 56: 57: 58: 59: 60:
Single-sided grid pattern in Black Mode Double-sided grid pattern in Black Mode Grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Full Color Mode Grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Full Color Mode Grid pattern of OHP film in Full Color Mode Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 2 in Black Mode Single-sided grid pattern of thick paper 3 in Black Mode Single-sided grid pattern of OHP film in Black Mode
Note: If the aligning amount is too large, abnormal noise (paper-folding noise) or actual paper folding may occur during paper feeding. If the aligning amount is too small, on the other hand, a skew, an image dislocation in feeding direction or a paper exit jam (E010) may occur. Pay attention to the above and select the appropriate value.
3-9
3.4.3 Printer related adjustment (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of polygonal motor rotation speed (Printer)) 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance A from the 1st line to the 21st line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance A is within 2000.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [401]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed. Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/step). (b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position (Printer) 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance B is within 520.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [411]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). 6. After the adjustment for the code 411 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the code 410. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [411]) [START] (Key in the same value in the step 5 above) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) Note: Make sure the 1st line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.
3 - 10
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of transport motor rotation speed (Printer)) 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [1] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Measure the distance C from the 1st line at the leading edge of the paper to the 21th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance C is within 2000.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [426]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed Press [1] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/step). (d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start position This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source. The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and acceptable values.
Order for adjustment 1 2 3 4 5 Paper source Lower drawer Upper drawer PFP or LCF Bypass feed Duplexing Code 441 440 444/443 442 445 Paper size A3/LD A4/LT A4/LT A4/LT A3/LD Acceptable value 0 to 80 0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40 0 to 40 Paper fed from the lower drawer Remarks
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10mm squares is printed out.) 3. Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. *At the duplexing, measure it on the top side of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance D is within 520.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code shown above) [START] (Key in an acceptable value shown above) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed Press [1] ([3] for duplexing) [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.2 mm/step).
3 - 11
(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing Note: Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished. (e-1) Adjustment for long-sized paper 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A3/LD from the lower drawer.) 3. Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [0] [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed. Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) ** The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). (e-2) Adjustment for short-sized paper 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Press [3] [FAX]. (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out. Use A4/LT from the upper drawer.) 3. Check the grid pattern on the test print and measure the distance E from the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern. 4. Check if the distance E is within 520.5 mm. 5. If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [498]) [START] [1] [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) "100% A" is displayed Press [3] [FAX] (A grid pattern is printed out.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
3 - 12
1 A B, E 6
21
Feeding direction
21
[Grid pattern] Fig. 3-401
<Adjustment order> [0] [5] [Power ON] [1] ([3](05-445, 498) for duplexing) [FAX] A: 05-401 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 2000.5 mm (0.05 mm/step) B: 05-411 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 520.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) Key in the same value for 05-410. C: 05-426 (Lower drawer, A3/LD) 2000.5 mm (0.05 mm/step) D: 05-440 (Upper drawer, A4/LT) 520.5 mm (0.2 mm/step), 441 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 442 (Bypass feed, A4/LT), 443 (LCF, A4/LT), 444 (PFP, A4/LT), 445 (Duplexing, A3/LD) E: 05-498-0 (Lower drawer, A3/LD), 520.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) 498-1 (Upper drawer, A4/LT)
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 13 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT
3.4.4 Scanner related adjustment (a) Image distortion

Feeding direction
Step 1
Feeding direction
Step 2
C
Fig. 3-402
1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. 2. Press [FAX] to make a copy of any image on a sheet of A3/LD paper. 3. Key in [308] and press the [START] button to move the carriage to the adjustment position. 4. Make an adjustment in the order of step 1 and 2. Step 1 In case of A: Tighten the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CW). In case of B: Loosen the mirror-3 adjustment screw (CCW). Step 2 In case of C: Tighten the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CW). In case of D: Loosen the mirror-1 adjustment screw (CCW).
e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT 3 - 14
Adjustment screw for the mirror-3 (Rear)
Carriage-2 Fig. 3-403 Adjustment screw for the mirror-1 (Rear)
Carriage-1 Fig. 3-404
The following adjustments (b) to (e) should be performed with Test Chart No. TCC-1. (Refer to page 3-19.) (b) Reproduction ratio adjustment of primary scanning direction 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo. 4. Measure the distance A between M1 and M2 on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance A is within 2000.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [405]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255) with digital keys) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step). (c) Image location of primary scanning direction 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo. 4. Measure the distance B from the left paper edge to the 5 mm line of left grid pattern on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance B is within 50.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in code [306]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step). (d) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo. 4. Measure the distance C between M3 and M4 on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance C is within 1500.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [340]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.3 mm/step).
3 - 15
(e) Image location of secondary scanning direction 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Place Test Chart No. TCC-1 on the original glass (with the arrow positioned at the left rear side). 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo. 4. Measure the distance D from the top paper edge to the 10 mm line of top grid pattern on the copy with a ruler. 5. Check if the distance D is within 100.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat step 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [305]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 92 to 164)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) * The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance D becomes (approx. 0.14 mm/step). (f) Top margin 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Open the platen cover or RADF. 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area E is within the range of 30.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [430]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory) (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
E
Fig. 3-405
3 - 16
(g) Right margin 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Open the platen cover or RADF. 3. Press [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area F at the right side of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2+1 mm, 2-0.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 3. to 5. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [432]) [START] (Key in a value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (Stored in memory). (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
Fig. 3-406
3 - 17
(h) Bottom margin 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) 2. Open platen cover or RADF. 3. Press the [FAX] [START] to make a copy at the mode of A3/LD, 100%, Black, Text/Photo and lower drawer. 4. Measure the blank area G at the trailing edge of the copied image. 5. Check if the blank area G is within the range of 20.5 mm. 6. If not, use the following procedure to change values and repeat the steps 2. to 4. above. <Procedure> (Adjustment Mode) (Key in the code [433]) [START] (Key in value (acceptable values : 0 to 255)) [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] (stored in memory) (100% A is displayed.) * The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/step).
Feeding direction
G
Fig. 3-407
3 - 18
Feeding direction
A
Fig. 3-408 Chart TCC-1
<Adjustment order> [0] [5] [Power ON] (Chart TCC-1) [FAX] [START] (A4/LT, 100%, Black and Text/Photo) A: 05-405 2000.5 mm (0.1 mm/step) B: 05-306 50.5 mm (0.04 mm/step) C: 05-340 1500.5 mm (0.3 mm/step) D: 05-305 100.5 mm (0.14 mm/step)
3 - 19
[9]
[1]
[8]
[10]
[3]
[2]
TOSHIBA COLOR CHART No.TCC-1
[5] [7]
[2]
[3] [2] [1]
[1] [6] [4] [6]
[3] [14] [7] [2] [13] [11] [7] [12] [7]
[1]
Fig. 3-409
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Grid patterns YMCK patches Resolution patterns Gradation pattern
: : : :
[5] Color registration pattern [6] Pictures [7] Magnification lines [8] Center lines [9] Arrow [10] [11] [12] [13]
: : : : :
Halftone band : White text on the black solid : Text : Thin lines : :
[14] Note area
For adjusting margin (void) and scanner section For checking uniformity For checking resolution Gradation pattern of seven colors (Y, M, C, R, G, B and K) Coverage: 10-100% For adjusting the halftone reproduction and gray balance For checking color registration For checking color reproduction and moire For checking the magnification error of primary and secondary scanning directions Center lines for A4/LT sizes A mark for placing the chart properly onto the original glass (place it to the left rear corner of the original glass.) For checking uniformity For checking the reproduction of white text on black solid For checking reproduction of text For checking reproduction of the thin lines (line width: 100m) For recording the date, conditions, etc.
3 - 20
3.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)

3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts replacement. (1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been or replaced, be sure to make this adjustment: Laser optical unit Photoconductive drum Developer material Main charger Main charger grid Transfer belt 1st transfer roller Drum cleaning blade Drum cleaner brush When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a copy and check the image to determine if adjustment is necessary: 2nd transfer roller Notes: 1.Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment". 2.Normally, only the adjustment of color/black integrated pattern is needed. When the adjustment of "3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting" is made, color pattern and black pattern need to be adjusted individually. <Adjustment Mode (05)>
Code 1642 (1643) (580) Item to be adjusted Automatic gamma adjustment Contents <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment Mode (2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button to output a Patch chart for gamma adjustment. Pattern No. Pattern Remarks 4 Color/black integrated When performing code 1642 10* Black When performing code 580 5* Color When performing code 1643 * This adjustment is performed only when "3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting" is performed. Usually, only the adjustment with the color/black integrated pattern (05-1642) is performed. (3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass. In the cases of patterns 4 and 5, place the chart aligning its side with 2 black squares against the original scale. In the case of pattern 10, place the chart aligning its black side of the gradation pattern against the original scale. (4) Key in a code and press the [START] button. The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.). (5) When the adjustment has finished normally, ENTER is shown. Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected. (To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.) In the case of an abnormal ending, ADJUSTMENT ERROR is shown. Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward. November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 21 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT
(2)
3.5.2 Density adjustment The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Color mode Text/Photo Original mode Text
Printed Image
Photo
Map
Item to be adjusted
Remarks
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
Manual density mode The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. center value Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) Manual density mode The larger the value is, the dark step value darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) Manual density mode The larger the value is, the light step value lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) Automatic density mode The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
1560
Full Color
1561
1562
1563
1564
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Color mode Text/Photo Original mode Text Photo Item to be Remarks adjusted Manual density mode The larger the value is, the center value darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
503
504
501
(Default: 128) Manual density mode The larger the value is, the 508
Black
510
509
dark step value
darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 20) Manual density mode The larger the value is, the 505 507 506 light step value lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
Automatic density 514 515 512 mode
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure.
3 - 22
Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing "3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment". <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in a code and press the [START] button. (3) Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255). (To correct the value once keyed in , press the [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy. (6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (5).
3 - 23
3.5.3 Color balance adjustment The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color at the Full Color Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Color Text/Photo 1779-0 1779-1 1779-2 1784-0 Magenta 1784-1 1784-2 1789-0 1789-1 1789-2 1794-0 Black 1794-1 1794-2 Original mode Text Printed Image Photo 1780-0 1781-0 1782-0 1780-1 1781-1 1782-1 1780-2 1785-0 1785-1 1785-2 1790-0 1790-1 1790-2 1795-0 1795-1 1795-2 1781-2 1786-0 1786-1 1786-2 1791-0 1791-1 1791-2 1796-0 1796-1 1796-2 1782-2 1787-0 1787-1 1787-2 1792-0 1792-1 1792-2 1798-0 1798-1 1798-2 Map 1783-0 1783-1 1783-2 1788-0 1788-1 1788-2 1793-0 1793-1 1793-2 1798-0 1798-1 1798-2 Item to be adjusted Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Low density Medium density High density Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the color to be adjusted becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Yellow
Cyan
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment. <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the code of the mode to be adjusted (color and original mode) and press the [START] button. (3) Select the density area to be adjusted with digital keys (0, 1 or 2), and press the [START] button. 0 : Low density (L) 1 : Medium density (M) 2 : High density (H) (4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.) (5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5). (7) Press the [FAX] button and then press the [START] button to make a test copy. (8) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).
3 - 24
3.5.4 Gamma balance adjustment The density adjustment at the Black Mode is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Color mode Black Text/Photo 590-0 590-1 590-2 Original mode Text 591-0 591-1 591-2 Item to be
Photo
592-0 592-1 592-2
adjusted Low density Medium density High density
Remarks The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.5.3 Color balance adjustment.
3 - 25
3.5.5 Offsetting adjustment for background processing The density of background and text can be adjusted as follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Color mode Text/Photo Text Original mode Printed Image Photo Map Item to be adjusted Automatic density adjustment for background Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the background becomes. (Automatic) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) Automatic density adjustment for text The larger the value is, the darker the text becomes. (Automatic) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) The larger the value is, the darker the background becomes. (Manual) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128) Manual density adjustment for text The larger the value is, the darker the text becomes. (Manual) Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128)
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
Full Color
1694
1695
1696
1697
Manual density 1698 1699 1700 1701 1702 adjustment for background
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".
3 - 26
3.5.6 Judgment threshold for ACS The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when Auto Color is selected at a color mode. The adjustment is available for each of the manually-set original and the original used with the RADF.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1675 Item to be adjusted Judgment threshold for ACS when original is set manually 1676 Judgment threshold for ACS when original is set on RADF Contents The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even at the Auto Color Mode. The smaller value is, the more it tends to be judged as color. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 70)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary and make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".
3.5.7 Sharpness adjustment If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1737 1738 1739 1740 1741 604 605 606 1757 Auto Color Black Color mode Full Color Original mode Text/Photo Text Printed Image Photo Map Text/Photo Text Photo Text/Photo Contents The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear. The acceptable values are 0 to 31. The center value is 16. However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. Note: You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".
3 - 27
3.5.8 Setting range correction The values of the background peak/text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density, and the values of the text peak affects that of the text density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Original mode Text/Photo 570 Photo 571 Text 572 Item to be adjusted Range correction for original manually set on the original glass 693 694 695 Range correction for original set on the RADF Remarks The following are the default values set for each original mode. Text/Photo: 22, Photo: 12, Text: 22 Each digit stands for: One's place: Automatic density mode Ten's place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: Background peak 1: 2: 3: 4: fixed varied fixed varied Text peak fixed fixed varied varied
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".
3 - 28
3.5.9 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) The levels of the background peak for the range correction at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Text/Photo 532 Original mode Photo 533 Text 534 Item to be adjusted Background peak for range correction Remarks When the value increases, the background (low density area) of the image is not output. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Text/Photo: 40, Photo: 16, Text: 40)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".
3.5.10 Adjustment of smudged/faint text The smudge/faint text at a Black Mode can be set at the following codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Original mode Text/Photo 648 Item to be adjusted Adjustment of smudged/ faint text Remarks When the value increases, the faint text is improved. When the value decreases, the smudged text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 30)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment. Note: Remember the image specifications and life span of the replacing parts may not meet the standard when the setting value is changed from the default value. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.5.2 Density adjustment".
3 - 29
3.5.11 Adaptation to highlighter Four modes of one touch adjustment are performed and each mode can be switched into two modes; highlighter 1 or 2. This adjustment is performed when the reproduction mode for highlighter is needed.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1769 1770 1771 1772 One touch adjustment Vivid Clear Warm Cool 1: Highlighter 1 2: Highlighter 2 Remarks 0: Default (Vivid / Clear / Warm / Cool)
Note: The color may not always be reproduced precisely due to the characteristics of fluorescent ink.
3.5.12 Beam level conversion setting The beam level for 4 divided smoothing is set at the Black Mode. This adjustment enables to adjust the dot size.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 667-0 667-1 667-2 667-3 667-4 Item to be adjusted Beam level 0/4 Beam level 1/4 Beam level 2/4 Beam level 3/4 Beam level 4/4 Remarks The smaller the value is, the smaller the beam width becomes. Therefore, the smaller dot is reproduced accordingly. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Level 0/4: 0, Level 1/4: 63, Level 2/4: 127, Level 3/4: 191, Level 4/4: 255)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.5.3 Color balance adjustment. Notes: 1. When this adjustment is performed, 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment (Black Mode) (05-580) needs to be performed since the reproduction of density at Black Mode varies. The result of this adjustment is not reflected to color/black integrated pattern. Namely, each automatic gamma adjustment of Black Mode (05-580) or of Color Mode (05-1643) needs to be performed individually after this adjustment. 2. After this adjustment, set 1 in 08-595 so that the correction result of the Black Mode is not reflected on Automatic Calibration. 3. The setting value must increase as the beam level number (0 to 4) becomes higher. Do not increase this order when setting the values. 4. Usually, beam level 4 is most effective on all black modes.
3 - 30
3.5.13 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1612 1613 1614 1615 1616 Paper type Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Remarks The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing offsetting, etc). Acceptable values : 0 to 255. (Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick paper 1: 249, Thick paper 2: 237, Thick paper 3: 237, OHP film: 249)
Note: The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.
3.5.14 Maximum text density adjustment The maximum text density of each color at Full Color Mode can be adjusted as follows.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Color Yellow Magenta Cyan Black Code 1630 1631 1632 1633 Item to be adjusted Maximum text density Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the maximum text density of each color to be adjusted becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 10 (Default: 5)
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make adjustment using the following procedure. Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing 3.5.1 Automatic gamma adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.5.2 Density adjustment.
3 - 31
3.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)

3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, the gradation reproducibility of all colors Y, M, C and K can be corrected by performing this automatic gamma adjustment. In case the gradation reproduction of the image checked is not satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below at parts replacement. (1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been unpacked or replaced, be sure to make this adjustment: Laser optical unit Photoconductive drum Developer material Main charger Main charger grid Transfer belt 1st transfer roller Drum cleaning blade Drum cleaner brush When any of the following parts are replaced or adjusted, make a print and check the image to determine if adjustment is necessary: 2nd transfer roller Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing the image adjustment in "3.3 Adjustment of Image Quality Control" and "3.4 Image Dimensional Adjustment".
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1000 1001 1002 1003 Adjustment item Automatic gamma adjustment Contents <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Adjustment Mode (2) Select the A4/LT drawer. Key in the pattern number and press the [FAX] button to output a Patch chart for gamma adjustment. Pattern No. Language/Resolution Remarks 47 48 49 50 PS/600x600dpi PS/1200x600dpi PCL/600x600dpi PCL/1200x600dpi When performing code 1000 When performing code 1001 When performing code 1002 When performing code 1003
(2)
(3) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (2) face down on the original glass, with its side, on which two black squares are present, aligned against the original scale. (4) Key in a code and press the [START] button. The scanner reads the chart automatically and performs automatic gamma adjustment calculation (approx. 30 sec.). (5) When the adjustment has finished normally, ENTER is shown. Press the [ENTER] button to have the adjustment results reflected. (To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.) In the case of an abnormal ending, ADJUSTMENT ERROR is shown. Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. When it is cleared, the control panel display will return to the ready state. Then, check if the patch chart on the original glass is placed in the wrong direction or if it is placed inclined on the original glass, and then repeat step (3) and afterward.
3 - 32
3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment (Black Mode) The gamma balance is adjusted by adjusting the density at the Black Mode. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Color mode Smooth (PS) 596-0 596-1 596-2 Language and screen Detail Smooth (PS) (PCL) 597-0 597-1 597-2 598-0 598-1 598-2 Detail (PCL) 599-0 599-1 599-2 Item to be adjusted Low density Medium density High density Remarks The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128)
Black
<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes to be adjusted (language and screen) and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the [START] button. 0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5). Let the equipment restart and perform printing job. If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
3 - 33
3.6.3 Color balance adjustment (Color Mode) The color balance is adjusted by adjusting the density of each color. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> PS Color PCL Density Remarks 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail 1010-0 1014-0 1018-0 1022-0 1026-0 1030-0 1034-0 1038-0 1010-1 1014-1 1018-1 1022-1 1010-2 1014-2 1018-2 1022-2 1011-0 1011-1 1015-0 1019-0 1023-0 1015-1 1019-1 1023-1 1026-1 1030-1 1026-2 1030-2 1027-0 1031-0 1027-1 1031-1 1027-2 1031-2 1028-0 1032-0 1028-1 1032-1 1028-2 1032-2 1029-0 1033-0 1029-1 1033-1 1029-2 1033-2 1034-1 1034-2 1035-0 1035-1 1035-2 1036-0 1036-1 1036-2 1037-0 1037-1 1037-2 1038-1 1038-2 1039-0 1039-1 1039-2 1040-0 1040-1 1040-2 1041-0 1041-1 1041-2
Yellow
Low The larger the Medium value is, the High Low darker the color to be adjusted
Magenta
1011-2 1015-2 1019-2 1023-2 1012-0 1016-0 1020-0 1024-0 Cyan 1012-1 1016-1 1020-1 1024-1 1012-2 1016-2 1020-2 1024-2 1013-0 1017-0 1021-0 1025-0 1013-1 1017-1 1021-1 1025-1 1013-2 1017-2 1021-2 1025-2
Medium becomes. Acceptable High Low values: 0 to 255. Medium (Default: 128) High Low Medium High
Black
Note: Be sure that this adjustment be made after performing 3.6.1 Automatic gamma adjustment. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment".
3 - 34
3.6.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text The smudged/faint text at the Black Mode is adjusted.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Language PS 654 PCL 655 Remarks When the value increases, the smudged text is improved. When the value decreases, the faint text is improved. Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (Default: 5)
<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes to be adjusted and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (4). (6) Let the equipment restart and perform printing job. (7) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (6).
3.6.5 Upper limit value at Toner Saving Mode The upper limit value is adjusted at the Toner Saving Mode.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Black mode PS 664 PCL 665 Color mode PS PS PCL PCL 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 600x600dpi 1200x600dpi 1055 1056 1057 1058 Remarks The smaller the value is, the lighter the density of image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 176)
<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.6.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text.
3 - 35
3.6.6 Dot size adjustment in black printing The dot size is adjusted in primary scanning direction in black printing.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 663 Remarks The smaller the value is, the dot size becomes smaller. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 255)
<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.6.4 Adjustment of smudged/faint text.
3.6.7 Maximum toner density adjustment to paper type The maximum toner amount adhering to the paper can be controlled.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code PS 1046-0 1047-0 1048-0 1049-0 1050-0 PCL 1046-1 1047-1 1048-1 1049-1 1050-1 Paper type Plain paper Thick paper 1 Thick paper 2 Thick paper 3 OHP film Remarks The smaller the value is, the toner amount adhered decreases of the high density area (ex. prevention of fusing offsetting, etc). Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: Plain paper: 255, Thick paper 1: 255, Thick paper 2: 255, Thick paper 3: 255, OHP film: 200)
<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.6.2 Gamma balance adjustment. Note: The larger the value is, the more frequently fusing offsetting occurs.
3.6.8 Image processing: Gamma correction table all clearing The state of calibration in color printing mode is initialized at the Setting Mode (08-597). This setting is to be performed when a defect occurs in Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1000 to 1003). The cause of defect is presumed as an image failure (jittering or uneven image density) at the patch chart for gamma adjustment.
3 - 36
3.7 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)

3.7.1 Gamma balance adjustment The gamma balance at the Black Mode is adjusted by adjusting the density. The adjustment is performed by selecting its density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Item to be adjusted Low density Medium density High density Black Text/Photo 880-0 880-1 880-2 Original mode Black Text 881-0 881-1 881-2 Black Photo 882-0 882-1 882-2 Gray Scale mode 883-0 883-1 883-2 Remarks The larger the value is, the density of the item to be adjusted becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255. (Default: 128)
<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the code corresponding to the desired original mode and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the [START] button. 0: Low density (L) 1: Medium density (M) 2: High density (H) (4) Key in the adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) (5) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5). (7) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (8) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (7).
3 - 37
3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode) Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment buttons.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Color mode Text/Photo Original mode Text Photo Item to be adjusted Manual density center value Remarks The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) The larger the value is, the darker the dark side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) The larger the value is, the lighter the light side becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) The larger the value is, the darker the image becomes. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
845
846
847
Manual density 855

Black
856
857
dark step value
Manual density 850 851 852 light step value
Automatic density 860 861 862
<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Key in a code and press the [START] button. Key in an adjustment value (acceptable values: 0 to 255). (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR] button.) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
3 - 38
3.7.3 Background adjustment (Gray Scale Mode) The adjustment level of background center value and the control of background adjustment button are adjusted.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 848 Item to be adjusted Center value Remarks The larger the value is, the background becomes darker. The smaller the value is, the background becomes lighter. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) The larger the value is, the image of the dark steps becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 20) The larger the value is, the image of the light steps becomes lighter. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 35)
858 853
Dark step value Light step value
<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 255. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5). 3.7.4 Background adjustment (Color Mode) The adjustment level of background center value is adjusted. The control value of background adjustment button is automatically adjusted to the same level as the adjusted center value. For example, when the control value of background adjustment key ranges from 0 to 6, the background center value (-2 to +2) is used to be the range from 6 to 14 accordingly.
Before adjustment +2 +1 0 -1 -2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 After adjustment Code 1070 1071 1072 Original mode Text Printed Image Photo +2 +1 0 -1 -2 <Adjustment Mode (05)>
Remarks The larger the value is, the background becomes lighter. Acceptable values: 0 to 50 (Default: 0)
<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 50. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 3 - 39 e-STUDIO3511/4511 ADJUSTMENT
3.7.5 Judgment threshold for ACS The judgment level is adjusted for the automatic identification of whether the original set on the glass is black or color. Namely, this is to adjust the judgment level used when Auto Color is selected at color modes. The adjustment is available for both the manually-set original and the original used with the RADF.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1065 Item to be adjusted Judgment threshold for ACS when original is set manually 1066 Judgment threshold for ACS when original is set on RADF Contents The larger the value is, the more an original tends to be judged as black even at the Auto Color Mode. The smaller the value is, the more it tends to be judged as color. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 70)
<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".
3.7.6 Sharpness adjustment If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1086 1087 1088 840 841 842 843 Gray Scale Color mode Full Color Original mode Text Printed Image Photo Text/Photo Text Photo Contents The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes; while the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes. The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear. The acceptable values are 0 to 31. The center value is 16. However, 0 is equivalent to the center value.
Black
Note: You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness. <Procedure> Procedure is same as that of "3.7.2 Density adjustment (Black Mode)".
3 - 40
3.7.7 Setting range correction The values of the background peak / text peak in the range correction at the Black Mode can be switched to "varied" or "fixed" in the following codes. If they are fixed, the range correction is performed with standard values. The values of the background peak affects the reproduction of the background density and the values of the text peak affects that of the text density.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Black Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo 825 826 827 Gray Scale 828 Item to be adjusted Range correction for original manually set on the original glass Remarks The following are the default values set for each original mode. Photo/Text: 12, Text: 12, Photo: 12, Gray Scale: 12 Each digit stands for: Ones place: Automatic density mode 830 831 832 833 Range correction for original set on the RADF Tens place: Manual density mode The setting conditions possible are as follows: Background peak 1: 2: 3: 4: fixed varied fixed varied Text peak fixed fixed varied varied
3.7.8 Setting range correction (Adjustment of background peak) The levels of the background peak for the range correction at the Black Mode can be set at the following codes.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Black Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo 835 836 837 Gray Scale 838 Item to be adjusted Background peak for range correction Remarks When the value increases, the background (low density section) of the image is not output. Acceptable vales: 0 to 255 (Default: Text/Photo: 56, Text: 64, Photo: 48, Gray Scale: 48)
3 - 41
3.7.9 Fine adjustment of black density The density of black side on scanned image is adjusted at color-scanning.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1075 1076 1077 Original mode Text Printed Image Photo Remarks The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker. Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (Default: 0)
Note: Be careful for the value not to be too large since the gradation is reproduced worse in darker side. <Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 4. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
3.7.10 RGB conversion method selection The color space conversion method of image is decided at color-scanning.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1080 1081 1082 Original mode Text Printed Image Photo 0: sRGB (Default: 0) 1: AppleRGB Remarks 2: ROMMRGB 3: AdobeRGB
<Procedure> (1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (2) Key in the codes and press the [START] button. (3) Key in the adjustment values. Acceptable values : 0 to 3. (To correct the value once keyed in, press [CLEAR] button.) (4) Press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the ready state. (5) Let the equipment restart and perform scanning job. (6) If the desired image has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).
3 - 42
3.7.11 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (black) The reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction with the resolution other than 600 dpi is adjusted in Scanning Function for black image.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 884 Remarks When the value increases, the image is zoomed in. When the value decreases, the image is zoomed out. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) * 0.1%/step
<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.7.2 Density adjustment.
3.7.12 Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (color) The reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction with the resolution other than 600 dpi is adjusted in Scanning Function for color image.
<Adjustment Mode (05)> Code 1060 Remarks When the value increases, the image is zoomed in. When the value decreases, the image is zoomed out. Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128) * 0.1%/step
<Procedure> Procedure is same as that of 3.7.2 Density adjustment.
3 - 43
3.8 High-Voltage Transformer Setting

3.8.1 General description The high-voltage transformers (PS-HVT-350) supply high-voltage to the parts related to charging, development, transfer and drum cleaning. The high-voltage transformer has the following high-voltage outputs. CH1: CH2: CH3: CH4: CH5: CH6: CH7: Main charger wire Main charger grid bias Color developer bias Black developer bias 1st transfer roller bias 2nd transfer roller bias Cleaning blade bias
Note: Make sure not to lose the data sheets which are attached to the high-voltage transformers. Use these sheets for the following setting. Never move the fixed volumes of resistors since output adjustment is performed when the devices are shipped.
3.8.2 Setting at the replacement of high-voltage transformer After replacing a high-voltage transformer, be sure to enter the data shown on the data sheets (main charger grid bias, color/black developer bias and 1st/2nd transfer roller bias) noted above according to the following procedure. (1) (2) (3) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Key in the adjusting codes in the table below and press the [START] button. Key in the adjusting value corresponding to each code on the attached sheets, and then press [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT].
Adjusting code 334 335 338 339 372 373 250 251 252 253 Item to be adjusted Main charger grid bias lower limit value Main charger grid bias upper limit value Color developer bias lower limit value Color developer bias upper limit value Black developer bias lower limit value Black developer bias upper limit value 1st transfer roller bias lower limit value 1st transfer roller bias upper limit value 2nd transfer roller bias lower limit value (+) 2nd transfer roller bias upper limit value (+) <Adjustment Mode (05)> Adjusting value Refer to the data sheets
(4) (5)
Key in all the codes in the above table by repeating (2) and (3). Turn the power OFF.
3 - 44
3.9 Adjustment of the Scanner Section

3.9.1 Carriages (1) Installing carriage wires When replacing the carriage wires, refer illustrations below: [Front side]
Carriage wire Carriage-2 Idler pulley Bracket for carriage-1 Tension spring Hook
Wire pulley
[Rear side]
Carriage-2
Carriage wire
Bracket for carriage-1 Idler pulley Hook
Wire pulley
Tension spring
Fig. 3-901
Adjustment of the carriage wire tension is not necessary since a certain tension is applied to the carriage wires by the tension springs. Note: Make sure the tension applied to the wire is normal.
3 - 45
(2)
Adjusting carriages-1 and -2 positions a. Move the carriage-2 toward the exit side. b. Loosen the screws fixing the front side pulley bracket, make the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the inside of the exit side frame and screw them up.
Carriage-2 Pulley bracket
[Rear]
[Front]
Exit side frame
Enlarged view of carriage

B Fig. 3-902 A
c. Put the carriage-1 on the rail, make the sections C and D of it touch with the inside of the exit frame and screw up the front/rear side of the bracket to fix it. Note: Make sure that the sections A and B of the carriage-2 touch with the exit side frame.
Carriage-1
[Rear]
[Front]
Exit side frame
Bracket
Bracket
D Fig. 3-903
Enlarged view of carriage
3 - 46
(3)
Assembling carriage wires Winding the wire around the wire pulley: a. Pull the 3 ball terminal located at the center of the wire into a hole on the wire pulley. One end of the wire with a hook attached comes to the outside. b. Wind the wires around the wire pulleys of the front and rear sides. The number of turns to be wound are as follows: 2 turns toward the opposite side of the boss 4 turns toward the boss side Notes: Pay attention to the followings when the wires are wound around the pulleys: Do not twist the wire. Wind the wires tightly so that they are in complete contact with the surface of the pulleys. Each turn should be pushed against the previously wound turn so that there is no space between them.
4 turns 2 turns 4 turns 2 turns
Ball terminal Ball terminal
No space between turns Hook Hook
Color: Silver
Color: Black
[Rear]
Fig. 3-904
[Front]
3 - 47
c. After winding the wires around the pulleys, attach the wire holder jigs not to loosen the wires. Notes: 1. When the wire holder jig is attached, make sure that the wire is not shifted or loosened. 2. The wire should come out of the slot of the wire holder jig and be passed under the arm of it.
Fig. 3-905
3 - 48
3.9.2 Lens unit (1) Replacing the lens unit The lens unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in the field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the whole unit. When replacing the unit, do not loosen or remove the 4 screws indicated with the arrows.
Fig. 3-906
Handle the unit with care. Do not hold the lens and adjusted part (hold the unit as shown below).
Fig. 3-907
3 - 49
(2)
Installation of lens unit Follow the procedure below when installing and replacing the lens unit. <Procedure> 1. Attach the lens unit and fix it temporarily with 2 screws. 2. Match the center scale of the plate in which the unit is to be installed and the rightmost scale of the adjusting hole on the lens unit plate. [Rear]
Screw
[Front]
Fig. 3-908
3. Tighten 5 screws securely to fix the lens unit while pushing it to the rear side and fix 2 ground wires with the screws. [Rear]
Screw Screw Ground wire
Ground wire
Screw Screw
[Front]
Fig. 3-909
3 - 50
3.10 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System

3.10.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding <Procedure> The center of the printed image shifts to the front side. Move the guide to the front side (Arrow (A) direction in the lower figure). The center of the printed image shifts to the rear side. Move the guide to the rear side (Arrow (B) direction in the lower figure).
Feeding direction Center
Feeding direction Center
[Front]
Fig. 3-1001
[Front]
Fig. 3-1002
Bypass feeding
Drawer feeding
(B)
(A) (A) (B)
Fig. 3-1003
Fig. 3-1004
3 - 51
3.11 Adjustment of the Developer Unit

3.11.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (black developer unit) Adjustment tool to use: Doctor-sleeve jig Adjusting procedure: (1) Take off the black developer unit from the equipment. (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer material cover. Then discharge the developer material.
Developer material cover
Screw Fig. 3-1101
(3)
Remove 2 screws and take off the doctor blade cover.
Screw
Doctor blade cover Screw Fig. 3-1102
(4)
Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert the gauge 0.55 of the doctor sleeve jig between the developer sleeve and doctor blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the screws.
Screw Developer sleeve
Doctor-sleeve jig
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-1103
3 - 52
(5)
Insert the gauge 0.50 of the doctor-sleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade and make sure that the gauge can move smoothly in the front/ rear direction. In addition, confirm that the gauge 0.60 cannot be inserted into the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig
Developer sleeve
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-1104
Notes: 1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade, insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the doctor blade. 2. While reattaching the black developer unit cover, set the latches securely.
3.11.2 Doctor-to-sleeve gap (color developer unit) Adjustment tool to use : Doctor-sleeve jig Adjusting procedure: (1) Take off the color developer unit from the equipment. (2) Remove 2 screws and take off the developer material cover. Then discharge the developer material.
Developer material cover Screw Screw
Fig. 3-1105
(3)
Remove 4 screws and the toner-scattering prevention seal holder.
Screw
Toner-scattering prevention seal holder Fig. 3-1106
3 - 53
(4)
Loosen 2 doctor blade fixing screws. Insert the gauge 0.55 of the doctor-sleeve jig between the developer sleeve and doctor blade to adjust the gap, and tighten the screws.
Screw Developer sleeve
Doctor blade Doctor-sleeve jig Fig. 3-1107
(5)
Insert the gauge 0.50 of the doctor-sleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and doctor blade and make sure that the gauge can move smoothly in the front/ rear direction. In addition, confirm that the gauge 0.60 cannot be inserted into the gap.
Doctor-sleeve jig
Developer sleeve
Doctor blade
Fig. 3-1108
Notes: 1. When confirming and adjusting the gap between the developer sleeve and the doctor blade, insert the gauges into the gap after rotating the developer sleeve so that its marking faces the doctor blade. 2. While reattaching the color developer unit cover, set the latches securely.
3 - 54
3.12 Adjustment of the RADF (MR-3015)

3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF position It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment. Remove the platen sheet during adjustment. (1) Open the RADF and then attach 2 positioning pins to the equipment. (The positioning pins have been attached at the rear of the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)
Positioning pin
Fig. 3-1201
(2)
Close the RADF to check that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF. If they do not, adjust them according to the following procedure.
Fig. 3-1202
(3)
Loosen the stepped screw 1 turn and 2 screws on the adjustment plate a half turn (status of temporary fixing).
Half turn
1 turn
Fig. 3-1203
3 - 55
(4)
Remove the stepped screw at the rear of right-hand hinge.
Fig. 3-1204
(5)
Open the RADF, and then loosen 2 hand screws 1 turn (status of tentative fixing).
Screw
Fig. 3-1205
(6)
Remove the positioning pin at the front side. Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into the hole at the rear side of the RADF. While peering inside from the front side, fit the positions of the pin and hole by moving the RADF right and left.
Fig. 3-1206
(7)
Tighten the positioning pin at the front side. Close the RADF to fit the positioning pin into the hole at the front side of the RADF. (For the front side, adjust the RADF position all around.)
Fig. 3-1207
3 - 56
(8)
While peering inside from the left side, close the RADF. Check the positions of the holes of the RADF and pins and then fit their positions by moving the RADF back and forth. (For the front side, also adjust the RADF position right and left.) Make sure not to dislocate the positions of the pin and hole at the rear side.
Fig. 3-1208
(9)
Open the RADF to tighten 2 hand screws. Close the RADF and then check again that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF.
Fig. 3-1209
(10) Fit the hinge hole into the hole of the equipment at the rear right of the RADF to tighten the stepped screw. If they do not fit, adjust the position of the hole by turning the screw of the adjustment plate.
Fig. 3-1210
(11) Tighten the stepped screw and 2 screws on the adjustment plate. Open and close the RADF to check again that the positioning pins fit smoothly into the holes on the RADF. Remove the positioning pins after checking it. (Replace the positioning pins at the rear of the right-hand hinge of the RADF.)
Screw
Stepped Screw Fig. 3-1211
3 - 57
(12) Place the platen sheet on the original glass with the semi round cutout toward you. Align the platen sheet against the left and rear side of the original glass. Close the RADF slowly. Open the RADF to check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.
Fig. 3-1212
3 - 58
3.12.2 Adjustment of RADF height It is mainly performed at the installation. It is also required when the RADF is dislocated for some reason such as moving the equipment. Perform the following adjustment by using the screw of the left and right hinge. Note: Perform this adjustment after 3.12.1 Adjustment of RADF position. Turn the exposure lamp ON during the gap check. (Test Mode: 03-267) Adjustment standard: Adjust the height so that the platen guide front holder touches the ADF original glass. Adjust the height so that the gap between the platen guide rear holder and the ADF original glass becomes 0.5 mm 0.3.
0.5mm0.3
ADF original glass Fig. 3-1213
Adjust the height by turning the height adjusting screw on the left hinge. Clockwise: The height of the hinge becomes high. Counterclockwise: The height of the hinge becomes low.
0mm
Platen guide rear holder
Platen guide front holder
Fig. 3-1214
Adjust the height by turning the height adjusting screw on the right hinge. Clockwise: The height of the hinge becomes high. Counterclockwise: The height of the hinge becomes low.
Fig. 3-1215
3 - 59
3.12.3 Adjustment of skew When an image skew occurs, adjust it according to the following steps, Step 1 Step 2 Step 3. Note: Perform this adjustment after confirming that the equipment has been adjusted properly. Prior to this adjustment, of RADF position and height are needed to be adjusted. Step 1 Case A: Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side - of the original ( Chapter 3.12.5). Case B: Adjust the aligning adjustment position to the rear side + of the original ( Chapter 3.12.5).
Paper White arrow: feeding direction
Original
Fig. 3-1216
Step 2 Case C: Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise. Case D: Loosen the fixing screw and hand screw of the right side hinge and then turn the adjustment screw clockwise.
Fixing screw Paper
Original
Adjustment screw Hand screw RADF
Fig. 3-1217
Front side Fig. 3-1218
Step 3 Case E: Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side - of the original ( 3.12.6). Case F: Adjust the reverse aligning adjustment position to the rear side + of the original ( 3.12.6).
Paper
Chapter Chapter
Original
Fig. 3-1219
3 - 60
3.12.4 Automatic adjustment of sensors and initialization of EEPROM When any of the PC board, original length sensor, read sensor, reverse sensor is replaced with a new one, make sure to perform the initialization of EEPROM and adjustment of sensors in the Adjustment Mode (05). Perform them after removing all originals on the sensor and closing the RADF. Also, make sure to adjust the tray volume when the initialization of EEPROM and automatic sensor adjustment have been performed. Refer to 2.2.4 Adjustment Mode (05) for the details. Errors such as paper jamming may occur if the EEPROM is not initialized and the sensors are not adjusted after the above mentioned parts were replaced.
3 - 61
3.12.5 Adjustment of aligning Adjust the aligning according to Step 1 of 3.12.3.
Rear side + of the original
Rear side - of the original
Skew of paper
Fig. 3-1220
3 - 62
3.12.6 Adjustment of aligning at reversing Adjust the aligning according to Step 3 of 3.12.3.
- aper of p w Ske
Fig. 3-1221
3 - 63
3.12.7 Adjustment of reverse solenoid When operating the reverse solenoid, adjust it if the position of the flapper lever is out of the following dimension. Gap between A of the front frame and the flapper lever C: 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm Adjusting procedure (1) Remove the screw on the left and take off the plate spring.
Plate spring
Fig. 3-1222
(2)
Align B of the front frame with the edge of the reverse solenoid, and temporarily fix the reverse solenoid with the screw on the right.
Fig. 3-1223
(3)
While the plunger of the reverse solenoid is put in the position to be turned ON (by pressing it in the direction of an arrow), loosen the screw on the right to adjust the reverse solenoid so that the gap (C) between A of the front frame and the flapper lever is 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm.
Fig. 3-1224
3 - 64
(4)
Fix the plate spring temporarily with the screw on the left. Then press the plate spring slightly in the direction of an arrow and tighten the screw in the position where the gap (D) between the plunger and the flapper lever is eliminated.
Plunger
Flapper lever Fig. 3-1225
3 - 65
3.12.8 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing switch Adjust the bracket position so that the switch is turned ON when the height A becomes 40-45 mm (within the empty weight falling limit).
Glass surface
Center
Fig. 3-1226
3 - 66
3.12.9 Adjustment of RADF opening/closing sensor Adjust the bracket position so that the sensor is turned ON when the height A becomes 30-35 mm (within the empty weight falling limit).
Glass surface
Center
Fig. 3-1227
3 - 67
3.12.10 Adjustment of tray volume Adjust in the adjustment mode (05). (1) (2) (3) (4) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. Narrow the original guide to the limit. Input the code "367". Press the [START] button.
Fig. 3-1228
(5) (6) (7) (8)
Extend the original guide to the limit. Input the code "368". Press the [START] button Turn the power OFF.
Fig. 3-1229
3 - 68
3.13 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1022)

3.13.1 Adjusting the jogging plate width (1) (2) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover. Adjust the front jogging plate to the home position. 1 Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-1301. 2 Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board. The front jogging plate moves to the home position. Adjust the rear jogging plate to the home position. 1 Set SW1 on the finisher controller PC board as shown in Fig. 3-1302. 2 Press SW2 twice on the finisher controller PC board. The rear jogging plate moves to the home position.
ON
Fig. 3-1301
(3)
ON
Fig. 3-1302
Rear jogging plate home position
Fig. 3-1303
3 - 69
(4) (5) (6)
Measure the jogging width (standard at 317 mm). Remove the processing tray. Loosen the screw on the home position sensor plate at the front.
Screw
Home position sensor plate
Fig. 3-1304
(7)
Adjust the position of the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) with reference to the index. EX. 1 If the width is 319 mm in step (2), the difference from the standard is +2 mm, it requires relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow A by 2 mm. EX. 2 If the width is 316 mm in step (2), the difference from the standard is -1 mm; it requires relocation of the sensor [3] in the direction of arrow B by 1 mm.
Sensor
Fig. 3-1305
3 - 70
3.13.2 Adjusting the angle of the jogging plate (1) Without removing the processing tray unit, loosen the 2 mounting screws of the rear jogging plate.
Screw Rear jogging plate
Fig. 3-1306
(2)
Place several sheets of A4/LT paper on the processing tray, and adjust the rear jogging plate. (At this time, adjust the gap between the paper and the front end of the rear jogging plate so that it is 0 mm to 0.5 mm.)
0 mm to 0.5 mm Paper Screw
Butted
Rear jogging plate
Fig. 3-1307
(3)
With reference to the rear jogging plate adjusted in step (2), adjust the front jogging plate in the same manner.
3 - 71
3.13.3 Adjusting the overlap of the sensor flag If the overlap between the sensor and the flag is wrong for some reason, perform the following adjustment. (1) (2) Remove the processing tray unit. Loosen the mounting screw of the front/rear jogging plate adjusting plate; then, move the adjusting plate to the left and the right.
Jogging plate adjusting plate
Screw
Adjusting plate
Screw
Jogging plate Adjusting plate adjusting plate
Fig. 3-1308
(3)
Tighten the screw so that the overlap between the flag of the front/rear jogging rack plate and the sensor is 1.5 mm to 2.0 mm.
Sensor
Sensor flag
1.5 mm to 2.0 mm
Fig. 3-1309
3 - 72
3.13.4 Adjusting the tension of the stack processing motor belt (1) (2) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover. Remove the 2 mounting screws, and detach the grip unit.
Screw Grip unit Screw
Fig. 3-1310
(3)
Loosen the screw on the tension arm plate. (The tension arm plate will be pulled under tension by the tension spring.)
Screw
Tension arm plate
Fig. 3-1311
3 - 73
(4)
Move the returning roller shaft to its lower limit (the slack of a belt is lightly taken); then, tighten the screw on the tension arm plate.
Screw
Tension arm plate
Returning roller shaft
Fig. 3-1312
(5)
Check to make sure that the returning roller shaft moves smoothly.
Returning roller shaft
Fig. 3-1313
3 - 74
3.13.5 Releasing the stack tray guide lever fixing plate (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Remove the right inner cover and the rear cover. Remove the finisher control PC board, PC board bracket and sensor PC board. Remove the stack tray. Remove the stack tray drive unit. Place the stack tray guide lever fixing plate so that it is in view through the hole in the side plate (front, rear). Then remove the fixing screw. (Perform the same for the front and the rear.)
Screw
Note: When removing the mounting screw, be sure to hold the stack tray guide lever up from below.
Stack tray guide lever fixing plate Fig. 3-1314
Stack tray guide lever Fig. 3-1315
3 - 75
3.13.6 Adjustment of the upper tray angle (1) Remove the front cover.
Fig. 3-1316
(2)
Loosen the screw denoted with the arrow.
Fig. 3-1317
(3)
The tension becomes loose. While pushing the bracket down, hold the tray and move it up or down, to adjust the angle so that the tray becomes parallel by a visual check.
Fig. 3-1318
3 - 76
(4)
After the height adjustment, tighten the fixing screw of the bracket. Note: If the fixing screw of the bracket is not fixed, the belt is loosened which may cause a skipped tooth.
Fig. 3-1319
3 - 77
3.13.7 DIP switch functions You can simulate various functions by setting the DIP switch (SW1) on the finisher controller PC board appropriately. 1) 2) 3) Initiating Operations Remove any obstacles from the area of operation. Set the DIP switch (SW1) as shown, and turn ON the power (so that LED1 will start to blink). Press the pushing switch (SW2) twice to initiate the operation in question. (LED2 will remain on during operation).
Setting
ON
Item Delivery motor
Operation The delivery roller rotates in a specific speed. The stack delivery lever moves to its home position and stops. The returning roller moves to the home position and stops. When not at the The front jogging plate moves to its home home position When at the home position position and stops. The front jogging plate moves over a specific position and stops at
To stop Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).
1 ON
Stack processing
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 ON
motor (stack delivery lever) Stack processing motor
1 ON
(returning roller) Front jogging plate motor
ON
Rear jogging plate motor

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
the home position. When not at the The rear jogging plate home position moves to the home position and stops. When at the home position The rear jogging plate moves over a specific
Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).
ON
Upper stack tray motor (up)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
distance and stops. The upper stack tray moves up and stops when the upper stack tray upper limit sensor turns ON. The upper stack tray moves down and stops when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor turns ON.
ON
Upper stack tray motor (down)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 - 78
Setting
ON
Item Lower stack tray motor (up)

7 8
Operation The lower stack tray moves up and stops when the lower stack tray upper limit sensor is turned ON. The lower stack tray moves down and stops when the lower stack tray lower limit sensor is turned ON. The stapler motor stops after the stapling operation.
To stop Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press SW2 again. Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Press the stapler safety switch (S14). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4). Turn OFF the joint sensor (S4).
1 ON
Lower stack tray motor (down)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 ON
Stapler motor
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
Shipping position operation

2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The upper and lower stack trays move to the shipping position and stop.
Note: Perform the shipping position operation when the finisher is packed again.
3 - 79
3.14 Adjustment of the Finisher (MJ-1023/1024)

3.14.1 Adjusting the alignment position (Finisher unit) Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the alignment position must be changed for some reason. (1) (2) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit. Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows according to the paper used for adjustment.
ON ON
A4 paper
Fig. 3-1401
LT paper
(3) (4)
(5) (6)
(7) (8) (9)
Turn ON the power. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board. When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed position. Place ten sheets of A4/LT paper between the alignment plates and push them against the stopper. Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board and push the alignment plate against the paper. When SW101 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm forward. When SW102 is pressed, alignment plate moves 0.42 mm backward. When adjustment is complete, remove paper and press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to store the adjustment in memory. Turn OFF all bits of finisher controller PC board SW104. Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
3 - 80
3.14.2 Adjusting the staple position (Finisher unit) Perform this adjustment after replacing the finisher controller PC board or when the staple position must be changed for some reason. This adjustment adjusts the front/rear stitches with A4/A4-R when the paper used for adjustment is AB type and with LT/LT-R when the paper is INCH type. (1) (2) Remove the rear cover of the finisher unit. Check that the power is OFF and set SW104 on the finisher controller PC board as follows according to paper/stitch position used for adjustment.
ON ON
A4/front stitch
ON ON
A4/rear stitch
A4-R/front stitch
ON ON
A4-R/rear stitch
LT/front stitch
ON ON
LT/rear stitch
LT-R/front stitch
Fig. 3-1402
LT-R/rear stitch
(3) (4)
(5)
(6)
Turn ON the power. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board. When SW103 is pressed, the swing guide opens and the alignment plate moves to prescribed position. Place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates. Push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. If the gap between the front alignment plate and front edge of the paper is 1 mm or greater, stop the staple position adjustment and repeat the staple position adjustment after completing alignment plate adjustment. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once to staple. However, remove the stapled paper manually because the paper is not ejected. Press SW103 on the finisher controller PC board once again.
3 - 81
(7) (8)
Verify the staple position. If any adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 8). If no adjustment is needed, proceed to the step 9). Press SW101 or SW102 on the finisher controller PC board to adjust the staple position. When SW101 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the front side. When SW102 is pressed, the staple position shifts 0.49 mm to the rear side.
Repeat the steps 5) to 7). (9) After confirming that the staple position is adjusted correctly, place a sheet of paper between the alignment plates and push it against the stopper and push the rear edge of the paper against the rear alignment plate. Then press SW103 once. (Stapling is performed and the adjustment value is stored in memory.) The staple position adjustment is completed. (10) Turn OFF all bits of SW104 on the finisher controller PC board. (11) Turn OFF the power and install the rear cover of the finisher unit.
3 - 82
3.14.3 Adjusting the folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) The folding position is adjusted by changing setting of bits 6 through 8 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board to match the stitching position (adjusting the distance over which the paper positioning plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position). If you have replaced the saddle stitcher controller PC board, be sure to set the new SW504 so that the settings will be the same as those on the old SW504. Perform this adjustment if, for any reason, you must change the folding position. (1) (2) Check that the power is OFF and separate the finisher from the host machine. If the optional puncher unit is installed, remove it from the finisher. Remove the PC board cover and set bits 1 through 4 of SW504 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board as follows:
ON
Do not change bits 5 through 8.

Fig. 3-1403
(3) (4)
Remove the rear cover, open the inlet cover of the saddle stitcher unit and tape the actuator of inlet cover sensor (PI9) and inlet door switch (SW1). Before inserting the paper, mark the top of the paper. You will be using two sheets of A3 or LD paper.
Mark
A3/LD paper
Insert direction
Fig. 3-1404
3 - 83
(5) (6)
Turn ON the power. Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board so that the feed motor (M1) starts to rotate. (Press SW1 three seconds or more if LD paper is used.) (7) Open the inlet cover and insert two sheets of paper. Push them in by hand until the front edge of the sheets push against the paper positioning plate. (8) Close the inlet cover. (9) Press SW1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board. The saddle stitcher unit will stitch the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically. (10) Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then perform positive width adjustment or negative width adjustment to suit the relationship between the stitching position and the folding position. If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform positive width adjustment. If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform negative width adjustment. Positive Width Adjustment Negative Width Adjustment
Mark
Mark
Folding position Stitching position
Stitching position Folding position
Unit: mm Example: If L is 1 mm, provide "+1 mm". Fig. 3-1405
Unit: mm Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide "-0.5 mm".
3 - 84
(11) Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on SW504 referring to the following table. If the width adjustment is 0 The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change. If for positive width adjustment Set SW504 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate setting in the table below is provided. Example: If SW504 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set SW504 to reflect - 2. If for negative width adjustment Set SW504 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting in the table below is provided. Example: If SW504 is currently set to -1 and the interval is -0.5mm, set SW504 to reflect +1.
DIPSW1 bit settings Bit 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON Bit 7 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON Bit 8 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Setting (in units of 0.5 mm) +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3
Do not use the following setting Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 ON OFF OFF
(12) Set SW504 bits 1 to 4 to OFF.
3 - 85
3.14.4 Fine adjustment of binding/folding position (Saddle stitcher unit) The binding position/folding position can be adjusted in the following (05) codes.
Code 468-0 468-1 468-2
Paper size A4-R / LT-R B4 A3 / LD
Remarks When the value increases, the binding/folding position shifts toward the right page. (0.25mm/step) Acceptable values: -14 to 14 (Default: 0)
Increase the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "A". Decrease the adjustment value when the sheet of paper which has exited is "B". A: When the upper side of the folding is longer than the lower side B: When the upper side of the folding is shorter than the lower side
Paper feeding direction

Fig. 3-1406
3.14.5 Sensor output adjustment (Puncher unit) Perform this adjustment when replacing the punch controller PC board, transmittance sensor (photosensor PC board/LED PC board), or deflection sensor (scrap full detector PC board unit). (1) (2) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher. Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
Fig. 3-1407
(3) (4)
(5) (6)
Turn ON the power. Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board. Sensor output is adjusted automatically when the switch is pressed. Adjustment is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alternately. Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set all bits of SW601 to OFF. Turn OFF the power.
3 - 86
3.14.6 Registering the number of punch holes (Puncher unit) This operation registers which puncher unit is attached to the IC on the punch driver PC board so that the puncher unit can be identified by the finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed when the punch driver PC board has been replaced. (1) (2) Check that the power is OFF and then remove the rear cover of the puncher. Set SW601 on the punch controller PC board as shown below.
ON
Fig. 3-1408
(3) (4)
Turn ON the power. Press SW602 on the punch controller PC board to select the number of punch holes. The items in the following table are displayed repeatedly from top to bottom each time SW602 is pressed.
Number of punch holes 2 hole (E) 2/3 hole (N) 4 hole (F) 4 hole (S) LED601/LED602 Blinks 1 times per cycle Blinks 2 times per cycle Blinks 3 times per cycle Blinks 4 times per cycle
(5)
(6) (7)
Press SW603 on the punch controller PC board. The number of punch holes is registered to the punch controller PC board each time the switch is pressed. Registration is complete if LED601 and LED602 on the punch controller PC board blinks alternately. Press SW602 or SW603 on the punch controller PC board to end the adjustment mode and set all bits of SW601 to OFF. Turn OFF the power.
3 - 87
3.15 Key Copy Counter (MU-8, MU-10)

To make a key copy counter available, the following 2 components must be installed to the equipment.
Key copy counter MU-8
Counter socket MU-10
Fig. 3-1501
<Installation procedure> (1) Take off the right upper cover. (2) Open the bypass tray, ADU, jam access cover and fuser unit cover. Take off the IH terminal cover. (3) Take off the right rear cover, and cut open the window for the key copy counter.
Right upper cover
IH terminal cover Right rear cover Fig. 3-1502
(4)
Pull out the harness connector from the hole of the machine frame, and cut the short harness of the connector. (Treat the cut harness properly to avoid it causing a shortcircuit with the machine frame.) Then, disconnect the dummy connector.
Harness connector
Dummy connector Fig. 3-1503
3 - 88
(5)
(6) (7)
Connect the connector of the counter socket to the harness connector of the equipment side. Install the counter socket to the machine frame with two M3 screws. Reattach the covers.
Harness connector
Counter socket
Screw Fig. 3-1504
(8)
Insert the key copy counter with its arrow mark pointing the rear side of the equipment.
Key copy counter
Fig. 3-1505
(9)
Key in the value 3 in the setting mode (08222).
3 - 89
3 - 90
4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

4.1 PM Support Mode
4.1.1 General description The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages / develop counts after they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use of users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively. In addition, the drum rotates 4 times at color modes to transfer the images of 4 colors on the transfer belt, overlaying one after another. Therefore, the number of output pages is counted as 4 for 1 page for printing at color mode. This equipment has the PM support mode, which makes it possible to see the general use of each part (the number of output pages, develop counts and drive counts) and replacement record and to do a counter clearing operation more efficiently when replacing. The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103). 4.1.2 Operational flow and operational screen (1) Operational flow
PM support mode activated [6]+[START]+[POWER]ON [RETURN] pressed [2] [START] Main unit chosen [SUB UNIT] pressed
Main screen Main unit list displayed
[RETURN] pressed Main unit chosen [RESET]
[CANCEL] pressed
Sub screen Sub unit list displayed
Clear finished
Clear screen Counter clear confirmation displayed
[CANCEL] pressed Sub unit chosen [RESET] pressed
[INITIALIZE] pressed Clear finished Counter clear performed
* The screen goes back to the main screen when the counter clear is performed or the [CANCEL] button is pressed after moving from the main screen, while it goes back to the sub screen after moving from the sub screen.
Fig. 4-101
4-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
(2) (a)
Operational screen Main screen
10
5
Fig. 4-102
Displaying of the main unit name Back to the PM support mode activation screen Clearing of the chosen unit counters (all the sub unit (parts) counters belonging to that unit) All counters are cleared when the unit is not selected Moving to the sub screen Moving to the next/previous page Displaying of the standard number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000) is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number. Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the unit parts Displaying of the present number of output pages/develop counts (x1,000) When there are differences among the sub units (parts), _ is displayed and CHECK SUBUNIT is displayed at the top is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages or develop counts has exceeded its PM standard number. Displaying of the number of output pages / develop counts (Page/D. cnt), drive counts (Cnt.) and previous replacement date (Chg.) for a chosen unit When the replacement date for the sub unit is different, press the [SUB UNIT] button to move to the sub screen and see each information, otherwise information is not displayed Notes: 1. is always displayed at the drive counts section for the reversing automatic document feeder (RADF) and feed unit. 2. is displayed at the numeric section for the paper source which is not installed since the paper source is different depending on the structure of options.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 4-2 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
(b)
Sub screen
5
Fig. 4-103
Displaying of the sub unit (parts) name Back to the main screen Clearing of the chosen sub unit (parts) counters Moving to the next/previous page Displaying of the present number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) is displayed next to the present number when the number of output pages or develop counts has exceeded its PM standard number. Displaying of the standard number of output pages / develop counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts) Displaying of the present drive counts (x1,000) is displayed next to the present number when the number of drive counts has exceeded its PM standard number. Displaying of the standard number of drive counts (x1,000) to replace the sub unit (parts) Displaying of the number of output pages, develop counts and drive counts and previous replacement date for a chosen sub unit
4-3
(c)
Clear screen
1
Fig. 4-104
When the [INITIALIZE] button is pressed, Present number of output pages/develop counts and Present driving counts are cleared and Previous replacement date is updated. (3) Access tree Note: The name inside [ ] is displayed on the LCD screen. Main screen Drum/cleaner unit [CLEANER/DRUM] Sub screen Drum [DRUM] Drum cleaning blade [DRUM BLADE] Drum cleaner brush [DRUM BRUSH] Main charger grid [GRID] Main charger wire [MAIN CHARGER WIRE] Main charger wire pad [WIRE CLEANING PAD] Ozone filter [OZONE FILTER]
Main charger unit [MAIN CHARGER]
Ozone filter [FILTER] Black developer unit [BLACK DEVELOPER] Color developer unit [COLOR DEVELOPER]
Developer material K [BLACK DEVELOPER]
Developer material Y [YELLOW DEVELOPER] Developer material M [MAGENTA DEVELOPER] Developer material C [CYAN DEVELOPER] 1st transfer roller [1st TRANSFER ROLLER] Transfer belt [TRANSFER BELT] Transfer belt cleaning blade [BELT BLADE] 2nd transfer roller [2nd TRANSFER ROLLER]
Transfer belt unit [1st TRANSFER]
2nd transfer roller unit [2nd TRANSFER]
4-4
Fuser unit [FUSER]
Fuser belt [FUSER BELT] Pressure roller [PRESS ROLLER] Oil roller [OIL ROLLER] Cleaning roller [CLEANING ROLLER] Separation finger [PRESS ROLLER FINGER] Fuser belt guide [BELT GUIDE] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(1st CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(1st CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(1st CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(2nd CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(2nd CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(2nd CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(SFB)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(SFB)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(SFB)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(RADF)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(RADF)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(RADF)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(LCF)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(LCF)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(LCF)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(3rd CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(3rd CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(3rd CST.)] Pickup roller [PICK UP ROLLER(4th CST.)] Feed roller [FEED ROLLER(4th CST.)] Separation roller [SEP ROLLER(4th CST.)]
Upper drawer [1st CST.]
Lower drawer [2nd CST.]
Bypass unit [SFB]
RADF [RADF]
LCF [LCF]
PFP upper drawer [3rd CST.]
PFP lower drawer [4th CST.]
Note: When the counter value of any of the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller in each unit is reset, the value of the feeding retry counter is also reset simultaneously. When the [RESET] button is pressed after selecting the feed unit in the Main Screen, the value of the feeding retry counter is also reset simultaneously. The feeding retry counter: - Upper drawer - Lower drawer - PFP upper drawer - PFP lower drawer - Bypass unit - LCF
Reset the feeding retry counter Reset the feeding retry counter Reset the feeding retry counter Reset the feeding retry counter Reset the feeding retry counter Reset the feeding retry counter
(08-1390) (08-1391) (08-1392) (08-1393) (08-1394) (08-1395)
4-5
4.1.3 Work flow of parts replacement The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages / develop counts after they were replaced before. However, its drive counts is also to be considered when replacing the parts. Even if the number of output pages has reached the level of replacement, for instance, the part may still be usable with its drive counts not reaching the specified drive counts. On the other hand, the part may need replacement even if the number of output pages has not reached the level of replacement with its driving time exceeding the specified drive counts. The life span of some parts such as feed roller is heavily dependent on the number of output pages rather than the drive counts. The following work flow diagram shows how to judge the timing of replacement with the number of output pages and the drive counts. The number of output pages is counted as 4 for 1 page for printing at color modes. This 4 is develop counts. Example 1: When the number of output pages has reached the specified level The parts in RADF The parts in feeding system The parts in the drum/cleaner unit The parts in the transfer belt unit The parts in the 2nd transfer unit Developer material The parts in the fuser unit Check the drive counts at PM support mode. Does it exceed the specified drive counts? No The part is still usable.
Replace the part.
Yes
Replace the part.
Replace the part after the drive counts has reached the specified count.
Fig. 4-105
Example 2: When the image failure occurred before the number of output pages has reached the specified level Check the drive counts of all parts at PM support mode. Yes
Does it exceed the specified drive count? No
Replace the part.
Check the part and equipment according to the TROUBLESHOOTING.

Fig. 4-106
4-6
4.2 General Descriptions for PM Procedure

(1) Preparation a. Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down. b. Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them. c. See the replacement record and check the parts to be replaced in the PM support mode (6S2) or list printing mode (9S-103). 6S-2 : [6]+[START]+[POWER]ON [2] [START] 9S-103 : [9]+[START]+[POWER]ON [103] [START]
PM SUPPORT CODE LIST
10-20-'03 11:28 UNIT OUTPUT PAGES/ DEVELOP COUNTS 22220 22220 22220 22220 22220 22220 PM OUTPUT PAGE/ DEVELOP COUNTS 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 DRIVE COUNTS PM DRIVE COUNTS
DRUM DRUM DRUM GRID MAIN WIRE
BLADE BRUSH CHARGER WIRE CLEANING PAD
30948 30948 30948 30948 30948 30948
320000 320000 320000 320000 320000 320000
Fig. 4-201
(2) (3)
d. Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment. Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations. Refer to the Service Manual if necessary. Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
4.3 Operational Items in Overhauling

Overhaul each equipment with the following timing. e-STUDIO3511: When the number of develop counts has reached 360,000 or 2.5 years have passed form the start of use (Whichever is earlier.) e-STUDIO4511: When the number of develop counts has reached 450,000 or 2.5 years have passed form the start of use (Whichever is earlier.) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Replace all the supplies. Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with new ones if they are damaged. Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck. Replace them with new ones if necessary. Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if necessary. Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.
4-7
4.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist

Symbols used in the checklist
Cleaning A Clean with alcohol Clean with soft pad, cloth or vacuum cleaner SI L Lubrication Launa 40 Coating Silicon oil W1 White grease W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) AV Alvania No.2 Replacement The number of sheets or developments consumed before replacement Replace if deformed or damaged Operation check After cleaning or replacement, confirm there is no problem. Date User name Serial No. Inspectors name Remarks
(Molykote X5-6020) (Value x 1,000)
[Preventive Maintenance Checklist] Notes: 1. Perform cleaning and lubricating in every 120,000 output pages for e-STUDIO3511, and every 150,000 output pages for e-STUDIO4511. Lubricate the replacement parts following to the replacement cycle. Exceptionally, the lubrication for the drum unit, main charger, color developer unit and 1st transfer unit must follow the PM cycle of each unit. 2. Values under Replacement indicate the replacement cycle for e-STUDIO3511/e-STUDIO4511. (KS= x 1,000 sheets, KD= x 1,000 developments) 3. The replacement cycle of the parts for the charge, development and 1st transfer in copying process is not indicated by the number of output pages (sheet), but the develop counts (development). The number of output pages is counted as 4 developments for 1 page for printing at color mode, and 1 development at black-and-white mode. 4. The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section equals to the number of sheets fed from each paper source. 5. Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating. A. Scanner
Items to check A1. Original glass A2. ADF original glass A3. Mirror-1 A4. Mirror-2 A5. Mirror-3 A6. Reflector A7. Lens A8. Exposure lamp A9. Automatic original detection sensor A10. Slide sheet (front and rear) Cleaning or A or A Lubrication Replacement (KS) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks *a1 *a1
or A
B. Laser unit
Items to check B1. Slit glass e-STUDIO3511/4511 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 4-8
04/02
Cleaning
Lubrication
Replacement (KS)
Operation check
Parts list <P-I>
Remarks
C. Feed unit
Items to check C1. C2. C3. C4. C5 C6. C7. C8. Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Transport roller Paper guide Drive gear (tooth face and shaft) GCB bushing bearing One side of the plastic bushing to which the shaft is inserted C9. Registration roller C10. Paper dust removal brush Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KS) 80/80 80/80 80/80 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P18-I20 P18-I24 P18-I5 Remarks
AV, V2 A W1 L W1 A
*c1
*c2
*c3
D. Automatic duplexing unit

Items to check D1. Transport roller (upper, middle and lower) D2. One side of the GCB bushing to which the shaft is inserted D3. One side of the plastic bushing to which the shaft is inserted D4. Paper guide Cleaning A L W1 W Lubrication Replacement (KS) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks
E. Bypass feed unit

Items to check E1. E2. E3. E4. E5. E6. E7. Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Bypass tray Drive gear (shaft) GCB bushing bearing Transport roller Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KS) 80/80 80/80 80/80 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P22-I26 P22-I37 P21-I1 Remarks
AV, W2 W1 L A
*e1
F. Main charger
Items to check F1. F2. F3. F4. F5. Main charger case Main charger wire Contact point of terminals Charger wire cleaning pad Main charger grid Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KD) 160/200 160/200 160/200 Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks *f1 *f1
P28-I15 P28-I12 P28-I21
4-9
04/02
G. Drum/Cleaner related section

Items to check G1. Photoconductive drum G2. G3. G4. G5. G6. G7. G8. G9. Drum shaft Whole cleaner unit Drum cleaning blade Drum cleaner brush Recovery blade Used toner auger drive section Discharge LED Ozone filter Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KD) 160/200 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P103-I1 Remarks
Refer to Chapter 4.8.2.
160/200 160/200 W1 160/200
P32-I34 P32-I29
*g1 *g1 *g2
P14-I50
H. Toner bag
Items to check H1. Toner bag Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KD) 50/50 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P103-I6 Remarks
I. Black developer unit

Items to check I1. I2. I3. I4. I5. I6. I7. I8. Whole black developer unit Black developer unit drive section Developer material (K) Front shield Oil seal (6 pcs.) Guide roller Toner cartridge drive gear Side shield Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KS) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks
W1 120/150 AV or A W1 360/450 P103-I2 P34-I3, 15 *i1 *i2
4 - 10
04/02
J. Color developer unit / Revolver unit

Items to check J1. Whole color developer unit (Y, M and C) J2. Color developer unit drive section (Y, M and C) J3. Developer material (Y, M, and C) J4. Front shield (Y, M and C) J5. Oil seal (6 pcs. for each color) J6. Guide roller (Y, M and C) J7. Toner cartridge drive gear (Y, M and C) J8. Revolver drive gear J9. Color auto-toner sensor J10. Side shield Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KS) Operation check Parts list <P-I> Remarks
W1 30/37.5 AV or A W1 W1 AV 360/450 P103-I3 P33-I12, 14 *j1 *j2
*j3
K. Transfer belt unit

Items to check K1. K2. K3. K4. K5. K6. K7. Transfer belt 1st transfer roller Transfer belt drive roller 1 Transfer belt drive roller 2 Transfer belt cleaning blade Image quality sensor Transfer belt home position sensor (2 pcs.) K8. Transfer belt recovery blade K9. Paper clinging detection sensor K10. Blade seal (front side) K11. Blade seal (rear side) K12. Tape Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KD) 480/600 480/600 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P30-I34 P30-I17 *k1 *k1 160/200 P31-I11 *k2 *k3 *k4 160/200 160/200 160/200 P31-I8 P31-I41 P31-I31 Remarks
A A
L. 2nd transfer roller unit

Items to check L1. 2nd transfer roller L2. Paper guide L3. Washer Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KS) 240/300 240/300 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P13-I30 *l1 P13-I49 Remarks
4 - 11
04/02
M. Fuser unit
Items to check M1. M2. M3. M4. M5. M6. M7. M8. M9. M10. M11. Fuser belt Pressure roller Separation finger Oil roller Cleaning roller Thermistor (3 pcs.) Fuser unit drive gear Exit roller Fuser belt guide Separation roller Scraper Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KS) 120/150 120/150 120/150 120/150 120/150 A W1 A 120/150 W2 120/150 P39-I55 P41-I18 *m3 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P40-I1 P39-I5 P39-I25 P40-I34 P40-I23 Remarks
*m1
*m2
N. RADF (MR-3015)
Items to check N1. Pickup roller N2. Feed roller N3. Separation roller N4. Original length sensor N5. Registration roller N6. 1st small roller N7. 2nd small roller N8. Read sensor N9. Read guide N10. Read roller N11. 3rd small roller N12. 4th small roller N13. Reverse sensor N14. Exit roller N15. Reverse roller N16. Platen sheet Cleaning Lubrication Replacement (KS) 120/120 120/120 120/120 A A A Operation check Parts list <P-I> P8-I26 P8-I25 P6-I6 Remarks
A A A A A or A
4 - 12
04/02
O. PFP (KD-1011)
Items to check O1. O2. O3. O4. Pickup roller (upper/lower) Feed roller (upper/lower) Separation roller (upper/lower) Drive gear (tooth face) Cleaning A A A Lubrication Replacement (KS) 80/80 80/80 80/80 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P5-I29 P5-I26 P5-I12 Remarks
AV, W2 W1
*o1
P. LCF (KD-1012)
Items to check O1. O2. O3. O4. Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Drive gear (tooth face) Cleaning A A A W1 Lubrication Replacement (KS) 160/160 160/160 160/160 Operation check Parts list <P-I> P4-I30 P4-I28 P5-I12 Remarks
4 - 13
04/02
A2 A4 A5
A8 A6
A3
A1
A7
A10
K11 A9 K10 K4 K7 K2 G5 K5 J9 G1 G6 G3
M8 M5
M1 M3
M2
D1 D4 L2 G9 K7 D1
J1 J3 J4 J5 J10
G7 M4 G4 M6
K9 K6
K3 L1 C9, C10 D1 E7 E1
E4
I1 I3 I4 I5 I8 C4 C2 C3
E2 E3 C4 C2 C3
F5
F2 F4
F1 G8 F3
K1
B1
C1
C5
Fig. 4-202 Front side
4 - 14
N5
N4
N2
N3 N1
N6 N8 N7
N9 N10 N11 N12
N13
N14
N15
N16
Fig. 4-203 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF)
O1
O2
O3
O2 O3
O1
Fig. 4-204 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP)
P1
P2
P3
Fig. 4-205 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF)
4 - 15
Remarks * in the Preventive Maintenance Check List *a1. Original glass, ADF original glass Clean both sides of the original glass and ADF original. Make sure that there is no dust on the mirrors-1, -2, -3 and lens after cleaning. Then install the original glass and ADF original glass. Note: Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the original scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be scanned. *c1, o1. Separation roller (Feed unit, PFP) Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring. When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places). Note: Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if adhered.
Apply grease on the inner surface
Apply white grease
Fig. 4-206
Fig. 4-207
*c2.
Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts) Apply some white grease (Molykote X5-6020) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive gears. Note: Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the clutch after applying molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of molycote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.
4 - 16
*c3.
Install the 2nd transfer front guide after the cleaning of the paper dust removal brush. Push the 2nd transfer front guide to the transfer belt unit and fix it securely as shown in the figure below.
Fig. 4-208
*e1.
Separation roller (SFB) Apply an even coat of grease (Alvania No.2) to all round the inside of the spring. When replacing the separation roller, apply adequate amount of white grease (Molykote HP-300) on the places of the holder shown in the figure (4 places). Note: Make sure that the grease does not adhere to the roller surface. Wipe it off with alcohol if adhered.
Apply grease on the inner surface
Apply white grease
Fig. 4-209
Fig. 4-210
4 - 17
*f1.
Main charger case / Main charger wire Clean the main charger case and wire with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly, and then wipe them with a dry cloth. Note: Be careful of the following when attaching a new wire (length: 373 mm). Insert the wire securely into the V-grooves of the front and rear sides. Do not twist the wire. Do not touch the wire with your bare hand.
*g1.
Drum cleaning blade / Drum cleaner brush Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as the adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade and brush with new ones if poor images are copied due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages which have been made. Recovery blade Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade get damaged. Developer material After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment and then enforced performing of image quality closed-loop control ( Chapter 3.2 ). Oil seal (Black developer unit) Mixer unit (Shafts of mixers-1 & -2) Developer sleeve Oil seal (Color developer unit) Mixer unit (Shafts of mixers-1 & -2) Developer sleeve
*g2.
*i1, j1.
*i2.
4 pcs. 2 pc.
*j2.
4 pcs. 2 pc.
Note: Lubricate the oil seal only when the oil seal is replaced. During replacement, coat the oil seal with grease (Alvania No.2). (1) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the mounting hole section of the developer frame or outside of the nozzle mixer. * Pay attention to the direction in which the oil seal is attached. (See figure on right.) (2) Apply an even coat of grease to the inside of the oil seal. Inside Amount: About two small drops (3) Wipe off any grease exuded from the inside.
Developer frame (Nozzle mixer) Outside
Grease
Oil seal
Fig. 4-211
4 - 18
*j3.
Color auto-toner sensor The head of color auto-toner sensor is to be cleaned with a cotton swab or soft cloth with sufficient alcohol filled in. The reference plate is to be cleaned by blowing off the adhered toner with an air-spray type cleaner such as a blower brush or an air duster. During replacement, coat the shaft of sensor shutter with the grease (Alvania No.2).
Head of color auto-toner sensor

Fig. 4-212
Reference plate
Note: Never clean the reference plate by touching it directly (e.g. brushing away the dust) since the surface of reference plate will be scratched. *k1. Transfer belt drive roller / Transfer belt driven roller Fully clean up the toner and such adhered to the roller with alcohol since an image failure may occur if there are any bolts remaining on the roller.
Blot
Fig. 4-213
*k2.
Area around image quality sensor Clean the shutter of the image quality sensor and around it. Do not touch the sensor head inside the shutter.
4 - 19
*k3.
Transfer belt home position sensor Clean each surface of transfer belt home position sensors (2 pcs.) with a dry cloth when replacing the transfer belt.
Fig. 4-214
*k4.
Transfer belt recovery blade Clean the surface of transfer belt recovery blade with a cloth soaked in water and tightly squeezed, and the wipe it with a dry cloth when replacing the transfer belt cleaning blade. If the edge of recovery blade is damaged, replace the blade regardless of the number of output pages. Paper clinging detection sensor Open the ADU and clean the paper clinging detection sensor with a cotton swab, etc. Note: Clean the entire area (denoted in the figure below) of the sensor surface.
*k5.
Fig. 4-215
4 - 20
*l1.
Paper guide Clean the surface of the paper guide (denoted in the figure) with a piece of dry cloth. When cleaning, do not touch the surface of the transfer belt with bare hands.
Fig. 4-216
*m1.
Separation finger The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output pages which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning. The finger may be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly. Replace the finger if the toner is sticking to it heavily. Thermistor Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is replaced. Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a new one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree. Separation roller When replacing the transfer belt, apply some White Molykote (HP-300) on both ends of the separation roller shaft.
*m2.
*m3.
Fig. 4-217
4 - 21
4.5 PM KIT
Item EPU-KIT-3511 Product name Drum cleaning blade Main charger wire Main charger grid Drum cleaner brush Ozone filter Charger wire cleaning pad DEV-KIT-3511C Developer material (Y) Developer material (M) Developer material (C) Cleaning jig TBU-KIT-3511 Transfer belt Transfer belt cleaning blade 1st transfer roller Blade seal (front side) Blade seal (rear side) Tape DEV-KIT-3511 Developer material (K) Cleaning jig 2nd transfer roller Washer FR-KIT-3511 Fuser belt Pressure roller Separation finger Oil roller Cleaning roller Fuser belt guide Scraper ROL-KIT-16CST Pick up roller Feed roller Separation roller ROL-KIT-1010 Pick up roller Feed roller Separation roller DF-KIT-3015 Pick up roller Feed roller Separation roller BL-3511D WIRE-CHARGR-373 GRID-220 B-3511 FILTER-OZ-SPB-600 ASYS-PAD-CHARGR-350 D-3511-Y D-3511-M D-3511-C JIG-CLEAN-DOC BT-3511TR BL-3511TR CR-3511TR SEAL-BLADE-FRT SEAL-BLADE-RER TAPE-2191FR D-3511-K JIG-CLEAN-DOC CR-3511TR2 WSH-4P5-8-OP3-PHF850S BT-3511-FU HR-3511-L SCRAPR-FUS-350 SR-3511U B-3511U COLAR-HR-IN ASYB-BRKT-SCRAPR ROLLER-PICK-AT K-ROLL-FEED K-ROLL-SPT ROL-PICK-UP ROL-PAPER-FED-F ROL-PAPER-FED-S ROL-PICK-UP ROL-FEED ROL-SPT-513 Part name Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 5 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 - 22
04/02
4.6 Jig List

Item Door switch jig Test chart (A4) Test chat (LT) Test chart No. TCC-1 (A4) Test chart No. TCC-1 (LT) Doctor blade cleaning jig Downloading jig (DLM board) Wire holder jig Download JIG-2 (6 Flash ROMs) Download JIG-1 (2 Flash ROMs) ROM writer adapter (For 1881) ROM writer adapter (For 1931) Doctor sleeve jig Developer material nozzle Parts list Page 101 101 101 101 101 101 102 101 102 102 102 102 101 101 Item 1 3 3 2 2 4 1 5 2 3 4 5 7 6
4.7 Grease List

Grease name SI Silicon oil L Launa 40 W1 White grease (Molykote X5-6020) W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) AV Alvania No.2 Part name ASM-SILOCON-1M OIL-LAUNA40-100 MOLYKOTE-100 ASM-PG-HP300-S GREASE-HP-S ASM-GE334C-S Volume 100 cc 100 cc 100 g 100 g 10 g 100 g Container Bottle Oiler Tube Bottle Bottle Tube Parts list Page 101 101 101 101 101 101 Item 8 9 12 10A 10B 11
4 - 23
4.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies

4.8.1 Precautions for storing TOSHIBA supplies A. Toner/Developer Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation. B. Photoconductive drum Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Drum cleaning blade / Transfer belt cleaning blade This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10C to 35C, and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Transfer belt / Transfer roller / Fuser belt / Pressure roller Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Oil roller / Cleaning roller Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. They should also be stored horizontally on a flat surface. Paper Avoid storing copy paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity. After a package is opened, be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.
C.
D.
E.
F.
4 - 24
4.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum (1) Use of gloves If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photosensitive drum may degrade, affecting the quality of the copy image. So, do not touch the drum surface with bare hands. (2) Handling precautions As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when installing and removing it so as not damage its surface. Be sure to apply patting powder (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. When the drum has been replaced with a new one, the drum counter (setting mode (08-1150-0, 3, 6 and 7) must be cleared to 0 (zero). This clearing can be performed in PM support mode. Notes: 1. Application of the patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning blade. If the application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be damaged. 2. When paper fibers or dint adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning efficiency and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers found adhering to the blade. (3) Installation of equipment and storage of drum Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes. Do not place the drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light such as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image density immediately after being installed in the equipment. Cleaning the drum At periodic maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated cleaning cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum. Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an adverse effect on the drum. Scratches on photoconductive drum surface If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no copy image will be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a new drum will be necessary. Collecting used photoconductive drums Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, we recommend following the relevant local regulations or rules.
(4)
(5)
(6)
4 - 25
4.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade and transfer belt cleaning blade (1) Handling precautions Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its edge: Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge. Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad. Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge. Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade. Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge. Do not place the blade near a heat source. (2) Cleaning procedure Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.
4.8.4 Handling of drum cleaner brush Do not touch the brush surface with bare hands. 4.8.5 Handling of transfer belt (1) Do not touch the belt surface with bare hands. (2) Prevent oil or other foreign matter from adhering to the belt surface. (3) Do not touch the transfer belt with alcohol or other organic solvents. (4) Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the transfer belt. (5) When replacing the belt and transfer belt cleaning unit, apply patting powder sufficiently and evenly. Otherwise, it may reduce the cleaning efficiency. 4.8.6 Checking and cleaning of fuser belt and pressure roller (1) Handling precautions Fuser belt Do not touch the belt surface with bare hands. Prevent oil or other foreign matter from staining the belt surface. Do not allow alcohol or any other organic solvent to contact with the fuser belt. Do not apply external pressure that might scratch the fuser belt. Pressure roller Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller. Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the pressure roller, or it may be damaged, possibly resulting in poor cleaning.
4 - 26
(2)
Checking Check for stain and damage on the fuser belt and pressure roller, and clean if necessary. Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips. Check the cleaning effect of the cleaning roller. Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller. Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner. Check the gap between the inlet guide and pressure roller. Check the fuser belt for proper transportation. Check the pressure roller for proper rotation. Cleaning procedure When the fuser belt and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe the surface clean with a suitable cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the belt and roller while they are still warm. Note: Be careful not to rub the fuser belt and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser belt and pressure roller.
(3)
(4)
Checking after the assembly of the fuser belt unit After the assembly, rotate the fuser belt for a round to confirm that the belt is neither folded nor scratched. A folded or scratched belt may be broken when it is in use.
4.8.7 Checking and replacing the oil roller and cleaning roller (1) Handling precautions Never allow solvents such as paint thinner to touch to the oil/cleaning rollers. (2) Poor cleaning and corrective treatment Judgment should be made depending on how much toner has been deposited on the fuser belt surface. When its surface is stained with toner, check the oil roller and cleaning roller. If toner is heavily adhered on the oil/cleaning rollers, it means the cleaning performance is declined and the oil/cleaning rollers should be replaced with new ones. The oil/cleaning rollers are gradually degraded due to subjection to the heat from the fuser belt over a long period of time. Replace them after the specified number of output pages have been made.
4 - 27
4 - 28
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
<CAUTION IN REPLACING PC BOARDS> The ID for each equipment is registered on the LGC board, the DRV board, the SYS board and the SLG board. So, if their replacement is required, be sure to replace only one board at a time If more than one of the LGC board, the DRV board and the SYS board require replacement, replace them in the following procedure. 1. First, replace one of the board to be replaced. 2. Turn the power ON and confirm that "READY" is displayed. 3. Turn the power OFF. 4. Replace another board that requires replacement. 5. Repeat steps 2 to 4.
<CAUTION IN REPLACING SLG BOARD> When the SLG board has been replaced, Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SYS board SLG board (05-369) must be performed.
<CAUTION IN REPLACING AND CLEARING NVRAM> When NVRAM has been replaced or cleared (System all clearing (08-669)), the following adjustments must be performed. 1. Perform Data transfer of characteristic value of scanner / SLG board SYS board (05364). 2. Perform Image quality control initialization (05-396) ( Chapter 3.3), and then perform Automatic gamma adjustment (05-1642, 1000 and 1002) consecutively ( 3.5.1 and 3.6.1). Chapters
<CAUTION IN REPLACING HDD> When the HDD is replaced, it is necessary to back up the data in the HDD before replacing and to recover them after replacing. Notes: 1. To maintain the security, ask users to perform the backup/restore for users data/information in the HDD. The service technician can perform them only when users permit it. 2. Some data in the HDD cannot be backed up and can be kept only on the paper.
5-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING
The procedure for replacing the HDD is as follows. (1) Ask users to back up the data in the HDD. See the following for the item of data, and the possibility and the measure of the backup. 1. Image data in the Electronic Filing - Archive them in the e-Filing of TopAccess. 2. F-code information, Template registration information, Address book - Back them up in the Administrator menu of TopAccess. 3. Department management data - Export them in Administrator menu of TopAccess. 4. Log data (Print, Scan, FAX (Transmission/Reception)) - Export them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess. (Import cannot be performed.) 5. Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Saved data of copy / FAX transmission) - Copy them to the client computer via the network. 6. Print waiting data (Copying data and FAX reception data that are waiting to be printed due to the paper run-out and jam, etc.) - Finish printing them after the paper supply and the jam release, etc. (The data cannot be kept.) 7. Network information - Put the input information down in writing. (The data cannot be backed up.) 8. Print job (Private print data, Schedule print data) - If any jobs are left, print them. (The data cannot be backed up.) 9. FAX saved data (Confidential / Bulletin board data) - Print them. (The data cannot be backed up.) 10. Registration data for FAX transmission (Delayed transmission / Recovery transmission) - The data cannot be backed up. (2) Replace the HDD and format it using Setting Mode (08-690). (3) Recover the HDD to the initial status according to the following procedure. 1. HDD program data, UI data - Update with the download jig. ( Chapter 6.1) 2. Printer gamma correction data - Perform the gamma automatic adjustment of the printer. (
Chapter 3.6.1)
5-2
(4) Ask users to reset the users setting items and to restore the data/information. See the following for the reset and the restore. 1. Network reset - Reenter the content written in the above (1). 2. Printer driver - Upload them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess. 3. F-code information, Template registering information, Address book - Restore them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess 4. Department management data - Import them in the Administrator menu of TopAccess. 5. Data in the shared folder (Scanned data, Stored data for copy / FAX transmission) - Copy them from the client computer via the network. 6. Image data in the Electronic Filing - Restore them in the e-Filing of TopAccess.
5-3
5.1 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code

5.1.1 Paper transport jam (paper exit section) [E010] Jam not reaching the exit sensor [E020] Stop jam at the exit sensor Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper on the transport path? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the paper clinging to the transfer belt entering under the receiving tray? YES Take an appropriate action according to the countermeasure of [E011] ( 5.1.4). Chapter
NO Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN358 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the exit sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the registration clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-108/158) NO 1. Check if the connector of the registration clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN362 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the registration clutch. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
5-4
5.1.2 Paper misfeeding [E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-222) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the ADU clutch. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
5-5
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor) Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Are the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the output check: 03-204 and the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected and the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the bypass feed clutch and bypass feed sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the bypass transport, feed, separation and pickup rollers. Replace them if they are worn out. [E130] Upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor) Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-201) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed clutch. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out.
5-6
[E140] Lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor) Open the side cover. Is there any paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the lower drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-202) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the lower drawer feed clutch. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out.
5-7
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor) Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the PFP upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the PFP upper drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-226) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out.
5-8
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor) Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the PFP lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the PFP lower drawer feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-228) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer feed clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out.
5-9
[E190] LCF misfeeding (paper not reaching the LCF feed sensor) Open the LCF side cover. Is there any paper in front of the LCF feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the LCF feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF feed sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN104 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the LCF feed sensor. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the LCF feed clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-209) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF feed clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the LCF feed clutch. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the LCF feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are worn out.
5 - 10
5.1.3 Paper transport jam [E200] [E210] [E300] [E330] [E3C0] Upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor) Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor) PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor) PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor) LCF transport jam (not reaching the registration sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Are the upper transport clutches (high/low speed) working? (Perform the output check: 03-439, 440) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the upper transport clutches (high/low speed) are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN362 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the upper transport clutches (high/low speed). 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper source, and replace them if they are worn out. 2. Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
5 - 11
[E220] [E310] [E340] [E3D0]
Lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor) PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor) PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor) LCF transport jam (not reaching the upper drawer feed sensor)
Open the jam access cover. Is there paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Are the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) working? (Perform the output check: 03-203, 205) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed). 6. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 12
[E320] PFP upper drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor) [E350] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor) [E3E0] LCF transport jam (not reaching the lower drawer feed sensor) Open the side cover. Is there paper in front of the lower drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the lower drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the lower drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the lower drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Are the lower transport clutches working? (Perform the output check: 03-203, 205) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the lower transport clutches (high/low speed) are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the lower transport clutches (high/low speed). 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES When the paper fed from the PFP: Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the PFP transport clutch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 13
[E360] PFP lower drawer transport jam (not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor) Open the PFP side cover. Is there any paper in front of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the PFP upper feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the PFP transport clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-225) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP transport clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the PFP transport clutch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check the condition of the feed roller, separation roller and pickup roller of each paper source, and replace them if they are worn out. 2. Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is worn out.
5 - 14
[E510] ADU transport stop jam Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU exit sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU exit sensor. 7. Replace the ADU board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the ADU clutch working? (Perform the output check: 03-222) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the ADU clutch. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they are worn out.
5 - 15
[E520] Stop jam in the ADU Open the ADU. Is there any paper in front of the ADU entrance sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the ADU entrance sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU entrance sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN214 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU entrance sensor. 7. Replace the ADU board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the exit motor (rotating in reverse) working? (Perform the output check: 03-121/171) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector of the exit motor is disconnected. Check if the connectors CN437 and J434 on the DRV board is disconnected. Check if the connector CN360 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the exit motor. 7. Replace the DRV board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the ADU motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-110/160) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU motor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN211, CN212 and CN215 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU board. 7. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the equipment. Replace them if they are worn out.
5 - 16
[EB50] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding When the paper is fed from any of the upper drawer, bypass feed unit or ADU: Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO When the paper is fed from the upper drawer: Is the upper drawer feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the upper drawer feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper drawer feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES When the paper is fed from the bypass feed unit: Is the bypass feed sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the bypass feed sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the bypass feed sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES When the paper is fed from the ADU: Is the ADU exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU exit sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN213 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU exit sensor. 7. Replace the ADU board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out.
5 - 17
When the paper is fed from any of the lower drawer, PFP or LCF: Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the upper drawer feed sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Are the upper/lower drawer feed sensors working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H], /[3]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connectors of the upper/lower drawer feed sensors are disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the upper/lower drawer feed sensors. Replace the LGC board.
[EB60] Paper remaining on the transport path due to multiple feeding Open the jam access cover. Is there any paper in front of the registration sensor? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 18
5.1.4 Other paper jam [E011] Paper jam caused by clinging to the transfer belt
Open the jam access cover. Is the paper clinging to the transfer belt? Is the paper clinging to the transfer belt entering under the receiving tray? YES 1. Remove the paper. 2. Use the paper within the specification if the thin paper being used is out of specification. Notes: 1. If the paper is remaining under the receiving tray, a scratched image occurs at printing in the color modes. 2. The paper smaller than B5 may easily enter under the receiving tray.
NO Is there any stain or poor cleaning area on the transfer belt? YES 1. Clean the transfer belt. 2. Check the installation and operation of the transfer belt cleaner.
NO Is the paper clinging detection sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[9]/[H]) NO 1. Is the detection area of the paper clinging detection sensor dirty? 2. Check if the connector of the paper clinging detection sensor and joint connectors (3 pcs.) are disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN331 of the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the harness is open-circuited or the connector pin is disconnected. 5. Replace the paper clinging detection sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES Replace the LGC board.
5 - 19
[E030] Power-ON jam Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel. Is there any paper on the transport path? (Refer to the following table) YES Remove the paper. NO Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check: Refer to the following table.) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Replace the LGC board. Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers (If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Registration area Exit area ADU Feeding area (equipment) Bypass unit LCF PFP Bridge unit Cover Jam access cover Fuser cover ADU Side cover Bypass unit LCF side cover PFP side cover Sensor Registration sensor Upper drawer feed sensor Exit sensor ADU entrance sensor ADU exit sensor Lower drawer feed sensor Bypass feed sensor LCF feed sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor Bridge unit transport sensor-1 Bridge unit transport sensor-2 Test Mode/Input check 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E] 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G] 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G] 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D] 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G] 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D] 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D] 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C] 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A]
Bridge unit
[E090] Paper jam by HDD abnormality (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON. Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Replace the HDD. Replace the SYS board.
5 - 20
[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path Open the cover of the unit/area whose picture is flashing on the control panel. Is there any paper on the transport path? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the sensor in the jamming area working? (Perform the input check: Refer to the following table) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. Check if any of the connectors on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the sensor. Replace the LGC board.
YES Replace the LGC board. Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors/covers (If a jam is occurring in the ADU, LCF or PFP, check the board in each unit.)
Jamming area Registration area Exit area ADU Bypass unit Feeding area (equipment) LCF PFP Bridge unit Finisher Cover Jam access cover Fuser cover ADU Bypass unit Side cover LCF side cover PFP side cover Sensor Registration sensor Upper drawer feed sensor Exit sensor ADU entrance sensor ADU exit sensor Bypass feed sensor Lower drawer feed sensor LCF feed sensor PFP upper drawer feed sensor PFP lower drawer feed sensor Bridge unit transport sensor-1 Bridge unit transport sensor-2 Sensors in the finisher Test Mode/Input check 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[E] 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[H] 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[G] 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[D] 03-[FAX]ON/[3]/[G] 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[G] 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[D] 03-[FAX]OFF/[4]/[D] 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C] 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[A] -
Bridge unit Finisher door
5 - 21
5.1.5 Cover open jam [E400] Jam access cover open Is the jam access cover open? YES Remove paper if there is any, then shut the cover. NO Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected. Check if the connector CN350 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the LGC board.
YES Replace the LGC board. [E410] Front cover open jam Is the front cover open? YES Shut the cover. NO Is the voltage of 24V being supplied from the power supply unit? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX] ON/[1]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector for 24V power supply is disconnected. Check if the connector CN350 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the front cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[F] NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the front cover opening/closing switch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the front cover opening/closing switch. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 22
[E420] PFP side cover open jam Is the PFP side cover open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover. NO Is the PFP side cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[F]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the PFP side cover opening/closing switch is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN241 or CN243 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing switch. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Replace the PFP board. 2. Replace the LGC board.
[E430] ADU open jam Is the ADU open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the ADU. NO Is the ADU opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[8]/[F]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the ADU opening/closing switch is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN211 or CN217 on the ADU board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN340 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the ADU board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the ADU opening/closing switch. 7. Replace the ADU board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Replace the ADU board. 2. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 23
[E440] Side cover open jam Is the side cover open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover. NO Is the side door switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[7]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the side door switch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the side door switch. Replace the LGC board.
YES Replace the LGC board. [E450] LCF side cover open jam Is the LCF side cover open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then shut the cover. NO Is the LCF side cover opening/closing switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[D]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF side cover opening/closing switch is disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN106 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the LCF side cover opening/closing switch. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Replace the LCF board. 2. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 24
[E480] Bridge unit open jam Is the Bridge unit open? YES Remove the paper if there is any, then close the unit. NO Is the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[B]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN351 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the bridge unit cover opening/closing detection switch. 6. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 25
5.1.6 RADF jam

Note: When performing the RADF related troubleshooting, be sure to perform Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356) and then "RADF original guide width adjustment (05-367, 368)" at Adjustment Mode whenever the RADF board, original length sensor, read sensor or reverse sensor has been replaced.
[E711] Jam not reaching the original length sensor [E712] Jam not reaching the registration sensor [E713] Stop jam at the original length sensor Are the pickup roller, feed roller and separation roller stained or worn out? YES Clean the rollers or replace them. NO Is the original excessively curled or folded? YES Flatten and set it again. NO Are the original length sensor and registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[8]/[E], [7]/[H]) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the original length sensor and registration sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN3 on the RADF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the original length sensor and registration sensor. 6. Replace the RADF board.
YES Replace the RADF board.
[E714] Feed signal reception jam Is the empty sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[B]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check if the lever of empty sensor is working normally. Check if the connector of the empty sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN5 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the empty sensor. Replace the RADF board.
5 - 26
[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor Are the registration roller and read roller stained? YES Clean the rollers. NO Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the read sensor are disconnected. Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the read sensor. Replace the RADF board.
[E722] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (during scanning) [E723] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (during scanning) Is the read roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Are the exit sensor and reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E], [7]/[F]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connectors of the exit sensor and reverse sensor are disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the exit sensor and reverse sensor. Replace the RADF board.
[E724] Stop jam at the registration sensor Is the registration roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Is the registration sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[H]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the registration sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN3 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the registration sensor. Replace the RADF board.
5 - 27
[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor Is the read roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Is the read sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the read sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the read sensor. Replace the RADF board.
[E726] Transport/exit signal reception jam 1. If the original is remained in the RADF, remove it. 2. If any paper is remained in the copier, remove it. 3. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the jam still occurs, lead the following procedure. 4. Check the connection between the RADF board and SLG board, and the connection between the RADF board and switching power supply. - Are the connection of the connectors and joint connectors normal? - Are the connector pins disconnected or are the harnesses open-circuited? 5. Check if the 24V and 5V outputs of the switching power supply are normal. 6. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. 7. Replace the RADF board. 8. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. 9. Replace the SLG board.
[E731] Stop jam at the exit sensor Is the exit roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the exit sensor. Replace the RADF board.
5 - 28
[E741] Stop jam at the reverse sensor Are the read roller and reverse roller stained? YES Clean the rollers. NO Is the reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[F]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the reverse sensor. Replace the RADF board.
[E742] Jam not reaching the reverse sensor (feeding in reverse) Is the reverse roller stained? YES Clean the roller. NO Is the reverse sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[F]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the reverse sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the reverse sensor. Replace the RADF board.
[E743] Jam not reaching the exit sensor (feeding in reverse) Are the reverse roller and read roller stained? YES Clean the rollers. NO Is the exit sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[E]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the exit sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN4 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the exit sensor. Replace the RADF board.
5 - 29
[E860] Jam access cover open Is the jam access cover opened? YES Remove the original, if any, and close the jam access cover. NO Is the jam access cover switch working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[C]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the jam access cover switch is disconnected. Check if the connector CN8 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the jam access cover switch. Replace the RADF board.
[E870] RADF open jam Is the RADF opened? YES Remove the original, if any, and close the RADF. NO Is the RADF opening/closing sensor adjusted within the specified range? NO Adjust the RADF opening/closing sensor. YES Is the RADF opening/closing sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[7]/[D]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the RADF opening/closing sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN6 on the RADF board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the RADF opening/closing sensor. Replace the RADF board.
5 - 30
5.1.7 Finisher jam (1) Jam in bridge unit Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-1 Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-1 Paper not reaching the bridge unit transport sensor-2 Paper stopping at the bridge unit transport sensor-2
[E910] [E920] [E930] [E940]
Is there any paper remaining inside the bridge unit? YES Remove the paper. NO Are the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 working? (Perform the input check:03-[FAX]ON/[0]/[C], /[0]/[A]) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2 are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN351 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the bridge unit transport sensors-1 and -2. 7. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the bridge unit gate solenoid working? (Perform the output check: 03-232) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector J510 of the bridge unit is disconnected. Check if the connector CN351 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Replace the bridge unit gate solenoid. Replace the LGC board.
YES Does the transport roller of the bridge unit work when the main motor is rotated? (Perform the output check: 03-101/151) NO Check the drive system of the equipment and bridge unit. YES Check if the rollers in the bridge unit are worn out.
5 - 31
(2)
Paper jam in finisher section
[EA10] Paper transport delay jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working normally? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.
YES Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.
5 - 32
[EA20] Paper transport stop jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.
MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is any of the connectors (J707, J708 and J722B) on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor [PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38]) open-circuited? YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses. NO Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely. 2. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place. 3. Replace the sensors.
5 - 33
[EA30] Power-ON jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.
MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher? YES Remove the paper. NO Is any of the connectors J707, J708 and J722B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and each sensor (the inlet sensor [PI33], the transport path sensor [PI34], the processing tray sensor [PI38], open-circuited? YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses. NO Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, the transport path sensor and the processing tray sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely. 2. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place. 3. Replace the sensors.
5 - 34
[EA40] Door open jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the finisher connected with the equipment? NO Connect the finisher with the equipment. YES Is the connector J11 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and joint sensor (S4) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the joint sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the joint sensor securely. 2. Replace the joint sensor.
5 - 35
MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is either of the covers upper or front of the finisher closed? NO Close the door. YES Is any connectors J707 and J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and upper/front cover opening sensors (PI31 and PI32) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the upper/front cover opening sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the upper/front cover opening sensor securely. 2. Replace the upper/front cover opening sensor.
YES Is the connector J719 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and front cover switch (MS31) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the front cover switch working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the front cover switch securely. 2. Replace the front cover switch.
Is the connector J5 on the punch controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and upper door switch (MSW61) open-circuited? Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and front door switch (MSW62) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Are the upper and front door switches working properly? NO 1. Connect the connectors of the upper and front door switches securely. 2. Replace the upper/front door switches.
5 - 36
[EA50] Stapling jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the stapling tray? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple sheet slid from the staple case? YES End. NO Is the connector J8 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stapling home position sensor (S17) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the stapling home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the stapling home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the stapling home position sensor.
MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment or on the stapling tray? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staple sheet slid from the staple case? YES End. NO Is the connector J721B on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and staple home position sensor (PI40) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the staple home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the staple home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the staple home position sensor.
5 - 37
[EA60] Early arrival jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (S2) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.
MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the inlet sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the inlet sensor.
5 - 38
[EA70] Stack delivery jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J9 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the stack delivery lever home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the stack delivery lever home position sensor.
YES Replace the finisher controller PC board. [EAF0] Stack return jam MJ-1022 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J10 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and returning roller home position sensor (S3) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the returning roller home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the returning roller home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the returning roller home position sensor.
5 - 39
(3) Paper jam in saddle stitcher section [EA80] Stapling jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path or the stapling tray in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the jam cleared by taking off the staple cartridge from the finisher and removing the staples stuck in the stapling unit? YES End. NO Is the connector J8 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the saddle stitcher controller PC board and stitcher home position switch (rear: SW5, front: SW7 open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Are the stitcher home position switches working properly? NO 1. Connect the connectors of the stitcher home position switches securely. 2. Replace the stitcher home position switches.
YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[EA90] Door open jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the saddle stitcher door closed? NO Close the door. YES Is either of the connectors J10 or J11 on saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected? Are the harnesses between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and cover opening sensors (delivery cover sensor [PI3], inlet cover sensor [PI9]) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is each of the sensors (delivery cover sensor, inlet cover sensor) working properly? NO 1. Connect the connectors of the each sensor securely. 2. Replace the sensors.
5 - 40
[EAA0] Power-ON jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or saddle stitcher section? YES Remove the paper. NO Is any of the connectors J9, J10 and J13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20], the vertical path paper sensor [PI17] and the delivery sensor[PI11]) open-circuited? YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses. NO Is each of the sensors (No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor, the vertical path paper sensor, and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely. 2. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place. 3. Replace the sensors.
[EAB0] Paper transport stop jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J708 on finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor [PI33] open-circuited? Is either of the connectors J9 or J10 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness between the saddle stitcher controller PC board and each sensor (No.1 paper sensor [PI18], No.2 paper sensor [PI19], No.3 paper sensor [PI20] and the delivery sensor [PI11]) open-circuited? YES Connect the connectors securely. Replace the harnesses. NO Is each of the sensors (the inlet sensor, No.1 paper sensor, No.2 paper sensor, No.3 paper sensor and the delivery sensor) working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connectors of the sensors securely. 2. Attach the actuators securely if their shafts are out of place. 3. Replace the sensors.
5 - 41
[EAC0] Transport delay jam MJ-1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher, saddle stitcher section or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J708 on the finisher controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the finisher controller PC board and inlet sensor (PI33) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the inlet sensor working properly? (Check the movement of the actuator.) NO 1. Connect the connector of the sensor securely. 2. Attach the actuator securely if its shaft is out of place. 3. Replace the sensor.
(4) Paper jam in puncher unit [E9F0] Punching jam MJ-1023/1024 Is there any paper remaining on the transport path in the finisher or equipment? YES Remove the paper. NO Is the connector J605A on the punch controller PC board disconnected? Is the harness connecting the punch controller PC board and punch home position sensor (PI63) open-circuited? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO Is the punch home position sensor working properly? NO 1. Connect the connector of the punch home position sensor securely. 2. Replace the punch home position sensor.
YES Replace the punch controller PC board.
5 - 42
(5) Other paper jam [EAD0] Print end command time-out jam Is the main motor rotating normally? NO 1. Replace the SYS board. 2. Replace the LGC board.
[EAE0] Receiving time time-out jam Is the finisher working? YES Replace the finisher controller PC board. NO 1. Check if the voltage (24V) is being supplied to the finisher. 2. Check the connection of the LGC board and IPC board. 3. Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and finisher I/F connector of the equipment side is open-circuited. 4. Check if the harness connecting the I/F connector of the finisher side and finisher controller PC board is open-circuited. 5. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[EB30] Ready time time-out jam Is there paper in the equipment? NO Replace the LGC board. YES Are the IPC board and LGC board properly connected to each other? NO Connect them properly. YES Is the harness securely connected to the IPC board? NO Connect the harness properly. YES Is any of the connector pins of the harness connecting the equipment and finisher disconnected or any of those harnesses open-circuited? NO Connect the pin or replace the harness. YES 1. Replace the IPC board. 2. Replace the LGC board. 3. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 43
5.1.8 Drive system related service call [C010] Main motor abnormality Is the main motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-101/151) NO 1. Check if the connector J581 of the main motor is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN347 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor patterns on the main motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the main motor. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN347-8 pin output from the LGC board is always level L. 2. Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC38-152 pin is always L. 3. Replace the LGC board. [C020] Developer motor abnormality Is the developer unit motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-112/162) NO 1. Check if the connector J578 of the developer motor is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor patterns on the developer motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the developer motor. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN348-B6 pin output from the LGC board is always level L. 2. Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC38-150 pin is always L. 3. Replace the LGC board. [C030] Transport motor abnormality Is the transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-123/173) NO 1. Check if the connector J582 of the transport motor is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN348 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor patterns on the transport motor board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the transport motor. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN348-A7 pin output from the LGC board is always level L. 2. Check if the voltage supplied to the ASIC input terminal IC38-149 pin is always L. 3. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 44
5.1.9 Paper feeding system related service call [C040] PFP motor abnormality Is the PFP motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-109/159) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Check if the signal line connector CN503 of the PFP motor is disconnected. Check if the power line connector CN502 of the PFP motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN246 on the PFP board is disconnected. Check if the signal line connector CN241 on the PFP board is disconnected. Check if the power line connector CN242 on the PFP board is disconnected. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and LGC board are short- or open circuited. 9. Replace the PFP motor. 10. Replace the PFP board. 11. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the LED on the PFP motor board lit without flashing? NO 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP motor board, PFP board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 3. Replace the PFP motor. 4. Replace the PFP board. 5. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the PLL lock signal CN246-8 pin output from the PFP board is always L level. 2. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 pin is always L level. 3. Replace the PFP board. 4. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 45
[C130] Upper drawer tray abnormality [C140] Lower drawer tray abnormality Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-242, 243) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[6]/[H], /[6]/[G]) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN337 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the slit reaches the sensor. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board. [C150] PFP upper drawer tray abnormality [C160] PFP lower drawer tray abnormality Does the tray go up? (Perform the output check: 03-278, 280) NO 1. Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN242 and CN244 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the PFP board. 7. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the tray-up sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[2]/[H], /[4]/[H]) NO 1. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN241, CN247 and CN248 on the PFP board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the slit reaches the sensor. 5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 6. Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 7. Replace the PFP board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 - 46 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
[C180] LCF tray motor abnormality Does the tray move? (Perform the output check: 03-271) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF tray motor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the LCF board. 7. Replace the LGC board.
YES Are the LCF tray-up sensor and LCF tray bottom sensor working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[F], /[3]/[A]) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN104 and CN105 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the slit reaches the sensors. 5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 6. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 47
[C1A0] LCF end fence motor abnormality Is the LCF end fence motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-207) NO 1. Check if the connector of the LCF end fence motor is disconnected. 2. Check if any of the connectors CN100, CN101 and CN103 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 5. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 6. Replace the LCF board. 7. Replace the LGC board.
YES Are the LCF end fence home/stop position sensors working? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]OFF/[5]/[A], /[5]/[B]) NO 1. Check if the connectors of the sensors are disconnected. 2. Check if either of the connectors CN100 or CN107 on the LCF board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. 4. Check if the slit reaches the sensors. 5. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 6. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 7. Replace the LCF board. 8. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board. [C1B0] LCF transport motor abnormality Is the LCF transport motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-122/172) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Check if the connector CN112 of the LCF transport motor is disconnected. Check if the connector CN102 on the LCF board is disconnected. Check if the signal line connector CN100 on the LCF board is disconnected. Check if the power line connector CN101 on the LCF board is disconnected. Check if the connector CN332 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 8. Replace the LCF transport motor. 9. Replace the LCF board. 10. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor patterns on the LCF transport motor board, LCF board and LGC board are short- or open- circuited. 3. Check if the PLL lock signal CN102-3 pin output from the LCF board is always L level. 4. Check if the voltage supplied to the microcomputer input terminal IC103-17 pin is always L level. 5. Replace the LCF transport motor. 6. Replace the LCF board. 7. Replace the LGC board.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 - 48 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
5.1.10 Scanning system related service call [C260] Peak detection error Does the exposure lamp light? (Perform the output check: 03-267) YES 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Check if the connectors on the CCD and SLG boards are disconnected. Check if the shading correction plate is dirty. Check if the conductor pattern on the CCD board is short- or open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the lens unit. Replace the SLG board.
NO 1. Check if the connectors of the exposure lamp and inverter are disconnected. 2. Check the SLG board if the connector pin CN21 is disconnected or the harness is short- or opencircuited. 3. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. 4. Replace the SLG board. 5. Replace the inverter. 6. Replace the exposure lamp. [C270] Carriage home position sensor not going OFF within a specified time [C280] Carriage home position sensor not going ON within a specified time Remove the original glass and move the carriages to the paper feeding side. Turn ON the power and check the following items. [C270] Are the carriages slightly moved to the feeding direction?/Are the carriages staying at a position other than home position? YES Check if the circuits of the SLG and SDV boards are abnormal. NO 1. Check if the connector pin is disconnected or the harness is short- or open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor pattern on the SDV board is short- or open-circuited. 3. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. 4. Replace the SDV board. 5. Replace the SLG board. [C280] Do the carriages make a big noise after they arrive at the home position? YES The carriage home position sensor is not turned ON. 1. Check if the connector of the sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if the circuits of the SDV and SLG boards are abnormal.
NO The carriages are stopped at the home position and do not move. 1. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are short- or open-circuited. 2. Check if the conductor pattern on the SDV board is short- or open-circuited. 3. Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. 4. Replace the SDV board. 5. Replace the SLG board.
5 - 49
5.1.11 Fuser unit related service call CAUTION: CAUTION:

Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the IH control circuit and IH coil. The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged after a while the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before checking.
[C410] Thermistor or heater abnormality at power ON 1. Check the thermistors (1) Check if the connectors are disconnected. (2) Check if the main, sub and front edge thermistors are in contact with the surface of the fuser belt properly? (3) Check if the harnesses of the main, sub and front edge thermistors are open-circuited. 2. Check the IH control board and IH coil (1) Check if the IH coil is broken. (2) Check if the connector of the IH coil is disconnected. (3) Check if the thermostats are blown. (4) Check if the connectors on the IH control board are disconnected (AC input connectors CN450, 451 and LGC I/F connectors CN455, 456). (5) Check if the IH control board or the switching power supply unit is abnormal. 3. Check the LGC board (1) Check if the connector CN358 is disconnected. (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Replace the LGC board. 4. Clear the status counter After repairing the matter which caused the error [C410], perform the following: (1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously. (2) Key in 400, then press the [START] button. (3) Change the current status counter value 1 or 2 to 0, then press the [ENTER] button or [INTERRUPT] button (to cancel [C410]). (4) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the equipment enters the normal ready state.
5 - 50
[C430] Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgment [C440] Heater abnormality after abnormality judgment 1.2.3. Check the thermistors, IH control board, IH coil and LGC board Check the above components following the procedure 1, 2 and 3 for [C410]. 4. Clear the status counter Change the current status counter value (08-400) 4 to 0 for [C430] and 5, 7 or 9 to 0 for [C440], taking the same procedure as that for [C410]. * The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively. The error occurred during warming-up : "4" or "5" The error occurred after the equipment has become ready: "7" The temperature detected by the main thermistor is 230C or higher: "9" The temperature detected by the sub thermistor is 230C or higher: "9"
[C450] Thermistor abnormality during printing 1. Check the front edge thermistor (1) Check if the connector is disconnected. (2) Check if the front edge thermistor is in contact with the surface of the fuser belt properly. (3) Check if the harness of the front edge thermistor is open-circuited. 2. Check the LGC board (1) Check if the connector CN358 is disconnected. (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Replace the LGC board. 3. Clear the status counter Change the current status counter value (08-400) 6 to 0.
5 - 51
[C470] IH initialization or IH power voltage abnormality 1. Check the AC input voltage Check if the AC input voltage is within the specified range. (especially when the heater becomes ON after the power is turned ON [the equipment is warming up]) 2. Check the thermostats Check if the thermostats are blown. 3. Check the IH control board (1) Check if the AC input connectors CN450, 451 on the IH control board or the LGC I/F connectors CN455, 456 are disconnected? (2) Check if the fuse on the IH control board has blown. (3) Replace the IH control board. 4. Check the LGC board (1) Check if the connector CN358 is disconnected. (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Replace the LGC board. 5. Clear the status counter Change the values 10, 11, 14 or 17 of the status counter (08-400) to 0. * The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively. The error occurred immediately after the power was turned ON: "10" The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40C: "11" The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "14" The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "17"
5 - 52
[C480] Overheating of IGBT 1. Check the operation of the IH control board cooling fan Check if the IH control board cooling fan is rotating normally. (Is the connector securely connected?) 2. Check the IH board (1) Check if the IGBT or IGBT radiation plate is normal. (Is the radiation plate securely attached?) (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Replace the IH board. 3. Clear the status counter Change the values 12, 15 or 18 of the status counter (08-400) to 0. * The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively. The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40C: "12" The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "15" The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "18" (When the only one side of IH coil is energized continuously for 15 seconds)
[C490] IH control circuit or IH coil abnormality 1. Check the IH board (1) Check if the conductor pattern on the board is short or open-circuited. (2) Replace the IH board. 2. Check the IH coil (1) Check if the coil is broken or short out. (2) Replace the IH coil. 3. Clear the status counter Change the values 13, 16 or 19 of the status counter (08-400) to 0. * The status counter value is as follows in the following cases. Change them to "0" respectively. The error occurred before the temperature of the fuser roller reaches 40C: "13" The error occurred before the equipment has become ready: "16" The error occurred when the equipment is in the ready state: "19"
When the problem is solved, [C470], [C480] and [C490] can be cleared by turning OFF and ON the main switch so the status counter does not have to be changed to "0". The value of the status counter remains the same until the next service call overwrites the value.
5 - 53
5.1.12 Communication related service call [C550] RADF I/F error (1) Check if the harness connecting the RADF board and SLG board is disconnected or opencircuited. (2) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. (3) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. (4) Replace the RADF board. (5) Replace the SLG board.
[C570] Communication error between Engine-CPU and IPC board (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Check if the LGC board and IPC board are connected properly. Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short- or open-circuited. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the IPC board. Replace the LGC board.
[C580] Communication error between IPC board and finisher (1) Check if the specified finisher is attached. (2) Check if the harness connecting the IPC board and the finisher controller PC board is disconnected or open-circuited. (3) Check if the conductor pattern on the IPC board is short- or open-circuited. (4) Check if the conductor pattern on the finisher controller PC board is short- or open-circuited. (5) Replace the IPC board. (6) Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[F070] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Communication error between System-CPU and Engine-CPU
Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and LGC board is disconnected or open-circuited. Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board. Check the version of the engine ROM version on the LGC board. Replace the SYS board. Replace the LGC board.
[F110] [F111] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Communication error between System-CPU and Scanner-CPU Scanner response abnormality
Check if the harness connecting the SYS board and SLG board is disconnected or open-circuited. Check the version of the system ROM on the SYS board. Check the version of the scanner ROM version on the SLG board. Replace the SYS board. Replace the SLG board.
5 - 54
5.1.13 RADF related service call

Note: When performing the RADF related troubleshooting, be sure to perform Automatic adjustment of RADF sensor and EEPROM initialization (05-356) and then "RADF original guide width adjustment (05-367, 368) at Adjustment Mode whenever the RADF board, original length sensor, read sensor or reverse sensor has been replaced.
[C730] EEPROM initialization error (1) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. (2) Replace the RADF board.
[C810] Fan motor abnormality (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Check if the load on the motor shaft is normal. Remove any foreign matter. Check if the harness connecting the fan motor and RADF board is open-circuited. Check if the power is supplied to the pin 1 of the CN9 on the RADF board during the operation. Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is open- or short-circuited. Replace the fan motor. Replace the RADF board.
[C820] Read sensor adjustment error (1) Check if there is any foreign matter between the read sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty. (2) Check if the harness connecting the read sensor and the RADF board is open-circuited. (3) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF is short- or open-circuited. (4) Replace the read sensor. (5) Replace the RADF board.
[C830] Original length sensor adjustment error (1) Check if there are any foreign objects between the original length sensor and the reflecting mirror. Check if the reflecting mirror is dirty. (2) Check if the harness connecting the original length sensor and the RADF board is open-circuited. (3) Check if the conductor pattern on the RADF board is short- or open-circuited. (4) Replace the original length sensor. (5) Replace the RADF board.
5 - 55
5.1.14 Circuit related service call [C900] Connection error between the SYS board and the LGC board (1) Check if the connector CN117 on the SYS board is completely inserted or not disconnected. (2) Check if the connector CN338 on the LGC board is completely inserted or not disconnected. (3) Check if the harness connecting the SYS board (CN117) and the LGC board (CN338) is opencircuited. (4) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short- or open-circuited. (5) Replace the SYS board. (6) Replace the LGC board.
[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality Does service call still occur even after turning OFF the main switch then back ON? NO Leave it for a while and see how.
YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern between the Engine-CPU and FROM is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board if it frequently occurs.
[C950] Memory of the LGC board abnormality, ID abnormality (1) Check if the connectors CN360 and CN 331 on the SYS board are completely inserted or not disconnected. (2) Check if the connector J434 on the DRV board is completely inserted or not disconnected. (3) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short- or open-circuited. (4) Replace the NVRAM. (5) Replace the LGC board. (6) Replace the DRV board. (7) Replace the SYS board. (8) Ask a specialist for a repair (Abnormal ID).
5 - 56
[C960] Connection error between the LGC board and the DRV board, ID abnormality (1) Check if the connectors CN360 and CN331 on the LGC board are completely inserted or not disconnected. (2) Check if the connector J434 on the DRV board is completely inserted or not disconnected. (3) Check if the harness connecting the DRV board (J434) and the LGC board (CN360) is opencircuited. (4) Check if the harness connecting the LGC board (CN331) and the high-voltage transformer (J480) is open-circuited. (5) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short- or open-circuited. (6) Replace the DRV board. (7) Replace the LGC board. (8) Ask a specialist for a repair (Abnormal ID).
[C9E0] Connection error between the SLG board and the SYS board (1) Check if the connector CN18 of the SLG board is completely inserted or not disconnected. (2) Check if the connector CN102 of the SYS board is completely inserted or not disconnected. (3) Check if the harness connecting the SLG board (CN18) and the SYS board (CN102) is opencircuited. (4) Check if the conductor pattern on each board is short- or open-circuited. (5) Replace the SLG board. (6) Replace the SYS board.
[F090]
SRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08). (2) When the message SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE? is displayed on the LCD, press the [INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared.) (3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the SYS board.
5 - 57
[F091]
NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board
(1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08). (2) When the message NVRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE? is displayed on the LCD, press the [INITIALIZE] button. (NVRAM is initialized.) Note: When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization. (3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the SYS board.
[F092] SRAM/NVRAM abnormality on the SYS board (1) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08). (2) When the message NVRAM/SRAM ERROR DOES IT INITIALIZE? is displayed on the LCD, press the [INITIALIZE] button. (SRAM is cleared and NVRAM is initialized.) Note: When the NVRAM is initialized, the scanner and image processing related adjustments are also initialized. Readjust them after the NVRAM initialization. (3) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. If the error is not recovered, replace the NVRAM on the SYS board.
[F350]
SLG board abnormality
(1) Check if the conductor pattern on the SLG board is short- or open-circuited. (2) Replace the SLG board.
5 - 58
5.1.15 Laser optical unit related service call [CA10] Polygonal motor abnormality Is the polygonal motor rotating? NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector CN352 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the harness is open-circuited or the connector pin is disconnected. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. Replace the laser optical unit. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the printed image distorted? YES 1. Check if the connector CN352 on the LGC board is almost disconnected. 2. Check if the harness is almost open-circuited or the connector pin is almost disconnected. 3. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 4. Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped. 5. Check if the suction area of laser unit cooling fan is plugged up. 6. Replace the laser optical unit. 7. Replace the LGC board.
NO 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller unit) are securely grounded. 3. Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they are not stained. 4. Check if the plate in paper transport system is securely grounded. 5. Check if the equipment is grounded. 6. Check if the laser unit cooling fan is stopped. 7. Check if the suction area of laser unit cooling fan is plugged up. 8. Replace the laser optical unit. 9. Replace the LGC board. [CA20] H-Sync detection error Is the cable (flexible flat type) between the connector (CN334) on the LGC board and connector (CN201) on the LDR board open-circuited, broken or disconnected? YES 1. Reconnect the cable. 2. Check if the connector on the LGC board hold the cable securely. 3. Replace the laser optical unit.
NO 1. Check if the units with high-voltage (developer unit, transfer belt unit and 2nd transfer roller unit) are securely grounded. 2. Check if the bias supply joints of the units with high-voltage are securely connected or they are not stained. 3. Check if the plate in paper transport system is securely grounded. 4. Check if the equipment is grounded. 5. Check if the conductor pattern is short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the LGC board. 7. Replace the laser optical unit.
November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 5 - 59 e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1.16 Finisher related service call [CB20] Delivery motor abnormality MJ-1022 Rotate the delivery roller by hand. Does it rotate smoothly? NO Fix the mechanism. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and delivery motor (M1) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the delivery motor clock sensor (S1) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES 1. Replace the delivery motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB30] Tray 1/2 shift motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Are the tray 1 shift area sensors 1-3 and tray 2 shift area sensors 1-3 normal? NO Replace the tray 1/2 shift area sensor boards. YES Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the tray 1/2 shift motors (M37/M38) correct? NO Correct the wirings. YES Is there any problem with the tray lift mechanism? NO Fix the lift mechanism. YES 1. Replace the tray 1/2 shift motors. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 60
[CB40] Rear aligning plate motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the rear aligning plate home position sensor (PI37) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear aligning plate motor (M34) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the rear aligning plate motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB50] Staple motor abnormality MJ-1022/1023/1024 Is the wiring between the stapler and finisher controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES 1. Replace the stapler. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CB60] Stapler unit shift motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the stapler shift home position sensor (PI40) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the stapler shift motor (M35) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any mechanical problem with the stapler stand motion path? YES Fix the mechanism. NO 1. Replace the stapler shift motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 61
[CB80] Backup RAM data abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the problem solved by turning the power of the equipment OFF and ON? YES End. NO 1. Replace the finisher controller PC board. 2. Replace the punch controller PC board.
[CB90] Paper pushing plate motor abnormality MJ-1024 Are the paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14), paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15) and paper pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the paper pushing plate drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the paper pushing plate motor (M8). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5 - 62
[CBA0] Stitch motor (front) abnormality [CBB0] Stitch motor (rear) abnormality MJ-1024 Are the front and rear stitchers and their stands installed properly? NO Install them properly. YES Are the stitcher home position switches (SW7/SW5) and stitcher motors (M7/M6) on the front and rear stitchers working normally? NO Replace the front or rear stitcher. YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBC0] Alignment motor abnormality MJ-1024 Is the alignment plate home position sensor (PI5) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the alignment plate drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the alignment motor (M5). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5 - 63
[CBD0] Guide motor abnormality MJ-1024 Is the guide home position sensor (PI13) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the guide plate drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replacing the guide motor (M3). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBE0] Paper folding motor abnormality MJ-1024 Are the paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper folding home position sensor (PI21) working normally? NO Replace the sensors. YES Is the paper folding roller drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replacing the paper folding motor (M2). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CBF0] Paper positioning plate motor abnormality MJ-1024 Is the paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the paper positioning plate drive mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replacing the paper positioning plate motor (M4). 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5 - 64
[CC00] Sensor connector abnormality MJ-1024 Are the guide home position sensor (PI13), paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14) and paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15) connected to the saddle stitcher controller PC board? NO Connect them to the board. YES Is the wiring between the sensors and the saddle stitcher correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is 5V DC being supplied from the connector pins J9-7, -10 and -13 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board? NO Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board. YES Are the connector pins J9-8, -11 and -14 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correctly connected to the ground? NO YES End. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CC10] Microswitch abnormality MJ-1024 Are the front cover switch (MS31), inlet door switch (SW1) and delivery door switch (SW3) normal? NO Replace the switches. YES Measure the voltage between J704-1 (+) and J704-2 (-) on the finisher controller PC board. Is it 24V? NO Replace the finisher controller PC board. YES Is the wiring between J704 on the finisher controller PC board and J1 on the saddle stitcher controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
5 - 65
[CC20] Communication error between finisher and saddle stitcher MJ-1024 Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power switch of the equipment? YES End. NO Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the saddle stitcher controller PC board connected? NO Connect the wiring. YES 1. Replace the finisher controller PC board. 2. Replace the saddle stitcher controller PC board.
[CC30] Stack processing motor abnormality MJ-1022 [Procedure 1] Is the tension of the drive belt normal? NO Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension. YES Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down? NO Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing contacts. YES Is the spring of the returning roller detached? YES Attach the spring. NO Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and stack processing motor (M2) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the stack delivery lever home position sensor (S8) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES 1. Replacing the stack processing motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 66
[Procedure 2] Does the bushing attached to the returning roller shaft smoothly move up and down? NO Apply grease on the cut-out part of the front side frame with where the bushing contacts. YES Is the spring of the returning roller detached? YES Attach the spring. NO Is the tension of the stack processing motor drive belt normal? NO Loosen the adjustment screw to adjust its tension. YES Is the returning roller home position sensor (S3) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES 1. Replace the stack processing motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CC40] Swing motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the swing unit home position sensor (PI35) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the swing motor (M36) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the swing mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the swing motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 67
[CC50] Horizontal registration motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed) Is the horizontal registration home position sensor (PI61) working normally? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the horizontal registration home position sensor and finisher controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the horizontal registration mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the horizontal registration motor (M62). 2. Replace the punch controller PC board. 3. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CC60] Punch motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 (when MJ-6004 is installed) Are the punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor clock sensor (PI62) working normally? NO Replace the sensors. YES Is the wiring between the sensors and finisher controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is the punching mechanism normal? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the punch motor (M61). 2. Replace the punch controller PC board. 3. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 68
[CC80] Front jogging motor abnormality/Front aligning plate motor abnormality MJ-1022 (Front jogging motor abnormality) Is the front jogging plate home position sensor (S6) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and front jogging motor (M3) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll? YES Fix it. NO 1. Replace the front jogging motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
MJ-1023/1024 (Front aligning plate motor abnormality) Is the front aligning plate home position sensor (PI36) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the front aligning plate motor (M33) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any mechanical problem with the path of aligning plate? NO Fix the mechanism. YES 1. Replace the front aligning plate motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 69
[CC90] Upper stack tray lift motor abnormality MJ-1022 Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and upper stack tray lift motor (M5) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Are the front and rear sides of the upper stack tray leveled? NO Level them. YES Is the upper stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S19) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Are the upper stack tray upper limit sensor (S25), upper stack tray full sensor (S23) and stack processing safety switch (S26) working properly? NO Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board. YES Does the voltage between the pins J14-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become 24V when the upper stack tray lift motor starts rotating? NO Replace the finisher controller PC board. YES Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If there is no problem, replace the upper stack tray lift motor.
5 - 70
[CCA0] Lower stack tray lift motor abnormality MJ-1022 Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and lower stack tray lift motor (M7) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Are the front and rear sides of the lower stack tray leveled? NO Level them. YES Is the lower stack tray lift motor clock sensor (S9) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the stack tray paper height sensor (S10) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Are the lower stack tray upper limit sensor (S13) and lower stack tray full sensor (S23) working properly? NO Replace the sensor or sensor controller PC board. YES Does the voltage between the pins J3-1 and -2 on the finisher controller PC board become 24V when the lower stack tray lift motor starts rotating? NO Replace the finisher controller PC board. YES Check the wiring between the upper stack tray lift motor and finisher controller PC board. If there is no problem, replace the motor.
[CCB0] Rear jogging motor abnormality MJ-1022 Is the rear jogging plate home position sensor (S7) working properly? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and rear jogging motor (M4) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Has the rack run over the stopper of the roll? YES Fix it. NO 1. Replace the rear jogging motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 71
[CCD0] Stack ejection motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the shutter home position sensor (PI45) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Are the wirings between the finisher controller PC board and the stack ejection motor (M32)/shutter clutch (CL31) correct? NO Correct the wirings. YES Is there any problem with the shutter mechanism? YES Fix the shutter mechanism. NO 1. Replace the stack ejection motor and shutter clutch. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CCE0] Rear end assist motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the rear end assist guide home position sensor (PI39) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the rear end assist motor (M39) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any problem with the rear end assist mechanism? YES Fix the rear end assist mechanism. NO 1. Replace the rear end assist motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
5 - 72
[CCF0] Gear change motor abnormality MJ-1023/1024 Is the gear change home position sensor (PI49) normal? NO Replace the sensor. YES Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and the gear change motor (M40) correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES Is there any problem with the gear change mechanism? YES Fix the gear change mechanism. NO 1. Replace the gear change motor. 2. Replace the finisher controller PC board.
[CE00] Communication error between finisher and puncher unit MJ-1023/1024 (When MJ-6004 is installed) Is the problem solved by turning OFF and ON the power of the equipment? YES End. NO Is the wiring between the finisher controller PC board and punch controller PC board correct? NO Correct the wiring. YES 1. Replace the finisher controller PC board. 2. Replace the punch controller PC board.
5 - 73
5.1.17 Image control related service call (1) Based on the procedure of [CE10], [CE20] and [CE40] described below, check the status and take appropriate actions. And then perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control according to the following procedure. 1. While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn ON the power. 2. Key in [395], and then press the [START] button. Confirm that the image quality control has finished normally. After confirming the items in (1), clear the abnormal detection counter of image quality control. 1. While pressing [0] and [8] simultaneously, turn ON the power. 2. Key in [573], and then press the [START] button. 3. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. 4. Key in [574], and then press the [START] button. 5. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. 6. Key in [575], and then press the [START] button. 7. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. 8. Key in [576], and then press the [START] button. 9. Rewrite the displayed status counter from "1" - "16" to "0", and then press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button.
(2)
[CE10] Image quality sensor abnormality (OFF level) Is the connector of the image quality sensor, or the connector CN345 on the LGC board disconnected? Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor, or the harness between the LGC board and the switching power supply open-circuited?
YES
Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
NO Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal? NO Check the power supply system and replace the switching power supply.
YES 1. Replace the image quality sensor. 2. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 74
[CE20] Image quality sensor abnormality (no pattern level) 1. Check if the transfer belt or transfer belt unit are securely installed. 2. Check for any abnormal stain caused by poor cleaning, large flaw or break on the transfer belt surface. 3. Check if the drum and the transfer belt are rotating. If any abnormality is found, correct any mechanical problem. Is the connectors CN345 on the LGC board disconnected? Is the connector of the image quality sensor disconnected or the surface of the sensor stained? Is the harness between the LGC board and the image quality sensor open-circuited? Is the shutter of image quality sensor opening and closing normally? Is the shutter damaged? <Procedure> 1. Take off the transfer belt unit so that the image quality sensor unit can be easily seen. 2. While pressing the digital keys [0] and [3] simultaneously, turn the power ON. 3. Key in 430. 4. The shutter is opened and closed repeatedly by pressing the [START] button repeatedly. YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. Clean the sensor. Replace the shutter if it is damaged. Replace the shutter solenoid if its operation is defective.
NO Is the output voltage from the 12V-power supply normal? NO Check the power supply system, and replace the switching power supply.
YES 1. Replace the image quality sensor. 2. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 75
[CE40] Image quality control test pattern abnormality (1) Use "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to 576)" to check the abnormal occurring condition for each color. (2) Check Output value display of image quality sensor / Low-density pattern (05-391-0 to 3) to check if the low-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color. The values under 320 for Y, M and C, and under 270 for K are defined as low-density pattern abnormality. Under 320 (Y, M and C) Under 270 (K) Low-density pattern abnormality Check the transfer belt. If the cleaning is poor, correct the transfer belt around its cleaning blade. 320 or above (Y, M and C) 270 or above (K)
To (9)
(3) Check Output value display of image quality sensor / High-density pattern (05-390-0 to 3) to check if the high-density pattern abnormality occurs for each color and identify the color which pattern is abnormal. If the value is 630 or above, it is defined as high-density pattern abnormality. (4) Set the values of Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556) and Image quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557) to 0 (Invalid). (5) Perform Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394). (6) Output the image quality control test pattern (04-270) more than one time and check the patch of the color identified in step (3) to see if the image is abnormal (Note). Abnormal Correct the items related to the image.
Normal (7) Replace the image quality sensor.
To (9)
(8) Set the values of Image quality closed-loop control / Contrast voltage (08-556) and Image quality closed-loop control / Laser power (08-557) to 1 (Valid). (9) Perform Enforced performing of image quality open-loop control (05-394) and make sure it is completed normally. (Error [CE40] does not appear.) Then perform Automatic gamma adjustment ( Chapter 3.5.1 and 3.6.1). (10) Clear all "Image quality control abnormal detection counter Y to K display/0 clearing (08-573 to 576)". Note Abnormal image: Blank print, Solid print, White banding, Color banding, White spots, Poor transfer, Uneven image density, Faded image (low density), Uneven light distribution, Blotched image
5 - 76
[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality Is the connector CN361 on the LGC board or the connector of the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected? Is the harness between the LGC board and the temperature/humidity sensor disconnected ? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO 1. Replace the temperature/humidity sensor. 2. Replace the LGC board.
[CE90] Drum thermistor abnormality Is the connector CN361 on the LGC board, or the connector of the drum thermistor disconnected? Is the harness between the LGC board and the drum thermistor disconnected? YES Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness. NO 1. Replace the drum thermistor. 2. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 77
5.1.18 Copy process related service call [C360] Charger cleaner motor abnormality (1) Check if the main charger is installed normally. (2) Check if the charger wire is broken. (3) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner front/rear position detection switch is disconnected. (4) Check if the cleaning pads are damaged or removed. (5) Check if any of the connector pins of the charger cleaner motor is disconnected. (6) Replace the charger cleaner motor. (7) Replace the LGC board.
[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality (1) (2) (3) (4) Is the main charger installed securely? Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is deformed. Check if the charger wire is broken or the main charger grid is deformed. Check if any foreign matter is on the charger wire or main charger grid.
[CEA0] Revolver home position detection abnormality Is the revolver home position sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[2]/[C]) NO 1. Check if the connector or joint connector of the revolver home position sensor is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the revolver home position sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.
5 - 78
[CEB0] Black developer unit lifting movement abnormality Is the black developer lifting clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-433) NO 1. Check if the connector of the black developer lifting clutch is disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN362 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the black developer lifting clutch. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES Are the black developer contact position detection sensor and black developer contact timing detection sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[C], /[1]/[B] NO 1. Check if the connectors of the black developer contact position detection sensor or black developer contact timing detection sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the black developer contact position detection sensor and black developer contact timing detection sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board. [CEC0] 2nd transfer roller position detection abnormality Is the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch working properly? (Perform the output check: 03-435) NO 1. Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer contact clutch are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the 2nd transfer roller contact clutch. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[1]/[A]) NO 1. Check if the connector or joint connectors of the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN345 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor. 6. Replace the LGC board.
[CEE0] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (Normal speed) [CEE1] Transfer belt position detection abnormality (When decelerating) If the error [CEE0] has occurred, check the transfer belt home position sensor-1. If the error [CEE1] has occurred, check the transfer belt home position sensor-2. Is there any stain or scratch on the reflection tape inside the transfer belt? YES Clean the transfer belt or replace it. Replace the cleaning pad if it is excessively stained.
NO Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 stained? YES Clean them. NO Are the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 working properly? (Perform the input check: 03-[FAX]ON/[9]/[H]) NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the transfer belt home position sensors-1 and -2 are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN361 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are opencircuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the transfer belt home position sensor-1 and -2. 6. Replace the LGC board.
[CEF0] Revolver motor abnormality Is the revolver motor working? (Perform the output check: 03-450) NO 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Check if the connector of the revolver motor is disconnected. Check if the connectors CN435 and J434 on the DRV board are disconnected. Check if the connector CN360 on the LGC board is disconnected. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the revolver motor. 7. Replace the DRV board and LGC board.
YES 1. Check if the conductor patterns on the DRV board and LGC board are short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the DRV board and LGC board.
5 - 80
5.1.19 Toner density control related service call [CF20] Toner density detection voltage abnormality (1) Specify the developer unit with the abnormality by checking the setting values of 08-824-0 to 08824-2. (When the value is 1, an abnormality occurs.) (2) Correct the defective section of the unit specified in (1) with the following procedure. Is the developer material transported properly? Is the form of magnetic brush is normal? NO 1. Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter is mixed in. 2. Correct the transport mechanism of developer material. 3. Check the polar position and correct if necessary.
YES Is the color auto-toner sensor stained? YES Clean it. NO Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally? (Perform the output check: 03-125/ 175) Is the color auto-toner sensor working? NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN356 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid. 5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the LGC board. 7. Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform Enforced correction of color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208).
YES Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and face the positioning component when opening the shutter.
YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board. (3) When the correction is completed, reset the values of 08-824-0 to 08-824-2 from 1 to 0 to clear the abnormality.
5 - 81
[CF30] Reference plate detection voltage abnormality Are the reference plate and color auto-toner sensor stained? YES Clean them. NO Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally? (Perform the output check: 03-125/ 175) Is the color auto-toner sensor working? NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN356 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid. 5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the LGC board. 7. Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform Enforced correction of color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208).
YES Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor holder and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.
YES 1. Replace the LGC board. 2. Replace the reference plate and perform Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light amount correction target value (05-207).
5 - 82
[CF40] Light amount correction voltage abnormality (1) Specify the developer unit with the abnormality by checking the setting values of 08-823-0 to 08823-2. (When the value is 1, an abnormality occurs.) (2) Correct the defective section of the unit specified in (1) with the following procedure. Is the developer unit inserted properly? NO Insert it properly. YES Is the developer material transported properly? Is the form of magnetic brush is normal? NO 1. Check if the amount of the developer material is normal or any foreign matter is mixed in. 2. Correct the transport mechanism of developer material. 3. Check the polar position and correct if necessary.
YES Is the color auto-toner sensor stained? YES Clean it. NO Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally? (Perform the output check: 03-125/ 175) Is the color auto-toner sensor working? NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN356 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid. 5. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 6. Replace the LGC board. 7. Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform Enforced correction of color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208).
YES Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter opening position correct? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the sensor holder will touch and face the positioning component when opening the shutter.
YES 1. Replace the LGC board. 2. Replace the reference plate and perform Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light amount correction target value (05-207). (3) When the correction is completed, reset the values of 08-823-0 to 08-823-2 from 1 to 0 to clear the abnormality.
5 - 83
[CF50] Color auto-toner sensor abnormality Are the connector of color auto-toner sensor, joint connector and connector CN356 on the LGC board connected normally? NO 1. Reconnect the connectors. 2. Correct or replace if the connector pins are disconnected or harnesses are opencircuited.
YES Are the color auto-toner sensor and reference plate stained? YES Clean them. NO Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid working normally? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO 1. Check if the connectors or joint connectors of the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid and color auto-toner sensor are disconnected. 2. Check if the connector CN356 on the LGC board is disconnected. 3. Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the harnesses are open-circuited. 4. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 5. Replace the color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid. 6. Replace the LGC board.
YES Is the color auto-toner sensor shutter closing position correct? (Perform the output check: 03-125/175) NO Adjust the install position of solenoid so that the gap between the sensor holder and stopper will be 1.0 mm when closing the shutter.
YES 1. Check if the conductor pattern on the LGC board is short- or open-circuited. 2. Replace the LGC board. 3. Replace the reference plate and perform Initialization of color auto-toner sensor light amount correction target value (05-207). 4. Replace the color auto-toner sensor and perform Enforced correction of color auto-toner sensor light amount (05-208).
5 - 84
5.1.20 Other service call [F100] (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) HDD format error
Check if the HDD is mounted. Check if the specified HDD is mounted. Check if the connector pins of the HDD are bent. Check if the connectors CN112, CN113 on the SYS board is disconnected. Replace the harness. Format the HDD. (Key in "2" at 08-690.) Replace the HDD. Replace the SYS board.
[F101] [F102] [F103] [F104] [F105]
HDD unmounted HDD start error HDD transfer time-out HDD data error HDD other error
(1) Check if the connectors of the HDD are disconnected. (2) Check if the connector pins are disconnected or the wires of harnesses are open-circuited. (3) Perform the bad sector check (08-694). If the check result is OK, recover the data in the HDD. If the check result is failed, replace the HDD. (4) Replace the SYS board.
[F106] Point and Print partition damage (1) (2) (3) (4) Turn the power OFF and start up the Setting Mode (08). Key in 662 and press the [START] button. (Partition clearing is performed.) Restart the equipment. Access TopAccess. Click the [Administration] tab, and then click the Maintenance Menu to open. Then install the Point and Print driver.
[F107] / SHR partition damage Initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[F108] /SHA partition damage Initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode (08-667).
[F120]
Database abnormality
(1) Rebuild the databases. (Perform 08-684.) (2) If the error is not recovered, initialize the HDD. (Enter 2 at 08-690.) * When Rebuilding all databases (08-684) is performed, all data in the Address Book and Mailbox are deleted. Make sure to back up these data in advance of rebuilding and restore the data after rebuilding.
5.1.21 Error in Internet FAX / Scanning Function

Notes:
1. When initializing the Electronic Filing (Setting Mode (08-666)), all data in the Electronic Filing are erased. Back up the data in the Electronic Filing by using the Electronic Filing Function of TopAccess before the initialization. 2. When initializing the shared folder (Setting Mode (08-667)), all data in the shared folder are erased. Back up the data in the shared folder by using Explorer before the initialization. 3. When formatting the HDD (Setting Mode (08-690)), all data in the shared folder, Electronic Filing, Address Book, template, etc. are erased. Back up these data before the initialization. Note that some of data cannot be backed up ( Page 5-1). (1) Internet FAX related error [1C10] System access abnormality [1C32] File deletion failure Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
[1C11] Insufficient memory When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C12] Message reception error [1C13] Message transmission error Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C14] Invalid parameter When a template is used, form the template again. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[1C15] Exceeding file capacity Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform the job again.
5 - 86
[1C20] System management module access abnormality [1C21] Job control module access abnormality [1C22] Job control module access abnormality Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690). If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[1C30] Directory creation failure [1C31] File creation failure [1C33] File access failure Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable. Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C40] Image conversion abnormality Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C60] HDD full failure during processing Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again. Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[1C61] Address Book reading failure Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[1C62] Memory acquiring failure Check if there is any job being performed and perform the job in error again. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[1C63] Terminal IP address unset Reset the Terminal IP address. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
5 - 87
[1C64] Terminal mail address unset Reset the Terminal mail address. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C65] SMTP address unset Reset the SMTP address and perform the job. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[1C66] Server time time-out error Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C67] NIC time time-out error [1C68] NIC access error [1C6D] System error Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
[1C69] SMTP server connection error Reset the login name or password of SMTP server and perform the job again. Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[1C6A] HOST NAME error Check if there is an illegal character in the device name. Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
[1C6B] Terminal mail address error Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address. Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job again.
[1C6C] Destination mail address error Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address. Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job again.
5 - 88
[1C70] SMTP client OFF Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[1C80] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[1C81] Onramp Gateway transmission failure Reset the mail box.
[1C82] Internet FAX transmission failure when processing FAX job received Reset the "Received Fax Forward".
[1CC1] Power failure Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely. Check if the power voltage is unstable.
5 - 89
(2) RFC related error [2500] [2501] HOST NAME error (RFC: 500) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 500) / Terminal mail address error (RFC: 500) HOST NAME error (RFC: 501) / Destination mail address error (RFC: 501) / Terminal mail address error (RFC: 501)
Check if the Terminal mail address and Destination mail address are correct. Check if the mail server is operating properly. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2503] [2504] [2551]
Destination mail address error (RFC: 503) HOST NAME error (RFC: 504) Destination mail address error (RFC: 551)
Check if the mail server is operating properly. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
[2550]
Destination mail address error (RFC: 550)
Check the state of the mail box in the mail server.
[2552]
Terminal/Destination mail address error (RFC: 552)
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
[2553]
Destination mail address error (RFC: 553)
Check if there is an illegal character in the mail box in the mail server.
5 - 90
(3) Electronic Filing related error [2B10] [2B11] [2B20] [2B30] [2BC0] [2BC1] No applicable job error in Job control module JOB status abnormality File library function error Insufficient disk space in /SHR partition Fatal failure occurred System management module resource acquiring failure
Erase some data in the Electronic Filing and perform the job in error again (in case of [2B30]). Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690). If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2B50] Image library error [2B90] Insufficient memory capacity Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, replace the main memory. Perform the job in error again. Check if there are no other running jobs and initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08666).
[2B31] Status of specified Electronic Filing or folder is undefined or being created/deleted Check if the specified Electronic Filing or folder exists. (If no, this error would not occur.) Delete the specified Electronic Filing or folder. Perform the job in error again. If the specified Electronic Filing or folder can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[2B32] Electronic Filing printing failure: Specified document can not be printed because of client's access (being edited, etc.) Check if the specified document exists. (If no, this error would not occur.) Delete the specified document. Perform the job in error again. If the specified document can not be deleted, initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
5 - 91
[2B51] List library error Check if the Function List can be printed out. If it can be printed out, perform the job in error again. If it can not be printed out, replace the main memory. If the recovery is still not completed, perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
[2BA0] Invalid Box password Check if the password is correct. Reset the password. When this error occurs when printing the data in the Electronic Filing, perform the printing with the administrator's password. If the recovery is still not completed or in case of invalid password for the operation other than printing (opening the file, etc.), initialize the Electronic Filing using the Setting Mode (08-666).
[2BB1] Power failure [2BD0] Power failure occurred during restoring of Electronic Filing Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely. Check if the power voltage is unstable.
5 - 92
(4) E-mail related error [2C10] System access abnormality [2C32] File deletion failure Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
[2C11] Insufficient memory When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2C12] Message reception error [2C13] Message transmission error Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C14] Invalid parameter When a template is used, form the template again. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2C15] Exceeding file capacity Reset and extend the "Maximum send to E-mail/iFAX size" or reduce the number of pages and perform the job again.
[2C20] System management module access abnormality [2C21] Job control module access abnormality [2C22] Job control module access abnormality Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690). If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
[2C30] Directory creation failure [2C31] File creation failure [2C33] File access failure Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable. Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
5 - 93
[2C40] Image conversion abnormality [2C62] Memory acquiring failure Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Replace the main memory and perform the job again.
[2C60] HDD full failure during processing Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again. Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[2C61] Address Book reading failure Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Reset the data in the Address Book and perform the job again.
[2C63] Terminal IP address unset Reset the Terminal IP address. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C64] Terminal mail address unset Reset the Terminal mail address. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C65] SMTP address unset Reset the SMTP address and perform the job. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2C66] Server time time-out error Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[2C67] NIC time time-out error [2C68] NIC access error [2C6D] NIC system error Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, replace the NIC board.
5 - 94
[2C69] SMTP server connection error Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform the job again. Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
[2C6A] HOST NAME error (No RFC error) Check if there is an illegal character in the device name. Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate device name.
[2C6B] Terminal mail address error Check if there is an illegal character in the Terminal mail address. Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Terminal mail address, then perform the job again.
[2C6C] Destination mail address error (No RFC error) Check if there is an illegal character in the Destination mail address. Delete the illegal character and reset the appropriate Destination mail address, then perform the job again.
[2C70] SMTP client OFF Set the SMTP valid and perform the job again.
[2C80] E-mail transmission failure when processing E-mail job received Reset the "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2C81] Process failure of FAX job received Reset the setting of the mail box or "Received InternetFax Forward".
[2CC1] Power failure Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely. Check if the power voltage is unstable.
5 - 95
(5) File sharing related error [2D10] [2D32] [2DA6] [2DA7] System access abnormality File deletion failure File deletion failure Resource acquiring failure
Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of automatic/manual file deletion failure (in case of [2DA6]) Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then perform the HDD formatting (08-690).
[2D11] Insufficient memory When there are running jobs, perform the job in error again after the completion of the running jobs. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D12] Message reception error [2D13] Message transmission error Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again.
[2D14] [2D61]
Invalid parameter
When a template is used, form the template again. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D15] Exceeding document number Delete some documents in the folder, and then perform the job in error again.
[2D20] [2D21] [2D22] [2D60]
System management module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality Job control module access abnormality File library access abnormality
Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Check if there are no other running jobs and perform the HDD formatting (08-690). If the recovery is still not completed, replace the SYS board.
5 - 96
[2D30] Directory creation failure [2D31] File creation failure [2D33] File access failure Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable. Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
[2D40] Image conversion abnormality Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Perform the job in error again. Replace the main memory and perform the job again. If the error still occurs, first, check if there are no jobs existing and then initialize the shared folder using the Setting Mode (08-667).
[2D62] File server connection error Check the IP address or path of the server. Check if the server is operating properly.
[2D63] Invalid network path Check the network path. If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and perform the job again.
[2D64] Login failure Reset the login name and password. Perform the job. Check if the account of the server is properly set up.
[2D65] Exceeding documents in folder: Creating new document is failed Delete some documents in the folder.
[2D66] HDD full failure during processing Reduce the number of pages of the job in error and perform the job again. Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk capacity.
5 - 97
[2D67] FTP service not available Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.
[2D68] File sharing service not available Check if the setting of SMB is valid.
[2DC1] Power failure Check if the power cable is connected properly and it is inserted securely. Check if the power voltage is unstable.
5 - 98
(6) E-mail reception related error [3A10] [3A11] [3A12] E-mail MIME error The format of the mail is not corresponding to MIME 1.0. Request the sender to retransmit the mail in the format corresponding to MIME 1.0.
[3A20] [3A21] [3A22] E-mail analysis error [3B10] [3B11] [3B12] E-mail format error [3B40] [3B41] [3B42] E-mail decode error These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail. Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A30] Partial mail time-out error The partial mail is not received in a specified period of time. Request the sender to retransmit the partial mail, or set the time-out period of the partial mail longer.
[3A40] Partial mail related error The format of the partial mail is not corresponding to this equipment. Request the sender to remake and retransmit the partial mail in RFC2046 format.
[3A50] [3A51] [3A52] Insufficient HDD capacity error [3A60] [3A61] [3A62] Warning of insufficient HDD capacity These errors occur when the HDD capacity is not sufficient for a temporary concentration of the jobs, etc. Request the sender to retransmit after a certain period of time, or divide the mail into more than one. Insufficient HDD capacity error also occurs when printing is disabled for no printing paper. In this case, supply the printing paper.
[3A70] Warning of partial mail interruption This error occurs when the partial mail reception setting becomes OFF during the partial mail reception. Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3A80] [3A81] [3A82] Partial mail reception setting OFF Reset the partial mail reception setting ON and then request the sender to retransmit the mail.
5 - 99
[3B20] [3B21] [3B22] Content-Type error The format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX). Request the sender to retransmit the file in TIFF-FX.
[3B30] [3B31] [3B32] Charset error These errors occur when the standard of the Charset is other than ISO-8559-1 or ISO-8559-2. Request the sender to reformat the Charset into either of the standards described above and then retransmit the mail.
[3C10] [3C11] [3C12] [3C13] TIFF analysis error These errors occur when the mail data is damaged from the transmission to the reception of the mail, or when the format of the attached file is not supported by this equipment (TIFF-FX). Request the sender to retransmit the mail.
[3C20] [3C21] [3C22] TIFF compression error The compression method of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: MH/MR/ MMR/JBIG) Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable compression method.
[3C30] [3C31] [3C32] TIFF resolution error The resolution of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: 200 x 100, 200 x 200, 200 x 400, 400 x 400, 300 x 300 or equivalent) Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable resolution.
[3C40] [3C41] [3C42] TIFF paper size error The paper size of the TIFF file is not acceptable for this equipment. (Acceptable: A4, B4, A3, B5, LT, LG, LD or ST) Request the sender to retransmit the file in the acceptable paper size.
[3C50] [3C51] [3C52] Offramp destination error These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is incorrect. Request the sender to correct the FAX number of offramp destination and then retransmit the mail.
5 - 100
[3C60] [3C61] [3C62] Offramp security error These errors occur when the FAX number of the offramp destination is not on the Address Book. Check if the FAX number of the offramp destination is correctly entered or the number has not been changed.
[3C70] Power failure error Check if the mail is recovered after turning ON the power again. Request the sender to retransmit the mail if it is not recovered.
[3D10] Destination address error Check if the setting of the server or DNS is correct. Correct if any of the setting is incorrect. When the content of the setting is correct, confirm the sender if the destination is correct.
[3D20] Offramp destination limitation error Inform the sender that the transfer of the FAX data over 40 is not supported.
[3D30] FAX board error This error occurs when the FAX board is not installed or the FAX board has an abnormality. Check if the FAX board is correctly connected.
[3E10] POP3 server connection error Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for this equipment is correct, or check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly.
[3E20] POP3 server connection time-out error Check if POP3 server to be connected is operating properly. Check if the LAN cable is correctly connected.
[3E30] POP3 login error Check if the POP3 server login name and password set for this equipment are correct.
[3F00] [3F10] [3F20] [3F30] [3F40] File I/O error These errors occur when the mail data is not transferred properly to the HDD. Request the sender to retransmit the mail. Replace the HDD if the error still occurs after retransmission.
5 - 101
5.2 Troubleshooting of Image

(1) Color deviation <Symptoms>
Original mode All modes Location Phenomena Color blurred in outline of Color white text or illustration deviation on a colored background Outline in black text on a Text Mode White void Text/Photo Mode colored background Photo Mode Color blurred in outline of Color Map Mode line or text deviation
AB BC C A A AB BC C A AB BC C
Fig. 5-201
Section
Step 1 2
Main Classification Drum rotation
Cause Sub Classification Unstable
Specific Classification
Check Item
Drum drive system
Main motor rotation speed Drum coupling
Inadequate Loose coupling Damage Deformation Deformation or damage
Output the built-in pattern on A3/LD. Motor abnormal Check main motor operation in the Test Mode (03). Check main motor operation in the Control circuit abnormal Test Mode (03). Adjustment Recheck values set for main motor error rotation speed. Check the grid pattern.
Transfer belt system
Transfer belt
Check the grid pattern. Check the condition of transfer belt edge.
Reflection tape Transfer belt home position sensor Drive roller Stain
Stain Damage
Slipping
Stain
Check the grid pattern. Check the condition of roller surface.
Laser optical unit
Large driving load Grounding (transfer belt unit) Reflection mirror warp f lens characteristic defect High-voltage supply terminal (1st/2nd transfer rollers)
Cleaning blade
Peeling Check the installing of the transfer belt unit. Check the grid pattern. Check the grid pattern. Check the connection of the terminal.
5 - 102
Criteria Perform following procedures from 2 and after.
Measures
Replace the main motor. Reconnect the connectors. Replace the harnesses. Replace the LGC board. Reset main motor speed to 128. Tighten the screws. Replace the couplings. Replace the couplings. Replace the belt (troubleshoot the transfer belt).
Is the value significantly different from the default value 128?
Is the misalignment of the secondary scanning direction varied? Is the belt edge damaged or folded? Is there any stain on the reflection tape? Is the reflection tape damaged? Is lens section of the sensor stained?
Clean the reflection tape or replace the transfer belt. Replace the transfer belt. Clean the lens section or replace the sensor.
Is the misalignment of the primary scanning direction varied? Is there any stain?
Clean it.
Replace the cleaning blade. Is the transfer belt unit installed normally? (Is the unit normally grounded? Are the lines of the primary scanning direction warped? Are the lines of the primary scanning direction warped? Is the terminal loosened? Check/correct the installing.
Replace the unit. Replace the unit. Check/reconnect the terminal.
* If the desired image has not been obtained with the above measures or the more qualified image is needed, correct the deviation amount in the Adjustment Mode (05). (Refer to the next page.) November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC 5 - 103 e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING
<Color Deviation Correction Procedure> There are 2 methods to correct a color deviation; using the "Test pattern 63" (correction method 1) and using the "Test pattern 64" (correction method 2). Correct in either way of these methods. Correction method 1 (1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) (2) Print out the test pattern and correct the deviation amount of the 1st page. Use the image position of magenta (M) as a reference for correction. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and black (K) must be corrected with this reference. a. Select A3/LD size. Key in 63 and then press the [FAX] button. 2 pages of test pattern are printed out. b. Check the image of the 1st page and specify the color to be corrected. c. Key in the code 417 and press the [START] button. d. Key in the sub code of the color to be corrected and press the [START] button. Sub code 0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y) e. Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. Notes: 1. When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by 0.0423 mm. 2. Adjust the image positions of black (B), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) to align the leading/trailing edge of each image. If both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust to uniform the deviation amount of each edge. (3) Print out the test pattern and correct the deviation amount of the 2nd page. Use the image position of magenta (M) as a reference for correction. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and black (K) must be corrected with this reference. a. Select A3/LD size. Key in 63 and then press the [FAX] button. 2 pages of test pattern are printed out. b. Check the image of the 2nd page and specify the color to be corrected. c. Key in the code 418 and press the [START] button. d. Key in the sub code of the color to be corrected and press the [START] button. Sub code 0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y) e. Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. Notes: 1. When the value increases by 1, the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by 0.0423 mm. 2. Adjust the image positions of black (B), cyan (C) and yellow (Y) to align the leading/trailing edge of each image. If both leading and trailing edges are not aligned, adjust to uniform the deviation amount of each edge. (4) Turn the power OFF.
5 - 104
03/12
Feeding direction
[Test pattern]
Details of A Use the image position of M as a reference and align the image positions of Y, C and K with this reference. Details of B
[Details of adjustment area]

Fig. 5-202
5 - 105
Correction method 2 (1) While pressing the digital keys [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. (Adjustment Mode) (2) Print out the test pattern and correct the deviation amount of the 1st page. Use the image position of magenta (M) as a reference for correction. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and black (K) must be corrected with this reference. a. Select A3/LD size. Key in "64" and then press the [FAX] button. 2 pages of the test pattern are printed out. b. Check the image of the 1st page and specify the color to be corrected. c. Key in the code "417" and press the [START] button. d. Key in the sub code of the color to be corrected and press the [START] button. Sub code 0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y)
e. Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. Notes: 1. When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by 0.0423 mm. 2. Adjust each image position of black (K), cyan (C) and yellow (Y). Uniform the gap between each image position of all colors including magenta (M). 3. If the patterns of the leading and trailing edge sides are not aligned, adjust to uniform the deviation amount of each side. (The top gap of the pattern on the leading edge side and bottom gap of the pattern on the trailing edge side should be the same. The bottom gap of the pattern on the leading edge side and top gap of the pattern on the trailing edge side should be the same.) (3) Print out the test pattern and correct the deviation amount of the 2nd page. Use the image position of magenta (M) as a reference for correction. The image positions of yellow (Y), cyan (C) and black (K) must be corrected with this reference. a. Select A3/LD size. Key in "64" and then press the [FAX] button. 2 pages of the test pattern are printed out. b. Check the image of the 2nd page and specify the color to be corrected. c. Key in the code "418" and press the [START] button. d. Key in the sub code of the color to be corrected and press the [START] button. Sub code 0: Black (K) 1: Cyan (C) 3: Yellow (Y) e. Key in the adjustment value and press the [ENTER] or [INTERRUPT] button. Notes: 1. When the value increases by "1", the image shifts toward the trailing edge of the paper by 0.0423 mm. 2. Adjust each image position of black (K), cyan (C) and yellow (Y). Uniform the gap between each image position of all colors including magenta (M).
5 - 106
03/12
3. If the patterns of the leading and trailing edge sides are not aligned, adjust to uniform the deviation amount of each side. (The top gap of the pattern on the leading edge side and bottom gap of the pattern on the trailing edge side should be the same. The bottom gap of the pattern on the leading edge side and top gap of the pattern on the trailing edge side should be the same.) (4) Turn the power OFF.
Pattern on the leading edge side
Feeding direction
Pattern on the trailing edge side
[Test pattern]
K Y K
C K C
M Y M C
K Y K
Gap: approx. 0.169 mm
C K C
M Y M C
Adjust each image position of K, C and Y. Uniform the gap between each image position of all colors including M.
[Details of adjustment area]

Fig. 5-202B
5 - 107
03/12
(3)
Poor image density, color reproduction and gray balance

Check gray balance. Check image density.
Fig. 5-204
Check color reproduction.
Cause/Section Density / Color reproduction / Gray balance Printer density
Step Check items 1 Check the image density / color reproduction / gray balance.
Check the density of printer output image.
Scanner Parameter adjustment value Printer output image abnormal
3 4 5
Check if the original glass, mirrors or lens is dirty. Check the image processing parameters. Is there any faded image (low density)? Is there any fog in the background? Is there any blotch image?
Measures Remarks Perform the enforced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. See step 5 if Output the test patterns and defect occurs. check them. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Clean it. Adjust the color balance (color). Adjust the image density. Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the faded image. Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the background fogging. Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the blotch image. Perform the troubleshooting procedures against the poor transfer. Correct the transfer belt area. (Refer to Service Manual)
Is there any poor transfer?
Is there any poor cleaning of the transfer belt? (Check inside the equipment.)
* If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjustment) are performed, make sure to perform Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop control and then Automatic gamma adjustment after taking a measure. e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 - 108 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
(4)
Background fogging
Fig. 5-205
5 - 109
Cause/Section Density reproduction
Step Check items 1 Check the gradation reproduction.
Printer section
Check the printer output image.
Scanner Parameter adjustment value
3 4
Check if the original glass, mirrors or lens is dirty. Check the image processing parameters.
Measures Remarks Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. Output the test patterns and See step 6 if check them. defects occur. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Clean it. Check the value of offsetting adjustment for background processing (color) and background peak adjustment for range correction (black). While checking the above encircled image, adjust the reproduction level by the offsetting adjustment for background processing (color) and background peak adjustment for range correction (black). Correct it.
Adjust the image processing parameters.
Cover
Auto-toner
7 8
Main charger output Developer bias Developer unit Developer material/ Toner/Drum
9 10 11 12 13 14
Drum cleaning blade Transfer belt cleaning blade
15 16
17
Toner dusting
18
Is the cover installed properly? (Is the drum exposed to the external light?) Is the auto-toner sensor normal? Check the operation of autotoner sensor and readjust. Check the motor and circuits. Is the toner supply operating constantly? Check the circuits. Is the main charger output normal? Is the developer bias proper? Check the circuits. Is the contact between the drum Check the doctor-to-sleeve gap and developer material proper? and pole position. Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material, toner and drum? material, toner and drum. Have the developer material and Replace the developer material drum reached their PM life? and drum. Is the storage environment of the Use the toner cartridge stored in toner cartridge 35oC or less the environment within specificawithout dew? tion. Is the drum cleaned properly? Check the drum cleaning blade pressure. Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Check if the spring of the transfer contacted and released properly? belt cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Check if the blade pressure in proper contact with the transfer spring is installed. belt? Is the toner accumulated on the Remove the toner and clean the seals of the developer unit? seals.
* If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjustment) are performed, make sure to perform Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop control and then Automatic gamma adjustment after taking a measure. e-STUDIO3511/4511 TROUBLESHOOTING 5 - 110 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
(5)
Moire/lack of sharpness
A
Fig. 5-206
5 - 111
Moire
Cause/Section Density reproduction Step Check items 1 Check the gradation reproduction. Measures Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. Check the sharpness adjustment value. While checking the above encircled images A and B, decrease moire by sharpness adjustment. Output the test patterns and check them. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Remarks
Parameter adjustment value
2 3
Check the image processing parameters. Adjust the image processing parameters.
Printer section
Check the printer output image.
When defects occur, perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedures.
Lack of sharpness
Cause/Section Density reproduction Step Check items 1 Check the gradation reproduction. Measures Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. Check the sharpness adjustment value. While checking the above encircled image A, increase sharpness by sharpness adjustment. Remarks
Parameter adjustment value
2 3
Check the image processing parameters. Adjust the image processing parameters.
* If the trouble is not solved at the step 1 and the step 2 or followings (excluding the parameter adjustment) are performed, make sure to perform Enforced performing of image quality closed-loop control and then Automatic gamma adjustment after taking a measure.
5 - 112
(6)
Toner offset
Black solid
Feeding direction
Approx. 173 mm
Shadow image
Fig. 5-207
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx. 173 mm behind the high density image.)
Cause/Section Fuser unit Step Check items 1 Is the pressure between the fuser belt and pressure roller proper? 2 Is the thermostat in contact? 3 Is there scratch on the fuser belt or pressure roller surface? 4 Has the fuser belt or pressure roller reached its PM life? 5 Is the fuser roller temperature proper? 6 Is the paper type corresponding to its mode? 7 Using recommended paper? 8 Is the specified developer used? 9 10 11 Are the mirrors, original glass or lens dirty? Is the control activated? Is the density too high? Measures Check the pressure removal parts and pressure mechanism. Establish its contact. Replace the fuser belt or the pressure roller. Replace the fuser belt or the pressure roller. Check and correct the control circuit. Use the proper type of paper or select the proper mode. Use the recommended paper. Use the specified developer and toner. Clean them. Check the image quality control related codes. Perform the forced performing of image quality closed-loop control (05-395) and then automatic gamma adjustment. Output the test patterns and check them. Color: using 04-231 for each color Black: using 04-113 Remarks
Paper
Developer material Scanner Image quality control Density
Printer density
12
Check the density of printer output image.
When defects occur, perform the corresponding troubleshooting procedures.
5 - 113
(7)
Blurred image
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-208
Cause/Section Scanner Drum
Step Check items 1 Is the scanner bedewed? 2 Is the drum bedewed or dirty?
Ozone exhaust
3 4
Is the ozone exhaust fan operating properly? Is the ozone filter stained or damaged?
Measures Clean it. Wipe the drum with dry cloth. * Be sure never use alcohol or other organic solvents because they have bad effect on the drum. Check the connection of the connector. Replace it.
5 - 114
(8)
Poor fusing
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-209
Step Check items 1 Check if the connector contacts properly. 2 Is the IH coil shorted or broken? Is the IH control board normal? 3 Are the connectors on the LGC board and joint connectors connected properly? 4 Is the LGC board normal? 5 Is the harness between the LGC board and IH board short- or open-circuited? Pressure between 6 Are the pressure springs working properly? fuser belt and pressure roller improper Fuser roller 7 Is the temperature of fuser roller too temperature low?
Cause/Section IH electric power/ control abnormal
Measures Correct it. Replace the IH coil or IH control board. Reconnect them.
Replace the LGC board. Replace the harness. Check/adjust the pressure springs.
Developer material and toner Paper
8 9 10 11
Using the specified developer material and toner? Is the paper damp? Is the paper type corresponding to its mode? Using the recommended paper?
Check/correct the setting value of fuser roller temperature. Clean or replace the thermistors. Check/correct the related circuit. Use the specified developer material and toner. Change the paper. Use the proper type of paper or select the proper mode. Use the recommended paper.
5 - 115
(9)
Blank print
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-210
5 - 116
Cause/Section Step Check items High-voltage 1 Is the high-voltage transformer output transformer defective? (1st/2nd transfer roller and developer bias) 2 Are the connector of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is the harness open-circuited? Developer unit 3 Is the developer unit installed securely? 4 5 6 7 Drum 8 9 Transfer unit 10 Do the developer sleeve and mixer rotate? Is the developer material properly transported? Is there any magnetic brush phase error? Is the doctor sleeve gap incorrect?
Measures Adjust the output and correct the circuit, or replace the transformer.
Reconnect the harness securely. Replace the high-voltage harness. Check/correct the developer sleeve coupling engaging. Check/correct the developer drive system. Remove foreign matter from the developer material, if any. Check the developer pole position.
11 12
13
Switching power supply Harnesses for SLG, SYS, LGC and LDR boards Laser optical unit
14 15
16
Adjust the gap with the doctor-sleeve jig. Check that the drum shaft is inserted. Is the drum rotating? Check the drum drive system. Check the contact of the grounding Is the drum grounded? plate. Is the transfer belt in proper contact with Check if the contact releasing lever is at releasing position. Check the installation the drum? of the transfer belt. Check the installation of the transfer belt Is the transport of the transfer belt normal? or transport mechanism. Is the releasing movement of the Check the installation of the transfer belt transfer belt cleaner is normal? (Does cleaning blade. Check the operation of the cleaning blade stay in contact?) the transfer belt cleaner clutch. Is the 2nd transfer roller contacted and Check the connection of the connector released properly? of 2nd transfer roller contact clutch and open-circuit of harness. Replace the switching power supply. Is the power supply output (5.1VD) normal? Are the connectors securely connected? Reconnect the connectors securely. Is any harness between the boards Replace the harness. open-circuited? Was the protection seal of slit removed Remove the protection seal. when replacing the unit?
5 - 117
(10) Solid print
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-211
Cause/Section Exposure lamp Inverter
Step Check items 1 Does the exposure lamp light?
Main charger High-voltage transformer (main charger wire/ grid bias)
2 3 4
Measures Check the contact of the inverter connector. If the inverter does not work, replace it. If the lamp does not work, replace it. Is the main charger securely installed? Reinstall it securely. Is the main charger wire open-circuited? Replace it. Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output and correct the circuit, defective? or replace the high-voltage transformer.
Harnesses for SLG, SYS and LGC boards Scanner Bedewing of scanner and drum
7 8
Are the connector of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is the harness open-circuited? Are the connectors securely connected? Is any harness between the boards open-circuited ? Is there foreign matter in the optical path? Is the scanner or the drum bedewed?
Reconnect the harness securely. Replace the high-voltage harness. Reconnect the connectors securely. Replace the harness. Remove it. Clean the mirrors, lens and drum. Keep the power cord plugged so that the damp heater can work.
5 - 118
(11) White banding (in feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-212
Cause/Section Laser optical unit Main charger grid Developer unit
Drum Transfer unit
Step Check items 1 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit glass? 2 Is there foreign matter on the charger grid? 3 Is there foreign matter inside the doctor blade? 4 Is there foreign matter on the drum seal? 5 Is the drum seal of developer unit in proper contact with the drum? 6 Is there scratch or foreign matter on the drum surface? 7 Is there scratch or foreign matter on the transfer belt surface? 8 Are the harness or foreign matters in contact with the transfer belt surface? 9 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade contacted and released properly?
Measures Clean the slit glass. Remove foreign matter. Remove foreign matter. Remove foreign matter. Modify the position of drum seal or replace it. Replace the drum. Replace the transfer belt. Correct or remove them. Check if the spring of the transfer belt cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Check if the blade pressure spring is installed. Replace the 1st/2nd transfer roller. Remove foreign matter.
10 11 Transport path 12
Discharge lamp Scanner
13 14
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in proper contact with the transfer belt? Is there any scratch or hole on the 1st/ 2nd transfer roller? Does the toner image touch foreign matter after transfer, before entering the fuser unit? Has any LED of discharge lamp gone out? Is there foreign matter or dust in the optical path?
Replace the discharge lamp. Clean the lens and mirrors.
5 - 119
(12) White banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-213
Cause/Section Main charger Drum
Step Check items 1 Is there foreign matter on the charger? 2 Is the terminal contact poor? 3 Is there any abnormalities on the drum surface? 4 Is the drum grounded? 5 6
Measures Remove foreign matter. Clean or adjust the terminals. Replace the drum.
Discharge lamp Developer unit
7 Drive systems High-voltage transformer (main charger wire/ grid, 1st/2nd transfer roller and developer bias) 8 9
Check the contact of the grounding plate. Is the discharge lamp lighting properly? Replace the discharge lamp or clean terminals. Check the developer drive system, or Is the developer sleeve rotating correctly? Is there any abnormalities on the clean the sleeve surface. sleeve surface? Is the connection of developer bias Correct it. supply terminal normal? Is the drum, scanner or transfer belt Check each drive system. jittery? Is the high-voltage transformer output Check/correct any electric leakage and defective? related circuits. If the high-voltage transformer does not work, replace it.
5 - 120
(13) Skew (slantwise copying)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-214
Cause/Section Drawer/LCF
Paper feed roller Rollers Aligning amount Registration roller Pre-registration guide 2nd transfer front guide RADF
Step Check items 1 Is the drawer or LCF properly installed? 2 Is too much paper loaded in the drawer or LCF? 3 Is the paper corner folded? 4 Are the drawer or LCF side guides properly set? 5 Is the surface of paper feed roller dirty?
Measures Reinstall the drawer or LCF properly. Reduce paper to 550 sheets or less. (2500 sheets or less/stack for LCF) Change the paper direction and reinsert it. Adjust the side guides.
Clean the roller surface with alcohol, or replace the roller. Check and reinstall E-rings, pins, clips 6 Is each roller improperly fixed to the shaft? and setscrews. 7 Is the aligning amount proper? Increase the aligning amount. 8 Is the registration roller spring removed? Mount the spring correctly. Clean the roller if it is dirty. Correct it. 9 Is the pre-registration guide improperly installed? 10 Is the 2nd transfer front guide installed Correct it. properly? 11 Is the RADF installed and adjusted Reinstall and readjust it. properly?
5 - 121
(14) Color banding (in feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-215
5 - 122
Cause/Section Scanner
Main charger
Cleaner
Step Check items 1 Is there foreign matter in the optical path? 2 Is there dust or stain on the shading correction plate or ADF original glass? 3 Is there foreign matter on the charger grid? 4 Is the charger grid dirty or deformed? 5 Is there foreign matter on the main charger? 6 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? 7 Is there foreign matter inside the charger case? 8 Is the inner surface of charger case dirty? 9 Are the pads of charger wire cleaner stopping at the position other than their home position? 10 Is there paper dust on the cleaning blade edge? 11 12 13 14 15 Is the cleaning blade contact improper? Is toner recovery defective? Are the harness or foreign matters in contact with the transfer belt surface? Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer belt cleaning blade? Is the transfer belt cleaning blade contacted and released properly?
Measures Clean the slit, lens and mirrors. Clean it. Remove foreign matter. Clean or replace the charger grid. Remove foreign matter. Clean or replace the charger wire. Remove foreign matter. Clean inside. Correct the position.
Transfer unit
Clean or replace the paper dust removal brush for the registration roller. Clean or replace the cleaning blade. Correct it. Clean the toner recovery auger section. Correct or remove them. Clean or replace it. Check if the spring of the transfer belt cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Check if the blade pressure spring is installed. a. Clean or replace them. b. Clean the thermistor. Replace the drum. Remove foreign matter or dust.
16 Fuser unit 17
Drum Laser optical unit
18 19
Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in proper contact with the transfer belt? a. Is there dirt or scratches on the fuser belt and pressure roller surface? b. Is the thermistor dirty? Are there scratches on the drum surface? Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit glass?
5 - 123
(15) Color banding (at right angles to feeding direction)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-216
Cause/Section Main charger Fuser unit High-voltage transformer (main charger wire/grid and transfer roller bias)
Step Check items 1 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? 2 Is the fuser belt, pressure roller or oil roller dirty? 3 Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Measures Clean or replace the charger wire. Clean them. Check the circuit and replace the highvoltage transformer if not working.
Drum
6 7 2nd transfer roller Scanner 8 9
Is each joint of high-voltage output Reconnect each joint. loosened? (Check if any electric leakage is causing noise.) Is there deep scratch on the drum Replace the drum, especially if the surface? scratch has reached the aluminum base. Check and correct the contact of Are there fine scratches on the drum surface (drum pitting)? cleaning blade and recovery blade. Is the drum grounded? Check the contact of the grounding plate. Clean the roller area or replace the Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating normally? roller. Is there foreign matter on the carriage Remove foreign matter. rail?
5 - 124
(16) White spots
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-217
Cause/Section Developer unit/Toner cartridge
Developer material/ Toner/Drum
Transfer unit
Main charger High-voltage transformer (main charger wire/ grid, developer 1st/ 2nd transfer roller bias) Paper
Step Check items Measures 1 Is the toner density of developer material Check and correct the auto-toner sensor proper? and toner supply operation. Check if the amount of toner is sufficient in the toner cartridge. 2 Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper? Adjust the gap. 3 Using the specified developer material, Use the specified developer material, toner and drum? toner and drum. Replace the developer material and 4 Have the developer material and drum reached their PM life? drum. Use the toner cartridge stored in the 5 Is the storage environment of the toner cartridge 35oC or less without dew? environment within specification. Replace the drum. 6 Is there any dent on the surface of the drum? 7 Is there any film forming on the drum? Clean or replace the drum. 8 Is the drum bedewed? Wipe the drum surface with a piece of dry cloth. Remove foreign matter. 9 Is there foreign matter on the transfer belt surface? 10 Is there foreign matter on the transfer Clean the transfer belt unit. belt drive roller? 11 Is there foreign matter on the charger? Remove it. 12 Is the charger wire dirty or deformed? Clean or replace the charger wire. 13 Is the high-voltage transformer output Adjust the output. defective?
14
Is the paper type corresponding to its mode?
Use the proper type of paper or select the proper mode.
5 - 125
(17) Poor transfer
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-218
Cause/Section Transfer unit
Paper
Step Check items 1 Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer rollers dirty? 2 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with the drum ? 3 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with the transfer belt? 4 Is there any deformation or abnormalities on the transfer belt? 5 Is paper in the drawer or LCF curled? 6 Is paper in the drawer or LCF damp? Is the registration roller malfunctioning? Is the high-voltage transformer output defective?
Measures Clean it. Correct it. Correct it. Replace the belt. Reinsert paper with reverse side up or change paper. Change paper. * Avoid storing paper in damp place. Clean the roller, remount the spring, or replace defective clutch-related parts. Check the circuit and adjust the transformer output.
Registration roller High-voltage transformer (1st/2nd transfer roller bias)
7 8
Are the high-voltage harness and terminals in proper contact?
Correct them if loosened.
5 - 126
(18) Uneven image density
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-219
Cause/Section Main charger Transfer unit
Laser optical unit Discharge lamp
Developer unit
Scanner section
Step Check items 1 Is the main charger dirty? 2 Is the transfer belt or 1st/2nd transfer rollers dirty? 3 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with the drum? 4 Is 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with the transfer belt? (Is the roller tilted?) 5 Is there any abnormalities or deformation on the transfer belt? 6 Is there foreign matter or dust on the slit glass? 7 Is the discharge lamp dirty? 8 Has any LED of discharge lamp gone out? 9 Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum? 10 Is the developer unit pressure mechanism malfunctioning? 11 Is the transport of developer material poor? 12 a. Is the platen cover or RADF open? b. Is the original glass, mirrors, or lens dirty?
Measures Clean it or replace the charger wire. Clean the belt. Correct it. Correct it.
Replace the transfer belt. Clean the slit glass. Clean it. Replace it. Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap. Check the mechanism. Remove foreign matter if any. a. Close the platen cover or RADF. b. Clean them.
5 - 127
(19) Faded image (low density)
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-220
Cause/Section Toner empty Auto-toner circuit
Toner motor Toner cartridge
Step Check items 1 Is the ADD TONER symbol blinking? 2 Is there enough toner in the cartridge? 3 Is the toner density of developer material too low? 4 Is the toner motor malfunctioning? 5 Are there any abnormalities in the toner cartridge? 6 7 Has the developer material reached its PM life? Is the magnetic brush in proper contact with the drum? Is the main charger dirty? Is there film forming on the drum surface? Has the drum reached its PM life? Has the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd transfer roller reached its PM life? Is the high-voltage transformer output settings improper? Are the connector of the high-voltage harness securely connected? Is the harness open-circuited?
Measures Replace the toner cartridge. Check the auto-toner circuit function.
Check the motor drive circuit. Replace the toner cartridge.
Developer material Developer unit
Replace developer material. Check the developer unit installation. Check the doctor-sleeve gap and pole position. Clean it or replace the charger wire. Clean or replace the drum. Replace the drum. Replace the transfer belt, 1st or 2nd transfer roller. Adjust the high-voltage transformer output. Reconnect the harness securely. Replace the high-voltage harness.
Main charger Drum
8 9 10 11 12 13
Transfer unit High-voltage transformer (developer bias)
5 - 128
(20) Image dislocation in feeding direction
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-221
Cause/Section Adjustment error of scanner or printer section Registration roller
Step Check items 1 Is same dislocation on every copy?
Measures Adjust the scanner/printer using the Adjustment Mode.
2 3 4
Paper feed clutch Pre-registration guide Transfer belt
5 6 7 8
Is the registration roller dirty, or is the Clean the roller with alcohol. spring removed? Reinstall the spring. Is the registration motor malfunctioning? Adjust or replace the gears, etc. if they are not engaged properly. Is the registration roller clutch operating Replace the registration roller clutch. normally? (Is the timing of operation delaying?) Is the paper feed clutch malfunctioning? Check the circuit or the clutch and replace them if necessary. Reinstall the guide. Is the pre-registration guide improperly installed? Is there any stain or scratch on the Clean or replace it. reflection tape? Is the lens of the transfer belt home Clean or replace it. position sensor stained?
5 - 129
(21) Image jittering
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-222
Cause/Section Registration roller Transfer unit
Step Check items 1 Is the toner image on the drum proper? 2 3 Is the registration roller rotating normally? Is the transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller operating normally? Are the fuser roller and pressure roller rotation proper? Is the fuser belt transportation proper? Is there large scratch on the drum? Is the slide sheet defective? Are there any abnormalities on the carriage feet? Is the tension of timing belt inappropriate? Is the carriage drive system malfunctioning? Are any mirrors loosely installed? Is the drum drive system malfunctioning?
Fuser unit
Drum Scanner
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Measures If proper, perform step 1 to 3; otherwise perform step 4 and after. Check the registration roller section and its springs. Check the drive system and replace the transfer belt or 2nd transfer roller if necessary. Check the drive system. Replace the fuser belt, fuser roller and pressure roller if necessary. Replace the drum. Replace it. Replace the feet. Correct the tension. Check the carriage drive system. Install them properly. Check the drum drive system. Clean or replace the belts, pulleys, bushings if they have dirt or scratches.
Drum drive system
5 - 130
(22) Poor cleaning
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-223
Note: Poor cleaning may occur in feeding direction.
5 - 131
Cause/Section Developer material Cleaner
Step Check items 1 Is the specified developer material used? 2 Is there paper dust on the drum cleaning blade edge? 3 Is the drum cleaning blade peeled? 4 5
Measures Use the specified developer material and toner. Clean it.
Transfer belt cleaner
6 7 8
Replace the blade. Check and replace the drum. Is the cleaning brush rotating normally? Check the brush driving section. Clean the brush area. Is the cleaning brush damaged? Is there Replace the brush and clean the brush area. Check the drum and replace if foreign matter on the brush? there is any abnormality. Clean or replace it. Is there paper dust on the edge of transfer belt cleaning blade? Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Replace the blade. peeled? Is the transfer belt cleaning blade Check if the spring of the transfer belt contacted and released properly? cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Check if the blade pressure spring is Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in installed. proper contact with the transfer belt? Is the toner recovery defective? Is the cleaning roller or the oil roller damaged? Have the roller reached their PM life? Is there any bubble-like defect on the fuser belt (173 mm pitch on the image)? Have the fuser belt and pressure roller reached their PM life? Is the pressure between the fuser belt and pressure roller proper? Is the temperature of fuser roller proper? Clean the toner recovery auger. Check the cleaning blade pressure. Replace them.
Toner recovery auger Fuser unit
10 11
12 13 14 15
Replace the fuser belt. Check and modify the heater control circuit. Replace them. Check and adjust the pressure mechanism. Check/correct the setting value of fuser roller temperature. Clean or replace the thermistors. Check and correct the circuit.
5 - 132
(23) Uneven light distribution
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-224
Cause/Section Original glass Main charger Discharge lamp Scanner Exposure lamp
Step Check items 1 Is the original glass dirty? 2 Are the main charger wire, grid and case dirty? 3 Is the discharge lamp dirty? 4 Are the reflector, exposure lamp, mirrors, lens, etc. dirty? 5 Is the exposure lamp tilted? 6 Is the lamp discolored or degraded?
Measures Clean the glass. Clean or replace them. Clean it. Clean them. Adjust the installed position of the lamp. Replace it.
5 - 133
(24) Blotched image
Feeding direction
Fig. 5-225
Cause/Section Paper
Transfer unit
High-voltage transformer (1st/2nd transfer roller bias)
Step Check items 1 Is the paper type corresponding to its mode? 2 Is paper too dry? 3 Is the transfer belt in proper contact with the drum? 4 Is the 2nd transfer roller in proper contact with the transfer belt? 5 Are there any abnormalities on the transfer belt? 6 Is the high-voltage transformer output abnormal?
Measures Check the paper type and mode. Change paper. Correct it. Correct it. Clean or replace the transfer belt. Adjust the output. Replace the transformer, if necessary.
5 - 134
(25) Stain on the paper back side
Feeding direction
Printing side of 1st page The edge of image cut off.
Feeding direction
Back side of 2nd page Fig. 5-226
5 - 135
Cause/Section Image adjustment/ setting
Paper feeding / Transport area
Transfer unit
Step Check items 1 Is the margin adjustment of image correct? 2 Is the margin adjustment of image correct when the paper size is not selected in bypass feeding? 3 Is the margin adjustment of image at duplexing correct? 4 Is the image location in primary/secondary scanning direction correct? 5 Is the reproduction ratio of image in primary/secondary scanning direction correct? 6 Is the tab setting correct? 7 Does the size of paper in the drawer or LCF correspond to the setting? 8 Is the width between the slides in the drawer correct (too wide)? 9 Is the width between the slides of the bypass tray correct (too wide)? 10 Is the sideways deviation adjustment for drawers or slides of the bypass tray correct? 11 Is the paper aligning amount sufficient? 12 Are the feed roller and transport roller dirty or worn out? 13 Does the paper mode correspond to the paper type? 14 Using the recommended paper? 15 Is there any stain caused by a poor cleaning, etc. on the transfer belt? 16 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade in proper contact with the transfer belt? 17 Is the transfer belt cleaning blade contacted or released properly?
Measures Adjust the margin. Adjust the margin.
Adjust the margin. (05-434) Adjust the location. Adjust the reproduction ratio.
Correct the setting. Use the appropriate paper size or correct the size setting. Correct the position of the slides. Correct the width. Adjust the deviation.
Adjust the aligning amount. Clean or replace the rollers. Use the appropriate paper type or paper mode. Use the recommended paper. Clean the transfer belt. Check if the blade pressure spring is installed. Check if the spring of the transfer belt cleaner clutch is removed or if any connector is disconnected. Otherwise replace the clutch. Clean the area around the roller. Otherwise replace the roller. Clean or replace the roller.
18 19 20 Fuser unit 21 22
Is the 2nd transfer roller rotating properly? Is there any foreign matter or stain on the 2nd transfer roller? Has the 2nd transfer roller reached to its Replace the 2nd transfer roller. PM life? Are the fuser belt and pressure roller Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller. dirty? Is the rib of transport guide dirty? Clean the rib.
5 - 136
6. FIRMWARE UPDATING
In this equipment, following firmware is written on the ROM on each board.
Firmware Master data (HDD program data, UI data) System ROM (System firmware, OS data, UI data) Engine ROM (Machine firmware) Scanner ROM (Scanner firmware) NIC ROM (NIC firmware) RADF ROM (RADF firmware) Finisher ROM (Finisher firmware) Finisher ROM (Saddle stitcher firmware) FAX ROM (FAX firmware) Stored Hard disk System control PC board (SYS board) Logic PC board (LGC board) Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) NIC board RADF control PC board (MR-3015) Finisher control PC board (MJ-1023/ MJ-1024) Finisher control PC board (MJ-1024) FAX board (GD-1150)
When you want to update the firmware above or the equipment becomes inoperative status due to some defectives of the firmware, updating the firmware is available by the following actions. Updating with the download jig 6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig Updating with PC connected 6.2 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager) Updating with the USB Storage Device 6.3 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device Notes: Written firmware varies depending on the kinds of the boards provided as service parts. For updating, only the minimum firmware is installed on the system control PC board, logic PC board, and scanning section control PC board. No firmware is installed on the NIC board and FAX board. The latest version of the firmware at the delivery is written on the RADF control PC board and finisher control PC board. When any of above boards is replaced with a new one in the field, confirm the other firmware version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware. The firmware (master data) is not installed on the hard disk provided as a service part. When the hard disk is replaced with a new one, confirm the other firmware version used with and then write the suitable version of the firmware.
6-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING
6.1 Firmware Updating with Download Jig

In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware automatically by connecting the download jig using the dedicated connector and turning ON the equipment. The download jig consists of the ROM, in which the program is written, and the jig board. And three types of the download jigs are available for each type of the firmware. For updating the firmware, in addition to the current ways such as updating each firmware individually, the batch update of the firmware of the equipment is available (except the hard disk and the option).
Firmware Master data System ROM Engine ROM Stored Hard disk System control PC board (SYS board) Logic PC board (LGC board) Download jig Individual update Batch update PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) K-PWA-DLM-320 or PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 K-PWA-DLM-320 (16 MB) or PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) K-PWA-DLM-320 K-PWA-DLM-320 K-PWA-DLM-320 K-PWA-DLM-320
Scanner ROM
Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) NIC board RADF control PC board (MR-3015) Finisher control PC board (MJ-1023/MJ-1024) Finisher control PC board (MJ-1024) FAX board (GD-1150)
NIC ROM RADF ROM Finisher ROM (Finisher firmware) Finisher ROM (Saddle stitcher firmware) FAX ROM
Refer to the followings for the details to update with each download jig. 6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) 6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320
6-2
Connector (for SYS board connection)
Connector (for ROM writer adapter connection)
Connector (for SYS board connection)
Connector (for ROM writer adapter connection)
ROM4 ROM5 ROM6
ROM1 ROM2 ROM3
ROM1 ROM2
[Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB)]
[Jig board: PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB)]
Important: The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) has two types having different ROM capacity. ROM capacity for each jig is as follows.
Download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) ROM capacity 8 MB x 6 8 MB x 2 Application Updating the master data Updating the system ROM, engine ROM, scanner ROM, NIC ROM
* PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) is substitutable for PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) is different from the existing jigs. The ROM is installed on the board directly. Therefore, ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write the data to these ROMs. Refer to the following to write the data. 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
Connector Mark for ROM installation direction LED
ROM
[Jig board:K-PWA-DLM-320] Important: Pay attention to the direction of the ROM.
6-3
6.1.1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) The master data written on the hard disk can be updated by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB). Update the master data according to the need such as the case of replacing the hard disk. The data to be overwritten are as follows. HDD program data (RIP data, list data, Web data, filing box control data) UI data (fixed section data, common section data, the language 1 to 7 data, the language 1 to 6 data for Web) (a) Update procedure Important: Use the download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB). Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig. Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly. (1) Write the data to the download jig. 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) (2) (3) Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Take off connector cover.
Connector cover
6-4
(4)
Remove the cover plate.
Cover plate
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.
Connector
(6)
Turn ON the power. Downloading starts automatically and the processing status is displayed on LCD screen.
6-5
(7)
Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the updating data written to the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(8) (9)
Turn OFF the power, and then remove the download jig. Perform the Updating System ROM continuously. 6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) <Updating System ROM>
6-6
(b) Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly. 08-900: System ROM version 08-920: FROM basic section software version 08-921: FROM internal program version 08-922: UI data fixed section version 08-923: UI data common section version 08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD 08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD 08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD 08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD 08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD 08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD 08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD 08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON 08-933: HDD unit data version 08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD 08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD 08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD 08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD 08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD 08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD
6-7
(c) Display during the update The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update.
Turn ON the power.
The device check starts.
When the device check completes, copying the data to HDD starts.
Copied
Total files
When copying all the files completes, the backup of the RIP font starts.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6-8 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
When the backup of the RIP font completes, the update completes with the following screen.
* If an error occurs, the following error message is displayed and the update is interrupted.
Error message
6-9
6.1.2 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB) The firmware of the equipment except the hard disk and the option can be updated individually or in a batch by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB). Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the system control PC board, logic PC board, scanning section control PC board, or NIC board. The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows. <Updating System ROM> System firmware (System firmware data, FROM internal program data) OS data (FROM basic section software) UI data (fixed section data, common section data, UI data in FROM displayed at power ON) <Updating Engine ROM> Engine ROM data <Updating Scanner ROM> Scanner ROM data <Updating NIC ROM> NIC ROM data
(a) Update procedure Important: Use the download jig PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 (16 MB). (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 (48 MB) is substitutable.) Turn OFF the power before installing and removing the download jig. Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly. (1) Write the ROM data to be updated to the download jig. > 6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
(2)
6 - 10
(3)
Take off the connector cover.

Connector cover
(4)
Cover plate
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN100) on the SYS board.
Connector
6 - 11
(6)
Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously. The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. * is displayed next to the items to be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
(7)
Select the item with the digital keys. * is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the * by pressing the number of the item. All items are selected in the default settings. Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch. Select items as follows to update it individually. <Updating System ROM> Select 1. OS Update, 2. UI Update, and 3. System Firmware. <Updating Engine ROM> Select 6. Machine Firmware Update only. <Updating Scanner ROM> Select 5. Scanner Firmware Update only. <Updating NIC ROM> Select 4. NIC Firmware Update only.
6 - 12
Example: Updating the system ROM (Updating the system ROM is taken as an example and explained.)
(8)
Press the [START] button. Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen.
6 - 13
(9)
Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the updating data written to the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly?
(10) Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector cover.
6 - 14
(b) Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly. <Updating System ROM> 08-900: System ROM version 08-920: FROM basic section software version 08-921: FROM internal program version 08-922: UI data fixed section version 08-923: UI data common section version 08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON <Updating Engine ROM> 08-903: Engine ROM version <Updating Scanner ROM> 08-905: Scanner ROM version <Updating NIC ROM> 08-916: NIC ROM version
6 - 15
(c) Display during the update The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update. (As an example, the display for updating the system ROM is explained below.) Turn ON the power while [8] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously.
Press [START] button after selecting the item to be updated. The device check starts.
When the device check completes, erasing the data in the ROM of the equipment starts.
When erasing the data completes, copying the data to the ROM of the equipment starts.
e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 - 16 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
When copying the data completes, verifying the data starts.
When verifying the data completes, copying and verifying the other data are implemented repeatedly.
When copying and verifying all the data complete, the update completes with the following screen.
6 - 17
Error message
6 - 18
6.1.3 Writing the data to the download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) The download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG) differs from the existing jigs in that the Flash ROM is mounted on the board of the jig directly. The ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350) is required to write data to these Flash ROMs. Connect the download jig with the ROM writer via ROM writer adapter to write data. For the procedure to write data, refer to the download procedure, instruction manual of each ROM writer, or others.
Download jig (PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG)
ROM writer adapter (PWA-DL-ADP-350)
PC
ROM writer
Note: There are two types of the ROM writer adapter. Use the proper one according to the ROM writer to be used. Applicable type of the adapter for the ROM writer can be confirmed by the model name indicated on the board. Confirm that the adapter is available for the ROM writer to be used before connecting them. If an unapplied adapter is connected, the application of the ROM writer judges it as an error and writing the data cannot be implemented. Applicable combinations of the ROM writer and adapter are as follows.
ROM writer Minato Electronics MODEL 1881XP (or equivalent) Minato Electronics MODEL 1893/1895/1931/1940 (or equivalent) ROM writer adapter PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881 (model 1881) PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931 (model 1931)
model 1881 model 1931 ( LV 6 5 0 )
model 1881 model 1931 ( LV 6 5 0 )
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1881]
[PWA-DL-ADP-350-1931]
6 - 19
6.1.4 K-PWA-DLM-320 The firmware of the equipment (engine ROM, scanner ROM) and the option (RADF ROM, Finisher ROM, FAX ROM) can be updated individually by using K-PWA-DLM-320. Update the ROM data written on each board according to the need such as the case of replacing the board. The data to be overwritten by this update are as follows. <Updating Engine ROM> Engine ROM data <Updating Scanner ROM> Scanner ROM data <Updating RADF ROM> RADF ROM data <Updating Finisher ROM> Finisher firmware Saddle stitcher firmware <Updating FAX ROM> FAX ROM data
6 - 20
(a) Update Procedure Since the procedure differs depending on the data, see the each procedure below. Important: Turn OFF the power before installing or removing the download jig. Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not be operated properly. <Updating Engine ROM> (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct ( Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Take off the connector cover. Page 6-3).
(2) (3)
Connector cover
(4)
Cover plate
6 - 21
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN344) on the logic PC board (LGC board).
Connector
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. When the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector cover.
(7)
(8)
6 - 22
<Updating Scanner ROM> (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct ( Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Take off the right upper cover.
Right upper cover
Page 6-3).
(2) (3)
(4)
Cover plate
6 - 23
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN16) on the scanning section control PC board (SLG board).
Connector
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 20 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the right upper cover.
(7)
(8)
6 - 24
<Updating RADF ROM> (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct ( (2) (3) Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Take off the RADF rear cover.
Page 6-3).
RADF rear cover
(4)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN14) on the RADF control PC board.
Connector
(5)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights.
6 - 25
(6)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 15 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the RADF rear cover.
(7)
6 - 26
<Updating Finisher ROM> Finisher firmware (MJ-1023/1024) and saddle stitcher firmware (MJ-1024 only) are written on the finisher ROM. These two kinds of firmware can be updated individually by installing the download jig to the finisher control PC board. Tip: The following updates are needed according to the finisher model. MJ-1023 (Console type): Only the update of Finisher firmware is needed. MJ-1024 (Console type with the saddle stitcher): Two kinds of update Finisher firmware and Saddle stitcher firmware are needed. (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct ( Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Take off the finisher rear cover.
Finisher rear cover Finisher rear cover
Page 6-3).
(2) (3)
[MJ-1023]
[MJ-1024]
* Connect the finisher interface cable with the equipment after removing the finisher rear cover. (4) Connect the download jig with the jig connector on the finisher control PC board.
Connector
6 - 27
(5)
Change the setting of the DIP switch on the finisher contorol PC board. Change the setting of the DIP switch as follows according to the firmware to be updated. Note: Record the current settings of the DIP switch before changing them. After the updating is completed, return the DIP switch to the status as record.
<Updating Finisher Firmware> Change all the setting of the DIP switch (1-8) to OFF. <Updating Saddle Stitcher Firmware> Change the setting of the DIP switch 1-6 to OFF and 7-8 to ON. (6) Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. Tip: The processing status can be confirmed by the lighting of the LED (LED 101-103) on the finisher control board.
Processing status 0% or above 15% or above 30% or above 45% or above 60% or above 75% or above 90% or above
LED103 OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
LED LED102 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON
LED101 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
6 - 28
(7)
After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks slowly (at interval of 0.8 sec). The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. (finisher section) or 2 min. 30 sec. (saddle stitcher section) since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed (finisher section) or 3 min. (saddle stitcher section), or LED flashes fast (at interval of 0.1 sec.). In this case, turn OFF the power and check the following items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Is the DIP switch on the finisher control PC board set properly according to the download section (finisher or saddle stitcher)? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and return the DIP switch to the status before updating. Install the finisher rear cover.
(8) (9)
6 - 29
<Updating FAX ROM> Important: Before updating the FAX ROM, make sure to print out the current Function list for maintenance, Function list (ADMIN), Phone book number information and Group number information. In case the updating is failed and the registered information of the users is lost for some reason, re-register the user information referring to the lists and recover it. Confirm the following items before turning OFF the power of the equipment. Turning OFF the power may clear the data below. Confirm that the MEMORY RX LED is OFF and there are no memory reception data. Print the Mailbox/Relay box report and then confirm that there are no F code data. Press the [JOB STATUS] button to display the screen and then confirm that there are no memory transmission data. (1) Install the ROM to the download jig. Make sure the direction is correct ( Turn OFF the power of the equipment. Take off the connector cover.
Connector cover
Page 6-3).
(2) (3)
6 - 30
(4)
Cover plate
(5)
Connect the download jig with the jig connector (CN602) on the FAX board.
Connector
(6)
Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously. Updating starts automatically and the LED on the download jig lights. After the update is completed properly, the LED on the download jig blinks. The LED starts blinking in approx. 30 sec. since the update starts. It is assumed that the update is failed if it does not start blinking even though 1 min. has passed. In this case, turn OFF the power and check the blinking items. Then, clear the problem and restart updating from the beginning. Is the download jig connected properly? Is the ROM installed to the download jig properly? Is the updating data written on the ROM of the download jig properly? Do the download jig and the equipment operate properly? Turn OFF the power, remove the download jig and install the cover plate and the connector cover.
(7)
(8)
6 - 31
(9)
In the FAX Clearing Mode, perform the FAX Set Up. a. Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08). 08-201: Destination setting of the equipment 08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine b. Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously. c. Key in 100. d. Press the [START] button. Note: If the equipment does not work properly after the operation (9), follow the procedure below and then perform the Clearing the image data in the FAX Clearing Mode to erase the image data in the memory. a. Confirm the destination setting is correct in the Setting Mode (08). 08-201: Destination setting of the equipment 08-701: Destination setting of the FAX machine b. Turn ON the power while [1] button and [*] button are pressed simultaneously. c. Key in 102. d. Press the [START] button.
6 - 32
(b) Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly. <Updating Engine ROM> 08-903: Engine ROM version <Updating Scanner ROM> 08-905: Scanner ROM version <Updating RADF ROM> 08-907: RADF ROM version <Updating Finisher ROM> 08-908: Finisher ROM version <Updating FAX ROM> 08-915: FAX ROM version
6 - 33
6.2 Firmware Updating with FSMS (Field Service Manager)

In this equipment, it is feasible to update the downloaded firmware from the PC connected with the equipment by using the utility software FSMS (Field Service Manager). Firmware can be also downloaded through USB, in addition to an existing serial transfer through RS-232C. This chapter explains only the firmware downloading method with FSMS. Refer to the Field Service Manager Operators Manual for the details about installation method and functions of FSMS.
OS: Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP
Connecting cable: USB cable or RS-232C cable
PC: IBM PC/AT or compatible machine (USB port or RS-232C port is needed)
Important: Updating with USB connection is more recommended since the data transfer speed is lower and it takes more time to update in the serial connection with RS-232C cable. Example: Updating time for system ROM (sysfirm.tz : Approx. 8 MB) RS-232C connection: Approx. 1 hour and 20 minutes USB connection: Approx. 10 minutes * The updating time noted above is a reference. It may vary depending on the performance of the PC used. Updating through USB is not feasible for Windows NT4.0 since this operating system does not support USB. When this system is used, update in the serial connection with RS-232C cable. When updating through USB (using FSMS), a printer driver needs to be installed in the PC in advance. Refer to the Printing Guide about the installation method of the printer driver.
The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System. The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System. The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System. The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System. Microsoft, Windows and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of US Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries. IBM PC/AT is a registered trademark of US International Business Machines Corporation. e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 - 34 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
The types of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.
Firmware Master data System ROM Engine ROM Scanner ROM NIC ROM Hard disk System control PC board (SYS board) Logic PC board (LGC board) Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) NIC board scnfirm.tz nicfirm.tz mfirm.tz sysfirm.tz, uidataF.tz, uidata0.tz, uidata1.tz Stored Data file name uidata2.tz, uidata3.tz, uidata4.tz, uidata5.tz, uidata6.tz, uidata7.tz, webdata1.tz, webdata2.tz, webdata3.tz, webdata4.tz, webdata5.tz, webdata6.tz, all.tz
6 - 35
(a) Update procedure Important: Do not operate the equipment or send a print job to the equipment during the update. This interferes the updating operation and the firmware may not be written properly. Do not turn OFF the power of equipment or PC during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be continued to function properly. When using FSMS, set 1 at FSMS permission code (08-258) in the Setting Mode (08) in advance. The data file (tz file format) of each firmware is recommended to save at the local drive in the PC (C drive, etc.) where FSMS program is installed. (1) Connect the equipment and PC with the cable.
USB connector (device)
USB cable
RS-232C connector
RS-232C cable
[USB connection]
[RS-232C connection]
* Connect the cable to the RS-232C connector in RS-232C connection after taking off the connector cover of the equipment. * Connect the PC end of the cable to the USB port or RS-232C port on the PC. (2) Turn ON the power of the equipment.
Tip: When updating with FSMS, updating can be performed in any of the normal mode, Adjustment Mode (05) and Setting Mode (08). To avoid an interruption during the update, using the Setting Mode (08) is recommended.
(3) (4)
Turn ON the power of the PC. Activate FSMS. Select TOSHIBA FSMS starting with the Start menu.
6 - 36
(5)
Enter the login password and click the [OK] button.
* Set the login password at the installation of FSMS. (6) Click the [F/W Download] button.
(7)
Select the model name of the equipment to be updated from the drop-down menu and click the [OK] button.
6 - 37
(8)
Click the [OFFLINE] button.
(9)
Select the transmit media and click the [OK] button.
In case of RS-232C connection: Select Serial In case of USB connection: Select USB * The connection status between the printer driver installed in the PC and the equipment to be connected is displayed only when USB is selected. Select the equipment to be updated and click the [Activate FSMS] button.
Tip: The content of Status display can be renewed to the latest status by clicking the [Refresh] button. When the status is displayed as Disconnected because the start up of the equipment is delayed, the status can be renewed to Connected by clicking this. e-STUDIO3511/4511 FIRMWARE UPDATING 6 - 38 November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
(10) Check the firmware to be updated and click the [OK] button.
Tip: The relation between the types of firmware to be updated and items to check is as follows in the table below. Item Program UI Data Common UI Data 1st Language UI Data MROM Scan ROM NIC ROM Generic Engine ROM Scanner ROM NIC ROM Master data System ROM Firmware sysfirm.tz uidataF.tz uidata0.tz uidata1.tz mfirm.tz scnfirm.tz nicfirm.tz uidata2.tz, uidata3.tz, uidata4.tz, uidata5.tz, uidata6.tz, uidata7.tz, webdata1.tz, webdata2.tz, webdata3.tz, webdata4.tz, webdata5.tz, webdata6.tz, all.tz Data file name to update
6 - 39
(11) Select the data file to be updated and click the [OK] button. There are two data filing methods: Selecting the multiple data files in a batch (select the folder where the files are saved) and selecting each data file individually. Selecting the multiple data files in a batch a. Select Download File Folder. b. Click the [Browse] button and select the folder where the files are saved.
Selecting each data file individually a. Select File Name Conversion. b. Click the [Browse] button of each data and select the file. When Generic Driver is used, check the checkbox of the file to be selected.
6 - 40
Tip: When selecting the multiple files in a batch, the name of the unselected data file (not saved in the folder) may be displayed. In this case, click the [OK] button and then the update of all files except the displayed file starts.
(12) The selected data is transmitted to the equipment. The data file name being transmitted and transmission condition are displayed at the bottom.
Tip: During transmission, the message WAIT or NOW SERVICING is displayed on the LCD screen of the equipment. In this case, all the button operations are locked.
(13) When the data transmission is completed, the following screen is displayed. Then click the [OK] button.
6 - 41
(14) The equipment restarts automatically and the items to be updated and processing status are displayed on the LCD screen.
Number of master data to be updated Items (Only the items to be updated are displayed.)
Processing status of each item Completed : Update completed ... ... ... ... ... : Updating
(15) Update Completed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
6 - 42
Update Failed!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning. Are the equipment and PC properly connected? Is the selected data file proper? Do the cable, equipment and PC operate properly? Are FSMS and printer driver properly installed?
(16) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.
6 - 43
(b) Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly. <Updating Master data> 08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD 08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD 08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD 08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD 08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD 08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD 08-933: HDD data unit version 08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD 08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD 08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD 08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD 08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD 08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD <Updating System ROM> 08-900: System ROM version 08-922: UI data fixed section version 08-923: UI data common section version 08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD 08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON <Updating Engine ROM > 08-903: Engine ROM version <Updating Scanner ROM> 08-905: Scanner ROM version <Updating NIC ROM> 08-916: NIC ROM version
6 - 44
6.3 Firmware Updating with USB Storage Device

In this equipment, it is feasible to update the firmware by connecting the USB storage device on which the firmware data is written to the USB connector mounted on the system control PC board and turning ON the power. The type of firmware to be updated can be selected on the LCD screen in this method. This allows to update only the necessary firmware individually or to update all firmware in a batch. The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below. Also, the data file of each firmware can be used commonly in the updating methods with USB storage device and Download jig.
Firmware Stored 1, 2, 3 ... n * The file name should be consecutive numbers from 1 Master data Hard disk to n without file extension. The capacity of each file is approx. 8 MB. However, the file capacity of n (last number) may be less than 8 MB. System ROM Engine ROM Scanner ROM NIC ROM System control PC board (SYS board) Logic PC board (LGC board) Scanning section control PC board (SLG board) NIC board ROM.bin sysfirm.bin, ROM.bin Data file name
6 - 45
Important: The following USB storage devices are recommended for updating. MELCO ClipDrive (RUF-C128M) Lexar Media JumpDrive (RD128-231) Iomega Mini USB Drive (Mini 128MB USB Drive) Only the USB storage device which meets the following conditions should be used for updating. Be careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed. A combination USB storage device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port) and its capacity is 64 MB or more A USB storage device which is complied with the following standards regulated by USB-IF (USB Implementers Forum) Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class) Sub-class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set) Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only) * Most common USB storage devices are complied with the specification above and can be used for updating. However, the operation in this equipment is not always guaranteed since the most of these devices are developed based on the use in PC environment (Windows or Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the device is operational in this equipment when purchasing the device. The USB storage device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. However, the update is performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0 is used. Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaranteed.
6 - 46
(a) Update procedure Important: The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Be careful since the devices formatted in FAT32 or NTFS format will not be operated. The file system can be confirmed on the properties in applications such as Explorer of Windows. Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not to be operated properly. (1) Connect the USB storage device to the PC and write the data file. Confirm the data file name before writing ( Page 6-44). The file system of USB storage device should be formatted in FAT format. Windows 95 and NT do not support USB. Be careful since the data can not be written on the devices in the PCs with these operating systems. Turn OFF the power of equipment. Take off the cover plate.
(2) (3)
Cover plate
(4)
Connect the USB storage device to the USB connector (host) on the SYS board.
USB storage device
USB connector (host)
6 - 47
(5)
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously. The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed after 3 minutes. * is displayed next to the items to be updated. (All items are selected in the default settings.)
Note: The display of items on this screen varies depending on the types of data written on the USB storage device. Each item is displayed only when each data file is written on the USB storage device in the following conditions.
Item 1. HDD Update 2. UI Data Update 3. System Firmware Update 4. NIC Firmware Update 5. Scanner Firmware Update 6. Machine Firmware Update Condition All master data files (1, 2, 3 ... n) are written. ROM.bin is written. sysfirm.bin and ROM.bin are written. ROM.bin is written. ROM.bin is written. ROM.bin is written.
If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed. In this case, turn OFF the power of the equipment and connect the device properly. Then repeat the procedure from (5).
6 - 48
(6)
Select the item with the digital keys. * is displayed next to the selected item. Display or delete the * by pressing the number of the item. All items are selected in the default settings. Select all items to update the firmware of the equipment in a batch. Select items as follows to update individually. <Updating Master data> Select 1. HDD Update only. <Updating System ROM> Select 2. UI Data Update and 3. System Firmware Update. <Updating Engine ROM> Select 6. Machine Firmware Update only. <Updating Scanner ROM> Select 5. Scanner Firmware Update only. <Updating NIC ROM> Select 4. NIC Firmware Update only. Example: Updating the master data and system ROM (Updating the master data and system ROM is taken as an example and explained.)
6 - 49
(7)
Press the [START] button. Updating starts and the processing status is displayed on the LCD screen. When the multiple items are selected, updating starts in order of item number.
(8)
Update Completed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen after the updating is completed properly.
Tip: Updating can be continued with another USB storage device on which the firmware data is written in the following procedure when the updating is completed. a. Confirm the message Please Connect Next Storage Key. Push START Button!! is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen. b. Replace the USB storage device while the power is left ON. c. Press the [START] button. d. The screen for selecting the items to be updated is displayed. Continue the updating from procedure (6). However, the items already updated are not displayed on the screen.
6 - 50
Update Failed. is displayed at the bottom of the LCD screen when the updating is not completed properly. Turn OFF the power, and then check the following items. After confirming and clearing the problems, restart updating from the beginning. Does the USB storage device meet the conditions to be used for updating ( Page 6-45)? Is the data file written properly on the USB storage device? Is the USB storage device installed properly? Do the USB storage device and equipment operate properly?
(9) Turn OFF the power, remove the USB storage device and install the connector cover.
6 - 51
(b) Confirmation of the updated data After the updating is completed, check each data version in the Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data was overwritten properly. <Updating Master data> 08-924: Version of UI data language 1 in HDD 08-925: Version of UI data language 2 in HDD 08-926: Version of UI data language 3 in HDD 08-927: Version of UI data language 4 in HDD 08-928: Version of UI data language 5 in HDD 08-929: Version of UI data language 6 in HDD 08-931: Version of UI data language 7 in HDD 08-933: HDD unit data version 08-934: Version of Web UI data language 1 in HDD 08-935: Version of Web UI data language 2 in HDD 08-936: Version of Web UI data language 3 in HDD 08-937: Version of Web UI data language 4 in HDD 08-938: Version of Web UI data language 5 in HDD 08-939: Version of Web UI data language 6 in HDD <Updating System ROM> 08-900: System ROM version 08-922: UI data fixed section version 08-923: UI data common section version 08-930: Version of UI data in FROM displayed at power ON <Updating Engine ROM> 08-903: Engine ROM version <Updating Scanner ROM> 08-905: Scanner ROM version <Updating NIC ROM> 08-916: NIC ROM version
6 - 52
(c) Display during the update The processing status is displayed as follows on the LCD screen during the update. (As an example, the display for updating the system ROM is explained below.)
Turn ON the power while [4] button and [9] button are pressed simultaneously. The initial screen is displayed and the recognition of the USB storage device connected to the equipment is started.
When the device is recognized properly after 3 minutes, the screen for selecting items is displayed.
Press the [START] button after selecting the item to be updated. The device check starts.
6 - 53
When the device check completes, copying the data to the HDD starts.
File name of master data Copied
Total files
When all files have been copied, the backup of RIP font starts.
When the backup of RIP font is completed, the following screen is displayed. Updating the master data is completed.
6 - 54
Updating the system ROM starts subsequently. The device check starts.
When the device check completes, copying the data to the ROM of the equipment starts.
When copying the data completes, copying the other data are implemented repeatedly.
6 - 55
When copying all the data complete, the update completes with the following screen.
* If the USB storage device is not recognized properly, the following message is displayed and the update is interrupted.
6 - 56
Error message
6 - 57
<Appendix> Assist Mode This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions. (1) NvRAM flag clearing (Clear NvRAM flags.) Even if the firmware downloading has been completed normally, the Recovery Mode may accidentally start up when the power is turned ON again. In this case, clear the NvRAM flags used in the download process with this function. (Normally, the flags are automatically cleared in the download process.) Also in the case the Recovery Mode accidentally starts up after the replacement of NvRAM on the SYS board, the flags are cleared with this function. (2) Data storage partition formatting (Format UID rom PRF PR2 SMS Partition.) When a defection occurs on the UI data, etc. which are stored in the HDD, the partition with the stored UI data, etc. is formatted with this function. (Do not use this function since it is not normally necessary.) (3) HDD partition creation (All Partition delete and create UID rom PRF PR2 SMS Partition.) When the HDD is replaced or UI data, etc. are downloaded using the FSMS or USB storage, it is necessary to format a partition in the HDD before downloading. In this case, the partition is created in the HDD with this function. Notes: 1. When downloading with a download jig, it is not necessary to format a partition in advance. 2. Perform the HDD partition formatting only when a new HDD is installed since all data in the current HDD are erased by this operation.
Operating Procedure of Assist Mode (1) Turn ON the power while [3] button and [CLEAR] button are pressed simultaneously. The following screen is displayed.
(2)
Select the item with the digital keys and press the [START] button.
6 - 58

7.1 Output Channel
The followings are four output channels which are not linked with the door switch. (1) +3.3V +3.3VA : CN464 Pins 13, 14, 15 and 16 Output to the SYS board +3.3VB : CN464 Pins 19 and 20 Output to the SYS board +3.3VB : CN466 Pin 3 Output to the LGC board +3.3VB : CN467 Pins 17 and 18 Output to the SLG board (2) +5.1V +5.1VA : CN464 Pins 24 and 26 Output to the SYS board +5.1VB : CN464 Pin 25 Output to the SYS board +5.1VB : CN466 Pin 1 Output to the LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board), PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) +5.1VB : CN467 Pins 5 and 6 Output to the RADF +5.1VB : CN467 Pins 21 and 22 Output to the SLG board +5.1VB : CN468 Pin 1 Output to the finisher +5.1VB : CN469 Pin 5 Output to the FIL board or FUS board (3) +12V +12VA : CN464 Pin 7 Output to the SYS board +12VB : CN464 Pin 5 Output to the SYS board +12VB : CN466 Pin 16 (*NAD/SAD/TWD models only) Output to the LGC board (4) -12V -12VA : CN464 Pin 9 Output to the SYS board -12VB : CN464 Pin 3 Output to the SYS board
7-1
The followings are two output channels which are linked with the door switch. (1) +5.1V +5.1VD : CN466 Pins 11 and 12 Output to the LGC board (2) +24V +24VD1 : CN465 Pins 1 and 2 Output to the LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) +24VD1 : CN469 Pins 1 and 2 Output to the PFP/LCF +24VD1 : CN470 Pin 1 Output to the power supply cooling fan +24VD2 : CN465 Pins 5 and 6 Output to the DRV board +24VD3 : CN467 Pins 1 and 2 Output to the RADF +24VD4 : CN467 Pin 9 Output to the SDV board +24VD4 : CN467 Pins 11 and 13 Output to the SLG board +24VD5 : CN468 Pin 3 Output to the finisher <<Output connector>> Not linked with the door switch CN464 For the SYS board CN466 For the LGC board, FAX board, CCL board (via LGC board), PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) CN467 For the SLG board, RADF CN468 For the finisher CN469 For the FIL board / FUS board Linked with the door switch CN465 For the LGC board, DRV board, CCL board (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) CN466 For the LGC board CN467 For the SLG board, SDV board, RADF CN468 For the finisher CN469 For the PFP/LCF CN470 For the power supply cooling fan
7-2
7.2 Fuse
When the power supply secondary fuse is blown out, confirm that there is no abnormally with each part using the following table. Voltage +24VD1 Part Fuse type Polygonal motor F3:8A (Semi time-lag) Tray-up motor ADU motor Main motor Developer motor Transport motor Drum cleaner brush motor Transfer belt cleaner auger motor Toner motor Laser unit cooling fan 2nd transfer roller drive clutch 2nd transfer roller contact clutch Bypass feed clutch Registration clutch Upper transport clutch (high speed) Upper transport clutch (low speed) Lower transport clutch (high speed) Lower transport clutch (low speed) Upper drawer feed clutch Lower drawer feed clutch ADU clutch Color developer toner supply clutch Color developer drive clutch Black developer drive clutch Black developer lifting clutch Transfer belt cleaner contact clutch Bypass pickup solenoid Image quality sensor shutter solenoid Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid Discharge LED Key copy counter / Copy key card CCL Carge cleaner motor Power supply Power supply cooling fan PFP/LCF Bridge unit DRV Revolver motor F4:5A (Semi time-lag) Exit motor IH control board cooling fan Ozone exhaust fan Internal cooling fan RADF F5:4A (Semi time-lag) SLG Exposure lamp (lamp inverter) F6:4A (Semi time-lag) CCD drive circuit (CCD board) SLG board cooling fan Scanner unit cooling fan SDV Scan motor Finisher F7:5A (Semi time-lag)
7-3 e-STUDIO3511/4511 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Board/Unit LGC
+24VD2
+24VD3 +24VD4
+24VD5
IH
F3
+24VD1 CN465 +24VD1 CN469 +24VD1 CN470

F4
LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) PFP/LCF Power supply cooling fan DRV board RADF SLG board, SDV board Finisher LGC board
*NAD/SAD/TWD models: Standard +24VD2 CN465 +24VD3 CN467 +24VD4 CN467 +24VD5 CN468 +5.1VD CN466 Reg.
F5 F6
Breaker Main switch

F1
Live
CN460
AC IN FIL board
F7
Door switch Noise filter
Noise filter AC DOOR
CN460

Switching power supply +3.3VA +3.3VB +3.3VB +3.3VB CN464 CN464 CN466 CN467 SYS board SYS board LGC board SLG board +5.1VA +5.1VB +5.1VB +5.1VB
F2 ICP1
7.3 Configuration of Power Supply Unit
Neutral
7-4
Noise filter Reg. AC MAIN
FUS board
*ASD/AUD/CND models: Standard *MJD model: Option
CN464 CN464 CN468 CN469
SYS board SYS board Finisher FIL board or FUS board
+5.1VB CN466
LGC board, CCL board (via LGC board), PFP/LCF (via LGC board), Bridge unit (via LGC board) +5.1VB CN467 +12VA -12VA +12VB +12VB -12VB CN464 CN464 CN464 CN466 CN464 SLG board, RADF SYS board SYS board SYS board LGC board SYS board
8. REMOTE SERVICE
There are following functions as Remote Service. (1) Auto Supply Order Automatically orders the toner and used toner container by FAX or E-mail. (2) Service Notification Notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail.
8.1 Auto Supply Order

8.1.1 Outline Automatically orders the toner and used toner container. (1) Placing an Order There are two ways to place an order. (1-1) FAX Installation of the FAX board is required. If the FAX board has not been installed, it is regarded as OFF setting. (1-2) Mail (E-mail body + TIFF image) (2) Order Intervals When the toner empty occurs, the number of occurrences is counted. And when it reaches the specified number for CONDITION, the order is placed automatically. With regard to the used toner container, it is done according to the number of the used toner container full detection. The number of the CONDITION can be set respectively for the toner and used toner container. (3) If Order Failure Occurs If some problems occur and the order cannot be placed after registering an order as a job, refer to the standard countermeasure for the FAX/E-mail transmission failure.
8-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 REMOTE SERVICE
8.1.2 Setting Item To enable Auto Supply Order, the following settings are required. (1) Self-diagnosis (08) Setting As the default setting, the Auto Supply Order setting screen is not displayed on the touch panel. To display it, switching the Valid/Invalid setting (08-765) is required. 0: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX) 1: Valid (FAX/Internet FAX/HTTP)* 2: Invalid (Default) When changing the setting value from "2" (default) to "0", the Auto Supply Order setting screen is displayed. (* HTTP has not been supported yet.) (2) Touch Panel Setting Each item is set from the Auto Supply Order screen on the touch panel. Entering the password and customer information is required because the setting is made from the ADMIN screen. Setting it with the administrator is a must. (2-1) Basic setting [ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [ORDER INFORMATION]
AUTO SUPPLY ORDER FAX NUMBER E-MAIL CUSTOMER NAME TEL NUMBER E-MAIL ADDRESS SUPPLIER NAME ADDRESS SERVICE TECNICIAN NUMBER NAME TEL NUMBER E-MAIL *1 HTTP has not been supported yet. *2 Even when "FAX" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the FAX number. *3 Even when "MAIL" is selected, the order is not placed without entering the E-mail address. Service technician information Supplier information Ordered by: [FAX], [MAIL], [HTTP] (*1) FAX number of supplier E-mail address of supplier Customer information (*2) (*3)
8-2
(2-2) Detailed setting for the order [ADMIN] > [SERVICE] > [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] > [TONER ORDERING]
***** TONER ORDER PART NUMBER CONDITIOIN QUANTITY AUTO ORDER Order information (TONER /USED TONER CONTAINER) Part number to be ordered The number of conditions The quantity to be ordered ON/OFF setting of order for each part (*1)
*1 The order is placed when the number of replacement reaches the number specified for the CONDITION.
(2-3) FAX number of this equipment (common information) [ADMIN] > [FAX] > [TERMINAL ID]
ID NAME FAX NUMBER ID name of this equipment FAX number of this equipment
(2-4) E-mail information of this equipment (common information) [ADMIN] > [E-MAIL]
FROM ADDRESS FROM NAME E-mail address of this equipment E-mail username of this equipment (*1)
*1 When sending an E-mail, validity of the address is checked. If the address is invalid, it is not sent. (3) Output of setting list of the Auto Supply Order Keying in the following buttons and keys prints the setting list. [USER FUNCTIONS] [USER] [LISTS] [*] [#] [*] [*] [3] [8] [START]
8-3
8.1.3 Setting procedure (1) (2) (3) (4) Start up the self-diagnosis setting mode 08-765, and then change the setting value to "0". Turn the power OFF, and then ON. Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button to enter the user function screen. Press the [ADMIN] button. - When the Admin Password has been set, ADMINISTRATOR PASSWORD screen is displayed.
(5)
Key in the Admin Password (6-digit), and then press the [ENTER] button. * Confirm the password to the administrator.
(6)
Press the [SERVICE] button in the ADMIN screen.
8-4
(7)
The SERVICE screen is displayed.
(8)
Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
(9)
Press the [ORDER INFORMATION] button.
(10) The ORDER INFORMATION screen is displayed.
8-5
(11) Press the buttons on the screen of ORDER INFORMATION to set the required item. [FAX]/[MAIL] /[OFF] -- Select the [FAX] or the [MAIL] button for the transmitting way of order. (HTTP has not been supported yet.) [OFF]: Turn off the AUTO SUPPLY ORDER function. [FAX NUMBER] ------- Input the FAX number of supplier. (To transmit by FAX, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the number.) [E-MAIL] ----------------- Input the E-mail address of supplier. (To transmit by E-mail, the order cannot be placed automatically if you do not input the address.) (12) Press the [NEXT] button. (Press the [ENTER] button to register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen. Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel this register, and then the screen returns to the (7) SERVICE screen.) (13) The CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER screen is displayed.
(14) Press the buttons of the screen of CUSTOMER/SUPPLIER to set the required item. CUSTOMER [NAME] ------------- Input the name of customer. [TEL NUMBER] --- Input the telephone number of customer. [E-MAIL] ------------ Input the E-mail address of customer. [ADDRESS] ------- Input the address of customer. SUPPLIER [NAME] ------------- Input the name of supplier. [ADDRESS] ------- Input the address of supplier.
8-6
(15) Press the [NEXT] button. (16) The SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING screen is displayed.
(17) Press a button on the screen of SERVICE TECHNICIAN/ RESULT PRINTING to set the required item. SERVICE TECHNICIAN [NUMBER] --------- Input the number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN. [NAME] ------------- Input the name of SERVICE TECHNICIAN. [TEL NUMBER] --- Input the telephone number of SERVICE TECHNICIAN. [E-MAIL] ------------ Input the E-mail address of SERVICE TECHNICIAN. [DESCRIPTION] - Input the remarks if you want to register. RESULT PRINTING [OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR] --- Whichever you press, the result list is printed. (These buttons have not been valid yet.) (18) Press the [ENTER] button to register and complete the order information setting.
8-7
(19) The SERVICE screen is returned.
7
(20) Press the [SUPPLY ORDER SETUP] button.
(21) Press the [TONER ORDERING] button. (22) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
(23) Press the [YELLOW(Y)] button. (Select the part to be ordered.)
8-8
(24) Input the order information of TONER. [PART NUMBER] -- Toner number [CONDITION] ------- The order is placed when the number of toner empty reaches the number specified for the CONDITION. [QUANTITY] --------- Quantity to be ordered AUTO ORDER [ON]/[OFF] --- Allows you to select whether each part to be ordered is placed automatically or not. (25) Press the [ENTER] button to register the setting of toner order. (26) The TONER ORDERING screen is displayed.
8-9
(27) Press the [MAGENTA(M)] / [CYAN(C)] / [BLACK(K)] / [USED TONER CONTAINER] button, and then input the order information in the same way.
(28) Press the [ENTER] button to register the order information. (29) The screen returns to the TONER ORDERING. (30) Press the [USER FUNCTION] button to be switched from the ADMIN screen on touch panel and returned to the BASIC screen, so that the setting of Auto Supply Order is finished. Note: Auto Supply Order setting is also available from the following setting mode (08). Items The transmitting way of order [FAX]/[MAIL] /[OFF] 08 code 732 Contents 0: Ordered by FAX 1: Ordered by E-mail 2: Ordered by HTTP 3: OFF Maximum 16 digits Maximum 192 letters Maximum 50 letters Maximum 32 digits Maximum 192 letters Maximum 100 letters Maximum 50 letters Maximum 100 letters
SUPPLIER [FAX NUMBER] SUPPLIER [E-MAIL] CUSTOMER [NAME] CUSTOMER [TEL NUMBER] CUSTOMER [E-MAIL] CUSTOMER [ADDRESS] SUPPLIER [NAME] SUPPLIER [ADDRESS]
733 734 738 739 740 741 746 747
8 - 10
Items SERVICE TECHNICIAN [NUMBER] SERVICE TECHNICIAN [NAME] SERVICE TECHNICIAN [TEL NUMBER] SERVICE TECHNICIAN [E-MAIL] Remarks [DESCRIPTION] RESULT PRINTING [OFF] / [ALWAYS] / [ON ERROR] YELLOW(Y) TONER [PART NUMBER] YELLOW(Y) TONER [CONDITION] YELLOW(Y) TONER [QUANTITY] MAGENTA(M) TONER [PART NUMBER] MAGENTA(M) TONER [CONDITION] MAGENTA(M) TONER [QUANTITY] CYAN(C) TONER [PART NUMBER] CYAN(C) TONER [CONDITION] CYAN(C) TONER [QUANTITY] BLACK(K) TONER [PART NUMBER] BLACK(K) TONER [CONDITION] BLACK(K) TONER [QUANTITY] USED TONER CONTAINER [PART NUMBER] USED TONER CONTAINER [CONDITION] USED TONER CONTAINER [QUANTITY]
08 code 742 743 744 745 748 764
Contents Maximum 5 digits Maximum 50 letters Maximum 32 digits Maximum 192 letters Maximum 128 letters 0: OFF 1: Always 2: ON Error Maximum 20 digits 1-99 1-99 Maximum 20 digits 1-99 1-99 Maximum 20 digits 1-99 1-99 Maximum 20 digits 1-99 1-99 Maximum 20 digits 1-99 1-99
755 757 756 752 754 753 749 751 750 758 760 759 761 763 762
8 - 11
8.1.4 Order Sheet Format The sample of order sheet is as follows. (1) FAX (This format is the same as that of TIFF image attached E-mail.) *1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
DATE & TIME CUSTOMER NUMBER CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS :99-99-'99 99:99 :XXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PART NUMBER TONER CARTRIDGE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW BLACK USED TONER CONTAINER : XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX QUANTITY 99 99 99 99 99
(*1)
DESCRIPTION AREA .............................................. ................................................................. DEVICE DESCRIPTION SERIAL NUMBER DEVICE FAX NUMBER DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS TOTAL 999999999 999999999 :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BLACK 999999999 999999999 TWIN COLOR 999999999 999999999 FULL COLOR 999999999 999999999
PRINT COUNTER SCAN COUNTER
(2)
E-MAIL (TIFF image attached with the E-mail is the same format with that of the FAX order sheet.) SUBJECT: SUPPLY ORDER REQUEST *1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
Date&Time: '03-09-12 00:17 Customer Number: S01 MachineName: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO4511 SerialNumber: 1234567890 Device FAX Number: Device Email: aaa@linux.nam1.local OrderInformation: YELLOW PartNumber: YELLOW-03 Quantity:17 CounterInformation: PrintCounter(Small) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 141 (*1) PrintCounter(Large) FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 0 ScanCounter FullColor: 0 TwinColor: 0 Black: 7
8 - 12
(3)
Result list
DATE & TIME CUSTOMER NUMBER CUSTOMER NAME CUSTOMER ADDRESS CUSTOMER TEL NUMBER CUSTOMER E-MAIL ADDRESS SERVICE TECHNICIAN TEL NUMBER SERVICE TECHNICIAN E-MAIL SUPPLIER NAME SUPPLIER ADDRESS
ORDER XXXXXXXXX :99-99-'99 99:99 :XXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX PART NUMBER QUANTITY 99 99 99 (*1) 99 99
TONER CARTRIDGE CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW BLACK USED TONER CONTAINER
: XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX : XXXXXXXXXXXX
DESCRIPTION AREA .............................................. ................................................................. DEVICE DESCRIPTION SERIAL NUMBER DEVICE FAX NUMBER DEVICE E-MAIL ADDRESS TOTAL 999999999 999999999 :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX BLACK 999999999 999999999 TWIN COLOR 999999999 999999999 FULL COLOR 999999999 999999999
PRINT COUNTER SCAN COUNTER
*1 Part not to be ordered is not output. (Less space between the lines)
8 - 13
8.2 Service Notification

8.2.1 Outline This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail. The following three are the items to be notified. Total Counter Transmit When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and time every month). Service Call Transmit When this function is effective, it notifies the corresponding error code and such at a service call error. PM Counter Transmit When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count has reached to its setting value, or the present PM driving count has reached to its setting value.
8.2.2 Setting 8.2.2.1 Preparation The screen to set this function is not displayed at the default setting. Set this screen to be displayed with the following code (08). 08-774 Setting of notification display 0: Invalid (Default) 1: Valid
8 - 14
8.2.2.2 Setting procedure 1) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button and select the [ADMIN] button. Then enter the password and press the [ENTER] button. Confirm the password to the administrator.
2)
Press the [SERVICE] button.
3)
Press the [SERVICE NOTIFICATION] button.
8 - 15
4)
Press the [ON] button in "SERVICE NOTIFICATION". When the [OFF] button is pressed, all functions related Service Notification become ineffective.
5)
Press the [E-MAIL] button and enter the E-mail address of the destination of this notification. (Maximum 3 addresses are set.) When pressing the [E-MAIL] button, the screen is switched to a full keyboard screen. Then enter the E-mail addresses and press the [ENTER] button.
8 - 16
6)
Press the [ON] button to notify or [OFF] button not to notify of each item. When the Total Count Transmit is set ON, the screen to set the notification date is displayed. Then set the notification date with the following procedure. (The information is notified on the set date and time every month.)
6-1) Key in the date (acceptable values: 1-31) in "Date" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the value by pressing the [CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value by pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the [SET] button is already pressed.) 6-2) Key in the time (acceptable values: 00:00-23:59) in "Time". Key in the time in the hour column of "Time", press the [SET] button, key in the time in the minute column of "Time" and press the [SET] button. (Correct the value by pressing the [CLEAR] button if the [SET] button is not yet pressed. Correct the value by pressing the [RESET] button to move the cursor back to the digit to be corrected if the [SET] button is already pressed.) 6-3) Press the [ENTER] button to set all. The display returns to the screen at procedure 5). 7) Press the [ENTER] button. The setting completes.
8 - 17
Note: Service Notification setting is also available from the following setting mode (08). Items Service Notification setting E-mail address 1 E-mail address 2 E-mail address 3 Total Counter Transmit setting Total counter transmission interval setting (days) Total counter transmission interval setting (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) Service Call Transmit setting PM Counter Transmit setting 08 code 767 768 777 778 769 770 776 Contents 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid) Maximum 192 letters Maximum 192 letters Maximum 192 letters 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid) 1 to 31 days 00:00-23:59
775 771
0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid) 0: OFF (Invalid) 1: ON (Valid)
8 - 18
8.2.3 Items to be notified The items of E-mail to be notified are shown below. 1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit Subject: Counter Notification (In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as "Periodical Maintenance Notification".)
1 4 Date:10/20/2003 13:47 Machine Model: e-STUDIO4511 SerialNumber: 1234567890 2 3 Total Counter: 300000 ChaargeCounterFormat LargeSizeChargeCount: 1 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition: 1 PMCounterFormat LargeSizePMCount: 1 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition: 0 6 7 Charge Counter: CounterType LargeSize SmallSize ColorCopy 00000000 00000000 ColorPrint 00000000 00000000 TwinColorCopy 00000000 00000000 MonoCopy 00000000 00000000 MonoPrint 00000000 00000000 MonoList 00000000 00000000 MonoFAX 00000000 00000000 ColorCopyScan 00000000 00000000 ColorNetScan 00000000 00000000 TwinColorCopyScan 00000000 00000000 MonoCopyScan 00000000 00000000 MonoFAXScan 00000000 00000000 MonoNetScan 00000000 00000000 MonoFAXTransmit 00000000 00000000 MonoFAXReceive 00000000 00000000 Periodical Maintenance Counter: CounterType SetPM CurrentPM SetPMTime CurrentPMTime Black 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24
25
26
27
1 2 3
4
Date Machine model name Serial number Total counter value Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter) Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter) Count setting of large-sized paper (PM) Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM) Number of output pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR) Number of output pages in the Printer Function (FULL COLOR) Number of output pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR)
5
6
7 8
9
10 11
8 - 19
12 13 14 15 16
17
Number of output pages in the Copier Function (BLACK) Number of output pages in the Printer Function (BLACK) Number of output pages at the List Print Mode (BLACK) Number of output pages in the FAX Function (BLACK) Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (FULL COLOR) Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (FULL COLOR) Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (TWIN COLOR) Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function (BLACK) Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (BLACK) Number of scanning pages in the Network Scanning Function (BLACK) Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (BLACK) Number of received pages in the FAX Function (BLACK) PM count setting value PM count present value PM driving count setting value PM driving count present value
18 19
20
21
22
23
24
25 26 27
2) 3)
Service Call Transmit Subject: Service Call Notification

1
Date: 10/20/2003 13:47 Machine Name: e-STUDIO4511 SerialNumber:1234567890 2 3 Function: Print Severity: Error Message: Printer Needs Attention: Call for service F110
4 5 6
1 2
Date Machine model name Serial number Function : Fixed at "Print" Severity : Fixed at "Error" Message : Fixed at "Printer Needs Attention : Call for service" The error code is displayed next to it.
3 4
5
8 - 20
J662 2 2 3 3 1 1
WIRELESS LAN AC ADAPTER

+5V
FG (OPTION)
AC(N:OUT) AC (GND) AC(L:OUT)
J655 AC(N:MAIN) 1 NF AC(L:MAIN) 2 4 AC(L) 3 AC(N)
J656
INLET (AC IN) NS-FILTER (NOISE FILTER)

F
N A GND B L C
MAIN GND
J653
LOAD
9.1 AC Wire Harness
BREAKER
J595 3 1 2 AC(L:MAIN) AC(L:MAIN) 4 F2 4 AC(N:MAIN) AC(N:MAIN) J460 1
MAIN-SW (MAIN-SWITCH)
J622 1 3 4 AC(L:DOOR) 6 2 AC(N:DOOR) 3 F1
NF
NF
9. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
J650
3 2 1
J650 3 3 2 2 1 1

PS-ACC AC-DC DC AC-DC DC
J469 1 2 3 4 5 6 +5.1VB SG
COV-INTLCK-SW
J647 AC-IN-YHM(N) AC-IN(L) AC-IN-YHM(N) AC-IN-YHM(N) 3 3 2 2 1 1
OPENING/CLOSING (COVER ) INTERLOCK SWITCH
J546 1 2 THERMO-FSR IH-COIL
FUSER
9-1
CN451 A CN450 B
SAD,TWD NAD,MODELS: STANDARD
CN453 CN452
J643 J642
PS-IH
CN454 J644 J644
PWA-F-FIL
ASD,AUD,CND MODELS: STANDARD MJD MODEL: OPTION
J433 J431 AC(N) 3 4 AC(L) 3 2 1
J493 AC(N) 4 3 2 AC(L) 1 J494 1 2 AC(N) 3
PWA-F-FUS
J433
J657 DRM-N DRM-L 2 1
THERMO-DRM-DH
ASD,AUD,SAD, TWD,CND MODELS: STANDARD DRM-DH NAD,MJD MODELS: OPTION SCANNER
AC(L)
3 2 1
RY
2 1
+5.1VB
J495 SG 3 2 1 SG +5.1VB
RY
J432 1 2 3 AC(N:SCN) AC(L:SCN)
THERMO-SCN-DH J61 J62
J64 1 1 2 2 DH-SCN-N 1 1 DH-SCN-L 2 2 J652 J60 1 1 2 2 J63
SCN-R-DH SCN-L-DH
J432 1 2 3
4 5 6
4 5 6
e-STUDIO3511/4511 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

+5.1VB SG
(DC LINE)
e-STUDIO3511/4511 WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
9-2
1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 SERVICE HANDBOOK 9. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 9.2 DC Wire Harness
J2 (TD+)FA1 1 (TD-)FA2 2 (RD+)FA3 3 FA45 4 FA45 5 (RD-)FA6 6 FA78 7 FA78 8 NC(MTG) 9 NC(MTG) 10 SH 11 SH 12 SH 13 SH 14
CN121 +3.3VA 1 +3.3VA 2 +3.3VA 3 NC(/CS2P) 4 D15 5 D14 6 D13 7 SG 8 D12 9 D11 10 D10 11 SG 12 D09 13 D08 14 /INTPR1 15 SG 16 A03 17 A02 18 A01 19 NC(SRXD) 20 A00 21 D07 22 D06 23 A15 24 D05 25 A14 26 D04 27 A13 28 D03 29 A12 30 D02 31 A11 32 D01 33 A10 34 D00 35 A09 36 A04 37 A08 38 /RESET 39 A07 40 /ACK 41 A06 42 /CSP1 43 A05 44 NC(OEP) 45 NC(STXD) 46 RW 47 SG 48 A16 49 SG 50 +3.3VA 51 SG 52 NC(DACK) 53 +3.3VA 54 /INTPR2 55 SG 56 BRDIN 57 +3.3VA 58 +3.3VA 59 +3.3VA 60
e-STUDIO3511/4511 9. A 9.2 DC
(OPTION)
J151 J152 TRST# A1 +12VA A2 TMS A3 TD1 A4 +5.1VA A5 INTA# A6 INTC# A7 +5.1VA A8 RESERVED A9 +3.3VA A10 RESERVED A11 A12 A13 +3.3VAUX A14 RST# A15 +3.3VA A16 GNT# A17 SG A18 RME# A19 AD[30] A20 +3.3VA A21 AD[28] A22 AD[26] A23 SG A24 AD[24] A25 IDSEL A26 +3.3VA A27 AD[22] A28 AD[20] A29 SG A30 AD[18] A31 AD[16] A32 +3.3VA A33 FRAME# A34 SG A35 TRDY# A36 SG A37 STOP# A38 +3.3VA A39 RESRVED A40 RESRVED A41 SG A42 PAR A43 AD[15] A44 +3.3VA A45 AD[13] A46 AD[11] A47 SG A48 AD[09] A49 SG A50 SG A51 C/BE(0)# A52 +3.3VA A53 AD[06] A54 AD[04] A55 SG A56 AD[02] A57 AD[00] A58 +3.3VA A59 REQ64# A60 +5.1VA A61 +5.1VA A62 -12VA B1 TCK B2 SG B3 TD0 B4 +5.1VA B5 +5.1VA B6 INTB# B7 INTD# B8 PRSNT1# B9 RESERVED B10 PRSNT2# B11 B12 B13 RESERVED B14 SG B15 CLK B16 SG B17 REQ# B18 +3.3VA B19 AD[31] B20 AD[29] B21 SG B22 AD[27] B23 AD[25] B24 +3.3VA B25 C/BE(3)# B26 AD[23] B27 SG B28 AD[21] B29 AD[19] B30 +3.3VA B31 AD[17] B32 C/BE(2)# B33 SG B34 IRDY# B35 +3.3VA B36 DEVSEL# B37 SG B38 LOCK# B39 PERR# B40 +3.3VA B41 SERR# B42 +3.3VA B43 C/BE(1)# B44 AD[14] B45 SG B46 AD[12] B47 AD[10] B48 M66EN B49 SG B50 SG B51 AD[08] B52 AD[07] B53 +3.3VA B54 AD[05] B55 AD[03] B56 SG B57 AD[01] B58 +3.3VA B59 ACK64# B60 +5.1VA B61 +5.1VA B62
PWA-F-NIC
J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 CN355
CN347 +5.1VB 13 SG 12 MAMON 11 MAMCLK 10 MAMCW 9 MAMPL 8 MAMGA 7 PG 6 PG 5 +24VD1 4 +24VD1 3 MAMBL 2 NC 1 CN348 NC B12 +24VD1 B11 +24VD1 B10 PG B9 PG B8 NC B7 DVMPL B6 DVMCW B5 DVMCLK B4 DEVMON B3 SG B2 +5.1VB B1
PWA-F-LGC
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
J581 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 J578 NC 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J582 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 +5.1VB SG FDMON FDMCK FDMCW FDMPL FDMGA PG PG +24VD1 +24VD1 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Board to Board
PWA-F-SYS
CN150 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 CN124 +3.3VA 1 +3.3VA 2 +3.3VA 3 SG 4 -12VA 5 -12VA 6 +5.1VA 7 +5.1VA 8 +3.3VA 9 OPBINT(2) 10 OPBINT(0) 11 SG 12 PCICLK(5) 13 SG 14 PCICLK(3) 15 SG 16 REQ(1)# 17 REQ(0)# 18 +3.3VA 19 AD[31] 20 AD[29] 21 SG 22 AD[27] 23 AD[25] 24 +3.3VA 25 C/BE(3)# 26 AD[23] 27 SG 28 AD[21] 29 AD[19] 30 +3.3VA 31 AD[17] 32 C/BE(2)# 33 SG 34 IRDY# 35 +3.3VA 36 DEVSEL# 37 SG 38 LOCK# 39 PERR# 40 +3.3VA 41 SERR# 42 +3.3VA 43 C/BE(1)# 44 AD[14] 45 SG 46 AD[12] 47 AD[10] 48 M66EN 49 SG 50 AD[8] 51 AD[7] 52 +3.3VA 53 AD[5] 54 AD[3] 55 SG 56 AD[1] 57 +3.3VA 58 +5.1VA 59 SG 60 +3.3VA 61 +3.3VA 62 +3.3VA 63 SG 64 +12VA 65 +12VA 66 +5.1VA 67 +5.1VA 68 +3.3VA 69 OPBINT(1) 70 +3.3VA 71 PCIRST# 72 +3.3VA 73 PCICLK(4) 74 +3.3VA 75 GNT(1)# 76 GNT(0)# 77 SG 78 PME# 79 AD[30] 80 +3.3VA 81 AD[28] 82 AD[26] 83 SG 84 AD[24] 85 +3.3VA 86 +3.3VA 87 AD[22] 88 AD[20] 89 SG 90 AD[18] 91 AD[16] 92 +3.3VA 93 FRAME# 94 SG 95 TRDY# 96 SG 97 STOP# 98 +3.3VA 99 +3.3VA 100 SG 101 SG 102 PAR 103 AD[15] 104 +3.3VA 105 AD[13] 106 AD[11] 107 SG 108 AD[9] 109 SG 110 C/BE(0)# 111 +3.3VA 112 AD[6] 113 AD[4] 114 SG 115 AD[2] 116 AD[0] 117 +3.3VA 118 +5.1VA 119 +5.1VA 120 CN115 CN116 SG 1 DQ0 2 DQ1 3 DQ2 4 DQ3 5 +3.3VA 6 DQ4 7 DQ5 8 DQ6 9 DQ7 10 DQ8 11 SG 12 DQ9 13 DQ10 14 DQ11 15 DQ12 16 DQ13 17 +3.3VA 18 DQ14 19 DQ15 20 NC 21 NC 22 SG 23 NC 24 NC 25 +3.3VA 26 /WE 27 DQMB0 28 DQMB1 29 /CS0 30 NC 31 SG 32 A0 33 A2 34 A4 35 A6 36 A8 37 A10 38 BA1 39 +3.3VA 40 +3.3VA 41 CLK0 42 SG 43 NC 44 /CS2 45 DQMB2 46 DQMB3 47 NC 48 +3.3VA 49 NC 50 NC 51 NC 52 NC 53 SG 54 DQ16 55 DQ17 56 DQ18 57 DQ19 58 +3.3VA 59 DQ20 60 NC 61 NC 62 CKE1 63 SG 64 DQ21 65 DQ22 66 DQ23 67 SG 68 DQ24 69 DQ25 70 DQ26 71 DQ27 72 +3.3VA 73 DQ28 74 DQ29 75 DQ30 76 DQ31 77 SG 78 CLK2 79 NC 80 NC(WP) 81 SDA 82 SCL 83 +3.3VA 84 SG 85 DQ32 86 DQ33 87 DQ34 88 DQ35 89 +3.3VA 90 DQ36 91 DQ37 92 DQ38 93 DQ39 94 DQ40 95 SG 96 DQ41 97 DQ42 98 DQ43 99 DQ44 100 DQ45 101 +3.3VA 102 DQ46 103 DQ47 104 NC 105 NC 106 SG 107 NC 108 NC 109 +3.3VA 110 /CAS 111 DQMB4 112 DQMB5 113 /CS1 114 /RAS 115 SG 116 A1 117 A3 118 A5 119 A7 120 A9 121 A11 122 BA0 123 +3.3VA 124 CLK1 125 A12 126 SG 127 CKE 128 /CS3 129 DQMB6 130 DQMB7 131 A13 132 +3.3VA 133 NC 134 NC 135 NC 136 NC 137 SG 138 DQ48 139 DQ49 140 DQ50 141 DQ51 142 +3.3VA 143 DQ52 144 NC 145 NC 146 NC 147 SG 148 DQ53 149 DQ54 150 DQ55 151 SG 152 DQ56 153 DQ57 154 DQ58 155 DQ59 156 +3.3VA 157 DQ60 158 DQ61 159 DQ62 160 DQ63 161 SG 162 CLK3 163 NC 164 SA0 165 SA1 166 SA2 167 +3.3VA 168
Board to Board
CN100 DATA0 1 DATA2 2 DATA4 3 DATA6 4 DATA8 5 DATA10 6 DATA12 7 DATA14 8 A21 9 A19 10 A17 11 A15 12 A13 13 A11 14 A09 15 A07 16 A05 17 A03 18 RDX 19 CS7-A 20 CS7-B 21 +3.3VA 22 +3.3VA 23 SG 24 SG 25 DATA1 26 DATA3 27 DATA5 28 DATA7 29 DATA9 30 DATA11 31 DATA13 32 DATA15 33 A20 34 A18 35 A16 36 A14 37 A12 38 A10 39 A08 40 A06 41 A04 42 A02 43 DWNLED 44 /CS0 45 +3.3VA 46 RMSL 47 /WRX 48 SG 49 SG 50
LAN(10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
DOWNLOARD JIG(FAX)
CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A
PCI SLOT(1) PCI SLOT(0)
F
LCD BACK LIGHT
J423 CCFL+ 1 2 CCFL3 J422 YD 1 XL 2 XR 3 YU 4 J424 FRAWE 1 LOAD 2 CP 3 SG 4 +5.1VA 5 SG 6 VEE 7 D.OFF 8 D0 9 D1 10 D2 11 D3 12 J427 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
J526 J527 J523 XSCL-1A LP-1A WE-1A YP-1A SG BZON-0A CPPOW-0A LDCLKA LDDAT-0A LDLTH-0A LDON1-0A LDON0-0A SG +5.1VA +5.1VA +5.1VA +5.1VA RSTCP-0A SG RTS1-0A CTS1-0A SOUT0-1A SIN0-1A SG UD3-1A UD2-1A UD1-1A UD0-1A SG LCDEN-1A A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
G
J429 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
CN11 DFAK-0A 1 1 DFSCST-0A 2 2 DFRXD-0A 3 3 SG 4 4 DFTXD-0A 5 5 SG 6 6 DFRAK-0A 7 7 DFRRQ-0A 8 8 DFRQ-0A 9 9 DFCNT-0A 10 10
J50 SG 3 CN13 PLTN-1A 1 2 +5.1VB 2 1 J49 3 SG 3 4 HOME-1A 5 2 +5.1VB 1 6
USB DEVICE
CN30
J426 SCN15 1 SCN14 2 SCN13 3 SCN12 4 SCN11 5 RET0 6 RET1 7 RET2 8 RET3 9 RET8 10 RET9 11 J425 LDFC-1 1 LDFC-2 2 LDFC-4 3 LDFC-5 4 LDFC-6 5 LDFC-7 6 LDFC-8 7 LDFC-9 8 LDFC-10 9 LDFC-11 10 LDFC-12 11 LDFC-13 12 LDFC-15 13 LDON0 14 LDON1 15 SG 16
CN118 XSCL-1A 1 LP-1A 2 WF-1A 3 YD-1A 4 INVGND 5 BZON-0A 6 CPPOW-1A 7 LDCLK-1A 8 LDDAT-1A 9 LDLTH-1A 10 LDON1-0A 11 LDON0-0A 12 SG 13 +5.1VA 14 +5.1VA 15 +5.1VA 16 +5.1VA 17 CPRST-0A 18 SG 19 RTS0-0A 20 CTS0-0A 21 SOUT[0] 22 SIN[0] 23 SG 24 UD3-1A 25 UD2-1A 26 UD1-1A 27 UD0-1A 28 SG 29 LCDEN-1A 30
LCD PANEL
CN109 TXD 1 RXD 2 RTS 3 DSR 4 DTR 5 CTS 6 CNT 7 SG 8
CN172 3 2 7 6 4 8 1 5 NC 9
PWA-F-DSP
RS-232C (D-sub 9pin)
CN21 PG 1 PG 2 LMPON-0A 3 +24VD4 4 FG 5
CN1 1 2 3 4 5
INV-EXP
MAD[5] MAD[7] MAD[9] MAD[11] MAD[13] MAD[15] MAD[17] ROMDT-0 +5.1VB LED-0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
SG SG +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SG +3.3VB +3.3VB PG +24VD4 PG +24VD4
PS-ACC
CN108 STB 1 DATA0 2 DATA1 3 DATA2 4 DATA3 5 DATA4 6 DATA5 7 DATA6 8 DATA7 9 NACK 10 BUSY 11 PERROR 12 SELECT 13 NATFD 14 NC 15 SG 16 FG 17 LOGIC 18 SG 19 SG 20 SG 21 SG 22 SG 23 SG 24 SG 25 SG 26 SG 27 SG 28 SG 29 SG 30 NINIT 31 NFAULT 32 NC 33 NC 34 NC 35 NSELIN 36
PWA-F-KEY
CN2 CN32 J42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
J428 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CN119 VBUS 1 D2 D+ 3 SG 4 CN110 VBUS 1 D2 D+ 3 SG 4 SG 5
USB HOST (INTERNAL)
CN31
CN32 +24VD4 2 PG 1
CN125 SG 1 DQ0 2 DQ1 3 DQ2 4 DQ3 5 +3.3VA 6 DQ4 7 DQ5 8 DQ6 9 DQ7 10 DQ8 11 SG 12 DQ9 13 DQ10 14 DQ11 15 DQ12 16 DQ13 17 +3.3VA 18 DQ14 19 DQ15 20 NC 21 NC 22 SG 23 NC 24 NC 25 +3.3VA 26 /WE 27 DQMB0 28 DQMB1 29 /CS0 30 NC 31 SG 32 A0 33 A2 34 A4 35 A6 36 A8 37 A10 38 BA1 39 +3.3VA 40 +3.3VA 41 CLK0 42 SG 43 NC 44 /CS2 45 DQMB2 46 DQMB3 47 NC 48 +3.3VA 49 NC 50 NC 51 NC 52 NC 53 SG 54 DQ16 55 DQ17 56 DQ18 57 DQ19 58 +3.3VA 59 DQ20 60 NC 61 NC 62 CKE1 63 SG 64 DQ21 65 DQ22 66 DQ23 67 SG 68 DQ24 69 DQ25 70 DQ26 71 DQ27 72 +3.3VA 73 DQ28 74 DQ29 75 DQ30 76 DQ31 77 SG 78 CLK2 79 NC 80 NC(WP) 81 SDA 82 SCL 83 +3.3VA 84 SG 85 DQ32 86 DQ33 87 DQ34 88 DQ35 89 +3.3VA 90 DQ36 91 DQ37 92 DQ38 93 DQ39 94 DQ40 95 SG 96 DQ41 97 DQ42 98 DQ43 99 DQ44 100 DQ45 101 +3.3VA 102 DQ46 103 DQ47 104 NC 105 NC 106 SG 107 NC 108 NC 109 +3.3VA 110 /CAS 111 DQMB4 112 DQMB5 113 /CS1 114 /RAS 115 SG 116 A1 117 A3 118 A5 119 A7 120 A9 121 A11 122 BA0 123 +3.3VA 124 CLK1 125 A12 126 SG 127 CKE 128 /CS3 129 DQMB6 130 DQMB7 131 A13 132 +3.3VA 133 NC 134 NC 135 NC 136 NC 137 SG 138 DQ48 139 DQ49 140 DQ50 141 DQ51 142 +3.3VA 143 DQ52 144 NC 145 NC 146 NC 147 SG 148 DQ53 149 DQ54 150 DQ55 151 SG 152 DQ56 153 DQ57 154 DQ58 155 DQ59 156 +3.3VA 157 DQ60 158 DQ61 159 DQ62 160 DQ63 161 SG 162 CLK3 163 NC 164 SA0 165 SA1 166 SA2 167 +3.3VA 168
J2 RXD 1 SG 2 TXD 3 SG 4 5 6 NC 7 8 F-CNT 9 CNT-GND 10
DOWNLOAD JIG(SYS) FAX(OPTION)

CN401 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 CN600 TXOUT2 1 +5VA 2 +12VB 3 +3.3VB 4 MOD2DMA-1 5 SG 6 MEM2CS-0 7 +5.1VB 8 MEMRD2-0 9 CLKOE-1 10 TXEN2-1 11 +5.1VB 12 A[16] 13 A[14] 14 A[12] 15 A[10] 16 A[8] 17 A[6] 18 A[4] 19 A[2] 20 A[0] 21 +5.1VB 22 CEP1RST-0 23 +5.1VB 24 SG 25 CEPCLK 26 SG 27 D[0] 28 D[2] 29 D[4] 30 D[6] 31 D[8] 32 D[10] 33 D[12] 34 D[14] 35 SG 36 MOD2DET-0 37 SG 38 DREQC2-1 39 DACKC2-0 40 RXIN2 41 AG 42 -12VB 43 AG 44 MD2INT-1 45 MOD2CS-0 46 MOD2RST-0 47 SG 48 RXEN2-1 49 MEMWRH2-0 50 MEMWRL2-0 51 A[18] 52 A[17] 53 A[15] 54 A[13] 55 A[11] 56 A[9] 57 A[7] 58 A[5] 59 A[3] 60 A[1] 61 CPURST-0 62 CEP2INT-1 63 +5.1VB 64 +5.1VB 65 IORD2-0 66 IOWR2-0 67 D[1] 68 D[3] 69 D[5] 70 D[7] 71 D[9] 72 D[11] 73 D[13] 74 D[15] 75 +5.1VB 76 +5.1VB 77 CEP2CS-0 78 DREQD2-1 79 DACKD2-0 80 CN702 +24VB 3 1 PG 2 2 NC 1 3 CN602 D[0] 1 D[2] 2 D[4] 3 D[6] 4 RD-0 5 A[0] 6 A[2] 7 A[4] 8 A[6] 9 A[8] 10 A[10] 11 A[12] 12 A[14] 13 A[16] 14 A[18] 15 SG 16 SG 17 D[1] 18 D[3] 19 D[5] 20 D[7] 21 BOOTCS-0 22 A[1] 23 A[3] 24 A[5] 25 A[7] 26 A[9] 27 A[11] 28 A[13] 29 A[15] 30 A[17] 31 ROMDET0-0 32 +5.1VB 33 LEDDL-0 34 CN701 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 NC 50
CN113 +12VA 1 SG 2 SG 3 +5.1VA 4 CN112 /RESET 1 SG 2 DD7 3 DD8 4 DD6 5 DD9 6 DD5 7 DD10 8 DD4 9 DD11 10 DD3 11 DD12 12 DD2 13 DD13 14 DD1 15 DD14 16 DD0 17 DD15 18 SG 19 NC(KEY) 20 MDARQ 21 SG 22 /DIOW 23 SG 24 /DIOR 25 SG 26 IORDY 27 SG 28 /DMACK 29 SG 30 INTRQ 31 RESERVED 32 DA1 33 /PDIAG 34 DA0 35 DA2 36 /CS0 37 /CS1 38 /DASP 39 SG 40
CN171 1 2 3 4 CN170 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CN344 D[0] 1 D[2] 2 D[4] 3 D[6] 4 RD-0 5 A[0] 6 A[2] 7 A[4] 8 A[6] 9 A[8] 10 A[10] 11 A[12] 12 A[14] 13 A[16] 14 A[18] 15 SG 16 SG 17 D[1] 18 D[3] 19 D[5] 20 D[7] 21 CS2-0 22 A[1] 23 A[3] 24 A[5] 25 A[7] 26 A[9] 27 A[11] 28 A[13] 29 A[15] 30 A[17] 31 ROMDT-0 32 +5.1VB 33 ROMLD-1 34
COINCONTROLLER
COPY KEY CARD (OPTION)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
J1
MAINMOT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CN354 +24VD1 PG +5.1VB SG ENVT2 ENVT1 ENVCH ENSNR2 ENSNR1 +5VSW
CN491 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BKCTR MNCTR FLCTR SG SIZE3 SIZE2 SIZE1 SIZE0 +5.1VB CTRCNT2
+24VD1 CTRON CTRCNT MCRUM EXTCTR PG
SG +5.1VB AD0 AD2 AD4 AD6 I/F0 I/F2 I/F4 I/F6 SG WE CSIP2 +5.1VB IPCSW SG +5.1VB AD1 AD3 AD5 AD7 I/F01 I/F03 I/F05 I/F07 SG OE IPRST +5.1VB SG
PWAF-CCL
CN492 CCW 1 CW 2 SG 3 SW1 4 SG 5 SW2 6
J664 6 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1 6
CN349
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
IPC
CCL-FPOS-SW J583 1 KEY-COPY 2 COUNTER 3 4 KTCR0 +24VD1 KTCRC SG J648 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4 CN356 KTCR0 A9 +24VD1 A8 KTCRC A7 SG A6 C-CK A5 C-K(SG) A4 NC A3 NC A2 SG A1 VLED B9 DVCTNR B8 AG B7 DVTNALD B6 +5.1VB B5 SLDVTNA B4 +24VD1 B3 SLDVTNB B2 CKSLS B1 J668 1 2 J667 1 2 J666 3 1 2 2 1 3
CCL-RPOS-SW
SPEAKER
+ -
CN503 1 2
SW2 SG SW1 SG CW CCW
J665 6 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1 6
DEVMOT
(OPTION)
J598 RXD 1 SG 2 TXD 3 SG 4 FG 5 F-CNT 6 CNT-GND 7 +5.1VB 8 SG 9 NC 10 +24VD5 11 PG 12 FG
(OPTION)
J512 SG/CPSW2 10 1 NC 9 2 J579 DVCTNR 4 8 3 AG 3 7 4 COLRATTNR-SNR 2 DVTNALD 6 5 +5.1VB 5 6 1 4 7 J580 SLDVTNA 3 3 8 ATTNR+24VD1 2 9 SHUT-SOL 2 SLDVTNB 1 1 10
M
CN352 +24VD1 PG POMCK POMON POMPL
CCL-MOT
2 1
DOWNLOAD JIG(LGC)
FINISHER
5 4 3 2 1
J204 1 2 3 4 5
M/DCPOL
NCU (1)
MDM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
CN501 TXOUT 1 RXIN 2 CML 3 LD 4 EXTRG 5 ATT3DB 6 RLADJ1 7 RLADJ2 8 RGCLK 9 AG 10 -12VB 11 AG 12 +12VB 13 +24VB 14 16Hz 15 AG 16 CI 17 ANSDET 18 REVA 19 REVB 20 INTHOOK 21 FXTHOOK 22 +5.1VA 23 AG 24 +5VA 25 -12VB 26 AG 27 +12VB 28 +24VB 29 PG 30
(STANADARD)
HDD
TRSPMOT
SCRAMBLER BOARD
NCU (2)
Board to Board Board to Board
DIMM(1)
PM DIMM
DIMM(0)
CN502 TXB 1 1 RXIN 2 2 CML 3 3 LD 4 4 ER/HK 5 5 ATT3DB 6 6 RLADJ1 7 7 RLADJ2 8 8 RGCLK 9 9 AG 10 10 -12VB 11 11 AG 12 12 +12VB 13 13 NC 14 14 16Hz 15 15 AG 16 16 CI 17 17 ANSDET 18 18 REVA 19 19 REVB 20 20 NC 21 21 NC 22 22 +5.1VA 23 23 AG 24 24 +5VA 25 25 -12VB 26 26 AG 27 27 +12VB 28 28 NC 29 29 NC 30 30
FAX
(OPTION)
COIN CONTROLLER/ COPY KEY CARD
CN126 L/S 1 FULL-C 2 MONO-C 3 B/W 4 +5.1VA 5 SG 6 NC 7
CN120 VBUS 1 D2 D+ 3 SG 4 VBUS 5 D6 D+ 7 SG 8
USB HOST
6 5 4 3 2 1
80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
APS-R
J54 1 2 2 1
J48 1 2 2 1
APS-C
J55 1 2 2 1
J53 1 1 2 2
J46 3 2 1 J45 3 2 1 J44 3 2 1 J43 3 2 1 CN16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
+5VAPS APSC-0A SG +5VAPS APS3-0A SG +5VAPS APS2-0A SG
CN18 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 CN10
APS3
APS2
A4 SERIES ONLY
APS1
+5VAPS APS1-0A SG
B7 B8 B9 CN16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
PC I/F(IEEE1284)
PWA-F-SLG
MDT[0] MDT[2] MDT[4] MDT[6] MRD-0A (PNCNT)DLAD(0) (SSW)DLAD(2) MAD[4] MAD[6] MAD[8] MAD[10] MAD[12] MAD[14] MAD[16] MAD[18] SG SG MDT[1] MDT[3] MDT[5] MDT[7] CSO2-0 (PNGT)DLAD(1) (MWR)DLAD(3)
DOWNLOARD JIG(SLG)
PWA-F-DRV
LP-EXPO
CN102 SCN-3V B20 SCNOUT-1 B19 SCNIN-1 B18 MMPI0-1 B17 SCNCTS-0 B16 SCNRTS-0 B15 SRST-0 B14 SYSCNT-0 B13 RESERVED B12 VSYN-1 B11 HSYN-0 B10 SG B9 MCKI-1 B8 RX0-0 B7 SG B6 RX1-1 B5 RX2-0 B4 SG B3 CLK-1 B2 RX3-0 B1 CCODE(0) A20 SG A19 SG A18 SG A17 SG A16 SG A15 CCODE(1) A14 SCNT-1 A13 VSYN-0 A12 SG A11 HSYN-1 A10 MCKI-0 A9 SG A8 RX0-1 A7 RX1-0 A6 SG A5 RX2-1 A4 CLK-0 A3 SG A2 RX3-1 A1
PFP/LCF
SCANFAN-MOT
SLGFAN-MOT
LSUFAN-MOT
J589 FAN1 2 +24VD1 1
A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13
J519 SG 3 CST-UCUTOP-1 2 TRY-SNR +5.1VB 1 J620 +5.1VB 1 CUFLS-0 2 SG 3
1 2
1 2
CN122 PWRDN 26 PWREN 25 SG 24 -12VB 23 SG 22 +12VB 21 SG 20 +12VA 19 SG 18 -12VA 17 SG 16 SG 15 +3.3VA 14 +3.3VA 13 +3.3VA 12 +3.3VA 11 SG 10 SG 9 +3.3VB 8 +3.3VB 7 SG 6 SG 5 +5.1VA 4 SG 3 +5.1VA 2 +5.1VB 1 J40 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
CN464 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 CN467 SG 24 SG 23 +5.1VB 22 +5.1VB 21 SG 20 SG 19 +3.3VB 18 +3.3VB 17 NC 16 NC 15 PG 14 +24VD4 13 PG 12 +24VD4 11
NC
J649 PG 4 PG 3 24VD1 2 24VD1 1
TRBLTCLN-CLT
J529 CLBUCP 2 +24VD1 1 J513 SG 3 RVLHP 2 +5.1VB 1 J645 1 3 2 2 3 1
PWA-F-CCD
CN466 +5.1VB 1 SG 2 +3.3VB 3 SG 4 PWRFNL 5 SG 6 PDWN 7 PWRFNH 8 SGD 9 SGD 10 +5.1VD 11 +5.1VD 12 AG 13 PG 14 +24VB 15 +12VB 16
CN335 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CN359 4 3 2 1 CN360 SG A1 EEPOIN A2 EEPCLK A3 SG A4 RVMPHC A5 RVMPHA A6 EXTMC A7 EXTMA A8 FAN2L A9 FAN4L A10 FAN6L A11 FAN2H A12 FAN4H A13 FAN6H A14 EXTC1 A15 SG B1 +5.1VB B2 FAN5H B3 FAN3H B4 RVMC1 B5 FAN5L B6 FAN3L B7 SG B8 EXTMB B9 EXTMD B10 RVMPHB B11 RVMPHD B12 +5.1VB B13 EEPCS B14 EEPDOUT B15 J434 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 CN436 +24VD2 1 +24VD2 2 PG 3 PG 4 NC 5
REVLVHP-SNR
CN363 SG 3 USTFL2 2 +5.1VB 1
CN439 +24VD2 1 2 FAN2 2 1 CN438 +24VD2 1 FAN3 2 +24VD2 3 FAN4 4
J669 1 2 2 1
J594 +24VD2 1 INTRNLFAN2 FAN-MOT 2
J564 ADUCL-0 2 ADU-CLT +24VD1 1 J312 SG 3 ADUFL ADU2 TRL-SNR +5.1VB 1 CN328 SG 3 ADUFU 2 +5.1VB 1 +24VD1 FDMA FDMB FDMC FDMD CN213 1 2 3 CN214 1 2 3 CN215 1 2 3 4 5 CN216 1 2 NC 3 4 5 CN311 1 ADUSET-SW 2 CN217 SG 2 COVSW 1
A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
+5.1VB CLFLS SG +24VD1 CLFED2 NC TUP2 TUP1 +24VD1 CLMFCL +24VD1 CLMFDL
J570 1 2 3 4 5 NC 6
J517-1 6 5 4 3 2 NC 1 J618 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4
J521 +24VD1 1 CST-LCURGC-0 FEED-CLT 2 J571 TUP2 2 TRY-MOT TUP1 1 J573 +24VD1 1 CST-LCLMFCL TR-H-CLT 2 J572 +24VD1 1 CST-LCLMFDL TR-L-CLT 2
2nd DRAWER
NEMPL-SNR
1st DRAWER
J576 PG 4 ATS 3 K-ATTNR+24VD1 SNR 2 ATSVR 1
J636 1 6 2 5 3 4 4 3 5 2 6 1
SG CUEMP +5.1VB SG CUTOP +5.1VB
J568 NC 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J516-1 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J518 SG 3 CUEMP-1 2 +5.1VB 1
EMPU-SNR
2nd DRAWER
J47 3 2 1
NC +24VD4 FANSLG +5VAPS APSR-0A SG
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
THMSDRM
1st DRAWER
CN19
CN20 SG 1 SG 2 +3.3VA 3 +3.3VA 4 +3.3VA 5 +3.3VA 6 SG 7 NC 8 BDI[9] 9 BDI[8] 10 BDI[7] 11 BDI[6] 12 BDI[5] 13 BDI[4] 14 BDI[3] 15 BDI[2] 16 BDI[1] 17 BDI[0] 18 SG 19 SG 20 GDI[9] 21 GDI[8] 22 GDI[7] 23 GDI[6] 24 GDI[5] 25 GDI[4] 26 GDI[3] 27 GDI[2] 28 GDI[1] 29 GDI[0] 30 SG 31 SG 32 RDI[9] 33 RDI[8] 34 RDI[7] 35 RDI[6] 36 RDI[5] 37 RDI[4] 38 RDI[3] 39 RDI[2] 40 RDI[1] 41 RDI(0) 42 SCLK-0 43 SDO-0 44 CEBLUE-0 45 SCLK-0 46 SDO-0 47 CEGREEN-0 48 SCLK-0 49 SDO-0 50 CERED-0 51 SHD-0 52 SHP-0 53 BLKCLP-0 54 ACLP-0 55 ADCLK-1 56 SG 57 SG 58 +5.1VB 59 +5.1VB 60 +5.1VB 61 SG 62 SG 63 SG 64 SH-0 65 CCDSW 66 CK2-0 67 CK1-1 68 SHMONO-0 69 SHCOLOR-0 70 CP-0 71 RS-0 72 SG 73 SG 74 +10.5V 75 +10.5V 76 SG 77 SG 78 SG 79 SG 80
CN12
CN332 LCCNT 28 SCSWB 27 RETS7 26 RETS6 25 RETS5 24 RETS4 23 RETS3 22 RETS2 21 RETS1 20 RETS0 19 SIZE3 18 SIZE2 17 SIZE1 16 SIZE0 15 SG 14 +5.1VB 13 PFRST 12 DRV0 11 DRV1 10 DRV2 9 DRV3 8 DRV4 7 DRV5 6 DRV6 5 DRV7 4 SCSWC 3 CLKB 2 CLKC 1
NC
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
USD-TNRFLL-SNR2
J661 +5.1VB 1 USTFL2 2 SG 3 J638 DRTMP+ 1 DRTMP2
J660 5 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 5
A1 A2 A3
A17 A16 A15
J621 TEMPS 4 SG TEMP/HUMI- 3 HUMIS SNR 2 +5.1VB 1
A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17
A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
TEMPS SG HUMIS +5.1VB DRTMP+ DRTMPATSDET PG ATS +24VD1 ATSVR SG FAN1 +24VD1 CLBUCP +24VD1 SG RVLHP +5.1VB
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19
B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
+5.1VB CLTOP SG +5.1VB CLEMP SG SG CUSW SG CLSW NC NC
J569 1 2 3 4 5 6 NC 7
J516-2 7 6 5 4 3 2 NC 1
J518 +5.1VB 1 CUEMP-1 2 SG 3
EMPL-SNR
J553 SG 1 CST-U-SW CUSW 2 J552 SG 1 CST-L-SW CLSW 2
2nd DRAWER
CN101 +5.1VB 1 DA1 2 +5.1VB 3 DD0 4 +5.1VB 5 DD3 6 +5.1VB 7 DD6 8 +5.1VB 9 DD9 10 SG 11 DD12 12 SG 13 SG 14 SG 15 SG 16 SG 17 SG 18 +3.3VB 19 INTRQ 20 +3.3VB 21 +5.1VA 22 -12VB 23 SG 24 +12VB 25 DA0 26 DA2 27 IDECS 28 DD1 29 DD2 30 DD4 31 DD5 32 DD7 33 DD8 34 DD10 35 DD11 36 DD13 37 DD14 38 DD15 39 /DIOR 40 /DIOW 41 /OMACK 42 /DLDCS0 43 /RESET 44 DMARQ 45 NC 46 FXWP 47 SG 48 SG 49 NC 50
Board to Board
CN351 PG 1 +24VD1 2 GASOL 3 NC 4 RLTRS 5 RLCSW 6 NC 7 RLCNT 8 JSPSW 9 SG 10 RLHSW 11 +5.1VB 12 RLC2S 13 CN331 SG B17 CUPE1 B16 +5.1VB B15 NC B14 NC B13 NC B12 NC B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 HVCLK A17 CCON A16 GVR A15 CDVDON A14 CDVAON A13 CDVVR A12 KDVDON A11 KDVAON A10 KDVVR A9 TC1ON A8 TC1VR A7 TC2ON A6 TC2VR A5 ECON A4 HVTSTS A3 +24VD1 A2 PG A1
J510 NC 1 NC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 J672 1 3 2 2 3 1
(OPTION) PS-IH
Board to Board
CN455 IH2ON 1 +5VSW 2 H1PWR1 3 H1PWR2 4 H1PWR3 5 H2PWR1 6 H2PWR2 7 H2PWR3 8 CN456 IH1ON 1 SG 2 IHDUTY 3 H1ERR1 4 H1ERR2 5
J626 A1 A13 A2 A12 A3 A11 A4 A10 A5 A9 A6 A8 A7 A7 A8 A6
CN358 IH2ON A1 +5VSW A2 H1PWR1 A3 H1PWR2 A4 H1PWR3 A5 H2PWR1 A6 H2PWR2 A7 H2PWR3 A8
BRIDGE UNIT
A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
IH1ON A9 SG A10 IHDUTY A11 H1ERR1 A12 H1ERR2 A13
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN334 SG +5.1VD +5.1VD SG WRLVL SG SG PIDT1 PIDT0 SG WRAPC SHDWN SG +5.1VD +5.1VD SG +5.1VB BEAMDT SG SG CN362 NC NC NC +24VD1 +5.1VB CLKDVP USTFL DRCLB SG BMDRCB
CN201 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
CN202 +5.1VB 3 BEAMDT 2 SG 1
CN203 1 PWA2 F-SNS 3
PWAF-LDR
EXIT THMS-F-FBLT THMS-R-FBLT

J673 1 3 2 2 3 1 J674 1 3 2 2 3 1 J675 1 2 3 CLING-SNR NC NC 3 2 1
CN117 SG A1 MCNT A2 IDTA0 A3 IDTA1 A4 IDTA2 A5 IDTA3 A6 SG A7 IDTA4 A8 IDTA5 A9 IDTA6 A10 IDTA7 A11 SG A12 IDTA8 A13 IDTA9 A14 IDTA10 A15 IDTA11 A16 SG A17 IDTA12 A18 IDTA13 A19 IDTA14 A20 IDTA15 A21 SG A22 IPOS0 A23 IPOS1 A24 IPOS2 A25 IPOS3 A26 +3.3VB A27 CCODE0 A28 CCODE1 A29 SG A30 SG B1 MMPI1 B2 +5.1VB B3 CBSY B4 CMD B5 SACK B6 SERR B7 SBSY B8 STS B9 CACK B10 CERR B11 SG B12 PEFCLK-M B13 SG B14 IRCLK1 B15 SG B16 IVSYNC0 B17 SG B18 INSYNC0 B19 SG B20 IDCLK B21 SG B22 IHDEN0 B23 SG B24 IVDEN0 B25 SG B26 NC(RESERVE1) B27 RESERVE2 B28 ARST0 B29 SG B30
CN338 A30 A29 A28 A27 A26 A25 A24 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 B30 B29 B28 B27 B26 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
THMS-C-FBLT
Board to Board
EXIT-SNR
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PCI
J635 +5VSW SSTHSSTH+ STHUSTHU+ THMUTHMU+ NC(THML-) NC(THML+) FUSSW SG EXTSW +5.1VB
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13
B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
+5VSW B1 ETHB2 ETH+ B3 STHB4 STH+ B5 MTHB6 MTH+ B7 NC B8 NC B9 FUSSW B10 SG B11 EXTSW B12 +5.1VB B13
22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
J550 +24VD1 1 K-DEVCLKDVP LIFT-CLT 2 J520 3 1 2 2 1 3 J574 +5.1VB 1 USD-TNRUSTFUL 2 FLL-SNR1 SG 3 J536 DRCLB 1 DRMBMDRCB CLN-MOT 2 J558 +24VD1 1 CST-UCLMFCU TR-H-CLT 2 J557 +24VD1 1 CST-UCLMFPH TR-L-CLT 2
BELTCLN-MOT
J530 BMBCOR 1 +24VD1 2 NC J641 NC 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 J554 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 J637 3 1 2 2 1 3 J658 3 1 2 2 1 3 J522 B1 B17 B2 B16 B3 B15 B4 B14 B5 B13 B6 B12 B7 B11 B8 B10 B9 B9 B10 B8 B11 B7 B12 B6 B13 B5 B14 B4 NC NC B15 B3 NC NC B16 B2 NC NC B17 B1 CN361 BMBCOR B1 +24VD1 B2 +5.1VB B3 CTNR B4 SG B5 +24VD1 B6 ERSLP B7 +5.1VB B8 BLK B9 SG B10 +5.1VB B11 KDS B12 SG B13 +5.1VB B14 MARKS B15 SG B16 +5.1VB B17 MARKL B18 +5.1VB B19
PWA-F-LGC
PWA-F-SYS
J480 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CN481 1 CN482 1 CN483 1 J615 1 MAIN CHARGER WIRE J616 1 MAIN CHARGER GRID J611 1 DEVELOPER BIAS(COLOR) J612 1 DEVELOPER BIAS(BLACK) J613 1 TRANSFER BIAS(1ST) J610 1 TRANSFER BIAS(2ND) J614 1 CLEANING BLADE BIAS
Board to Board
J514 +5.1VB 1 COLRCTNR 2 TNR-SNR SG 3 LP-ERS J596 +24VD1 2 ELSLED 1
PS-HVT
CN484 1 CN485 1 CN486 1 CN487 1
J539 +5.1VB 1 K-DEVBLK 2 POS-SNR SG 3 J537 +5.1VB 1 K-DEVKDS 2 TIM-SNR SG 3 J575 +5.1VB 3 MARKS 2 SG 1
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+24VD1 +24VD1 CLMFCU CLKDVR +24VD1 +24VD1 CLMFDH CLCDVR +24VD1 +24VD1 CLRGST CLCTNS
J526 +24VD1 1 RGST-CLT CLRGST 2
J617 6 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1 6
J551 +24VD1 1 KCLKDVR DEV-CLT 2 J549 +24VD1 1 COLRCLCDVR DEV-CLT 2 J538 +24VD1 1 COLR-DEVCLCTNS TNR-CLT 2 J521 CURGC-0 2 CST-U+24VD1 FEED-CLT 1 J620 SG 3 CUFLS-0 2 +5.1VB 1
TRBLTHP-SNR1
J584
(OPTION)
J659 +5.1VB 3 TRBLTMARKL 2 HP-SNR2 SG 1
B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13
CN337 NC CLFED1 +24VD1 SG CUFLS +5.1VB
J567 NC 6 5 4 3 2 1
J517-1 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6
NEMPU-SNR
J519 +5.1VB 1 CST-LCUTOP-1 2 TRY-SNR SG 3
1st DRAWER
FG
FG
J591 1 IH-FAN-MOT 2 J590 1 2 J587 1 2 3 4 5 6 J588 1 2 3 4 5 6
FG
J501 17 16 CN211 CN562 ADCOV-1 1 15 ADTR1-1 2 14 ADCNT-1 3 13 SG 4 12 +5.1VB PWA5 11 ADTR2-1 F-ADU 6 10 CRT-DOWNA 7 9 ADM2A-0A 8 8 ADM2C-0A 9 7 ADM2B-0A 10 6 ADM2D-0A 11 5 CN212 CN563 4 +24VD1 1 3 +24VD1 2 2 PG 3 1 PG 4 CN340 J544 ADCUL 34 1 +24VD1 33 2 ADCOV 32 3 ADTRT 31 4 ADCNT 30 5 SG 29 6 +5.1VB 28 7 ADTR2 27 8 CRTDOWN 26 9 ADM2A 25 10 ADM2C 24 11 ADM2B 23 12 ADM2D 22 13 +24VD1 21 14 +24VD1 20 15 PG 19 16 PG 18 17 J639 1 7 2 6 3 5 4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 J525 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
FG
FG
J560 CLTRP 1 2TR+24VD1 DRV-CLT 2
FG
TOUCH PANEL
OZNFAN-MOT
ADUTRU-SNR
CN465 +24VD1 1 +24VD1 2 PG 3 PG 4 +24VD2 5 +24VD2 6 PG 7 PG 8 CN469 +24VD1 1 +24VD1 2 PG 3 PG 4 +5.1VB 5 SG 6
CN350 +24VD1 1 +24VD1 2 PG 3 PG 4
CN435 +24VD2 1 RVMA 2 RVMC 3 RVMD 4 RVMB 5 +24VD2 6 CN437 EXTMC 1 +24VD2 2 EXTMA 3 EXTMB 4 +24VD2 5 EXTMD 6
M
REVLVMOT
ADU-MOT
EXITMOT
AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT

J631 +5.1VB 1 SFBFED SFB2 FED-SNR SG 3 J629 SOLSFB 2 SFB-SOL +24VD1 1 SFBFEED-CLT J628 CLSFB 2 +24VD1 1 J630 SG 3 SFBSW 2 +5.1VB 1 J507 1 5 2 4 3 3 4 2 5 1 NC 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 J545 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
CN345 NC NC NC CLTRP +24VD1 CLTRP +24VD1 +5.1VB PSTRPD SG KTNR1B KTNR1A KTNDET SG +5.1VB PSTPC SG +5.1VB CTUFED SG
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J559 CLTRP 2 2TR+24VD1 1 CONT-CLT J561 +5.1VB 1 TR2PSTRPD 2 POS-SNR SG 3
TRANSFER BELT UNIT

J640 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 J527 1 6 2 5 3 4 4 3 5 2 6 1 J534 NC 1 KTNR1B 2 TNR-MOT KTNR1A 3 J532 KTNDET 1 K-TNR-SW SG 2 J556 +5.1VB 1 PSTPC 2 FED-U-SNR SG 3 J555 +5.1VB 1 CTUFED 2 RGST-SNR SG 3
CN2
1 2 3 4
PWA-F-SDV
6 5 4 3 2 1
J41 CN1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 NC 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SG SG +5.1VB +5.1VB PG PG +24VD3 +24VD3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RADF
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PG +24VD4 SG SG +5.1VB +5.1VB PG PG +24VD3 +24VD3
HOME SNR
PLTNSNR
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 NC 3
CN468 +5.1VB 1 SG 2 +24VD5 3 PG 4 J650 NC CN470 +24VD1 1 FAN-ACC 2 1 1 NC 2 2 3 3 CN495 +5.1VB 1 2 SG 3
SFSSW +5.1VB SFBFED SG SOLSFB +24VD1 CLSFB +24VD1 SG SFBSW +5.1VB
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
+5.1VB SG SCNMD3 SCNMD2 SCNMD1 SCNREF SCNEN MOTRST-0 SCNDIR SCNLK
SFB-SNR
MOT-A +24VD4 MOT-A(-) MOT-B +24VD4 MOT-B(-)
PWA-FFIL
SAD,TWD,JPD,NAD MODELS: STANDARD
PS-FAN-MOT
M
CN431 +5.1VB 1 SG 2 PWA-F3 FUS 4
J619 SFSZ3-0 5 SFSZ2-0 4 PWA-F-SFB 3 SFSZ1-0 SFSZ0-0 2 SG 1
J634 NC NC 1 3 PG 2 2 +24VB 3 1
SCAN-MOT M
(OPTION)
FG
6 5 4 3 2 1
13 14 15 16 17 18
SFSZ3 SFSZ2 SFSZ1 SFSZ0 SG SG
6 5 4 3 2 1
ASD,AUD,CND MODELS: STANDARD MJD MODEL : OPTION BYPASS UNIT FG FG FG FG
A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
NC NC SG CTLFED +5.1VB SDCSW SG +12VB AG TNREF TNLVL1 TNLVL2 TNLED AG +24VD1 SLTBTNA SG FRDSW +24VD1 RSTSW
J565 5 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 5 J511 13 1 12 2 11 3 10 4 9 5 8 6 7 7 6 8 5 9 4 10 3 11 2 12 1 13 J625 1 7 2 6 3 5 4 4 5 3 6 2 7 1
J566 SG 3 CTLFED FED-L-SW 2 +5.1VB 1 J528 SDCSW 2 SIDESG COV-SW 1 +12VB AG TNREF TNLV1 TNLV2 TNLED AG J542 1 2 3 4 TNLVL-SNR 5 6 7
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J543 +24VD1 2 TNLVLSLTBTNA 1 SHUT-SOL J646 4 1 3 2 2 3 1 4 J577 SG 1 FRNTFRDSW COV-SW 2 J597 +24VD1 1 MAIN-SW RSTSW 2
JPD MODEL ONLY
9.3 Connector Table

CN331 PWA-F-LGC (CN331) <-> PS-HVT (CN480), CLING-SNR
Pin No Symbol A1 PG A2 +24VD1 A3 HVTSTS A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 ECON TC2VR TC2ON TC1VR TC1ON KDVVR KDVAON KDXDON CDVVR CDVAON CDVDON GVR CCON HVCLK NC NC NC NC +5.1VB CUPE1 SG Name Power ground +24V High-voltage power supply abnormality detection signal Drum cleaning blade bias ON/OFF signal 2nd transfer belt bias output reference voltage 2nd transfer belt bias output voltage ON/OFF signal 1st transfer belt bias output reference voltage 1st transfer belt bias output voltage ON/OFF signal Black developer bias high-voltage DC output reference voltage Black developer bias high-voltage AC component ON/ OFF signal Black developer bias high-voltage DC component ON/ OFF signal Color developer bias high-voltage DC output reference voltage Color developer bias high-voltage AC component ON/ OFF signal Color developer bias high-voltage DC component ON/ OFF signal Drum main charger grid output reference voltage Drum main charger grid ON/OFF signal Timer output for power supply (AC output reference frequency) Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected +5V Paper clinging detection sensor detection signal Signal ground Active L: Abnormal H: Normal L Analog L Analog L Analog L L Analog L L Analog L 12 13 +5.1VB RLC2S
CN351 PWA-F-LGC (CN351) <-> BRIDGE UNIT (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Symbol PG +24VD1 GASOL NC RLTRS RLCSW NC RLCNT JSPSW SG RLHSW Name Power ground +24V Bridge unit gate solenoid drive signal Not connected Bridge unit intermediary transport sensor detection signal Bridge unit transport cover opening/closing sensor detection signal Not connected Bridge unit connection detection signal (1) Bridge unit connection detection signal (2) Signal ground Bridge unit load-full sensor detection signal (copier side) +5V Bridge unit exit sensor detection signal Active L -
CN102 PWA-F-SYS (CN102) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN18)

Pin No Symbol A1 RX3-1 A2 SG A3 CLK-0 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 RX2-1 SG RX1-0 RX0-1 SG MCKI-0 HSYN-1 SG VSYN-0 SCNT-1 CCODE(1) SG SG SG SG SG CCODE(0) RX3-0 CLK-1 SG RX2-0 RX1-1 SG RX0-0 MCKI-1 SG HSYN-0 VSYN-1 RESERVED SYSCNT-0 SRST-0 SCNRTS-0 SCNCTS-0 MMPIO-1 SCNIN-1 SCNOUT-1 SCN-3V Name Image data 3 (differential signal +) Signal ground Clock signal for image data transmission (differential signal -) Image data 2 (differential signal +) Signal ground Image data 1 (differential signal -) Image data 0 (differential signal +) Signal ground Clock signal for image data processing (differential signal -) Horizontal scanning synchronized signal (differential signal +) Signal ground Vertical scanning synchronized signal (differential signal -) Scanner board connection detection signal Color code signal (1) Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Color code signal (0) Image data 3 (differential signal +) Clock signal for image data transmission (differential signal +) Signal ground Image data 2 (differential signal -) Image data 1 (differential signal +) Ground Image data 0 (differential signal -) Clock signal for image data processing (differential signal +) Signal ground Horizontal scanning synchronized signal (differential signal -) Vertical scanning synchronized signal (differential signal +) Signal ground SYS board connection detection signal Scanner reset SIO transmission request SIO transmission clear TS circuit starting request signal SIO received data SIO transmitted data +3.3V Active L L L L L H -
CN116 PWA-F-SYS (CN116) <-> DIMM (0)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 Symbol SG DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 +3.3VA DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 SG DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 +3.3VA DQ14 DQ15 NC NC SG NC NC +3.3VA /WE DQMB0 DQMB1 /CS0 NC SG A0 A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 BA1 +3.3VA +3.3VA CLK0 SG NC /CS2 DQMB2 DQMB3 NC +3.3VA NC NC NC NC SG DQ16 DQ17 DQ18 DQ19 +3.3VA DQ20 NC NC CKE1 SG DQ21 DQ22 DQ23 SG DQ24 DQ25 DQ26 DQ27 +3.3VA DQ28 DQ29 DQ30 DQ31 SG CLK2 NC NC(WP) SDA SCL +3.3VA SG DQ32 DQ33 DQ34 DQ35 +3.3VA DQ36 DQ37 DQ38 DQ39 DQ40 SG DQ41 DQ42 DQ43 DQ44 DQ45 +3.3VA DQ46 DA47 NC NC SG NC NC +3.3VA /CAS DQMB4 DQMB5 /CS1 /RAS SG A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 BA0 +3.3VA CLK1 A12 SG CKE /CS3 DQMB6 DQMB7 A13 +3.3VA NC NC NC NC SG DQ48 DQ49 DQ50 DQ51 +3.3VA DQ52 NC NC NC SG DQ53 DQ54 DQ55 SG DQ56 DQ57 DQ58 DQ59 +3.3VA DQ60 DQ61 DQ62 DQ63 SG CLK3 NC SA0 SA1 SA2 +3.3VA Name Signal ground Memory data bus [0] Memory data bus [1] Memory data bus [2] Memory data bus [3] +3.3V Memory data bus [4] Memory data bus [5] Memory data bus [6] Memory data bus [7] Memory data bus [8] Signal ground Memory data bus [9] Memory data bus [10] Memory data bus [11] Memory data bus [12] Memory data bus [13] +3.3V Memory data bus [14] Memory data bus [15] Not connected Not connected Signal ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Data write enable signal Output disable/write mask (0) Output disable/write mask (1) Chip select signal (0) Not connected Signal ground Memory address bus [0] Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [2] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [4] Memory address bus [10] Bank select (1) +3.3V +3.3V Clock (0) input Signal ground Not connected Chip select signal (2) Output disable/write mask (2) Output disable/write mask (3) Not connected +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [16] Memory data bus [17] Memory data bus [18] Memory data bus [19] +3.3V Memory data bus [20] Not connected Not connected Clock enable signal Signal ground Memory data bus [21] Memory data bus [22] Memory data bus [23] Signal ground Memory data bus [24] Memory data bus [25] Memory data bus [26] Memory data bus [27] +3.3V Memory data bus [28] Memory data bus [29] Memory data bus [30] Memory data bus [31] Signal ground Clock (2) input Not connected Not connected PD serial data PD serial clock +3.3V Signal ground Memory data bus [32] Memory data bus [33] Memory data bus [34] Memory data bus [35] +3.3V Memory data bus [36] Memory data bus [37] Memory data bus [38] Memory data bus [39] Memory data bus [40] Signal ground Memory data bus [41] Memory data bus [42] Memory data bus [43] Memory data bus [44] Memory data bus [45] +3.3V Memory data bus [46] Memory data bus [47] Not connected Not connected Signal ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Column address strobe signal Output disable/write mask (4) Output disable/write mask (5) Chip select signal (1) Row address strobe signal Signal ground Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [5] Memory address bus [7] Memory address bus [9] Memory address bus [11] Bank select (0) +3.3V Clock (1) input Memory address bus [12] Signal ground Clock enable signal Chip select signal (3) Output disable/write mask (6) Output disable/write mask (7) Memory address bus [13] +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [48] Memory data bus [49] Memory data bus [50] Memory data bus [51] +3.3V Memory data bus [52] Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [53] Memory data bus [54] Memory data bus [55] Signal ground Memory data bus [56] Memory data bus [57] Memory data bus [58] Memory data bus [59] +3.3V Memory data bus [60] Memory data bus [61] Memory data bus [62] Memory data bus [63] Signal ground Clock (3) input Not connected PD address [0] PD address [1] PD address [2] +3.3V Active -
CN124 PWA-F-SYS (CN124) <-> PWA-F-PCI (CN150)/SCRAMBLER BOARD (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Symbol +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA SG -12VA -12VA +5.1VA +5.1VA +3.3VA OPBINT(2) OPBINT(0) SG PCICLK(5) SG PCICLK(3) SG REQ(1)# REQ(0)# +3.3VA AD[31] AD[29] SG AD[27] AD[25] +3.3VA C/BE(3)# AD[23] SG AD[21] AD[19] +3.3VA AD[17] C/BE(2)# SG IRDY# +3.3VA DEVSEL# SG LOCK# PERR# +3.3VA SERR# +3.3VA C/BE(1)# AD[14] SG AD[12] AD[10] M66EN SG AD[8] AD[7] +3.3VA AD[5] AD[3] SG AD[1] +3.3VA +5.1VA SG +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA SG +12VA +12VA +5.1VA +5.1VA +3.3VA OPBINT(1) +3.3VA PCIRST# +3.3VA PCICLK(4) +3.3VA GNT(1)# GNT(0)# SG PMF# AD[30] +3.3VA AD[28] AD[26] SG AD[24] +3.3VA +3.3VA AD[22] AD[20] SG AD[18] AD[16] +3.3VA FRAME# SG TRDY# SG STOP# +3.3VA +3.3VA SG SG PAR AD[15] +3.3VA AD[13] AD[11] SG AD[9] SG C/BE(0)# +3.3VA AD[6] AD[4] SG AD[2] AD[0] +3.3VA +5.1VA +5.1VA Name +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground -12V -12V +5V +5V +3.3V Interrupt request (2) Interrupt request (0) Signal ground PCI clock (5) [Not used] Signal ground PCI clock (3) Signal ground Data request signal (1) Data request signal (0) +3.3V PCI address/data bus [31] PCI address/data bus [29] Signal ground PCI address/data bus [27] PCI address/data bus [25] +3.3V Command and byte enable (3) PCI address/data bus [23] Signal ground PCI address/data bus [21] PCI address/data bus [19] +3.3V PCI address/data bus [17] Command and byte enable (2) Signal ground Initiator ready +3.3V Device select Signal ground Lock Data parity Error +3.3V System Error +3.3V Command and byte enable (1) PCI address/data bus [14] Signal ground PCI address/data bus [12] PCI address/data bus [10] PCI bus 66 MHz clock enable signal Signal ground PCI address/data bus [8] PCI address/data bus [7] +3.3V PCI address/data bus [5] PCI address/data bus [3] Signal ground PCI address/data bus [1] +3.3V +5V Signal ground +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground +12V +12V +5V +5V +3.3V Interrupt request (1) +3.3V PCI reset signal +3.3V PCI clock (4) +3.3V Grant (1) Grant (0) Signal ground Power Management Event PCI address/data bus [30] +3.3V PCI address/data bus [28] PCI address/data bus [26] Signal ground PCI address/data bus [24] +3.3V +3.3V PCI address/data bus [22] PCI address/data bus [20] Signal ground PCI address/data bus [18] PCI address/data bus [16] +3.3V Cycle frame Signal ground Target ready Signal ground Stop +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground Signal ground Parity PCI address/data bus [15] +3.3V PCI address/data bus [13] PCI address/data bus [11] Signal ground PCI address/data bus [9] Signal ground Command and byte enable (0) +3.3V PCI address/data bus [6] PCI address/data bus [4] Signal ground PCI address/data bus [2] PCI address/data bus [0] +3.3V +5V +5V Active L L L L L L L L -
CN464 PS-ACC (CN464) <-> PWA-F-SYS (CN122)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Symbol PWREN PWRDN -12VB SG +12VB SG +12VA SG -12VA SG SG SG +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA SG SG +3.3VB +3.3VB SG SG SG +5.1VA +5.1VB +5.1VA Name Power output enable signal Power down signal -12V Signal ground +12V Signal ground +12V Signal ground -12V Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground Signal ground +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground +5V +5V +5V Active L L -
J422
Pin No 1 2 3 4
PWA-F-DSP (J422) <-> LCD PANEL

Symbol YD XL XR YU Name Y-axis touch position detection terminal (D) X-axis touch position detection terminal (L) X-axis touch position detection terminal (R) Y-axis touch position detection terminal (U) Active -
J423
PWA-F-DSP (J423) <-> LCD BACK LIGHT

Name High-voltage terminal (High) Not connected High-voltage terminal (Low) Active -
Pin No Symbol 1 CCFL+ 2 NC 3 CCFL-
J424
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
PWA-F-DSP (J424) <-> LCD PANEL

Symbol FRAME LAOD CP SG +5.1VA SG VEE /D.OFF D0 D1 D2 D3 Name LCD scanning line start signal LCD data latch pulse LCD data transmission clock Signal ground +5V Signal ground LCD contrast signal LCD enable signal LCD display data (0) LCD display data (1) LCD display data (2) LCD display data (3) Active -
CN352 PWA-F-LGC (CN352) <-> M/DC-POL

Pin No Symbol 1 POMPL 2 POMON 3 4 5 POMCK PG +24VD1 Name Polygonal motor phase locked signal Polygonal motor ON/OFF signal Polygonal motor reference clock signal Power ground +24V Active L: Normal L: ON, H: OFF -
CN354 PWA-F-LGC (CN354) <-> PWA-F-CCL (CN491)

Pin No Symbol 1 +5VSW 2 ENSNR1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ENSNR2 ENVCL ENVT1 ENVT2 SG +5.1VB PG +24VD1 Name +5V Charger cleaner rear position detection switch signal (Home position) Charger cleaner front position detection switch signal Not used (Open) Charger cleaner motor control signal T1 Charger cleaner motor control signal T2 Signal ground +5V Power ground +24V Active L L -
CN465 PS-ACC (CN465) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN350), PWA-F-DRV (CN436)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Symbol +24VD1 +24VD1 PG PG +24VD2 +24VD2 PG PG Name +24V +24V Power ground Power ground +24V +24V Power ground Power ground Active -
J425
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PWA-F-DSP (J425) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J428)

Symbol LDFC-1 LDFC-2 LDFC-4 LDFC-5 LDFC-6 LDFC-7 LDFC-8 LDFC-9 LDFC-10 LDFC-11 LDFC-12 LDFC-13 LDFC-15 LDON0 LDON1 LGND(SG) Name LED driver output (1) LED driver output (2) LED driver output (4) LED driver output (5) LED driver output (6) LED driver output (7) LED driver output (8) LED driver output (9) LED driver output (10) LED driver output (11) LED driver output (12) LED driver output (13) LED driver output (15) LED drive selection signal (0) LED drive selection signal (1) Signal ground Active L L L L L L L L L L L L L H H -
CN466 PS-ACC (CN466) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN335, 359), FAX (CN702)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Symbol +5.1VB SG +3.3VB SG PWRFNL SG PDWN PWRFNH SGD +5.1VD +5.1VD SGD AG PG +24VB +12VB Name +5V Signal ground +3.3V Signal ground Power supply cooling fan control signal (Low) Signal ground Power down signal Power supply cooling fan control signal (High) Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Analog ground Power ground *JPD model only +24V *JPD model only +12V *JPD model only Active L -
CN355 PWA-F-LGC (CN355) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 Symbol +24VD1 CTRON CTRCNT MCRUN EXTCTR PG BKCTR MNCTR FLCTR SG SIZE3 SIZE2 SIZE1 SIZE0 +5.1VB CTRCNT2 Name +24V Counter ON signal Copy permitting signal Copying operation signal Exit sensor ON signal Power ground Black and white mode counter ON signal Mono-color mode counter ON signal Full color mode counter ON signal Signal ground Paper size signal (3) Paper size signal (2) Paper size signal (1) Paper size signal (0) +5V Copy key card detection signal Active L L L L L L -
CN332 PWA-F-LGC (CN332) <-> PFP (OPTION)/LCF (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Symbol CLKC CLKB SCSWC DRV7 DRV6 DRV5 DRV4 DRV3 DRV2 DRV1 DRV0 PFRST +5.1VB SG SIZE0 SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3 RETS0 RETS1 RETS2 RETS3 RETS4 RETS5 RETS6 RETS7 SCSWB LCCNT Name PFP/LCF register control signal PFP/LCF register control signal PFP/LCF switch select control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal PFP/LCF driver control signal Reset signal +5V Signal ground Size data bus 0 Not used Not used Not used PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF sensor detection signal PFP/LCF switch select control signal LCF connection signal Active L -
J426
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
PWA-F-DSP (J426) <-> PWA-F-KEY (J429)

Symbol SCN15 SCN14 SCN13 SCN12 SCN11 RET0 RET1 RET2 RET3 RET8 RET9 Name Button scanning signal (5) Button scanning signal (4) Button scanning signal (3) Button scanning signal (2) Button scanning signal (1) Button scanning return signal (0) Button scanning return signal (1) Button scanning return signal (2) Button scanning return signal (3) Button scanning return signal (8) Button scanning return signal (9) Active -
CN105 PWA-F-SYS (CN105) <-> SYS-FAN-MOT

Pin No Symbol Name 1 FAN-ON(+12VA) SYS board cooling fan drive signal (+12V) 2 SG Signal ground Active -
CN108 PWA-F-SYS (CN108) <-> PC I/F (IEEE1284)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Symbol STB DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 NACK BUSY PERROR SELECT NATFD NC SG FG LOGIC SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG SG NINIT NFAULT NC NC NC NSEL IN Name nStrobe Data bus [0] Data bus [1] Data bus [2] Data bus [3] Data bus [4] Data bus [5] Data bus [6] Data bus [7] nAck Busy PError Select nAutoFd Not connected Signal ground Frame ground Peripheral Logic High [Pull-up] Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground nInit nFault Not connected Not connected Not connected nSelectIn Active H -
CN467 PS-ACC (CN467) <-> PWA-F-SLG (CN10)/RADF (CN1) (OPTION)/ PWA-F-SDV (CN32)
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Symbol +24VD3 +24VD3 PG PG +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SG +24VD4 PG +24VD4 PG +24VD4 PG NC NC +3.3VB +3.3VB SG SG +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SG Name +24V +24V Power ground Power ground +5V +5V Signal ground Signal ground +24V Power ground +24V Power ground +24V Power ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Signal ground Active -
CN356 PWA-F-LGC (CN356) <-> COLR-ATTNR-SNR/ATTNR-SHUT-SOL/ KEY COPY COUNTER (OPTION)

Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 Symbol SG NC NC C-CK (SG) C-CK SG KTCRC +24VD1 KTCR0 CKSLS SLDVTNB +24VD1 SLDVTNA +5.1VB DVTNALD AG DVCTRN VLED Name Signal ground Not connected Not connected Signal ground Key copy counter identification signal (Connected to A4 pin) Signal ground Key copy counter/copy key card connection detection signal +24V Key copy counter ON signal Color auto-toner and shutter solenoid connection detection signal (Connected to A1 pin) Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid drive signal B Color auto-toner sensor shutter solenoid drive signal A +5V Color auto-toner sensor LED drive signal Analog ground Color auto-toner sensor signal Not used Active L L Analog -
J2
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
PWA-F-NIC (J2) <-> LAN (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)

Symbol (TD+)FA1 (TD-)FA2 (RD+)FA3 FA45 FA45 (RD-)FA6 FA78 FA78 NC(MTG) NC(MTG) SH SH SH SH Name Transmitted data + Transmitted data Received data + Not used Not used Received data Not used Not used Not connected Not connected Shield Shield Shield Shield Active -
CN334 PWA-F-LGC (CN334) <-> PWA-F-LDR (CN201)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Symbol SG SG BEAMDT +5.1VB SG +5.1VD +5.1VD SG SHDWN WRAPC SG PIDT0 PIDT1 SG SG WRLVL SG +5.1VD +5.1VD SG Name Signal ground Signal ground Laser beam monitor signal +5V Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Laser ON/OFF signal APC write signal Signal ground Laser image data Laser image data Signal ground Signal ground Laser write level signal Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Active -
CN202 PWA-F-LDR (CN202) <-> PWA-F-SNS (CN203)

Pin No Symbol 1 SG 2 BEAMDT 3 +5.1VB Name Signal ground Laser beam position detection signal +5V Active -
CN358 PWA-F-LGC (CN358) <-> PS-IH (CN455, 456), THMS-F-FBLT, THMS-R-FBLT, THMS-C-FBLT, EXIT-SNR
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 Symbol IH2ON +5VSW H1-PWR1 H1-PWR2 H1-PWR3 H2-PWR1 H2-PWR2 H2-PWR3 IH1ON SG IH DUTY H1 ERR1 H1 ERR2 +5VSW ETHETH+ STHSTH+ MTHMTH+ NC NC FUSSW SG EXTSW +24V Name IH2 ON/OFF signal +5V Heater H1 power data 1 Heater H1 power data 2 Heater H1 power data 3 Heater H2 power data 1 Heater H2 power data 2 Heater H2 power data 3 IH1 ON/OFF signal Signal ground IH1/2 duty control signal Heater H1 error signal 1 Hearer H1 error signal 2 +5V Fuser belt front edge thermistor detection signal Fuser belt front edge thermistor detection signal (+5V) Fuser belt sub thermistor detection signal Fuser belt sub thermistor detection signal (+5V) Fuser belt main thermistor detection signal Fuser belt main thermistor detection signal (+5V) Not used Not used Fuser unit connection detection signal Signal ground Exit sensor detection signal +24V Active H H Analog Analog Analog -
CN468 PS-ACC (CN468) <-> FINISHER (J598) (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol +5.1VB SG +24VD5 PG Name +5V Signal ground +24V Power ground Active -
CN213 PWA-F-ADU (CN213) <-> ADU-TRL-SNR

Pin No Symbol 1 SG 2 ADUFL 3 +5.1VB Name Signal ground ADU exit sensor detection signal +5V Active -
CN109 PWA-F-SYS (CN109) <-> RS-232C

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Symbol TXD RXD RTS DSR DTR CTS CNT SG Name Transmitted data Received data Transmission request Data set ready signal Data terminal ready signal Transmission enabled Carrier detection signal Signal ground Active -
CN469 PS-ACC (CN469) <-> PFP(OPTION)/LCF (OPTION)/PWA-F-FUS (CN431)/PWA-F-FIL (CN495)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol +24VD1 +24VD1 PG PG +5.1VB SG Name +24V +24V Power ground Power ground +5V Signal ground Active -
CN214 PWA-F-ADU (CN214) <-> ADU-TRU-SNR

Pin No Symbol 1 SG 2 ADUFU 3 +5.1VB Name Signal ground ADU entrance sensor detection signal +5V Active -
CN337 PWA-F-LGC (CN337) <-> CST-L-TR-L-CLT, CST-L-TR-H-CLT, TRY-MOT, CST-L-FEED-CLT, NEMP-L-SNR, CST-U-TRY-SNR, EMP-U-SNR, CST-L-SW, CST-U-SW, EMP-L-SNR, CST-L-TRY-SNR, NEMP-U-SNR, CST-U-FEED-CLT
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 Symbol CLMFDL +24VD1 CLMFCL +24VD1 TUP1 TUP2 NC CLFED2 +24VD1 SG CLFLS +5.1VB +5.1VB CUTOP SG +5.1VB CUEMP SG NC NC CLSW SG CUSW SG SG CLEMP +5.1VB SG CLTOP +5.1VB +5.1VB CUFLS SG +24VD1 CLFED1 NC Name Lower transport clutch (Low speed) drive signal +24V Lower transport clutch (High speed) drive signal +24V Tray-up motor drive signal-1 Tray-up motor drive signal-2 Not connected Lower drawer feed clutch drive signal +24V Signal ground Lower drawer paper stock sensor detection signal +5V +5V Upper drawer tray-up sensor detection signal Signal ground +5V Upper drawer empty sensor detection signal Signal ground Not connected Not connected Lower drawer detection switch signal Signal ground Upper drawer detection switch signal Signal ground Signal ground Lower drawer empty sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground Lower drawer tray-up sensor detection signal +5V +5V Upper drawer paper stock sensor detection signal Signal ground +24V Upper drawer feed clutch drive signal Not connected Active L L L L -
CN215 PWA-F-ADU (CN215) <-> ADU-MOT

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 Symbol +24VD1 FDMA FDMB FDMC FDMD Name +24V ADU motor drive signal-A ADU motor drive signal-B ADU motor drive signal-C ADU motor drive signal-D Active -
CN110 PWA-F-SYS (CN110) <-> USB HOST

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 Symbol VBUS DD+ SG SG Name +5V Serial data Serial data Signal ground Signal ground Active -
CN470 PS-ACC (CN470) <-> PS-FAN-MOT (J633)

Pin No Symbol 1 +24VD1 2 FAN-ACC Name +24V Power supply cooling fan drive signal Active -
CN217 PWA-F-ADU (CN217) <-> ADU-SET-SW CN11

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PWA-F-SLG (CN11) <-> RADF (CN2) (OPTION)

Symbol DFAK-0A DFSCST-0A DFRXD-0A SG DFTXD-0A SG DFRAK-0A DFRRQ-0A DFRQ-0A DFCNT-0A Name RADF acknowledge signal RADF VARID signal RADF received data Signal ground RADF transmitted data Signal ground Acknowledge signal Request signal RADF request signal RADF detection signal Active -
CN112 PWA-F-SYS (CN112) <-> HDD (CN170) (STANDARD)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Symbol /RESET SG DD7 DD8 DD6 DD9 DD5 DD10 DD4 DD11 DD3 DD12 DD2 DD13 DD1 DD14 DD0 DD15 SG NC(KEY) MDARQ SG /DIOW SG /DIOR SG IORDY SG /DMACK SG INTRQ RESERVED DA1 /PDIAG DA0 DA2 /CS0 /CS1 /DASP SG Name Reset signal Signal ground Data bus [7] Data bus [8] Data bus [6] Data bus [9] Data bus [5] Data bus [10] Data bus [4] Data bus [11] Data bus [3] Data bus [12] Data bus [2] Data bus [13] Data bus [1] Data bus [14] Data bus [0] Data bus [15] Signal ground Not connected DMA request Signal ground I/O write Signal ground I/O read Signal ground I/O ready Signal ground DMA C197 signal Signal ground Interrupt request Reserve signal Device address [1] Passed diagnostics Device address [0] Device address [2] Chip select (0) Chip select (1) Device active or slave present Signal ground Active H L H L L L L -
Pin No Symbol 1 SG 2 COVSW
Name Signal ground ADU opening/closing switch detection signal
Active -
CN360 PWA-F-LGC (CN360) <-> PWA-F-DRV (CN434)

Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 Symbol SG EEPDIN EEPCLK SG RVMPHC RVMPHA EXTMC EXTMA FAN2L FAN4L FAN6L FAN2H FAN4H FAN6H EXTC1 SG +5.1VB FAN5H FAN3H RVMC1 FAN5L FAN3L SG EXTMB EXTMD RVMPHB RVMPHD +5.1VB EEPCS EEPDOUT Name Signal ground Serial data to EEPROM Serial clock to EEPROM Signal ground Revolver motor drive signal C Revolver motor drive signal A Exit motor drive signal C Exit motor drive signal A Internal cooling fan drive signal L Ozone exhaust fan drive signal L Not used Internal cooling fan drive signal H Ozone exhaust fan drive signal H Not used Exit motor drive reference voltage Signal ground +5V Not used IH control board cooling fan drive signal H Revolver motor drive reference voltage Not used IH control board cooling fan drive signal L Signal ground Exit motor drive signal B Exit motor drive signal D Revolver motor drive signal B Revolver motor drive signal D +5V Chip select signal to EEPROM Serial data to EEPROM Active Analog H -
CN492 PWA-F-CCL (CN492) <-> CCL-F-POS-SW, CCL-R-POS-SW, CCL-MOT

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol CCW CW SG SW1 SG SW2 Name Charger cleaner motor drive signal (CCW) Charger cleaner motor drive signal (CW) Signal ground Charger cleaner rear position detection switch signal (Home position) Signal ground Charger cleaner front position detection switch signal Active L L
CN125 PWA-F-SYS (CN125) <-> PM DIMM

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 Symbol SG DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 +3.3VA DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 SG DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 +3.3VA DQ14 DQ15 NC NC SG NC NC +3.3VA /WE DQMB0 DQMB1 /CS0 NC SG A0 A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 BA1 +3.3VA +3.3VA CLK0 SG NC /CS2 DQMB2 DQMB3 NC +3.3VA NC NC NC NC SG DQ16 DQ17 DQ18 DQ19 +3.3VA DQ20 NC NC CKE1 SG DQ21 DQ22 DQ23 SG DQ24 DQ25 DQ26 DQ27 +3.3VA DQ28 DQ29 DQ30 DQ31 SG CLK2 NC NC(WP) SDA SCL +3.3VA SG DQ32 DQ33 DQ34 DQ35 +3.3VA DQ36 DQ37 DQ38 DQ39 DQ40 SG DQ41 DQ42 DQ43 DQ44 DQ45 +3.3VA DQ46 DA47 NC NC SG NC NC +3.3VA /CAS DQMB4 DQMB5 /CS1 /RAS SG A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 BA0 +3.3VA CLK1 A12 SG CKE /CS3 DQMB6 DQMB7 A13 +3.3VA NC NC NC NC SG DQ48 DQ49 DQ50 DQ51 +3.3VA DQ52 NC NC NC SG DQ53 DQ54 DQ55 SG DQ56 DQ57 DQ58 DQ59 +3.3VA DQ60 DQ61 DQ62 DQ63 SG CLK3 NC SA0 SA1 SA2 +3.3VA Name Signal ground Memory data bus [0] Memory data bus [1] Memory data bus [2] Memory data bus [3] +3.3V Memory data bus [4] Memory data bus [5] Memory data bus [6] Memory data bus [7] Memory data bus [8] Signal ground Memory data bus [9] Memory data bus [10] Memory data bus [11] Memory data bus [12] Memory data bus [13] +3.3V Memory data bus [14] Memory data bus [15] Not connected Not connected Signal ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Data write enable signal Output disable/write mask (0) Output disable/write mask (1) Chip select signal (0) Not connected Signal ground Memory address bus [0] Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [2] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [4] Memory address bus [10] Bank select (1) +3.3V +3.3V Clock (0) input Signal ground Not connected Chip select signal (2) Output disable/write mask (2) Output disable/write mask (3) Not connected +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [16] Memory data bus [17] Memory data bus [18] Memory data bus [19] +3.3V Memory data bus [20] Not connected Not connected Clock enable signal Signal ground Memory data bus [21] Memory data bus [22] Memory data bus [23] Signal ground Memory data bus [24] Memory data bus [25] Memory data bus [26] Memory data bus [27] +3.3V Memory data bus [28] Memory data bus [29] Memory data bus [30] Memory data bus [31] Signal ground Clock (2) input Not connected Not connected PD serial data PD serial clock +3.3V Signal ground Memory data bus [32] Memory data bus [33] Memory data bus [34] Memory data bus [35] +3.3V Memory data bus [36] Memory data bus [37] Memory data bus [38] Memory data bus [39] Memory data bus [40] Signal ground Memory data bus [41] Memory data bus [42] Memory data bus [43] Memory data bus [44] Memory data bus [45] +3.3V Memory data bus [46] Memory data bus [47] Not connected Not connected Signal ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Column address strobe signal Output disable/write mask (4) Output disable/write mask (5) Chip select signal (1) Row address strobe signal Signal ground Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [5] Memory address bus [7] Memory address bus [9] Memory address bus [11] Bank select (0) +3.3V Clock (1) input Memory address bus [12] Signal ground Clock enable signal Chip select signal (3) Output disable/write mask (6) Output disable/write mask (7) Memory address bus [13] +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [48] Memory data bus [49] Memory data bus [50] Memory data bus [51] +3.3V Memory data bus [52] Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [53] Memory data bus [54] Memory data bus [55] Signal ground Memory data bus [56] Memory data bus [57] Memory data bus [58] Memory data bus [59] Memory data bus [60] Memory data bus [61] Memory data bus [62] Memory data bus [63] Signal ground Clock (3) input Not connected PD address [0] PD address [1] PD address [2] +3.3V Active -
CN12
PWA-F-SLG (CN12) <-> SCAN-FAN-MOT, SLG-FAN-MOT, APS1(A4 SERISE ONLY)/APS2/APS3/APSC/APSR

Name Not connected +24V Scanner unit cooling fan and SLG board cooling fan drive signal +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Automatic original detection sensor signal Signal ground Active -
Pin No Symbol A1 NC A2 +24VD4 A3 FANSLG A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 +5VAPS APSR-0A SG +5VAPS APSC-0A SG +5VAPS APS3-0A SG +5VAPS APS2-0A SG +5VAPS APS1-0A SG
CN501 FAX (CN501) <-> NCU(1) (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Symbol TXOUT RXIN CML LD EXTRG ATT3DB RLADJ1 RLADJ2 RGCLK AG -12VB AG +12VB +24VB 16Hz AG CI ANSDET REVA REVB INTHOOK EXTHO OK +5.1VA AG +5.1VA -12VB AG +12VB +24VB PG Name Transmitted facsimile data Received facsimile data CML relay drive signal Dial pulse drive signal Not used -3db ATT exchange signal MODEM select signal MODEM select signal Not used Analog ground -12V Analog ground +12V +24V Not used Analog ground Ring signal detection Facsimile data answer detection Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal Internal telephone hook signal External telephone hook signal +5V Analog ground +5V -12V Analog ground +12V +24V Power ground Active L L -
CN340 PWA-F-LGC (CN340) <-> PWA-F-ADU (CN211, 212), ADU-CLT, PWA-F-SFB (J619), SFB-SNR, SFB-FEED-CLT, SFB-SOL, SFB-FED-SER
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Symbol SG SG SFSZ0 SFSZ1 SFSZ2 SFSZ3 +5.1VB SFBSW SG +24VD1 CLSFB +24VD1 SOLSFB SG SFDFED +5.1VB SFSSW PG PG +24VD1 +24VD1 ADM2D ADM2B ADM2C ADM2A CRTDOWN ADTR2 +5.1VB SG ADCNT ADTRP ADCOV +24VD1 ADUCL Name Signal ground Signal ground SFB paper size detection signal-0 SFB paper size detection signal-1 SFB paper size detection signal-2 SFB paper size detection signal-3 +5V SFB bypass paper sensor detection signal Signal ground +24V Bypass feed clutch drive signal +24V Bypass pickup solenoid drive signal Signal ground Bypass feed sensor detection signal +5V Connected to A1 pin Power ground Power ground +24V +24V ADU motor drive signal D ADU motor drive signal B ADU motor drive signal C ADU motor drive signal A ADU motor control signal ADU exit sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground ADU connection detection signal ADU entrance sensor detection signal ADU opening/closing switch detection signal +24V ADU clutch drive signal Active L L L L L L
CN13
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
PWA-F-SLG (CN13) <-> PLTN-SNR, HOME-SNR, PWA-F-SDV (CN30)

Symbol SG PLTN-1A +5.1VB SG HOME-1A +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SCNMD3 SCNMD2 SCNMD1 SCNREF SCNEN MOTRST-0 SCNDIR SCNLK Name Signal ground Platen sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground Carriage home position sensor detect signal +5V +5V Signal ground Scan motor drive signal-3 Scan motor drive signal-2 Scan motor drive signal-1 Scan motor drive reference signal Scan motor ON/OFF signal Reset signal Scan motor rotational direction signal Scan motor drive clock signal Active Analog H:ON L L: CW, H: CCW -
CN361 PWA-F-LGC (CN361) <-> TEMP/HUMI-SNR, THMS-DRM, K-ATTNR-SNR, LSU-FAN-MOT, TRBLT-CLN-CLT, REVLV-HP-SNR, BELT-CLN-MOT, COLR-TNR-SNR, LP-ERS, K-DEV-POS-SNR, K-DEV-TIM-SNR, TRBLT-HP-SNR2, TRBLT-HP-SNR1
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 Symbol TEMPS SG HUMIS +5.1VB DRTMP+ DRTMPATSDET PG ATS +24VD1 ATSVR SG FAN1 +24VD1 CLBUCP +24VD1 SG RVLHP +5.1VB BMBCOR +24VD1 +5.1VB CTNR SG +24VD1 ERSLP +5.1VB BLK SG +5.1VB KDS SG +5.1VB MARKS SG +5.1VB MARKL SG Name Temperature signal Signal ground Humidity signal +5V Drum thermistor detection signal Drum thermistor detection signal Black auto-toner sensor detection (Connected to A12 pin) Power ground Black auto-toner sensor detection signal +24V Black auto-toner sensor reference voltage Signal ground Laser unit cooling fan drive signal +24V Transfer belt cleaner clutch drive signal +24V Signal ground Revolver home position sensor detection signal +5V Transfer belt cleaner auger motor drive signal +24V +5V Color toner cartridge sensor detection signal Signal ground +24V Exposure lamp drive signal +5V Black developer contact position detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Black developer contact timing detection sensor signal Signal ground +5V Transfer belt home position sensor-1 detection signal Signal ground +5V Transfer belt home position sensor-2 detection signal Signal ground Active Analog Analog Analog Analog L Analog Analog -
CN113 PWA-F-SYS (CN113) <-> HDD (CN171)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol +12VA SG SG +5.1VA Name +12V Signal ground Signal ground +5V Active -
CN502 FAX (CN502) <-> NCU(2) (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Symbol TXB RXIN CML LD ER/HK ATT3DB RLADJ1 RLADJ2 RGCLK AG -12VB AG +12VB NC 16Hz AG CI ANSDET REVA REVB NC NC +5.1VA AG +5.1VA -12VB AG +12VB NC NC Name Transmitted facsimile data Received facsimile data CML relay drive signal Dial pulse drive signal Not used -3db ATT exchange signal MODEM select signal MODEM select signal Not used Analog ground -12V Analog ground +12V Not connected Not used Analog ground Ring signal detect Facsimile data answer detection Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal Line 1 External telephone hook detection signal Not connected Not connected +5V Analog ground +5V -12V Analog ground +12V Not connected Not connected Active L L -
CN115 PWA-F-SYS (CN115) <-> DIMM (1)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 Symbol SG DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 +3.3VA DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 SG DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 +3.3VA DQ14 DQ15 NC NC SG NC NC +3.3VA /WE DQMB0 DQMB1 /CS0 NC SG A0 A2 A4 A6 A8 A10 BA1 +3.3VA +3.3VA CLK0 SG NC /CS2 DQMB2 DQMB3 NC +3.3VA NC NC NC NC SG DQ16 DQ17 DQ18 DQ19 +3.3VA DQ20 NC NC CKE1 SG DQ21 DQ22 DQ23 SG DQ24 DQ25 DQ26 DQ27 +3.3VA DQ28 DQ29 DQ30 DQ31 SG CLK2 NC NC(WP) SDA SCL +3.3VA SG DQ32 DQ33 DQ34 DQ35 +3.3VA DQ36 DQ37 DQ38 DQ39 DQ40 SG DQ41 DQ42 DQ43 DQ44 DQ45 +3.3VA DQ46 DA47 NC NC SG NC NC +3.3VA /CAS DQMB4 DQMB5 /CS1 /RAS SG A1 A3 A5 A7 A9 A11 BA0 +3.3VA CLK1 A12 SG CKE /CS3 DQMB6 DQMB7 A13 +3.3VA NC NC NC NC SG DQ48 DQ49 DQ50 DQ51 +3.3VA DQ52 NC NC NC SG DQ53 DQ54 DQ55 SG DQ56 DQ57 DQ58 DQ59 +3.3VA DQ60 DQ61 DQ62 DQ63 SG CLK3 NC SA0 SA1 SA2 +3.3VA Name Signal ground Memory data bus [0] Memory data bus [1] Memory data bus [2] Memory data bus [3] +3.3V Memory data bus [4] Memory data bus [5] Memory data bus [6] Memory data bus [7] Memory data bus [8] Signal ground Memory data bus [9] Memory data bus [10] Memory data bus [11] Memory data bus [12] Memory data bus [13] +3.3V Memory data bus [14] Memory data bus [15] Not connected Not connected Signal ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Data write enable signal Output disable/write mask (0) Output disable/write mask (1) Chip select signal (0) Not connected Signal ground Memory address bus [0] Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [2] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [4] Memory address bus [10] Bank select (1) +3.3V +3.3V Clock (0) input Signal ground Not connected Chip select signal (2) Output disable/write mask (2) Output disable/write mask (3) Not connected +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [16] Memory data bus [17] Memory data bus [18] Memory data bus [19] +3.3V Memory data bus [20] Not connected Not connected Clock enable signal Signal ground Memory data bus [21] Memory data bus [22] Memory data bus [23] Signal ground Memory data bus [24] Memory data bus [25] Memory data bus [26] Memory data bus [27] +3.3V Memory data bus [28] Memory data bus [29] Memory data bus [30] Memory data bus [31] Signal ground Clock [2] input Not connected Not connected PD serial data PD serial clock +3.3V Signal ground Memory data bus [32] Memory data bus [33] Memory data bus [34] Memory data bus [35] +3.3V Memory data bus [36] Memory data bus [37] Memory data bus [38] Memory data bus [39] Memory data bus [40] Signal ground Memory data bus [41] Memory data bus [42] Memory data bus [43] Memory data bus [44] Memory data bus [45] +3.3V Memory data bus [46] Memory data bus [47] Not connected Not connected Signal ground Not connected Not connected +3.3V Column address strobe signal Output disable/write mask (4) Output disable/write mask (5) Chip select signal (1) Row address strobe signal Signal ground Memory address bus [1] Memory address bus [3] Memory address bus [5] Memory address bus [7] Memory address bus [9] Memory address bus [11] Bank select (0) +3.3V Clock (1) input Memory address bus [12] Signal ground Clock enable signal Chip select signal (3) Output disable/write mask (6) Output disable/write mask (7) Memory address bus [13] +3.3V Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [48] Memory data bus [49] Memory data bus [50] Memory data bus [51] +3.3V Memory data bus [52] Not connected Not connected Not connected Signal ground Memory data bus [53] Memory data bus [54] Memory data bus [55] Signal ground Memory data bus [56] Memory data bus [57] Memory data bus [58] Memory data bus [59] +3.3V Memory data bus [60] Memory data bus [61] Memory data bus [62] Memory data bus [63] Signal ground Clock (3) input Not connected PD address [0] PD address [1] PD address [2] +3.3V Active -
CN16
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
PWA-F-SLG (CN16) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SLG)

Symbol MDT[0] MDT[2] MDT[4] MDT[6] MRD-0A (PNCNT)DLAD[0] (SSW)DLAD[2] MAD[4] MAD[6] MAD[8] MAD[10] MAD[12] MAD[14] MAD[16] MAD[18] SG SG MDT[1] MDT[3] MDT[5] MDT[7] CS02-0 (PNCNT)DLAD[1] (MER)DLAD[3] MAD[5] MAD[7] MAD[9] MAD[11] MAD[13] MAD[15] MAD[17] ROMDT-0 +5.1VB LED-0 Name ROM data bus [0] ROM data bus [2] ROM data bus [4] ROM data bus [6] ROM data read signal ROM address bus [0] ROM address bus [2] ROM data bus [4] ROM data bus [6] ROM data bus [8] ROM address bus [10] ROM address bus [12] ROM address bus [14] ROM address bus [16] ROM address bus [18] Signal ground Signal ground ROM data bus [1] ROM data bus [3] ROM data bus [5] ROM data bus [7] Chip select signal ROM address bus [1] ROM address bus [3] ROM address bus [5] ROM address bus [7] ROM address bus [9] ROM address bus [11] ROM address bus [13] ROM address bus [15] ROM address bus [17] ROM select signal +5V LED drive signal Active -
CN117 PWA-F-SYS (CN117) <-> PWA-F-LGC (CN338)

Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 A24 A25 A26 A27 A28 A29 A30 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 B24 B25 B26 B27 B28 B29 B30 Symbol SG MCNT IDTA0 IDTA1 IDTA2 IDTA3 SG IDTA4 IDTA5 IDTA6 IDTA7 SG IDTA8 IDTA9 IDTA10 IDTA11 SG IDTA12 IDTA13 IDTA14 IDTA15 SG IPOS0 IPOS1 IPOS2 IPOS3 +3.3VB CCODE0 CCODE1 SG SG MMPI1 +5.1VB CBSY CMD SACK SERR SBSY STS CACK CERR SG PEFCLK_M SG IRCLK1 SG IHSYNC0 SG IVSYNC0 SG IDCLK SG IHDEN0 SG IVDEN0 SG NC(RESERVE1) RESERVE2 ARST0 SG Name Signal ground LGC board connection detection signal Image data [0] Image data [1] Image data [2] Image data [3] Signal ground Image data [4] Image data [5] Image data [6] Image data [7] Signal ground Image data [8] Image data [9] Image data [10] Image data [11] Signal ground Image data [12] Image data [13] Image data [14] Image data [15] Signal ground Standard position signal (0) Standard position signal (1) Standard position signal (2) Standard position signal (3) +3.3V Color code signal (0) Color code signal (1) Signal ground Signal ground TS circuit starting request signal +5V System command busy Command data System status acknowledge System status error System status busy Status data System command acknowledge System command error Ground Clock signal for image data processing Ground Clock signal input for image data transmission Ground Horizontal scanning synchronized signal Ground Vertical scanning synchronized signal Ground Clock signal output for image data transmission Ground Data enable of the horizontal scanning direction Ground Data enable of the vertical scanning direction (output] Ground Not connected Data enable of the vertical scanning direction (input] LGC board reset Ground Active H H L L L L L L L L L L L L -
CN344 PWA-F-LGC (CN344) <-> DOUNLOARD JIG (LGC)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Symbol D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] RD-0 A[0] A[2] A[4] A[6] A[8] A[10] A[12] A[14] A[16] A[18] SG SG D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] CS2-0 A[1] A[3] A[5] A[7] A[9] A[11] A[13] A[15] A[17] ROMDT-0 +5.1VB ROMLD-1 Name ROM data bus [0] ROM data bus [2] ROM data bus [4] ROM data bus [6] ROM data read signal ROM address bus [0] ROM address bus [2] ROM address bus [4] ROM address bus [6] ROM address bus [8] ROM address bus [10] ROM address bus [12] ROM address bus [14] ROM address bus [16] ROM address bus [18] Signal ground Signal ground ROM data bus [1] ROM data bus [3] ROM data bus [5] ROM data bus [7] Chip select signal ROM address bus [1] ROM address bus [3] ROM address bus [5] ROM address bus [7] ROM address bus [9] ROM address bus [11] ROM address bus [13] ROM address bus [15] ROM address bus [17] Download board connection detection signal +5V External ROM loading status signal Active L L L
CN503 FAX (CN503) <-> SPEAKER (OPTION)

Pin No Symbol 1 SP+ 2 SPName Speaker output (+) Speaker output (-) Active -
CN362 PWA-F-LGC (CN362) <-> COLR-DEV-TNR-CLT, COLR-DEV-CLT, K-DEV-CLT, RGST-CLT, CST-U-TR-L-CLT, CST-U-TR-H-CLT, DRM-CLN-MOT, USD-TNR-FLL-SNR, K-DEV-CONT-CLT
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Symbol CLCTNS CLRRST +24VD1 +24VD1 CLCDVR CLMFDH +24VD1 +24VD1 CLKDVR CLMFCU +24VD1 +24VD1 BMDRCB SG DRCLB USTFL CLKDVP +5.1VB +24VD1 NC NC NC Name Color developer toner supply clutch drive signal Registration clutch drive signal +24V +24V Color developer drive clutch signal Upper transport clutch (Low speed) drive signal +24V +24V Black developer drive clutch signal Upper transport clutch (High speed) drive signal +24V +24V Drum cleaner brush motor drive signal Signal ground Drum cleaner brush motor drive signal Toner bag full detection sensor signal Black developer lifting clutch drive signal +5V +24V Not connected Not connected Not connected Active -
CN600 FAX (CN600) <-> MDM (CN401) (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Symbol TXOUT2 +5VA +12VB +3.3VB MOD2DMA-1 SG MEM2CS-0 +5.1VB MEMRD2-0 CLKOE-1 TXEN2-1 +5.1VB A[16] A[14] A[12] A[10] A[8] A[6] A[4] A[2] A[0] +5.1VB CEP1RST-0 +5.1VB SG CEPCLK SG D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] D[8] D[10] D[12] D[14] SG MOD2DET-0 SG DREQC2-1 DACKC2-0 RXIN2 AG -12VB AG MD2INT-1 MOD2CS-0 MOD2RST-0 SG RXEN2-1 MEMWRH2-0 MEMWRL2-0 A[18] A[17] A[15] A[13] A[11] A[9] A[7] A[5] A[3] A[1] CPURST-0 CEP2INT-1 +5.1VB +5.1VB IORD2-0 IOWR2-0 D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] D[9] D[11] D[13] D[15] +5.1VB +5.1VB CEP2CS-0 DREQD2-1 DACKD2-0 Name Transmitted data +5V +12V +3.3V Mode2 DMA signal Signal ground SRAM chip select signal +5V SRAM data read signal Clock out enable signal TX enable signal +5V MDM address bus [16] MDM address bus [14] MDM address bus [12] MDM address bus [10] MDM address bus [8] MDM address bus [6] MDM address bus [4] MDM address bus [2] MDM address bus [0] +5V CEP1 reset signal +5V Signal ground System clock signal Signal ground MDM data bus [0] MDM data bus [2] MDM data bus [4] MDM data bus [6] MDM data bus [8] MDM data bus [10] MDM data bus [12] MDM data bus [14] Signal ground Mode2 detection signal Signal ground Data request signal Data acknowledge signal Received data Analog ground -12V Analog ground Mode2 interrupt signal Mode2 chip select signal Mode2 reset signal Signal ground RX enable signal SRAM high byte write signal SRAM low byte write signal MDM address bus [18] MDM address bus [17] MDM address bus [15] MDM address bus [13] MDM address bus [11] MDM address bus [9] MDM address bus [7] MDM address bus [5] MDM address bus [3] MDM address bus [1] CPU reset signal CEP2 interrupt signal +5V +5V MDM data read signal MDM data write signal MDM data bus [1] MDM data bus [3] MDM data bus [5] MDM data bus [7] MDM data bus [9] MDM data bus [11] MDM data bus [13] MDM data bus [15] +5V +5V CEP2 chip select signal Data request signal Data acknowledge signal Active -
CN20
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
PWA-F-SLG (CN20) <-> PWA-F-CCD (CN19)

Symbol SG SG +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA SG NC BDI[9] BDI[8] BDI[7] BDI[6] BDI[5] BDI[4] BDI[3] BDI[2] BDI[1] BDI[0] SG SG GDI[9] GDI[8] GDI[7] GDI[6] GDI[5] GDI[4] GDI[3] GDI[2] GDI[1] GDI[0] SG SG RDI[9] RDI[8] RDI[7] RDI[6] RDI[5] RDI[4] RDI[3] RDI[2] RDI[1] RDI[0] SCLK-0 SDO-0 CEBLUE-0 SCLK-0 SDO-0 CEGREEN-0 SCLK-0 SDO-0 CERED-0 SHD-0 SHP-0 BLKCLP-0 ACLP-0 ADCLK-1 SG SG +5.1VB +5.1VB +5.1VB SG SG SG SH-0 CCDSW CK2-0 CK1-1 SHMONO-0 SHCOLOR-0 CP-0 RS-0 SG SG +10.5V +10.5V SG SG SG SG Name Signal ground Signal ground +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground Not connected Color (Blue) digital data bus [9] Color (Blue) digital data bus [8] Color (Blue) digital data bus [7] Color (Blue) digital data bus [6] Color (Blue) digital data bus [5] Color (Blue) digital data bus [4] Color (Blue) digital data bus [3] Color (Blue) digital data bus [2] Color (Blue) digital data bus [1] Color (Blue) digital data bus [0] Signal ground Signal ground Color (Green) digital data bus [9] Color (Green) digital data bus [8] Color (Green) digital data bus [7] Color (Green) digital data bus [6] Color (Green) digital data bus [5] Color (Green) digital data bus [4] Color (Green) digital data bus [3] Color (Green) digital data bus [2] Color (Green) digital data bus [1] Color (Green) digital data bus [0] Signal ground Signal ground Color (Red) digital data bus [9] Color (Red) digital data bus [8] Color (Red) digital data bus [7] Color (Red) digital data bus [6] Color (Red) digital data bus [5] Color (Red) digital data bus [4] Color (Red) digital data bus [3] Color (Red) digital data bus [2] Color (Red) digital data bus [1] Color (Red) digital data bus [0] Serial clock to image pre-processing IC(Blue) Serial data to image pre-processing IC(Brue) Data write signal to image pre-processing IC(Blue) Serial clock to image pre-processing IC(Green) Serial data to image pre-processing IC(Green) Data write signal to image pre-processing IC(Green) Serial clock to image pre-processing IC(Red) Serial data to image pre-processing IC(Red) Data write signal to image pre-processing IC(Red) Layer P/D sample hold signal Layer P sample hold signal Black level clamp signal Line clamp signal AD clock signal Signal ground Signal ground +5V +5V +5V Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Not used 4th line mode exchange signal Shift clock to phase-2 Shift clock to phase-1 Shift pulse (Mono) Shift pulse (Color) Clump pulse signal Reset signal Signal ground Signal ground +10.5V +10.5V Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Active .-
CN345 PWA-F-LGC (CN345) <-> MAIN-SW, FRNT-COV-SW, TNLVL-SHUT-SOL, TNLVL-SNR, SIDE-COV-SW, FED-L-SNR, RGST-SNR,FED-U-SNR, K-TRN-SW, TNR-MOT, TR2-POS-SNR, 2TR-CONT-CLT, 2TR-DRV-CLT
Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 Symbol RSTSW +24VD1 FRDSW SG SLTBTNA +24VD1 AG TNLED TNLVL2 TNLVL1 INREF AG +12VB SG SDCSW +5.1VB CTLFED SG NC NC SG CTUFED +5.1VB SG PSTPC +5.1VB SG KTNDET KTNR1A KTNR1B SG PSTRPD +5.1VB +24VD1 CLTRP +24VD1 CLTRR NC NC NC Name Main reset signal +24V Front cover opening/closing signal Signal ground Image quality sensor shutter solenoid drive signal +24V Analog ground Image quality sensor LED drive signal Image quality sensor detection signal Image quality sensor detection signal Image quality sensor reference signal Analog ground +12V Signal ground Side cover opening/closing switch signal +5V Lower drawer feed sensor detection signal Signal ground Not connected Not connected Signal ground Registration sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground Upper drawer feed sensor detection signal +5V Signal ground Black toner cartridge switch signal Toner motor drive signal A Toner motor drive signal B Signal ground 2nd transfer roller position detection sensor detection signal +5V +24V 2nd transfer roller contact clutch drive signal +24V 2nd transfer roller drive clutch drive signal Not connected Not connected Not connected Active Analog Analog Analog L L -
CN363 PWA-F-LGC (CN363) <-> USD-TNR-SNR

Pin No Symbol 1 +5.1VB 2 USTFL2 3 SG Name +5V Toner bag sensor drive signal Signal ground Active -
CN100 PWA-F-SYS (CN100) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (SYS)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Symbol DATA0 DATA2 DATA4 DATA6 DATA8 DATA10 DATA12 DATA14 A21 A19 A17 A15 A13 A11 A09 A07 A05 A03 RDX CS7-A CS7-B +3.3VA +3.3VA SG SG DATA1 DATA3 DATA5 DATA7 DATA9 DATA11 DATA13 DATA15 A20 A18 A16 A14 A12 A10 A08 A06 A04 A02 DWNLED /CS0 +3.3VA RMSL /WRX SG SG Name System data bus [0] System data bus [2] System data bus [4] System data bus [6] System data bus [8] System data bus [10] System data bus [12] System data bus [14] System address bus [19] System address bus [17] System address bus [15] System address bus [13] System address bus [11] System address bus [9] System address bus [7] System address bus [5] System address bus [3] System address bus [1] System read signal Chip select signal (7-A) Chip select signal (7-B) +3.3V +3.3V Signal ground Signal ground System data bus [1] System data bus [3] System data bus [5] System data bus [7] System data bus [9] System data bus [11] System data bus [13] System data bus [15] System address bus [18] System address bus [16] System address bus [14] System address bus [12] System address bus [10] System address bus [8] System address bus [6] System address bus [4] System address bus [2] System address bus [0] System address bus [20] System chip select signal +3.3V System control signal System write signal Signal ground Signal ground Active -
CN118 PWA-F-SYS (CN118) <-> PWA-F-DSP (J427)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Symbol XSCL-1A LP-1A WF-1A YD-1A INVGND BZON-0A CPPOW-1A LDCLK-1A LDDAT-1A LDLTH-1A LDON1-0A LDON0-0A SG +5.1VA +5.1VA +5.1VA +5.1VA CPRST-0A SG RST0-0A CTS0-0A SOUT[0] SIN[0] SG UD3-1A UD2-1A UD1-1A UD0-1A SG LCDEN-1A Name LCD data transmission clock LCD data latch pulse LCD frame signal LCD scanning line start signal Ground Buzzer-ON signal Panel connection detection signal LED serial clock LED serial data LED data latch signal LED drive selection signal (1) LED drive selection signal (0) Signal ground +5V +5V +5V +5V Reset signal Signal ground Key controller SIO transmission request Key controller SIO transmission clear Key controller SIO transmitted data Key controller SIO received data Signal ground LCD display data (3) LCD display data (2) LCD display data (1) LCD display data (0) Signal ground LCD enable signal Active H H H L H L L L L L L H
CN347 PWA-F-LGC (CN347) <-> MAIN-MOT

Pin No Symbol 1 NC 2 MAMBL 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 +24VD1 +24VD1 PG PG MAMGA MAMPL MAMCW MAMCLK MAMON SG +5.1VB Name Not used Main motor brake signal +24V +24V Power ground Power ground Main motor speed switching signal Main motor phase locked signal Main motor rotational direction signal Main motor reference clock signal Main motor ON/OFF signal Signal ground +5V Active L: Braking, H: Normal L: Low, H: High L: Normal L: CW, H: CCW L: ON, H: OFF -
CN119 PWA-F-SYS (CN119) <-> USB DEVICE

Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol VBUS DD+ SG Name +5V Serial data Serial data Signal ground Active -
CN120 PWA-F-SYS (CN120) <-> USB HOST

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Symbol VBUS DD+ SG VBUS DD+ SG Name +5V Serial data Serial data Signal ground +5V Serial data Serial data Signal ground Active -
CN348 PWA-F-LGC (CN348) <-> TRSP-MOT, DEV-MOT

Pin No A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 Symbol NC +24VD1 +24VD1 PG PG FDMGA FDMPL FDMCW FDMCK FDMON SG +5.1VB +5.1VB SG DEVMON DVMCLK DVMCW DVMPL NC PG PG +24VD1 +24VD1 NC Name Not connected +24V +24V Power ground Power ground Transport motor speed switching signal Transport motor phase locked signal Transport motor rotational direction signal Transport motor reference clock signal Transport motor ON/OFF signal Signal ground +5V +5V Signal ground Developer motor ON/OFF signal Developer motor reference clock signal Developer motor rotational direction signal Developer motor phase locked signal Not connected Power ground Power ground +24V +24V Not connected Active L: Low, H: High L: Normal L: CW, H: CCW L: ON, H: OFF L: ON, H: OFF L: CW, H: CCW L: Normal -
CN602 FAX (CN602) <-> DOWNLOAD JIG (FAX) (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Symbol D[0] D[2] D[4] D[6] RD-0 A[0] A[2] A[4] A[6] A[8] A[10] A[12] A[14] A[16] A[18] SG SG D[1] D[3] D[5] D[7] BOOTCS-0 A[1] A[3] A[5] A[7] A[9] A[11] A[13] A[15] A[17] ROMDET0-0 +5.1VB LEDDL-0 Name ROM data bus [0] ROM data bus [2] ROM data bus [4] ROM data bus [6] ROM data read signal ROM address bus [0] ROM address bus [2] ROM address bus [4] ROM address bus [6] ROM address bus [8] ROM address bus [10] ROM address bus [12] ROM address bus [14] ROM address bus [16] ROM address bus [18] Signal ground Signal ground ROM data bus [1] ROM data bus [3] ROM data bus [5] ROM data bus [7] Chip select signal ROM address bus [1] ROM address bus [3] ROM address bus [5] ROM address bus [7] ROM address bus [9] ROM address bus [11] ROM address bus [13] ROM address bus [15] ROM address bus [17] Download board connection detection signal +5V External ROM loading status signal Active L L
CN101 PWA-F-SYS (CN101) <-> FAX (CN701) (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 Symbol +5.1VB DA1 +5.1VB DD0 +5.1VB DD3 +5.1VB DD6 +5.1VB DD9 SG DD12 SG SG SG SG SG SG +3.3VB INTRQ +3.3VB +5.1VA -12VB SG +12VB DA0 DA2 IDECS DD1 DD2 DD4 DD5 DD7 DD8 DD10 DD11 DD13 DD14 DD15 /DIOR /DIOW /DMACK /DLDCS0 /RESET DMARQ NC FXWP SG SG NC Name +5V IDE Address [1] +5V Fax data bus [0] +5V Fax data bus [3] +5V Fax data bus [6] +5V Fax data bus [9] Signal ground Fax data bus [12] Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground Signal ground +3.3V IDE interrupt signal +3.3V +5V -12V Signal ground +12V IDE Address [0] IDE Address [2] IDE chip select signal Fax data bus [1] Fax data bus [2] Fax data bus [4] Fax data bus [5] Fax data bus [7] Fax data bus [8] Fax data bus [10] Fax data bus [11] Fax data bus [13] Fax data bus [14] Fax data bus [15] IDE IOR signal IDE IOW signal DM acknowledge signal Chip select signal Reset signal DM data request signal Not used FAX wake-up signal Signal ground Signal ground Not connected Active L -
CN121 PWA-F-SYS (CN121) <-> PWA-F-NIC (J3)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 Symbol +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA NC (/CS2P) D15 D14 D13 SG D12 D11 D10 SG D09 D08 /INTPRI SG A03 A02 A01 NC (SRXD) A00 D07 D06 A15 D05 A14 D04 A13 D03 A12 D02 A11 D01 A10 D00 A09 A04 A08 /RESET A07 /ACK A06 /CSP1 A05 NC (OEO) NC (STXD) RW SG A16 SG +3.3VA SG NC (DACK) +3.3VA /INTPR2 SG BRDNIN +3.3VA +3.3VA +3.3VA Name +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Not connected I/F data bus [15] I/F data bus [14] I/F data bus [13] Signal ground I/F data bus [12] I/F data bus [11] I/F data bus [10] Signal ground I/F data bus [9] I/F data bus [8] Interrupt 1 signal Signal ground I/F address bus [3] I/F address bus [2] I/F address bus [1] Not connected I/F address bus [0] I/F data bus [7] I/F data bus [6] I/F address bus [15] I/F data bus [5] I/F address bus [14] I/F data bus [4] I/F address bus [13] I/F data bus [3] I/F address bus [12] I/F data bus [2] I/F address bus [11] I/F data bus [1] I/F address bus [10] I/F data bus [0] I/F address bus [9] I/F address bus [4] I/F address bus [8] System reset signal I/F address bus [7] NIC acknowledge signal I/F address bus [6] Chip select signal I/F address bus [5] Not connected Not connected Read/write to NIC Signal ground I/F address bus [16] Signal ground +3.3V Signal ground Not connected +3.3V PR2 interrupt signal Signal ground NIC board in detection signal +3.3V +3.3V +3.3V Active L -
CN21
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5
PWA-F-SLG (CN21) <-> INV-EXP (CN1)

Symbol PG PG LMPON-0A +24VD4 FG Name Power ground Power ground Exposure lamp ON signal +24V Frame ground Active H -
CN126 PWA-F-SYS (CN126) <-> COIN CONTROLLER (OPTION)/COPY KEY CARD (OPTION)
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Symbol L/S FULL-C MONO-C B/W +5.1VA SG NC Name Paper size signal Full-color mode signal Mono-color mode signal Black and white mode signal +5V Signal ground Not connected Active -
CN31
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6
PWA-F-SDV (CN31) <-> SCAN-MOT

Symbol MOT-B(-) +24VD4 MOT-B MOT-A(-) +24VD4 MOT-A Name Scan motor drive signal B(-) +24V Scan motor drive signal B Scan motor drive signal A(-) +24V Scan motor drive signal A Active -
CN435 PWA-F-DRV (CN435) <-> REVLV-MOT (J587)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol +24VD2 RVMA RVMC RVMD RVMB +24VD2 Name +24V Revolver motor drive signal-A Revolver motor drive signal-C Revolver motor drive signal-D Revolver motor drive signal-B +24V Active -
CN2
Pin No 1 2 3 4
INV-EXP (CN2) <-> LP-EXPO

Symbol NC NC Name Exposure lamp high-voltage output (High) Not connected Not connected Exposure lamp high-voltage output (Low) Active -
CN349 PWA-F-LGC (CN349) <-> IPC (OPTION)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Symbol SG +5.1VB AD0 AD2 AD4 AD6 I/O0 I/O2 I/O4 I/O6 SG WE CSIP2 +5.1VB IPCSW SG +5.1VB AD1 AD3 AD5 AD7 I/O1 I/O3 I/O5 I/O7 SG OE IPRST +5.1VB SG Name Signal ground +5V System address bus [0] System address bus [2] System address bus [4] System address bus [6] System data bus [0] System data bus [2] System data bus [4] System data bus [6] Signal ground Write signal Chip select signal to IP2 +5V IPC connection detection signal Signal ground +5V System address bus [1] System address bus [3] System address bus [5] System address bus [7] System data bus [1] System data bus [3] System data bus [5] System data bus [7] Signal ground Output enable signal IPC reset signal +5V Signal ground Active L -
CN437 PWA-F-DRV (CN437) <-> EXIT-MOT (J588)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Symbol EXTMC +24VD2 EXTMA EXTMB +24VD2 EXTMD Name Exit motor drive signal-C +24V Exit motor drive signal-A Exit motor drive signal-B +24V Exit motor drive signal-D Active -
CN481 PS-HVT (CN481) <-> MAIN CHARGE WIRE (J615)

Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to main charge wire Active -
CN482 PS-HVT (CN482) <-> MAIN CHARGE GRID (J616)

Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to main charge grid Active -
J2
Pin No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IPC (J2) <-> FINISHER (J598) (OPTION)

Symbol RXD SG TXD SG NC NC NC NC F-CNT CNT-GND Name Receiver serial data Signal ground Transmitted serial data Signal ground Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Finisher connection detection signal Signal ground Active L -
CN483 PS-HVT (CN483) <-> DEVELOPER BIAS (COLOR) (J611)

Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to developer bias (Color) Active -
CN438 PWA-F-DRV (CN438) <-> IH-FAN-MOT (J951), OZN-FAN-MOT (J590)

Pin No 1 2 3 4 Symbol +24VD2 FAN3 +24VD2 FAN4 Name +24V IH control board cooling fan drive signal +24V Ozone exhaust fan drive signal Active -
CN484 PS-HVT (CN484) <-> DEVELOPER BIAS (BLACK) (J612)

Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to developer bias (Block) Active -
CN439 PWA-F-DRV (CN439) <-> INTRNL-FAN-MOT (J594)

Pin No Symbol 1 +24VD2 2 FAN2 Name +24V Internal cooling fan drive signal Active -
CN485 PS-HVT (CN485) <-> TRANSFER BIAS (1st) (J613)

Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to 1st transfer bias Active -
CN486 PS-HVT (CN486) <-> TRANSFER BIAS (2nd) (J610)

Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to 2nd transfer bias Active -
CN487 PS-HVT (CN487) <-> CLEANING BLADE BIAS (J614)

Pin No 1 Symbol Name High-voltage to cleaning blade Active -
A. version
SSE030001000
Trademarks described in this guide:

The official name of Windows 95 is Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System. The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System. The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System. The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System. The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, MS-DOS and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft products are trademarks or registered trademarks of US Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries. IBM PC/AT is a registered trademark of the US International Business Machine Corporation. Macintosh, AppleTalk, LaserWriter, and Mac OS are trademarks of US Apple Computer Inc. in the US and other countries. PostScript is trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. NetWare is trademark of Novell, Inc. Other company names and product names in this guide are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. No part of this guide may be copied in whole or part without permission. The contents of this guide may change without notification. The information indicated by this Service Support Guide may slightly differ from specifications, a catalog, advertising data, and printed matter. The contents of this Service Support Guide are confidential. Therefore, please manage severely not to leak to others. While every efforts has been made to ensure the accuracy of information in this guideline, ToshibaTEC cannot accept responsibility for any errors or omissions. 2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Revision Record
Document No.: SSE03001
Date Revision No. Pages Contents Remarks
CONTENTS 1. Product Overview ................................................................... 1-1 2. Quick Overview....................................................................... 2-1 3. Design Features...................................................................... 3-1
A. Basic Features .................................................................................................3-1 B. Network Printing Features.............................................................................3-12 C. Network Scanning Features...........................................................................3-16 D. e-Filing Features ............................................................................................3-17 E. Internet Fax Features.....................................................................................3-20 F. Fax Features.................................................................................................3-21 G. Management Tools .......................................................................................3-24 H. Advanced Technology....................................................................................3-26
4. Configuration .......................................................................... 4-1

A. System Configuration.......................................................................................4-1 B. Copy Paper Configuration................................................................................4-2 C. Original Configuration ......................................................................................4-3 D. e-STUDIO3511/4511 Product Codes...............................................................4-4 E. e-STUDIO3511/4511 Accessories ...................................................................4-5 F. Product Codes for Options...............................................................................4-6 G. Accessories for Options ...................................................................................4-8
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (MR-3015)............................................................... 4-8 Platen Cover (KA-3511PC) ..................................................................................................... 4-8 Paper Feed Pedestal (KD-1011)............................................................................................. 4-8 Drawer Module (MY-1021)...................................................................................................... 4-9 Large Capacity Feeder (KD-1012) .......................................................................................... 4-9 Finisher (MJ-1022) Hanging type............................................................................................ 4-9 Finisher (MJ-1023) Console type.......................................................................................... 4-10 Finisher (MJ-1024) Console full feature type ........................................................................ 4-10 Bridge Unit (KN-3511)........................................................................................................... 4-11 Hole Punch Unit (MJ-6004)................................................................................................... 4-11 Staple cartridge (STAPLE-600, 1600, 2000) ........................................................................ 4-11 Expansion Memory (GC-1180) ............................................................................................. 4-11 FAX board (GD-1150) ........................................................................................................... 4-12 FAX board 2nd line (GD-1160) ............................................................................................. 4-12 Damp heater (MF-3511)........................................................................................................ 4-12 Key counter (MU-8, 10)......................................................................................................... 4-12 Work table (KK-3511)............................................................................................................ 4-13 Wireless LAN adapter (GN-1010) ......................................................................................... 4-13 PCI slot (GO-1030) ............................................................................................................... 4-13 Scrambler board (GP-1030).................................................................................................. 4-13
H. Replacement Units.........................................................................................4-14 I. Supplies .........................................................................................................4-15 J. Software Configuration...................................................................................4-16

e-STUDIO3511/4511 series CD-ROM.................................................................................. 4-16
5. Specifications ......................................................................... 5-1

A. e-STUDIO3511/4511 Specifications ................................................................5-1
Copying speed ........................................................................................................................ 5-2
B. Options.............................................................................................................5-3
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF).................................................................... 5-3 Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) .................................................................................................... 5-3 Drawer Module (DM)............................................................................................................... 5-3 Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) ................................................................................................. 5-4 Finisher (1) Hanging Type....................................................................................................... 5-4 Expansion Memory ................................................................................................................. 5-4 Finisher (2) Console Type....................................................................................................... 5-5 Finisher (3) Console Full Feature Type .................................................................................. 5-6 Hole punch unit (MJ-6004)...................................................................................................... 5-6 FAX board ............................................................................................................................... 5-7
C. Software...........................................................................................................5-8
TOSHIBA Viewer/TOSHIBA Viewer via Network System Requirements............................... 5-8
6. Service Features ..................................................................... 6-1

A. Firmware Updating...........................................................................................6-1
Using PC via serial interface ................................................................................................... 6-2 Using Jig board ....................................................................................................................... 6-2
B. Estimated Installation Time ..............................................................................6-3 C. Supplies ...........................................................................................................6-4 D. PM Kit ..............................................................................................................6-5 E. PM Kit of Options .............................................................................................6-6
Paper Feed Pedestal (KD-1011)/Cassette Module (MY-1021) .............................................. 6-6 Large Capacity Feeder (KD-1012) .......................................................................................... 6-6 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (MR-3015)............................................................... 6-6
F. Customer Maintenance Items ..........................................................................6-7 G. Preventive Maintenance (PM) Items ................................................................6-8

Lubrication items ................................................................................................................... 6-12 Replacement item (a)............................................................................................................ 6-13 Replacement item (b)............................................................................................................ 6-13 Replacement item (c) ............................................................................................................ 6-13 Replacement item (d)............................................................................................................ 6-14 Replacement item (e)............................................................................................................ 6-14
H. Recommended Monthly Copy/Print Volume ..................................................6-15 I. Method of Displaying Counters ......................................................................6-15
7. Service Support ...................................................................... 7-1 8. Technical Training-Digital Copier.......................................... 8-1 9. Service Requirements ............................................................ 9-1 10. Warranty .............................................................................. 10-1
1. Product Overview
The Toshiba e-STUDIO3511/4511 is the first network-ready MFP system, grown out of the following backgrounds and user needs: Innovations in Information Technology and proliferation of the Internet carry an enormous amount of data. Increased demand for a copier with versatility. The copier is expected to increase office productivity by adding network print and scan capabilities. The e-STUDIO3511/4511 has been developed under Toshibas network-ready MFP Strategy, which allows the MFP system to be connected to the network anytime, anywhere, in a simple manner, achieving a significant increase in office productivity and reduction in the TCO (Total Cost of Ownership). The eSTUDIO3511/4511, with network printing and scanning capabilities built in, serves as multifunction printer interface and information gateway. It is designed to input and output both paper and electronic documents with ease, for increased efficiency in sharing and utilizing information over a network. Therefore, in the heyday of the Internet, it appeals to demanding users who seek greater cost-effectiveness, scalability, and openness with an eye towards the development of future business models or solutions. The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is an authentic black-and-white MFP system with all options, large-capacity black toner cartridge, and high full color copying, printing and scanning. It features a copying/printing speed of 35 cpm/ppm, or 45 cpm/ppm in black-and-white mode and 11 cpm/ppm in full color mode. It targets users who demand a full-scale black-and-white MFP system with a compact body, sufficiently fast output speed, high image quality, advanced paper handling capabilities, and superb network connectivity-plus full color functions-for a reasonable cost.
Product Concept behind the e-STUDIO3511/4511

Toshiba developed the e-STUDIO3511/4511 to meet current needs and win new customers, based on the following two key concepts:
June 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
1-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 Design Features
e-Bridge Technology
The key concept behind the e-STUDIO3511/4511 is e-Bridge Technology, featuring an all-in-one architecture to implement copying, network printing, network scanning and internet faxing. In other words, it integrates these features on one board. Most MFP models require an optional printer board, Network Interface Card, and Document Controller to upgrade it to a network printer and scanner. e-STUDIO3511/4511, on the other hand, has the e-Bridge Controller built in, so that as soon as it is installed, it can be flexibly connected to the users network configurations and is ready to serve as a network printer and scanner. In addition, the e-Bridge Controller increases efficiency and productivity in concurrent processing of copying, printing, and scanning.
e-Bridge Technology builds the following 4 bridges: 1. Bridge between paper documents and electronic data Paper-based originals or documents can be easily converted into electronic form and filed electronically. Then the electronic data can be transferred or shared over the network in conjunction with various scanning and e-filing functions. This is beneficial to users who aim at increasing their work efficiency, while saving the expenses of document management, fax communications, and postal charges. 2. Bridge between users and MFP The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is designed for quick installation, effortless access, and easy operationevident in the tilt type control panel, wide LCD touch panel, integrated user interface, and convenient web utilities. 3. Bridge between MFP and other networked devices The e-STUDIO3511/4511 flexibly supports a variety of network configurations. Even mobile or wireless communications equipment-notebook computers, mobile phones, and PDAs-can be easily connected to the e-STUDIO3511/4511 anytime, anywhere. 4. Bridge between users and Toshiba Toshiba provides the Remote Device Management System over the Internet. If the e-STUDIO3511/4511 is connected to the network, you can monitor its status at a users site and obtain real-time maintenance over the Internet. Thanks to Toshibas original one board architecture, firmware upgrading is easily and precisely performed. An information gateway, e-SUTUDIO3511/4511 series bridges the gap between services, customers and business partners through the Internet. Toshiba provides suitable connectivity anytime and anywhere with ease, convenience and reliability.
1-2
Versatility of Black and White with the Advantage of Color

The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is a Real Black and White MFP system, with standard network capability, high productivity, high image quality, high reliability, versatile functions, and excellent paper handling features. In addition, it provides color functions for users as needed. Color needs have been increasing in the market, but customers always have difficulty with expensive color printout costs. Thats why color MFPs are unpopular in offices. The e-STUDIO3511/4511, however, is here to clear the customers hesitation and make color MFPs more accessible. The e-STUDIO3511/4511 inherits the productivity, reliability, functions, paper handling capabilities and CPC (Cost per Copy) of the conventional black and white MFP system, and it also provides the color functions and attractive full color CPC. This newly designed MFP system truly provides the multiple functions that you need. There are many potential users who would like to, but hesitate to, install a full color MFP system in their offices, due to the following concerns: Most documents are copied or printed in black and white, only a few in color. The initial cost and CPC are much higher, compared to a black and white MFP system. It is not always necessary to make copies or printouts in full color mode, since most documents are created in black and white. Using a dedicated color MFP, users have to bear the full color CPC even for black and white copies or printouts. This is a financial burden on users who create most of their documents in black and white. The Versatility of Black and White with the Advantage of Color concept appeals to potential users who frequently uses black and white copies/prints, but also would like to have full color capabilities on demand in their offices-at reduced cost and full utilization of their limited office space. The conventional full dedicated color model charges the users full color CPC even for black and white copies or printouts. The Auto Color Selection Mode of the e-STUDIO3511/4511, on the other hand, automatically distinguishes black and white and full color originals from color-mixed originals. The result is a Black and White CPC for black and white originals and full color CPC for full color originals. Therefore, users dont have to worry about the cost of outputs from color-mixed originals without pre-scanning. This machine provides advanced color features as described above, without sacrificing the productivity of black and white copies. The big black toner cartridge, developing unit only for black, and black sensor separately equipped from the RGB sensor ensure the same black and white productivity as a conventional black and white MFP system. The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is Copying/Printing/Scanning/Faxing System with occasional full color capability.
1-3
2. Quick Overview
Configuration
Standard NIC, All-in-One Board, Auto Duplexing Unit, Stack Feed Bypass, 2 Drawers Paper Handling Options FAX, Wireless, Security Options
General Features
Wide Control Panel Half VGA LCD Touch Panel Display and Tilt Type Control Panel Powerful Paper Handling Stackless Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU) Stack Feed Bypass (SFB) Optional Sheet-through Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Max. 3,700-sheet Paper Capacity and Max. 5 Feed Paper Ways Various Media Capabilities Optional Finishers (Sort / Group, Stapling, Cascade, Offset and Saddle-Stitch) Optional Hole Punch Unit
Copier Features
Copying Speed e-STUDIO3511: e-STUDIO4511: Black and White Mode Full Color Mode Black and White Mode Full Color Mode 35 cpm (A4/LT) 11 cpm (A4/LT) 45 cpm (A4/LT) 11 cpm (A4/LT)
Easy Black and White and Full Color Image Output (Versatile Copy Modes) Black, Full Color, Twin Color and Auto Color Selection (ACS) Mode High Image Quality 2400 600 dpi with Smoothing Technology, 256-Step Gradations Fast First Copy and Short Warm-up Time First Copy Output Time: 8.0 seconds (Black and White)/18.0 seconds (Full Color) Warm-up Time: Approx. 40 seconds Memory Copy (Standard 256MB Page Memory with Optional 256MB and 60 GB HDD) Job Reservation Convenient Electronic Sort Electronic Sort, Magazine Sort and Alternation Economical Energy Saving Functions Energy Saver, Auto Energy Saver, Auto Sleep Mode and Weekly Timer Copying Mixed-Size Originals and Mixed B&W/Color Originals (ACS)
2-1
Printer Features
Printer Featuring Digital Copier-Specific Capabilities Easy-to-install and Easy-to-use Printer Driver Standard 256MB Memory and 60GB Hard Disk Standard PCL6 and PostScript3 (clone) Compatible with popular office networks Convenient Printing Features N-in-1 Printing, Private Print and Proof Print Optional Wireless Printing (IEEE802.11b)
Network Scanner Features

Scan to File Scan to E-mail Scan to e-filing Color Scan
e-filing Features
Functional Overview e-filing Boxes and Folders Public Box (1), User Box (200) 100 folders per Box Single/Dual Agent e-filing functions (Method to store the document) e-filing Operability
Internet Fax Feature

Economical Internet Fax
Network Fax Feature

Network Fax (Internet: Standard, PSTN: Option)
FAX Features
Optional Walk-up Fax (Super G3/G3) Super G3 Fax 2nd Line Option JBIG data compression Memory capacity (**MB) Versatile Transmission Features Public Mail Box/Mail Box (ITU-T F-code) Transmission/Reception of Large-Size Fax Duplex Transmission and two sided printing
2-2
3. Design Features
A. Basic Features Wide Control Panel
The e-STUDIO3511/4511 enhanced Control Panel and Touch Panel Display provides users with better viewability and more comfortable key entry operations. Half-VGA Touch Panel Display The e-STUDIO3511/4511is equipped with the half-VGA Touch Panel Display.
The e-STUDIO3511/4511 adheres to the design of user interface and operability of its predecessor, model e-STUDIO35/45. However, a big difference is the size of the Touch Panel Display-the eSTUDIO3511/4511 features a wide Touch Panel Display. This allows more icons or information, divided into separate screens for the e-STUDIO35/45, to be shown on one single screen. Also, the wide Touch Panel Display shortens the screen flow for an operation, so its much easier for users to access a mode or function that they are looking for. In addition, spacing between the icons is wide enough to avoid the occurrence of misoperation by mistakenly pressing more than one key.
3-1
QWERTY Keyboard The e-STUDIO3511/4511 features a responsive QWERTY touch keyboard. This key arrangement is more familiar to users who are used to operating PCs and allows them to key in text or symbols more smoothly.
Tilt Type Control Panel The Control Panel tilts to a convenient viewing angle to achieve physically stress-free operability for any users, as illustrated below. For example, its very accessible for people sitting in a wheelchair who need to operate the copier.
3-2
Powerful Paper Handling

The rich paper handling units, options, and capabilities, which are fully utilised in conjunction with the advanced editing or finishing functions, save paper and result in increased work efficiency. Stackless Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU) Two-sided copies/prints are delivered quickly and easily thanks to the stackless type Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU). Another benefit of the ADU is that it doesnt take up the space of one paper feed drawer, since it is stackless and attached to the right side of the machine. Stack Feed Bypass (SFB) Various types of paper, including thick paper, OHP sheets and envelopes, can be fed through the Stack Feed Bypass (SFB), which provides more flexibility in copying/printing documents. Up to 100 sheets of paper can be fed through the SFB. Optional Sheet-through Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) The optional Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) quickly and automatically feeds twosided originals, and turns them over for copying of both sides. This reduces manual labour and minimizes waiting time. This sheet-through type RADF provides faster productivity than ordinary sheet-stack type RADF. The sheet-stack type RADF feeds each sheet of original separately, places it on the glass, and scans it by moving its scanner sensors, causing scanning to be much slower. This sheet-through type RADF, however, can feed originals without stacking the sheets on glass, because the originals are moved over the stacked scanner sensors, instead of moving the scanner sensors over the originals. A maximum of 100 sheets of paper (from LD to ST-R, A3 to A5-R) can be stacked on the RADF at a time. After all are scanned, an additional 100 sheets of paper can be placed on the RADF and scanned continuously. In total, up to 200 images can be stored in the copier for one copy job in simplex mode, and 400 images in duplex mode. The RADF operates in coordination with various features, including the Automatic Magnification Selection (AMS) and Automatic Paper Selection (APS). This allows users to make copies on the right sized paper in the right size without any manual key operations. The RADF also accepts different sized originals at the same time, as long as their widths are the same. Maximum 3,700-sheet Paper Capacity The optional Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) holds a maximum of 2,500 sheets of LT/A4-sized paper. With the standard two drawers and the Stack Feed Bypass (SFB), a maximum of 3,700 sheets of paper can be loaded. Thanks to such large-capacity paper sources, paper does not need to be replenished so frequently. The LCF is a pedestal type so that it can be installed at the bottom of the copier. 2,500 sheets of paper in total can be loaded side by side. When the first half of the paper runs out, the other half of paper is shifted to the other side to be fed into the copier.
3-3
Maximum 5 Feed Paper Ways With the optional Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) and Cassette Module in addition to the standard two drawers and the Stack Feed Bypass (SFB), the number of paper sources available can increase to five, which allows users to load several types and sizes of paper at the same time in a single copier. A Variety of Media Acceptable Users are offered a wide range of options to create documentation. High quality copy or print images can be obtained on various types of media, including: Thick paper OHP sheets Envelopes Postal cards Tab sheets (Applicable date may vary by region) Optional Finishers The optional Finishers increase the speed and efficiency of making multiple copy/print sets and simplify complex jobs to produce professional looking documentation. Three types of optional Finishers are available: a Hanging type Finisher MJ-1022*, a Multistaple Finisher MJ-1023 and a Saddle-stitch Finisher MJ-1024. When the e-STUDIO3511/4511 is used in the network, copies are ejected onto the upper tray and printouts onto the lower tray by default. When adding the optional Fax Board, incoming faxes print to the Central Output Tray.
* The Hanging type Finisher MJ-1022 is only available for the e-STUDIO3511.
The Finisher delivers outstanding performance in combination with a variety of finishing related modes, as follows: Sort/Group This function is available for all three Finishers. Collated or grouped sets of copies/prints can be made. Stapling This function is available for all three Finishers. Copy/Print sets can be stapled automatically. See the table below for details. Cascade This capability is available for all three Finishers. When making a large number of copies/prints, if the first bin becomes full, documents will automatically be fed into the second bin. When the second bin also becomes full, and if the first bin is already empty, documents will automatically be fed back into the first bin. Offset This capability is available for all three Finishers. Sorted copy/print sets are separated by slightly offsetting alternate sets toward the front of the tray. Saddle-stitch This function is available exclusively for the Saddle-stitch Finisher MJ-1024. The Saddle Stitch mode staples at the centre and folds magazine-sorted outputs.
3-4
Finisher Type and Staple Positions
Optional Hole Punch Unit The Hole Punch Unit is available only when the Multi-staple Finisher MJ-1023 and Saddlestitch Finishers MJ-1024 are installed. Holes are punched in a set of copies automatically to make it easier to bind the document. It increases the productivity of punching holes in sets of copied/printed document drastically.
* The number of holes punched and their positions vary by region.
3-5
Easy Black-and-White and Full Color Image Output The e-STUDIO3511/4511 provides the following four color modes: Black Mode All originals are copied or printed out in black and white, regardless of their color. Full Color Mode All originals are copied or printed out in full color. ACS (Auto Color Selection) Mode Determines whether originals are full colored or black and white. Full color originals are automatically copied/printed out in full color, and black and white ones in Black and White. When the e-STUDIO3511/4511 is placed in ACS (Auto Color Selection) mode, the black and white pages are automatically copied in black-and-white using the black toner only, and the full color pages in full color using color toner-even if an original contains both Black and White and full color pages. This prevents users from making copies or printouts in unexpected color mode. As a result, they can save paper and the time of redoing the copy or print jobs. In addition, as illustrated below, users only bear the higher full color CPC when making full color copies or printouts, not when making black and white ones. This significantly reduces their CPC.
3-6
High Copy/Print Image Quality The technologies adopted for the e-STUDIO3511/4511 brings users image quality, which best fits their documentation needs. 2400 x 600 dpi with Smoothing Technology The e-STUDIO3511/4511 produces exceptionally sharp images with a copying resolution of 2400 x 600 dpi. Although original images are digitized at a high resolution of 600 dpi, the copying resolution is enhanced to 2400 x 600 dpi, thanks to the smoothing technology, resulting in excellent text quality. The smoothing algorithm changes the 600 dpi scanned and stored image in memory to a finer and smoother one. During the actual printing process, changing the laser beam lighting period and positioning in a pixel makes it possible to precisely control print dots in the very fine width of one fourth of a 600 dpi pixel. In the copying process, the line width of text can be reduced to ensure that image quality does not deteriorate, and that fonts etc. are razor sharp.
256-Step Gradations The e-STUDIO3511/4511 provides high resolution with 256 gradations for each color element, enabling the reproduction of halftones with greater clarity.
3-7
Original Mode The e-STUDIO3511/4511 offers users a variety of original mode options for optimum copy or print image quality. The table below briefly describes each original mode option and shows you whether it is available in color mode. Text Available in Black mode: Yes Available in Full Color mode: Yes This mode is suitable for obtaining sharp (black) text and fine line on a copy image. Text/Photo Available in Black mode: Yes (default) Available in Full Color mode: Yes This mode maintains high image quality of both text and photo. It is suitable for copying an original containing both text and photo. Photo Available in Black mode: Yes Available in Full Color mode: Yes This mode is suitable for reproducing details of a photo image printed on a photographic paper, preventing the image from looking bluish. Printed Image Available in Black mode: No Available in Full Color mode: Yes This mode is suitable for reproducing an original with high fidelity, eliminating moirs from a halftone original (offset printings). Twin Color Mode Originals are copied in black and red or any color that users choose. The following three options are available: [RED TO RED OTHER BLACK]..........Red in an original Copied in red Others in an original Copied in black [BLACK TO BLACK OTHER RED] .....Black in an original Copied in black Others in an original Copied in red [TWIN COLOR SELECT] ....................Color option 1 Copied in black Others Copied in Color option 2 Map Available in Black mode: No Available in Full Color mode: Yes This mode is suitable for obtaining a sharper copy image of a map, which contains both black and color text in a color background. Image Smoothing Available in Black mode: Yes Available in Full Color mode: No This mode is suitable for reproducing halftones in Black and White copying. Image Quality Adjustment The e-STUDIO3511/4511 allows users to adjust copy/print image quality to obtain their desired copy or print output through a very simple operation on the Control Panel. The table below describes adjustment modes that the users can access from the Control Panel. Color Balance This mode is intended to adjust the color balance of copies by altering the intensity of the subtractive primary colors: Y, M, C and K. RGB This mode is intended to adjust the color balance by altering the intensity of the additive primary colors: R, G and B. Sharpness This mode is intended to enhance the edges of text or fine lines. Background This mode is intended to eliminate noise or darker color from the background to enhance contrast on a copy image. One Touch Adjustment This mode is intended to make a copy or print image look warm, cool, vivid or clear, depending on user needs, through a simple operation on the Control Panel.
3-8
Reduced First Copy Time and Warm-up Time The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is in a ready-to-copy/print state as soon as it is turned on, reducing the stress of users accustomed to waiting several minutes for dedicated full color MFP models to fully warm up. The first copy time of the e-STUDIO3511/4511 is approximately 7 seconds in black mode, and 17 seconds in full color mode. In addition, thanks to the Twin IH (Induction Heating) Fusing Technology, its warm-up time has been reduced to 40 seconds. Memory Copy The 128 MB Page Memory Board and 60 GB Hard Disk Drive come standard with the eSTUDIO3511/4511. In addition, the 256 MB page memory is separately available. This enables access to various digital features including Scan Once/Copy Many, Electronic Sort, Magazine Sort and N-in-1. The 60GB HDD memory capacity will suit users who frequently work with full color, large-volume, graphics-intensive documents that require a large amount of storage space. Job Preset The e-STUDIO3511/4511 provides the auto job start or job preset function, designed to preset up to five jobs in total, including copy jobs, scan jobs and optional fax jobs, through an operation on the Control Panel-while the copier is warming up or while one job is progress. Combined with concurrent multifunction processing, this function enables fast output of these jobs, one right after another, without wasting time at the copier. Convenient Electronic Sorting Electronic sorting stores images to memory and then outputs prints copies in order, on demand. This feature is available both in Black mode and Full Color mode and improves convenience for users with the following two functions: Alternation With LT or LT-R/A4 or A4-R paper loaded in the copier, each copy set is alternately stacked vertically and horizontally in the Central Output Tray, making it easier to separate the copies. Magazine Sort Double sided, two page spread copy sets can be produced in proper magazine order, providing fast and efficient magazine page layout. With the optional Saddlestitch Finisher, magazine sorted output can be folded and stapled, so that producing magazines becomes very simple. A combination of the Saddle-stitch Finisher and electronic sorting achieves fully automated document finishing, from magazine sorting to saddle stitching and folding of the copy sets.
3-9
Energy Saving Functions The e-STUDIO3511/4511 minimizes power consumption with the following energy saving functions: Energy Saver/Auto Energy Saver This function automatically lowers the fuser unit temperature to stand by with the minimum power consumption when the copier is not being used for a selectable period of time (3 - 60 minutes). Auto Sleep Mode This function automatically cuts off unnecessary electricity to the fuser unit when the copier is not being used for a selectable period of time (3 240 minutes). Weekly Timer The Weekly Timer function allows users to set an automatic start up or shut down time for the unit for each weekday. Taking advantage of the Weekly Timer function eliminates energy waste caused by users who forget to turn off the unit when leaving the office. When it is certain that the copier will remain unused for a long time, these energy saving capabilities will reduce power consumption and cut electricity costs. Advanced Digital Features The e-STUDIO3511/4511 provides a variety of convenient digital copier-specific functions, allowing users to create documentation more flexibly, without any additional manual labour: Edge Erase A white border is created along the edges of the copy, eliminating black stains that are reproduced on the copy. Image Shift An image can be shifted slightly to create a margin for binding. Dual-Page Copying The facing pages of a book or magazine are copied page by page onto two separate sheets of paper. X-Y Zoom Different reproduction ratios can be set for the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) axes. Trimming/Masking Copy only the desired area of an original by specifying the area to be copied (trimming) or to be erased (masking). Mirror Image Copies are made with images completely reversed and side by side. 2-in-1, 4-in-1 or 8-in-1 (Duplex) A two- or four-page document can be reduced and copied onto one sheet of paper. Job Memory Copying (with the template) Utilised in conjunction with the template functions, this function allows users to store a combination of frequently used copy settings in advance, including reproduction ratio, copy density and quantity and paper size. Annotation and Page Numbering Date- and time-stamp copies, or add page numbers. Cover Sheet and Sheet Insertion A blank sheet or printed sheet of paper can be inserted as follows: a blank front cover page/a printed front cover page/blank front and back cover pages/a printed front cover page and a blank back cover page Rotation Copy If the orientation of an original is different from that of paper loaded in a drawer, a scanned original can be oriented appropriately to fit the paper. Image Direction This function is used to print a landscape oriented document in portrait orientation.
3-10
Other Convenient Features Interrupt While one copy job is in progress, it can be interrupted using the INTERRUPT key and another copy job can be initiated. Once completed the interrupted copy job will resume. Department Code The Department Code setting assists an administrator in knowing how many copies have been made per group or department. The administrator is authorized to print out the copy counter and to reset the counters. Languages Selection The language used to display messages on the Touch Panel Display can be selected. Six languages are available by the factory defaults. Users can display Control Panel messages in the commonly used language in their region. Paper Volume Indication The paper level or the amount of paper remaining in a drawer can be displayed on the Touch Panel Display. Help/Info. Function Making full use of clear text description and graphics, the Touch Panel Display provides users with explicit, step-by-step troubleshooting guidance, including the location of occasional misfeeds and the procedure to refill toner.
3-11
B. Network Printing Features

Printer Featuring Digital Copier-Specific Capabilities Compared to a conventional stand-alone type printer, the e-STUDIO3511/4511 provides faster printing and superior print capabilities with digital copier-specific functions. Installing a variety of paper handling options provides functions which usually cannot be achieved using the conventional standalone type printer, as follows: Duplex printing Sorting Stapling Magazine sorting Optional hole punching Easy-to-install/use Printer Driver Depending on the operating environment, various installations are available to help users install the printer driver easily: Installer The installer in the CD-ROM automatically guides users to install the printer drivers and other software. Point and Print The printer driver can be installed by simply double-clicking the queue displayed in the network. TopAccess TopAccess allows users to download the printer drivers and other software from the Toshiba e-STUDIO3511/4511. The printer driver is designed to pursue the following: Intuitive user interface Users can access and utilise modes or functions at a glance of the user interface. They can perform their desired print functions without feeling frustrated by using the printer driver. This improves their work efficiency. Preview windows The users can preview what a printout will look like before starting the print job. Thanks to the user-friendly interface and preview windows as illustrated below, they can utilise a combination of advanced editing and finishing modes that the eSTUDIO3511/4511 features, such as a combination of duplex printing and magazine sort printing. This allows them to create more professional-looking documents on their own, while saving their time, cost and paper.
3-12
Standard 256 MB Memory The e-STUDIO3511/4511 comes with 256 MB of RAM as standard (128 MB for the main memory and 128 MB for the page memory), and can be expanded up to 512 MB. It is recommended to upgrade the memory, when handling a large size of print jobs or full color, high-resolution text and graphics, such as PostScript 3data. Large-capacity Hard Disk A 60 GB large-capacity hard disk comes equipped with the e-STUDIO3511/4511, allowing storage of large-sized, full color print or scanned images. As a result, it facilitates electronic filing, electronic sorting and fax transmission and reception. Standard PCL6 and PostScript3 The e-STUDIO3511/4511 provides PCL5c/PCL6 (5e + XL) and optional Adobe PostScript 3, with faster printing of complex graphics, more efficient data streams for reduced network traffic, and improved print quality, truer to the original. Black and White: PCL6

Full Color: PCL5c , PostScropt 3 Compatible with Popular Office Networks The e-STUDIO3511/4511 can serve as a network printer. Users, considering how the unit will operate with their existing workgroup PC and network OS, can feel comfortable about the prospects of adding the e-STUDIO3511/4511 to a standard PC setting: OS supporting the printer driver: Windows: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP Macintosh: Mac OS 8.6, Mac OS 9.X, Mac OS X ver10.1/10.2 Unix filter Solaris (SUN): v 2.6/2.7/7.8/8/9 HP-UX: ver. 10.20, 11i.v1.6 AIX (IBM): 4.3.3, 5L Linux: Red Hat 6.2/7.1/7.2/7.3/8.0 SuSE Linux ver7.0 Mandrake Linux ver 7.1/9 Turbo Linux 8 SCO: UnixWare 7, Open Unix 8 Standard Interface Parallel, Ethernet 10/100BaseT and USB1.1 Network OS(for client/server) Windows 2000, Windows NT 4.0, NetWare 4-6 Network OS(for Peer-to-Peer) Windows 98/Me/2000, Windows NT 4.0/XP Protocols IPX/SPX, TCP/IP, EtherTalk, NetBIOS on TCP/IP, LPR/LPD, IPP (ver.1.1), NetWare P-SERVER, Port 9100
3-13
Optimal Color Selected for Business Documents The e-STUDIO3511/4511 automatically selects one of the following copy/print modes to provide the best image quality, according to the type of image or document to print out: Photo This applies proper color quality for printing photos. Presentation This applies proper image quality for printing a presentation. Web This applies proper image quality for printing a Web page. N-in-1 Printing This function enables multiple originals to be condensed onto one or both sides of a single copy sheet for a maximum of 32-in-1 (16-in-1 duplex). This is particularly suitable for document reference files, for which print size is not usually an issue. Users who have to carry a lot of paperwork can reduce the bulk and weight of lengthy documents. Private Print The private print function allows users to print out a confidential document via an operation on the Touch Panel Display. A print job is password protected on the computer. Then the job is sent to the copier and stored in the hard disk. After that, the users approach the copier, enter the password on the Touch Panel Display, and then start printing out the job. Proof Print The proof print function is an additional feature of the Private Print function. When several copies of a document are to be printed, the proof print function allows users to print out one copy on a trial basis to check the output first. If the output is satisfactory, they can continue printing the rest of copies. Optional Wireless Solution (IEEE802.11b Compliant) The e-STUDIO3511/4511 optionally supports the external adapter for the FX-DS110-APL Micro Access Point with TOSHIBA Logo, provided by CONTEC Co., Ltd. FXDS110-APL complies with IEEE Standard 802.11b for wireless LAN, independent of operating systems or protocol. This will help users easily implement a wireless LAN solution in their offices.
3-14
Other Convenient Features The table below describes other functions which increase in convenience and usability in printer mode. Double-Sided Printing The Auto Duplexing Unit (ADU) provides double-sided print. Taking full advantage of the double-sided print capability saves paper. Cover Sheet and Sheet Insertion - A blank sheet of paper or printed page can be inserted as a front and/or back cover page. Special types of paper can also be inserted at the desired page. Scheduled Print This allows users to specify the date and time a print job is to be performed. Users can schedule the printer to print out the large-volume documents in their offhours, which minimizes waiting time for other jobs. Watermark Users can add a watermark either on the first page or all pages of a document. Besides the default watermarks, users can make preferred watermark settings, including the font size and type, darkness, angle and positions, and create a new watermark by themselves. Image Overlay This allows users to print a job to an image overlay file to store it as an image overlay. Then the users can use this stored image to overlay on another print job to create a new image. Stored Job Print(e-filing) This function is similar to the Document Storage function mentioned in the Copier Features chapter. Frequently printed documents can be temporarily stored in the copiers hard disk. The stored document can be printed immediately or at any time through a simple operation on the Control Panel or by selecting the stored job on TopAccess. E-mail Printing This function is used to save print data, including PS data, PCL job data and TIFF in a file, and e-mail the file as an attachment to a remote copier. The print data can be printed out from there. IBM AS/400 Computer Printing Support The e-STUDIO3511/4511 supports the IBM AS/400, which has a substantial share as a Unix workstation. WHQL and Novell-certified The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is a WHQL (Windows Hardware Quality Labs) and Novell certified MFP model, which ensures its correct functioning or operation of the copier.
3-15
C. Network Scanning Features

Scan to e-Filing Box/Scan to File The e-STUDIO3511/4511 can operate as a network scanner. Users can scan documents or images in either black and white or full color, convert them into electronic form, and share them over the network. The scanned images are initially stored on the e-filing box, which users create on the hard disk, in JPEG (color/grayscale) or MMR (black and white) format. Users can retrieve the scanned documents or images, as follows: Scan to e-filing box Formally called Scan to TWAIN, is used to store scanned images in the electronic filing (e-filing) box, which users create on the hard disk. Users can immediately access the e-filing box and retrieve the scanned images using the TWAIN driver. Scan to file Is used to transfer images to a specified folder created in a client PC or file server using the SMB protocol or FTP. An advantage of having the file server is that since the scanned image is forwarded to the file server, users do not have to worry about taking up a large amount of hard disk space in the copier. The users can view images on their client PCs using the viewer that comes standard with Windows 98 or later, or on viewers that can be downloaded, free of charge. Scan to E-mail Scan to E-mail is another method to transfer scanned images to clients. Scanned images are transmitted to the specified destinations as attached files via the mail server. Users can pre-program destination e-mail addresses, an e-mail subject, senders name, main text body, format of an attached file and so forth. For the e-STUDIO3511/4511, the maximum e-mail size is expanded to 30 MB. This allows the users to easily transmit large-sized scanned images-even a full color, LD/A3-sized image-to remote parties by e-mail in much the same way a facsimile is used.
3-16
D. e-Filing Features
Overview The e-STUDIO3511/4511 features the electronic filing (e-Filing) function, which allows users to scan images, convert them into electronic form, and store them on the large-capacity hard disk of 60 GB or e-filing box-at the same time they are copied, printed out or scanned. Incoming faxes can also be stored on the hard disk. The scanned images can be retrieved using the TWAIN driver or File Downloader or viewed and edited using the Webbased utility, and printed out in black and white or full color.
Using the e-Filing function, users can copy and convert a frequently used document into electronic form, and store it in the Box. When they need to print it out, they do not have to take the original document to the copier.
3-17
e-Filing boxes and folders Users can create filing boxes and folders on the hard disk and store the scanned images there, depending on applications of the scanned images. The table below shows the number of boxes and folders that users can create for e-filing: Public box Max. Quantity: 1 The Public box is sharable among all users and administrators. User box Max. Quantity: 200 Users can create up to 200 user boxes on the hard disk through an operation on the Control Panel or Web-based utility. The box can be passwordprotected for ensuring data security. Folders Max. Quantity: 100/box Users can create and name up to 100 folders in a box utilizing the Web-based utility. Single/Dual Agent e-Filing Functions (Method to Store Scanned Images) Users can scan and store copy jobs, print jobs, scan jobs and incoming faxes (optionally available) in the e-filing boxes, as follows: Single Agent Copy to Box A copy job is stored in the box in Toshibas unique file format. It can also be copied at the same time, as required. Scan to Box A scan job is stored in the box in JPEG (color/grayscale) or MMR (black and white) format. A scanned image is transferred or e-mailed to specified destinations using Scan to File or Scan to E-mail, as required. Received Fax to Box An incoming fax is stored in the box in MMR. Using the Fax Mailbox (ITU-T compatible) feature, the fax received with ITU-T Sub-address (SUB, F-code) can be stored into the box. For a fax without SUB, an administrator can specify a forwarding destination (Fax received forward). Print to Box A print job is stored in the box in Toshibas unique file format. Received Internet Fax to Box Incoming Internet Fax documents can be stored in the box. An administrator can specify a forwarding (I-Fax received forward). Dual Agent Users can combine two agents and assign them to a template, and seamlessly perform two jobs as follows: Copy + Scan to File Copy + Scan to Box Fax/iFax + Scan to File Scan to File + Scan to E-mail Scan to E-mail + Scan to Box
3-18
Operability Printer Driver The Print to Box option is available in the printer driver. Users can specify a destination box for storing a print job, password-protect it, and choose whether to print it out or not.
Printer deriver screen
Control Panel The user-friendly screens help users to specify a box for storing and retrieving images, set up, edit or delete a box, and password-protect it.
Box setup screen Web-based Utility
Box selection screen
Documents stored in the box can be viewed or shared over the network using the webbased utility. In addition, through the e-Filing function, one document stored in the box can be merged with
another, regardless of how the documents are stored in the box, as illustrated below. It is difficult and time consuming to integrate multiple pages created on different applications or different platforms into one complete document. But the e-Filing function used in conjunction with the Web-based utility allows such pages to be easily merged.
3-19
E. Internet Fax Features

Overview The e-STUDIO3511/4511 comes standard with the Internet FAX function. The concept of Internet Fax is to transmit or receive the fax data using the IP network, including the Internet or intranet, as a part of or as the entire transmission path. Internet Fax also refers to a device, service or software that is capable of transmitting or receiving a fax over the IP network. With the e-STUDIO3511/4511, users can access the Internet Fax mode simply by pressing the FAX key on the Control Panel. On Ramp/Off Ramp Gateway Functions Not only can the e-STUDIO3511/4511 send and receives faxes via fixed phone lines, it can also make use of the Internet to increase cost effectiveness. The On Ramp Gateway function allows documents to be received from F-code compatible G3 faxes and disseminated to other Internet fax machines or PCs. The Off Ramp Gateway function, on the other hand, allows faxes to be received via the Internet and relayed to other fax machines through the public switched telephone network. This convenient function allows local faxes to be sent at local phone rates, and long distance rates can be avoided through use of the Internet. Both On Ramp and Off Ramp functions can be configured to run simultaneously.
3-20
F. Fax Features
Network Fax The optional FAX Board is required for this function, which allows users to fax a document created with an application directly from the client PCs. When the document is created, the eSTUDIO3511/4511 should be chosen as a printer to print out the document. The document will not actually be printed, but directly transmitted to the FAX Board. The data is then transmitted from the FAX Board to specified destinations over the telephone line. The Address Book Viewer allows the users to add frequently dialed fax numbers to the address book. Functions Provided by the Optional Walk-up Fax The e-STUDIO3511/4511 can operate as a multi-featured facsimile that is designed to provide highspeed transmission and reduction of communications costs. The table below describes other functions which increase convenience and usability in FAX mode. Super G3 Fax When the optional FAX board is installed, the e-STUDIO3511/4511 can serve as a Super G3 facsimile with a 33.6kbps fax modem compatible with ITU-TV.34 to transmit or receive a fax almost twice as fast as a G3 facsimile can. That results in significant reductions in communications costs, particularly for long distance faxing. 2nd Line Option With the optional 2nd line board installed, users can start transmitting a fax before an incoming fax is completely received. The users can set the 2nd line for only receiving a fax or for receiving a fax for only a specified period of time. JBIG data compression The e-STUDIO3511/4511 supports the data compression method called JBIG. The JBIG image compression format substantially increases data compression rate, compared with conventional data compression methods. Particularly the JBIG format is strongest when transmitting a fax containing a lot of grayscale images or photographs, and eventually cuts transmission time and fees. Memory capacity The 128 MB Page Memory Board and 60 GB Hard Disk Drive come standard with the eSTUDIO3511/4511, making it easier to store a large number of fax jobs. Versatile Transmission/reception methods Direct Transmission The destination facsimile is dialed immediately, and a fax can be transmitted as it is being scanned. Memory Transmission A fax automatically starts transmission after it is temporarily stored in the memory.
3-21
Delayed Transmission A fax is transmitted to a specified destination facsimile at a specified time, programmed up to one month in advance. Quality Transmission When transmission is easily influenced by line-noise problems, this mode can be enabled to slow down the transmission rate to ensure that the fax can be received at the destination successfully. Relay Transmission(F-code compliant) A fax is transmitted to a hub station where a relay mailbox is created, then the fax is relayed to final destinations, resulting in savings of phone charges. Recovery Transmission In case of fax transmission error, the fax is stored in memory for a specified period of time. This function gives users a chance to retransmit the fax without requiring them to rescan the original. Priority Transmission Users in a hurry can transmit a fax prior to other reserved transmissions. Busy Transmission If the e-STUDIO3511/4511 fails to connect using the primary number stored in the Phone Book, it can dial a sub-number. Batch Transmission Two or more reserved jobs at a time can be faxed to one remote destination to reduce communications costs. Dual Access This function allows the main unit to perform two jobs concurrently, reducing the likelihood of job conflict. For instance, users can make copies, print out documents, or transmit faxes from the memory, while receiving incoming faxes. Private Mail Box/ Public Mail Box (F code) Private mailbox is a secure transmission method. Users cannot receive mail until they enter a password. Once transmitted, however, the information will be deleted from the senders memory. Public mailbox is similar to a bulletin board, where information posted remains for future access. This feature is password-protected. Transmission/Reception of Large-Size Fax Making full use of the rich paper handling capabilities and sources, users can transmit and receive/print out an LD/A3-sized document or technical drawing. Duplex Transmission and two sided printing With the optional Reversing Automatic document Feeder (RADF) installed, the eSTUDIO3511/4511 allows two-sided documents to be scanned and transmitted sequentially. In addition, the Duplex Print mode can print out received faxes on both sides of the paper.
3-22
Operability For the e-STUDIO3511/4511, both a fax number and an e-mail/Internet FAX address of a particular party can be registered in a single address book. The address book can be controlled through a simple operation on the Control Panel or utilizing the Web based TopAccess utility. The e-mail address or fax number can be easily added to or deleted from the address book. In addition, the registered address and fax numbers can be backed up or imported and exported.
The newly designed address book significantly simplifies the steps to enter and search for fax numbers and e-mail addresses, increasing user-friendliness and convenience.
3-23
G. Management Tools
Remarkably Easy-to-use Templates The template function is intended for the users to define frequently used settings under a template or graphical icon. There are 12,060 templates available in total (200 private groups (60 templates + 60 templates for a shared group). Any users (administrator or general user) can create, edit, and share templates easily on a department or individual basis on a Web browser, depending on company scale and structure. They can also name the template to indicate its function or settings.
The template function allows users to customize their own icon, where modes and functions that they frequently use are assigned. TopAccess Comes Standard The web-based utility TopAccess comes standard with e-STUDIO3511/4511. It is designed to manage the status of the machine and jobs on any PC over the Internet regardless of OS or platform. When the copier is in an error state, including Add Paper and Misfeed in Copier, users can easily identify the problem and take prompt action. TopAccess represents a copiers configuration graphically, so that the users can recognize sizes of paper currently loaded in the copier, what options are installed, and so forth. Users can also view printing counter and details on a print job, including a users name, document name, date and time when the print job is requested. In addition, TopAccess provides functions specific to an administrator. For instance, only the administrator is authorized to change passwords, reset the Print Counter, and set up TopAccess, Job Log, Network and Printer.
3-24
Job Monitoring Tool, TopAccessDocMon The job monitoring Tool, TopAccessDocMon for the e-STUDIO3511/4511 allows users to monitor all jobs, control their own current jobs and confirm the status of the system. With the notification feature enabled, messages pop up to notify users of copier or printing events, before walking to the copier only to find their job incomplete or unsuccessful, eliminating the need to walk to the machine to check status. The table below shows items that the users can monitor using the TopAccessDocMon utility. Counter information Users can monitor the total counters for copy jobs, printer jobs, and scan jobs. Device information Displays configuration, name, model and location of the currently installed MFP. Job status Monitors status of printer jobs, scan jobs, e-filing jobs and network fax transmission jobs. Job control Printer jobs, scan jobs, e-filing jobs and network fax transmission jobs in a queue can be deleted before execution. Address Book Viewer The Address Book Viewer is a utility used to add or search for fax numbers or e-mail addresses of remote parties. For the e-STUDIO3511/4511, addresses and fax numbers are all managed in a single address book, which significantly increases convenience in adding, editing, or searching for the fax numbers or e-mail addresses to which users would like to send documents or images. Users can also import the public or private address books created on the e-STUDIO35/45 and GL1010 to the Address Book Viewer. This saves the users from manually re-entering all addresses.
Optional Scrambler Board Toshiba has developed a new optional security board called Scrambler Board, designed to encrypt data still remaining on the hard disk after copying, printing, faxing or scanning is completed.
3-25
H. Advanced Technology
The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is the culmination of the following leading technologies that only Toshiba offers: New e-Bridge For the e-STUDIO3511/4511, Toshiba has developed e-Bridge , designed to control multiple functions efficiently. The e-STUDIO35/45 requires an optional printer board, network interface card and Document Controller to upgrade it to a network printer and scanner. This means that copying, printing, and scanning are processed separately with the CPU mounted on each of the options. On the other hand, for the e-STUDIO3511/4511, these multiple functions are all integrated on a single board called e-Bridge Controller and processed with a single CPU. This centralises all kinds of jobs that the e-STUDIO3511/4511 performs, including copy jobs, print jobs and scan jobs. Mounted on the e-Bridge Controller are the following: Toshiba-manufactured 64-bit RISC CPU (333MHz), used to implement the concurrent processing of copying, printing, and scanning High-speed memory (4ch DRAM), arranged as image memory and system memory, to achieve high-speed concurrent processing UltraDMA, used by the controller chip to increase efficiency in data transfer RIP accelerator, used to enhance performance of RIP, such as compression, decompression, and rotation
3-26
Improved Warm-up Time Thanks to Twin-IH Fusing The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is the first full color-capable model with Induction Heating (IH) Fuser Technology. With the IH fuser, a high frequency current flows through the IH coil inside the fuser roller and produces a high frequency magnetic field. This magnetic field produces an eddy current in the fuser roller. Then the resistance element of the fuser roller generates joule heat, which heats up the fuser roller. Using this method allows the fuser roller to be heated up directly in a fast and energy efficient way. This method disproves the common theory that warm-up time is long for full color MFP models-it drastically reduces the warm-up time to a record-breaking 40 seconds. In addition, the TWIN-IH Fuser is designed to optimally control the fusing temperature and ensure efficient heating. The heat roller has been reduced to 60 in diameter, compared to Toshibas highend Black and White-specific MFP models where the heat roller is 80 in diameter. Compared to the conventional fuser, this structure allows the entire fuser roller to be heated evenly. As a result, the toner can be fused on paper evenly.
3-27
4 CCD Sensors to Scan Black The e-STUDIO3511/4511 is the first-class MFP equipped with 4 CCD sensors .Dedicated color models, such as the e-STUDIO210c/310c, have 3 CCD sensors, each of which is covered with the R, G, and B filters to separate the light reflected from an original into red, green, and blue. Then the R, G, B data scanned by these CCD sensors undergoes image processing and is converted into C, M, Y, and K data for copying or printing. In other words, even K or black output data is created for copying or printing based on the scanned R, G, and B data. On the other hand, the e-STUDIO3511/4511 has not only the CCD sensors for R, G, and B, but also an additional one specifically for capturing black data from the reflected light, which maintains the scan speed comparable to black and whitespecific MFP models and increases sharpness of the black copy or print image output.
Newly Developed Toner The newly developed matte toner can be fused on paper at lower temperature, saving significant amounts of energy. Gloss is eliminated from copy images, so it is easy to handwrite annotations on the copy with pens. High-speed Processing The e-STUDIO3511/4511 comes with the large-capacity hard disk drive of 60 GB, as well as 256 MB of RAM, upgradeable up to 512 MB.
3-28
Integrated Multifunction Initial Setting For the e-STUDIO3511/4511, just pressing the [INITIAL SETTING] key on the Control Panel, users can easily access the initial setting screen of the address book setting, counter setting, user setting (such as copy, printer, scan and fax mode), and administrator settings (including the network setting energy saver mode and maintenance).
Concurrent Processing The e-STUDIO3511/4511 can process one job while a preset job is in progress. Up to five jobs in total can be preset through an operation either on the Control Panel or Web-based utility, but any jobs specified on the Control Panel are executed prior to ones specified on the Web-based utility. In addition, using the dual agent function, two jobs can be seamlessly performed. For instance, if Copy + Scan to File is chosen for the dual agent function, while an original is being copied, it is scanned, converted into electronic data, and stored in a specified folder created on a client PC.
3-29
4. Configuration
A. System Configuration
4-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 Configuration
B. Copy Paper Configuration
No.
Copy paper feeder 1st drawer e-STUDIO3511/4511 2nd drawer Stack feed bypass KD-1011 (Option) MY-1021 (Option) KD-1012 (Option) 3rd drawer (Paper Feed Pedestal) 4th drawer (Drawer Module) Large Capacity Feeder
Paper capacity (sheets) 550 550 100 550 550 2500 (1250 x 2)

e-STUDIO3511/4511 maximum paper capacity ( + + + ): 3700 sheets
4-2
C. Original Configuration
No.
Original feeder e-STUDIO3511/4511 MR-3015 (Option) Original table Reversing Automatic Document Feeder
Paper capacity (sheets) 1 100

4-3
D. e-STUDIO3511/4511 Product Codes

Items NAD SAD ASD e-STUDIO3511 AUD MJD CND TWD NAD SAD ASD e-STUDIO4511 AUD MJD CND TWD *Equipment Version NAD: North America SAD: Saudi Arabia ASD: Asia, Central/South America AUD: Australia MJD: Europe CND: China TWD: Taiwan Code 6AG0 000 0031 6AG0 000 0035 6AG0 000 0034 6AG0 000 0033 6AG0 000 0032 6AG0 000 0037 6AG0 000 0036 6AR0 000 0039 6AR0 000 0043 6AR0 000 0042 6AR0 000 0041 6AR0 000 0040 6AR0 000 0045 6AR0 000 0044 Remarks
4-4
E. e-STUDIO3511/4511 Accessories
Items Unpacking/setup instruction Developer unit Developer material Detachable power cord Setup report Warranty sheet Customer satisfaction card Operator's manual for copying function Operator's manual for TOSHIBA Viewer CD-ROM Platen cover Pass certificate Envelope Installation report Installation pocket Screws Operation panel stopper Color developer unit stopper Transfer belt unit lever bracket Blind seal Rubber plug Quantity 1pc. 4pcs. 4pcs. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 5pcs. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 6pcs. 1pc. 4pcs. 4pcs. For CND For CND For CND For CND For CND For NAD, MJD For NAD, CND For MJD For NAD, SAD, ASD, AUD, CND For NAD, SAD, ASD, AUD K, Y, M, C each 1pc. K, Y, M, C each 1pc. For JPD, CND Remarks
4-5
F. Product Codes for Options

Items Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Platen Cover MR-3015 KA-3511PC KA-3511PC-N KA-3511PC-C Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011 KD-1011-N MY-1021 Drawer Module (DM) MY-1021-N MY-1021-C KD-1012LT Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012A4 KD-1012A4-N KD-1012A4-C MJ-1022 Finisher (1) Hanging type MJ-1022-N MJ-1022-C MJ-1023 Finisher (2) Console type MJ-1023-N MJ-1023-C Finisher (3) Console full feature type MJ-1024 MJ-1024-N MJ-1024-C KN-3511 Bridge unit KN-3511-N KN-3511-C MJ-6004N Hole punch unit MJ-6004E MJ-6004F MJ-6004S STAPLE-1600 Staple Cartridge Expansion Memory STAPLE-2000 STAPLE-600 GC-1180 GD-1150-NA GD-1150-AU FAX board GD-1150-EU GD-1150-TW GD-1150C Code 6A00 000 0040 6AR0 000 0032 6AR0 000 0033 6AR0 000 0034 6AR0 000 0047 6AR0 000 0048 6AR0 000 0056 6AR0 000 0057 6AR0 000 0058 6AR0 000 0051 6AR0 000 0052 6AR0 000 0053 6AR0 000 0055 6AR0 000 0035 6AR0 000 0038 6AR0 000 0041 6AR0 000 0036 6AR0 000 0039 6AR0 000 0042 6AR0 000 0037 6AR0 000 0040 6AR0 000 0043 6AR0 000 0044 6AR0 000 0045 6AR0 000 0046 6A00 000 0042 6A00 000 0043 6A00 000 0044 6A00 000 0045 660 84989 6A00 000 0041 660 84999 6A00 000 0048 6AR0 000 0066 6AR0 000 0069 6AR0 000 0068 6AR0 000 0067 6AR0 000 0071 For NAD/SAD For AU/ASD For MJD For TWD For CND For TWD, ASD For CND For NAD For MJD For FR For SW For PFP For PFP For PFP LT A4 A4 A4 Remarks
4-6
Items GD-1160NA FAX board 2nd line GD-1160EU GD-1160TW GD-1160C MF-U Damp heater MF-E MF-E-N MF-E-C Key counter MU-8 MU-10 KK-3511 Work table Wireless LAN adapter PCI slot KK-3511-N KK-3511-C GN-1010 GO-1030
Code 6AR0 000 0072 6AR0 000 0073 6AR0 000 0075 6AR0 000 0076 6AR0 000 0062 6AR0 000 0063 6AR0 000 0064 6AR0 000 0065 660 02050 660 02051 6AR0 000 0059 6AR0 000 0061 6AR0 000 0061 6AR0 000 0049 6A00 000 0052
Remarks For NAD/SAD/TWD For AU/AUD/ASD/CND For TWD For CND For NAD For MJD For TWD/ASD For CND
4-7
G. Accessories for Options

Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (MR-3015) Items Automatic document feeder itself Unpacking/setup instruction Test charts Platen Cover (KA-3511PC) Items Original cover itself Unpacking/setup instruction Paper Feed Pedestal (KD-1011) Items Paper feed pedestal itself Unpacking/setup instruction Paper drawer Right copier support brackets Right copier support cover Rear copier support brackets Rear copier support cover Brackets L-type brackets Blind cover Paper length guide Size cards Screws Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc. 2pcs. 2pcs. 1pc. 1pc 2pcs. 11pcs. At unpacking, It is already included in the paper cassette. LT type x 1, A4 type x 1 At unpacking, It is already included in the paper feed pedestal. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. LT type x 1, A4 type x1 Remarks
4-8
Drawer Module (MY-1021) Items Drawer module itself Unpacking/setup instruction Paper drawer Paper length guide Size cards Screw Large Capacity Feeder (KD-1012) Items Large capacity feeder itself Unpacking/setup instruction Copier support brackets Right support cover Rear support cover Brackets L-type brackets Blind cover Screws Finisher (MJ-1022) Hanging type Items Finisher itself Unpacking/setup instruction IPC board Locking support Bridge unit Bridge unit attachment bracket Bridge unit exit guide Finisher attachment bracket Copier holding brackets Copier holding cover Harness band Screws 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. 2pcs. 1pc. 1pc. 17pcs. (F: Long, R: Short) L: shape Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 4pcs. 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. 2pcs. 2pcs. 11pcs. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc 2pcs. 1pc. At unpacking, It is already included in the paper cassette. LT type x 1, A4 type x 1 Remarks
4-9
Finisher (MJ-1023) Console type Items Finisher itself Unpacking/setup instruction IPC board Locking support Bridge unit attachment bracket Bridge unit exit guide Finisher attachment bracket Blind cover Copier holding brackets Harness band Finisher rail cover F Finisher rail cover R Harness band Screws Finisher (MJ-1024) Console full feature type Items Finisher itself Unpacking/setup instruction IPC board Locking support Bridge unit attachment bracket Bridge unit exit guide Finisher attachment bracket Blind cover Copier holding brackets Finisher rail cover F Bracket for finisher rail cover F Harness band Screws Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 23pcs. (F: Short, R: Long with stud) Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 17pcs. L: shape (F: Short, R: Long with stud) Remarks
4-10
Bridge Unit (KN-3511) Items Bridge unit itself Bridge unit cover Bridge support bracket Harness Harness cover Screws Hole Punch Unit (MJ-6004) Items Hole punch unit itself Unpacking/setup instruction Front cover Front bracket Rear bracket Bracket for 1023 Bracket for 1024 Brush Label Screws Staple cartridge (STAPLE-600, 1600, 2000) Items Staple cartridge Expansion Memory (GC-1180) Items Memory board itself Unpacking/setup instruction Quantity 1pc. 1pc. Remarks Quantity 1pc. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 8pcs. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 7pcs. Remarks
4-11
FAX board (GD-1150) Items FAX board Unpacking/setup instruction Screws Phone cord Super G3 label PPT labels Operator's manual for facsimile function FAX board 2nd line (GD-1160) Items FAX board Unpacking/setup instruction Screws Phone card Locking support Ground wire Operators manual for facsimile function Damp heater (MF-3511) Items Damp heater Unpacking/setup instruction Scanner plate (R) Scanner plate (L) PC board Screws Locking support Edge saddle M clamp Key counter (MU-8, 10) Items Key counter Quantity 1pc. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 7pcs. 5pcs. 1pc. 1pc. Remarks Quantity 2pcs. 1pc. 3pcs. 1pc. 5pcs. 1pc. 1pc. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 3pcs. 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. or 1pc. NA/SA models: 2pcs. Others: 1pc. 1pc. Remarks
4-12
Work table (KK-3511) Items Work table Unpacking/setup instruction Table holding bracket Screws Wireless LAN adapter (GN-1010) Items Wireless LAN adapter Unpacking/setup instruction AC adapter (with bracket) AC cable Grounding cable LAN cable Screws Label CD-ROM PCI slot (GO-1030) Items PCI slot Bracket Screws Scrambler board (GP-1030) Items Scrambler board Unpacking/setup instruction Edge saddle Harness Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. 1pcs. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 5pcs. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 7pcs. 1pc. 1pc. Remarks Quantity 1pc. 1pc. 1pc. 2pcs. Remarks
4-13
H. Replacement Units
Items Fuser unit Transfer belt unit Developer unit (Black) Developer unit (Y, M, C) Main charger unit FUSER-3511-100 FUSER-3511-200 ASYB-TR-BLT-3511 DEVE-UNIT-3511K DEVE-UNIT-3511YMC MAIN-CH-3511 Code 6LA47964000 6LA47965000 6LA47963000 6LA47962000 6LA47961000 6LA47960000 Remarks For 100V range equipment For 200V range equipment
4-14
I. Supplies
Items ASY-S-T3511K ASY-S-T3511EK Black toner cartridge ASY-S-T3511DK ASY-S-T3511TK ASY-S-T3511CK ASY-S-T3511Y ASY-S-T3511EY Y ASY-S-T3511DY ASY-S-T3511TY ASY-S-T3511CY ASY-S-T3511M ASY-S-T3511EM Color toner cartridge M ASY-S-T3511DM ASY-S-T3511TM ASY-S-T3511CM ASY-S-T3511C ASY-S-T3511EC C ASY-S-T3511DC ASY-S-T3511TC ASY-S-T3511CC Drum Black developer Color developer OD-3511 D-3511K D-3511Y D-3511M D-3511C ASY-S-TB3511 Toner bag ASY-S-TB3511E ASY-S-TB3511T ASY-S-TB3511C Toshiba Original Supplies and Parts Stress to your customers that Toshiba's original supplies and parts assure the highest copy quality with consistent results, whatever the operating environment or the job size. Use of Toshiba original supplies contributes to fewer service calls and greater copier durability. Code 6LA27191000 6LA27195000 6LA27250000 6LA27314000 6LA27310000 6LA27192000 6LA27196000 6LA27251000 6LA27315000 6LA27311000 6LA27193000 6LA27197000 6LA27252000 6LA27316000 6LA27312000 6LA27194000 6LA27198000 6LA27253000 6LA27317000 6LA27313000 6LA27284000 6LA27227000 6LA27228000 6LA27229000 6LA27230000 6LA27408000 6LA27409000 TBD TBD For MJD For TWD For CND For TWD For CND For TWD For CND For NAD For MJD For TWD For CND For NAD For MJD For TWD For CND For NAD For MJD Remarks For NAD For MJD
4-15
J. Software Configuration
CD-ROMs that include printer drivers and applications are packed with the copier, Printer Kit and Internet FAX Kit. The following lists show the items in each CD-ROM. e-STUDIO3511/4511 series CD-ROM Items TOSHIBA Viewer (Local) Printer Driver (GDI) For Windows 95/98/Me For Local For Network For Windows NT4.0 For Local For Network For Windows 2000/XP For Local For Network CD-ROM\Driv2kXp\Local CD-ROM\Driv2kXp\Network *1, *2 *1 CD-ROM\Driv_NT4\Local CD-ROM\Driv_NT4\Network *1, *2 *1 CD-ROM\Driv9xMe\Local CD-ROM\Driv9xMe\Network *1, *2 *1 Setup program/File location CD-ROM\Toshiba Viewer\SETUP.EXE Remarks
*1: The printer driver has various versions in each language. The above folders are divided into the language sub folders in which each language driver is stored. An appropriate language driver should be selected in accordance with the copier or OS you use. *2: A TWAIN driver is included.
4-16
5. Specifications
A. e-STUDIO3511/4511 Specifications
Items Model name Type Copying process Original glass Original platen type Original scanning system Exposure lamp Resolution Toner supplying Developing method Photoconductor type Fusing method Memory Main memory Page memory HDD Acceptable original type Maximum original size Copy paper supply Acceptable copy paper size Acceptable copy paper Reproduction ratio Preset ratio LT model A4 model Zoom (in 1% increments/decrements) Density control (exposure control) Multiple copying Warm-up time (approx.) First copy time (approx.) PM cycle Total counter Power requirements Power consumption Noise e-STUDIO3511 e-STUDIO4511 FC-3511 FC-4511 Desktop type Indirect electrostatic photographic method Fixed
* Original referenced to top left, referenced to center when using the reversing automatic document feeder (RADF).
Fixed hard platen (option: RADF and Platen cover) CCD line sensor (7450 pixels x 4 lines) Xenon lamp 600 x 600 dpi 2400 x 600 B/W 600 x 600 Color Dry magnetic toner, cartridge type Magnetic brush (1 roller) OPC drum (90) Heat roller IH (Induction Heating) method 256 MB 128 MB (Maximum 256MB) 60 GB Sheet, book and three-dimensional object LD, A3 3700 sheet cassette x 1 LD to ST-R, A3 to A5-R 17 to 22 lb.(bond), 64 to 80 g/m(bond) 25, 50, 100, 200, 400% 25, 50, 100, 200, 400% 25 to 200%
25 to 400%
*When the ADF or RADF is used: 50 to 200%
115VAC series 220VAC series
Dimensions (W x D x H)
Copier only Full options Copier only Full options
Weight (approx.) Space occupied (W x D)
Automatic/Manual (11 steps) 1 to 999 copies (Ten key input) 40 sec. 70 sec. B/W less than 8 sec. Color TBD target 150k TBD Electronic 7-digit counter 115-127VAC, 50/60Hz, 220-240VAC, 50/60Hz Max. 1.5kW or less 1.5kW 1.7kW or less Idling: 40dB (A) Copying: 55dB (A) Copying (with full option): 60dB (A) 20.9" x 19.6" x 6.5", 530 mm x 554 mm x 600 mm 34.4" x 23.6" x 47.7" 34.4" x 23.6" x 47.7" 875 x 599 x 1211 mm 1228 mm x 599 mm x 1211 mm 110 lb., 50 kg 203 lb., 92 kg 273 lb., 124 kg 29.9" x 38.2", 760 mm x 970 mm
5-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 Specifications
Copying speed Paper Type Plain Paper Paper size LT, ST-R, 8.5SQ, A4, A5-R, B5 LT-R, A4-R, B5-R LG, COMP, 13LG, B4, FOLIO LD, A3 Bypass Thick 1 LT, ST-R, 8.5SQ, A4, A5-R, B5 LT-R, A4-R, B5-R LG, COMP, 13LG, B4, FOLIO LD, A3 Thick 2 Thick 3 Sticker Labels OHP Film Drawer Bypass Drawer Bypass Drawer Bypass Drawer Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Bypass Feeder Drawer Bypass Drawer Bypass Drawer Bypass Drawer e-STUDIO3511 Black 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min color 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min e-STUDIO4511 Black 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min color 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min 11 sheets/min
This specification varies depending on copying condition and environment.
5-2
B. Options
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (RADF) Items Model name Copy side Acceptable original paper size Acceptable original paper weight Original stacking capacity Original setting direction Original alignment Original feeding speed Power supply Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight (approx.) Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) Items Model name Acceptable copy paper size Acceptable copy paper weight Copy paper supply Power supply Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight (approx.) Drawer Module (DM) Items Model name Acceptable copy paper size Acceptable copy paper weight Copy paper supply Power supply Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight (approx.) Specifications MY-1021 LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST, ST-R, COMP, A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, FOLIO 17 to 22 lb., 64 to 105 g/m 550 sheets cassette x 1 Supplied from the copier TBD TBD Specifications KD-1011 LD, LG, LT, LT-R, ST, ST-R, COMP, A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, FOLIO 17 to 22 lb., 64 to 105 g/m 550 sheets cassette x 1 Supplied from the copier TBD TBD Specifications MR-3015 Single-side, Duplex ST-R to LD, A5-R to A3 1-sided original: 13 to 33 lb., 50 to 127 g/m 2-sided original: 13 to 28 lb., 50 to 105 g/m 100 sheets (22 lb., 80 g/m) Face up Center alignment 45 original/min. (LT, A4) Supplied from the copier TBD TBD
5-3
Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) Items Model name Acceptable copy paper size Acceptable copy paper weight Copy paper supply Power supply Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight (approx.) Finisher (1) Hanging Type Items Model name Number of trays Mode Acceptable copy paper size Acceptable copy paper weight Stack capacity (approx.) Non-sort ST-R, A5-R LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R LG, B4 LD, COMP, A3, FOLIO ST-R, A5-R Sort LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R LG, B4 LD, COMP, A3, FOLIO Staple sort ST-R, A5-R LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R LG, B4 LD, COMP, A3, FOLIO Staple position Staple capacity Specifications MJ-1022 2 trays Non-sort, sort, staple sort, Group ST-R to LD, A5-R to A3 13 to 33 lb., 50 to 127 g/m Upper tray Lower tray 200 sheets 700 sheets 200 sheets 700 sheets 140 sheets 490 sheets 100 sheets 350 sheets 200 sheets 700 sheets 140 sheets 490 sheets 100 sheets 350 sheets 170 sheets or 50 sets 600 sheets or 50 sets 110 sheets or 15 sets 400 sheets or 15 sets 80 sheets or 15 sets 300 sheets or 15 sets Rear LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R: 30 sheets LG, B4: 20 sheets LD, COMP, A3, FOLIO: 15 sheets *Acceptable copy paper weight: 17 to 22lb., 64 to 80 g/m STAPLE-1600 (3000 staples) Supplied from the copier TBD TBD Specifications KD-1012LT/A4 LT, A4 17 to 22 lb., 64 to 105 g/m 2500 sheets Supplied from the copier TBD TBD
Staple cartridge type Power supply Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight (approx.) Expansion Memory Items Model name Type
Specifications GC-1180 128 MB
5-4
Finisher (2) Console Type Items Specifications Model name MJ-1023 Number of trays 2 trays Mode Non-sort, sort, staple sort, Group, Hole punch (option) Acceptable copy paper size ST-R to LD, A5-R to A3 Acceptable copy paper weight 13 to 33 lb., 50 to 127 g/m Stack capacity (approx.) Upper tray Lower tray Non-sort ST-R, A5-R, LT, A4 1000 sheets 1000 sheets LT-R, A4-R, LG, B4, 500 sheets 500 sheets LD, COMP, A3 ST-R, A5-R Sort LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R 200 sheets 700 sheets LG, B4 140 sheets 490 sheets LD, COMP, A3 100 sheets 350 sheets Staple sort ST-R, A5-R LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R 170 sheets or 50 sets 600 sheets or 50 sets LG, B4 110 sheets or 15 sets 400 sheets or 15 sets LD, COMP, A3 80 sheets or 15 sets 300 sheets or 15 sets Staple position Rear Staple capacity LT, A4: 50 sheets LG, B4, LD, LT-R,: 20 sheets COMP, A4-R, A3, FOLIO *Acceptable copy paper weight: 17 to 22lb., 64 to 80 g/m Staple cartridge type STAPLE-2000 (5000 staples) Power supply Supplied from the copier Dimensions (W x D x H) TBD Weight (approx.) TBD
5-5
Finisher (3) Console Full Feature Type Items Model name Number of trays Mode Acceptable copy paper size Acceptable copy paper weight Stack capacity (approx.) Non-sort ST-R, A5-R LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R LG, B4 LD, COMP, A3, FOLIO ST-R, A5-R Sort LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R LG, B4 LD, COMP, A3, FOLIO Staple sort ST-R, A5-R LT, LT-R, A4, A4-R LG, B4 LD, COMP, A3, FOLIO Staple position Staple capacity Specifications MJ-1024 2 trays Non-sort, sort, staple sort, Group, Saddle stitch, Hole punch (option) ST-R to LD, A5-R to A3 17 to 43 lb., 64 to 163 g/m Upper tray Lower tray 200 sheets 700 sheets 500 sheets 500 sheets 140 sheets 490 sheets 100 sheets 350 sheets 200 sheets 700 sheets 140 sheets 490 sheets 100 sheets 350 sheets 170 sheets or 50 sets 600 sheets or 50 sets 110 sheets or 15 sets 400 sheets or 15 sets 80 sheets or 15 sets 300 sheets or 15 sets Rear LT, A4: 50 sheets LG, B4, LD, LT-R,: 20 sheets COMP, A4-R, A3, FOLIO *Acceptable copy paper weight: 17 to 22lb., 64 to 80 g/m STAPLE-2000 (5000 staples) Supplied from the copier TBD TBD
Staple cartridge type Power supply Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight (approx.) Hole punch unit (MJ-6004) Items Model name Applicable options Type The number of holes
MJ-6004N 2 or 3 holes
Specifications MJ-6004 for MJ-1023/1024 MJ-6004E MJ-6004F 2 holes 4 holes
MJ-6004S 4 holes
5-6
FAX board Items Model name Applicable network Number of lines Compatibility communication mode Encoding system Transmission rate (bps) Transmission speed (approx.) Communication TX resolution resolution Specifications GD-1150/1160 Public Switched Telephone Line (PSTN) 1 (Standard), 2 (Optional) Super G3, G3, ECM JBIG, MMR, MR, MH 33.6 kbps 7.4 kbps 3 sec./page Memory transmission: 8 x 3.85, 8 x 7.7, 8 x 15.4, 16 x 15.4, 11.8 x 11.8 (300 dpi), Transfer TX only Direct transmission: 8 x 3.85, 8 x 7.7, 8 x 15.4, 16 x 15.4, 11.8 x 11.8 (300 dpi), Transfer TX only Note: When Direct TX is set, multiple original can no be scanned from platen glass. Reception: 8 x 3.85, 8 x 7.7, 8 x 15.4, 16 x 15.4, 11.8 x 11.8 (300 dpi), Transfer TX only ST-R to LD, FOLIO, A5-R to A3 0.7 sec./page (LT, A4) TBD 16 x 15.4 dots/mm, 8 x 7.7 dots/mm, 8 x 3.85 dots/mm Text, Photo/Text, Photo, B&W only 256 levels (Error diffusion) Transmission/F code: 240 MB (HDD) Reception: 120 MB (HDD) Permanent (HDD) Maximum 16 x 15.4 dots/mm ST-R to LD, FOLIO, A5-R to A3 Yes (Number/Alphabetical) 1000 stations Yes (Max. 14 items) Yes (Template key) Yes Maximum 200 groups, 400 destinations/group Yes Yes (Max. 100 jobs) Yes Yes (Max. 24 hours) Yes (Max. 400 destination) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
RX resolution
Acceptable original size Scanning speed Scanning resolution Scanning mode Gray scale Memory Memory backup Printing resolution Acceptable printing paper size Functions Phone book search Phone book Automatic redial Program key Group dialing Number of group dialing Chain dialing Direct transmission Memory transmission Recovery transmission Broadcasting Delayed transmission Priority transmission Quality transmission (low speed TX) Cover sheet transmission Transmission journal Reception journal Transmission report Reception list Public Mailbox (F code) Mailbox (F code)
5-7
Items Number of mailboxes Polling communication Relay transmission Line monitoring Protocol dump list Remote diagnosis configuration
Specifications Max. 300 (Mail box + Public mail box + Relay box + Email + File box) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
C. Software
TOSHIBA Viewer/TOSHIBA Viewer via Network System Requirements PC IBM PC/AT or compatible machines For Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000: Pentium 150 MHz or higher For Windows XP: Pentium 300 MHz or higher OS Windows 95 (OSR2) Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher) Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Home Edition/Professional Memory For Windows 95/98 First Edition: 32MB minimum (64MB recommended) For Windows 98Second Edition/Me/NT4.0/2000/XP: 64MB minimum (128MB recommended) Display For Windows 95/98/Me/NT4.0/2000: 24-bit color video card and driver are recommended For Windows XP: SVGA (800 x 600) or higher-resolution video adapter and monitor Interface For TOSHIBA Viewer: Parallel interface conforming to IEEE1284 is required For TOSHIBA Viewer via Network: Network Interface Card is required
5-8
6. Service Features
A. Firmware Updating
In the e-STUDIO3511/4511, the functions of the copier are mainly controlled from four types of PC boards: System control PC board, Logic control PC board, Scanner control PC board and NIC board. A Flash ROM or Flash ROMs with firmware for controlling the functions is installed in each PC board. Also, in the optional unit (RADF (MR-3015), Finisher (MJ-1023/1024), FAX board (GD-1150)), the firmware that control the operations of the unit is installed. The firmware is mainly divided into System Firmware and Engine Firmware. (See below) When updating each firmware of the e-STUDIO3511/4511, use either of the following two methods. Connect the PC to the copier and then start to download the firmware. Perform downloading after the ROM with the written-in firmware has been installed in the jig board. Firmware Master data OS data UI data HDD program data System firmware (SYS ROM*) System firmware OS data UI data Engine firmware Engine ROM* Scanner ROM* NIC ROM* Optional unit firmware RADF ROM Finisher ROM FAX ROM RADF board (MR-3015) Finisher board (MJ-1023/1024) FAX board (GD-1150) K-PWA-DLM-320 Logic PC board (LGC board) Scanner control PC board (SLG board) NIC board K-PWA-DLM-320 or PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 System control PC board (SYS board) PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1 Hard disk PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG2 Board in which firmware is installed Recovery PWA to be used
* For System ROM, Engine ROM, Scanner ROM, and NIC ROM, the firmware can be batch updated by using PWA-DWNLD-350-JIG1.
6-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 Service Features
Using PC via serial interface TBD
Using Jig board For updating, after the ROM with the latest written-in firmware has been installed in the jig board for updating, connect the jig board to the connector prepared on each PC board of the copier. When the power is turned on, the data in the Flash ROM(s) will be automatically rewritten. This method can be used when the copier cannot be started because the firmware in the copier was damaged by a power failure, or when downloading from the PC failed. When updating, the jig board to be used will be different depending on the type of firmware. For the details of the combinations of the firmware and jig board, refer to "Jig board to be used" listed in the table.
6-2
B. Estimated Installation Time

Items e-STUDIO3511/4511 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder Original cover Paper Feed Pedestal Additional Drawer Module Large Capacity Feeder Bridge Kit Hanging type Finisher Hole Punch Unit Work Tray FAX Board FAX 2nd Line Board Expansion Memory Wireless LAN PCI Slot Scrambler Board Key Counter Damp Heater Console type Saddle stitch type MR-3015 KA-3511PC KD-1011 MY-1021 KD-1012 KN-3511 MJ-1022 MJ-1023 MJ-1024 MJ-6004N/E/F/S KK-3511 GD-1150 GD-1160 GC-1180 GN-1010 GO-1030 GP-1030 MU-8, MU-10 MF-3511U/E Time (approx.) Within 45 minutes TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD Within 20 minutes TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD
*1: The installation time of Finisher unit without the KN-3511.
6-3
C. Supplies
Replacement cycle (developments) e-STUDIO3511 20k 7k 7k 7k 160k 120K 30K 30K 30K 50K e-STUDIO4511 20k 7k 7k 7k 200k 150K 37.5K 37.5K 37.5K 50K
Items T-3511K Toner T-3511Y T-3511M T-3511C Drum Developer Black Yellow Magenta Cyan Toner Bag D-3511K D-3511Y D-3511M D-3511C TB-3511 OD-3511
Remarks
6-4
D. PM Kit
Replacement cycle Items EPU-KIT-3511 Drum cleaning blade Main charger wire Main charger grid Drum cleaning brush Ozone filter Cleaning pad DEV-KIT-3511-CLR Developer material (Y) Developer material (M) Developer material (C) Cleaning jig TBU-KIT-3511 Transfer belt Transfer belt cleaning blade 1st transfer roller DEV-KIT-3511 Developer material (K) Cleaning jig 2nd transfer roller 2nd transfer roller cleaning brush FR-KIT-3511 Fuser belt Pressure roller Separation finger Oil roller Cleaning roller Fuser belt guide (developments/sheets) e-STUDIO3511 BL-3511D WIRE-CH-363 GRID-220 B-3511 FILTER-OZ-TK TBD D-3511-Y D-3511-M D-3511-C JIG-CLEAN-DOC BT-3511TR BL-3511TR CR-3511TR1 D-3511-K JIG-CLEAN-DOC CR-3511TR2 FP-3511TR2 BT-3511-FU HR-3511-L SCRAPER-HR (5pcs.) SR-3511U B-3511U TBD (2pcs.) e-STUDIO4511
160kd
200kd
30kd
37.5kd
240kd
300kd
120kd
150kd
120ks
150ks
Note: k developments (kd), k sheets (ks)
6-5
E. PM Kit of Options
Paper Feed Pedestal (KD-1011)/Cassette Module (MY-1021) Items ROL-KIT-16CST Separation roller Feed roller Pickup roller Large Capacity Feeder (KD-1012) Items ROL-KIT-1010 Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Replacement cycle (sheets) e-STUDIO3511 ROL-PICK-UP ROL-PAPER-FED-F ROL-PAPER-FED-S e-STUDIO4511 Replacement cycle (sheets) e-STUDIO3511 K-ROLL-SPT K-ROLL-FEED ROLLER-PICK-AT e-STUDIO4511
80k
80k
160k
160k
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (MR-3015) Items DF-KIT-3015 Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller Replacement cycle (sheets) e-STUDIO3511 ROL-PICK-UP ROL-FEED ROL-SPT-513 e-STUDIO4511
80k
80k
6-6
F. Customer Maintenance Items

Items Cleaning of the original glass, ADF glass and original scale Cleaning of the original cover Replacing of the toner cartridge Replacing of the toner bag Maintenance every week When the Toner empty message has appeared. When the Dispose of used toner Press HELP message has appeared. Cleaning of the back side of the reversing automatic document feeder Maintenance every week Only when the reversing automatic document feeder is installed. Adding of a staple cartridge (For finisher) Disposing of the punched paper bits When the Set staple cartridge message has appeared. When the Please Dispose of the Hole Punch Dust message has appeared. Only when the finisher is installed. Only when the hole punch unit is installed. Timing Maintenance every week Remarks
6-7
G. Preventive Maintenance (PM) Items

In order to use the e-STUDIO3511/4511 efficiently and maintain it in good condition, preventive maintenance, such as cleaning, parts replacement, etc., must be performed every time a fixed number of the copies and printouts has been made. The cycles of preventive maintenance performed according to a fixed period (PM cycle) differs depending on the model. The PM cycle of each model and the contents of the maintenance to be performed are as shown below. Note: Black and White (B/W), Full Color (F/C) The meanings of the symbols in the figures are as follows: C:Cleaning --- Refer to Cleaning items table. L:Lubrication --- Refer to Lubrication items table. R-a:Replacement parts (a) --- Refer to Replacement items (a) table. R-b: Replacement parts (b) --- Refer to Replacement items (b) table. R-c: Replacement parts (c) --- Refer to Replacement item (c) table. R-d: Replacement parts (d) --- Refer to Replacement item (d) table. R-e: Replacement parts (e) --- Refer to Replacement item (e) table.
e-STUDIO3511 (B/W : F/C = 9 : 1, PM cycle: 120k sheets = 156k developments)

Installation
120k
123k
185k
240k
246k
300k
360k
369k
480k
492k
Go to

C L R-b R-c R-d R-e C L R-b R-c R-d R-a C L R-b R-c R-d R-e C L R-b R-c R-d
Machine life (Maximum)
554k
600k
615k
720k
797k sheets
738k
(1036k developments)
R-e
C L R-a R-b R-c
R-d
C L R-b R-c
R-d R-e
6-8
e-STUDIO4511 (B/W : F/C = 9 : 1, PM cycle: 150k sheets = 195k developments)

Installation
150k
154k
231k
300k
308k
375k
450k
462k
600k
615k
Go to

C L R-b R-c R-d R-e C L R-b R-c R-d R-a C L R-b R-c R-d R-e C L R-b R-c R-d
Machine life (Maximum)

692k
750k
769k
900k
923k
1050k
1137k sheets
1077k 1125k
(1478k developments)
R-e
C L R-a R-b R-c
R-d
C L R-b R-c
R-d R-e
C L R-b R-c
R-d
R-a
6-9
Cleaning items The Items that should be cleaned at the timing of C (every PM cycle) are as shown below. Section e-STUDIO3511/4511 Scanner Original glass ADF original glass Mirror-1 Mirror-2 Mirror-3 Reflector Lens Exposure lamp Automatic original detection sensor Slide sheet (front and rear) Laser unit Feed unit Slit glass Transport roller Paper guide Registration roller Paper dust removal brush Bypass feed unit Main charger Bypass tray Main charger case Contact point of terminals Grid Drum/cleaner related section Drum shaft bearing Whole cleaner unit Recovery blade Discharge lamp Black developer unit Whole black developer unit Front shield Guide roller Side shield Color developer unit/Revolver unit Whole color developer unit (Y, M and C) Front shield (Y, M and C) Guide roller (Y, M and C) Color auto-toner sensor Side shield Transfer belt unit Transfer belt drive roller Transfer belt driven roller Drive roller cleaning brush Image quality sensor Fuser unit Thermistor (4pcs.) Exit roller *2 *2 *2 *2 *1, *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1, *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *1, *2 Items Remarks
6-10
Section
Items Original length sensor Registration roller First roller 2nd roller Read sensor Rear guide Rear roller 3rd roller 4th roller Reverse sensor Exit roller Reverse roller Platen sheet
Remarks
Reversing Automatic Document Feeder (MR-3015)
Paper Feed Pedestal (KD-1011) Pickup roller (upper/lower) Feed roller (upper/lower) Separation roller (upper/lower) Large Capacity Feeder (KD-1012) Pickup roller Feed roller Separation roller
*1: Cleaning is unnecessary. Only check for deformation and damage. *2: If a part is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced immediately.
6-11
Lubrication items The items to which lubrication should be applied at the timing of L (every PM cycle) are as shown below. Section e-STUDIO3511/4511 Feed unit Pickup roller Feed roller Drive gear (tooth face and shaft) GCB bushing bearing Bypass feed unit Drum/cleaner related section Black developer unit Black developer unit drive section Oil seal (5pcs.) Toner cartridge drive gear Color developer unit/ Revolver unit Color developer unit drive section (Y, M and C) Oil seal (5pcs. for each color) Toner cartridge drive gear (Y, M and C) Revolver drive gear Color auto-toner sensor Fuser unit Paper Feed Pedestal (KD-1011) Large Capacity Feeder (KD-1012) Fuser unit drive gear Separation roller (upper/lower) Drive gear (tooth face) Drive gear (tooth face) Drive gear (tooth face and shaft) GCB bushing bearing Used toner auger drive section Items Remarks
6-12
Replacement item (a) The items that should be replaced at the timing of R-a (30k or 37.5k developments) are as shown below. Section e-STUDIO3511/4511 Color developer unit/ Revolver Replacement item (b) The items that should be replaced at the timing of R-b (120k or 150k developments) are as shown below. Section e-STUDIO3511/4511 Black developer unit Replacement item (c) The items that should be replaced at the timing of R-c (120k or 150k sheets) are as shown below. Section e-STUDIO3511/4511 2nd transfer roller unit Fuser unit 2nd transfer roller 2nd transfer roller cleaning brush Fuser belt Pressure roller Separation finger Oil roller Cleaning roller Fuser belt guide Items Remarks Developer material (K) Items Remarks Developer material (Y, M and C) Items Remarks
6-13
Replacement item (d) The items that should be replaced at the timing of R-d (160k or 200k developments) are as shown below. Section e-STUDIO3511/4511 Main charger Main charger wire Charger wire cleaning pad Grid Drum/cleaner related section Photoconductive drum Drum cleaning blade Drum cleaning brush Ozone filter Replacement item (e) The items that should be replaced at the timing of R-e (240k or 300k developments) are as shown below. Section e-STUDIO3511/4511 Transfer belt unit Transfer belt 1st transfer roller Transfer belt cleaning blade Items Remarks Items Remarks
6-14
H. Recommended Monthly Copy/Print Volume

e-STUDIO3511/4511 8k to 150k developments/month
I. Method of Displaying Counters

The current number of copies/prints or scans can be displayed using the following methods. 1) 2) Press the [USER FUNCTION] key on the control panel. Press the [COUNTER] key, and then press [TOTAL COUNTER] key on the touch panel.
3A) Press the [PRINT COUNTER] key. The print counter contains following counters: Items Copy Counter Fax Counter Print Counter List Counter Total Counter Contents Indicates the number of sheets has been printed by copy operations. Indicates the number of sheets has been printed by fax or Internet Fax receptions. Indicates the number of sheets has been printed by print operation. Indicates the number of sheets has been printed by system page printing operations. The total number of copies or prints is displayed classified by the color mode. 3B) Press the [SCAN COUNTER] key. The scan counter contains following counters: Items Copy Counter Fax Counter Network Counter Total Counter The counter value can Contents Indicates the number of originals has been scanned by Copy operations. Indicates the number of originals has been scanned by Fax operations. Indicates the number of originals has been scanned by Network scan operations. The total number of scans is displayed classified by the color mode. be either Sheet or Count depending on the contract.
6-15
7. Service Support
A. TABS-Electronic Imaging Division, Service Organization
The TABS-EID National Service Department has reporting to it four regional service managers and their staffs of regional service specialists. It is the responsibility of these regional staffs to conduct technical training in Toshibas various Digital Universities (TDU). Additionally, the regional service managers and their staffs support dealer service departments by providing, through scheduled or emergency visits, technical information, additional training, account assistance, and aid in the development of service department procedures. The addresses and telephone numbers of Toshibas regional offices are listed below along with a territory map that shows the area covered by each region.
Northeast Region 959 Route 46 East, 5th Floor Parsippany, NJ. 07054 Fax (973) 515-2298 Southeast Region 4855 Peachtree Industrial Blvd Suite 210 Norcross, GA. 30092 Fax (770) 209-8555 Midwest Region 8770 W. Bryn Mawr Ave. #700 Chicago, IL. 60631 Fax (773) 380-8610 Northwest Region 142 Technology#150 Irvine, CA. 92618 Fax (949) 753-0626
T.A.B.S. Service Support Territory Map
Washington 441 Oregon Idaho Calif. 442 Nevada 445 Colorado Utah 444 Arizona New Mexico Texas 345 Alaska 441 Montana North Dakota South Dakota Nebraska 243 Kansas 443 Oklahoma 341 Minnesota 245 Wisconsin Michigan 244
Maine 142 Vermont New York 144 Penn. New Hampshire Mass. Rhode Island Conn. 141
Wyoming
IowaChicago 241 Illinois Missouri Arkansas
TDU
Ohio
NewJersey
242 Indiana Kentucky
DE TDU W. VAVirginia Maryland 145
Tennessee
Irvine TDU
N. Carolina 344 S. Carolina Georgia
Dallas TDU
Miss. 342 Alabama
Atlanta TDU
343 Florida
& Hotline Support Center
Louisiana
January 2004 TOSHIBA TEC
7-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 Service Information
B. Service Policy
Toshiba requires that its authorized dealers establish and maintain, in the dealers approved territory, an adequately trained service staff and facilities for the maintenance and repair of Toshibas copier, facsimile and printer products. Before a dealer can receive delivery of its first machine of any particular model, one of the dealerships technicians must have successfully completed a Toshiba technical training program on that model. In some cases, depending on model, the dealer may be required to have a technician trained on both a machine (hardware) and its related controller (i.e. eBridge). In addition, within ninety days, the dealer must have a second technician training on the same model.
C. Internet FYI Portal - Training

Toshiba America Business Solutions, Inc. provides its dealers Internet access 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to its service information system through Toshibas FYI portal. This website provides onlineaccess to: Course catalogs an overview of courses eligible for enrollment and the prerequisite requirements. Course calendar a current schedule by region for all classroom courses. Course registration permits dealer service managers to enroll their technicians in various courses. The technicians must meet prerequisites in order to attend the courses. Enrollment status provides the dealership access to the enrollment status of their technicians. Testing on-line testing for all courses (CBT and classroom). Technicians must be registered in courses to access the tests. Self-Paced Training includes Web-STEP, Webinars, Study Guides and CBT order forms.
D. Internet FYI Portal - TECH-TO-GO

Via Toshibas FYI Internet website, dealers can access Tech-To-Go, the companys service information system Knowledgebase for Toshiba EID products. This comprehensive database of service information helps technicians troubleshoot specific symptoms or problems and provides recommendations on how to easily resolve customer issues. Tech-To-Go lets technicians search and scan documentation about specific product models and problems. These pages include on-line service manuals, downloads, utilities, patches, drivers, etc. To ensure the best possible administrative support and training, we have structured the FYI portal as follows: The website address is http://fyi.toshiba.com To gain access to Toshibas FYI website you must have an assigned user name and password. These can be obtained from the FYI administrator at your dealership.
7-2
For Toshiba service training support, please contact Toshibas Service System Administrator at 949-462-4812. For Toshiba FYI Portal technical support, please contact Toshibas eBusiness Administrator at 949-462-6370.
E. Technical Support Hotline

(1) Telephone Support: e-STUDIO3511/4511 telephone support for dealer technicians with engine hardware issues are to contact Toshibas Dallas Hotline Support Center. Telephone support for technicians with eBridge Controller issues must contact Toshibas InTouch Center. (2) Telephone Number: Contact the Dallas Hotline Support Center, toll-free, at 888-879-8247 and select menu option 2 for the copier/fax hardware queue. Select menu option 3 for the InTouch Center Network and Printing Queue. (3) Hours of Operation: From 8:00AM to 5:00PM in all local time zones. (4) Hotline Support Requirements: When calling the Dallas Hotline Support Center or InTouch Center, the calling technician must be trained on the engine hardware and/or eBridge Controller --- if he is not, the dealer service manager must place the call. The technician must be at the end-users location and have the appropriate service-related documents and adjustment jigs. To help navigate TABS Technical Telephone Support Hotline, the following flow chart shows the seven separate support areas technicians have access to when calling a single number for technical support.
7-3
7-4
F. On-Site Support
(1) Dealer Support Visits: If an on-site field visit is needed to assist a dealer technician in resolving a technical issue, the dealer must coordinate the on-site field visit through the Dallas Hotline Support Center or the InTouch Center. The responding center will contact the appropriate Toshiba regional service department and have the department contact the dealer. (2) Scheduling of On-site Visits: A Toshiba regional specialist will coordinate time and travel arrangements with the requesting dealer. At the time of the visit, a technician trained on the product that is presenting the technical issue must be available. If a visit to the end-users site is required, the trained technician (or dealer service manager) must accompany the Toshiba regional specialists.
7-5
8. Technical Training-Digital Copier and eBridge Controller

A. Training Programs
To service the e-STUDIO3511/4511 engine hardware, a dealer technician must attend an eSTUDIO3511/4511 Digital Copier School. Classes are available at all Toshiba Digital Universities. At the successful completion of the training, technicians will be officially certified to service, repair and maintain the e-STUDIO3511 and e-STUDIO4511 digital copiers. However, in order to be able to order the e-STUDIO3511/4511, the authorized dealer must have a trained technician (does not have to be the same technician) on both the engine hardware and eBridge Controller. This training program does not cover eBridge. To service the e-STUDIO3511/4511 eBridge Controller, a dealer technician must attend either a threeday or two-day (depending on technician qualifications) e-STUDIO3511/4511 eBridge Controller Technical Training School. Classes are available at all Toshiba Digital Universities. At the successful completion of either of the two trainings, technicians will be officially certified to service, repair and maintain the e-STUDIO3511 and e-STUDIO4511 eBridge Controller.
B. Who Should Attend Training

All technicians who meet each of the class prerequisites are eligible to attend training.
C. Training Prerequisites
All technicians planning to attend Toshibas e-STUDIO3511/4511 Digital Copier School must have successfully completed all of the following prior to enrolling through Toshibas FYI portal: Level 1-Technical Preparation Course Workbook (LEV-1WB) e-STUDIO3511/4511 online Web STEP Program Online Accessory Webinar for the e-STUDIO3511/4511, or previous eSTUDIO28/35/45 training (It is highly recommended that any technician satisfying the prerequisite requirement with the eStudio28/35/45, still review the Accessories Webinar.) Color Theory and Technology CBT (CD part #: 4406CBTFC22) Fax Basic (CD part #: CDSFAXBASIC) Note The e-STUDIO3511/4511 Web STEP Program and Accessory Webinar are also available as a webbased training program and can be accessed directly through FYI. A memo discussing the eSTUDIO3511/4511 web-based STEP Program and the Accessory Webinar will be posted on FYI under Announcements ~ Service. The web address link for the e-STUDIO3511/4511 web STEP Program and Accessory Webinar will be indicated in the memo. The web address link will also be available on FYI under Training ~ Service ~ Self-Paced Training ~ Web-STEP.
8-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 Technical Training-Digital Copier
All technicians planning to attend Toshibas three-day e-STUDIO3511/4511 eBridge Controller School must have successfully completed at least one of the following prior to enrolling through Toshibas FYI portal: A Novell CNA and/or CNE certificate. (We strongly recommend that a person having only a Novell CNA certification also posses a strong working knowledge of WINDOWS 95/98/2000 or WINDOWS NT.) An MCP certificate for Supporting WINDOWS 95/98/2000 and/or Supporting WINDOWS NT. A MCSE certificate A CompTia Network + certificate BTA ProTech Certification Completion of MindBuilders CBT program titled Plug It In. If a technician possesses long term work experience in an MIS/IT environment installing, configuring, and administering various network platforms, Toshiba offers the option of the technician taking a Networking Proficiency Exam for either Novell or NT. In addition to the above, the technician must also complete a new Color Controller Pre-Study Guide and related online test. The Color Controller Pre-Study Guide is posted on FYI under Announcements ~ Service ~ Self-Paced Training ~ Study Guide. All technicians planning to attend Toshibas two-day e-STUDIO3511/4511 eBridge Controller School must have successfully completed the following prior to enrolling through Toshibas FYI portal: Successful completion of Toshibas current Controller Advanced class or the GL1010 V1.2 Update class.
D. What The Training Covers (Course Content)
e-STUDIO3511/4511 Digital Copier Class
DAY
DAY 1
MODULE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Orientation Unpacking and Setup Specifications& Features Accessories Options Supplies PM Control Panel Error Codes Diagnostic Modes Identification and Familiarization Homework and Review 1
DAY 2 9
e-STUDIO160/200/250 series Technical Training-Digital Copier
8-2
February 2003 TOSHIBA TEC
10 11 12 13 14 DAY 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 DAY 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 DAY 5
Digital Color Copier Overview Scanner Unit Image Processing Laser Unit Process Related Homework and Review 2 Developer Units Transfer Unit Paper Feed ADU Power Supply Quiz Homework and Review 3 Fuser Unit Drive System Revolver Unit Image Quality Control Misc. Codes & Color Adjustments
28 Homework and Review 4 29 Firmware Update Procedures 30 FAX Review/ Final Exam and Wrap-Up
e-STUDIO3511/4511 eBridge Controller Class-Three Day
Day 1:Introduction and Course Overview Baseline Survey e-Bridge Overview and Features e-Bridge Functions and Management e-Bridge Drivers and Utilities e-Bridge TopAccess User and Admin Day 2:e-Bridge e-Filing e-Bridge Scanner and Downloader e-Bridge 08 Service Codes e-Bridge Department Code Enforcement e-Bridge Wireless Features Day 3:e-Bridge Novell Installations e-Bridge LDAP e-Bridge Fax Functions Review Final Examination Troubleshooting
8-3 e-STUDIO3511/4511 Technical Training-Digital Copier
e-STUDIO3511/4511 eBridge Controller Class-Two Day
Day 1:Introduction and Course Overview e-Bridge Overview and Features e-Bridge Functions and Management e-Bridge Drivers and Utilities e-Bridge TopAccess User and Admin e-Bridge e-Filing e-Bridge Scanner and Downloader Day 2: e-Bridge 08 Service Codes e-Bridge Department Code Enforcement e-Bridge Fax Functions Review Final Examination
E. Training Locations
The e-STUDIO3511/4511 Digital Copier and eBridge Controller schools will be taught at all Toshiba Digital Universities. Irvine, CA. Atlanta, GA. Parsippany, NJ. Dallas, TX. Chicago, ILL. Classroom instruction is provided by experienced Toshiba regional specialists who have been trained in the latest classroom platform skills and teaching techniques by Practical Management Incorporated (PMI), a leading company in train-the-trainer development. Toshiba regional specialists have a high degree of experience and technical knowledge on Toshiba products. They not only teach the technical courses, they also are responsible for resolving difficult technical problems when providing on-site support.
F. Training Format
The e-STUDIO3511/4511 Digital Copier School is five days long. The eBridge Controller School has a three-day version, and a two-day version. A ratio of two technicians per machine is provided at all Toshiba Digital Universities as are full system machine configurations including all optional accessories and network environments. Technicians perform numerous hands-on exercises giving them in-depth and practical knowledge of the machine, its internal workings as well as real world experience with numerous network configurations and set-ups. This knowledge is augmented by informative lectures that clarify complicated processes and procedures. At the end of the class,
8-4
technicians are required to complete a rigorous testing process to demonstrate what theyve learned and to prove their technical skills.
G. Training Equipment
e-STUDIO4511 MJ-1024 Finisher MJ-6004 Hole Punch MR-3015 RADF KN-3511 Bridge Unit GD-1150 FAX Board FAX 2 Line GN-1010 Wireless LAN GO-1030 PCI Slot GP-1030 Scrambler KD-1012 LCF GC-1180 Expansion Memory
nd
H. Documentation
The following manuals will be posted on Toshibas FYI website under Tech-To-Go, Copier, Active Models, e-STUDIO3511 or e-STUDIO4511 or eBridge Controller. However, for the purpose of training, these manuals will be distributed to technicians during the e-STUDIO3511/4511 Digital Copier class or eBridge Controller class. Dealers will be charged for all documentation distributed in class. Description e-STUDIO3511/4511Service Manual e-STUDIO3511/4511Service Handbook e-STUDIO3511/4511Operators Manual ESTUDIO3511/4511 Quick Start Guide FAX Operators Guide GD-1150/1160 FAX Service Manual GD-1150/1160 FAX Service Handbook KD-1011 Pedestal Service Manual KD-1012 Tandem LCF Service Manual MJ-1022 Hanging Finisher Service Manual MJ-1023/24/6004/KN3511 Finisher Service Manual GP-1030 Scrambler Service Manual Printing Guide
(1) (1)
Part Number SHE03000500 SHE03000200 6LA47583000 6LA47587000 6LA47669001 SME03000700 SME03000400 SME03001300 SME03001500 SME03001700 SME03001800 SME03000900 OME03003300 OME03003700
Network Operators Guide
8-5
Network Administrators Guide e-Filing Guide

(1) (1) (1)
(1)
OME03003500 OME03003100 6LA47663000 6LA47664000
Quick Start Guide

(1)
User Functions Guide
Documentation distributed in e-STUDIO3511/4511 eBridge Controller classes.
Note: Service Parts List are not distributed in class but the PDF file can be downloaded from
Toshibas FYI website. Service Parts List can also be ordered from the Parts Department.
I. Tools and Adjustment Jigs

Following is a list of adjustment jigs for the e-STUDIO3511/4511. One set of these jigs is given to each technician attending e-STUDIO3511/4511 Digital Copier school. Dealers will be billed at stated prices. Description Chart-Color-LT Color Test Chart Test Chart-LT Developer Material Nozzle Door Switch Jig Wire Holding Tool Part Number 4406-552060 4408687180 4407914000 4407915730 6LA01757000
In addition to the above listed jigs, the following jigs will be given only to the first technician trained from the designated dealer, because only one set per dealer is required. ordered through EIDs standard parts ordering procedure or via FYI. Description Download Jig Board (16MB) Download Jig Board (48MB) Download DLM Jig Board Part Number 6LA41994000 6LA41995000 44205829000 Additional jigs can be
J. Dealer Administered Technical Education Program (D.A.T.E.)

Toshibas Dealer Administered Technical Education Program will be available for the e-STUDIO3511/4511 Digital Copier class. A D.A.T.E. program will not be available for the eBridge Controller class. To be a D.A.T.E. Program participant, a dealer must have on file a current D.A.T.E. Program Policy and Procedures Acknowledgment for the specified location. The criteria to be a D.A.T.E. dealer is detailed in the Acknowledgment, however, below are some of the basic requirements: The dealer must be active with a current Dealer Agreement.
8-6
A minimum classroom size of approx. 450 sq. ft is required to accommodate four technicians and two fully configured systems. Larger classes with added technicians call for an additional 90square -feet per technician. The designated dealer instructor must posses a minimum of three years experience repairing and maintaining copiers. The dealer instructor must have successfully completed one of the train-the-trainer courses recommended by Toshiba. The dealer instructor must achieve a final grade score of 90 percent or better to be to be allowed to teach the same D.A.T.E. Program.
8-7
9. Service Requirements
A. Service Authorization
Toshiba requires its dealers to establish and maintain an adequately trained service staff and on-site facilities for field maintenance and repair of its copier, facsimile and printer products in the dealers approved territory. Before a dealer can receive delivery of its first machine of any particular model, one of the dealerships technicians must have successfully completed a Toshiba technical training program on that model. In some cases, depending on model, the dealer may be required to have a technician trained on both a machine (hardware) and its related controller (i.e. eBridge). In addition, within ninety days, the dealer must have a second technician training on the same model.
B. Service Recommendations
To properly service and maintain e-STUDIO3511/4511Digital Copiers, Toshiba strongly recommends that technicians carry with them a PC laptop computer. Laptops are used as tools and allow technicians to periodically update machines and accessories to the latest firmware versions. Toshiba also suggests the PC laptop include a CD-ROM drive giving the technicians the ability to use many of the CD-ROM service support programs such as COSMOS (Service Manuals and Handbooks in PDF format on CDs) and RIBON (Spare Parts List on CDs). Toshiba also recommends that technicians have access to the Internet to view the latest technical data and up-to-date problem resolutions posted on Toshibas FYI website.
9-1
e-STUDIO3511/4511 Service Requirements
10. Parts & Supplies Warranty Program

Effective October 1 , 2003, Toshiba America Business Systems will be implementing a new, parts and supplies, warranty program. This new warranty program was designed to simplify the warranty process for our customers on the majority of their parts & supplies related warranty issues. The process is simple. Each parts invoice you receive will include a 1.04% discount on the total invoice amount. The cumulative value of this discount has been calculated to equal or exceed what the average dealer submits in parts and supplies warranty claims. You are effectively being pre-paid for your parts and supplies warranties. Please note that with this new program the cost of the following processes have been virtually eliminated: ?? The cost to pack, ship and return defective parts is eliminated. Simply dispose of them in the appropriate manner ?? The cost of your time to complete a warranty tag for defective or damaged supplies is eliminated. No paperwork is required. ?? The cost of your time spent managing your warranty credit balance is eliminated. Your warranty credit is applied to every parts invoice immediately.
st
Effective Date Our new warranty program will begin October 1, 2003. In order to ensure proper tracking, the program will begin with a 90-day overlap of the old and new warranty systems. All parts in the system postmarked as of October 1, 2003 will be processed under the old warranty system. Additionally, the new warranty system will be applied to all parts purchases made 90-days prior to the start of the program. You will be issued a one-time credit balance for all parts purchased between June 30, 2003 and September 2003 totaling 1.04% of your total parts purchases for that period. This ensures that the program launch is smooth and has no detrimental effect on your warranties in process.
Program Description After October 1, 2003 you will no longer need to complete warranty documents or send in products for warranty claim. You are effectively being paid in advance at a rate that has been determined to be equal to or exceed the amount you would typically claim through the previous system for parts & supplies. On the bottom of each parts invoice you receive after October 1, 2003 there will be a credit applied in the amount of 1.04% of your total parts purchase (see examples of parts invoices attached). Note that this 1.04% credit is applied to parts purchases only but covers warranty costs for both parts and supplies. Rather than having 2 separate credit percentages for parts and supplies it was decided to factor the relatively low amount of supply warranties into the parts credit multiplier for the sake of simplicity. Participation As a Toshiba dealer you are automatically participating in the program every time you order Toshiba original parts. No paperwork is required and no product needs to be returned to Toshiba
for warranty credit. You are pre-paid for parts and supply warranties via the warranty credit on your parts invoices. Exceptions to the parts & supplies warranty program There are some exceptions to the warranty program that you should be aware of. This program was designed to simplify and reduce the cost associated with the warranty process for the overwhelming majority of part & supply damage and defect issues. However, there are a few instances where this simplified warranty program may not adequately address a warranty problem. These exceptions to this process are meant to ensure equity on all parts and supply warranty issues. ?? First, if an abnormal high failure rate for parts or supplies occurs (i.e. large scale defect/failure) this will be handled outside of the new warranty program. Defective products will be repaired or replaced as they were under the previous warranty program. Should it be determined by Toshiba that a major component defect has occurred, you will be notified of the defect and given instructions on the return/replacement process by our service group. ?? Second, parts required for most field updates will continue to be provided free of charge using the previous processes & procedures. Typical means of offering field updates are for dealers to provide a list of serial numbers for machines requiring the update (easiest) or in some cases by offering dealers a one-for-one replacement (order the parts you need and you are credited back for the parts when you return the old one). As before, you will be notified of the need for field updates by Toshibas service group who will provide you with all necessary instructions. ?? Third, although the drum replacement warranty program will be superceded by this new warranty program, the drum core credit program will remain in place. Selenium, Selenium/Tellurium and Arsenic tri-Selenide (i.e. SG-87, SG-88, etc) may still be returned for credit in accordance with the existing program. Note that the drum core credit program is not a warranty program but an incentive for you to return SETE/ASSE drums for proper disposal in accordance with EPA regulations. ?? Forth, defective upper fuser rollers are covered by the new warranty program and do not need to be returned to Toshiba. However, upper fuser roller cores can still be returned for core credit in accordance with the upper fuser roller core credit program. Note that this is not a warranty credit but rather a core credit intended to provide an incentive to recycle the aluminum roller core material. ?? Fifth, It may be necessary, on occasion, for Toshiba to collect defective parts from the field for evaluation. Should this be necessary, you will be contacted directly by Toshibas service group with instructions. PLEASE DO NOT RETURN DEFECTIVE PARTS UNLESS YOU ARE SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. Requests for defective parts are uncommon and will be dealt with on a case-by-case basis. Toshiba will work with the individual dealer to determine reasonable compensation for their time and expenses. ?? Lastly, PCBs used for troubleshooting will be handled separately from the new warranty system. Dealers are encouraged to use PCBs from their own inventory to trouble-shoot. However, should you require PCBs from Toshiba to facilitate trouble-shooting you will need to follow the procedures outlined in the parts trouble-shooting section of this parts & supplies warranty program document. This exception exists because of the high value commonly associated with PCBs and ensures that dealers are able to recover at least some portion of their cost.
Parts used for troubleshooting (PCBs) It is sometimes necessary remove a part that is suspected to have a defect and replace it with a new part to trouble-shoot a problem. Printed circuit boards are the most common part that a trouble-shooting methodology is applied to. Because most dealers do not have the facilities to test items such as printed circuit boards in house, a new circuit board is often times swapped out with the PCB suspected of being defective to determine if there is a problem. It is strongly recommended that dealers use PCBs from their own stock to troubleshoot. It is also strongly recommended that prior to ordering a PCB for trouble-shooting that you contact Toshibas Tech Hotline for assistance and advice. However, should you choose to order a new PCB from Toshiba to use for troubleshooting, please note that the following applies: When returning the PCB for credit it will be necessary to request a return authorization (RA) and include: ?? An Invoice of the part(s) purchased for use in troubleshooting ?? A copy of the machine service history showing the machine serial number and the date the part was replaced ?? All parts used for trouble-shooting must be returned with the above documentation within 30 days of purchase
Upon inspection of the returned parts there will be one of three outcomes. They are: ?? Part is sealed in its original package & packaging is undamaged or marked (i.e. must be in new, salable condition). A 20% restocking fee will be applied ?? Part is in original package but has been opened The board must be electrically inspected/tested if it test OK a 40% restocking fee will be assessed ?? Part is in original package but has been opened The board must be electrically inspected/tested if it fails to test OK no credit will be issued ?? Parts returned after 31 days will not be eligible for credit and will be returned to the customer. Please note that prior to returning any boards for troubleshooting purposes you will need a return authorization (RA) from Toshiba. You will be instructed by the Toshiba employee issuing the RA number of the proper address to send the board to. Boards received without an RA number will be treated as a request for repair. The board will be repaired and returned to the dealer who will be billed for the repair.
Should you have any questions regarding the parts and supplies warranty program please contact your Regional Aftermarket Sales Manager.
Purpose of the Imaging Manual

The Imaging Manual is intended for customers using the Toshiba e-STUDIO3511/4511 with a variety of specific needs and inquiries for high image quality, such as: How to obtain a clearer copy image How to maintain the current image quality How to make the text look sharper on the copy The Toshiba MFPs are factory-configured to provide image quality settings that satisfy the majority of customers. However, these settings may not be necessarily optimal for all specific needs from customers. Proper image quality adjustments can satisfy such needs. Most of the adjustments described in this manual must be performed by a service technician, but a few of them can also be performed by the customer. It is strongly recommended that this manual be fully utilized by not only the service technician, but also the sales representative, who also has opportunities of obtaining customer feedback on the image quality. This manual helps the sales representative to study and comprehend what kind of customer needs for the image quality can be satisfied, to make a proposal to the customer for improving image quality, and to communicate the customers needs with ease to the service technician. In addition, this manual is expected to facilitate the marketing of the Toshiba MFPs to prospective customers that have specific demand for image quality and the expansion of sales. The adjustments described in this manual are all based on the needs of actual customers. Meeting their specific needs will increase their satisfaction. Please remember to read "Cautions after the completion of the adjustment," which you must pay close attention to, after the completion of the adjustment.
Precautions in Servicing
For adjustments to be performed by the service technician, the cautions mentioned in the Service Manual must be stringently followed. The adjustments must be performed by a qualified service technician who has completed the service training course. The default values mentioned in this manual may be different from the actual ones, due to the timing of shipping (firmware version). But note that the values recommended and acceptable value range mentioned in this manual remain the same.
Purpose of the Imaging Manual
Icons The following icons used in this manual denotes the following: : Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in Black mode (excluding Image smoothing mode) Printer An adjustment having an effect on black-and-white printing * The adjustment will be effective, if "Mono" is selected from among the "Color" options on the Windows printer driver or if "Mono" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the Macintosh printer driver. Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in Black mode : Copy Scan An adjustment having an effect on copying in Image smoothing mode in Black mode An adjustment having an effect on scanning in Gray scale mode
: Copy An adjustment having an effect on copying in Full color mode Printer An adjustment having an effect on full-color printing * The adjustment will be effective, if "Automatic" is selected from among the "Color" options on the Windows printer driver or if "Color" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the Macintosh printer driver. Scan An adjustment having an effect on scanning in Full color mode : Copy Scan
PCL5c
An adjustment having an effect on copying in Auto color mode An adjustment having an effect on scanning in Auto color mode
: An adjustment having an effect on printing on the Windows PCL5c emulation printer driver
PCL6 PS3
: An adjustment having an effect on printing on the Windows PCL6 emulation printer driver : An adjustment having an effect on printing on the Windows PS3 emulation printer driver : An adjustment having effect on printing on the Macintosh printer driver : An adjustment having an effect on the image stored in the e-Filing box by the scanning functions (including Scan to Box, Scan to File and Scan to E-mail)
Mac Scan to Box
Copy to Box
: An adjustment having an effect on the image stored in the e-Filing box by the copying functions (Copy to Box)
Print to Box
: An adjustment having an effect on the image stored in the e-Filing box by the printing functions (Print to Box)
Fax to Box
: An adjustment having an effect on the image stored in the e-Filing box by the Fax and Internet Fax functions (including Received Fax to Box and Received Internet Fax to Box)
Table of Contents 1. General Adjustments Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)
1.1 1.2 To Obtain a Darker Image To Achieve the Image Quality Most Suitable for Paper Used
1.2.1 To Adjust the Blurred or Grained Image 1.2.2 To Adjust the Light Image at the Trailing Edge/Splattering of Toner
1.3 1.4 1.5
To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality after Power-on (To optimally program image quality control) To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality under the Operating Conditions (To optimally program image quality control) To Correct Out-of-Register Colors
2. Copier-specific Adjustments
2.1 To Sharply Copy Light Text or Thin Lines (To darken handwritten text or thin lines in the graphic image)
2.1.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in Black Mode 2.1.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in Full Color Mode 2.1.3 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in Auto Color Mode
2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
To Closely Match with the Color Balance of the Original To Improve the Reproducibility of Gray To Copy in Vivid Colors To Make the Pale Area of the Original Look Darker and Sharper (To improve the highlight reproducibility) To Eliminate the Background Color
2.6.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in Black Mode 2.6.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in Full Color Mode
2.7
To Avoid Copying the Image Seen through the Back of the Page Printed on Thin Paper
2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11
To Eliminate Moir To Copy Sharply (To enhance sharpness) To Make Photo Edges Look Softer To Make Solid Filled Bold Text (Logo) Highly Colored
2.11.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo 2.11.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Colored Logo
2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15
To Sharply Contrast the Hues of Highlighters on the Copy To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper To Obtain Smooth Gray-scale Photo Images To Change the Threshold in Auto Color Mode (To change the threshold between Full color mode and Black mode to meet the users needs) 2.16 To Clearly Copy Text (To adjust the density of text)
Table of Contents
3. Printer-specific Adjustments
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance To Obtain the Desired Color Balance To Closely Match with the Color Balance on the Monitor To Maintain a Uniform Gray Hue (To Maintain consistency in Gray among Text, Photos and Graphics) To Easily Adjust the Overall Brightness To Easily Adjust the Overall Saturation To Clearly Print Light-colored Thin Lines or Text To Clearly Print Thin Lines/Double Lines To Decrease the Image Density and Save Toner (To Print in Toner Save Mode) To Adjust the Image Density in Toner Save Mode To Print Illegible Gray or Colored Text in Black To Ignore Blank Pages for Printing To Sharply Print Black Text
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 To Clearly Store the B/W Image in Auto Color Mode To Store the Original, while Reducing the File Size To Store the Color Photo Image, while Minimizing Moir To Store the B/W Original with Photos and Text with the High Density (To change the density in Copy to Box) To Match with the Color Balance on the Original (To adjust the color balance in Print to Box) To Scan and Print, while Minimizing Moir To Finely Print the Image Stored in the e-Filing box To Store an Image Suitable for Displaying on the Monitor or Image Editing
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 To Clearly Scan Text (To reduce noise around text) To Scan the Original, while Eliminating the Background Color (To eliminate the background density) To Clearly Scan and Print the Original in Black and White (To improve gradation and reduce graininess) To Scan the Original, while Reducing the File Size To Sharply Scan the Original (To increase the sharpness intensity) To Scan the Original, while Enhancing Black To Scan the Original with the Desired Gradation
ii
1. General Adjustments Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box) 1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image
Before the adjustment After the adjustment
The output image looks light and blurred. Explanation
The output image looks darker and sharper.
When an original containing photo images or gradational images is printed, the output image sometimes looks light and blurred. Perform image quality control or automatic calibration, and adjust the transfer roller bias output, in order to obtain a darker and sharper image.
Procedures * Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below. * Procedures (1), (3) and (4) are used by the service technician only. * Procedure (2) is used by the service technician, and by the user. (1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct variations in density. After exercising image quality control, print and check the image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Perform the automatic calibration to correct variations in image density. * [ADMIN] is selected from among the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] options by default. In other words, an administrator is authorized to operate the automatic calibration. But the [USER] option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it. Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] option.
1.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1. General Adjustments Copying, Printing and e-Filing (Output from Box)
To adjust the copy image quality Use steps (a) through (i) to perform the automatic calibration. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [ADMIN] button. (c) Enter the 6-digit administrator password. Press the [ENTER] button. (d) Press the [GENERAL] button. (e) Press the [CALIBRATION] button. (f) Press the [COPY] button. (g) Press the [CALIBRATION] button to print out the test chart. (h) Place the printed test chart on the original glass. (i) Press the [START] button to perform calibration. When the calibration comes to an end, the message "Scanning and calibrating" will disappear. * As a result of the above steps, both the full-color and black-and-white copy image quality will be corrected simultaneously. To adjust the print image quality Use steps (a) through (k) to perform the automatic calibration. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [ADMIN] button. (c) Enter the 6-digit administrator password. Press the [ENTER] button. (d) Press the [GENERAL] button. (e) Press the [CALIBRATION] button. (f) Press the [PRINT] button. (g) Press the desired resolution button ([600 x 600] or [1200 x 600]) of the PDL ("PS3" or "PCL" emulation), which will be based on the calibration. (h) Press the [CALIBRATION] button to print out the test chart. (i) Place the printed test chart on the original glass. (j) Press the [START] button to perform calibration. When the calibration comes to an end, the message "Scanning and calibrating" will disappear. (k) The message "Is a result made to reflect?" will appear. Press the [YES] button. * Automatic calibration correction will be applied to printing performed under the following conditions: Printing Automatic calibration PC Printer driver type correction Color Applied Color: Automatic PCL5c Mono Applied Color: Mono Mono Not applied Windows PCL6 --Mono Not applied Color Applied Color: Automatic PS3 Mono Applied Color: Mono Mono Not applied Color Applied Color Resolution Type: Color Macintosh Mono Applied Color Resolution Type: Mono Mono Not applied * The [1200 x 600] button will be displayed, provided that the optional GC-1180 expansion memory is installed. *Repeat the above steps to correct the resolution of the PDL ("PS3" or "PCL" emulation), if necessary. After performing the automatic calibration, print and check the image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.1
(3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [234/236/237/238/239] to adjust the transfer (2nd transfer) roller bias output. (Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias so as to increase the density of the image.) The code to use varies, according to a type of paper used. Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to the paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality. Set the value within a range of "2" to "8" to obtain the highest density of the image. Value recommended 2 to 8 Acceptable value range 0 to 10
Paper type Plain paper Black Full color Black Thick 1 Full color Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back
[05] code
Subcode 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 0 1 0 1
Default
05-234
05-236
2 to 8
0 to 10
Black Full color Black Full color Black Full color
05-237 05-238 05-239
2 to 8 2 to 8 2 to 8
0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
5 5 5
* "Front" refers to the printed side in simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing upwards in duplex mode. "Back" refers to the printed side that is delivered facing downwards in duplex mode. * The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper types. Paper type Acceptable paper weight Plain paper 64 to 80 g/m 17 to 20 lb. Bond Thick 1 81 to 105 g/m Max. 28 lb. Bond Thick 2 106 to 163 g/m Max. 43 lb. Bond / 90 lb. Index Thick 3 164 to 209 g/m Max. 55 lb. Bond / 110 lb. Index After adjusting the transfer roller bias output, perform the automatic calibration in the same manner as in procedure (2). <Hint> The transfer voltage increases as the set value is increased. It is usually recommended that the set value be increased, when printing on thick paper or paper with asperities on its surface. On the other hand, the set value should be decreased, when printing on thin paper. After adjusting the density, print and check the image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
1.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(4) Check the life of the consumables (particularly the drum, developer material and fuser unit) and replace them, if necessary. When replacing any consumable, use steps (a) to (c) below. (a) Enter PM support mode. Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to "0." * For further information regarding PM support mode, refer to the Service Handbook. (b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [396]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized. (c) Perform the automatic calibration in the same manner as in procedure (2). * After replacing any consumable, remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to "0." Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables. * While replacing any consumable, also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit, and thoroughly clean it, if it is soiled.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular.
Remarks Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables. If printing on another type of paper causes a problem with the image quality after the adjustment, return the set value (for 05-234 to 239) to the default (set value: 5) and then perform the adjustment again. When replacing any consumable, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.1
1.2 To Achieve the Image Quality Most Suitable for Paper Used
Before the adjustment
The image looks grained, depending on the type of paper.
After the adjustment
The image quality at the trailing edge of the paper may become lighter, depending on the type of paper used.
Printing direction
The clear image quality, most suitable for a type of paper used, is obtained.
Toner is splattered in the image, depending on the type of paper, used.
1.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Printing direction
Explanation The image sometimes looks slightly blurred or grained on the copy or printout, depending on the type of paper used. In addition, it may become lighter at the trailing edge of the paper. Adjust the transfer roller bias output, in order to achieve the image quality most suitable for the paper used.
Procedures * The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below. * The procedure to use varies, depending on whether the image looks blurred/grained or becomes lighter at the trailing edge of the paper. Use the procedures, according to the image quality problem you have.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.2
1.2.1 To Adjust the Blurred or Grained Image

(1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [234/236/237/238/239] to adjust the transfer (2nd transfer) roller bias output. (Adjust the offset voltage of transfer roller bias so as to optimize the halftones.) The code to use varies, according to a type of paper used. Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to the paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality. Set the value within a range of "2" to "8" to optimize the halftones. Paper type Plain paper Black Full color Black Thick 1 Full color Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP Front Back Front Back Front Back Front Back [05] code Subcode 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 0 1 0 1 0 1 Value recommended 2 to 8 Acceptable value range 0 to 10 Default
05-234
05-236
2 to 8
0 to 10
Black Full color Black Full color Black Full color
05-237 05-238 05-239
2 to 8 2 to 8 2 to 8
0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
5 5 5
* "Front" refers to the printed side in simplex mode or the side that is delivered facing upwards in duplex mode. "Back" refers to the printed side that is delivered facing downwards in duplex mode. * The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper types. Paper type Acceptable paper weight Plain paper 64 to 80 g/m 17 to 20 lb. Bond Thick 1 81 to 105 g/m Max. 28 lb. Bond Thick 2 106 to 163 g/m Max. 43 lb. Bond / 90 lb. Index Thick 3 164 to 209 g/m Max. 55 lb. Bond / 110 lb. Index After adjusting the transfer roller bias output, perform the automatic calibration. * For further information regarding the procedures, refer to procedure (2) in 1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image. <Hint> The transfer voltage increases as the set value is increased. It is usually desirable that the set value be decreased to obtain a clearly highlighted area. After performing the adjustment, print and check the image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
1.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(2) Check the life of the consumables (particularly the drum, developer material and fuser unit) and replace them, if necessary. When replacing any consumable, use steps (a) to (c) below. (a) Enter PM support mode. Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable part to "0." * For further information regarding PM support mode, refer to the Service Handbook. (b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [396]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized. (c) Perform the automatic calibration. * For further information regarding the procedures, refer to procedure (2) in 1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image. * After replacing any consumable, remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to "0." Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables. * While replacing any consumable, also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit, and thoroughly clean it, if it is soiled.
Remarks Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables. The desired image quality may not be obtained, depending on the type of paper used. In this case, use the recommended paper and then print or adjust the image quality. If printing on another type of paper causes a problem with the image quality after the adjustment, return the set value (for 05-234 to 239) to the default (set value: 5) and then perform the adjustment again. The adjustment will make up for the gap in the image quality and density between the front and back of the paper in duplex copying/printing. Particularly, if the image on the back is lighter than on the front, the image quality may be improved by increasing the set value for the transfer roller bias output. When replacing any consumable, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.2
1.2.2 To Adjust the Light Image at the Trailing Edge/Splattering of Toner

(1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for code [293] or [1822] to adjust the transfer roller bias output at the trailing edge of the paper. (Adjust the ratio (%) of the transfer roller bias output at the center to the trailing edge of the paper, in order to ensure a uniform density between them.) The code to use varies, according to a type of paper used. Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to the paper type for which you would like to improve the image quality. Set the value within the recommended value range, in order to ensure a uniform density between the center and trailing edge of the paper. Use steps (a) to (b) to adjust the transfer roller bias output. * The adjustment ranges of the transfer roller bias output at the trailing edge of the paper are as illustrated below.
Printing direction
Adjustment range B (05-1822)
Adjustment range A (05-293)
(a) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for code [293] to correct the transfer roller bias output at the trailing edge of the paper in adjustment range A. Value Paper type [05] code Subcode recommended Plain paper 0 Thick 1 1 05-293 60 to 85 Thick 2 2 Thick 3 3 OHP 4 Acceptable value range
Default 85 75 80 80 80
0 to 100
1.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for code [1822] to correct the transfer roller bias output in adjustment range B. (Specify an average factor, in order to prevent the transfer roller bias output from being rapidly changed between the center and trailing edge of the paper.) Value Acceptable Paper type [05] code Subcode Default recommended value range Plain paper 0 Thick 1 1 05-1822 75 to 100 0 to 100 92 Thick 2 2 Thick 3 3 OHP 4 * The value for code 05-1822 must be larger than the one for code 05-293, if the same subcodes are used. Example: Value for subcode 0 of 05-1822 Value for subcode 0 of 05-293 * The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper types. Paper type Acceptable paper weight Plain paper 64 to 80 g/m 17 to 20 lb. Bond Thick 1 81 to 105 g/m Max. 28 lb. Bond Thick 2 106 to 163 g/m Max. 43 lb. Bond / 90 lb. Index Thick 3 164 to 209 g/m Max. 55 lb. Bond / 110 lb. Index
<Hint>
As the set value is decreased, the transfer voltage at the trailing edge of the paper becomes low and eventually the image quality will vary. (If the transfer voltage is too high relative to the paper weight, a transfer void will occur. (The density will be decreased.) To avoid this problem, decrease the transfer voltage.)
After performing the adjustment, print and check the image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.2
(2) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for code [434] to adjust the bottom margin. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image printed on the back of the paper (printed side delivered facing downwards) in duplex copying. Remember that it will not affect the image printed in simplex copying, the one printed on the front of the paper (printed side delivered facing upwards) in duplex copying, and the print image quality. * In duplex copying, the bottom margin on the back of the paper may be narrower than on the front in simplex or duplex copying, depending on the paper size and how much paper is moistened. This results in the faint image at the trailing edge on the back of the paper. Adjust the bottom margin, in order to clearly copy at the trailing edge on the back of the paper. Use steps (a) to (b) to adjust the bottom margin. (a) With the platen cover or RADF opened, make a double-sided copy. (Copy a solid black image.) Checking the copy image, determine how much the bottom margin should be increased. * Select the best paper size for duplex copying, if necessary. It is recommended to use the paper, which is most frequently used for duplex copying. * When making a double-sided copy of the solid black image, place blank paper on the original glass, allowing the solid black image to be copied only at the trailing edge on the back of the paper, for toner saving purposes. (b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for subcode "0" of code [434] to adjust the bottom margin on the back of the paper. The amount of change per step varies, depending on the paper size. Long size (A3/B4/LD/LG): The bottom margin will be increased by 0.042 mm per step. The bottom margin determined for the short size will be applied. Value recommended Set a value larger than the current one to increase the bottom margin. Acceptable value range 0 to 255 Default UC: 28 EUR: 45 Others: 45 Short size (A4/LT): The bottom margin will be increased by 0.028 mm per step. Middle size (A4-R/LT-R, etc.): [05] code 05-434 Subcode 0
* Set the value in increments of approximately 12, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * Set "0" for the subcode. Setting "1" for the subcode allows you to adjust the right margin on the back in duplex copying, but it is not necessary here. Therefore, never change the value for subcode 1. After the adjustment, make a double-sided copy again, with the platen cover or RADF opened and check the image at the trailing edge on the back of the paper. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, repeat step (b). <Hint> If the user is concerned regarding the image quality at the trailing edge on the back of the paper, set a slightly wider bottom margin (3 to 4 mm). If not, it is recommended to set it to 2 to 3 mm.
1.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment Too small a set value may possibly cause the image to become light, if a darker image is laid out at the trailing edge of the original. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
Remarks Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables. The desired image quality may not be obtained, depending on the type of paper used. In this case, use the recommended paper and then print or adjust the image quality. If printing on another type of paper causes a problem with the image quality after the adjustment, return the set values (for codes 05-239 and 1822) to the defaults and then perform the adjustment again. The adjustment will make up for the gap in the image quality and density at the trailing edge between the front and back of the paper in duplex copying. Particularly, if the image at the trailing edge on the back of the paper is light, the image quality may be improved by decreasing the set value for the transfer roller bias output.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.2
1.3 To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality after Power-on

(To optimally program image quality control)
Before the adjustment Immediately after power-on After the adjustment Immediately after power-on
Immediately after power-on
Immediately after power-on
The image quality varies, depending on the operating environment or condition at power-on.
The uniform image quality is ensured, every time the copier is turned on.
Explanation If copying or printing is performed immediately after the copier is turned on or when it is returned from energy saving mode, there will be variations in the density of the image. (It will not occur when the copier is temporarily turned off and on for releasing jammed paper or when it is shortly returned from energy saving mode.) Switch the image quality control mode to the mode, which gives a higher priority to accuracy in image quality control, in order to ensure the uniform image quality, every time the copier is turned on. * Image quality control is performed in mode 1 by default, which is intended to reduce the warm-up time. Switch it to mode 2, which is intended to increase the interval during which image quality control is performed.
1.3
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedures * The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below. (1) Enter setting mode [08]. Change the value for code [559] to "2" to place image quality control in mode 2. It is intended to increase the interval during which image quality control is performed. Value for 08-559 Image quality control immediately after the copier is turned on 0 Invalid 1 Valid: Mode 1 (default) 2 Valid: Mode 2 After switching to mode 2, forcibly perform image quality control, as follows: Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button. After forcibly exercising image quality control, print and check the image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Check the life of the consumables (particularly the drum, developer material and transfer belt unit) and replace them, if necessary. When replacing any consumable, use steps (a) to (c) below. (a) Enter PM support mode. Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to "0." * For further information regarding PM support mode, refer to the Service Handbook. (b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [396]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized. (c) Perform the automatic calibration. * For further information regarding the procedures, refer to procedure (2) in 1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image. * After replacing any consumable, remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to "0." Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables. * While replacing any consumable, also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit, and thoroughly clean it, if it is soiled.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment Switching image quality control mode will increase the warm-up time by approximately 25 seconds at maximum, immediately after the copier is turned on or returned from energy saving mode. In addition, it will increase the interval during which image quality control is performed. This may possibly shorten the life of the consumables. Pay special attention to these factors and perform the adjustment, while checking the image quality. Remarks When replacing any consumable, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.3
1.4 To Minimize Variations in the Image Quality under the Operating Conditions
(To optimally program image quality control)
The image contrast varies, depending on the date and time when copying or printing is performed or the type of job.
The image quality is constantly maintained.
1.4
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Explanation The image contrast may vary, depending on the date and time when copying or printing is performed or the type of copy/print job. To constantly maintain image quality, shorten the waiting period until image quality control is performed.
Procedures * The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below. (1) Enter setting mode [08]. Change the value for code [570], [571] or [572] to specify the best interval during which image quality control is performed, according to use of the copier. In addition, change the value for code [565] or [566] to switch image quality control mode to mode 2. It gives a higher priority to accuracy in image quality control. The copier is installed in a place where the temperature and humidity vary widely: Use steps (a) to (b) and perform the adjustment of image quality control. (a) Change the value for 08-405 within the range from "1" to "3" (value %R.H.) to increase the frequency of image quality control, in response to a change in humidity. * Image quality control will be performed, when the relative humidity changes in accordance with the specified difference from the previous image quality control. If the difference in the relative humidity exceeds the specified value, image quality control is performed, first. Then a copy or print job will be performed. Value for 08-570 1 to 3 4 Difference in relative humidity 5%R.H. to 15%R.H. 20%R.H. (default)
(b) Change the value for code 08-565 to "2" to place image quality control in mode 2. It is intended to increase the interval during which image quality control is performed. Value for 08-565 Image quality control when the relative humidity varies 0 Invalid 1 Valid: Mode 1 (default) 2 Valid: Mode 2
After switching to mode 2, forcibly perform image quality control, as follows: Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.4
A very small number of copies are output (approx. one copy per hour): Use steps (a) to (b) and perform the adjustment of image quality control. (a) Change the value for 08-571 within the range from "1" to "3" to reduce the waiting period until image quality control is performed. * When a copy or print job is initiated, if the waiting period until image quality control is performed has already elapsed, image quality control is performed, first. Then a copy or print job will be performed. Value for 08-571 Waiting period until image quality control is performed 1 to 3 1 to 3 hours 4 4 hours (default) (b) Change the value for code 08-566 to "2" to place image quality control in mode 2. It is intended to increase the interval during which image quality control is performed. Value for 08-566 Image quality control when the specified waiting period has already elapsed 0 Invalid 1 Valid: Mode 1 (default) 2 Valid: Mode 2 After switching to mode 2, forcibly perform image quality control, as follows: Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button.
A large number of sheets are printed (hundreds of copies or more per day) and the image quality needs to be constantly maintained: Change the value for code 08-572 to "1" to "9" (Value 100 sheets) to reduce the accumulated number of sheets printed. It will determine the interval until the next image quality control is performed. * After a copy or print job is completed, if the accumulated number of sheets printed exceeds the specified value, image quality control will be performed. Value for 08-572 Accumulated number of sheets printed until image quality control is performed 1 to 9 100 to 900 sheets 10 1,000 sheets (default) * Use code 08-567 to define in which mode image quality control is performed, when the accumulated number of sheets printed exceeds the specified value. Mode 2 is selected by default. It is intended to increase the interval during which image quality control is performed and maintain the image quality with high accuracy. Therefore, never change the value for this code, unless otherwise required. Image quality control when the accumulated number of sheets printed Value for 08-567 exceeds the specified value 0 Invalid 1 Valid: Mode 1 2 Valid: Mode 2 (default) After changing the value for code 08-572, forcibly perform image quality control, as follows: Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button. After performing the adjustment, print and check the image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
1.4
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(2) Check the life of the consumables (particularly the drum, developer material and transfer belt unit) and replace them, if necessary. When replacing any consumable, use steps (a) to (c) below. (a) Enter PM support mode. Reset the counter corresponding to the replaced consumable to "0." * For further information regarding PM support mode, refer to the Service Handbook. (b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [396]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be performed and the image quality control value will be initialized. (c) Perform the automatic calibration. * For further information regarding the procedures, refer to procedure (2) in 1.1 To Obtain a Darker Image. * After replacing any consumable, remember to reset the counter corresponding to it to "0." Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables. * While replacing any consumable, also check the slit glass in the laser optical unit, and thoroughly clean it, if it is soiled.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly slow down the copying or printing speed and shorten the life of the consumables. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the image. Switching image quality control mode will increase the interval of image quality control by approximately 25 seconds at maximum. It is performed before or after a copy or print job is performed. This may possibly cause loss in the life of consumables. Pay special attention to these factors and perform the adjustment, while checking the image quality.
Remarks Enter the value mentioned in the procedures or one within the recommended value range for the adjustment. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including slowdown in the copying or printing speed. When replacing any consumable, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.4
1.5 To Correct Out-of-Register Colors


The text and background are misaligned or out of register.
Text is aligned with the background and a clear copy/print image is obtained.
Explanation Colors of text or a thin line are sometimes printed out of register. Perform color registration control, in order to print or copy without out-of-register colors.
Procedure * The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedure below. (1) Make sure that no out-of-register colors are recognized on an original. (2) Check a direction in which colors are misaligned. * This adjustment is intended to correct the print start timing of the toner colors in the secondary scanning direction, in order to align the print positions of 3 toner colors (K, C and Y) with magenta (M). Therefore, it will be effective, only if colors are misaligned in the paper feeding direction (or the secondary scanning direction). If colors are misaligned in the direction perpendicular to the paper feeding direction (or the primary scanning direction), refer to <Hint> below. <Hint> If colors are misaligned in the direction perpendicular to the paper feeding direction, enter test mode [03] and rotate the transfer belt for 5 minutes. (The main motor drives the transfer belt. Use 03-101 to rotate the main motor or 03-151 to stop it.) After that, check the copy or print image. If the colors still misaligned, replace the transfer belt or transfer belt unit. For further information regarding how to use test mode [03] and transfer belt replacement procedures, refer to the Service Manual and Service Handbook.
1.5
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(3) Enter adjustment mode [05] and print out the test print pattern to correct out-of-register colors. Use steps (a) to (b) to print out the test print pattern. (a) Select A3/LD-sized paper. (b) Enter a code corresponding to a desired test print pattern. Press the [FAX] button. Print out any of the following test print patterns in the table below. No. of copies [05] code Test print pattern to be printed 05-62 Grid pattern (for identifying out-of-register colors) 2 05-63 Test print pattern 1 for correcting out-of-register colors 2 05-64 Test print pattern 2 for correcting out-of-register colors 2 * Use code 05-62. The grid pattern will be printed on the entire copy, with all toner colors (C, M, Y and K) overlaid. Check the printed grid pattern (or whether the toner colors are accurately overlaid) to discover out-of-register colors on the entire copy. * Use code 05-63 or 05-64. The test print pattern will be printed. It is designed to facilitate identifying in which direction colors are misaligned. Either of the patterns is available to correct out-of-register colors. Therefore, print out whichever one is easier to use. (Refer to procedure (4) for further information regarding the test print pattern sample and correction procedures.) * Jot down a "page number" and "paper feeding direction" on the printed test print pattern beforehand. This facilitates identifying out-of-register colors in the subsequent adjustment.
(4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the values for codes [417] and [418] to correct out-of-register colors. Align 3 toner colors (Y, C and K) with magenta (M). First, change the value for code 05-417, which will affect all pages to print, and correct out-of-register colors on the first page of the test print pattern. Next, print out the 2 copies of test print pattern again. Change the value for code 05-418, which will affect only the second and subsequent pages, and correct out-of-register colors. Applied to All pages to print Second and subsequent pages to print Color Y (yellow) M (magenta) C (cyan) K (black) Y (yellow) M (magenta) C (cyan) K (black) [05] code Subcode 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 Value recommended 125 to 131 Acceptable value range 118 to 138 Default 129 128 127 127 128 128 128 130
05-417
05-418
125 to 131
118 to 138
* If the set value is increased by 1, the print position of the color will be shifted for 0.0423 mm toward the trailing edge of the paper. (For instance, if the value for code 05-417-1 is increased by 3, the print position of cyan will be shifted for 0.1269 mm (0.0423mm x 3) toward the trailing edge of the paper. This correction will affect all pages.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.5
How to use test print pattern 1 for correcting out-of-register colors (05-63) Align 3 toner colors (Y, C and K) with magenta (M) at the leading edge and trailing edge of the test print pattern.
Correction at the leading edge

Before After
Align the print positions of Y, C and K to M.
To correct out-of-register colors: Decrease the value for Y. Decrease the value for C. Increase the value for K.
Correction at the trailing edge

Before After
* If the colors cannot be aligned at the leading edge and trailing edge of the test print pattern, change the value to equalize the amount of out-of-register colors between the leading edge and trailing edge. * If the direction or the amount of out-of-register colors is not consistent, print out several copies of the test print pattern to identify a pattern for the out-of-register colors (direction and amount). Then perform the adjustment most suitable for it.
1.5
e-STUDIO3511/4511
How to use test print pattern 2 for correcting out-of-register colors (05-64) Align 3 toner colors (Y, C and K) with magenta (M) to make spacing equal at the leading edge and trailing edge of the test print pattern.
Correction at the leading/trailing edge
Before Pattern at the leading edge
After Lower spacing (0.169 mm) Upper spacing (0.169 mm)
Align the print positions of Y, C and K to M and make spacing equal. Pattern at the trailing edge To correct out-of-register colors: Decrease the value for Y. Decrease the value for C. Increase the value for K.
* If spacing of the patterns at the leading edge and trailing edge of the printed pattern cannot be equalized at a time, adjust the spacing to meet either of the following conditions: Make the upper spacing of the pattern at the leading edge equal to the lower spacing of the pattern at the trailing edge. Make the lower spacing of the pattern at the leading edge equal to the upper spacing of the pattern at the trailing edge. * If the direction or the amount of out-of-register colors is not consistent, print out several copies of the test print pattern to identify a pattern for the out-of-register colors (direction and amount). Then perform the adjustment most suitable for it. Cautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular. Remarks Out-of-register colors may possibly occur after replacing the drum, drum cleaning blade, transfer belt, transfer belt cleaning blade or 1st transfer roller during the preventive maintenance (PM). In this case, use the above procedures to correct them. Out-of-register colors cannot be perfectly corrected, depending on the type of text or lines to print. Also, refer to the relevant information in the Service Manual and Service Handbook for further information regarding the color registration control procedures.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
1.5
2. Copier-specific Adjustments 2.1 To Sharply Copy Light Text or Thin Lines

(To darken handwritten text or thin lines in the graphic image)
When the light print image is copied, text looks blurred.
The graphics image and text look darker and sharper.
Explanation Perform an adjustment regarding the image processing, in order to obtain a sharp and dark copy image, when copying an original containing light text and graphic images.
Procedures * The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in Black mode, Full color mode or Auto color mode. Refer to the procedure corresponding to a users request.
2.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.1.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in Black Mode

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1), (2) and (5) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedures (3), (4), (6) and (7) are used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ ] button to increase the copy density. After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality. With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [SHARPNESS] button. Press the [SHARP] button to increase the sharpness intensity. After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality. With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure. (3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for codes [604 to 606] to increase the copy density of text (or increase the sharpness intensity). The code to use varies, according to original mode (Text/Photo, Photo or Text). Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to original mode for which you would like to improve the image quality and set a value larger than "16" for it. Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text [05] code 05-604 05-605 05-606 Value recommended Set a value larger than 16. Acceptable value range 0 to 31 Default 0
* Setting "1" provides the softest image, while setting "31" provides the sharpest image. The default value ("0") provides an image as sharp as the one provided by setting "16." Changing the value for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the "Sharpness" indicator in the "IMAGE" menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 3. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 5 (sharper), the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 5 (sharper).) After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.1
(4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for code [648] to increase the copy density of text. (To improve faint, smudged text or thin lines) Initially, set a value larger than 180 for code 05-648. Copy and check the copy image quality. Next, finely adjust the value, in accordance with the original density. Up to 255 can be set for this code. Original mode [05] code Value recommended Acceptable value range Text/Photo 05-648 Approx. 180 0 to 255 After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (5) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Select "TEXT" from among the original mode options. * To have "TEXT" selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to procedure (1) in 2.8 To Eliminate Moir. After selecting Text mode, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (6) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [590 to 592] to adjust the gamma curve balance of the medium- and high-density areas. Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo [05] code 05-590 05-591 05-592 Subcode 1/2 1/2 1/2 Value recommended Set a value larger than 128. Acceptable value range 0 to 255 Default 128 Default 30
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. (Please be careful that the gradation (or density) of the medium-density area may exceed that of the highdensity area, depending on the set value.) * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. The density of light text or a graphic image will vary, if the medium- or high-density area is mainly adjusted. Setting "0" for the subcode allows you to adjust the lowdensity area. But it will not affect the light text or graphic images. Therefore, never change the value for the low-density area. Subcode 1 2 Area for the density to be adjusted Medium-density area High-density area
After adjusting the gamma curve balance, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
2.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(7) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [570 to 572] or [693 to 695] to set the background peak of range correction to "fixed" in manual copy density mode. The code to use varies, according to the density option (auto or manual), original mode, (Text/Photo, Photo or Text) and use of the RADF (MR-3015). Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to the condition for which you would like to improve the image quality and set "1" in ten place. * Set value (Ex.: To set the background/text peak in manual and auto copy density mode to "fixed")
1 1
One place: Set the background/text peak in auto copy density mode to "fixed" See the table below for further information. Ten place: Set the background/text peak in manual copy density mode to "fixed" See the table below for further information. Value 1 2 3 4 Background peak Fixed Varied Fixed Varied Text peak Fixed Fixed Varied Varied
* Change the value only for manual copy density mode (ten place). Never change the value for auto copy density mode (one place). To scan an original manually placed on the original glass Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text [05] code 05-570 05-571 05-572 Copy density mode Manual Manual Manual Value recommended Ten place One place 1 Current value 1 Current value 1 Current value Default Ten place One place 2 2 1 2 2 2
To scan an original fed from the RADF Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text [05] code 05-693 05-694 05-695 Copy density mode Manual Manual Manual Value recommended Ten place One place 1 Current value 1 Current value 1 Current value Default Ten place One place 2 2 1 2 2 2
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause an increase in the amount of toner used, moir, blurred text (small, dark text blurred), diminished photo images or gradational images (less accurate reproduction of halftones). Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
Remarks Enter the value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.1
2.1.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in Full Color Mode

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1), (2) and (4) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (3) is used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ ] button to increase the copy density. After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality. With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [SHARPNESS] button. Press the [SHARP] button to increase the sharpness intensity. After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality. With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure. (3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for codes [1737 to 1741] to increase the copy density of text (or increase the sharpness intensity). The code to use varies, according to original mode (Text/Photo, Text, Printed image, Photo or Map). Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to original mode for which you would like to improve the image quality and set a value larger than "16" for it. Original mode [05] code Value recommended Text/Photo 05-1737 Text 05-1738 Set a value larger than 16. Printed image 05-1739 Photo 05-1740 Map 05-1741 Acceptable value range Default
0 to 31
* Setting "1" provides the softest image, while setting "31" provides the sharpest image. The default value ("0") provides an image as sharp as the one provided by setting "16." Changing the value for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the "Sharpness" indicator in the "IMAGE" menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 3. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 5 (sharper), the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 5 (sharper).) After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
2.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(4) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Select "TEXT" from among the original mode options. * To have "TEXT" selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to procedure (1) in 2.8 To Eliminate Moir.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.1
2.1.3 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality in Auto Color Mode

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (2) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (3) is used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ ] button to increase the copy density. After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality. With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [SHARPNESS] button. Press the [SHARP] button to increase the sharpness intensity. After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality. With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure. (3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for code [1757] to increase the copy density of text (or increase the sharpness intensity). Only the Text/Photo mode option is available in Auto color mode. Set a value larger than "16" for code 05-1757. Original mode Text/Photo [05] code 05-1757 Value recommended Set a value larger than 16. Acceptable value range 0 to 31 Default 0
* Setting "1" provides the softest image, while setting "31" provides the sharpest image. The default value ("0") provides an image as sharp as the one provided by setting "16." Changing the value for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the "Sharpness" indicator in the "IMAGE" menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 3. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 5 (sharper), the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 5 (sharper).)
2.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.1
2.2 To Closely Match with the Color Balance of the Original

Copy
Copy
The copy image looks yellowish, compared with the original.
The color balance of the copy image is closely matched with that of the original.
Explanation Depending on the color balance of the original, the copy image sometimes looks different from the original. Perform image quality control, automatic calibration, hue adjustment (color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment) and the color density adjustment, in order to match the color balance of the copy image with that of the original.
2.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (4) are used by the service technician only. * Procedures (2) and (3) are used by the service technician, and by the user.
(1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct the color balance and copy density. After exercising image quality control, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Perform the automatic calibration to correct variations in the copy density. * [ADMIN] is selected from among the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] options by default. In other words, an administrator is authorized to operate the automatic calibration. But the [USER] option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it. Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] option. Use steps (a) through (i) to perform the automatic calibration. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [ADMIN] button. (c) Enter the 6-digit administrator password. Press the [ENTER] button. (d) Press the [GENERAL] button. (e) Press the [CALIBRATION] button. (f) Press the [COPY] button. (g) Press the [CALIBRATION] button to print out the test chart. (h) Place the printed test chart on the original glass. (i) Press the [START] button to perform calibration. When the calibration comes to an end, the message "Scanning and calibrating" will disappear. * As a result of the above steps, the both full-color and black-and-white copy image quality will be corrected simultaneously. After performing the automatic calibration, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.2
(3) Perform the color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the hue in general. Use steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment. (a) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. (b)Press the [COLOR BALANCE] button to adjust the color balance by changing the amount of toner (C, M, Y and K) or the [RGB ADJUSTMENT] button to adjust the color balance by changing the intensity of R, G and B. (c) Press the [+] button to enhance the tint of the color or the [ ] button to decrease it. (d) Press the [ENTER] button. After adjusting the hue, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1779 to 1798] to adjust the color density. Color to be Acceptable Original mode [05] code Subcode Value recommended adjusted value range Text/Photo 05-1779 0/1/2 Text 05-1780 0/1/2 Y Printed image 05-1781 0/1/2 (Yellow) Photo 05-1782 0/1/2 Map 05-1783 0/1/2 Text/Photo 05-1784 0/1/2 Text 05-1785 0/1/2 M Printed image 05-1786 0/1/2 (Magenta) Set a value larger than 128 Photo 05-1787 0/1/2 to increase the density. Map 05-1788 0/1/2 0 to 255 Text/Photo 05-1789 0/1/2 Set a value smaller than 128 Text 05-1790 0/1/2 to decrease the density. C Printed image 05-1791 0/1/2 (Cyan) Photo 05-1792 0/1/2 Map 05-1793 0/1/2 Text/Photo 05-1794 0/1/2 Text 05-1795 0/1/2 K Printed image 05-1796 0/1/2 (Black) Photo 05-1797 0/1/2 Map 05-1798 0/1/2
Default
128
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * Changing the value for the code corresponding to Text/Photo mode will affect the copy image quality in Full color mode and Auto color mode. * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area 2 High-density area
2.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure, particularly when the highly colored original is copied in Photo mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.2
2.3 To Improve the Reproducibility of Gray

Another color (M) is blended in the gray area.
No undesired color is blended. A clear copy image is obtained.
Explanation When an original containing gray is copied, another color may be blended in the gray area. Perform image quality control and perform the automatic calibration, hue adjustment (color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment) and color density adjustment, in order to avoid this problem (or to obtain an achromatic color, for instance). Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (4) are used by the service technician only. * Procedures (2) and (3) are used by the service technician, and by the user. (1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct the color balance and copy density. After exercising image quality control, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Perform the automatic calibration to correct variations in the copy density. * For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (2) in 2.2 To Closely Match with the Color Balance of the Original. * [ADMIN] is selected from among the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] options by default. In other words, an administrator is authorized to operate the automatic calibration. But the [USER] option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it. Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] option. After performing the automatic calibration, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
2.3
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(3) Perform the color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the hue. * For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (2) in 2.2 To Closely Match with the Color Balance of the Original. After adjusting the hue, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1779 to 1798] to adjust the color density. Color to be Acceptable Original mode [05] code Subcode Value recommended adjusted value range Text/Photo 05-1779 0/1/2 Text 05-1780 0/1/2 Y Printed image 05-1781 0/1/2 (Yellow) Photo 05-1782 0/1/2 Map 05-1783 0/1/2 Text/Photo 05-1784 0/1/2 Text 05-1785 0/1/2 M Printed image 05-1786 0/1/2 (Magenta) Set a value larger than 128 Photo 05-1787 0/1/2 to increase the density. Map 05-1788 0/1/2 0 to 255 Text/Photo 05-1789 0/1/2 Set a value smaller than 128 Text 05-1790 0/1/2 to decrease the density. C Printed image 05-1791 0/1/2 (Cyan) Photo 05-1792 0/1/2 Map 05-1793 0/1/2 Text/Photo 05-1794 0/1/2 Text 05-1795 0/1/2 K Printed image 05-1796 0/1/2 (Black) Photo 05-1797 0/1/2 Map 05-1798 0/1/2
Default
128
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure, particularly when the highly colored original is copied in Photo mode. Also, it may cause degradation in the color reproducibility. (Excessively enhancing the tint of black makes other colors, such as skin tones, look dull.) Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.3
2.4 To Copy in Vivid Colors

When a copy is made without any adjustments, vividness is missing on the copy image. Explanation
The copy image is obtained in vivid colors.
When a copy is made without any adjustments, vividness may be missing on the copy image. Perform the hue adjustment (color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment) and color density adjustment, in order to obtain a copy image in vivid colors.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (2) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (3) is used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT] button. Press the [VIVID] button. After selecting the "Vivid" option, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Perform the color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the hue. * For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (3) in 2.2 To Closely Match with the Color Balance of the Original. After adjusting the hue, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
2.4
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1779 to 1798] to adjust the color density. Color to be Acceptable Original mode [05] code Subcode Value recommended adjusted value range Text/Photo 05-1779 0/1/2 Text 05-1780 0/1/2 Y Printed image 05-1781 0/1/2 (Yellow) Photo 05-1782 0/1/2 Map 05-1783 0/1/2 Text/Photo 05-1784 0/1/2 Text 05-1785 0/1/2 M Printed image 05-1786 0/1/2 (Magenta) Set a value larger than 128 Photo 05-1787 0/1/2 to increase the density. Map 05-1788 0/1/2 0 to 255 Text/Photo 05-1789 0/1/2 Set a value smaller than 128 Text 05-1790 0/1/2 to decrease the density. C Printed image 05-1791 0/1/2 (Cyan) Photo 05-1792 0/1/2 Map 05-1793 0/1/2 Text/Photo 05-1794 0/1/2 Text 05-1795 0/1/2 K Printed image 05-1796 0/1/2 (Black) Photo 05-1797 0/1/2 Map 05-1798 0/1/2
Default
128
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause offset failure, particularly when the highly colored original is copied in Photo mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.4
2.5 To Make the Pale Area of the Original Look Darker and Sharper
(To improve the highlight reproducibility)
The splashing area (highlight) is blurred.
A clear copy image of the splashing area is obtained.
Explanation Perform the copy density adjustment and background adjustment, in order to make the pale area (highlight) of the original look darker and sharper on the copy.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (3) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedures (2) and (4) are used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT] button. Press the [DARK] button to darken the background. After increasing the background density, copy and check the copy image quality. With the background density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
2.5
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(2) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1688 to 1692] and [1698 to 1702] to adjust the background density. * The highlighted area will become highly visible, if the background density is increased. Acceptable Adjustment Original mode [05] code Value recommended Default value range Text/Photo 05-1688 Text 05-1689 Automatic offsetting adjustment for Printed image 05-1690 background processing Photo 05-1691 Map 05-1692 Set a value larger than 128 0 to 255 128 Text/Photo 05-1698 to increase the density. Manual offsetting Text 05-1699 adjustment for Printed image 05-1700 background processing Photo 05-1701 Map 05-1702 * The value for the automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied, only if automatic copy density mode is selected. On the other hand, the value for the manual offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied, only if manual copy density mode is selected. * Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * The outcome of the adjustment will affect only copying in Full color mode. <Note> "Making the highlighted area more visible (or increasing the background density)" and "eliminating the background color (or decreasing the background density)" are mutually contradictory. If the background color is darkened to make the highlighted area more visible, the hue of the background may change. After adjusting the background density, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (3) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ ] button to increase the copy density. After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality. With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.5
(4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1779 to 1798] to adjust the color density. Color to be Acceptable Original mode [05] code Subcode Value recommended adjusted value range Text/Photo 05-1779 0/1 Text 05-1780 0/1 Y Printed image 05-1781 0/1 (Yellow) Photo 05-1782 0/1 Map 05-1783 0/1 Text/Photo 05-1784 0/1 Text 05-1785 0/1 M Printed image 05-1786 0/1 (Magenta) Set a value larger than 128 Photo 05-1787 0/1 to increase the density. Map 05-1788 0/1 0 to 255 Text/Photo 05-1789 0/1 Set a value smaller than 128 Text 05-1790 0/1 to decrease the density. C Printed image 05-1791 0/1 (Cyan) Photo 05-1792 0/1 Map 05-1793 0/1 Text/Photo 05-1794 0/1 Text 05-1795 0/1 K Printed image 05-1796 0/1 (Black) Photo 05-1797 0/1 Map 05-1798 0/1
Default
128
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * Changing the value for the code corresponding to Text/Photo mode will affect the copy image quality in Full color mode and Auto color mode. * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. The density of the highlighted area will vary, if the low- or mediumdensity area is mainly adjusted. Setting "2" for subcode allows you to adjust the high-density area. But it will not affect the highlighted area. Therefore, never change the value for the high-density area. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area
2.5
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the background color to become excessively dark. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.5
2.6 To Eliminate the Background Color

The background color of the original is also copied. Therefore, no clear contrast is made between the background and text.
The background color is eliminated, allowing clear contrast between the background and text.
Explanation When a full-color original, such as color paper, is copied, its background color is also copied. Therefore, no clear contrast is made between the background and text on the copy. Perform the background adjustment, in order to copy the original with the highly colored background, while eliminating the background color or making it white.
Procedures * The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in Black mode or Full color mode. Refer to the procedure corresponding to a users request.
2.6
e-STUDIO3511/4511

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * The service technician must perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below. (1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [590 to 592] to adjust the gamma curve balance of the low- and medium-density areas. Acceptable value range 0 to 255
Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo
[05] code 05-590 05-591 05-592
Subcode 0/1 0/1 0/1
Value recommended Set a value smaller than 128.
Default 128
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. The background density will vary, if the low- or mediumdensity area is mainly adjusted. Setting "2" for the subcode allows you to adjust the high-density area. But it will not affect the background density. Therefore, never change the value for the high-density area. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area
After adjusting the gamma curve balance, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.6
(2) Adjust the background peak of range correction to lighten the copy image. Use steps (a) to (b) to adjust the background peak of range correction. (a) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [570 to 572] or [693 to 695] to set the background peak of range correction to "fixed." The code to use varies, according to the density option (auto or manual), original mode, (Text/Photo, Photo or Text) and use of the RADF (MR-3015). Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to the condition for which you would like to improve the image quality and set "1" in one or ten place. * Set value (Ex.: To set the background/text peak in manual and auto copy density mode to "fixed")
1 1
To scan an original manually placed on the original glass Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text [05] code 05-570 05-571 05-572 Copy density mode Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Value recommended Ten place One place 1 Current value Current value 1 1 Current value Current value 1 1 Current value Current value 1 Default Ten place One place 2 1 2 2 2 2
To scan an original fed from the RADF Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text [05] code 05-693 05-694 05-695 Copy density mode Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Value recommended Ten place One place 1 Current value Current value 1 1 Current value Current value 1 1 Current value Current value 1 Default Ten place One place 2 1 2 2 2 2
2.6
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for codes [532 to 534] to adjust the background peak of range correction and lighten the copy image. (Increase the number of pixels to be identified as "white" by range correction.) The code to use varies, according to original mode (Text/Photo, Photo or Text). Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to original mode for which you would like to improve the image quality and increase the current value by 10 to 30. Acceptable value range 0 to 255
Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text
[05] code 05-532 05-533 05-534
Value recommended Current value + 10 or more Current value + 10 or more Current value + 10 or more
Default 40 16 40
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause text handwritten with a pencil or light text to become illegible on the copy. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
Remarks Enter the value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.6

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (3) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (2) is used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT] button. Press the [LIGHT] button to decrease the background density. After decreasing the background density, copy and check the image quality. With the background density set to the minimum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1688 to 1692] and [1698 to 1702] to adjust the background density. Adjustment Automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing Original mode Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map [05] code 05-1688 05-1689 05-1690 05-1691 05-1692 05-1698 05-1699 05-1700 05-1701 05-1702 Value recommended Acceptable Default value range
Set a value smaller than 128.
0 to 255
128
Manual offsetting adjustment for background processing
* The value for the automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied, only if automatic copy density mode is selected. On the other hand, the value for the manual offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied, only if manual copy density mode is selected. * Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * The outcome of the adjustment will affect only copying in Full color mode. <Note> "Making the highlighted area more visible (or increasing the background density)" and "eliminating the background color (or decreasing the background density)" are mutually contradictory. If the density of the background color is decreased, the highlighted area may become less visible. After adjusting the background density, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
2.6
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highlighted area to become less visible on the copy. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.6
2.7 To Avoid Copying the Image Seen through the Back of the Page Printed on Thin Paper
Original printed on thin paper (front) Original printed on thin paper (back)
When the double-sided original printed on thin paper is copied, the images seen through the back of the page are also copied. Explanation
The images seen through the back of the page are not copied any more in duplex copying.
When a double-sided original printed on thin paper, such as a brochure and leaflet, is copied, the images seen through the back of the page are also copied. Perform the background adjustment, in order to avoid this problem.
Procedures * The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in Black mode or Full color mode. Refer to the procedure corresponding to a users request.
2.7
e-STUDIO3511/4511

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedure (1) is used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedures (2) and (3) are used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ ] button to decrease the copy density. * Move the copy density indicator to the [ ] side for 1 or 2 steps. The images seen through the back of the page will no longer be copied. But remember that text will also be lightly copied, depending on the type of original. After decreasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality. With the copy density set to the minimum, if the images seen through the back of the page are still copied, or if you would like to prevent this problem without changing the copy density of text, use the next procedure. (2) Adjust the background peak of range correction to lighten the copy image. Use steps (a) to (b) to adjust the background peak of range correction. (a) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [570 to 572] or [693 to 695] to set the background peak of range correction to "fixed." The code to use varies, according to the density option (auto or manual), original mode, (Text/Photo, Photo or Text) and use of the RADF (MR-3015). Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to the condition for which you would like to improve the image quality and set "1" in one or ten place. * Set value (Ex.: To set the background/text peak in manual and auto copy density mode to "fixed")
1 1
To scan an original manually placed on the original glass Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text [05] code 05-570 05-571 05-572 Copy density mode Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Value recommended Ten place One place 1 Current value Current value 1 1 Current value Current value 1 1 Current value Current value 1 Default Ten place One place 2 1 2 2 2 2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.7
To scan an original fed from the RADF Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text [05] code 05-693 05-694 05-695 Copy density mode Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Value recommended Ten place One place 1 Current value Current value 1 1 Current value Current value 1 1 Current value Current value 1 Default Ten place One place 2 1 2 2 2 2
(b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for codes [532 to 534] to adjust the background peak of range correction and lighten the copy image. (Increase the number of pixels to be identified as "white" by range correction.) The code to use varies, according to original mode (Text/Photo, Photo or Text). Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to the condition for which you would like to improve the image quality and increase the current value by 10 to 30. Acceptable value range 0 to 255
Original mode Text/Photo Photo Text
[05] code 05-532 05-533 05-534
Value recommended Current value + 10 or more Current value + 10 or more Current value + 10 or more
Default 40 16 40
After adjusting the background peak, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [590 to 592] to adjust the gamma curve balance of the low- and medium-density areas. Acceptable value range 0 to 255
Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo
[05] code 05-590 05-591 05-592
Subcode 0/1 0/1 0/1
Value recommended Set a value smaller than 128.
Default 128
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * Since the subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted, refer to the table below and set the appropriate subcode. Remember that mainly adjusting the low- or medium-density area will change the copy density of the images seen through the back of the page. Setting "2" for the subcode will allow you to adjust the high-density area. But this will not solve the problem. Therefore, never change the values for the high-density area. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area
2.7
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause text handwritten with a pencil or light text to become illegible on the copy. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.7

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (3) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (2) is used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT] button. Press the [LIGHT] button to decrease the background density. After decreasing the background density, copy and check the copy image quality. With the background density set to the minimum, if the images seen through the back of the page are still copied, use the next procedure. (2) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1688 to 1692] and [1698 to 1702] to adjust the background density. Adjustment Automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing Original mode Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map [05] code 05-1688 05-1689 05-1690 05-1691 05-1692 05-1698 05-1699 05-1700 05-1701 05-1702 Value recommended Acceptable Default value range
0 to 255
128
Manual offsetting adjustment for background processing
* The value for the automatic offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied, only if automatic copy density mode is selected. On the other hand, the value for the manual offsetting adjustment for background processing will be applied, only if manual copy density mode is selected. * Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * The outcome of the adjustment will affect only on copying in Full color mode. <Note> "Making the highlighted area more visible (or increasing the background density)" and "eliminating the background color (or decreasing the background density)" are mutually contradictory. If the density of the background color is decreased, the highlighted area may become less visible. After adjusting the background density, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
2.7
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highlighted area to become less visible on the copy. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.7
2.8 To Eliminate Moir

Moir occurs on the photo image.
Moir is eliminated and a clear copy image is obtained.
Explanation When an original containing photo images or gradational images (halftones) is copied, moir sometimes occurs on the copy. Perform an adjustment regarding the image processing (sharpness intensity), in order to obtain a clear copy image, while eliminating moir.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (2) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (3) is used by the service technician only.
2.8
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel and select the original mode option, as follows: To copy in Full color mode: To copy in Black mode: Select the Printed image mode option. Select the Photo mode option.
* To have the above original mode options selected by default, use the following procedures: To change default original mode on the Control Panel Use steps (a) to (d) to change default original mode. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [USER] button. (c) Press the [COPY] button. (d) In the "ORIGINAL MODE FOR COLOR" or "BLACK" option, press the button corresponding to the desired original mode option. To change default original mode in setting mode [08] Enter setting mode [08]. Change the value for code [550] or [585] to change the original mode option, which is selected by default at power-on. In Black mode Value for 08-550 0 1 2 3 In Full color mode Value for 08-585 0 1 2 3 4 Default original mode at power-on Text/Photo (default) Photo Text Image smoothing
Default original mode at power-on Text/Photo (default) Text Printed image Photo Map
After changing the default original mode option, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [SHARPNESS] button. Press the [SOFT] button to soften the copy image. After softening the copy image, copy and check the copy image quality. With the sharpness intensity set to the minimum (softest), if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.8
(3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [604 to 606], [1737 to 1741] and [1757] to adjust the sharpness intensity. * Decreasing the sharpness intensity will minimize moir. Color mode Black Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text/Photo [05] code 05-604 05-605 05-606 05-1737 05-1738 05-1739 05-1740 05-1741 05-1757 Value recommended Set a value smaller than 16. Acceptable value range 0 to 31 Default 0
Full color
0 to 31
Auto color
0 to 31
* Setting "1" provides the softest image, while setting "31" provides the sharpest image. The default value ("0") provides an image as sharp as the one provided by setting "16." Changing the value for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the "Sharpness" indicator in the "IMAGE" menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 3. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 5 (sharper), the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 5 (sharper).) <Note> "Minimizing moir" and "Sharpening the copy image" are mutually contradictory. When the adjustment is performed to minimize moir, the resolution of the copy image may decrease.
2.8
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Remarks Enter the value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality. Procedures (2) and (3) provide the same effect of the adjustment. However, procedure (3) allows more flexible adjustment.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.8
2.9 To Copy Sharply (To enhance sharpness)

The image looks light and blurred on the copy.
The edges are enhanced and the copy image becomes sharper.
Explanation Perform an adjustment regarding the image processing (sharpness intensity), in order to obtain a sharper copy image, when a light or blurred original is copied. Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (2) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (3) is used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT] button. Press the [CLEAR] button. After selecting the "Clear" option, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [SHARPNESS] button. Press the [SHARP] button to increase the sharpness intensity. After increasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality. With the sharpness intensity set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
2.9
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [604 to 606], [1737 to 1741] and [1757] to adjust the sharpness intensity. * Increasing the sharpness intensity will enhance the edges of the image. Color mode Black Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text/Photo [05] code 05-604 05-605 05-606 05-1737 05-1738 05-1739 05-1740 05-1741 05-1757 Value recommended Set a value larger than 16. Acceptable value range 0 to 31 Default 0
Full color
Set a value larger than 16.
0 to 31
Auto color
0 to 31
* Setting "1" provides the softest image, while setting "31" provides the sharpest image. The default value ("0") provides an image as sharp as the one provided by setting "16." Changing the value for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the "Sharpness" indicator in the "IMAGE" menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 3. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 5 (sharper), the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 5 (sharper).) <Note> "Sharpening the copy image" and "Minimizing moir" are mutually contradictory. When an adjustment is performed to sharpen the copy image, moir may occur.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.9
2.10 To Make Photo Edges Look Softer

The edges (contours) of the image are highly visible.
The edges look soft.
Explanation When a photo image is copied, the contours or edges of the image sometimes become highly visible on the copy. Perform an adjustment regarding the image processing (sharpness intensity), in order to soften the edges of the image.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (2) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedures (3) and (4) are used by the service technician only.
2.10
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel and select the original mode option, as follows: To copy in Full color mode: To copy in Black mode: Select the Printed image mode option. Select the Photo mode option.
* When copying a photo image in Full color mode, select the Photo mode option from among the original mode options. * To have the above original mode options selected by default, refer to procedure (1) in 2.8 To Eliminate Moir. After changing the default original mode option, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
(2) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [SHARPNESS] button. Press the [SOFT] button to soften the copy image. After softening the copy image, copy and check the copy image quality. With the sharpness intensity set to the minimum (softest), if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.10
(3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [604 to 606], [1737 to 1741] and [1757] to adjust the sharpness intensity. * Decreasing the sharpness intensity will minimize the edges of the image. Color mode Black Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo Text/Photo Text Printed image Photo Map Text/Photo [05] code 05-604 05-605 05-606 05-1737 05-1738 05-1739 05-1740 05-1741 05-1757 Value recommended Set a value smaller than 16. Acceptable value range 0 to 31 Default 0
Full color
0 to 31
Auto color
0 to 31
* Setting "1" provides the softest image, while setting "31" provides the sharpest image. The default value ("0") provides an image as sharp as the one provided by setting "16." Changing the value for these codes will change the sharpness intensity, when the "Sharpness" indicator in the "IMAGE" menu is set to the center. Remember that 1 step of the indicator will increase or decrease the sharpness intensity by 3. If the sharpness intensity of the center value is changed, each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 5 (sharper), the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 5 (sharper).) <Note> "Minimizing the edges of the copy image" and "Sharpening the copy image" are mutually contradictory. When the adjustment is performed to minimize the edges, the resolution of the copy image may decrease. After decreasing the sharpness intensity, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1630 to 1633] to adjust the maximum color density of text. Color to be adjusted Y (Yellow) M (Magenta) C (Cyan) K (Black) Acceptable value range
[05] code 05-1630 05-1631 05-1632 05-1633
Value recommended
Default
Set a value larger than 5 to increase the density. 0 to 10 Set a value smaller than 5 to decrease the density. 5
* Set the value in increment of 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.
2.10
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment When the original containing text is copied, the adjustment may possibly cause the text to become blurred on the copy. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.10
2.11 To Make Solid Filled Bold Text (Logo) Highly Colored

The solid filled graph is not highly colored enough.
The solid filled graph becomes highly colored and sharper.
Explanation Solid filled bold text, such as a logo, is not sometimes highly colored on the copy. Change the original mode option and perform the copy density adjustment, in order to make the solid filled image more highly colored. * This adjustment will have an effect only on copying in Full color mode.
Procedures * The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality of a black or colored logo. Refer to the procedure corresponding to a users request.
2.11
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.11.1 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Black Logo

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (4) are used by the service technician only. * Procedures (2) and (3) are used by the service technician, and by the user. (1) Make sure that the color of the solid filled logo is not printed out of register. If it is, perform color registration control. * For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to 1.5. To Correct Out-of-register Colors or the Service Manual. After correcting out-of-register colors, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Perform the color balance adjustment to enhance black. Use steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment. (a) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. (b)Press the [COLOR BALANCE] button. (c) Press the [+] button to enhance the tint of [BLACK]. (d) Press the [ENTER] button. After adjusting the tint of black, copy and check the copy image quality. With the tint of black set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (3) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Select "TEXT" from among the original mode options. * To have "TEXT" selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to procedure (1) in 2.8 To Eliminate Moir. After selecting Text mode, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.11
(4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for code [1795] to adjust the black density. Color to be Acceptable Original mode [05] code Subcode Value recommended adjusted value range K Text 05-1795 0/1/2 Set a value larger than 128. 0 to 255 (Black)
Default 128
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area 2 High-density area
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the highly or deeply colored area, such as in a photo, to become blurred on the copy. Also, it may also cause offset failure, grained images and degradation in gradation. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
2.11
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.11.2 To Adjust the Copy Image Quality of a Colored Logo

* You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) to (3) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (4) is used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ ] button to increase the copy density. After increasing the copy density, copy and check the copy image quality. With the copy density set to the maximum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) Perform the color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the hue in general. Use steps (a) through (d) to perform the adjustment. (a) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. (b)Press the [COLOR BALANCE] button to adjust the color balance by changing the amount of toner (C, M, Y and K) or the [RGB ADJUSTMENT] button to adjust the color balance by changing the intensity of R, G and B. (c) Press the [+] button to enhance the tint of the color or the [ ] button to decrease it. (d) Press the [ENTER] button. After adjusting the hue, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.11
(3) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Select "TEXT" or "MAP" from among the original mode options. * To have "TEXT" or "MAP" selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to procedure (1) in 2.8 To Eliminate Moir. After selecting Text or Map mode, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure. (4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1780/1785/1790/1795] or [1783/1788/1793/1798] to adjust the color density. Color to be Original mode [05] code Subcode adjusted Y Text 05-1780 0/1/2 (Yellow) Map 05-1783 0/1/2 M Text 05-1785 0/1/2 (Magenta) Map 05-1788 0/1/2 C Text 05-1790 0/1/2 (Cyan) Map 05-1793 0/1/2 K Text 05-1795 0/1/2 (Black) Map 05-1798 0/1/2 Acceptable value range
Value recommended
Default
0 to 255
128
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area 2 High-density area
2.11
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause a dark-colored area, such as in a photo, to become blurred on the copy. Also, it may also cause offset failure, grained images and degradation in gradation. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.11
2.12 To Sharply Contrast the Hues of Highlighters on the Copy

The hues of highlighters are not accurately reproduced. The areas marked with 2 different colored highlighters are reproduced in the same hue. They are indistinguishable. Explanation
The areas marked with 2 different colored highlighters are accurately reproduced and distinguishable on the copy.
When an original containing text or areas marked with highlighters is copied, their hues may sometimes not be accurately reproduced on the copy. The inks of highlighters are special. Therefore, their hues cannot be accurately reproduced. To reproduce the hues of similar highlighters, such as yellow and green, while producing sharp contrasts on the copy, perform the color adjustment (color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment) and color density adjustment. Also, the e-STUDIO3511/4511 allows the setting specifically for reproducing text or areas marked with highlighters. It can be assigned for a button in the "ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT" option.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedure (1) is used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedures (2) and (3) are used by the service technician only. (1) Perform the color balance adjustment or RGB adjustment to adjust the hue in general. * For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to procedure (3) in 2.2 To Closely Match with the Color Balance of the Original. After adjusting the hue, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
2.12
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(2) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1769 to 1772] to assign the highlighter-specific mode function for a button in the "ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT" option. * First, request the user to select a button ([VIVID], [CLEAR], [WARM] or [COLD]) to assign the highlighter-specific mode function for. Button to assign the highlighterspecific mode function for [VIVID] [CLEAR] [WARM] [COLD] Acceptable value range 0 to 2
[05] code 05-1769 05-1770 05-1771 05-1772
Mode to assign 0: Default 1: Highlighter 1 2: Highlighter 2
Default
* Two types of highlighter-specific modes are available. Highlighter 1 is intended to sharply contrast between yellow and green, which are difficult to contrast in default mode. Highlighter 2 is intended to improve the vividness of green (or darken green), compared to Highlighter 1. Select either of modes at a users request. * Setting "0" for each code allows the adjustment to be performed in accordance with the name of the button. (For instance, setting "0" for code 05-1769 is intended to provide more vivid copy images.) But once any value other than "0" is set for the codes, the output will no longer be obtained in accordance with the name of the button. * Even when "1" or "2" is set for the codes, the buttons in the "ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT" option will not be renamed. (For instance, provided that "1" is set for code 05-1769 to assign Highlighter 1 for the [VIVID] button, [VIVID] will still appear in the "ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT" option. However, the copy image will be adjusted, based on the Highlighter 1 mode function.) After assigning the highlighter-specific mode function for the button, use steps (a) to (b) and press the Highlighter-specific mode button in the "ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT" option. (a) Press the [IMAGE] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ONE TOUCH ADJUSTMENT] button. (b) Press the button where the highlighter-specific mode function is assigned. After selecting highlighter-specific mode, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.12
(3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1779 to 1798] to adjust the color density. Color to be Acceptable Original mode [05] code Subcode Value recommended adjusted value range Text/Photo 05-1779 0/1/2 Text 05-1780 0/1/2 Y Printed image 05-1781 0/1/2 (Yellow) Photo 05-1782 0/1/2 Map 05-1783 0/1/2 Text/Photo 05-1784 0/1/2 Text 05-1785 0/1/2 M Printed image 05-1786 0/1/2 (Magenta) Set a value larger than 128 Photo 05-1787 0/1/2 to increase the density. Map 05-1788 0/1/2 0 to 255 Text/Photo 05-1789 0/1/2 Set a value smaller than 128 Text 05-1790 0/1/2 to decrease the density. C Printed image 05-1791 0/1/2 (Cyan) Photo 05-1792 0/1/2 Map 05-1793 0/1/2 Text/Photo 05-1794 0/1/2 Text 05-1795 0/1/2 K Printed image 05-1796 0/1/2 (Black) Photo 05-1797 0/1/2 Map 05-1798 0/1/2
Default
128
2.12
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly vary the hues of areas (including photo images and text) other than those marked with highlighters. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.12
2.13 To Obtain a Good Color Balance on Thick Paper

The copy image looks light on thick paper.
The copy image looks darker and sharper even on thick paper.
Explanation When a copy is made on thick paper in thick paper mode, the copy image sometimes looks light. In thick paper mode, the amount of toner used is reduced in advance, in order to avoid a toner fixing problem. Adjust the amount of toner used, while checking the toner fixing, in order to obtain a dark and sharp copy image on thick paper.
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician only. (1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1613 to 1616] to adjust the amount of toner used. The code to use varies, according to paper mode. Adjust the value for the [05] code corresponding to paper mode for which you would like to improve the image quality and increase the value to obtain the copy density that the user desires. Paper mode Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 OHP [05] code 05-1613 05-1614 05-1615 05-1616 Value recommended Set a value larger than 249. Set a value larger than 237. Set a value larger than 237. Set a value larger than 249. Acceptable value range 0 to 255 Default 249 237 237 249
* Set the value in increments of approximately 4, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained. * The table below shows you the acceptable paper weight for the paper types. Paper type Acceptable paper weight Thick 1 81 to 105 g/m Max. 28 lb. Bond Thick 2 106 to 163 g/m Max. 43 lb. Bond / 90 lb. Index Thick 3 164 to 209 g/m Max. 55 lb. Bond / 110 lb. Index * Use the recommended OHP transparencies.
2.13
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Remarks Enter the value within the recommended value range mentioned in the procedures. Otherwise, it may cause a loss in copier performance, including degradation in the image quality and reduction in the life of the consumables If the adjustment causes a toner fixing problem, decrease the value for codes 05-1613 to 1616.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.13
2.14 To Obtain Smooth Gray-scale Photo Images

Halftones are not accurately reproduced. Explanation
Halftones are reproduced better.
When a photo image or gradational image is copied in Black mode with the Text/Photo mode option selected, halftones are not accurately reproduced. Select Image smoothing mode from among the original mode options, in order to reproduce halftones better in Black mode. * Remember that the copy image obtained in Image smoothing mode cannot be stored in the e-Filing box.
2.14
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician only. (1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Select "IMAGE SMOOTHING" from among the original mode options. * To have "IMAGE SMOOTHING" selected from among the original mode options by default, refer to procedure (1) in 2.8 To Eliminate Moir.
Remarks When Image smoothing mode is selected from among the original mode options, the image processing is performed to give a higher priority to accurate reproduction of halftones. As a result, the copying speed will be slowed down, compared to other modes.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.14
2.15 To Change the Threshold in Auto Color Mode

(To change the threshold between Full color mode and Black mode to meet the users needs)
Original
Copied in Auto color mode
It is copied in Full color mode.
Changing the threshold value will allow a colored original to be copied in Black mode.
Explanation When Auto color mode is selected, it will be automatically determined whether an original is colored or blackand-white. Then it will be copied in Full color mode or Black mode. But adjust the threshold value, in order to change the threshold between Black mode and Full color mode and suit preferences of the user.
2.15
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedure (1) is used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (2) is used by the service technician only. (1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ZOOM] button. Specify an original size and a copy size. * When a non-standard sized original is copied, an area outside the original (or the original cover) may also be scanned. This may prevent the original size from being accurately detected. If the original size is specified in the reduction and enlargement copying function beforehand, the area outside the original will no longer be scanned. As a result, the original size will be accurately detected. Also, clean the original cover, if it is soiled. Otherwise, the type of original cannot be accurately detected. After specifying the original size and copy size, copy and check the copy image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure. (2) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1675/1676] to adjust the threshold value in Auto color mode. * As the set value is increased, the original will be more likely to be recognized as black-and-white. On the other hand, if the value is decreased, it will be more likely to be recognized as full color. Acceptable Threshold to be adjusted [05] code Default value range Threshold when an original is manually 05-1675 0 to 255 70 placed on the original glass Threshold when an original is placed on the original glass from the RADF (MR-3015) 05-1676 0 to 255 70
* Set the value in increments of approximately 30, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment When a non-standard sized original is copied, an area outside the original (or the original cover) may also be scanned. This may prevent the original size from being accurately detected. If the original cover is soiled, the type of original cannot be accurately detected. Therefore, instruct the user to clean the original cover on a routine basis (once a week). After the threshold in Auto color mode is adjusted, based on a particular type of original, other types of original may not be correctly detected. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking whether any type of original is correctly detected.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.15
2.16 To Clearly Copy Text (To adjust the density of text)

Text is faint or smudged on the copy.
Text is darkened and sharply copied.
Explanation Adjust the copy density of text, in order to sharply copy light-colored, thin text, or lighten highly colored text. * This adjustment will be effective, only when Text/Photo or Text mode is selected from among the original mode options. If Text/Photo mode is selected, the adjustment will affect only text (or an area which is recognized as text).
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician only. * The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the copy image quality in Black mode or Full color mode. Refer to the procedure corresponding to a users request.
2.16
e-STUDIO3511/4511

(1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for code [648] to increase the copy density of text. (To improve faint, smudged text or thin lines) Initially, set a value larger than 180 for code 05-648. Copy and check the copy image quality. Next, finely adjust the value, in accordance with the original density. Up to 255 can be set for this code. Acceptable Original mode [05] code Value recommended Default value range Text/Photo 05-648 Approx. 180 0 to 255 30

(1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1630 to 1633] to adjust the maximum color density of text. Color to be adjusted Y (Yellow) M (Magenta) C (Cyan) K (Black) Acceptable value range
[05] code 05-1630 05-1631 05-1632 05-1633
Value recommended
Default
* Set the value in increment of 1, while checking the copy image until the optimum value is obtained.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause degradation in the image quality. For instance, if the density of text is increased, noise may possibly occur around the text on the copy. If the density is decreased, the text may look faint. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
2.16
3. Printer-specific Adjustments 3.1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance

The color balance varies, according to a change in the environment or a lapse of time.
The color balance is constantly maintained.
Explanation The color balance varies, according to a change in the environment, replacement of the consumables and so forth. Periodically adjust the color reproducibility (automatic calibration), in order to constantly maintain a steady color balance on the printout. The automatic calibration is the basic adjustment to accurately reproduce colors on the printout. When you would like to accurately reproduce the desired hue or when you have replaced the consumables and changed the operating conditions, perform the automatic calibration to ensure the color reproducibility. Procedures * Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below. * Procedure (1) is used by the service technician only. * Procedure (2) is used by the service technician, and by the user.
3.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PCL5c
PCL6
PS3
Mac
(1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct variations in image contrast. After exercising image quality control, print and check the print image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
PCL5c Mac PS3 * This adjustment will be effective, only if "Automatic" is selected from among the "Color" options on the printer driver.
* This adjustment will be effective, only if "Color" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the printer driver.
(2) Perform the automatic calibration to correct variations in image density. * [ADMIN] is selected from among the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] options by default. In other words, an administrator is authorized to operate the automatic calibration. But the [USER] option can also be selected to allow the user to operate it. Refer to the User Functions Guide for further information regarding how to select the [CALIBRATION DISPLAY LEVEL] option. * Use steps (a) through (k) to perform the automatic calibration. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b)Press the [ADMIN] button. (c) Enter the 6-digit administrator password. Press the [ENTER] button. (d) Press the [GENERAL] button. (e) Press the [CALIBRATION] button. (f) Press the [PRINT] button. (g)Press the desired resolution button ([600 x 600] or [1200 x 600]) of the PDL ("PS3" or "PCL" emulation), which will be subjected to the calibration. (h)Press the [CALIBRATION] button to print out the test chart. (i) Place the printed test chart on the original glass. (j) Press the [START] button to perform calibration. When the calibration comes to an end, the message "Scanning and calibrating" will disappear. (k)The message "Is a result made to reflect?" will appear. Press the [YES] button. * Automatic calibration correction will be applied to printing performed under the following conditions: Printing Automatic calibration PC Printer driver type correction Color Applied Color: Automatic PCL5c Mono Applied Color: Mono Mono Not applied Windows PCL6 --Mono Not applied Color Applied Color: Automatic PS3 Mono Applied Color: Mono Mono Not applied Color Applied Color Resolution Type: Color Macintosh Mono Applied Color Resolution Type: Mono Mono Not applied * The [1200 x 600] button will be displayed, provided that the optional GC-1180 expansion memory is installed. *Repeat the above steps to correct the resolution of the PDL ("PS3" or "PCL" emulation), if necessary. Cautions after the completion of the adjustment Nothing in particular.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.1
3.2 To Obtain the Desired Color Balance

The natural color balance is obtained.
The desired color balance is obtained. (Ex. Yellowness is enhanced.)
Explanation If you would like to change the color balance or darkness of the printout and reproducibility of halftones in accordance to a type of original or the users requirement, change the "Image Quality Type" setting on the printer driver or adjust the color balance.
Procedures * Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedures below. * Procedures (1) and (3) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedures (2) and (4) are used by the service technician only.
3.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(1) Change the "Image Quality Type" setting. * This adjustment will be effective, only if printing is performed in PostScript (PS3 or Macintosh) or if you print out a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office. Please be careful that it may not be effective, if you print out a file or PDF file created on a graphic application (e.g. Adobe Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress).
For Windows
PCL5c PS3 * This adjustment will be effective, only if "Automatic" is selected from among the "Color" options on the printer driver.
Open the property page of the printer driver. Change the "Image Quality Type" setting in the Image Quality tab.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.2
For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will be effective, only if "Color" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the printer driver
Open the print settings dialog box. In the "Quality" menu, change the "Color Resolution Type" setting. Select the desired combination of color (Color or Mono), resolution, halftone and type from among the "Color Resolution Type" options.
3.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
* The Image Quality Type options feature the following: General: "General" is the best-rounded option to offer fine printouts of any type of original, including text, photographs and graphics. If "General" is selected, "Smooth" will be selected by default (or automatically) from among the "Halftone" options (how halftones are printed). "Smooth" is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation. Photograph: "Photograph" is intended to improve the reproducibility of halftones, such as photos and gradational images. This provides the color balance closely matching the monitor with sRGB selected as a color space. If "Photograph" is selected, "Smooth" will be selected by default (or automatically) from among the "Halftone" options. "Smooth" is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation. Presentation: "Presentation" is intended to improve to the reproducibility of vivid colors. It is suitable for printing a presentation material, which requires sharp-contrast images. Therefore, the color balance this option provides may be slightly different from the one on the monitor. If "Presentation" is selected, "Smooth" will be selected by default (or automatically) from among the "Halftone" options. "Smooth" is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation. Line Art: "Line Art" is intended to reproduce thin lines without jaggies visible on the printout. It is suitable for printing out line drawings. The color balance this option provides is the same as the one the Presentation option provides. But if "LineArt" is selected, "Detail" will be selected by default (or automatically) from among the "Halftone" options. "Detail" is intended to print halftones in detail (with the high density). After changing the printer driver settings, print and check the print image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
PCL5c
PCL6
PS3
Mac
PCL5c Mac
PS3
* This adjustment will be effective, only if "Automatic" is selected from among the "Color" options on the printer driver.
* This adjustment will be effective, only if "Color" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the printer driver.
(3) Perform the automatic calibration to correct variations in image density. * Refer to procedure (2) described in 3.1 To Maintain a Steady Color Balance. After exercising the automatic calibration, print and check the print image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.2
PCL5c
PS3
Mac
* This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.
(4) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1010 to 1041] to adjust the color density. Adjust the value for the [05] codes corresponding to the print options to be applied (PDL, Resolution and Halftone). Ex.: When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected: PCL5c, 600 x 600, Image Quality Type = General, Halftone = Default (Smooth) > Change the values for Y: 05-1026, M: 05-1027, C: 05-1028 and K: 05-1029. When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected: Color High-res (= 1200 x 600), Photo (Halftone = Smooth): > Change the values for Y: 05-1018, M: 05-1019, C: 05-1020 and K: 05-1021. * Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.) * The resolution option on the Macintosh printer driver is "Low-res" (= 600 x 600) or "High-res" (= 1200 x 600). Color to be adjusted PDL Resolution Halftone 600 x 600 PCL5c Y (Yellow) PS3 1200 x 600 600 x 600 PCL5c M (Magenta) PS3 1200 x 600 600 x 600 PCL5c C (Cyan) PS3 1200 x 600 600 x 600 PCL5c K (Black) PS3 1200 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail [05] code Subcode 05-1026 05-1030 05-1034 05-1038 05-1010 05-1014 05-1018 05-1022 05-1027 05-1031 05-1035 05-1039 05-1011 05-1015 05-1019 05-1023 05-1028 05-1032 05-1036 05-1040 05-1012 05-1016 05-1020 05-1024 05-1029 05-1033 05-1037 05-1041 05-1013 05-1017 05-1021 05-1025 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 Value recommended Acceptable Default value range
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printout until the optimum value is obtained.
3.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
* "Halftone" refers to how halftones are printed. Two options are available: "Smooth" which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and "Detail" which is intended to print halftones in details (with the high density). On Windows (PCL5c and PS3), the halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the "Halftone" options in the "Image Quality" tab. "Default" is selected from among the options by default. It is intended to automatically select "Smooth" or "Detail" in accordance with the selected "Image Quality Type" option, as described by the table below. On Macintosh, the halftone option in full-color printing is determined, based on the selected image quality type option in the "Quality" menu on the printer driver. Halftone option applied Image Quality Type Windows Macintosh
(Halftone = "Default")
General Photograph Presentation Line Art
Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail
* The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area 2 High-density area
<Note> After performing the adjustment, the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" options. (For instance, if the values for 05 code for PCL, 600 x 600 and Smooth are changed, they will be applied to printing performed with PCL5c, 600 x 600, Halftone = "Smooth" (or "Default") selected.) Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.2
3.3 To Closely Match with the Color Balance on the Monitor

As viewed on the monitor
The color balance as viewed on the monitor looks different from the printout. Explanation
The color balance of the printout is closely matched with the one on the monitor
The color balance on the printout is initially programmed to provide the maximum color saturation within the range of colors reproducible in printing. In general, colors, which can be reproduced, vary, depending on whether they are reproduced on the printout or on the monitor (or depending on whether they are reproduced in "ink" or with the "light"). Consequently, the color balance on the printout cannot be perfectly matched with the one on the monitor. Change the "Image Quality Type" setting, in order to closely match the color balance on the printout with the one on the monitor, at a users request. * This adjustment will be effective in closely matching the color balance on the printout with the one on the monitor, if the sRGB is selected as a color space. Therefore, remember that it may not be matched with the color balance on the monitor, which does not support sRGB or if a color space other than sRGB is selected.
3.3
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician, and by the user. (1) Select "Photograph" from among the "Image Quality Type" options. * This adjustment will be effective, only if printing is performed in PostScript (PS3 or Macintosh) or if you print out a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office. Please be careful that it may not be effective, if you print out a file or PDF file created on a graphic application (e.g. Adobe Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress).
For Windows
PCL5c PS3 * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.
Open the property page of the printer driver. Select "Photograph" from among the "Image Quality Type" options.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.3
For Macintosh
Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.
Open the print settings dialog box. In the "Quality" menu, switch the "Color Resolution Type" option to "Photograph." Select the desired combination of color (Color or Mono), resolution, halftone and type from among the "Color Resolution Type" options. In this adjustment, select the combination, which includes the "Photograph" option (Color Low-res Photo or Color High-res Photo).
3.3
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Remarks Setting a color space to sRGB is a prerequisite to maximize the effectiveness of this adjustment. Therefore, if the monitor does not support sRGB or if color management cannot be performed, the effectiveness of the adjustment may be significantly lost. In general, it is impossible to reproduce the color saturation closely matching the true colors, as viewed on the monitor.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.3
3.4 To Maintain a Uniform Gray Hue

(To Maintain consistency in Gray among Text, Photos and Graphics)
Photo area

Photo area
Text area
Text area
How gray is reproduced varies, depending on the type of original. As a result, there are variations in gray.
All toner colors are used to reproduce gray. As a result, consistency is maintained in the gray hue.
Explanation In PostScript printing, only the K toner is usually used to reproduce gray areas of drawing data, lines and text. On the other hand, all toner colors (C, M, Y and K) are used to reproduce gray areas of image data, such as BMP, GIF, JPEG and TIFF. This provides deeper gray on the printout. Change the printer driver settings, in order to constantly use all toner colors (C, M, Y and K) to reproduce gray areas and maintain consistency in the gray hue between the drawing data and image data. * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color PostScript printing.
3.4
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician, and by the user. (1) Change the "Pure Gray" setting on the printer driver. * This adjustment will be effective, only if you print out a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office. Please be careful that it may not be effective, if you print out a file or PDF file created on a graphic application (e.g. Adobe Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress). For Windows
PS3 * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.
Open the property page of the printer driver. Unmark the "Pure Gray" checkbox in the "Image Quality" Tab.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.4
For Macintosh
Open the print settings dialog box. In the "Quality" menu, unmark "Pure Black and Pure Gray" in the "Pure Black & Gray" drop-down list. (Select "Pure Black Only" from the drop-down list.)
3.4
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment will allow gray areas to always be reproduced using all toner colors (C, M, Y and K). As a result, undesired colors may look blended, depending on the image to print out. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printout.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.4
3.5 To Easily Adjust the Overall Brightness

The image is printed with a natural brightness. (Default printing)
The darker print image is obtained.
The brighter print image is obtained.
Explanation The brightness of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing the "Brightness" setting on the printer driver. * This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the PCL5c emulation printer driver. (This adjustment cannot be performed on the Macintosh printer driver.)
3.5
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician, and by the user.
PCL5c
(1) Open the property page of the printer driver. Adjust "Brightness" in the "Image Quality" tab. Select the desired value for brightness within a range between 100% (Darkest) and 100% (Lightest).
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment Remember that the brightness change will affect all the "Image Quality Type" options. (For instance, if the brightness is changed with "General" selected, it will be maintained, even when it is switched to another "Image Quality Type" option, such as "Photograph.")
Remarks The brightness adjustment does not affect black text (CMY = 100%, K = 100% or RGB = 0%).
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.5
3.6 To Easily Adjust the Overall Saturation

The image is printed with a natural saturation. (Default printing)
The saturation is decreased.
The saturation is increased.
Explanation The saturation of the print image can be easily adjusted by changing "Saturation" setting on the printer driver. * This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the PCL5c emulation printer driver. (This adjustment cannot be performed on the Macintosh printer driver.)
3.6
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PCL5c
(1) Open the property page of the printer driver. Adjust "Saturation" in the "Image Quality" tab. Select the desired value for brightness within a range between 100% (Least clear) and 100% (Clearest).
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment Remember that the saturation change will affect all the "Image Quality Type" options. (For instance, if the saturation is changed with "General" selected, it will be maintained, even when it is switched to another "Image Quality Type" option, such as "Photograph."
Remarks The saturation adjustment does not affect black or gray areas on the printout.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.6
3.7 To Clearly Print Light-colored Thin Lines or Text

Light-colored thin lines and text are dotted on the printout.
The light-colored thin lines and text are clearly printed out.
Explanation When light-colored thin lines and text are printed out, they may sometimes be dotted on the printout. Change the printer driver setting or adjust the color balance or gamma curve balance, in order to clearly print them out.
Procedures * Perform the adjustment in accordance with the procedure below. * Procedure (1) is used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (2) is used by the service technician only.
3.7
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(1) Change the "Image Quality Type" setting. * This adjustment will be effective, only if printing is performed in PostScript (PS3 or Macintosh) or if you print out a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office. Please be careful that it may not be effective, if you print out a file or PDF file created on a graphic application (e.g. Adobe Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress). For Windows
PCL5c PS3 * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.
Open the property page of the printer driver. Change the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" settings in the Image Quality tab. Change these settings in either of the following, in accordance with a type of original to print: Image Quality Type: "Presentation," Halftone: "Detail"
Image Quality Type: "Line Art," Halftone: "Default"
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.7
For Macintosh
Open the print settings dialog box. In the "Quality" menu, select "Line Art" from among the "Color Resolution Type" options. Select the desired combination of color (Color or Mono), resolution, halftone and type from among the "Color Resolution Type" options. In this adjustment, select the combination, which includes the "Line Art" option (Color Low-res LineArt or Color High-res LineArt).
After changing the printer driver settings, print and check the print image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
PCL5c
PS3
Mac
(2) Change the value for an appropriate code in adjustment mode [05] to adjust the color balance or gamma curve balance. * The [05] code to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the image quality in full-color printing or black-and-white printing. Use either of the procedures below appropriate to a type of original to print. To adjust the image quality in full-color printing ("Automatic" is selected from among the "Color" options on the PCL5c or PS3 printer driver. "Color" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the Macintosh printer driver.) Use steps (a) to (b) to adjust the color balance. * The "Color" options are available in the "Setup" tab on the PCL5c and PS3 printer drivers. The "Color Resolution Type" is available in the "Quality" menu on the Macintosh printer driver. (a) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Select code [395]. Press the [START] button. Image quality control will be forcibly performed to correct variations in image contrast.
3.7
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(b) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1014 to 1017], [1022 to 1025], [1030 to 1033] or [1038 to 1041] to adjust the color balance and increase the color density. Adjust the value for the [05] codes corresponding to the print options to be applied (PDL, Resolution and Halftone). Ex.: When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected: PCL5c, 600 x 600, Image Quality Type = Presentation, Halftone =Detail) > Change the values for Y: 05-1030, M: 05-1031, C: 05-1032 and K: 05-1033. When printing on Macintosh is with the following option selected: Color Low-res (= 600 x 600), LineArt (Halftone = Detail): > Change the values for Y: 05-1014, M: 05-1015, C: 05-1016 and K: 05-1017. * Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.) * The resolution option on the Macintosh printer driver is "Low-res" (= 600 x 600) or "High-res" (= 1200 x 600). Color to be adjusted Y (Yellow) PDL PCL5c PS3 PCL5c PS3 PCL5c PS3 PCL5c PS3 Resolution Halftone 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail Detail [05] code Subcode 05-1030 05-1038 05-1014 05-1022 05-1031 05-1039 05-1015 05-1023 05-1032 05-1040 05-1016 05-1024 05-1033 05-1041 05-1017 05-1025 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 Value recommended Acceptable Default value range
M (Magenta)
0 to 255
128
C (Cyan)
K (Black)
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printout until the optimum value is obtained. * The value for the [05] code for K (black) will affect black-and-white images (including text, lines and photos) on the printout. * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area 2 High-density area <Note> After performing the adjustment, the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the "Halftone" option. (For instance, if the values for [05] code for PCL and Detail are changed, they will be applied to printing performed with PCL5c and Halftone = "Detail" (or "Default") selected.) Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.7
To adjust the image quality in black-and-white printing ("Mono" is selected from among the "Color" options on the PCL5c or PS3 printer driver. "Mono" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the Macintosh printer driver.) * The "Color" options are available in the "Setup" tab on the PCL5c and PS3 printer drivers. The "Color Resolution Type" is available in the "Quality" menu on the Macintosh printer driver. (a) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for code [597] or [599]. Adjust the gamma curve balance and increase the density in black-and-white printing. Adjust the [05] codes corresponding to the PDL to be applied. * Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.) Value recommended Set a value larger than 128. Acceptable Default value range 0 to 255 128
PDL PCL5c PS3
Halftone Detail Detail
[05] code Subcode 05-599 05-597 0/1/2 0/1/2
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printout until the optimum value is obtained. * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area 2 High-density area <Note> After performing the adjustment, the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the "Halftone" option. (For instance, if the values for [05] code for PCL and Detail are changed, they will be applied to printing performed with PCL5c and Halftone = "Detail" (or "Default") selected.) Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.
3.7
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause graininess on the printout or variations in hues. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printout.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.7
3.8 To Clearly Print Thin Lines/Double Lines

Thin lines or double lines are dotted on the print out.
The thin lines or double lines are clearly printed out.
Explanation When thin lines or double lines, which are laid out on a solid filled area, are printed out, they may sometimes be dotted on the printout. Change the printer driver setting, in order to clearly print them out.
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician, and by the user. (1) Mark the "Distinguish Thin Line" checkbox on the printer driver.
3.8
e-STUDIO3511/4511
For Windows
PCL5c PCL6 PS3
Open the property page of the printer driver. Mark the "Distinguish Thin Lines" checkbox in the "Image Quality" tab.
For Macintosh
Mac
Open the print settings dialog box. In the "Printing Modes" menu, select the "Distinguish Thin Lines" option to "On."
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.8
3.9 To Decrease the Image Density and Save Toner

(To Print in Toner Save Mode)
Default printing.
Printing is performed, while the toner is being saved.
Explanation The e-STUDIO3511/4511 offers toner save mode. It is intended to automatically decrease the image density and reduce the amount of toner used to print the output. Change the printer driver setting and print in toner save mode, for instance, if a large number of copies have to be printed, or if the image density is too high.
3.9
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(1) Enable toner save mode on the printer driver. For Windows
PCL5c PCL6 PS3
Open the property page of the printer driver. Mark the "Toner Save" checkbox in the "Effect" tab.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.9
For Macintosh
Open the print settings dialog box. In the "Quality" menu, select the "Toner Save" option to "On."
3.9
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly provide lower image density than the user desires, when printing is performed in toner save mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printout.
Remarks The print density in toner save mode can also be adjusted. For further information regarding the adjustment procedures, refer to 3.10 To Adjust the Image Density in Toner Save Mode.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.9
3.10 To Adjust the Image Density in Toner Save Mode

The image density is too dark, even when printing is performed in toner save mode.
The image density in toner save mode is adjustable, as desired.
Explanation The e-STUDIO3511/4511 offers toner save mode. It is intended to automatically decrease the image density and reduce the amount of toner used to print the output. Adjust the upper limit of the image density in toner save mode, in order to obtain the desired print density.
Procedures * All the adjustments are performed by the service technician only.
PCL5c
PCL6
PS3
Mac
(1) Change the value for an appropriate code in adjustment mode [05] to adjust the image density in toner save mode. * The [05] code to use varies, depending on whether to adjust the image quality in full-color printing or black-and-white printing. Use either of the procedures below corresponding to the type of original to print.
3.10
e-STUDIO3511/4511
To adjust the image quality in full-color printing ("Automatic" is selected from among the "Color" options on the PCL5c or PS3 printer driver. "Color" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the Macintosh printer driver.) * The "Color" options are available in the "Setup" tab on the PCL5c and PS3 printer drivers. The "Color Resolution Type" is available in the "Quality" menu on the Macintosh printer driver. (a) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1055 to 1058] to adjust the upper limit of the image density in toner save mode. * Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.) * The resolution option on the Macintosh printer driver is "Low-res" (= 600 x 600) or "High-res" (= 1200 x 600). Acceptable PDL Resolution [05] code Value recommended Default value range 600 x 600 PCL5c 1200 x 600 600 x 600 PS3 1200 x 600 05-1056 05-1058 05-1055 05-1057 Set a value smaller than 176 to decrease the density. 0 to 255 Set a value larger than 176 to increase the density. 176
*Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printout until the optimum value is obtained. To adjust the image quality in black-and-white printing ("Mono" is selected from among the "Color" options on the PCL5c or PS3 printer driver. "Mono" is selected from among the "Color Resolution Type" options on the Macintosh printer driver.) * The "Color" options are available in the "Setup" tab on the PCL5c and PS3 printer drivers. The "Color Resolution Type" is available in the "Quality" menu on the Macintosh printer driver. The PCL6 printer driver supports only black-and-white printing. Therefore, the "Color" option is not available. (a) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Increase the value for code [664] or [665]. Increase the upper limit of the image density in toner save mode. * Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.) PDL PCL5c/PCL6 [05] code 05-665 Value recommended Set a value smaller than 176 to decrease the density. 0 to 255 PS3 05-664 Set a value larger than 176 to increase the density. 176 Acceptable value range Default
*Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printout until the optimum value is obtained.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly increase the amount of toner used (if the image density is increased) or cause the faint print image (if the image density is decreased). Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printout.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.10
3.11 To Print Illegible Gray or Colored Text in Black

Gray text is illegible on the printout.
The gray text is printed in black. This makes it more legible on the printout.
Explanation Text may look illegible on the printout, depending on the hues of a background and text contained in the original, particularly, when printing the original containing yellow, light blue or gray text in the light-colored background. In addition, when a full-color original is printed in black and white, the colored text may turn gray on the printout and eventually become illegible. In this case, change the printer driver settings, in order to reproduce the colored text (except white text) in black and make it more legible on the printout. * This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the PCL5c, PCL6 or PS3 emulation printer driver. (This adjustment cannot be performed on the Macintosh printer driver.)
3.11
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PCL5c
PCL6
PS3
(1) Open the property page of the printer driver. Mark the "Use Black for All Text" checkbox in the "Image Quality" tab. * This adjustment will be effective, only if printing is performed in PostScript (PS3) or if you print out a file created on a general application, such as Microsoft Office. Please be careful that it may not be effective, if you print out a file or PDF file created on a graphic application (e.g. Adobe Illustrator) or a DTP application (e.g. QuarkXPress).
Remarks Not all colored text (e.g. extremely large-sized text) may be printed in black.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.11
3.12 To Ignore Blank Pages for Printing

A blank page is also delivered.
A blank page is ignored for printing.
Explanation Some applications may be designed to automatically insert blank pages for laying out the pages of a document. Change the printer driver setting, in order to ignore all blank pages for printing. * This adjustment will have an effect only on printing on the PCL5c, PCL6 or PS3 emulation printer driver. (This adjustment cannot be performed on the Macintosh printer driver.)
3.12
e-STUDIO3511/4511
PCL5c
PCL6
PS3
(1) Open the property page of the printer driver. Mark the "Do not Print Blank Pages" checkbox in the "Effect" tab.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the functions in the "Layout" tab (Booklet printing, N-up printing, Use Front Cover, Use Back Cover and Interleave Pages) not to work, as programmed. Therefore, pay special attention to a combination of the functions to be used.
Remarks If any data is inserted in the header or footer of a particular page on Excel or Word, even though no data is present in the body, the page will not be recognized as a blank page. The header or footer will be printed out.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.12
3.13 To Sharply Print Black Text

Text looks black on the monitor. But the hue will vary, if it is printed out in full color. Explanation
The hue of text is nearly matched with the black hue on the monitor.
Text looks black on the monitor. But if it is printed in full color (with "Automatic" selected from among the "Color" options), all toner colors (CMYK) will be used to print it, depending on the application in use. As a result, the black hue on the printout looks different from what the user desires. This problem is caused by the application specifications, not by the copier. Adjust the color balance, in order to closely match the hue of text printed using all toner colors with the black hue on the monitor. Procedures * All adjustments are performed by the service technician only.
PCL5c PCL6 PS3 Mac
PCL5c PS3 Mac * This adjustment will have an effect only on full-color printing.
(2) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1010 to 1041] to adjust the color density. Adjust the value for the [05] codes corresponding to the print options to be applied (PDL, Resolution and Halftone). Ex.: When printing on Windows is performed with the following options selected: PCL5c, 600 x 600, Image Quality Type = General, Halftone = Default (Smooth) > Change the values for Y: 05-1026, M: 05-1027, C: 05-1028 and K: 05-1029. When printing on Macintosh is performed with the following option selected: Color High-res (= 1200 x 600), Photo (Halftone = Smooth): > Change the values for Y: 05-1018, M: 05-1019, C: 05-1020 and K: 05-1021. * Printing on Macintosh is performed in PostScript. (See the "PS3" row in the table below.) * The resolution option on the Macintosh printer driver is "Low-res" (= 600 x 600) or "High-res" (= 1200 x 600).
3.13
e-STUDIO3511/4511
* The black hue of text printed using all toner colors (C, M, Y and K) will look much clearer, if the amount of the C (cyan) toner used is larger than the M (magenta) or Y (yellow) toner. Remember that adjusting the density of K (black) does not affect the black hue, if all toner colors are used to print text. Color to be adjusted Value recommended Acceptable Default value range
PDL
Resolution Halftone 600 x 600 Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail Smooth Detail
[05] code Subcode 05-1026 05-1030 05-1034 05-1038 05-1010 05-1014 05-1018 05-1022 05-1027 05-1031 05-1035 05-1039 05-1011 05-1015 05-1019 05-1023 05-1028 05-1032 05-1036 05-1040 05-1012 05-1016 05-1020 05-1024 05-1029 05-1033 05-1037 05-1041 05-1013 05-1017 05-1021 05-1025 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2
PCL5c Y (Yellow) PS3 1200 x 600 600 x 600 PCL5c M (Magenta) PS3 1200 x 600 600 x 600 PCL5c C (Cyan) PS3 1200 x 600 600 x 600 PCL5c K (Black) PS3 1200 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600 1200 x 600 600 x 600
* Set the value in increments of approximately 10, while checking the printout until the optimum value is obtained.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.13
* "Halftone" refers to how halftones are printed. Two options are available: "Smooth" which is intended to improve the reproducibility of gradation and "Detail" which is intended to print halftones in details (with the high density). On Windows (PCL5c and PS3), the halftone option to be applied in printing can be selected from among the "Halftone" options in the "Image Quality" tab. "Default" is selected from among the options by default. It is intended to automatically select "Smooth" or "Detail" in accordance with the selected "Image Quality Type" option, as described by the table below. On Macintosh, the halftone option in full-color printing is determined, based on the selected image quality type option in the "Quality" menu on the printer driver. Halftone option applied Image Quality Type Windows Macintosh
(Halftone = "Default")
General Photograph Presentation Line Art
Smooth Smooth Smooth Detail
* The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area 2 High-density area
<Note> After performing the adjustment, the values changed will be applied to all printouts for the "Image Quality Type" and "Halftone" options. (For instance, if the values for 05 code for PCL, 600 x 600 and Smooth are changed, they will be applied to printing performed with PCL5c, 600 x 600, Halftone = "Smooth" (or "Default") selected.) Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future printouts will be changed, when printing out originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly change the hue of the text and image, such as a photo image, on the printout. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the printout.
3.13
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Remarks The following factors may cause all toner colors (C, M, Y and K) to be used to print black text in the PDF file: The ICC (International Color Consortium) profile is embedded in the PDF file. The black text is not properly defined on the PDF file. Use the procedures below to verify whether these factors are included in the PDF file. To analyze the embedded ICC profile If the ICC profile is embedded in the PDF file, 100% black may be defined to print using all toner colors (C, M, Y and K), rather than K (black) only. Use the Preflight on Adobe Acrobat 6.0 Professional, in order to analyze the embedded ICC profile. * The steps described below can be used on Adobe Acrobat 6.0 Professional on both Windows and Macintosh. This section shows you the steps on Windows as an example. * For further information regarding the Preflight, refer to an appropriate manual or the Help menu of Adobe Acrobat 6.0 Professional. (1) Open a PDF file on Adobe Acrobat 6.0 Professional. Choose and click the "Document" menu. Choose "Preflight." (2) Highlight a profile and click [Analyze].
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.13
(3) Open "Color Spaces" in the "Overview" or "Pages" section. * If the ICC profile is embedded in the PDF file, "ICC based color space" will appear on the window.
3.13
e-STUDIO3511/4511
To check the definition of black text When creating a PDF file, 100% black may not be defined as follows, depending on the application settings: RGB data: CMYK data: RGB = 0% CMY = 0%, K = 100%
As a result, text, which should be defined as 100% black on the application, is not defined as 100% black on the saved PDF file. (A few percent of color data is defined.) Eventually, all toner colors (C, M, Y and K) will be used to print it. Use "Info Pallet" on Adobe Photoshop to examine the color definition on the PDF file. * The steps described below can be used on Adobe Photoshop on both Windows and Macintosh. This section shows you the steps on Windows as an example. * For further information regarding the Info Pallet, refer to an appropriate manual or the Help menu of Adobe Photoshop. (1) Open a PDF file on Adobe Photoshop. (2) Move the cursor over the data to check the color definition. (3) The color definition will be displayed on the Information Pallet.
(3)
(2)
e-STUDIO3511/4511
3.13
4. e-Filing-specific Adjustments 4.1 To Clearly Store the B/W Image in Auto Color Mode
The light image becomes blurred and text becomes illegible.
Even the light image is not blurred. Text is clear and legible.
Explanation When a black-and-white original containing black-and-white photo images is scanned in Auto color mode and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box), it is stored with binary data, with reference to a threshold value. This may make a dark area blurred and a light area eliminated. Adjust the threshold value, in order to clearly store the black-and-white original in Auto color mode. * Please remember that the e-Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform, but not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform. * This adjustment will have an effect on the image stored using Scan to File and Scan to E-mail.
4.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Scan to Box
* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Auto color mode.
(1) Adjust the threshold value, in order to store the black-and-white original with the appropriate density. Use steps (a) to (d) to adjust the threshold value. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [USER] button. (c) Press the [SCAN] button. (d) In the "THRESHOLD" option, press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the threshold value. If the threshold value is set to " ," the original will be stored with the low density. If the threshold value is set to " ," the original will be stored with the high density.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment All scanning functions are implemented with reference to the threshold changed above. It will affect the quality of images stored in Auto color mode. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future images will be changed, when storing originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.
Remarks If the adjustment does not result in the desired image, it is recommended to scan the black-and-white original in Full color mode rather than in Auto color mode, or copy it in Auto color mode and store it in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box) rather than scan it. This allows it to be stored in shades of gray rather than with binary data, and eventually provides better halftones. But remember that the data will increase in size, compared to the one with binary data.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
4.1
4.2 To Store the Original, while Reducing the File Size

Before the adjustment Ex.: A4, 200 dpi, LOW = Approx. 1000 KB After the adjustment Ex.: A4, 200 dpi, HIGH = Approx. 400 KB
When "LOW" is selected in the "JPEG COMPRESS" options, the file size will become larger than required.
When "HIGH" is selected in the "JPEG COMPRESS" options, the file size will be reduced.
Explanation When an original is scanned in Full color or Gray scale mode and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box), it will be compressed in JPEG format. The data compression rate can be selected on a job-by-job basis. The file size significantly varies, depending on the selected data compression rate. (When "LOW" is selected in the "JPEG COMPRESS" option, the file size will be 2 to 4 times larger than the one when "HIGH" is selected.) When storing the original, if a higher priority is given to the file size reduction than the image quality, change the JPEG compression rate. * Please remember that the e-Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform, but not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform. * This adjustment will have an effect on the image stored using Scan to File and Scan to E-mail.
4.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Scan to Box
* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Full color mode (including Auto color mode) or Gray scale mode.
(1) Select [HIGH] from among the "JPEG COMPRESS" options. * In the "JPEG COMPRESS" option, [MID] is selected by default. * The procedure to use varies, depending on whether to select the JPEG compression rate on a job-by-job basis (without utilizing the template), utilize the template, or change the default JPEG compression rate. Refer to "To select the JPEG compression rate on a job-by-job basis" in order to store an image at a high compression rate for a particular job. Refer to "To utilize the template" in order to select an appropriate JPEG compression rate, corresponding to the type of original to store and the purpose of the image stored. Refer to "To change the default JPEG compression rate" in order to have "HIGH" selected from among the "JPEG COMPRESS" options by default. To select the JPEG compression rate on a job-by-job basis (without utilizing the template) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. Select [HIGH] from among the "JPEG COMPRESS" options. To utilize the template Recall the template where "HIGH" is selected from among the JPEG compression rate options and scan the original. * The user may want to select a compression rate, depending on the type of original or purpose of the image stored. In this case, it is recommended to utilize the template. Initially, select the desired JPEG compression rate in the template and recall it as necessary. This facilitates changing the compression rate on a job-by-job basis. For further information regarding the template and its use, refer to the Operators Manual for Basic Function, Network Operators Guide and Network Administrators Guide. To change the default JPEG compression rate Use steps (a) to (d) to change the default JPEG compression rate. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [USER] button. (c) Press the [SCAN] button. (d) In the "JPEG COMPRESS" option, select [HIGH] as the default compression rate.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment Changing the default JPEG compression rate of the scanning functions will affect the quality of images, which will be stored in Full color (including Auto color) or Gray scale mode. Carefully perform the adjustment, being aware that the image quality of all future images will be changed, when storing originals other than the one that is used for the adjustment.
Remarks If the image is copied or printed in full color or shades of gray and stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box or Print to Box), the user can select a desired JPEG compression rate, when downloading the image using File Downloarder on a client PC.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
4.2
4.3 To Store the Color Photo Image, while Minimizing Moir

When the magazine article containing fullcolor photo images is stored in Photo mode, moir is likely to occur.
Storing it in Printed image mode will reduce moir.
Explanation When an original, such as a magazine article containing with full-color photo images, is copied in Full color mode, with Photo mode selected, and stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box), moir is likely to occur on the photo images. It may occur, when it is copied on paper. But it will be more enhanced, if it is stored as image data. Select Printed image mode from among the original mode options, in order to store full-color photo images, while minimizing moir, * Please remember that the e-Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform, but not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform.
4.3
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Copy to Box
* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Full color mode.
(1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Select [PRINTED IMAGE] from among the original mode options. * Use either of the following procedures to switch default original mode to Printed image mode:
To change default original mode on the Control Panel Use steps (a) to (d) to change default original mode. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [USER] button. (c) Press the [COPY] button. (d) In the "ORIGINAL MODE FOR COLOR" option, press the [PRINTED IMAGE] button. To change default original mode in setting mode [08] Enter setting mode [08]. Set "2" for code [585]. Printed image mode will be selected by default at power-on. Value for 08-585 Default original mode at power-on 0 Text/Photo (Default) 1 Text 2 Printed image 3 Photo 4 Map
e-STUDIO3511/4511
4.3
4.4 To Store the B/W Original with Photos and Text with the High Density
(To change the density in Copy to Box)
The black-and-white image is stored in Photo mode. When it is opened on an application, text looks very light.
If it is stored in Text or Text/Photo mode, text will look darker and clearer.
Explanation When a black-and-white original containing both photo images and text is copied in Black mode, with Photo mode selected, and stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box), text may be stored with the low-density, depending on the type of original, because Photo mode is intended to improve the reproducibility of halftones. Change the original mode option and adjust the scan density, in order to obtain a darker and clearer image, when the image stored in the e-Filing box is to be imported into an application on a client PC. * Please remember that the e-Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform, but not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform.
Procedures * All the adjustments are performed by the service technician, and by the user.
4.4
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Copy to Box
* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Black mode.
(1) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Select [TEXT] or [TEXT/PHOTO] from among the original mode options. * Copying the original in Text mode may diminish the quality of photo images. If there is a problem with the image stored in Text mode, switch to Text/Photo mode. * Use either of the following procedures to switch default original mode to Text mode or Text/Photo mode:
To change default original mode on the Control Panel Use steps (a) to (d) to change default original mode. (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [USER] button. (c) Press the [COPY] button. (d) In the "ORIGINAL MODE FOR BLACK" option, press the desired button to specify default mode. To change default original mode in setting mode [08] Enter setting mode [08]. Change the value for code [550]. The specified original mode option will be selected by default at power-on. Value for 08-550 Default original mode at power-on 0 Text/Photo (default) 1 Photo 2 Text 3 Image smoothing
After changing original mode, store the original and check the image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
Copy to Box
* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Black mode.
(2) Press the [BASIC] button on the Control Panel. Press the [ ] button to increase the copy density.
Remarks If this adjustment does not result in the desired image quality, it is recommended to scan the black-and-white original and store it in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box), rather than copy it. Provided that the image stored is imported into an application on a client PC, Scan to Box will provide the image most suitable for displaying on the computer monitor. Remember that copying and storing in the e-Filing box cannot be performed simultaneously.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
4.4
4.5 To Match with the Color Balance on the Original

(To adjust the color balance in Print to Box)
Before the adjustment Original image After the adjustment Original image
Print to Box e-Filing box e-Filing box
Print to Box
Stored
Stored
Downloaded Client PC Client PC
Downloaded
Displayed on the computer monitor
Displayed on the computer monitor
The image stored in the e-Filing box looks different in the color balance from the original.
The color balance of the image stored is closely matched with that of the original.
4.5
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Explanation If a full-color image is printed on a client PC and stored in the e-Filing box (Print to Box), it will be optimized for printing on paper. This is the reason why the image stored in the e-Filing box looks slightly different in the color balance from the original displayed on the computer monitor. Change the "Image Quality Type" setting on the printer driver, in order to minimize the difference in the color balance and closely match the color balance of the image stored with that of the original. * Please remember that the e-Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform, but not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform.
Print to Box
PCL5c
PS3
(1) Open the property page of the printer driver. Select "General" from among the "Image Quality Type" options in the Image Quality tab. * "General" allows the image to be stored in colors, which are closely matched with the original, compared to the other Image Quality Type options.

e-STUDIO3511/4511
4.5
4.6 To Scan and Print, while Minimizing Moir

When the image stored in the e-Filing box is printed out, moir is likely to occur.
The image stored in the e-Filing box can be printed out, while moir is being minimized.
Explanation An original is scanned and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box). When the image stored is printed directly from the e-Filing box, moir may occur, depending on the type of original. Also, it is likely to occur, particularly when the original is scanned in Full color mode or Auto color mode in a high resolution (600 dpi) or even in Gray scale mode. Select an appropriate scan resolution or adjust the sharpness intensity in the scanning functions, in order to store the original and print it from the e-Filing box, while minimizing moir.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedures (1) and (2) are used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (3) is used by the service technician only.
4.6
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Scan to Box
(1) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. Select [PRINTED IMAGE] from among the original mode options. * This adjustment will be effective, only if "TEXT" or "PHOTO" is initially selected from among the original mode options. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Full color mode. After changing original mode, scan and store the original. Then print and check the print image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure.
Scan to Box
(2) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. In the "RESOLUTION" option, select a lower resolution option. * In the "RESOLUTION" option, "200 (dpi)" is selected by default. If moir occurs in a resolution of 200 dpi, select a lower resolution option (100 dpi or 150 dpi). * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Full color mode or Gray scale mode. After changing the resolution, scan and store the original. Then print and check the print image quality. If you do not prefer to decrease a resolution, or if moir still occurs even in a lower resolution, use the next procedure.
Scan to Box
(3) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1086 to 1088] and for [843] to adjust the sharpness intensity in the scanning functions. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Full color mode or Gray scale mode. Acceptable value range 0 to 31
Color mode Full color Gray scale
Original mode Text Printed image Photo ---
[05] code 05-1086 05-1087 05-1088 05-843
Value recommended
Default
* Setting "1" provides the softest image, while setting "31" provides the sharpest image. The default value ("0") provides an image as sharp as the one provided by setting "16."
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment When the original containing text and lines is scanned and printed, the adjustment may possibly cause them to look faint or a blend of undesired colors. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image or printout.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
4.6
4.7 To Finely Print the Image Stored in the e-Filing box

e-Filing box
Copy to Box, Print to Box (Print data)
Copy to Box, Print to Box (Print data ) e-Filing box
Stored
Downloaded (Converted into RGB) Client PC Stored
Stored
Print (Print data) Print (Converted into print data again)
If the image stored in the e-Filing box is downloaded to a PC and then printed out, the image data conversion may diminish the image quality.
If the image is printed out directly from the eFiling box, the image quality will be maintained.
4.7
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Explanation Initially, the original is copied or printed and stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box or Print to Box) as CMYK data or optimized for printing on paper. While it is being downloaded to a client PC using File Downloader or the TWAIN driver, it is converted into RGB data or optimized for displaying on the computer monitor. The RGB data is not suitable for printing on paper. Therefore, if it is printed out, the image quality may be diminished. Therefore, it should be printed out directly from the e-Filing box, rather than downloaded to the PC, in order to obtain the fine printout. * Please remember that the e-Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform, but not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform.
Copy to Box
Print to Box
(1) Print out the image stored in the e-Filing box on the Control Panel or using the e-Filing Web utility. * For further information regarding how to print it out, refer to the following documents: To print it out on the Control Panel: Operators Manual for Basic Function To print it out using the e-Filing Web utility: e-Filing Guide <Note>
Scan to Box
Fax to Box
To finely print out the original scanned or faxed and stored in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box or Fax to Box), download it to the client PC, first, select the desired Image Quality Type option on the printer driver and print it out, rather than print it out directly from the e-Filing box.
Remarks Use the "Archive Document" function, which the e-Filing Web utility provides. The image stored in the e-Filing box can be saved in file, while it is optimized for printing on paper. For instance, when the file is temporarily relocated for the purpose of freeing up the e-Filing box and uploaded again to print it out later, it is converted into PDF or TIFF format using File Downloader. This may vary the image quality. On the other hand, the "Archive Document" function allows it to be relocated, while the image quality is being maintained. But remember that the file created by the "Archive Document" function cannot be immediately opened or printed on the PC. For further information regarding the "Archive Document" function and its use, refer to the e-Filing Guide.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
4.7
4.8 To Store an Image Suitable for Displaying on the Monitor or Image Editing
e-Filing box
Copy to Box (Print data)
e-Filing box
Scan to Box (RGB data)
Stored
Stored
Downloaded (Converted into RGB) Client PC Stored and edited Client PC
Downloaded (RGB data)
Stored and edited
Displayed on the computer monitor (RGB data)
Displayed on the computer monitor (RGB data)
When the original is stored by Copy to Box, it will be converted into RGB data, while being downloaded to a PC. This may diminish the image quality.
The original is stored as RGB data by Scan to Box. This can avoid unnecessary data conversion. As a result, the image quality can be maintained.
4.8
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Explanation Initially, the full-color original is copied and stored in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box) as CMYK data or optimized for printing on paper. But while it is being downloaded to a client PC using File Downloader or the TWAIN driver, it is converted into RGB data or optimized for displaying on the computer monitor. Depending on the type of original, this CMYK-to-RGB conversion may cause out-of-register colors or graininess on the printout. If the image is displayed on the monitor and further edited on the PC, the image quality may be diminished. To store the full-color original and display it on the computer monitor, while minimizing image degradation, scan and store it in the e-Filing box (Scan to Box). This allows it to be stored as RGB data. * Please remember that the e-Filing functions are available only on the Windows platform, but not on the Macintosh or UNIX platform.
Scan to Box
* This adjustment will have an effect only on the image stored in Full color mode.
(1) Scan the full-color image and store it in the e-Filing box. * For further information regarding how to store the image using the scanning functions, refer to the Operators Manual for Basic Function.
Remarks When storing the black-and-white original in Auto color mode, copy and store it in the e-Filing box (Copy to Box) rather than scan it, in order to obtain the better image, depending on the type of original. For further information, refer to 4.1 To Clearly Store the B/W Image in Auto Color Mode.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
4.8
5. Scanning-specific Adjustments 5.1 To Clearly Scan Text (To reduce noise around text)
If the original is scanned in Full color mode or Gray scale mode, noise may occur in text or edges of a solid filled area. Explanation
The image quality is maintained, while noise is being reduced.
When an original is scanned in Full color or Gray scale mode, the data compression may cause noise (splattering of the toner colors) around text or the edges of a solid filled area. Adjust the JPEG compression rate or change the scan resolution, in order to obtain better scanned-in image, while reducing noise. * This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in Full color mode (including Auto color mode) or Gray scale mode.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * All the adjustments are performed by the service technician, and by the user. (1) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. Select [LOW] from among the "JPEG COMPRESS" options. * In the "JPEG COMPRESS" option, [MID] is selected by default. After changing the compression rate, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality. If further adjustment is required, use procedure (2).
5.1
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(2) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. In the "RESOLUTION" option, select a higher resolution. * In the "RESOLUTION" option, "200 (dpi)" is selected by default. If noise occurs in a resolution of 200 dpi, select a higher resolution (300 dpi, 400 dpi or 600 dpi). After changing the resolution, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality. If further adjustments are required, use procedure (1).
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment of the JPEG compression rate or resolution may possibly increase the size of the file to be stored. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image quality. The table below shows you the correlation between a resolution and file size. (The ratio of the file size may vary, depending on the type of original. Therefore, use the table below just for your reference.) * The file size in a resolution of 200 dpi is 1. Resolution File size ratio 200 dpi 1 300 dpi Approx. 2 400 dpi Approx. 4 600 dpi Approx. 10
If the resolution selected in procedure (2) is too high, moir may possibly occur in the scanned-in image. Therefore, carefully adjust the resolution, while checking the scanned-in image.
Remarks Use the following steps to change the default "JPEG COMPRESS" and "RESOLUTION" options: (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [USER] button. (c) Press the [SCAN] button. (d) In the "JPEG COMPRESS" or "RESOLUTION" option, press the desired button to change the default setting. * The default resolution can be selected on a color mode basis: Full color mode (including Auto color mode), Gray scale mode and Black mode. But, remember that some of the resolution options cannot be selected as the default. (The resolution options available vary, depending on whether the optional GC-1180 expansion memory is installed or not.) The following resolution options are available as the default: Full color mode (including Auto color mode): Gray scale mode: Black mode: 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi) 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi) 600 / 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 (dpi)
e-STUDIO3511/4511
5.1
5.2 To Scan the Original, while Eliminating the Background Color

(To eliminate the background density)
The background color of the original is also scanned. Therefore, no clear contrast is made between the background and image. Explanation
The background color is eliminated, allowing clear contrast between the background and image.
When an original with a background color is scanned, such as a newspaper and color paper, the background color is also scanned. Therefore, no clear contrast is made between the background and image. Perform the background adjustment, in order to clearly scan this type of original. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in Full color mode (including Auto color mode) or Gray scale mode.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * Procedure (1) is used by the service technician, and by the user. * Procedure (2) is used by the service technician only. (1) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. Press the [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT] button. Press the [ ] button to decrease the background density. After decreasing the background density, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality. With the background density set to the minimum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use the next procedure.
5.2
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(2) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1070 to 1072] or [848] to decrease the background density. The code to use varies, according to color mode (Full color mode or Gray scale mode). Adjust the value for the [05] codes corresponding to color mode for which you would like to improve the image quality. Acceptable Color mode Original mode [05] code Value recommended Default value range Text 05-1070 Full color Set a value larger than 0. 0 to 50 0 Printed image 05-1071 Photo 05-1072 Gray scale --05-848 Set a value smaller than 128. 0 to 255 128 * Set the value, as follows, while checking the scanned-in image until the optimum value is obtained. Adjustment in Full color mode: Adjustment in Gray scale mode: Set the value in increments of approximately 10. Set the value in increments of approximately 20.
* The background density in Full color mode (code 05-1070, 1071 or 1072) will become the highest, if "0" is set. On the other hand, it will become the lowest, if "50" is set. Changing the value will also change the background density in Full color mode, when the "Background Adjustment" indicator is set to the center. Then, if the background density of the center value is changed, each step of the indicator will be changed accordingly. (For instance, if the center value is increased by 5 (lighter), the value of each step of the indicator will also be increased by 5 (lighter)). * The background density in Gray scale mode (05-848) will become the lowest, if "0" is set. On the other hand, it will become the highest, if "255" is set. Changing the value will also change the background density in Gray scale mode, when the "Background Adjustment" indicator is set to the center. Each step of the background density indicator will be changed, based on the values for codes 05-853 and 858. They are intended to adjust the amount of change in the output background density per step defined in manual density mode.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly diminish the quality of the light-colored image. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image.
Remarks When scanning the original, use the following steps to change the default indicator position in the background adjustment option, which is displayed on the Control Panel: (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [USER] button. (c) Press the [SCAN] button. (d) In the "BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT" option in Full color mode or Gray scale mode, specify the default background density.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
5.2
5.3 To Clearly Scan and Print the Original in Black and White
(To improve gradation and reduce graininess)
If the original is scanned in Black mode, the halftones may become blurred in black.
The halftones of the scanned-in image are clearly printed out.
Explanation If an original is scanned in Black mode, a difference in the density level of the halftones cannot be accurately scanned. As a result, it may become blurred in black or grained. Scan the black-and-white original in Gray scale mode, in order to scan and print it out in black and white more clearly.
(1) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. Select [GRAY SCALE] from among the color mode options.
5.3
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly increase the size of the file to be stored. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image quality. The correlation between color mode and file size is as described below. (The ratio of the file size may vary, depending on the type of original. Therefore, use the description below just for your reference.) * Ratio of the file size in Black mode to Gray scale mode If the file size in Black mode/Text mode is 1, it will be increased to approximately 7 times in Gray scale mode. If the file size in Black mode/Photo mode is 1, it will be approximately doubled in Gray scale mode.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
5.3
5.4 To Scan the Original, while Reducing the File Size

Approx. 600 KB
Approx. 100 KB
Approx. 200 KB
Approx. 30 KB
Approx. 900 KB
Approx. 150 KB
Approx. 550 KB
Approx. 90 KB
* The above file sizes are just for your reference.
* The above file sizes are just for your reference.
If the original is constantly scanned at the default compression rate, the file size will become larger than required.
If the original is scanned at a reasonable compression rate, depending on the purpose of the scanned-in image, the file size will be successfully reduced.
Explanation If an original is scanned at the default settings, a proper image will be obtained for general purposes. But the file size may become larger than required. The file size of the scanned-in image significantly varies, depending on the selected resolution or JPEG compression rate. If an appropriate resolution and a compression rate are selected in accordance with the purpose of the original, the image quality will be maintained, while the file size is being reduced. Change the resolution, original mode, or JPEG compression rate or perform the background adjustment, in order to minimize the file size of the scanned-in image.
Procedures * You can start with any of the procedures. But it is recommended to perform the procedures in order, as listed below. You can use one procedure in conjunction with another. But if this changes the image quality more than required or loses effectiveness of the adjustment, restore the settings made in the previously used procedure to the original. Then perform the next procedure. * All the adjustments are performed by the service technician, and by the user.
5.4
e-STUDIO3511/4511
(1) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. Select a lower resolution option in the "RESOLUTION" option. * In the "RESOLUTION" option, "200 (dpi)" is selected by default. Select a lower resolution option (100 dpi or 150 dpi) to reduce the file size. * This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in all color modes (Full color, Gray scale, Black and Auto color). After changing the resolution, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (2) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. In the "ORIGINAL MODE" option, select [TEXT]. * Perform this adjustment, only if the black-and-white original containing no photo images is scanned or if degradation in the photo image quality is acceptable. * This adjustment will be effective, only if [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO] is initially selected from among the original mode options. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in Black mode. After changing original mode, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (3) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. In the "JPEG COMPRESS" option, select [HIGH]. * In the "JPEG COMPRESS" option, [MID] is selected by default. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in Full color mode (including Auto color mode) or Gray scale mode. After changing the compression rate, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality. If further image quality adjustments are still necessary, use the next procedure. (4) When scanning the original, press the [EDIT] button on the Control Panel. Press the [BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT] button. Press the [ ] button to decrease the background density. Then select [HIGH] from among the "JPEG COMPRESS" options. * This adjustment will be effective, only when the original with a color background, such as a newspaper and color paper, is scanned. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in Full color mode (including Auto color mode) or Gray scale mode. After decreasing the background density and changing the compression rate, scan the original and check the scanned-in image quality. With the background density set to the minimum, if further image quality adjustments are still necessary, the service technician must use another procedure.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
5.4
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The table below shows you the correlation between the adjustment and file size. (The ratio of the file size may vary, depending on the type of original. Therefore, use the table below just for your reference.) Correlation between a resolution and file size (procedure (1)) * The file size in a resolution of 200 dpi is 100%. Resolution File size ratio 200 dpi 100% 150 dpi Approx. 60% 100 dpi Approx. 40% Correlation between original mode and file size (procedure (2)) * The file size in Photo mode is 100%. Original mode File size ratio Photo 100% Text Approx. 30% Correlation between JPEC compression rate and file size (procedure (3)) * The file size is 100%, with [MID] selected. JPEG compression rate File size ratio MID 100% HIGH Approx. 80%
The adjustment may possibly diminish the image quality, as shown by the table below. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image. Procedures used Possible image degradation Any of procedures from (1) to (4) A photo image area may be blurred. (1) or (3) Noise may be increase around text. (1) or (3) Small-sized text may become illegible. (4) Light-colored images may not be clearly scanned.
5.4
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Remarks Use the following steps to change the default resolution, original mode, JPEG compression rate and/or background adjustment options: (a) Press the [USER FUNCTIONS] button on the Control Panel to enter the "User Functions" menu. (b) Press the [USER] button. (c) Press the [SCAN] button. (d) In the "RESOLUTION," "ORIGINAL MODE," "JPEG COMPRESS" and/or "BACKGROUND ADJUSTMENT" option, press the desired button to change the default. * The default resolution can be selected on a color mode basis: Full color mode (including Auto color mode), Gray scale mode and Black mode. But remember that some of the resolution options cannot be selected as the default. (The resolution options available vary, depending on whether the optional GC-1180 expansion memory is installed or not.) The following resolution options are available as the default: Full color mode (including Auto color mode): Gray scale mode: Black mode: 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi) 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 / 100 (dpi) 600 / 400 / 300 / 200 / 150 (dpi)
Remember that when scanning in Full color mode, if the original mode option is switched from Photo mode or Printed image to Text mode, the file size may become larger.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
5.4
5.5 To Sharply Scan the Original (To increase the sharpness intensity)
The image looks too soft and blurred.
The edges are enhanced. The image looks sharp.
Explanation Adjust the sharpness intensity, in order to sharply scan the soft and blurred original. * This adjustment will have an effect on the image scanned in all color modes (Full color, Gray scale, Black and Auto color).
5.5
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician only. (1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1086 to 1088] and [840 to 843] to adjust the sharpness intensity. Color mode Black Original mode Text/Photo Text Photo Text Printed image Photo --[05] code 05-840 05-841 05-842 05-1086 05-1087 05-1088 05-843 Value recommended Acceptable value range Default
0 to 31
Full color Gray scale
* Setting "1" provides the softest image, while setting "31" provides the sharpest image. The default value ("0") provides an image as sharp as the one provided by setting "16."
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause moir. In addition, when text and thin lines in a light-colored background are scanned, the background around the text or line may be eliminated. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
5.5
5.6 To Scan the Original, while Enhancing Black

Scan
Scan
Black is not dark enough, compared to the original.
Black is enhanced and closely matched with the original hue.
Explanation When a full-color original is scanned, black is not dark enough, compared to the original. (In general, the scanned-in image is likely to become less dark.) Finely adjust the black density of the scanned-in image, in order to darken black and closely match it with the original hue. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in Full color mode (including Auto color mode).
5.6
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician only. (1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [1075 to 1077] to adjust the black density of a scanned-in image. Color mode Full color Original mode Text Printed image Photo [05] code 05-1075 05-1076 05-1077 Value recommended Set a value larger than 0. Acceptable value range 0 to 4 Default 0
* Setting "0" provides the lightest black, while setting "4" the darkest.
Cautions after the completion of the adjustment The adjustment may possibly cause the background color to become too dark. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the scanned-in image.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
5.6
5.7 To Scan the Original with the Desired Gradation

The image is scanned with natural gradation. (Default scanning)
Gradation is decreased. Explanation
Gradation is increased.
When an original is scanned in Black mode or Gray scale mode, the reproducibility of halftones (gradation) can be adjusted by changing the scan density on an area basis (low-, medium- and high-density areas). Adjust the gamma curve balance, in order to change the gradation, in accordance with the type of original or at a users request. * This adjustment will have an effect only on the image scanned in Black mode or Gray scale mode.
5.7
e-STUDIO3511/4511
Procedure * The adjustment is performed by the service technician only. (1) Enter adjustment mode [05]. Change the value for codes [880 to 883] to adjust the gamma curve balance of the low-, medium- and high-density areas. Color mode Original mode Text/Photo Black Text Photo Gray scale --[05] code Subcode 05-880 05-881 05-882 05-883 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 0/1/2 Value recommended Set a value smaller than 128 to decrease the density. 0 to 255 Set a value larger than 128 to increase the density. 128 Acceptable value range Default
* Set the value in increments of approximately 20, while checking the scanned-in image until the optimum value is obtained. * The subcode varies, according to the area for which the density is adjusted. Refer to the table below and set the subcode for the area to be adjusted. Subcode Area for the density to be adjusted 0 Low-density area 1 Medium-density area 2 High-density area
* Gradation in Black mode will significantly vary, if the medium-density area is mainly adjusted. But remember that adjusting the low- or high-density area will rarely affect the gradation in Black mode.
e-STUDIO3511/4511
5.7
Company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Copyright TOSHIBA TEC Corp.2004 All Rights Reserved.

E-Studio 3511, E-Studio 4511 Parts, Service Handbook, Service Manual, Service Support Guide, Imaging Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

E-Studio 3511, E-Studio 4511 Parts, Service Handbook, Service Manual, Service Support Guide, Imaging Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Thank You for purchasing this Factory Service Manual on EBAY from PCTECHINFO!

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

File No. SME03000500 R03042130900-TTEC Ver00_2003-11

2003 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE INSTALLATION AND SERVICE FOR e-STUDIO3511/4511

2. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................... 2-1

3. COPY PROCESS .......................................................................................................... 3-1

4. General OPERATION ................................................................................................... 4-1

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

5. CONTROL PANEL ........................................................................................................ 5-1

6. SCANNER ..................................................................................................................... 6-1

7. IMAGE PROCESSING .................................................................................................. 7-1

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

8. LASER OPTICAL UNIT ................................................................................................ 8-1

9. DRIVE SYSTEM ............................................................................................................ 9-1

10. PAPER FEEDING SYSTEM ........................................................................................ 10-1

11. DRUM RELATED SECTION ....................................................................................... 11-1

12. DEVELOPER UNIT ..................................................................................................... 12-1

13. REVOLVER UNIT ........................................................................................................ 13-1

14. TRANSFER UNIT ........................................................................................................ 14-1

15. IMAGE QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................................................... 15-1

16. FUSER UNIT / PAPER EXIT SECTION ...................................................................... 16-1

17. AUTOMATIC DUPLEXING UNIT (ADU) ..................................................................... 17-1

18. POWER SUPPLY UNIT ............................................................................................... 18-1

19. PC BOARDS ............................................................................................................... 19-1

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Bypass feed (Size specified) 35 (11) 28 ( 5 ) 24 ( 5 ) 21 ( 5 )

Bypass feed (Size specified) 45 (11) 32 ( 5 ) 26 ( 5 ) 22 ( 5 )

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

* System copy speed

Special paper recommended by Toshiba Tec

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

1.5 System List

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

Staple cartridge STAPLE-1600

Work table KK-3511

Key copy counter MU8, MU-10

Finisher Hole punch unit MJ-6004N/E/F/S

Damp heater MF-3511

Drawer module MY-1021

Staple cartridge STAPLE-600

Paper Feed Pedestal (PFP) KD-1011

Large Capacity Feeder (LCF) KD-1012A4/LT

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

[B] Rear side view (Drive system)

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

e-STUDIO3511/4511 OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

November 2003 TOSHIBA TEC

2.2 Electric Parts Layout

Control panel unit

Automatic duplexing unit

Transport unit Process unit

Paper feeder unit